:y^>5Z>

^^^.&si

]:>::^Sa^:

^^>^

'■^^■''xS :^^ >m

S.:^>

^^^^

>3> > .5 1>

■>^ '■ ■ >

■■)r> :vi<!3»u^' i;

^ >:r«> _^::»' >-^^^ ^^i=^?:
-^ - -^^^ -^^ :^o» ipi:

> ;^ > • ^

:> r»
3 i»

S -j^^Pi

^

^'>

fc>;:3>

3

j2>>

■~T) "^

;>

113^^ •

S :>

":>

"2iK>

->."<»

"Ti

^3*>

i>: ->

:>

^13^'

rs^ ^

^

'ZS^':-

'!!> J>

2>

31^

\% '"~y'.-

3>

'~^-

'j>

>

^~>:'

>zy .

^

'^»

:>^-V

^

* -^y

. .--o': :

:>:' ££> » ■ :?c>:> S>X

>3 .0^ r.2>;g>3

:> i>- 2>

t> J> -.30 ...^

2>:v:>.j^

5 7>-^-:5>3' .:r^

'ibrarD of tb IJJwseum

OF

COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY,

AT HARVARD COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, MASS.

The gift of tfisiJiijimfnzjCjLcjuut Jkjxcisirnuj

No.

^3^0

<^lJr.l3., I'^CflJ JjjL.ICj. iSp^

TRANSACTIONS

OF THE

OONNEOTICUT ACADEMY

OF

ARTS AND SCIENCES.

VOLUME VIII.

NEW HAVEN:
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY.

•'1888 to 1892.

TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR, PRINTERS.

6FFICER? 0F THE /IC^DEPY, )S9^-95.

President.
WILLIAM H. BREWER.

Vice-President.

CHARLES S. HASTINGS.

Vorrespondinff Secretary.

ADDISON VAN NAME.

Mecordint/ Secretury.

SAMUEL L. PENFIELD.

JAbrnriitn.

ADDISON VAN NAME.

TreiLfitrer.

WILLIAM W. FARNAM.

J'liltlishiny Coniniittee.

HUBERT A. NEWTON, CHARLES S. HASTINGS,

GEORGE J. BRUSH, ADDISON E. VERRILL,

RUSSELL H. CHITTENDEN, EDWARD S. DANA,

ADDISON VAN NAME.

Aiiditi H g Committee.

ADDISON E. VERRILL, ADDISON VAN NAME.

CON TENTS.

I'AGB

List of Additions to the Library, v

Art. I. — Some Experiments on the Physiological Action
OP Uranium Salts. By R. H. Chittenden and
A. Lambert, 1

II. — Elastine and Elastose Bodies. By R. H. Chit-
tenden and H. S. Hart, . . 19

in. — The Influence of Urethan, Paraldehyde, Anti-

PY^RIN, AND AnTIFEBRIN ON PrOTEID MeTABOLISM.

By R. H. Chittenden, 39

IV. — The Influence of skveral new Therapeutic
Agents on Amyloly^tic and Proteoly^tic Action.
By R. H. Chittenden and C. W. Stewart, 60

V. — Caseoses, Casein Dyspkptone, and Casein Pep-
tone. By R. H. Chittenden, 66

VI. — Some Experiments on the Influence of Arsenic
AND Antimony on Glycogenic Function and
Fatty Degeneration of the Liver. By R. H.
Chittenden and J. A. Blake, 106

VII. — The Nature and Chemical Composition of the
Myosin of Muscle Tissue. By R. H. Chittenden
and G. W. Cummins, 115

VIII. — Myosinoses. By W. Kuhne and R. H. Chittenden. 139

IX. — The Relative Absorption of Nickel and Cobalt.

By R. H. Chittenden and C. Norris, Jr., 148

X. — Results obtained by Etching a Sphere and Crys-
tals OF Quartz with Hydrofluoric Acid. By
O. Meyer and S. L. Penfield. Plates 1, 2, 158

^I. — New England Spiders of the Families Drassid^,
Agalenid^ and Dy^sderid^. By J. H. Emekton.
Plates 3-8, 166

XII. — The Development of a Paleozoic Poriferous

Coral. By C. E. Beecher. Plates 9-13, 207

IV CONTENTS.

PAGE

XIII. — Symmetrical Cell Development ijst the Favosi

TiD.E. By C. E. Beecher. Plates 14, 15, 215

XIV. — New England Spiders of the Family Attid^.

By J. H. Emerton. Plates 16-21, .-- 220

XV. — A Provisional List of the Hepatic.e of the
Hawaiian Islands. By A. W. Evans. Plates

22, 23, - - - - 253

— XVI. — An Arrangement of the Genera of Hepatic^.

By A. W. Evans, 262

XVII. — On the Ferments contained in the Juice of the
Pineapple (Ananassa sativa). By R. H. Chit-
tenden, E. P. JosLiN and F. S. Meara, . 281

^VIII. — The Nephrostomes of Rana. By O. C. Farring-

TON. Plate 24, 309

XIX. — Notes on the Fauna of the Island of Dominica,
British West Indies. By G. E. Verrill. Plates
25-27, .^ 315

XX. — On a Collection of Land Moli.usca from the
Island of Dominica, West Indies. By H. A.

PiLSBRY, 356

XXI. — New England Spiders of the Family Thromsid^.

By J. H. Emerton. Plates 28-32, 359

0- XXIL — The Marine Nemerteans of New England and
Adjacent Waters. By A. E. Verrill. Plates
33-39, 382

XXIII. — D1N0PHILID.E OF New England. By A. E. Ver-
rill. Plate 36, Figures 6, Qa, 457

XXIV. — Marine Planarians of New England. By A. E.

Verrill. Plates 40-44, 459

ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY

Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences,

By Gift and Exchange, from Aug. 1, 1888, to Dec. 31, 1890.

American Association for the Advancenie^it of Science.

Proceedings. Meeting XXXVII, XXXVIII, 1888-89. Salem, 1889-90. 8°.
Albany.— TVeu) York State Library.

Annual report. LXX-LXXII, 1887-89. 8°.
New York State Museum of Natural History.

Annual report. XL-XLIII, 1886-89. 8°.

Bulletin. No. 1-10, 1887-90. 8°.

Memoirs. Vol. I. 1, 1889. 4°.
Annapolis. — United States Naval InstittUe.

Proceedings. Vol. XIV. 3, 4, XV, XVI. 2-4, 1888-90. 8°.

Index to vol. I-XV.
Baltimore. — Johns Hopkins University.

American chemical journal. Vol. X. 5, 6, XI. XII, 1888-90. 8°.

Studies from the biological laboratory. Vol. IV 5-7, 1889-90. 8°.

University circulars. No. 80, 1890. 4°.
Maryland Academy of Sciences.

Transactions. Vol. I, pp. 1-68, 1888-89. 8°.
Boston. — American Academy of Arts and Sciences.

Proceedings. Vol. XXIII, XXIV, 1887-89. 8°.
Society of Natural History.

Memoirs. Vol. IV. 7-9, 1890 4°.

Proceedings. Vol. XXIII. 3, 4, XXIV, 1888-90. 8°.
Brooklyn. — Entomological Society.

Entomologica Americana. Vol. IV. .5-12, V, VI, 1888-90. 8°.
Cambridge. — Harvard College.

Annual reports of the president and treasurer. 1887-88, 1888-89. 8°.
Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College.

Annals. Vol. XVIII. 6-10, XIX. 1, XX, XXI, XXII, XXIV, XXXI. 1,
1888-90. 4°.

Annual report. XLIII, XLIV, 1888-89. 8°.

Henry Draper Memorial Annual report. Ill, IV, 1889-90. 4°.

History, 1840-90. 8°.
Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College.

Memoirs. Vol. XIV. 1, pt. 2\ XVI. 3, XVII. 1, 1889-90. 4°.

Bulletin. Vol. XVI. 2-9, XVII, XX. 1-5, 1889-90. 8°.
Annual report. 1887-88, 1888-89. 8°.

-Entomological Club.

Psyche. No. 138-40, 147-176, 188.5-90. 8°.
-New England Meteorological Society.

Investigations. 1889. 4°.

Bulletin. 1889 appendix. 4°.

vi Additions to the Library.

Chapel Hill. — Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society.

Journal. Vol. V, VI, VII. 1, 1888-90. 8°.
Cincinnati. — Observatory.

Publications. No. X, 1882-86. 8°.
Society of Natural History.

Journal. Vol. XI. 2-4, XII, XIII. 1-3, 1880-90. 8°.
Colorado Springs. — Colorado College Scientific Society.

Colorado College studies. I, 1890. 8°.
Davenport. — Academy of Natural Sciences.

Proceedings. Vol. V. 1, 1884-89. 8°.
Frankfort. — Kentucky Geological Survey.

Chemical report. Vol. A, pt. III. 1888. 8°.

Report on the geological and economic features of the Jackson Purchase
region. By R. H. Loughridge. 1888. 8°.

Reports on the geology of Bath, Fleming, Henry, Shelby, Oldham and
Mason counties. By W. McLinney. [1886-88]. 8°.

Kentucky fossil shells. By Henry Nettelroth. 1889. 4°.
Granville. — Dennison Utiiversity.

Bulletin of the scientific laboratories. Vol. IV, V. 1888-90. 8°.
Harrisborg. — Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania.

Annual report for 1886. Pt. IV and atlas. 8°.

Atlas of northern anthracite field. Pt. II-V.' 1888-89. 8°.

Atlas of eastern anthracite field. Pt. II, III. 1888-89. 8°.

Atlas of southern anthracite field. Pt. II. 1889. 8''.

South Mountain atlas. 8°.

Catalogue of the geological museum. Pt. III. 1889.

Dictionary of fossils. Vol. I. 1889. 8o.
Little Rock. — Arkansas Geological Survey.

Annual report, 1888. Vol. I-III. 8°.
Madison. — Was?>bur7ie Observatory.

Publications. Vol. VI, VII. 1, 1890. 8°.
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences^ Arts and Letters.

Transactions. Vol. Vli, 1883-87. 8°.
University of Wisconsiri.

Agricultural station. Annual report. V, 1887-88. 8°.
Mebiden. — Scientific Association.

Transactions. Vol. Ill, 1887-88. 8°.
Middletown. — Wesleyaji University.

Annual report of the curators of the museum. XVIII, XIX, 1888-90. 8°.
Minneapolis. — Geological and Natural History Survey of Minnesota.

Geology of Minnesota. Final rei)ort. Vol. II, 1888. 4°.
Minnesota Academy of Natural Sciences.

Bulletin. Vol. III. 1, 1885-86. 8°.
New Orleans. — Academy of Sciences.

Papers. Vol. I. 2, 1887-88. o°.
Neav York. — Academy of Sciences.

Annals. Vol. IV, 5-12, V. 1-8, 1888-90. 8°.

Ti-ansactions. Vol. VII, VIII, IX. 1-8, 1887-90. 8°.
American Geographical Society.

Bulletin. Vol. XX. 3, 4, .and supp't, XXI, XXII. 1-3, 1888-90. 8°.
American Museum of Natural History.

Bulletin. Vol. II. 2-4, III, pp. 1-194, 1889-90. 8°.

Annual report. 1888-89, 1889-90. 8°.
Astor Library.

Annual report. XXXIX-XLI, 1887-89. 8°.

Additions to the Lihrary. vii

New York. — Microsropkal Society.

Journal. Vol. IV. 3, 4, V, VI, 1888-90. 8°.

Torrey Botanical Club.

Bulletin. Vol. XV. 8-12, XVI, XVII, 1888-90. 8°.
Philadelphia. — American Entomological Society.

Transactions. Vol. V-XVI, XVII. 1, 2, 1874-90. 8°.

Franklin Institute.

Journal. Vol. CXXVI. 3-P., CXXVII-CXXX, 1888-90. 8°.

Wag7ier Free Institute of Science.

Transactions. Vol. II, III, 1889-90. 8°.
Rochester. — Academy of Science.

Proceedings. Vol. I. 1, 1889-90. 8°.
Sacramento. — California State Mining Bureau.

Annual report of the state mineralogist. IX, 1889. 8°.
Bulletin. No. 1, 1888. 8°
Salem. — Fssex Institute.

Bulletin. Vol. XX, XXI, XXII. 1-3, 1888-90. 8°.
San Francisco. — California Academy of Sciences.
Memoirs. Vol. II. 2, 1888. 4°.
Proceedings. Ser. II. Vol. I, II, 1889. 8°.
Occasional papers. 1, II, 1890. 8°.

Technical Society of the Pacific Coast.

Transactions and proceedings. Vol. V. 2-4, VI, VII. 1-3, 1888-90. 8°.
ToPEKA. — Kansas Academy of Science.

Transactions. Vol. X, XII. 1, 1885-89. 8°.

Washburn College Laboratory of Natural History.

Bulletin. Vol. I. 9-11, 1889-90. 8°.
Trenton, N. J. — Natural History Society.

Joumal. Vol. II. 1, 1889. 8°.
Washington. — Bureau of Education.

Report of the commissioner of education. 1886-87, 1887-88. 8°.
Circulars of information. 1888, 1889, 1890, i. 8°.

Chief Signal Officer.

Annual report. 1887 pt. 2, 1888, 1889. 8°.

Departmeiit of Agriculture.

Division of Entomology. Bulletin. No. 1, 10-10. 19-22, 1888-90. 8°.

Periodica] bulletin. Vol. I, II, III. 1-3, 1888-90. 8°.

United States Geological Survey.

Annual report. VII, VIII, IX, 1885-86, 1886-87, 1887-88. 8°.
Bulletin. No. 40-61, 63^, 66, 1887-90. 8°.

Monographs. Vol. I. XIII-XVI and atlas of vol. XII, 1888-90. 4°.
Mineral resources of the United States. 1887, 1888. 8°.
Mineral products of the United States. 1882-87.

United States Naval Observatory .

Astronomical and meteorological observations. 1884. 4°.
Report of the superintendent. 1888, 1889. 8°.

Smithsonian Institution.

Annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology. V, VI, 1883-84, 1884-85. 8°.
Bibliography of the Iroquoian languages. By James C. Pilling. 1888. 8"..
Bibliography of the Muskhogean languages. By James C. Pilling.

1889. 8°.
Textile fabrics of ancient Peru. By William H. Holmes. 1889. 8°.
The circular, square and octagonal earthworks of Ohio. By Cyrus

Thomas. 1889. 8°.
The problem of the Ohio mounds. By Cyrus Thomas. 1889. 8°.

viii Additions to the Library.

Washington. —SmitliKonian InstUution.

Work in mound exploration of the Bureau of Ethnology. By Cyrus

Thomas. 1887. 8°.
Perforated stones from California. By Henry W. Henshaw. 1887. 8°.

Surgeon GeneroVs Office.

Medical and surgical history of the war of the rebellion. Pt. III. Vol. I.
1888. 4°.
Worcester. — American Antiquarian Society.

Proceedings. New series. Vol. V. 2, 3, VI, 1888-90. 8°.

Amiens. — Societe Linneenne du Nbrd de la France.

Bulletin. No. 175-310, 1887-89. 8°.

M^moires. Tome VII, 1886-88. 8°.
Amsterdam. — Kon. Akademie van Wetenschappen.

Jaarboek. 1886-89. 8°.

Verslagen en mededeelingeu. Afdeel. natuurkunde. 3de reeks. Deel III-
VII, 1887-90. 8°.
Kott. Zoologisch Genootschap ^'- Natura Artis Magistra."

Bijdragen tot de dierkunde. Aflev. 14-16, and festuummer. 1886-88. 4°.
Auxerre. — Societe des Sciences Historiques et Nafurelles de f Yonne.

Bulletin. Tome XLII-XLIII, 1888-89. 8°.
Barcelona. — Real Academia de Ciencias Naturales y Aries.

Meraoria inaugural. Por D. Lauro Clariana y Rycart. 1889. 8°.
Basel. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Verhandlungen. Theil VIII. 3, IX. 1, 1890. 8°.
Batavia. — Kon. Natnurkundige Vereeniging in Nederlandsch-lndie.

Natuurkundige tijdschrift. Deel XLVIII, XLIX, 1889-90. 8°.
Magnetical and Meteorological Observatory.

Observations. Vol. VIII, X, XI, 1883-88. 4".
Bergen. — Museum.

Aarsberetning. 1887-89. 8°.
Berlin . — Konigliche Sterntuarte.

Berliner astronomisches Jahrbuch. 1891, 1892. 8°.
Bologna. — R. Accademia delle Scienze deW Istituto di Bologna.

Rendiconto. Anno 1887-88, 1888-89. 8°.
Bombay. — Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society.

Journal. Vol. XVII. 2, 1889. 8°.
Government Observatory.

Magnetical and meterological observations. 1886, 1887. 4°.
Bonn. — Naturhistorischer Verein der preussischen Rheinlande, Westfalens nnd des
Reg.-Bezirks Osnabriick.

Verhandlungen. Jahrg. XLV, XLVI, XLVII. 1, 1888-90. 8°.
Bordeaux. — Acade'mie Nationale des Sciences, Belles- Lettres et Arts.

Actes. Annde XLVIII, 1886. 8°.
Societe Linneenne.

Actes. Tome XXIX, XXX, 1873-7.5. 8°.

Proces-verbaux. 1887, 1889. 8°.
-Societe des Sciences Physiques et NatureUes.

M^moires. 3« s^r. Tome III. 2 and appendice, IV, V. 1 and appendice
1887-89. 8°.
Braunschweig. — Verein fiir Naturwissenschaft.

Jahresbericht. V, 1886-87. 8°.
Bremen. — NdtJirwissenschaftlicher Verein.

Abhandlungen. Bd. X. 3, XI. 1, 2, 1889-90. S^.

Additions to the Library. ix

Brkslau.-— >Sc7jZeaiscAe Oesellschaft fiir vaterldndische Cultur.

Jahres Bericht. LXV-LXVII, 1887-89. 8°.
Brunn. — NatUrforscher Verein.

Verhandlungen. Bd. XXVI, XXVII, 1887-88. 8°.

Bericht der meteorologischen Commission. VI, VII, 1886-87. 8°.
Bruxelles. — Academie Royale des Sciences, des Lettrea et des Bemix-ArU de Belgique.

Memoires couronnes et raemoires des savants Strangers. Tome XLIX,
1888. 4°.

Memoires couronnes et autres memoires. Tome XL-XLII, 1887-89. 8°.

Bulletins. 3« ser. Tome XIII -XVI, 1887-88. 8°.

Annuaire. Annee LIV, LV, 1888-89. 8°.
Mufiee Boyal de VHistoire Naturelle.

Bulletin. Tome V. 1, 1887-88. 8°.
Observatoire Royal.

Annales. 2« s^r. Annales astronomiques. Tome V. 3, VI, 1885-87. l*.

Annales meteorologiques. Tome II, 1885. 4°.

Societe Entomolcgique de Belgique.

Annales. Tome XXXI-XXXIII, 1887-89. 8°.
Societe Royale Beige de Geographic.

Bulletin. Annee XII, XIII, XIV. 1, 2, 18SS-90. 8°.
Societe Royale de Botanique.

Bulletin. Tome XXVI. 2, XXVII, XXVIII, 1887-89. 8°.

Tables generales, tome I-XXV. 1890. 8°.
Societe Royale Malacologiqiie de Belgique.

Annales. Tome XXII, XXIII,' 1887-88. 8°.

Proces-verbaux. Tome XVI, pp. 81-141, XVII, XVIII, pp. 1-133, 1887-89.
8°.
BuCAREST. — Instifut Ifeteorologique de Roimianie.

Annales. Tome III, 1887. 4°.
Budapest. — Kdn. ung. Ceiitral-AnMalt far Meteorologie utid Erdmagnetisnmn.

Jahrbiicher. Jahrg. XVI, XVII, 18S6-87. 4°.
Buenos Aires. — Museo Publico.

Anales. Tome III. 3, 1888. 4°,

Los caballos fosiles de la pampa Argentina descriptos par Dr. G. Burmei-
ster. 1887. f°.
Sociedad Cientiflca Argentina.

Anales. Tome XXV. 2-fi, XXVI-XXIX, XXX. 1-5, 1888-90. 8°.
Province de Buenos-Ayres.

Annuaire statistique. Annee VIII, 1888. 8°.
Caen. — Societe Linneenne de Nbrmandie.

Bulletin. 4" s^r. Vol. II, 1887-88. 8°.
Calcutta. — Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Journal. Vol. LVII, pt. i, ii, no. 2-5 ; LVIII, pt. i, ii ; LIX, pt. i, no. 1-2,
pt. ii, no. 1 and supp't, 1888-90. 8°.

Proceedings. 1888, no. 4^10, 1889, 1890, no. 1-3. 8°.
Geological Survey of India.

Palseontologia Indica. Ser. XIII, vol. iv, pt. 1, 1889. 4°.

Memoirs. Vol. XXIV. 2, 1890. 8°.

Records. Vol. XXI. 3, 4, XXII, XXIII. 1-3, 1888-90. 8°.

Bibliographj- of Indian geology, compiled by R D. Oldham. Preliminary
issue. 1888. 8°.
Meteorological Department of the Oovernmejit of India.

Indian meteorological memoirs. Vol. III. 3-4, IV. 5, 6, 1888-89. f°.

Report on the meteorology of India. 1887, 1888. f°.

Report on the administration of the meteorological department. 1887-88
f°.

X Additions to the Library.

Calcutta. — Meteorological Department of the Government of India.

Meteorolotfical observations recorded at seven stations in India, 1888. f°.

Cyclone memoirs. Pt. II, 1890. 8°.

Meteorological observations at Simla, 1841-45. Vol. II, Lond., 1877. 4°.

Handbook of the cyclone storms in the Bay of Bengal. By John Eliot.
1890. 8°.

Charts of the Arabian Sea and the adjacent portion of the North Indian
Ocean, showina; the pressure, winds and currents in each month of the
year [1888]. f°.
Cambridge. — Philosophical Society.

Transactions. Vol. XIV. 3, 4, 1889. 4°.

Proceedings. Vol. VI. 4^6, VII. 1-3, 1888-90. 4°.
Catania. — Accadenda Gioenia di Scienze Naturali.

Atti Ser. III. Tomo XX. Ser. IV. Tomo I. 1888-90. 4°.

Bullettino mensile. Nuova serie. Fasc. 1, 4-18, 1888-90. 8°.
Cherbourg. — Societe Rationale des Sciences Naturelles.

Meraoires. Tome XXVI, 1889. 8°.
Christiania. — KiJn. Universitiits-Stervwarte.

Zonenbeobachtungen der Sterne zwischeu 64° 50' und 70° 10' ncirdlicher
Declination. 1888. 4°.
Norwegisches meteorologisches Institnt.

Jahrbuch. 1886, 1887. 4°.
Nm-wegian North- Atlantic Expedition, 1876-78.

Publication XIX. 4°.
Vidensknbs SelsJcabet.

Forhandliugar. 1888, 1889. 8°.
Qh0r_ — Naturforschende Gesellschaft Granbiindens.

Jahres-Bericht. Neue Folge. Jahrg. XXXI-XXXIII, 1886-89. 8°.
Cordoba. — Academia Nacional de Ciencias.

Actas. Tomo VI and atlas, 1889. 4°.

Boletin. Tomo X. 2, 3, XI. 1-3, 1887-89 8°.
Da>zig. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Schriften. Neue Folge. Bd. VII. 1, 2, 1888-89. 8°.
Dijon. — Academic des Sciences, Arts et Belles-Lettres.

Memoires. 3« s(5r. Tome X. 4 ser. Tome I. 1887-89. 8°.
DoRPAT.— Ge/e/irfe Estnische Gesellschaft.

Sitzungsberichte. 1888-89. 8°.
Naturforscher-Geselhchaft bei der Universitiit Dorpat.

Archiv fiir die Naturkunde Liv-Elist-und Kurlands. Ser. I. Bd. IX. 5,
1889. 8°.

Sitzungsberichte. Bd. VIII. 3, IX. 1, 1888-89. 8°.

Schriften. V, 1890. 8°.
Dresden. — Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft Isis.

Sitzungsberichte und Abhandhmgen. 1888, 1889, 1890. 8°.
Verein filr Erdkunde.

Mittheilungen. 1888. 8°.

Festschrift zur Jubelfeier des 25jahrigen Bestehens. 1888. 8°.

Jubileumschrift. Litteratur des Landes-und Volkskunde des Konigreich
Sachsen. Bearb. von Paul Emil Richter. 1889. 8°.
Dublin.— i?o?/ai Irish Academy.

Transactions. Vol. XXIX. 1-13. 1887-90. 8°.

Proceedings. Ser. II. Polite lit. and antiq. Vol. II. 8. Science. Vol.
IV. 6. Ser. III. Vol. I. 1-3. 1888-90. 8°.

Cunningham memoirs. No, V, 1890. 4°.

Todd lecture series. Vol. I. 1, II, 1887-89. 8°.

Additions to the Library.

Dublin. — Royal Irish Academy.

Irish manuscript series. Vol. II. 1, 1890. 8°.

List of papers published in the transactions, Cunningham memoirs, and
Irish manuscript series, 1786-1886. 4°.

Royal Geological Society of Ireland.

Journal. Vol. XVII. 2, 1S8.5-87. 8°.
Edinburgh. — Botanical Society.

Transactions and proceedings. Vol. I. 1-3, III. 2, IV, V, X, XI, XII. 3,

XIII. 2, .3, XIV-XVII, 1841-1889. 8°.
Annual report and proceedings. I- VIII, 1836-44, 1855. 8°.

Geological Society.

Transactions. Vol. V. 4, VI. 1, 1888-90.

Royal Physical Society.

Proceedings. Vol. IX. 2, 3, X. 1, 1886-89. 8°.

Royal Society.

Proceedings. Vol. XV, XVI, 1887-89. 4°.
Emden. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Jahresbericht. LXXII-LXXIV, 1886-89. 8°.
Erfurt. — Kdn. Akadeinie gemeinniiiziger Wissenschaften.

Jahrbiicher. Neue Folge. Heft XVI, 1890. 8°.
FiRENZE. — Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale.

BoUettino delle pubblicazioni Italiane ricevute per diritto di stampa.
No. 63-119, 1888-90. 8°.

R. Istituto di Studi Superiori Practici e di Perfezionamento.

Pubblicazioni. Sezione di filosofla e filologia.
Le seconde nozze del conjuge superstite. Studio storico di Alberto Del

Vecchio. 1885. 8°.
I pin antichi frammenti del costituto Fiorentino raccolti e pubblicati
da Guiseppe Rondoni. 1882. 8°.

Sezione di Scienze fisiche e naturali.

Osservazioni continue della elettricitd atmosferica istiluite a Firenze

dal Prof. Antonio Roiti. 1884. 8°.
Linee generali della tisiologia del cervelletlo. Prima memoria del Prof.
Luigi Luciani. 1884. 8°.
Sezione di medicina e chirurgia.

Archivio della scuola d'anatomia patologica. Vol. II, 1882. 8°.
Esegesi medico legale sul methodus testificandi di Giovan Battista Co
dronchi. Pel Prof. Angiolo Filippi. 1883. 8°.
Frankfurt a. M. — Deutsche malakozoologische Gesellschaft.

Nachrichtsblatt. Jahrg. XX. 7-12, XXI, XXII, 1888-90. 8°.
Senckenbergische naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Abhandluugen. Bd. XV. 3, XVI. 1, 1888-90. 4°.

Bericht. 1888-90. 8°.
Freiburg in B. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Berichte. Bd. il-IV, 1887-89. 8°.
Geneve. — Institut National Genevois.

Bulletin. Tome XXIX, 1890. 8°.

Mcimoires. Tome XVII, 1886-89. 4°.
Societe de Physique et d''IIlstoire Naturelle.

Memoires. Tome XXX, 1888-90. 4°.
Museo Civico di Storia Naturale.

Annali. Ser. II. Vol. Ill -VI, 1886-89. 8°.
GiESSEN. — Oberhessische Gesellschaft ficr Natur-und Heilkuude.

Bericht. XXVI, XXVII, 1889-90. 8°.
Glasgow. — Geological Society.

Transactiojis. Vol. VIII. 2, 1886-88. 8°.

xii Additions to the Library.

Glasgow. — Natural History Society.

Proceedings and transactions. New series. Vol. II, III. 1, 1886-89. 8°.
Philosophical Society.

Proceedings. Vol. XIX, XX, 1888-89. 8°.
GoTTiNGEN. — Konigl. Oesellschaft der Wissetischaftcn.

Nachrichten. 18S8, 1889. 8°.
GusTROW. — Verein der Freunde der Naturgeschichte in Mecklenburg.

Archiv. Jahrg. XLII, XLIII, 1888-89. 8°.
Habana. — Real Colegio de Belen.

Observaciones magnetieas y meteorologicas. 1886. iv, 1887, 1888. i 4°.
Halifax. — Xova Scotian Institute of Natural Science.

Proceedings and transactions. Vol. I. 4, V. 3, 4, VI. 2-4, VII. 1-3,
1865-89. 8°.
Department of Mines.

Report. 1888, 1889. 8°.
Halle. — Kais. Leopoldinisch-VaroUniscJie deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher.

Leopoldina. Heft XXIV, XXV, 1888-89. 4°.
Naturforschende Oesellschaft.

Abhaudlungen. Bd. XVII. 1, 3, 1888. 4°.

Bericht. 1887. 8°.
'■Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fiir Sachsen und Thiiringen.

Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissenschaften. Bd. LXI, LXII, LXIII. 1-3, 1889-90.
8°.
Hamburg. — Deutsche Seewarte.

Archiv. Jahrg. X-XII, 1887-89. 4°.

Monatliche Uebersicht der AVitterung. 1888 Miirz-Dec, 1889, 1890 Jan.-
Mai. 8°.

Deutsches meteorologisches Jahrbuch. 1887, 1888. 4°.

Ergebnisse der meteorologischen Beobachtungen, 1876-1885. 4°.
Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein.

Abhandlungen. Bd. XI. 1, 1889. 4°.
Wissenschaftliche Anstalten.

Jahrbuch. Jahrg. VI, 1888.
Hannover. — Naturhistorische Oesellschaft.

Jahresbericht. XXXVIII, XXXIX, 1887-89. 8o.
Harlem. — Musee Teyler.

Archives. S(^rie II. Vol. II. 1, III. 2-4, 1884-90. 8°.

Catalogue de la bibliotheque. Vol. I. 7, 8, II. 1, 3. 1887-89. 8°.
Societd Ilollandaise des Scietices.

Archives nt^erlandaises des sciences exactes et uaturelles. Tome XXIII,
XXIV, 1888-90. 8°.
Helsingfors. — Societas Sclentiarum Fennica.

Acta. Tom. XV, XVI, 1888. 4°.

Ofversigt af forhandlingar. XXVIII-XXXI, 1885-89. 8©.

Bidrag till kannedom af Finlauds natur och folk. Hiift. XLV-XLVIII,
1SS7-89. 8o.

Finska Vetensliaps-Societeten, 1838-1888, dess organisation och verksam-
het. Af. A. E. Arppe. 1888. 8°.
Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica.

Acta. Vol. Ill, IV, V. 1, 1886-88. 8°.

Meddelauden. Hiift. XIV, XV, 1888-89.

Herbarium musei fennici. Ed. 2. I. Plantae vasculares, 1889. 8°.

Notae conspectus florae fennicae. Auctore H. Hjelt. 1888. 8°.
Hermannstadt.— ;S'ie6«nA;Mr(7i';cAer Verein fiir Naturwissenschaften.

Verhandlungen und Mittheilungen. Jahrg. XXVIII. XXIX, 1888-89. 8°.

Additions to the Library. xiii

HoBART. — Royal Society of Tasmania.

Papers and proceedings. 1887, 1888. 8°.
Jena. — Medicinisch-naturwiisenscliaflliche Oesellschafl.

Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Naturwisseuschaft. Bd. XXII. 3, 4. XXIII,
XXIV, 1888-90. 8°.
Kharkow. — Societe des Sciences Experimeittales annexee d V UniversiU de Kharkow.

Travaux de la section medicale. 1886-87, 1888. i, 1889. i-iii. 8°.
Ki EL. — Konigl. Christian AlbrecJits- Universitdt.

Sehrifteu aus dem Jahre 1SS7-88, 1888-89, 1889-90. 8° and 4°.
Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fiir Schleswig-Holstein.

Schriften. Bd. VII. 2, VIII. 1, 1889. 8°.
KiKV. — Kievskie Obshcliestvo lestestvoispytatelei.

Zapiski. Tom. IX. 1, 3, X. 1-3, XI. 1, 1888-88. 8°.
Kjobenhavn. — Kon. Danske Videnskabernes Selskdb.

Oversigt over forhandlinger. 1887. iil, 1888, 1889, 1890. i. 8°.
KoNiGSBERG. — KowigL pJiysikalisch-okonomische Oesellschaft.

Scliriften. Jahrg. XXVIII-XXX, 1887-89. 4°.
Krakow.^JST. k. Sternwarie.

Materyaly do klimatograUi Galicyi. Rok 1887, 1888. 8°.
La Plata.— 3/Mseo.

La musee de La Plata. Rapide coup d'reil sur sa fondatioii et son d6-
veloppement. Par F. P. Moreno. 1890. 8°.
Lausanne. — Societe Vaudoise des Sciences Natnrelles.

Bulletin. 3« ser. No. 97-101, 1888-90. 8°.
Leeds. — Yorkshire Geological and PolytecJinic Society.

Proceedings. New series. Vol. X, XI. 1-:.', 1888-89. 8°.
Leiden. — Nederlandsche Dierkuiidige Vereeniging.

Tijdscrifl. Ser. II. Deel II. 3, 4, supplement deel II, 1888-89. 8°.
Leipzig. — Astronomische Oesellschaft.

Vierteljaiirsschrift. Jahrg. XXIII, XXIV, XXV. 1, 2, 1888-90. 8».

Publication. XIX, 1889 4°.

Catalog. Abth. I. Stuck IV, XIV, 1890. 4°.
Kon. sdchsische Oesellschaft der Wissenschaften.

Berichte. Math.-physische Classe. Bd. XL, XLI, XLII. 1, 1888-90.

Register zu den Jahrg. 1866-85 der Berichte und Bd. I-XII der Abhand-
lungen. 1889. 8°.
Nat urforschende Oesellschaft.

Sitzungsberichte. Jahrg. XIII, XIV, 1886-87. 8°.
Verein fiir Erdkunde.

Mittbeilungen. 1887-89. 8°.

Zoologischer Anzeiger. No. 283-350, 1888-90. 8°.

Liege. — Societe Oeologique de Belgique.

Aunales. Tome XIII. 2, XIV. 2, XV. 2. 3, XVI. 1, 1888-89. 8°.
Societe Royale des Sciences.

Memoires. 2'^ s»5r. Tome XV, XVI, 1888-90. 8°.
LiSBOA, — Sociedade de Geographia.

Boletin. Serie VII. 9-12, VIII, IX. 1-6, 1887-90. 8°.

Catalogos e indices. As publicayoes. 1889. 8°.

Indices e catalogos. A biblioteca. I. 1890. 8°.

Historia do infante D. Duarte irmao de el-rei D. Joao IV. Por Jos^
Ramos-Coelho. Tomo I. 1889. 8°.
Liverpool. — Literary and Philosophical Society.

Proceedings. No. XLI-XLIll, 1887-89. 8°.
London. — Geological Society.

Quarterly journal. Vol. XLIV. 3, 4, XLV, XLVI, 1888-90. 8°,

xiv Additions to the Library.

London. — Linnean Society.

Journal. Zoology. No. 118-123, 130-144, 1888-90. 8°.

—Botany. No. 150, 152-157, 159-174, 181-182, 1887-90. 8°.

Proceedings. 1887-88. 8°.

List. 1888-90. 8°.
MatJiematical Society.

Proceedings. No. 321-390, 1888-90. 8°.
Royal Meteorological Society.

Quarterly journal. New series. No. 67-76, 1888-90. 8°.

List of fellows. 1889, 1890. 8°.
Royal 3Iicroscopical Society.

Journal. 1888. iv-vi, 1S89, 1890. i-v. 8°.
Royal Society.

Philosophical transactions. Vol. CLXXVIII, CLXXIX. A, B, CLXXX.
A, B. 1887-89. 4°.

Proceedings. No. 270-294, 1888-90. 8°.

List of council and members. 1887-89. 4°.
LouvAiN.— La Cellule. Tome I-V, VI. 1, 1881-90. 8°.
Lund. — Universitet.

Acta. Tom. VIII, XVIII, XXIV, XXV, 1871-89. 4°.
Lton. — Acadimie des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts.

Mi^moires. Classe des sciences. Tome XXVIII, XXIX, 1886-88. 8°.

Histoire des herbiers. Par le Dr. Saint-Lager. Paris, 1885. 8°.

Recherches sur les anciens herbaria. Par le Dr. Saint-Lager. Paris, 1886.
8°.

Viciscitudes onomastiques de laglobulaire vulgaire. Paris, 1889. 8°.
Mus4e Guimet.

Aunales. Tome XIII, XV-XVIL 1888-89. 4°.

Revue de I'histoire des religions. Tome XVI, 2, 3, XVII-XXI, 1887-90.
8°.
Madras. — Government Observatory.

Observations made with the meridian circle, 1865-67. 4°.
Madrid. — Comision del Ilapa Geologico de Espana.

Bolctin. Tomo XIV, XV, 1887-88. 8°.

Memorias. Descripcion flsica, geologica y minera de la provincia de
Huelva. Por D. Joaquin Gonzalo y Tarin. Tome I, II, 1886-88. 8°.

Mapa geologico de Espafia. Hoja 6, 8, 12, 16, 19, 20, 23, 24, 27, 28, 31, 32.
1889.
Ohservatorio.

Observaciones meteorologicas. 1886-87. 8°.

Resumen da las observaciones cfectuadas en la peninsula. 1884, 1885. 8°.
Sociedad Espanola de Historia Natural.

Anales. Tomo XVII. 2, 3, XVIII, 1888-89. 8°.
Real icademia de Ciencias Exactas, Fisicas y Naturales.

Memorias. Tomo XIII. 2, 3, 1889. 4°.

Revista de los progresos de las ciencias exactas. Tomo XXII. 5-7,
1888-89. 8°.

Anuario, 1889. 8°.
Manchester. — Literary and Philosophical Society.

Memoirs and proceedings. Series IV. Vol. I-III, 1888-90. 8°.
Marburg. — Gesellschaft zur Beforderung der gesammten Natnrwissenschaften.

Sitzungsberichte. Jahrg. 1888, 1889. 8°.
Melbourne. — National Museum.

Prodromus of the zoology of Victoria. Decade XVI-XX. 1888-90. 8"
Metz. — Academic.

M^moires. 3« s^r. Ann^e XV, 1885-86. 8°.

Additions to the Lihrary. xv

Mexico. — Observatorio Meteorologico-Magnetico Central.

Boletin mensuel. Tomo I. 6-13, II, 1888-89. 4°.

Sociedad CienUfica '■'■Antonio Alzate."

Memorias. Tomo II, III, IV. 1-2, 1888-90. 8°.

Sociedad de Oeographia y Estadistica.

Boletin. Epoca IV. Tomo I. 1-4, 6, 1888-89. 8°.

Sociedad Mexicana de Historia Natural.

La iiaturaleza. Ser. II. Tomo 1. 4-9. 1888-90. 4°.
MiDDELBtiRG. — ZeeiiwHch Genootschap der Weteniichaxipen.
Zelandia illustrata. Vervolj;,-. 1885. 8°.
Levensberichten van Zeeiiwen. Afl. I, II, 1888-89. 8°.
De stadsrekeniu^en van Middelbuij^-. III. 1500-1549. Door H. M. Keste-

loo. 8°.
Vlnchtbergen in Walcheren. Door Dr. J. C. Man. 1888. 8°.
MiLANO. — Real Istitiito Lombardo di Scieme e Lettere.

Rendiconto. Serie II. Vol. XX, XXI, 1887-88. 8°.

Real Osservatorio di Brera.

Pubblicazioni. No. XXXIII-XXXVII, 1888-91. 4°.

Societd Italiana di Scienze JSfaturali.

Atti. Vol. XXIV-XXXII, 1881-90. 8°.
MoDENA. — Regia Accademia delle Scienne, Lettere ed Arti.
Memorie. Serie II. Tomo V, VI, 1887-88. 4°.

Societd del Ndturalisti.

Memorie. Ser. III. Vol. VII. 1, VIII, IX. 1, 1888-90. 8°.
MoNTPELLiER. — Academic des Sciences et Lettres.

M(3moires. Section des lettres. Tome VIII. 2, 3, 1888-89. 4».
Moscou. — Societe Imperiale des Nat^iralides.

Bulletin. Annexe 1888, 1889, 1890. i. 8°.
Nouveaux memoires. Tome XV. 6, 1889. 4°.

Meteorologische Beobachtungen am Observatorium der landwirth. Aka-
demie bei Moskau. Jahr. 1887. ii, 1888, 1889. i. 4°.
MiJNCHEN. — Kon. bayerische Akademie der Wissenschajten.

Sitzungsberichte. Philosph.-philolog. und histor. Classe. 1888, 1889, 1890.
Bd. I. 1, 2. 8*".

Mathemat.physikal. Classe. 1888, 1889, 1890 Heft 1 , 2. 8°.

Ueber die Molekularbeschaffenheit der Krystalle. Festrede von Dr. Paul

Groth. 1888. 4°.
Ueber die historische Methode auf dem Gebiet des deutsehen Civilprocess-

rechts. Festrede von J. W. v Planck. 1889. 4°.
Georg Simon Ohm's wisseuscliaftliche Lelstungen. Festrede von Eugen

Lommel. 1889. 4°.
Die Anfiinge einer politischeii Literatur bei den Griechen. Festrede von

Rudolph Scholl. 1890. 4°.
Gediichtnisrede auf Karl von Prautl. Von W. v. Christ. 1889. 4°.
Gedjichtnisrede auf J. von Dollinger. Von C. A. Cornelius. 1890. 4°.

Kbii. Sternwarte.

Neue Annalen. Bd. I, 1890. 4°.
MiJNSTER. — Westfdli&cher Provincial- Vereinfiir Wissenschaft und Kimst.

Jahresbericht. XVI, XVII, 1887-88. 8°.
Nancy. — Academic de Stanislas.

Memoires. 5« ser. Tome V-VII, 1888-89. 8°.
Napoli. — R. Accademia delle Scienze Flsiche e Matmiatiche.
Atti. Ser. II. Vol. I-lII, 1887-89. 4°.
Rediconto. Ser. II. Vol. I-III, 1887-89. 4°.
Neuchatel. — Societe des Sciences Nattirelles.
Bulletin. Tome XVI, 1888. 8°.

\

;ivi Additions to the Library.

Newcastle-upon-Tyne. — No7-th of England Institute of Mining and Mechanical
Engineers.

Transactions. Vol. XXXVII. 5, 6, XXXVIII. 1-5, 1888-90. 8°.
Report of the French commission on the use of explosives in the pres-
ence of flre-dnmp in mines. Pt. 1, 2. 1890. 8°.
NOhnberg. — Naturhistoriache Qesellschaft.

Jahresbericht. 1888, nebst Abhandlungen, Bd. VIII. 8°.
Odessa. — Societe des Naturalistes de la Nouvelle Russie.

Zapiski. Tom. XII. 2, XIII, XIV, 1888-89. 4°.
Matematicheskoe otdielenie. Tom. VIII-X, 1888-89. 8°.
Ottawa. — Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada.

Annual report. New series. Vol. Ill, with maps, 18S7-88. 8°.
Contributions to palaeontology. Vol. I. 2. 1889. 8°.

Meteorological Service of the Dominion of Canada.

Report. 1885. 8°.
Oxford. — Badcliffe Library.

Catalogue of books added during 1888, 1889. 8°.

Haddiffe Observatory.

Results of astronomical and meteorological observations. Vol. XLIII,
XLIV, 1885, 1886. 8°.
Palermo. — R. Accademia di Scienze, Lettere e Belle Arti.

Atti. Nuova serie. Vol. X, 1888-89. 4°.
Paris. — Ecole Normale Superieure.

Annales scientifiques. 3' s6r. Tome V. 8-12, VI, VII. 1-10, 1888-90. 4°.

J^cole Polytechnique.

Journal. Cahier LVIII, LIX, 1889. 4°.

Observatoire.

Rapport annuel. 1888, 1889. 4°.

Societe Nationale d' Acclimatation.

Revue des sciences naturelles appliquees. 4e serie. Tome V. 16-24, VI,
VII. 1888-90. 8°.

Societe Geologique de France.

Bulletin, 'se s«5r. Tome XIV. 9, XV. 9, XVI. 4-11, XVII. 1-9, XVIII. 1-4,
1886-90. 8°.

Societe 3fathematiqne de France.

Bulletin. Tome XVI. 4, XVII, XVIII, 1888-90. 8°.
Penzance. — Royal Geological Society of Cornwall.
Transactions. Vol. XI. 3, 4, 1888-90. 8°.
Perugia. — Accademia Medico- Chirvrgica.

Atti e rendiconti. Vol. I l-A, 1889. 8°.
Pisa. — Societd Toscana di Scienze Naturali.
Memorie. Vol. IX, X, 1888-89, 8°.

Processi verbali. Vol. VI, pp. 105-302, VII, pp. 1-170, 1888-90. 8°.
Commemorazionc di Giuseppe Menenghini fatta nell' aula magna dell'
Universita Pisana ai 24 Marzo, 1889. 8°.
Potsdam. — Astrophysikalisches Observatoriu7n.

Publicationen. Bd.'lV. 2, VI, 1889. 4°.
Pkag. — Kon. hiihm.ische Ge.ielhchaft der Wissenschaften.

Abhandlungen der math.-naturwiss. Classe. Folge VII Bd. II, III,

1888-90. 4°.
Sitzungsberichte. 1888, 1889, 1890. 8°.
Jahresbericht. 1887-89. 8°.

K. k. Sternwarte.

Magnetische und meteorologische Beobachtungen. Jahrg. XLIX, L,

1888-89. 4°.
Astronomische Beobachtungen. Appendix zu Jahrg. XLVI-XLVIII. 1890.
4°.

Additions to the Library. xvii

PuLKOVA. — Nicolai-Hauptsternwarte.

Jahresbericht. 1887. 8°.

Tabulae quantitatum Besselianarum, 1890-94. 8°.
Quebec — Literary and Historical Society.

Transactions. No. 19, 18S7-89. 8°.
Regensbukg. — Naturwissenschaftlichcr Verein.

Berichte. Heft I, 1886-87. 8°.
Historincher Vtrein von Oberpfalz unci Regensburg.

Verhaudlungen. Bd. XLI, XLII, 1887-88. 8°.
Richmond, Surrey. — Keiv Observatory.

Report of the committee. 1888, 1889. 8°.
Riga. — Naturforscher Verein.

Correspondenzblatt. Jahrg. XXXI-XXXIII, 1888-90. 8°.
La Rochelle. — Academic des Belles- Lettres, Sciences et Arts.

Annales de la soci6t^ des sciences naturelles de la Charente-Inferieure.
Vol. XXIV, XXV, 1887-88. 8°.
Roma. — Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale Vittorio Emajiuele.

Bollettino delle opere moderne straniere acquistate dalle biblioteche
pubbliche governative del regno d'ltalia. Vol. Ill, IV, V. 1-3, 1888-90.
8°.
Meale Accademia dei Lincei.

Atti. Ser. IV. Rendiconti. Vol. IV, i. 11-13, ii, V, VI. i, ii. 1-8,
1888-90. 4°.

Memorie della classe dl scienze morali, storiehe e filologiche. Vol.

II, III, V, 1886-88. 4°.

Memorie della classe di scienze flsiche, matematiche e natural!.

Vol. III-V, 1886-88. 4°.
Accademia Pontifica de'' Nuovi Lincei.

Atti. Tomo XLII, XLIII. 1-3, 1888-90. 4°.
Reale Comitaio Geologicq d'ltalia.

Bollettino. Vol. XVIII-XX, 1887-89. 8°.
Socieid Italiana delle Scietize.

Memorie di matematica e di fisica. Ser. III. Tomo IV, V and appendice,
VII, 1882-90. 4°.
St. Gallen. — Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft.

Bericht. Jahrg. 1886-87, 1887-88. 8°.
San Jose. — Institnto Jleteorologico Nacional.

Boletin trimestral. No. 4, 1888. 4°.
S. Paolo. — Commissao Geographica e Geologica da Provincia de S. Paolo.

Boletin. No I -III, 1889. 8°.
St. Peteksburg. — Vomite Ge'ologique.

Memolres. Vol. II. 2-5, III. 1-4, IV. 1, V. 3-4, VI, VII. 1, 2, VIII. 1, IX. 1,
XI. 1, 1885-89. 4°.

Bulletins. Vol. IV. 7-10, V, VII. 1-10, VIII. 1-8, 1885-89. 8°.

Bibliotheque geologique de la Russie. 1885-88. 8°.
Hortus Petropolitanus.

Acta. Tom. X. 2, XI. 1, 1889-90. 8°.
Lnp. Russ. Geograf. Obshtchestvo.

Otchet. God 1887-89. 8°.
Kais. Akademie der Wissenschqften.

Bulletin. Tome XXXII. 2^, XXXIII. 1, 1888-89.

Repertorium der Meteorologie. Bd. XI, XII, 1888-90. 4°.

Neue Reduction der Bradley'schen Beobachtungen, 1750-62. Von A.
Auwers. Bd. Ill, 1888. f°.
St. Petersburg. — Physikalisches Centralobservatorium.

Annalen. Jahrg. 1887, 1888, 1889. 4°.

xviii Additions to the Lihrary.

Santiago. — Deutscher wisseriHchafUicher Verein.

Verhandlungen. Hefl VI, 1888. 8°.
Schxueizerische naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Verhandlungen. Jahresversammlung LXXI, LXXII, 1888-89. 8°.
Stockholm. — Entomologisk Forening.

Entomologisk tidskrift. Arg. IX, X, 18S8-89. 8°.
Kong. Svenxka Vetenskaps Akademie.

Haudlingar. Ny foljd. Bd. XX, XXI, 1882-85. 4°.

Bihang till haudlingar. Bd. IX-XIII, 1884-88. 8°.

Ofversiiit af forliandlingar. Arg. XLI-XLV, 1884-88. 8°.

Lefnad.steckningar. Bd. II. 3, 1885. 8°.

Meteorologi^ka iakttagelser. Bd. XXII-XXVI, 1S80-84. 4°.

FiJrteckning ofver innehalet i skrifter, 1820-1883. 8°.

Ledamoter, 1885-89. 8°.
Stuttgart.— F«/em far vateiianduche Naturkunde hi Wilrttemberg.

Jahreshef.e. Jahrg. XLV, XLVI, 1889-90. 8o.
Sydney. — Oovemnieid Observatory.

Results of meteorological observations made in New South Wales during
1887. 8°.

Results of rain, river and evaporation observations during 1888, 1889. 8°.
Linnean Society of New South Wales.

Proceedings. Series II. Vol. II. 1, 4, 1887-88. 8°.
Royal Society of New South Wales.

Journal and proceedings. Vol. XXII-XXIII, 1888-89. 8°.
Tacubaya. — Observatorio Astronomico Nacional.

Anuario. Afio IX-XI, 1889-91. 8°.
Thkondhjem. — Kon. Norske Videnskabers Selskab.

Skrifter. 1886, 1887. 8°.
TiFLis. — Physicalisches Observo.torium.

Magnetische Beobachtungcn. 1886-87, 1887-88. 8°.
Tokyo. — Imperial Utiiversity of Japan.

Journal of the college of science. Vol. II. 4, 5, III, 1888-90. 4°.

Calendar. 1889-90. 8°.
Seismological Society of Japan.

Transactions. Vol. XIII, 1889. 8°.
Torino. — Musei di Zoologia ed Anatomia Comparata.

Bollettino. No. 49-86, 1888-90. 8°.
Toronto. — Canadian Institute.

Proceedings. Ser. III. Vol. VI, VII, 1889-90. 8°.

Annual report. 1887-88, 1888-89. 8°.
Toulouse. — Academic des Sciences., Inscriptions et Belles- Lettres.

Memoires. 8« ser. Tome IX, X. g" S6r. Tome I. 1887-89. 8°.'
Tromso. — Mnsenm.

Aarshefter. I-XII, 1878-89. 8°.

Aarsberetning. 1873-1888 8°.
Upsala. — Hegia Societas Scientianmn.

Nova acta. Ser. III.- Vol. XIV. 1, 1890. 4°.

Catalogue methodique des acta et nova acta, 1744-1889. 4°.
Utrecht. — Kon. Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Instituut.

Nederlandsch meteorologisch jaarboek. Jaarg. XXXI. 2, XL, XLI,

1879-90. 4°.
Provinciaal Utrechtsch Genootschap van Kunste^i en Wetenschappen.

Verslag van het verhaudelde in de algemeene vergadering. 1887-89. 8°.

Aanteekeningen van het verhandelde in de sectie-vergaderingen. 1887-89.
8°.
Vknezia. — Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti.

Atti. Ser. VI. Vol. V. 10, VI, VII, 1887-89. 8°.

Additions to the Lihrary. xix

ViCENZA. — Accademia Olvmpica.

Atti. Vol. XXT, 1886. 8°.
Wellington. — New Zealand Institute.

Transactions and proceedings. Vol. XXI, 1888. 8°.
WiEN. — Kais. Akademie der Wissenschaften.

Sitzungsberichte. Matheraat.-naturwiss. Classe. Abth. I. Bd. XCV-
XCVII, XCVIII. 1-3, 1887-89. 8°.
K. k. Central- Anstalt filr Meteorologie und Erdmagnetistnus.

Jahrbiicher. Neue Folge. XXIV, XXV, 1887-88. 4°.
K. k. geologische JEteichxaiistalt.

Abliandlungen. Bd. XIII. 1, XV. 1, 2, 1889-90. 4°.

Jahrbucli. ' Bd. XXXVII. 3, 4, XXXVIII, XXXIX, XL. 1, 2, 1887-90. 8°.

Verhandlungen. Jahrg. 1887, no. 10-18, 1888, 1889, 1890, no. 10-13. S*.
K. k. naturhistorisches HofmuMimi.

Annalen. Bd. III. 3, 4, IV. 1, 4, V. 1-3, 1888-90. 8°.
K. k. Universitats-Sternwarte.

Annalen. Bd. V, VI, 1885-86. 4°.
K. k. zoologisch-botanische Oenellschaft.

Verhandlungen. Bd. XXXVIII, XXXIX, XL. 1, 2. 1887. 8«"
Wiesbaden. — Nassauuchei' Verein fur Naturkunde.

Jahrbiicher. Jahrg. XLI, XLII, 1888-89. 8°.
WuRZBURG. — Phy&ikalisch-medicinisclie Gesellschaft.

Sitzungsberichte. Jahrg. 1888, 1889. 8°.
Z URICH. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Vierteljahrschrift. Jahrg. XXXI. 3, 4, XXXII, XXXIII, XXXIV. 1, 2,
1886-89. 8«.

Recent discussions on the abolition of patents for inventions. Lond. 1869. 8*.

From R. A. Macfie, Esq.
De la mesure de la simplicitc dans les sciences mathematiques. Par E. Lemoine.

Paris, 1888. 8°.
Notes sur diverses questions de la gi^ometrie du triangle. Par E. Lemoine. Paris,

1888. S°. From the Author.

Atmospheric economy of solar radiation. By Arthur Searle. 8°. (From Proe.

Amer. Acad, of Arts and Sci., 1888.) Frotii the Author.

Eskimo of Hudson's Strait. By F. F. Payne. 8°. (From Proc. Canad. Inst.

1889.) From the Autfior.

Echinoderms from the northern coast of Yucatan and the harbor of Vera Cruz.

By J. E. Ives. 8°. (From Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. of Philad., 1890.)

From the Author.
Ueber Feuerbestattung. Vortrag von Prof. Dr. Friedrich Goppelsroeder. Miil-

hausen, 1890. 8°. From the Author.

Die geologischen Horizonte der fossilen Kohlen. Von C. F. Zincken. Leipzig.

1884. 8°. From the Author

I, — Some Experiments on the Physiological Action op Uranium
Salts. By R. H. Chittenden and Alexander Lambert, M.D.

In 1885, experiments were commenced in the laboratory of phys-
iological chemistry at Yale University, to ascertain something
regarding the physiological and toxical action of uranium salts. At
that time there was little accurate knowledge concerning uranium.
Gmelin* had, in 1824, performed a few experiments with the nitrate
from which he concluded that this salt is a feeble poison ; thus he
states that 15 grains had no eifect on a dog, that 1 drachm merely
caused vomiting after more than an hour's interval, and that 34
grains killed a rabbit in 52 hours by stopping the iiTitability of the
heart, while 3 grains injected into the jugular vein of a rabbit
caused instant death. Later, in 1851, there appeared a statement
in the British and Foreign Medico-chirurgical Review that Lecoute
always found sugar in the urine of dogs slowly poisoned by small
doses of uranium nitrate. This statement was commented upon by
Hughes in his manual of pharmico dynamics (p. 866), and has been
made the basis of a claim by the so-called homa?opathic school that
uranium nitrate is a remedy for diabetes. Hughes also refersf to a
monograph by Edward Blake on urapium, where three persons and
nineteen animals were experimented on. In none of Blake's subjects,
however, human or brute, was sugar eliminated in the urine.
L^lceration of the pyloric end of the stomach and of the duodenum
was found well marked in several of the animals, although in no
case was the drug introduced directly into the stomach. Hughes,
likewise, refers to several cases of diabetes which he considers were
cured by the exhibition of small doses of uranium nitrate,J one-sixth
to one-third of a grain three times a day. This constitutes all the
matter bearing on uranium that we have been able to find.

Our work was commenced by a series of experiments on the in-
fluence of a variety of soluble uranium salts on the action of the
araylolytic and proteolytic ferments occurring in the animal organ-

* Edinburgh Medical and Surgical Journal, vol. xxvi, p. 136.

t Ibid., p. 867.

1^ Lancet, June 13, 1874.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VI [I. 1 Nov., 1888.

2 Chittenden and Lambert — Experiments on the

ism. The results, already published,* show plainly that all of the
uranyl salts, with one or two exceptions, have a more or less marked
inhibitory influence on amylolytic and proteolytic action. With
the salivary ferment, even 0-010 per cent, of uranyl nitrate was suffi-
cient to completely stop all action, while with pepsin-hydrochloric
acid and with alkaline trypsin solutions, 0*5 per cent, of the same
salt was required to produce an equal effect. In this case the
inhibitory action of the uranium salt was, in part at least, due to the
formation of a more or less definite and indigestible compound of
uranium with the proteid matter to be digested.f

On the excretion of carbonic acid, uranyl nitrate, by a later series
of experiments,! was also found to have a marked influence. With
rabbits, the hypodermic injection of this salt was followed by a slight
rise in body temperature and a decided increase in the elimination
of carbonic acid. The action of the salt was somewhat slow, but
repetition of the experiment always led to an increase of body
temperature and a decided increase in the amount of carbonic acid
excreted. 0*7 gram of the salt in divided doses was required to
produce the result stated, the rabbit not suffering any apparent ill
effects from this quantity.

The object of the present series of experiments has been : 1st, to
ascertain the influence of uranium salts on proteid metabolism ; 2d,
to ascertain something regarding the toxic action of uranium salts ;
and 3d, whether uranium has any influence on the production of
glycosuria.

Influence on proteid metabolism.

In this experiment a mongrel bitch weighing 18*8 kilos was em-
ployed. The animal was confined in a convenient cage suitably
arranged for the collection of the excreta, and was fed during the
experiment upon a constant diet of known composition. A large
quantity of fresh, lean beef finely chopped, was dessicated at a low
temperature until it had lost about 75 per cent, of water. It then
contained 11 "88 per cent, of nitrogen, as determined by Kjeldahl's
method. A large quantity of ordinary soda crackers were obtained
and when sampled were found to contain 0*69 per cent, of nitrogen.
40 grams of this prepared beef and 25 grams of the crackers, with

* Chittendea and Hutchinson. Studies from the Laboratory of Physiological
Chemistry, Yale University, vol. ii.

f See Chittenden and Whitehouse. Studies, vol. ii, p. 111.
X Chittenden and Cummins. Studies, vol. ii.

Physiological Action of XJranium Salts.

400 c. c. of water were fed to the animal twice daily, making a total
daily income of 10-054 grams of nitrogen. As soon as nitrogenous
equilibrium was established, the 24 hours' urine was analyzed for
nine consecutive days, thus giving the average composition of the
normal excretion. Uranyl nitrate was then administered for ten
consecutive days in gradually increasing quantities.

The accompanying tables give the analytical results. Nitrogen
was determined by the Kjeldalil method, sulphur and phosphorus
by fusion of a given volume of the urine with potassium hydroxide
and potassium nitrate in a silver crucible, and precipitation of the
sulphur as barium sulphate and of the phosphorus first as phospho-
ammonium molybdate and then as ammonio-raagnesium phosphate.*

Normal Urine— Without uranium.

Date

VoUirae.

ao'lLlsP-^^-

Nitrogen

Sulphur.

Phos-
phorus.

Dose of
Uranyl nitrate.

May
31

June

1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

c. c.
565

610
630
600
630
570
460
590
640

acid

1016

1017
1016
1018
1018
1019
1020
1018
1016

grams.

8-414

10-380
10-040

9-618
10-770
10-325

8-738
10-091
10-763

gram.
0-441

0-516
0-558
0-589
0-661
0-608
0-628
0-576
0-604

gram.
0-572

0-637
0-665
0-595
0-715
0-632
0-746
0-712
0-645

0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0

j 0-025 gram.
( 0-025 ■

Total

5395

----

89-139

5-181

5-919

Daily
average

588

----

1017-5 9-904

0-575

0-657

Examination of the first table shows that the animal was in nitro-
genous equilibrium, the average daily excretion of nitrogen for the
normal period being 9-904 grams while the daily amount of nitrogen
taken was 10-054 grams, thus showing a fairly close agi-eement, espe

* See studies from Laboratory of Physiological Chemistry, Tale University, vol. ii,

p. 88.

Chittenden and Lambert — Experiments on the

cially as there would be a slight loss of nitrogen through the hair shed
daily. On commencing the administration of uranium nitrate, small
doses were at first given two or three times daily in gelatin capsules,
at times not to interfere with digestion. On the second day, uranium
was detected in the urine. On June 12th, the 5th day the uranium
salt was given, a trace of albumin appeared in the urine and on the
day following, the 24 hours' urine contained 1*74 grams of albumin.

With Uranium.

Date.

Volume.

c. c.
600

600

602

680

640

710

720

830

640

Re-
action.

acid

<t

((
((

<<

Sp. Gr.

Total
nitrogen.

Nitro-
gen-
nitrogen

of
albumin.

Sulphur.

Phos-
phorus.

Dose of
Uranyl
nitrate.

June
9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

1017
1015
1018
1017
1022

1020

1023

1022

1025

grams.
10-285

8-895

8-925

8-380

11-391

8-847

10-608

11-767

11-178

grams.
10-285

8-895

8-925

8-380

11-093

8-439

10-141

11-446

10-955

gram.

0-587

0-404
0-574
0-525
0-724

0-634

0-571

0-738

0-606

gram.
1-226

0-556

0-612

0-603

0-621

0-628

0-628

0-704

0-626

gram.
j 0 035
\ 0-035
j 0-050
\ 0-025
i 0-050
'{ 0'025

0-050
( 0-025
\ 0-025
( 0-025
J 0-025
\ 0-050
( 0-050
\ 0-050
( 0050
( 0-075
\ 0-075
( 0-075
( 0-150
\ 0-150
(0-150

Total.

6022

90-276

88-559

5-363

6-20Jf.

1-295
grams.

Daily
average

669
650

1019-9

10-031

9-839

0-596

0-689

18

acid

1026

10-179

9-772

0-611

0-542

0

On the 16th of June, the urine contained 7'7 grams of sugar. The
appearance and disappearance of both albumin and sugar were fol-
lowed quantitatively and the results will be discussed later on.
Naturally, the appearance of albumin in the urine compels a correc-
tion in the table of nitrogen results on those days when albumin
was excreted. This has been done by subtracting from the total
nitrogen found, the nitrogen equivalent to the albumin, on the
assumption that the latter contains 15-5 per cent, of nitrogen.

Physiological Action of Uranium Salts. 5

Examination of the analytical results shows that the uranium salt
has a marked influence on the excretion of water, the increase
amounting on an average for the nine days period to over 80 c. c.
per day. There is also a very marked increase in the specific
gravity of the daily excretion, but this is without doubt in great
part due to the presence of albumin and sugar, as the increase is
most noticeable on those days when the largest amounts of sugar and
albumin were excreted.

Regarding nitrogen, a comparison of the total amounts excreted
for the two periods, after correction for the nitrogen of the albumin,
indicates that small doses of the uranium salt have little, if any,
influence on proteid metabolism. On the last three days of the
uranium period, however, when the amount administered had not
only been increased, but there was doubtless also an accumulative
effect, the excretion of nitrogen appeared to be considerably above
the normal, certainly enough to warrant the assumption that com-
paratively large doses of uranium salts may increase somewhat pro-
teid metabolism, and this view is sustained by the increase in both
the total and daily average amounts of sulphur and phosphorus
excreted. During the uranium period of ten days, 1*295 grams of
the nitrate, or 19'98 grains, were given without any apparent ill
effects being immediately produced.

Excretion of sugar atid albumin.

After about 0'4 of a gram of uranium nitrate had been given, the
urine began to show traces of albumin and five days after this, sugar
made its appearance. The amounts excreted are shown in the accom-
panying table. Sugar was determined by AUihn's gravimetric
method, and albumin by boiling with acetic acid and collecting the
coagulum on a weighed filter. On the 18th, the weighed diet was
discontinued, but the urine was kept under close scrutiny with the
results shown in the table. The sugar first disappeared and four
days after this the albumin, likewise. On again administering
uranium, and in much larger doses than in the first series, both
sugar and albumin failed to appear until after a single dose of over
4 grams of the salt had been administered, when considerable albu-
min showed itself in the urine. We were then compelled to stop
the experiment, and the dog was chloroformed and a ])Ost-mortem
immediately made.

The liver was excessively congested and appeared abnormally
large. Microscopic examination of hardened sections showed an

Chittenden and Lambert— Experiments on the

Table showing the amounts of Albumin and Sugar in the Dog's

Ueine.

1

Dose of

Date.

Volume.

Reaction.

Sp. Gr.

Albumin.

Sugar.

Uranyl
nitrate.

June

c. c.

grams.

grams.

grams.

8

640

acid

1016

0

0

0-050

9

600

"

1017

0

0

0-070

10

600

"

1015

0

0

0-075

11

602

"

1018

0

0

0-075

12

680

"

1017

trace

0

0-050

13

640

"

1022

1-741

0

0-075

14

710

"

1020

2-634

0

0-050

15

720

"

1023

3-009

0

0 150

16

830

"

1022

2-066

7-735

0-225

17

640

"

1025

1-441

7-449

0-450

18

650

weighed

1026
diet dis

2-633
continued.

7-476

0

19

1280

acid

1016

3-604

14-387

0

20

((

considerable

considerable

0

21*

750

"

1027

3-048

0-525

0

22

410

alkaline

1035

1-756

0

0

23t

. . -

acid

some

0

0

24

460

"

1018

0-578

0

0

25

430

alkaline

1030

trace

0

0

26

0

0

0

27

0

0

0-4

28

0

0

0-5

29

0

0

0

30

0

0

0

Julyl

0

0

1-0

2

0

0

0

3

. . .

0

0

1-5

4

0

0

4-4

5

----

considerable

0

0

infiltration of cells around the blood vessels, but aside from this and
an apparent tendency of the liver cells to separate into stringy
masses there was nothing abnormal. The kidneys both had adher-
ent capsules and the medullary portion was large in ratio to the
cortex, which, besides being smaller than normal, was striated. The
lesion as made out microscopically was acute parenchymatous neph-

* On this day granular casts were found, but they were not present on the follow-
ing day.

f Dog- vomited freely.

Physiological Action of Uranium Salts, 7

ritis. The endothelial cells of the malphigian tufts were swollen
and proliferated, so that frequently the tuft of vessels was com-
pressed by these proliferating cells and by the deti'itus and infiltrat-
ing pus cells. In the convoluted tubules the cells were swollen,
granular and very much broken down, while the lumen of the tubes
themselves was often filled with detritus and cast matter. In the
straight tubules, the cells were also occasionally broken down and
frequently swollen and granular. The stroma was found in places
infiltrated with pus cells. Stomach and intestines were normal.

Further data regarding the excretion of albumin and sugar,
through the action of uranium, are given in the description of the
toxic action of this substance.

The toxic action of uranium.
Our experiments on the toxic action of uranium have been confined
wholly to the action of pure uranyl nitrate on rabbits, nine in number.
The animals were confined in cages with proper outlets for collecting
the excreta, and were fed on grass, spinach, and other green food.

Experiment I.

Large, vigorous buck. In this experiment small doses of uranium,
gradually increased, were given in gelatin capsules, and the urine
examined each day for albumin and sugar. The accompanying table
gives the details of dose and the amounts of sugar and albumin
found.

Outside of changes in the urine there were no indications of toxic
action until on the ninth day, when a slight weakness was noticeable,
especially in the hind legs. After this, the animal gradually grew
weaker and emaciated, with total loss of appetite and with eyes dull
and Avatery. On the 8th of June, a large quantity of thick tenacious
mucus mixed with pin-head faeces was passed. Motion of all kinds
was difficult. On the 9lh of June, the animal could not sit up and
during poi'tions of the day there appeared to be paralysis of both
hintl legs. Later in the day the power of motion returned, and when
placed on his back the rabbit could kick out feebly with both legs.
On the next day his weakness and dullness were still more pro-
nounced, and when stirred from a squatting posture he trembled vio-
lently. His eyes were watery and glazed, with the pupils widely
dilated. On touching the cornea he did not offer to close the eye-
lids, but endeavored to withdraw his head. All jjower of vision was
apparently lost. Later, he lost the power of coordination in his legs,
was unable to make any coordinate movements, though still retaining

Chittenden and Lambert — Experiments on the

the power to move each limb separately. All faecal discharges had
stopped and the animal refused all food.

Date.

Volume.

May

c, c.

25

73

36

—

37

70

38

85

39

75

30

—

31

June

1

75
83

3

75

3

80

4

18

5

13

6

—

7

45

8

30

9

20

10

0

Reaction.

Sp. Gr.

Albumin.

Sugar.

gram.

gram.

alkaline.

1020

0

0

((

—

0

0

(1

1020

0

0

a

1016

0

0-035

'•

1022

0-189

trace.

"

1023

0-140

0-492

"

1023

0-125

0

"

1021

0-101

0

"

1020

0-173

0

neutral.

—

0-317

0

alkaline.

—

0-155

0

-

1025

0-518

0

"

—

0-301

0

consid-
erable.

0

Dose of Uranyl nitrate.

gram.

i 0-035
j 0-050
l 0-025

j 0-050
j 0-050
j 0-050

I 0-050

j 0-050
\ 0-025
j 0-050
] 0-050
I 0-050
\ 0-050
j 0-050
\ 0-050
J 0-050
/ 0-050

-i 0-050

j 0-100

j 0-100
\ 0-100
S 0-150
} 0-150
j 0-200
} 0-200
j 0-200
\ 0-150

2.175 grams.

On the morning of the 11th found dead. Post-mortem showed the
heart distended on the right side and the lungs normal. The liver
was much smaller than normal and the gall-bladder full of very black
bik'. On a microscopic examination of the liver, the only noticeable
feature was the extreme congestion. In the stomach, the mucous
membrane seemed somewhat disintegrated. In the intestines, brown
colored spots were seen where Peyer's patches are situated, and mi-
croscopic examination showed that the latter were deeply inflamed.
Further, from the large amount of mucus in the mucous glands, it
was evident that there was acute catarrhal inflammation of the intes-
tines. The cfficum was full of black matter. There were no normal
faeces in the colon or rectum, only the pin-head variety.

Physiological Action of Uranium Salts.

9

The kidneys were very mncli diminished in size and extremely con-
gested. Sections showed that the epithelial cells of the malpighian
tul'ts were not swollen or prolil'erated, though in some places the
tufts of vessels were slightly compressed by detritus. The cells of
the convoluted tubules were swollen, granular and broken down or
gone entirely, as were also the cells of the straight tubes, the latter
being also filled in places with casts and detritus. The vessels be-
tween the tubes were filled with blood. The stroma was swollen
and infiltrated with pus cells and in j^laces there were extravasations
of blood.

Brain and cord were slightly congested, but otherwise normal.

Examination of the table of urine tests shows that sugar appeared
first in the urine, but continued only lor three days, while albumin
showed itself immediately after the first appearance of the sugar and
continued throughout the experiment. The amount of ui'ine voided
grew gradually smaller as the animal began to feel the full effects of
the uranium,

Ex23erinie7it II.
In this experiment, uranium was given as indicated in the follow-
ing table, and the urine examined each day.

Date.

Volume.

Reaction.

Sp Gr.

Albumin.

Sugar.

Dose of uranyl nitrate.

June

c. c.

gram.

gram.

gram.

1

. —

alkaline.

—

0

0

0-050

2

100

"

1014

trace.

0

\ 0-050
■/ 0-050

3

55

-

1025

0-192

0

\ 0-050
I 0-050

4

41

"

—

0-227

0-406

\ 0-050
} 0-050

5?
6f

125

acid.

1024

1-095

1-078

j 0-050
/ 0-050

7

120

alkaline.

1024

0-523

0-917

3 0-050
/ 0-050

8

100

acid.

1022

0-237

trace.

( 0-100
] 0-100

9

55

alkaline.

—

0-351

0

\ 0-100
} 0-100

10

125

"

1022

0-687

0-430

j 0-100

I 0-100

0-100

11

75

a

—

cuiisiderabie.

0

12

75

a

1022

0-332

0

0-100

1.350 grams.

On June 4th, the animal began to show weakness, particularly
noticeable in his hind legs, but this disappeared and the animal
Trans. Conn. A.cad., Vol. VIII. 2 Nov., 1888,

10 Chittenden and Lambert — Exfperhnents on the

appeared better. On the 11th, it had lost its appetite, become emaci-
ated and showed general weakness and loss of muscular power. On
the following day at noon it was found dead, without having shown
any marked symptoms other than general depression of the muscular
system.

The heart was found greatly distended on the right side, Inngs
normal and the liver small and congested, especially near the lower
edges of the left lobe. Kidneys were also small and congested. The
bladder contained quite a little urine, with considerable albumin and
sug^ar in it.

Ex2yeriment III.

This experiment was practically a duplicate of the preceding. An
albino buck was used and the uranium salt was forced down the
throat in gelatin capsules, as in the preceding experiments. The
table shows tlie amount of nitrate given and the character of the
urine each day.

Date.

Volume.

Reaction.

Sp. Gr.

Albumin.

Sugar.

Dose of iiranyl nitrate.

May
25

26

c. c.
171

alkaline,
acid.

1014

gram.
0

trace.

gram.
0

0

gram.

0-025

\ 0-050

/ 0-025

27 1

28 f

29 1

30 f

31

no urin

e passed.

] 0-050

75

alkaline.

1026

0-494

0.275

i 0-050
\ 0-050
j 0-050
I 0-025

no urin

e passed.

0-300 gram.

The first symptom noticeable was the suppression of urine for over
forty-eight hours. On the 2Vth, the animal was quite dull and showed
signs of general weakness. As he walked, he moved as if it caused
him pain in the lumbar region. On the next day he showed great
thirst, and he finally died on June 1st, a loose diarrhcea setting in a
few hours before death.

Post-mortem examination showed that the heart had stopped in
diastole, and that it was much distended with blood. Lungs were
normal. The liver was congested, as were also the kidneys. The
latter had non-adherent capsules. The stomach contained consider-
able undigested food, and its mucous membrane was partly disinte-
grated. Portions of the duodenum were somewhat congested. The

Physiological Action of Tlranium Salts. ' 11

bladder contained a few cubic centimeters of urine, which had in it
considerable sugar and some albumin.

The most noticeable feature of this experiment was the suppression
of urine.

Experiment IV.

In this experiment, a large white buck was used and the uranium
was administered in capsules as follows :

May 17

0-050 gram uranyl nitrate.

18

0-075 "

19

0-075 "

20

0-025 "

0-225

There were no symptoms of toxic action until the morning of the
20th. The rabbit was then dull and weak. He trembled violently
as he hopped about; the hind legs appeared j^artly paralyzed. The
pupils were dilated and the appetite gone. On the 21st, weakness
was still more pronounced. Any movement was accompanied by
tremblings and great difficulty was experienced while walking, in
making the dilferent movements correctly. There was severe diar-
rluea and the animal showed extreme emaciation. On the 22d, the
diarrhoea had passed into an involuntary defecation more or less
continuous. The animal was too weak to move and lay all the fore-
noon breathing heavily, though the number of respirations per minute
did not go much beyond normal, 45-54 per minute. On the afternoon
of this day, two days after the last dose of uranium had been admin-
istered, the animal appeared stronger, the involuntary defecations
had ceased, though a loose diarrhoea still continued, and the animal
appeared to have recovered the use of its locomotive muscles. On the
23d, however, the animal was again unable to move and finally died
at noon, the diarrhoea having continued more or less up to death.

During the last three days there was complete suppression of
urine, but on the 20th, 59 c. c. of urine were passed, of specific gravity
1022, and which contained 0-656 gram of sugar.

On post-mortem examination, the heart was found to have stopped
in diastole and engorged with blood. The lungs were congested.
The kidneys had non-adherent capsules and the cortex and medulla
showed severe congestion. The stomach contained no food, but con-
siderable tenacious mucus. The small intestines from duodenum to
caecum were very much congested.

12

Chittende7i and Lambert — Experiments on the

Experiment V.

Gray and white buck. This experiment was a repetition of No.
IV, the same amounts of uranium salt being given and at the same
intervals of time. The animal died three days after the last dose of
uranium had been administered. The symptoms were not very
marked, simply loss of muscular power, and a gradual wasting away.
On post mortem, the heart was found in diastole and engorged with
blood. Lungs congested. The liver was black with the blood in it,
especially on the edges, and when pressed between the fingers was
extremely pliable and of a soft, pulpy consistency, showing marked
parenchymatous degeneration. The gall bladder was distended with
very dark bile. Both kidneys had non-adherent capsules. The left
kidney was slightly congested. The intestines had an inflamed patch
in the jejunum and were congested for a foot above it. The bladder
contained a little urine, which gave reactions for both sugar and
albumin. Sugar and albumin were also found in the urine several
days before death.

Experiment VI.

In this experiment still smaller amounts of uranium were adminis-
tered, a total of only 0-175 gram being given in three days. The
foUowino; table shows the dosase and tlie chanoes in the urine :

Date.

Volume.

Reaction.

Sp. Gr.

Albumin. Sugar.

Dose of
iiraiiyl nitrate.

June

14

15

16

17

18

19/

20 f

21

22

c. c.

110

75
30

60
50

alkaline

1043

1027
1022

1015

gram.

0

0

0-104
0-337
0-126

0-154

some
trace

gram.
0
0

I

0

0

0
0

gram.

0-050
j 0-050
\ 0-025

0-050

0-175

There were no noticeable symptoms of toxic action aside from the
changes in the urine, and even here there was no sugar at any time
present. Just as the albumin had almost disappeared from the urine
and we looked for speedy recovery, the animal Avas found dead (on
the 23d). Post-mortem showed the heart in diastole, engorged with
blood. Lungs normal. Liver normal, aside from a slight congestion.

Physiological Action of Tlraniimi Salts. 1 3

Sections under the microscope showed no pathological changes. The
kidneys were congested. Under the microscope, the epithelial cells
were proliferated and occasionally the tufts wei-e seen slightly com-
pressed by these proliferating cells and detritus. The convoluted
tubules showed swollen and granular cells, even broken down, in
places. In the straight tubules, the cells were also swollen and gran-
iilar and sometimes were detached from the tubes. In places, there
was cast matter and detritus in the tubes. The stroma was normal.
Hence, here, as in many of the preceding experiments, it is a case of
acute parenchymatous nephritis. The stomach was full of undi-
gested food and apparently normal ; the duodenum was congested
and the small intestines throughout were nearly empty, except for a
little mucus. The bladder had in it about 10 c. c. of urine, which
contained a trace of albumin but no sugar.

Experiment VII.

An albino rabbit. A single dose of 0*3 gram of uranyl nitrate
was given in a gelatin capsule by mouth on June 13th. Outside of
changes in the urine there were no symptoms whatever until the 17th,
when in the early morning the animal was found weak and power-
less, all motor power coinpletely gone. It rapidly grew weaker and
died in the afternoon of the same day.

The right side of the heart was found much distended. The lungs
were normal, the liver small and congested. Kidneys were also
small and congested and of a cloudy appearance. Microscopic exam-
ination showed acute parenchymatous nephritis. Stomach was full
of undigested food, but the intestines were empty. Both appeared
normal.

On June loth, 160 c. c. of alkaline urine were passed, of specific
gravity 1023. It contained 0-748 gram of albumin and 1-069 grams
of sugar. On the 16th, 30 c. c. were passed of 1022 specific gravity
and containing 0-412 gram of albumin and 0-354 gram of sugar.
On the 17th, no urine was passed and on making the post mortem the
bladder was found empty.

With this rabbit, an attempt was made to ascertain how much
carbohydrate matter there was in the liver at the time of death.
40 grams of the sampled and finely ground liver were thoroughly
extracted Avith boiling water (continuous extraction for three days),
frequently replaced. The several decoctions were ultimately united
and finally brought to a volume of 500 c. c. Two portions of 200 c. c.
each were placed in suitable flasks and suflicient hydrochloric acid

14 Chittenden and Lambert — Experiments on the

added to each, to make the fluid contain 2 per cent. HCl. The acid
fluids were then heated on water-baths for 15 hours, in order to con-
vert all carbohydrate matter into dextrose. The fluids were then
neutralized, evaporated and finally tested for dextrose with Feh-
ling's solution, by Allihn's gravimetric method. Both solutions failed
to give any reducing action whatever, thus showing a total lack of
carbohydrate matter in the liver. This is in strong contrast to the
normal condition of a rabbit's liver, which contains an abundance of
carbohydrate matter, both sugar and glycogen; on an average 10"35
per cent, of total carbohydrates, as determined by methods similar
to the one just described.* Glycogenic function is then destroyed by
uranium, the same as in phosphorus poisoning, but unlike the action
of phosphorus there is apparently no fatty degeneration of the organs.

The liver here experimented with was small for the size of the rab-
bit, a large white buck. It was also noticeable, as in many of the
other rabbits experimented on, that while the stomach was full of
food, sometimes even distended by it, there was nothing at all in the
intestines below the pylorus until the ca3cum was reached, which was
again lull, and the intestines below were either almost free fi'om
faeces or else contained only the pin-head variety. The food in the
stomach was wholly undigested. As has been already pointed out, a
small ])ercentage of a soluble uranium salt is sufficient to completely
stop gastric and pancreatic digestion. This being the case it is quite
probable that the emaciation, etc., so noticeable in uranium poison-
ing, is the direct result of the action of the salt on the digestive func-
tions. Nothing being digested there would be no matter for absorp-
tion, and hence no sugar-forming material for the liver. All the
carbohydrate matter stored up would in a little time be completely
consumed and as the portal blood could bring no new nutritive mat-
ter, the liver would naturally diminish in size and the animal become
emaciated and eveniually die from that cause alone, even if the uran-
ium gave no other direct cause of death. In this connection we also
need to recall the general increased metabolism of both nitrogenous
and non-nitrogenous matter, under the influence of uranium.

The uranium salt may also act specifically on the liver cells, afiect-
ing their metabolic power, preventing any storage of carbohydrate
matter or moi'e probably causing a degeneration of the cells, by
which they may be led to give up to the blood in abnormal abund-
ance all the carbohydrate matter previously stored up. This possible

* Post-mortem formation of sugar in the liver. Studies from Laboratory of Physio-
logical Chemistry, Yale Uuiversity, vol. I, p. 171.

Physiological Action of ZTranium Salts. 15

sjiecific action of the poison on the liver cells would in a measure ex-
plain the temporary glycosuria, which appears and then disappears so
frequently in uranium poisoning. Further, by a combination of this
specific action with the non-absorption of nutritive matter through
retarded digestion, it would be easy to explain the alternate appear-
ance, disappearance and re-appearance, of sugar in the urine in these
cases. Where the symptoms run their course wnth a fair degree of
rapidity, as in continued dosing with uranium, sugar appears in the
urine for a few days and then disappears, although the amount of
uranium administered may be steadily increased. In fact, the in-
creased dose of uranium is doubtless the cause of the further non-
appearance of the sugar, since the stored up carbohydrate material
having been wholly used up, and at the same time digestion and ab-
sorption being prevented, there is no more carbohydrate-producing
material available, either directly or indirectly. On the other hand,
if, after the sugar at first present has disappeared from the urine,
there comes an interval of a day or so when uranium is not adminis-
tered and digestion again starts up, then the specific action may
again come into play and a temporary glycosuria again result. This
condition was noticed in experiment No. II.

In some of the experiments, there seems to have been a visible
change in the hepatic cells, as in the experiment next to be described,
where under the microscope the cell bodies appeared as if collected
into small granules or even broken down. Again, in some experi-
ments, as in No. V, there was a noticeable pulpy degeneration of the
liver cells.

Experiment VIII.

In this experiment, the uranium salt was introduced by hypodermic
injection. 0'23 gram of uranyl nitrate in a little water was injected
beneath the skin of the leg of a good-sized rabbit, on June 20th at 4.0
p. M. Two days after he showed marked weakness, although his
appetite remained good. On the following day he appeared quite
dormant and could be roused only with difficulty ' power of motion
seemed to be nearly gone. He died the next day at noon. On June
21st, the day following the administration of the uranium, 60 c.c. of
alkaline urine were passed containing 0"234 gram of albumin and
0*660 gram of sugar. After this, there was complete suppression of
urine till death.

Post-mortem. — Heart had stopped in diastole ; lungs nornial. The
liver was mottled and congested slightly in areas. Under the micro-

1 6 Chittenden Mid Lambert — Experhnents on the

scope, sections showed the cell bodies strongly granulated, with their
outlines mostly clear, but in places broken down.

There was also an infiltration of pus cells around the blood vessels.
The kidneys were normal in size and appearance, with non-adherent
capsules. Under the microscope, however, all the conditions charac-
teristic of acute parenchymatous nephritis were to be seen. The
epithelial cells of the malpighian tufts were proliferated, so much so
as to compress the vessels. Both convoluted and straiglit tubules
had their cells swollen, granular and broken down. The stroma was
normal. Some adipose tissue in the pelvis of the kidney was infil-
trated with pus cells. There was also considerable detritus between
the papillae. The bladder was empty and contracted. In the abdom-
inal cavity there was about 30 c.c. of a coaguiable, clear fluid. The
stomach was full of food, the intestines empty. No foeces in colon
and rectum. No signs of congestion in the alimentary tract, except
in the rectum, where there were red blotches which proved to be the
beginning of inflammation and infiltration of pus cells. The animal
appeared to have died from suppression of urine.

Experiment IX.

In this experiment, one large dose of uranium (TO gram of the
nitrate) was given by mouth on June 27th, at 4.30 p. m. On July 5th.
the animal was still alive, but weak and emaciated. There were no
symptoms other than those already described. Owing to lack of
time we were not able to continue the experiment, but wishing to see
any changes which might have occurred in the organs the animal was
chloroformed and a post mortem made. On June 28th, the urine
passed contained some albumin, but no sugar; on July 1st, considera-
ble albumin, but still no sugar.

The liver was found to be small but not congested. The cell sub-
stance, as seen iinder the microscope, was collected into small gran-
ules. Nuclei and nucleoli were quite distinct. Kidneys had non-
adherent capsules, but they were congested and the cortex looked
striated. Under the microscoi^e, the epithelial cells of the glomeruli
were seen to be swollen and proliferated. In the convoluted tubes,
the cells were slightly swollen and granular and occasionally broken
down. The straight tubes were also broken down in places and con-
tained cast matter. The stroma was normal. Stomach was filled
with food, while the intestines were entirely empty. Peyer's patches
were swollen and infiltrated with pus cells. The cgecum was par-
tially filled witli matter and the end of it looked honey-combed. It

Physiological Action of Uranium Salts. 17

proved to be slightly inflamed, and with cells infiltrated into it more
or less. Colon and rectum were empty.

From these results, collectively, it is to be seen that uranium is an
irritant poison and, like other metallic irritants, produces gastro-intes-
tinal irritation of more or less intensity, as shown by the acute diar-
rhoea and other symptoms met with in this lorm of poisoning. In
the majority of cases, the action of the uranium salt on the intestines
results in a simple enteritis, but this is liable to pass eventually into
acute catarrhal inflammation.

As ordinarily administered, it is not in any sense a rapid poison;
the ingestion of a fatal dose of a uranium salt is not followed by any
noticeable effects for some time. The action of a small amount (150
milligrams) is apparently as rapid and pronounced as that of large
quantities (I gram). The first noticeable symptom in rabbits is gen-
eral weakness, lack of motor power, loss of coordination and occa-
sional temporary paralysis of the locomotor muscles. Introduced
into the stomach in suflicient amounts, it checks digestion and even
stops it altogether. On the other hand, it appears to increase some-
what proteid metabolism and also to increase the elimination of car-
bonic acid and raise the body temperature. Hence, it is to be consid-
ered as having a direct action on nutrition, the disturbance of which
is also plainly indicated by the rapid emaciation which follows the
administration of uranium.

Its most marked lesions are its destructive action on the kidneys,
and its destruction of the kidney tissue itself. It causes here an acute
parenchymatous nephritis of the same kind as found in arsenic, mer.
cury, and phosphorus poisoning. Further, the quantity of albumin
found in the urine shows plainly how greatly the blood vessels are
involved in the inflammation. The albuminuria produced is severe and
constant, and when the uranium is given in a single large dose, as in ex-
periment No. IX, or in a small dose by hypodermic injection, as in ex-
periment No. VIII, then albumin may appear in the urine within 24
hours. The uranium must have some specifically destructive action on
the kidney epithelium cells, causing them to swell and break down. At
first, with small doses of uranium, the urine is decidedly increased in
volume, but later on, when toxic action is more pronounced, there may
be a partial or even complete suppression of the urine. This latter
condition is naturally more quickly produced by large doses of ura-
nium. In several cases, suppression of urine would seem to have been
the cause of death. The urine, too, in a short time after the admin-
Traxs. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 3 Nov., 1888.

18 Chittenden and Lamhert — Experhnents on TJraniuiin.

istration of uranium contains more or less sugar; as a rule the sugar
does not make its appearance until after the albumin. Salkowski has
shown that mercury will also cause diabetes in rabbits, but it is
questionable whether it is as constant a symptom as in uranium pois-
oning. It is also stated that in phosphorus poisoning the urine some-
times contains sugar.* In the hypodermic injection of uranium, ex-
periment No. VIII, sugar appeared in the rabbit's urine within 24
hours. The production of glycosuria is a very characteristic symptom
in uranium poisoning. The urine also contains invariably a large
amount of crystallized calcium oxalate, which would also point to de-
cided malnutrition and help explain the marked emaciation so com-
monly seen.

In those cases where the poisoning becomes in a measure chronic,
the nervous symptoms sometimes predominate, as shown in loss of
sight and power of coordination.

* H. C. Wood. Therapeutics, p. 110.

II. — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies. By R. H. Chittenden
AND Horace S. Hart, B.A., Ph.B.

Elastin, the basis of the so-called elastic tissue, has generally been
considered one of the most indigestible of the albuminoid substances.
In fact, the older writers looked on it as almost insoluble in the
digestive juices. Recently, however, the experiments of Etzinger,*
Horbaczewskijf and Morochowetz,J have shown that both the ligamen-
turn nucliOi of the ox when finely divided, and purified elastin when
powdered, are fairly soluble both in pepsin-hydrochloric acid and in
natural gastric juice, as Horbaczewski's observations on a man with
stomach fistula have fully indicated.

It has been our object, therefore, to study somewhat in detail the
primary cleavage products of elastin, so far as they may be formed?
making use of the methods§ which have yielded such fruitful results
with many of the proteid bodies.

Preparation of Elastin.

As usually described, elastin is a body free from sulphur, insoluble
in water even after several days boiling, likewise in cold dilute alkali,
acetic acid, dilute hydrochloric acid, alcohol, and ether. Naturally,
therefore, the method of preparing such an insoluble body has con-
sisted in removing from a tissue rich in elastin, all extraneous sub-
stances by successive treatment with the above-mentioned reagents.
In fact, so vigorous is the method of treatment, as usually described,
that it appears almost questionable whether a body belonging to a
group noted for ease of decomposition might not sufi'er some change
in such a long process of preparation.

We have employed two methods, the first one of which is practi-
cally identical with that followed by Horbaczewski. The neck bands
of a number of recently killed oxen were thoroughly freed from all
adhering fat and muscle and then chopped quite fine ; they weighed

* Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, Band x, p. 84.

f Ueber das Verhalteu des elastins bei der Pepsinverdauung, Zeitschrift fiir physiol-
ogische chemie, Band vi, p. 330.

\ Verdauiingsgesetze, Abstract in Jahresbericht fiir Thierchemie, 1886, p. 271.

§ Kiihiie and Chittenden, Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, Band xx, xxii; also Studies from
Laboratory of Physiological Chem. Yale University, vol. ii.

20 Chitten(le7i and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies.

2400 grams. The mass was boiled for four days in water frequently
changed, after which it was soaked for 45 hours in 8 litres of 1 per
cent, potassium hydroxide, and then boiled with the solution for 4
hours. The tissue was freed from alkali by thorough washing with
water, and was then boiled with water, frequently changed, for 16
hours. The potassium hydroxide solution on neutralization, gave a
heavy precipitate slightly soluble in excess of 0-4 per cent, hydro-
chloric acid, easily soluble in strong acid. The addition of acid in
excess caused a strong odor of hydrogen sulphide to be given off.

After boiling the tissue a second time with water, it was placed in 8
litres of 10 per cent, acetic acid and warmed for an hour and a half,
after which it was allowed to stand in the cold for 16 hours. It was
then boiled for 4 hours in the same acetic acid solution, and after-
wards washed thoroughly with water. The tissue was then placed
in 10 litres of 5 per cent, hydrochloric acid and allowed to soak for
some time in the cold, after which it was washed in running water
and macerated in water, frequently changed, for 24 hours to take out
all traces of the acid. After this treatment, the tissue was boiled
with successive portions of water for about 45 hours, when it was
placed in a large volume of 95 per cent, alcohol and allowed to re-
main for several days. It was afterwards boiled in alcohol for about
15 hours and then placed in an excess of ether, after which it was ex-
tracted with warm ether for two days.

Analysis of Elastin A.

Sub-
stance
used,
gram.

H2O
fouud.
gram.

H

N found.

N

Ash
found,
gram.

No.

CO... 0
found. d
gram.

c. c.

T.

°C.

Pres-
sure,
mm.

Ash

%

I

11

III

IV

V

VI

0-4250
0-3398
0-5454
0-4440
0-5125
0-2971

0-2745
0-2213

7-17
7-23

0-8381
0-6697

53-77
53-74

72-7
59-8
69-4

8-6
9-0
9-4

771-5
771-2
767-1

16-47
16-59
16-59

0-0027

....
0-9

Percentage composition of ash-free substance .

C
H

N
O

54-26
7-24

54-22
7-30

16-74

16-76

16-62

Average.

54- 24

7-^7

16-70

21-79

100-00

Gldttenden and Hart — E last In and the Elastose Sadies. 21

The tissue on being freed from water was hard, tough, and difficult
to powder. It was finally ground to a coarse powder and then re-
extracted with warm ether, until the ether on evaporation left no
appreciable residue. This took some time, for, as previously pointed
out by Horbaczewski, there apparently remains in the tissue a small
amount of fat-like matter, which dissolves very slowly in ether and
which can be completely extracted only by first grinding the purified
tissue as fine as possible. The elastin prepared in this manner we
have termed for convenience Elastin A.

A portion of the preparation dried at 110° C. gave on analysis the
results contained in the accompanying table. The methods of
analysis were the same as those previously described in former
articles on the proteoses.* By fusion with potassium hydroxide and
potassium nitrate, according to the method recommended by Ham-
marsten,f no sulphur could be found. Elastic tissue, however,
unquestionably contains sulphur, but whether it exists there as a
constituent part of the elastin molecule, or loosely united as in kera-
tin, or as a constituent of some adhering j^roteid or other substance,
it is difiicult to say. Certainly, the boiling of elastic tissue with 1
per cent, potassium hydroxide for several hours might reasonably be
expected to remove a part at least of any sulphur which might be
present, and if by this process sulphur is removed from the tissue
might it not as probably come from the elastin, as from any other
proteid substance? Treatment with acid, of the alkaline solution
obtained in the preparation of A, plainly showed the presence of
hydrogen sulphide and we therefore decided in the preparation of the
second portion of elastin to omit the treatment with alkali. Accord-
ingly, 1700 grams of carefully cleaned neck bands from oxen were
treated in the same manner as in A, except that the alkali was
omitted, and in its place, treatment of the tissue with both acetic and
hydrochloric acid was repeated twice. In subjecting elastin to the
action of 5 per cent, hydrochloric acid care must be taken, before
boiling the washed tissue with water, to see that every trace of acid
is removed, otherwise the faintly acid water formed will at 100° C.
give rise to a partial decomposition of the elastin.

After thorough extraction of the powdered elastin with ether, a
portion dried at 110° C. gave by analysis the results shown in the
following table, Elastin B.

* See Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, Band xx, p. 11, and Amer. Chem. Jour., vol. vl, p. 3.
f Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, Band ix, p. 298.

22 Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies.

Analysis op Elastin B.

Sub-
stance
used,
gram.

H,0

found,
gram.

H

%

C0.2

found,
gram.

C

%

N found.

N
%

BaS04 after

fusion with

KOH + KNO3

gram.

Ash
found,
gram.

No.

c, c.

T.

Pres-
sure,
mm.

S

Ash

fo

I

0-5833
0-4374
0-3836

0-3744
0-2851

7-13 1-1531

53-90

----

....

----

II

7-24 0-8653 53-94

III

54-1

11-0

754-8

16-91

IV

0-4821

66-8

11-7

760-4

16-69

V

0-9095

0-0170

0-25

VI

0-7854

0-0208

0-36

VII

0-4235

0'0015

0-35

VIII

0-4583

---

0-0013

0-28

Percentage composition of ash-free substance .

c

54-06

54-10

H

7-15

7-26

N
S
0

----

■---

16-96

16-75

0-34

0-39

Average.
54-08

7-20
16-85

0-30
21-57

100-00

Comparison of the two products shows a fairly close agreement in
composition. In B, however, the carbon is slightly lower and the
nitrogen a trifle higher than in A. Further, Elastin B contains 0-3
per cent, of sulphur, as determined by the modified Liebig's process.*
Miiller originally reported elastin, purified, however, by the use of an
alkali, as containing 0-08 per cent, of sulphur, but this he considered
merely as an imj^urity.

Morochowetz, who appears to have made a hydration product of
elastin by the simple action of heat and water, states that it contains
0-617 per cent, of sulphur, but the details of his process we do not
know.f If the figures are correct, his elastin must have probably con-
tained double the percentage of sulphur present in elastin B-
Whether pure elastin does contain sulphur, or whether the 0-3 per
cent, present in i^reparation B is simply a constituent of some adhering
proteid, removable by alkali, we are not at present prepared to say,
but deem it probable that elastin does contain a small amount of
sulphur.

■ See studies from Laboratory of Physiological Chemistry, Yale University, vol. ii, p.

163.

\ We have seen only an abstract in Jahresberieht fiir Thierchemie fiir 1886, p. 271.

Chittenden and Hart — Elastm and the Elastose Bodies. 23

Elastin A., prepared by the usual process, shows a close agreement
in composition with Horbaczewski's product, but is quite different
from the product obtained by Miiller and Tilanus, as seen from the
following table.

Elastin A. Horhaczeivski. Miiller* Tilanus*

C 54-24 54-32 55-09-55-72 54-90-55-65

H 7-27 6-99 7-11-7-67 7-25-7-41

N 16-70 16-75 15-71-16-52 17-52-17-74

The liigher content of carbon in the preparations of Miiller and
Tilanus are doubtless due to the presence of more or less fat, not
completely extracted by ether.

Decomposition of Elastin by acid loater at 100" C.

On heating moist elastin with water containing a trace of hydro-
chloric acid, for some hours at or near 100° C. it soon commences to
swell, and after a time becomes converted into a semi-gelatinous
mass, a portion of which, as the boiling continues, becomes soluble and
passes into the acid fluid. The liquid gives no reaction with tannic
acid for gelatin, but does give a strong biuret reaction and yields a
heavy turbidity when excess of strong potassium hydroxide is added
to the solution. Evidently, under these conditions, some soluble
cleavage product or products are formed, percipitable by excess of
caustic alkali.

These products we prepared in quantity by taking a portion of elas-
tin ^, soaking it for some time in 5 per cent, hydrochloric acid, until
the softened elastin was thoroughly impregnated with the acid, then
washing out the excess of acid by soaking it for 20 hours in a laro-e
volume of water. The elastin, still quite strongly acid to test papers,
was then boiled in water for about 10 hours, when the acid liquid
was strained off from the gelatinous elastin. The boiling was then
continued with a fresh volume of water, the gelatinous mass still
containing sufficient acid to render the whole fluid distinctly acid
to test papers. Tnis process was repeated until the elastin had
been heated for 45 hours with water gradually containing less
and less acid, until finally the elastin remaining had entirely lost
its former gelatinous appearance and taken on its original look.
All of the acid fluids were united and concentrated somewhat,

* Gorup-Besanez, Physiologische Cliemie, Dritte Auflage, p. 148

24 Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies.

then neutralized with sodium carbonate. No neutralization pre-
cipitate was observed. By further evaporation of the neutral fluid
on a water-bath, a gummy mass separated on the bottom of the
dish. It was quite tenacious, something like rubber, soluble in cold
water, biit not so readily in hot. The cold water solution of the
gummy mass, and the mother-liquor showed the following reactions:

1 . Heated in a test-tube, the sohition quickly became turbid, giving finally,
if concentrated, a sticky precipitate. The turbidity, however, immediately
disappeared as tlie fluid cooled, returning again when heat was applied
and disappearing wlien cold. When the solution was so concentrated as to
yield a heavy precipitate by heat, it naturally dissolved more slowly.

2. With chloroplatinic acid, a heavy yellow precipitate was formed,
readily soluble in alcohol.

3. Heated with acetic acid there was no change, but addition of potas-
sium ferrocyanide to the acid fluid caused a heavy precipitate.

4. Millon's reagent gave a strong reaction similar to the albumin reaction.
.5. Strong potassium hydroxide gave a fine flocculent precipitate, insoluble

in excess of the alkali.

6. Pure dilute nitric acid gave a heavy precipitate, only slowly soluble in
excess of the acid. Heated, it yielded a clear yellow fluid and with ammo-
nia gave the orange yellow color of the xanthoprotein reaction.

7. Pure dilute hydrochloric acid yielded a slight precipitate, soluble in
large excess.

8. Saturation of the sohition with ammonium sulphate gave a heavy,
gummy precij^itate.

The gummy mass and the original filtrate giving approximately
the same reactions, the solution of the former was united witii the
latter, the fluid made slightly acid with acetic acid and then satu-
rated in the cold with ammonium sulphate. The saturated fluid, on
bcino- boiled, gave a second gummy precipitate which was added to
the first.

From analogy with the reactions of the proteoses, ammonium sul-
phate should precipitate any elastose bodies formed, leaving in solu-
tion the true peptone. The precipitates formed in the manner de-
scribed were washed by being rubbed up in a mortar with hot satu-
rated ammonium sulphate solution, and the washings added to the
filtrate. A portion of the ammonium sulphate was then removed
from the solution by concentration and crystallization, and the re-
mainder by dialysis in running water. On testing the solution
for peptone, however, none could be found; the biuret test failed to
give any reaction, as did also phosphotungstic acid.

Chittenden and Hart — Elastiu and the Elastose Bodies. 25

Protoelastose.

The ammonium sulphate precipitate of elastoses, after being washed
as described above, was dissolved in water, the solution made quite
neutral by addition of a little sodium carbonate and then saturated
with crystals of rock salt. A heavy gummy precipitate resulted,
which by analogy should consist of what we may call protoelastose.

This precipitate, after being washed with saturated salt solution,
was dissolved in water and reprecipitated by salt, this process being
repeated three times. The final sodium chloride precipitate was dis-
solved in water, dialyzed until all chlorine was removed from
the solution, concentrated and precipitated with 95 per cent, alcohol.
Apparently, only a portion of the substance was precipitated by
alcohol, so the alcoholic filtrate was evaporated and the residue care-
fully dried. Further examination, however, showed that both pro-
ducts were identical, alcohol simply precij^itating a portion of the
substance.

After being dried at 110° C. until of constant weight, having then
the form of a brown powder, both ])roducts were analyzed Avith th^
results shown in the accompanying tables.

Analysis of Protoelastose (A1) Precipitated by Alcohol.

Sub-
stance

used,
gram .'

0-6852

H..0
found .
gram.

PI

%

6-92

CO.
foimd.
gram.

C

r/

N found.

N

Ash
found,
gram.

No.

c. c.

T.

°0.

Pres-
sure,
ram.

Ash
%

I

0-4271

1-3190

52-49

II

0-3926

0-2437

6-89

0-7526

52-27

....

III

0-5400

.- - .

72-9

13-7

759-4

16-13

IV

0-3883

51-9

15-4

762-9

15-95

..

V

0-7048

0-0259

3-67

VI

0-5362

----

----

----

----

....

....

0-0202

3-76

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

c

54-51

54-28

H

7-19

7-16

N

0

16-75

16-56

Average.

54-39

7-17

16-65

21-79

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vul. VIII.

100-00

Nov., 1888.

26 Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies.

Analysis of Protoelastose (Ai) from the Alcoholic Filtrate.

Sub-

HoO

CO.

N found.

Ash

No.

stance

found.

H

found.

C

Pres-

N

found.

Ash

used.

gram.

%

gram.

%

c. c.

T.

°C.

sure.

%

gram.

%

gram.

mm.

I

0-4936

0-3113

7-00

0-9626

53-18

II

0-4096

0-2592

7-03

0-8079

53-78

....

III

0-4588

... -

63-2

13-4

759-8

16-49

IV

0-4367

....

62-5

21-6

760-8

17-06

V

0-3655

0-0054

1-47

VI

0-5096

....

...

....

....

.....

0-0075

1-47

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

c

53-96

54-58

H

7-11

7-13

N

O

16-73

17-31

Average.

7-12
17-02
21-59

100-00

The reactions of the two preparations were identical and were as
follows; both were readily soluble in cold water, but only slightly
soluble in hot water; in neutral solution, heat produced a turbidity
which disa^ipeared on cooling; the concentrated mineral acids gave
precipitates soluble in excess ; phosphotungstic acid, picric acid, tan-
nic acid, 30 per cent, acetic acid saturated wnth salt, acetic acid and
potassium ferrocyanide, and alcohol all produced precipitates; mer-
curic chloride and mercuric nitrate gave precipitates insoluble in
excess ; lead acetate and cupric sulphate both failed to give any
precipitate ; potassium mercuric iodide produced a precipitate in a
hydrochloric acid solution ; sodium carbonate and sodium hydroxide
gave heavy precipitates and both the biuret and xanthoprotein test
gave positive results. Further, the elastose is but slightly, if at all,
diffusible. Long continued concentration of an aqueous solution
leads to a separation of more or less of the substance as a gummy
mass.

In composition, the protoelastose formed by action of the dilute
acid and heat is almost identical with that of elastin itself.

Morochowetz,* in a recent paper on the laws of digestion, states
that elastin by the action of heat and water passes into a new form,

*Loc. cit.

Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies. 21

elastose, which by further action passes into peptone. The elastose
is described as a body completely soluble in water, not jjrecipitable
by mineral or acetic acids, but its solution is rendered turbid by heat.
In its other reactions it resembles albumin. In composition, how-
ever, it differs decidedly from elastin and equally from our protoelas-
tose. Morochowetz ascribes to it 55 '9 per cent, carbon, 7*29 per cent,
hydrogen, 16*68 per cent, nitrogen and 0*617 per cent, sulphur. As
to the method employed in its preparation and purification we do
not know, but as described it evidently is not akin to pure elastose.

Deiiferoelastose.

In the salt-saturated filtrate from the first sodium chloride precipi-
tate of protoelastose, there was present a substance precipitable as a
gummy mass, by the addition of a little 30 per cent, acetic acid sat-
urated with salt. Past experience with other proteoses has shown
that, as a rule, all of the proto body is not precipitated by saturation
of its neutral solution with salt, but that there usually remains a certain
amount which on addition of salt-saturated acetic acid is precipitated,
together with more or less of the deutero body, and that from this
filtrate pure deutero can be separated by saturation with ammonium
sulphate. In the present instance, however, it appeared that the
acetic acid precipitate was of quite a different nature from the sodium
chloride precipitate and that if it was not pure deuteroelastose, it at
least contained only a ti-ace of the proto body. Further, saturation
of the acetic acid filtrate with ammonium sulphate gave only a slight
precipitate, even when the mixture was heated, showing that if the
salt-saturated acetic acid had not precipitated the deuteroelastose,
little could have been formed.

The gummy precipitate separated by acetic acid and salt was
purified somewhat by solution in water, and reprecipitation by satura-
tion with salt and addition of a little salt-saturated acetic acid. It
was then dissolved in water, made exactly neutral to test papers, and
dialyzed until all chlorine was removed from the solution. The
filtered fluid was then evaporated to dryness on a water-bath, and the
powdered residue dried at 110" C. until of constant weight.

The composition of the substance is shown in the accompanying
table, from which it is seen that the deutero body contains a notice-
ably smaller percentage of carbon than protoelastose, and a corres-
pondingly higher content of oxygen. The difference between the
sodium chloride precipitate and the acetic acid precipitate, however,
becomes far more marked when the reactions of the two bodies are

28 Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies.

compared. Deuteroelastose was readily soluble both in cold and hot
water, and on heating a cold saturated solution only a slight turbidity
was seen which, as in the proto reaction, disappeared when the solu-
tion cooled. This turbidity was no doubt due to the presence of a
small amount of protoelastose, for later on we obtained a purer deu-
tero body having nearly all of the reactions of the present preparation
in which, however, the heat reaction was absent.

Analysis of Deuteroelastose. A 1.

Sub-
stance
used.
gram.

N found.

Hi,0
found,
griim.

CO2
found,
gram.

C

N
t

Ash
found,
gram.

No.

c. c.

T.

Pres-
sure
mm.

Ash

%

I

0-5164

0-9894

52-24

II

0-4003

0-2499

6-93

0-7708

52-51

.. .

III

0-4648

0-2924

6-98

0-8885

52-12

IV

0-4278

0-2704

7-02

0-8149

51-94

V

0-3624

.

49-8

13-8

759-8

16-43

VI

0-4818

65-8

13-9

759-3

16-30

VII

0-5370

0-0105

1-95

VIII

0-4371

----

----

....

....

....

....

....

0-0091

2-08

C

53-30

53-57

53-19

52-99

H

7-07

7-13

7-13

N

0

16-76

16-64

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

53-26

T12

16-70

22-92

100-00

The deutero body, likewise, gave no precipitate whatever with
the concentrated mineral acids, nor with acetic acid and potassium
ferrocyanide. Alcohol gave no precipitate and salt-saturated 30 per
cent, acetic acid, when added to an aqueous solution of the substance,
also gave no precipitate.

Ferric chloride gave a slight turbidity, but no precipitate. With
the other reactions of protoelastose, the deutero body showed close
agreement. Pure deuteroelastose, formed later on by the action of
pepsin -hydrochloric acid, gave no precipitate whatever with concen-
trated potassium hydroxide. This reaction, Avhich is quite character-
istic of protoelastose, was fairly distinct in the deutero body first
described, which fact, coupled with the turbidity produced by heat,
may be considered good evidence that the deuteroelastose was not
perfectly pure.

Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies. 29

Digestion of elastin by pepsin-hydrochloric acid.

An artificial gastric juice, free from both albumose and peptone,
was prejDared as follows ; the cardiac portions from the mucous mem-
branes of ten pigs' stomachs (820 grams) were placed in three litres
of 0*4 per cent, hydrochloric acid and warmed at 40° C. for two
weeks. The clear fluid filtered from the small residue of nuclein, an-
tialbumid, etc, was then saturated with ammoniiim sulphate to pre-
cipitate the pepsin. This was filtered ofi", washed with saturated
ammonium sulphate solution to remove any adherent peptone, dis-
solved in two litres of 0*2 per cent, hydrochloric acid and dialyzed
until the sulphate was entirely removed. The resultant solution
was mixed with an equal volume of 0*4 per cent, hydrochloric acid,
making a pure and active pepsin-acid mixture.

In the first digestion of elastin, 150 grams of powdered elastin A,
1500 c.c. of the pepsin-acid mixture, and an equal volume of 0-4 per
cent, hydrochloric acid, were warmed at 40° C. for 75 hours. At the
end of this time the elastin was almost entirely dissolved. The acid
fluid was filtered from the small residue remaining, and neutralized
with potassium hydroxide, without giving any neutralization precipi-
tate. The reactions of the fluid showed plainly the presence of elas-
toses similar to those formed by the action of acid. Saturation of
the fluid with ammonium sulphate gave a heavy gummy precipitate,
in the filtrate from which, nothing having the reactions of peptone
could be discovered.

Protoelastose.

The ammonium sulphate precipitate was dissolved in water and the
neutral fluid saturated with sodium chloride, by which a heavy gummy
precipitate was formed, having all of the reactions described as char-
acteristic of protoelastose. The product was purified by several re-
precipitations with salt, then dialyzed and the solution evaporated to
dryness on a water-bath, the residue powdered and dried at 110° C.
until of constant weight.

The composition of the substance (protoelastose A 2) is shown in
the accompanying table.

In reactions, the product agrees exactly with the protoelastose
already described, being precipitated by the concentrated miner'al
acids, by acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide, by 30 per cent,
acetic acid and sodium chloride, by strong potassium and sodium
hydroxide as well as by sodium carbonate. Its a<pieous solution,
likewise, shows tlu; peculiar action towards heat, already described ;

30 Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies.

becoming turbid when heated, clear again as the solution cools. The
product also gives the other reactions common to both proto- and
deuteroelastose.

Analysis of Protoelastose. A 2.

Sub-
stance

used,
gram.

found,
gram.

H

CO2
fouud.
gram.

C

N found.

N
%

Ash
found,
gram.

No.

c. c.

T.

Pres-
sure
mm.

Ash

%

I

II

III

IV

V

VI

0-4607
0-4952
0-5546
0-3109
0-4603
0-5303

0-2880
0-8079

6-94
6-90

0-9103
0-9763

53-88
53.76

76-2

45-8

13-9
21-0

759-4

754-8

16-41

17-06

0-0061
0-0073

1-32
1-37

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

c

54-58

54-46

H

7-03

6-99

N

0

16-64

17-29

Average.

7-01
16-96
21-51

100-00

This body, which we prefer to call protoelastose, is apparently iden-
tical in composition and reactions with the hemielastin previously de-
scribed by Horbaczewski,* and separated by him from a pepsin-acid
digestion of elastin, by a method somewhat similar to the one em-
ployed by us.

At first glance, it w'ould appear from Horbaczewski's method of
separation, that his hemielastin would consist of a mixture of proto-
and deuteroelastose, instead of being identical with the proto body.
But the fact that he strongly acidified his digestive mixture with
acetic acid, prior to saturating it with salt, explains the matter.
Deuteroelastose, which is precipitable from a salt-saturated solution
by a little acetic acid, is more or less soluble when excess of the acid
is added, and hence by acidifying the mixture sufficiently, the deutero
might remain dissolved while the proto would be precipitated by
salt from an acid solution, equally as well as from a neutral fluid,

* Ueber das Verhalten des Elastins bei der Pepsinverdanung. Zeitschrift fiir
physiologische Ghemie, Band vi, p. 3,30.

Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies. 31

Deuteroelastose.

In the salt-saturated filtrates from protoelastose, deutero was sepa-
rated as a gummy, sticky precipitate by addition of a little 30 per
cent, salt-saturated acetic acid. It was purified by reprecipitation
and dialysis, and the final neutral solution was evaporated to dryness
and the residue dried at 110° C. until of constant weight. The
amount was small and only the nitrogen was determined, 16-88 per
cent.

In reactions, the body closely resembled the deutero already de-
scribed ; its aqueous solution giving no precipitate or turbidity what-
ever on the application of heat, no precipitate with alcohol, or with
strong potassium hydroxide solution. It was likewise not precipi-
tated by acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide, by the concentrated
or dilute mineral acids, nor by 30 per cent, acetic acid. In reactions,
the body resembles the elastin peptone of Horbaczewski, like it being-
soluble in cold and warm water and dilute alcohol, and giving the
same precipitations with phosphotungstic acid, picric acid, tannic
acid, and with potassium mercuric iodide. It also gives the biuret
and xanthoprotein reaction. It dilfuses slowly.

With our present knowledge regarding peptones and proteoses,
this body can hardly be considered as belonging to the former class,
since it is precipitable both by ammonium sulphate, and by acetic
acid when added to a salt-saturated solution ; reactions not common
to true peptones.

A second digestion of elastin A was made with the same quantities
of pepsin-hydrochloric acid, and the same amount of powdered elastin,
as in the first digestion. The products formed were separated in the
same manner as the preceding, the elastoses l)eing first precipitated
collectively by saturation of the digestive fluid with ammonium sul-
phate.

On boiling the filtrate from this ammonium sulphate precipitate, a
second gummy mass separated. This was collected on a cloth filter
and washed with saturated ammonium sulphate solution. In the fil-
trate from this precipitate, no peptone could be detected. This
second ammonium sulphate precipitate was purified by dialysis, etc.,
and the final solution evaporated to dryness and the substance dried
at 110° C. Its composition is shown in the accompanying table,
from which it is seen to be nearly identical with that of protoelastose.
The reactions, however, indicate that it is a mixture of the two elas-
toses. Thus, while the concentrated mineral acids and potassium
hydroxide give no precipitate, acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide

32 Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies.

produce a noticeable turbidity, as does also alcohol, and acetic acid
and sodium chloride. Moreover, the aqueous solution becomes some-
what clouded on heating, clearing up again as the solution cools.
Hence, the reactions would indicate a preponderance of deuteroelas-
tose, while the composition points to an excess of the proto body.

Analysis of the Second Ammonium Sulphate Precipitate.

Sub-
stance
used,
gram.

H.,0
found,
gram.

CO.,
found,
gram.

C

N found.

N
%

Ash
found,
gram.

No.

c. c.

57-7
57-6

T.
° C.

14-2
22-6

Pres-
sure
mm.

758-0
753-9

Ash

I

II

III

IV

V

VI

0-4783
0-3781
0-4100
0-3963
0-4756
0-5016

0-3115
0-2433

7-23

7-14

0-9404
0-7405

53-61
53-40

16-76
16-72

0-0048
0-0054

1-00
1-07

c

H

N
O

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

54-14 53-93 5^-03

7-30 7-22 .... -... 7-26
16-92 16-89 lG-90

S2-S1

100-00

We must conclude, then, that this second gummy precipitate is sim-
ply a residue of the mixed elastoscs not at first precipitated, perhaps
from a lack of complete saturation with ammonium sulphate. Past
experience, however, has shown that deuteroproteose is not as quickly
or completely precipitated witli ammonium sulphate as the other
proteoses.

From the first ammonium sulphate precipitate, a large amount of
protoelastose (A 3) was separated, having all of the reactions charac-
teristic of this body, and the composition, when dried at 110° C,
shown in the accompanying table.

A larger amount of deuteroelastose was separated from this diges-
tion than in the preceding one, and after purification by the use of
methods already described, a portion was dried at 110° C. for analy-
sis. Its composition is shown in the accompanying table. Like the
deuteroelastose formed by dilute hydrochloric acid, it contains a
lower percentage of carbon than elastin or the proto body, while its
content of nitrogen is higher than that of elastin. Its reactions were
the same as the deutero previously obtained.

Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose bodies. 33

Denteroelastose appears to be the same as the elastin peptone of
Horbaczewski, as already mentioned ; and the composition of the
present product resembles it, in that it contains a similar percentage
of carbon, but is unlike it in containing one per cent, more nitrogen.

Analysis op Protoelastose. A 3.

No

Sub-
stance

used,
gram.

H2O
found,
gram.

H

%

CO2
found,
gram.

I

0

% c. c.

vT foun

T.
° C.

d.

Pres-
sure
mm.

X

16-99
16-89

Ash
found,
gram.

Ash

I

II

III

IV

V

VI

0-2990
0-4383
0-3938
0-3233
0-5562
0-4866

0-1906
0-2750

7-07
6-97

0-5841
0-8606

53-27
53-54

57-1

47-1

19-8
21-6

760-8

757-2

0-0081
0-0079

1-45
1-62

Percentage coviposition of ash-free substance.

c

54-08

54-37

H

7-19

7-08

N

0

17-26

17-16

100-00

Analysis of Deuteroelastose. A 3.

No.

Sub-
stance

used,
gram.

H,0
found,
gram.

H

%

CO2
found,
gram.

C

%

1
c. c.

'? foun

T.
° C.

d.

Pres-
sure
mm.

N

Ash
found
gram.

Ash

I

II

III

IV

V

VI

VII

0-5067
0-6021
0-4550
0-6886
0-3570
0-6638
0-7748

0-3125
0-3752
0-2705

6-85
6-92
6-60

0-9681

1-1587

0-8685

52-10
52-47
52-05

96-3
51-4

13-8
22-4

759-4

754-0

16-70
16-58

0-0201
0-0247

3-02
2-91

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

c

53-68

54-07

53-63

H

XT

7-06

7-13

6-60

0

;;;;

;;;;

17-21

Average,

53-79

6'9'J

-31 17-26

21-96

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII.

100-00

Nov., U

34 Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Sodies.

Horbaczevv ski's elastin peptone is described as not giving a precipi-
tate with acetic acid and neutral salt. Deuteroelastose, likewise,
gives no precipitate with acetic acid and salt, except when the solu-
tion is saturated or nearly saturated with the salt.

Another preparation of deuteroelastose was separated from a
pepsin-hydrochloric acid digestion of elastin B. Its chemical com-
position is shown in the accompanying table, from which it is seen
to differ somewhat from deutero A, but like It has a lower content of
carbon than the proto body.

Analysis of Deuteroelastose B.

Sub-

H2O

CO2

N found.

Ash

I

No.

stance

found.

H

found.

C

' T.

C. C. 0 (.

Pres-

N

found.

Ash

used.

gram.

%

gram.

%

sure

%

gram.

%

gram.

0-3560

6-68

mm.

I

0-5919

1-0934

50-37

1

II

0-4201

0-3573

6-80

0-7796

50-60

III

0-4853

64-9 140

756-8

15-91

IV

0-4719

...

66-0 33-4

754-3

16-11

V

0-7960

0-0398

5-00

vt

0-5883

....

....

....

....

.... ....

....

....

0-0397

5-04

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

c

53-01

53-31

H

7-03

7-14

N

0

16-81

16-90

Average.

53-11

7-08

16-85

22-96

100-00

Digestion of dastin u'lth pancreatic juice.

A strong solution of pure trypsin was prepared, according to
Kiihne's method,* from 100 grams of dried ox pancreas and added to
150 grams of powdered elastin B in 2 litres of 0-5 per cent, sodium
carbonate. The mixture M'as warmed at 40° C. for four or five days,
a little thymol being added to prevent putrefaction. At the end of
this time, the elastin was nearly all dissolved and the filtered fluid
on being tested gave the ordinary elastose reactions. On saturation
of a portion of the neutralized fluid with ammonium sulphate, a
heavy gummy precipitate was obtained, and in the filtrate no trace
of peptone I'eaction could be found.

* Kiihoe and Chittenden, Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, Band xii, p. 196.

Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies. 35

The entire digestive fluid was therefore neutralized with dilute
hydrochloric acid (no neutralization precipitate), and the protoelas-
tose at ouce separated by saturation with sodium chloride. The
product was purified by repeated precipitation with salt, and after
dialysis, the resultant fluid was evaporated to dryness and the
residue dried at 110° C for analysis. The product contained con-
siderable ash (7'4 per cent.), consisting mainly of calcium phosphate
and sulphate, with some oxide of iron. Its composition, seen in the
accompanying table, is somewhat different from the protoelastose
formed by pepsin-hydrochloric acid, containing as it does a notice-
ably lower percentage of carbon. In its reactions, however, it
resembles closely the preceding preparations. It is readily soluble
in cold water and the solution when heated gives the characteristic
turbidity, which disappears as the solution cools. With acetic acid
and potassium ferrocyanide, it gives the usual precipitate and also
with the concentrated mineral acids, the latter dissolving in an
excess of the acid. Unlike the protoelastose previously described,
however, it gives with cupric sulphate a precipitate soluble in excess
of the copper salt, and with sodium hydroxide no precipitate. In
all other respects, its reactions resemble those of the proto body
formed in pepsin digestion.

Analysis of the SooroM Chloride Precipitate— Trypsin Digestion of B.

Sub-

Ho.O

OO2

N found.

Ash

No.

stance

found.

H

found.

C

T.

0 Q

Pres-

N

found.

Ash

used.

gram.

%

gram.

%

c. c.

sure

%

gram.

%

gram.

mm.

I

0-4455

0-2635

6-57

0-8045

49-24

....

II

0-4650

0-2696

6-44

0-8360

49-03

...

III

0-3765

. - - .

. - . -

49-7

16-0

765-4

15-77

....

IV

0-6754

87-3

15-1

765-4

15-49

... -

...

V

0-6473

0-0480

7-41

VI

0-8286

....

----

----

....

----

....

0-0610

7-36

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

c

53-15

52-95

H

7-09

6-95

0

17-02

16-74

Average.

53-05

7-02

16-88

SS-05

100-00

In the salt-saturated filtrate from protoelastose, the addition of
a little 30 per cent, acetic acid saturated with salt gave a second

36 Chittenden and Hart — Elastin and the Elastose Bodies.

gnramy precipitate which was dissolved in water, the solution neu-
tralized and dialyzed until all chlorine was removed. The solution,
on evaporation, left a brownish residue, which was powdered and
dried at 110° C. It was readily soluble in cold and hot water, its
solution showing no turbidity whatever when heated. It likewise
gave no precipitate with alcohol. Unlike the ordinary deutero-
elastose, it did give noticeable precipitates with the mineral acids,
soluble in excess, and also with acetic acid and potassium ferro-
cyanide. Lead acetate and cupric sulphate also gave precipitates,
soluble in excess of the metallic salt. Sodium or potassium hydrox-
ide failed to give any precipitate. In composition too, the product
showed an approach to protoelastose formed by j^epsin digestion,
but unfortunately it contained over 5 per cent, of ash, and hence the
quantitative results may perhaps be questionable.

Analysis of the precipitate produced by Salt-saturated Acetic
Acid— Trypsin Digestion of B.

Sub-

HoO

CO2

N found.

Ash

No.

stance

found.

H

found.

C

T.

° C

Pres-

N

found.

Ash

lised.

gram.

%

gram.

c. c.

sure

i

gram.

%

gram.

t

mm.

I

0-4120

0-2466

6-65

0-7780

51-49

....

....

....

...

II

0-3625

0-2185

6-69

0-6899

51-89

III 0-3431

45-6

14-7

756-5

15-81

IVi 0-3436

45-8

19-4

754-8

15-52

V

0-6973

-- - -

0-0370

5-30

VI

0-5663

----

----

----

----

----

....

----

----

0-0337

5-60

Preeentage composition of ash-free substance.

c

54-46

54-85

H

7-01

7-07

N

0

16-71

16-40

Average.

54-6.5

7-04

16-55

21-76

100-00

Of anything corresponding to heteroalbumose, we have found no
trace. Further, under the conditions of our experiments, no appre-
ciable amount of true peptone was formed in any of the digestions ;
at least, nothing approaching a peptone in reactions was to be found
in any of the digestive fluids, after saturation with ammonium sul-
phate. We propose, later, to attempt a study of the elastin peptone,

Chittenden and Hart—Elastin and the ElaMom Bodies. 37

Eh
O

Q
O
«

m
P
O

t— (

>

o

o
o

o

'A

o

Cd <B

1

0

H^

\ t~-

in

m

4ti

t-

cb

^

iC

s

0?

>

oa.

6

S c

CD

r-H C*

10

«

00

, »c

00

^

^•■3

0

0

00

0

CO

1

CS ^l^

CO

10

c-

S

; CO

*;-

C^

CU

_

_o

rt C/"-^ A-

so

50

0

1—1

CO

^^ § A.^

0

c«

05

GO

^

-^

t-

cb

' ^— (

T^

0

1—1

CJ

- — ^

,

'o

1—1

00

iO

50

W

CO

<D

.»■

0

'XI

05

0

o

2

CQ

10

t-

T-l

0?

lb

_o

03

OS

2
o
p

13
0

CD

0

OS

50

«5

0

CD

ro

t-

05

?*

CJ

05

a

P

<1

03

«b

1-1

o?

C7 ■

'm

p<

<+-(

O

t-

CO

1—1

C5

CO

a

^

oi

0^

o?

CO

10

o

•<

-#

^-

t-

' 1—1

1-H

■-3

0

10

' 01

o

<^

"3

1

1

^Ph

o W !z; Gc o

38 Chittenden and Hart — JElastin and the Elastose Bodies.

using for this purpose the elastoses just described as well as elastin
itself, and more vigorous digestive fluids, both peptic and tryptic.

In conclusion, then, we may say that elastin by the action of veiy
dilute acid at 100° C, and by the proteolytic action of pepsin-
hydrochloric acid, and of trypsin yields two primary cleavage pro-
ducts, which bear essentially the same relation to elastin that proto-
and deuteroalbumose do to albumin. Further, that protoelastose is
practically identical in reactions and composition with Horbaczew-
ski's hemielastin.

The close relationship in composition of all the bodies analyzed is
shown in the accompanying table. In considering these results, how-
ever, it is well to remember that the pancreatic preparations contain
an over large amount of ash, and hence the figures may not be
altogether trustworthy.

III. — The Imfluence of Urethax, Paraldehyde, Antipyrin,

AND ANTIFEBRl>f ON PROTEID METABOLISM. By R. H. ChIT-
TFNDEN.

I. The influence of urethan ; — from experiments made by N. P. Washburn,

Ph.B.

Ethyl-urethan, C0(NHJ0.C2H^, which has recently come into
use as a hypnotic, is claimed by R. v, Jaksch* to be a sleep-produc-
ing agent, free from the usual disagreeable after effects common to
most hypnotics. According to this observer, urethan does not ap-
pear to exert any poisonous action on the heart, nor to have any
depressing influence on the arterial system. Tt is further assumed
that the drag is without influence on digestion. Urethan acts
mainly on the brain, the peripheral nervous system being unaffected,
and according to v. Jaksch the hypnotic effect is always produced
when the drug is taken in doses of 1 gram.

Smaller doses (0'25-0*5 gram) are uncertain in their action.

In view of the somewhat peculiar action of urethan as a hypnotic,
we have undertaken to study the influence of the drug on the proteid
metabolism of the healthy organism, in order to compare its action
in this respect with that of other well known hypnotics.

Garnier,f alone, appears to have experimented in this direction.
He states that, in the case of a man, a dose of 6 grams of urethan was
followed by giddiness, etc., which condition, however, soon passed
away. In this experiment, the excretion of urea was appreciably in-
creased. In another experiment, the same observer found that a
dose of 2 grams of urethan was also followed by an increased excre-
tion of urea, in the case of a dog in a condition of hunger. A portion
of the urethan was appai-ently converted into urea and excreted as
such, but the greater part of the drug appeared in the urine unchanged.
Garnier further states that large, nearly fatal doses, of the drug check

* Abstract in Jahresbericht fiir Thierchemie, 1885, p. 70.

f Influence de I'urethane sur I'excretioQ des elements azotes de I'urine. Coiupt.
rend. soc. Biolog. 1886, p. 230.

40 R. II. Chittenden — Influence of Urethan, Paraldehyde,

metabolism, diminishing the quantity of urine excreted, as well as the
amount of urea, uric acid, etc.

The experiments about to be described were conducted wholly upon
the person of a healthy man of 66 kilos, body weight. A definite
amount of food, of known composition, was taken daily and uniform
habits of sleep, exercise, etc., were kept up during the whole time of
the experiment, which extended over a period of six weeks. In this
manner, body equilibrium was established and the daily excretions
brought to a constancy of composition, as preliminary to studying
the action of the drug. The daily diet was as follows :

312 grams fresh beef, free from fat and tendons.

368

potatoes.

227

wheat bread.

149

boiled rice.

35

butter.

28

sugar.

6

salt.

200

water.

The body-weight was ascertained each morning, and the 24 hours'
urine collected and analyzed each day as follows : nitrogen was de-
termined by the Kjeldahl method;* sulphur by fusing a given vol-
ume of the urine with pure potassium hydroxide and potassium nitrate
in a silver crucible, and ultimately precipitating and weighing the
sulphur as barium sulphate ;f phosphorus by fusion of a portion of
the urine in a like manner with potassium hydroxide and nitrate,
precipitation of the phosphoric acid from a nitric acid solution by
molybdic solution, solution of this precipitate in ammonia and repre-
cipitatiou with magnesia mixture, as ammonio-magnesium phosphate;
chlorine by ignition Avith potassium nitrate, and titration of the pre-
pared sobition with a standard solution of silver nitrate.

On April 19th, analysis of the urine was commenced and con-
tinued for fourteen days before the first dose of urethan was admin-
istered. The drug was then taken for five consecutive days, a total
of 73 grains or 4*73 grams, after which the urethan was discontinued
for seven days. A second trial was then made by giving 89 grains

* Neue metbode zur Bestimmung des Stickstoifs in organischen Korpern. Zcit-
schrift fiir Analytische Chemie, xxii, 366.

•j- For the details of the processes used, see Studies from Laboratory of Physiological
Chemistry, Yale University, vol. ii, p. 88.

Antipyrin, and Antifebrin on Proteid Metabolism.

41

Amount

of urethan

takeu.

0

o a5

6'S

2S oiooiT-Hosoioot-coo oioioeo

OS

CO

. CO

.§0

2 Qococot-iooojt-oooio ooiooo

t-l
0

^1

10

00
tH

2 a

d 000005COCO 1-^ ■ 1 «1C500»

CO

0
1— 1

i« S

° B

Ho

>

,• 0 0 0 0 0 0 C> '77 to <?"» 0000

OSOOiOOSTHi— iO^OtH 0050SO
0 l-H r-l t-Ht-H— l-rHi-l -rH t-C

10
CO
0

T-i

t-«OCX)00C-iMIOC>?C01C 00COJ>CO

cp

lb
07

0

d

"0 "■*■'■'-■'■'"•■' ^"::::

Body
weight.

d 000000000 , 0000

a 000000000 0000

ca ^oooDwooooco . -5i<«ooi»

u

0

ji 0»0^:v)lOCOt-Xi010o3T-IC>>SOTt(

Trans. Conn, Acad., Vol. VIII.

Nov., IJ

42 Ji. JT. Chittenden — Influence of Urethan, Paraldehyde,

0

a s'

„ lO O <D O OJ

eg ->* o »p O CJ

t>c

00 t- lO t- «D

iO CO

o ci !0 t- o T-H c-

-T-l th t- (» CO CO O
-^ iC t~ CO T-H CO t-

■rM CO lO CO o*
OS iO o t- -*

1-1 LO -* 30 T-H

t- IC t- ?D 00 i— t-

iffl iC t- »o t-

^ 05 C- CO £-

O O tH tH -l-H

tS)

■rH O

00 CO ■* cQ
iO o to t^
CO CO CJ c^

05 CO »C
i-H «D CO

■^ T-l Ci

■rf Oi i-H c> o?

■^ CO CO -* CO
(?J « xti -^ CO

SiC

ai T-l lo t- 00 -^

a CO io 00 CO 00

T^ "^ Ol ip W

S CD CD ih> lb CO

^

1-1 00 CO o

T-l lo CO 00

-rtl <?4 00 CO

o CO do do

iO (N c-

00 C* OS
■^ iO lO

O t^ O Oi o

CO Oi OS OS '^

00 CO CO T-l ep

it- do T^ o o

T-( T-l OJ CQ (?■»

— a>

i« S

00

^

o

lO

o

o

o

CO

-<*

CO

o

C»

w

o

o

o

o

CD

^

Of)

o

CD

o

CO

f-

OS

in

on

rt^

T— 1

c>

CO

o

iO

o

tH

Oi

CO

O)

OS

OS

OS

os

'^

c^

eo

1—1

'^

CO

o

OS

CO

-*

H-o

T-l

T— 1

T— 1

T^

T-l

T— 1

T-l

T— ^

T-H

T— 1

T— 1

T— 1

>

Eh

'Tt*

00

OS

T-l

OS

00

or,

on

o

CO

o

CO

Of

CD

CO

CO

OS

o>

f>>

c>

Of

o>

c»

o>

Of

o>

o>

ot

o>

OJ

Of

Of

ot

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

a

i 2

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

«

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

«-s

ffl

'

'

"

'

"

"

"*

"

**

'

'

"

'

'*

"

"

'^

^

*

>,s

CO

o

o

o

o

<— )

o

o

<->

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

I

o

o

o

o

o

o

'

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

CD

M<

o>

o>

c>

TT

CO

-^

'^

o>

or

CO

o>

o

»

CO

^

«^

lO

lO

t.c

If

-t<

-*

'^

'

-^

M<

^

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

t*

CO

CD

CD

CO

CD

CO

CO

CO

CD

CD

CO

CO

CD

CD

CO

CO

CO

a5

>%

t;

c3

ir^

CO

«-

O)

OS

O

T— 1

o/

CO

M<

in

CD

r-

UJ

OS

o

^H

ot

eo

^

c

§

T— 1

T— 1

I— 1

ot

c-<

c^

Of

CJ

Antipyrin, and Antifebrin on Proteid MetahoUsm. 43

or 5 "76 grams of urethan in three consecutive days, followed by a
period of six days in which the drug was not taken.

The tables, giving the amounts in grams for the 24 hours' urine
of the several elements determined, show plainly that urethan has a
decided action on the metabolism of the body.

On examining the results in detail, it is to be seen that urethan
has a very decided diuretic action, most noticeable on the second day the
drug was taken. In fact, this may be called the initial action of the
drug, since in both trials the amount of water excreted, after the first
increase, rapidly diminished as the dose of urethan was increased, and
indeed, the volume remained far below the average amount for two
or three days after the drug had been discontinued, or until its elimi-
nation from the system was fairly complete, when the volume of
fluid quickly rose to normal.

The excretion of nitrogen is at once affected by urethan, even a
dose of five or ten grains bringing the nitrogen noticeably below the
normal amount. In both series, the excretion of nitrogen was greatly
diminished. On discontinuing the drug, the nitrogen excreted rapidly
increased in amount, and on the third or fourth day after its discon-
tinuance, the daily excretion of nitrogen passed considerably above
the normal.

As regards the excretion of phosphorus, it would appear from the
experiments that the administration of small doses of urethan gives
rise to an increased excretion of this element, as seen from the results
obtained on May 5-9th. With larger doses of the drug, however,
the excretion of phosphorus is diminished, as seen from the results of
May 17-1 9th. As the excretion of sulphur runs parallel with the
excretion of nitrogen, both coming from the metabolism of proteid
matter, it follows that urethan when taken in small quantities
must exert an inhibitory influence on proteid metabolism, while it
stimulates the decomposition of certain phosphorized matters. In
larger doses, the inhibitory action of the drug on proteid metabolism
is still more pronounced, while at the same time the excretion of
phosphorus is also retarded.

In no case was any hypnotic action noticeable.

44 H. H. Chittenden — The Influence of Urethan, Paraldehyde^

II. The influence of Paraldehyde ; — from experiments made by J. E. Docken-

dorff, Ph.B.

In the following experiment, a full-blooded coach dog of 25 kilos,
weight was employed. The animal was confined in a suitable cage,
lined with galvanized iron and furnished with a bottom of wire net-
ting, under which was a funnel-shaped tray, the whole so arranged as
to allow all of the fluid excreta to pass into a collecting bottle under-
neath.

The animal was fed daily on a weighed diet consisting of dessicated
beef, soda crackers and water. The beef was prepared by removing
as thoroughly as possible all fat, fascise, tendons, etc., passing it
through a sausage cutter and then drying it at a temperature below
60° C, until it had lost 75 per cent, of its weight. The dried and
sampled beef was then preserved in tightly stoppered jars until
needed. The crackers were ordinary soda crackers, containing about
0-7 per cent, of nitrogen. The daily rations consisted of 60 grams of
crackers and 125 grams of the dessicated beef, soaked in 600 c. c. of
water. This diet was commenced sometime before the urine was
collected, and was continued throughout the experiment. Ulti-
mately, the 24 hours' urine was analyzed each day, according to the
methods described in the preceding experiment. Owing to irregular-
ity of urination, and the difticulty of using a catheter, the quantity
of urine obtained each day was necessarily quite variable, hence
the composition of the normal urine was determined daily for
three weeks, so that a sufficiently large number of results might
be obtained to yield an accurate average for the normal period.
Paraldehyde was then administered in gelatin capsules, about six
hours after the dog had been fed, so that the drug might not inter-
fere with digestion. Its administration was continued for eighteen
days.

The results, expressed in grams for each 24 hours' urine, are shown
in the accompanying tables.

Antipyynn, and Antlfehrin on Proteid 3Ietaholistn.

45

Normal Urine. Without Paraldehyde.

Date.

Total
Volume.

Sp. Gr

1 Reaction.
acid.

Nitrogen.

grams
12-540

Sulphur.

Phosphorus.

Amoinit of
Paraldehyde.

Api'il
21

c. c.
395

1036

grams

0-883

grams
0-862

0

22

840

1025

"

19-315

1-529

1-288

23

660

1031

((

18-276

1-176

1-442

24

490

1035

<(

14-622

1-038

1-096

25

610

1036

"

21-050

1-388

1-340

26

410

1036

(<

13-568

27

550

1037

"

18-550

1-396

1-202

28

415

1036

"

13-580

1-322

0-730

29

420

1037

"

14-916

0-940

0-934

30

630

1038

"

18-071

1-394

1-386

May
1

490

1040

..

18-415

1-172

1.214

2

390

1038

<«

12-896

0-826

0-80G

3

630

1038

"

23-425

1-499

1-410

4

525

1036

"

17-244

1-235

1-098

5

430

1035

"

13-849

1-138

0-862

6

375

1035

-

11-672

0-810

0-784

7

740

1032

-

23191

1-648

1-538

8

465

1031

"

13-682

1-085

0-898

9

545

1032

"

10-239

1-340

1-166

10

535

1032

"

15-756

1-119

1-134

11

495

526

1032

"

14-406

1-145

0-904

Av'age

1035

acid.

16-440

1-204

1-105

46 R. H. Chittenden — The Influence of Urethan, Paraldehyde,

With Paraldehyde (C2H40)3

Date.

Total
Volume.

Sp. Gr.

Reaction.

Nitrogen.

Sulphur.

Phosphorus.

Amount of
Paraldehyde.

May

c. c.

grams

grams

grams

grams

12

540

1031

acid.

15-032

1-346

1-044

0-424

13

...

Urine

lost.

0-740

14

540

1028

acid.

13-624

1-000

0-776

0-715

15

310

1024

6-539

0-587

0-442

0-794

16

810

1027

20-191

1-593

1-339

0-755

17

460

1031

12-793

0-874

0-932

0-784

18

690

1033

21-091

1-444

1-296

0-702

19

525

1033

16-863

1-214

1-106

1-071

20

505

1032

14-523

1-016

0-978

1-536

21

735

1029

20-844

1-475

1-292

1-499

22

545

1031

16-756

1-122

0-462

1-811

23

555

1031

17-063

1-195

1-620

2-268

24

580

1032

18-202

1-245

1-080

2-675

25

360

1030

9-935

0-734

0-590

3-111

26

800

1033

25-695

1-924

1-476

3-632

27

460

1030

12-992

0-935

0-766

4-063

28

585

1033

19-174

1-368

0-990

4-958

29

.695
570

1032

21-756

1-391

1-342

5-941

Av'age

1030

acid.

16-060

1-203

1-031

87-479

Antipyrin, and Antifebrin on Proteid Metabolism.
Without Paraldehyde.

47

Date.

Total
Volume.

Sp. Gr.

Reaction.

Nitrogen.

Sulphur.

Phosphorus.

Amount of
Paraldehyde.

May
30

31

June
1

2

3
4

c. c.
610

570

440
645
640

445

558

1028
1031

1028
1031
1030
1026

acid.

a

acid.

grams

17-672

17-080

12-201
19-550
17-798
11-112

grams
1-309

1-311

0-765
1-376
1-237
0-979

grams
0-992

1154

0-780
1-299
1-608

0

Av 'age

1029

15-902

1-163

1-166

Throughout the experiment, the dog appeared perfectly well, and
at no time showed any symptoms of nausea. Neither was there any
special hypnotic action noticeable.

The average of the results shows plainly that the drug has little,
if any, action on proteid metabolism. Under the influence of the
paraldehyde there was a slight increase in the amount of water
excreted. Bokai * has stated that the urinary secretion is slightly
increased by paraldehyde. In our experiment, however, the diuretic
action is not great. As regards the excretion of nitrogen, there is a
slight diminution to be seen in the paraldehyde period. There is
also a corresponding decrease in the excretion of phosphorus. The
three periods, however, show such close agreement in results, it is
obvious that, under the conditions of this experiment, paraldehyde
has not exerted any special influence on proteid metabolism.

According to the experiments of Quinquad and A. Henocque,f
paraldehyde causes a diminution of body temperature, and at the
same time a very noticeable falling off* in the excretion of carbonic
acid ; thus, according to one of Quinquad's experiments, a dog after
receiving by hypodermic injection 8 c. c, of paraldehyde gave off" 5-5
grams of carbonic acid, while it expired during the same time, three-
fourths of an hour after the injection, only 1*96 grams of carbonic
acid.

* Ueber die physiologische Wirkung des Paraldehyds. Centralblatt fur die medicin-
ische Wissenschaften. 1887, p. 412.

f Abstract in Jahresbericht fiir Thierchemie. 1884, p. 374.

48 R. H. Ghittende7i — The Influence of JJrethan, Paraldehyde,

III. Influence of Antipyrin ; — from experiments made by H. F. Adams,

Ph.B.

Previous experiments* with antipyrin, made in this laboratory,
have shown that this drug, when introduced into the stomach of
healthy rabbits, has little, if any, noticeable influence on the excre-
tion of carbonic acid or on the body temperature, except in the
case of toxic doses. Coppola,f likewise, found that the subcu-
taneous introduction of 0-1 to 0-3 gram of antipyrin in the case of
dogs led to a reduction of body temperature of only 0*25 to 0-6 of a
degree, while 0*3-0*4 gram of the di'ug was without any noticeable
influence upon the excretion of urea. In fever patients, F. Muller,J
however, had previously noticed a diminution in the excretion of
nitrogen under the influence of antipyrin, while in the case of healthy
men the excretion was afiected but very slightly, if at all. Jacubo-
witsch,§ likewise, had noticed in experiments on healtliy and fevered
children that the use of antipyrin led to a diminution both in the
quantity and specific gravity of the urine, and also a diminution in
the quantity of uric acid, phosphoric acid, sulphuric acid and of
chlorides. L. Riess,|| by carefully conducted experiments on nine
typhus fever patients, found as a j)rincipal result that antipyrin in
doses up to 12 grams per day diminished considerably the excretion
of nitrogen, the diminution ranging in six series of experiments from
2*5 to 24'7 per cent. Umbach,^ likewise, has studied the influence
of antipyrin on the excretion of nitrogen, both on a dog and on him-
self, and he found that with a definite diet the excretion of nitrogen
sank, under the influence of 4 grams of antipyrin, in two days about
2 grams, equal to 4 grams of urea. The uric acid excretion, however,
was not materially afiected.

In spite of these manifold experiments, we have deemed the matter
of sufiicient importance to warrant further study, especially with a
view to the action of the drug on the metamorphism of nitrogenous
matter in the healthy organism. Tlie experiments were therefore
tried upon a healthy man with a body weight of 77 kilograms, and

* Chittenden and Cummins. Studies, vol. ii., p. 231.

f Abstract in Jahresbericht fiir Thierchemie. 1885, p. 98.

X Abstract iu Jahresbericht fiir Thierchemie. 1884, p. 242.

§ Abstract iu Jahresbericht lur Thierchemie. 1885, p. 444.

II Archiv fiir experim. Pathol, u. Pharm. xxii, 127 ; also Abstract in Jahresbericht
fiir Thierchemie. 1886, p. 417. Ueber stickstoffausscheiduug bei antipyretischer
Fieberbehandlung.

^ Ueber den Einfluss der Antipyrins auf die stickstoffausscheidung. Abstract in
Jahresbericht fiir Thierchemie. 1886, p. 418.

Antipyrinj and Antifehrin on Proteid Metabolism. 49

under definite conditions of diet, exercise, etc. Nitrogenous equi-
librium was established prior to the experiment, and the following
daily diet was strictly adhered to throughout the entire period.

386 grams meat (beef).

340 " potatoes.

227 " wheat bread.

163 " oat meal (steamed).

28 " sugar.

42 " butter.

120 " milk.

1040 " water.

In this experiment, nitrogenous metabolism was measured by deter-
mining the urea and uric acid contained in the daily excretion, instead
of determining the total nitrogen. This was done in order to ascer-
tain whether the drug has any special action on the excretion of uric
acid. Urea was determined by Liebig's method, as modified by
Pfliiger.* Chlorine was previously determined by fusion with potas-
sium nitrate and titration with silver nitrate in the usual manner, and
then removed from the solution to be tested for urea, by a standard
silver solution. Uric acid was determined by Salkowski's method,
and phosphoric acid by titration with a standard uranium solution.

The accompanying tables give the results of the daily analyses.
From these it is evident that under the conditions of this experiment,
anti pyrin has a decided inhibitory action on the proteid metabolism
of the healthy human organism, as shown by the diminished excre-
tion of urea and uric acid when the drug is taken. Antipyrin also
tends to diminish the volume of the urinary secretion, this action
being very marked in the second series, where comparativelv laro-e
amounts of antipyrin were administered. As regards the excretion
of phosphoric acid and of chlorine, nothing definite can be said. The
raoi*e important changes produced by the antipyrin are shown in the
following table of average daily results.

Urea. Uric acid. Total P2O5. Volume. Sp.Grr.

grams. gram. grams. c. c.

Normal period 41-806 0-586 3-185 951 1028

First antipyrin period 38-375 0-556 3-026 848 1029

First after period- 42-030 0-575 2-929 929 1028

Second antipyrin period.. 40*854 0-472 2-941 822 1031

Second after period 44-220 0-537 2-923 957 1028

* Pfliiger's Archlv fiir Physiologie, vol. xxi, p. 248.
TuANs. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 7 Nov., 1888

50 B. H. Chittenden — TJie Infl^ience of Urethmi, Paraldehyde,

a

'u
n .

fl

o

S
<

0

t" OT OJ ,1^ -,1^ (?.? -A^ 1^ 7^ OJ T- T^

CD
0
QO

1—1

'6

CS

0
'u

p

C CO 0 0 07 l-H CO 0 C? ^ 1-1

C-^OSC- 'OiOCO co-*t-<»
g »p iO iO 1 t- ^ 1^ IC iC 0 Tt(

^000 "ooo 0000

00

*p
0

0 =*

c. c8

CW^OSOSi-HT-HT-i OCOLtCC
SOS01050Tt<?DO Q000O5Q0

^0000000 0000

0

14

2'*?OCDCOi-Ht--rt< COOOOO
ScD(NCO'<*-*»O00 COOIOaj

a

coot-ot-eorHCD coeot-os

P«010CQO-i-i00O 10 T^ -^ t.-

a^ipcc^-r^t-'p *i' V' '^. ?^

0
-*

LC

0 2.

^-■00010000 0000

" T-H tH T-H -rH

O00i>ifflt-«Dt^ OSOOi-i
CO CQ 0? OJ C? 0^ 0<J OJ CO CO . CO

0000000 0000

00
1—1

0
.9

^5 ^•^«^•<«^•^« v.^»-*.*

C3

mOOOOOOO 0000

aooooooo 0000

S: 0 T>} 0> W 0 0 (35 00 00 GCi ^

2t-c-t~t-c~t-co oo^oo

1

& OJ 0 CQ « CQ OJ CO p3^ ^ .» CO T

he

<<

Antipyrin, and Antifebrm on Proteid Metabolism.

51

Amount of Aniipyrin
taken.

■J!

•5 o o o Lo ^
5 so CO so ^ ira

o

Urea.

03 O n-H O 00 o
a 05 Oi CO CO CD
- 05 CO O -^H CQ

{^^ o 00 c» t- t-
QO th to CO CO so

iO -^iOOOOOO* o
(, ^CSjDOO^tHtH CO

CO i-qpGOcpioi-io o
\ i:> ii -^ CO ii csi C't Iw

CO CO^Tj<Tj)^>^TiH ^

Uric acid.

1

a tH GO IC GC t- CO t- <??(?* 00 CQ (?J lO lO
2 lO L"? Cp lO ip ip O Cp ■» -^ lO CO -^ lO

^ooioo o ooooooo o

^ a
0-i o

- 05 CO to O CO

a C5 oi CO -^ o

g lO IC lO CO CO

Sis o o o o o

00 oi-ioioosoo-^ 00
GO »ccoioeoooa5-r-i lo

ip «0 ip lO iC l-O ip lO JO

o ooooooo o

52 00 GO 05 05 CO

a 00 1-1 o lo o

33 W T-l lO O -tH

qD M 05 Ci 03 Ot)

1

CO O^ y-f T-< <^ to C^ T^ OS
W lO ^ C> O CO O -r^ CV>

o ifflipooooiojo OS
CO oi(Ji ojcoijoiMcb it

Chlorine.

! ! !

?2CO'00 0505<0 IC OOC~-COi-llO»Oo5|iO
a -^ GO O 00 00 i- JO CO O GO CJ CO lO j-

csootpoos oi cpaDcjojcoiOi-c"?

Total
volume.

.coooc 00 ooooLooo

iJO00»OO^ '^ OOS-^Ot-h^OO
.iXt-OOOOO GO 0S000iOC5 0505

O T-t -^H

OS
OS

00

§

p.

02

■•-H 1— 1 t~ <3i O OS
CO CO Ol G<J CO <N

o o o o o o

•TT^ CO 00 GO 00 CO 00
W OJ (?i (M W C» CVJ

ooooooo

Reaction.

"o - ^ - ■•

Body
weight.

M o o o o o
g o o o o o
a CO CO I'- ^oo CD

il CO CO CO CD CO
013 C- £- C~ t~ t~

ooooooo

ooooooo

Xi ^ ■* 00 00 00 CO 1
CD CO CD iO lO »0 lO 1
t- t- t- £> C- C- J>

Date.

^ lO CO C- GO 05

QC

C3

O -rH 0> CO TJH lO CO

o

a

52 R. H. Chittenden — The Influence of Urethan, Paraldehyde,

O

I

iz;

<

o
o

iz;

<j a

- c:

a
o

a

CO

g -^ i5 CO 5 J5

cr.

=

1

^ en "^ "^ CO r^ '<:**
g S Oi O ^ (?J o

£ ^ <p ^ ^ oi cc
ti !- -^ <^'> -^ <5i 05
"^ =c -<* -5j< "TtH CO CO

o

CO ^ tH O CO
I— 1^ l!5 OS I-

O -tH 1-- -^ ®

-^ iO CO i~ o?
^ "^ ^ ^ ■^

o

I2

^ e -^ Tt< «o JO 05

" 5 eo CO o 00 r-

£ lo io "* CO ^

~ &c o 6 o 6 o

■^ CO c^ ■>* -^
o} -^ CO T-l o

CO iC iO lO »o

o o o o o

co
o

5 ch

■g ^ - O? L- iO X) rt<
^ -O - -Ttl 07 Cif 00 c-

„a ' giococooJC
0=« bo^oooo

1

CO o o i« « o
OS OS o 05 eo <M

iC Jp iO Tj< »p ip

o o o o o o

o

-So coocoio-*a>

O I, g O} M O t- (?■?
^ P-i fci) CO M 03 c« <?>?

1-1 CQ Ci iC CD o
■rH to CO -^ OS OS

OS ^ CO OS i^H -rH

Ol <?« 0* 0« 05 CO

CO
OS

1

1 1 ^ ^ ^ gs §

g p -5i o CO o? qp

r-j ^ "^ tJI ■^ "^ ■^

!

r^t l^ LO ■* CO lO
00 I- OS CO t- 00
CO -t^ t- 30 JO GO

-rt* -* CO -^ 05 CO

03

T-H

3§ ^"§§§§0

o ^ . • 00 00 i~- t.~- «:>
E- o

<» O O O »0 O £>
(JJ -r^ 05 i- CO »0 LO

00 OS OS OS OS OS OS

1

^K O O OJ C<J o?

'-' CO CO CO CO CO

o o o o o

&. , T— 1 1— 1 T-l T-H T- 1
1

O 00 C- C- OS 00
CO <N W OT O? CVJ

o o o o o o

(3
1

'o " ^ t t :;

Body

weight.

m O O O O 1

P o o o o
r -^ » 00 «o
£ 1- o lo '^

be J> t- t- £-

o o o o o

O O O O' o

^ X' Xi 00 cs

t- t- t- t- £-

«' C- OD CS O tH
.^ ^ T_l ^ OJ CQ

Average

o» CO ^ i» CO

Ci C^} 5^ Oi «

>

<

Antipyrin, and Antifebrin on Proteid Metabolism. 53

Since this work was finished we have seen an interesting paper
by Dr. Kiimagawa* on the action of certain antipyretics on proteid
metabolism, in which is given the results of an experiment with
antipyriu on the excretion of nitrogen and uric acid, in the case of a
dog of 26 kilos, weight in a condition of nitrogenous equilibrium.

In this experiment, Dr. Kumagawa found that even large doses of
antipyrin (51 grams in 16 days) produced no change whatever in the
excretion of nitrogen (determined by the Kjeldahl method), but that
there was a very noticeable increase in the excretion of uric acid
(determined by Salkowski's method), amounting on an average to 65
per cent, above the noi'mal excretion. These results stand in direct
opposition to what we have found with somewhat smaller doses, in
experimenting on the human organism. Whether the explanation
of this ditference is to be found in the different nature of the two
organisms experimented with we cannot now say, but we hope at a
later date to explain this apparently divergent action.

IV. The influence of antifebrin ; — from experiments made by H. C.

Taylor, Ph.B.

Antifebrin or acetanilide, which has recently come into use as an
antipyretic, as a nervine and antiseptic, has been the subject of many
clinical observations but has not as yet, so far as we know, been
experimented with to ascertain its influence on proteid metabolism.
We have endeavored, therefore, to ascertain the influence of this new
antipyretic on the nutrition of the healthy human organism, believing
that such results may possibly be of greater value than those ob-
tained by experimenting on animals. At the same time it is to be
borne in mind, that an antipyretic especially may produce an eftect
upon the healthy organism quite different from that which the same
doses would produce on an organism rendered perhaps more sus-
ceptible by disease, as in fever. The experiment was therefore con-
ducted upon the person of a young man of 64 kilos, body weight,
brought into a condition of nitrogenous equilibrium and maintained
throughout the experiment upon a weighed diet of known composi-
tion. For reasons already given, the excretion of nitrogenous matter
was measured by determining in the 24 hours' urine the amount of
urea and uric acid, using the methods employed in one of the pre-
ceding experiments. Sulphur, phosphorus and chlorine Avere also

*Ueber die Wirkung eiaiger antipyretisclier Mittel auf den Eiweissumsatz im
Orgauismus. Virchow's Arcbiv, Band cxiii, p. 192.

54 R. H. Chittenden — The Influence of TTrethan, Paraldehyde,

determined each day by methods already indicated. After nitrogen-
ous equilibrium had been established, and the urine analyzed for ten
consecutive days, antifebrin was administered daily in divided doses,
at a time not to interfere with digestion, for a period of nine days.
The daily dose was gradually increased until at last there was a
slight approach to cyanosis. In all, ]3'3 grams or 205 grains of the
antipyretic were taken. No disagreeable symptoms were experienced,
but there was a very noticeable lividity of countenance with a de-
cided blueness of the lips, and a slight darkening of the skin near the
cheek bones.

The initial daily dose was 0*4 of a gram or a little over 6 grains,
and was rapidly increased to 2*6 grams or 40 grains per day, given in
thi'ee doses. There are, to be sure, many cases recorded where
apparently smaller doses have led to serious results, but careful
watching failed to show any symptoms whatever even suggestive of
any disagreeable action on the digestive system, the circulation or
respiration. Weinstein, indeed, has said that persons not suf-
fering from fever may take antifebrin for weeks together without
any effect on the circulation, while according to Herczel the long-
continued administration of antifebrin, thirty to forty-five grains
daily for six weeks, may lead to what he terms aniline anaemia with
solution and decomposition of the haemoglobin of the blood. In
fact, the latter observer considers that aniline is set free from the
acetanilide and that the decomposition of the blood-coloring matter
is due to this cause. Whether this is the cause of the cyanosis so
often spoken of in connection Avith this drug is uncertain.

In the second antifebrin period, 13*9 grams or 214 grains of the
drug were taken in seven days, accompanied at the close with the
same approach to cyanosis as before.

Examination of the analytical results shows plainly that under
the conditions of this experiment the excretion of urea is not very
greatly affected. There is, however, in both antifebrin periods a
slight increase, indicating increased proteid metabolism under the
influence of the di'ug. This increased excretion of urea is more
apparent in the individual results than in the average of the series.
Thus, in the normal urine it is to be noticed that the daily excretion
of urea never exceeded 34'5 grams, while in the first antifebrin period,
on the days when the largest doses of acetanilide were taken, the
excretion of urea amounted to 35-37 grams, and in the after period
quickly fell to about 33 grams per day. The same peculiarity is
also noticeable, to a less extent, in the second antifebrin period.

Antipyrin, and Antifehrin on Proteid 3fetaholism,.

55

<4-( ••

o n
a ^
o S3

<<

o

Chlorine.

grams

2-967

4-404

3-603

3-520

8-221

4-027

4-377

4-073

6-366

4-078 ■

4-063

o

en
o

grams
0-966
0-864
1-227
0-859
1-041
0-881
0-862
0.842

0-821
1-122

00

Ci
O

Sulphur.

grams
1-380
1-154
1-207
1-254
1-220
1-296
1-222
1-289

1-350
1-124

Uric acid.

gram

0-749
0-708
0-739
0-753
0-779
0-723
0-741

0-694

0-777

o
t-

o

Urea.

grams
33-331
33-280
33-486
33-947
33-058
34-502
32-619
33-440

34-370
33-334

33-536

Total
volume.

c. c.

790
1280
12C0
1340
1030
1150
1250

880

1590
1250

CO

1— (

1—1

Sp. Gr.

1025
1016
1017
1014
1018
1017
1015
1023

1013
1016

1017

a

acid

Body

weight.

grams
64200
64200
64000
64000
64000
64000
63800
64200

64000
64000

Date.

^co-<*»ocoi-a)050 os — -^^

*5^ Oi Cl C^ OJ OJ CJ O? CO u-i -'

<1

56 R. 11. Chittenden — lyifuence q/ Urethan, Paraldehyde,

t_ .

o a

-^ ^

g

be

p <D
O tt2

o

o

OS

o

T-l

IP

CO

o

a p

o^

a

CO

a

CO

lO

w

CO

CO

o

CD

CO

o?

to

'^

o

CO

IC

o*

00

^

oo

t~

^

g

t-

Iffl

OS

LO

iO

tfO

00

t-

co

O

be

^

lO

"*

CO

"*

o

^

00

^

^

en

3

O

a

OT

o

o

t-

on

OJ

00

CO

Oi

lO

^

to

l-t

«5

OS

T-^

^

■rX

o

CO

P.

03

OS

a>

lO

^-1

OS

o

OS

00

tH

OS

o

bO

o

o

o

T-^

o

T-l

o

o

1—1

o

M

^

i

as

1—!

CO

«o

o

tH

CO

■^

OS

00

(N

^

a

^

OS

00

-*

lO

OS

OS

00

Cu

a

W

CO

'_^'

CO

o?

CO

CJ

CJ

CO

CJ

m

be

'6

o

^

.,—1

<M

>-H

o

00

1—1

0-?

OS

CO

^

e:

t-

<£,

1—1

t-

CO

lO

t-

OS

CO

ci3

«o

t~

?o

CD

iO

iO

io

eo

lO

CO

'£^

?rr

o

o

o

o

o

O'

o

o

o

o

t^

CO

S

lO

o

CO

CO

CQ

(>}

CO

•1— 1

Tj<

lO

w

CO

Tjf

00

t-

OS

o

£

OS

o

00

00

OS

o

00

t)

CO

rH

OS

JO

OS

CO

to

»c

t-

CO

be

CO

CO

OJ

CO

0?

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

^ <lj

iS S

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

1*

o s

o

CO

OS

I-

OS

o

CO

■30

£~

00

Ho
>

o

1*

CO
•I— 1

tH

£-

CO

1—1

1— 1

■<*

CO

c

c^

to

CO

t-

'^

00

I—

i>

c-

J«

CO

T-t

.—1

TH

T-l

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

en

d

o

T?

o

O

^

"^

^

z

^

^

^

^

a

03

cc

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

GO

00

00

-rtl

-TtH

^

■^

rf<

-*<

CO

CO

JO

be

o

CO

CO

CD

CD

CO

CD

CD

CO

a>

be

OJ

t»^

cS

C3

c6

CO

-^

to

CO

£-

00

OS

c^

■r-,

>

P

§

^

■^

<

Antipyrin, and Antifebrin on Proteid Metabolism.

57

a.0

o

ce

eo

Tj<

o»

"*

CO

^

OS

^

o

o

jq

bs)

-*

iO

'^

■*

JO

^

to

JO

a>

JO

O

m

g

00

OJ

lO

C5

OS

CO

00

OS

o

c-

si

o

GO

<X)

OS

00

00

t-

ZO

00

«c>

Cu

rt

00

Oi

o

o

00

00

OS

OS

OS

o

&c

o

o

o

tH

tH

o

o

o

o

o

si

Pi

u

iC

a

(?>

^

C-}

^

OS

CO

?D

qo

«

-*

si

t-

t-

tH

00

r(H

»c

nn

t^

o

Q,

CO

03

CO

-*

Tt

^*

'^

CO

lO

CO

^

bO

bC

CO CO CO CO

is a

E- o

W S

S CO

bt) «

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VITI.

Nov., ij

58 R. H. Chittenden — Influence of Z^rethm}, Paraldehyde,

°.2

a2

a o

O

ir>

ip

to

IC

C9

5 &

2 -

OT

(fj

o?

CJ

OJ

^

O'

3 a

be

<<

•

o5

i3

a ^

•*

lO

(N

lO

o

-*

00

t-

OS

^

■l-H

^

o

OS

T^

o

lO

1—1

t-

JO

O

CO

OS

o

X.

<N

in

50

1-1

OS

o*

^

S
o

Sb'^

LO

ITS

t-

c»

i>

i~

CO

00

lo

lb

CD

tr

o

a "o

1—1

o

co

■rH

CO

■^

CD

l^

lO

CO

Ci

^

50

t-

l>

CO

OS

T-H

00

i>

OS

^

c§ ®

GO

oo

op

■30

OS

GO

CO

9>

t-

GO

GO

00

O

6

6

6

6

o

6

i

'^

o

o

o

^

CL,

tH

a s

W

c^>

iO

■?>

OS

OS

CO

o^

<c

CO

a.

t-

CO

CO

-*

OS

OT

OS

l-

'

=2

Js CO

CO

c^

OJ

T**

OJ

CO

CO

^

eo

)

^

Sul

be

^^

■^

■^

rH

l— 1

■^

'^'

^^

''"'

'

T— 1

j£ t-

o

C<J

o

iO

CO

T-H

CO

OS

1—1

"os

CB

fl CO

«o

OS

I-

OS

OJ

CJ

o

OS

CO

00

CO

^ 1*-

T**

o

«p

»C

50

t-

iO

»o

CO

CO

CD

_o

Ic =

o

6

o

o

o

o

o

6

■=

^

O

P

OJ {-,

CO

(N

00

OS

o

lO

CO

«

1-*

o

,^

C3

f3 o

t-

'X>

CD

i-

OS

CD

00

OS

o

00

OS

01

5 ^'

(as

oo

OS

IC

OS

l_-

<?

I.'

?'

00

?'

tl.

CO

CO

CO

-^

il

>*

CO

CO

CO

OT

CO

&C CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

s a

fi o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

^

^

o

o

«-' CO

-^

r-

^

OJ

Q^}

S

o

<^

Ol

■*

O 3

. <rj

CO

(??

CO

'^

<M

to

GO

o

OS

OJ

Eh "o

o -^

1—'

1-H

T-l

t-f

T— t

1-1

T— <

T-H

1— '

1— '

>

tJ

c-

(D

OS

X)

oo

o?

GO

00

'^

OJ

m

1
o

O

1—1

o?

c>

OJ

<N

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

■ J^

1—1

1-1

1—1

1-1

1—1

■^^

'-^

■rH

1— '

a

o

__,

^

■-iS

o

"3

C5
IS

as

P^

2 o

o

o

o

I o

f>i'S

i S

F CO

o

o

o

5

o

(^

<=■

o

O

1

"5 "Fc

•X)

00

00

00

00

CD

CD

CO

CO

o .Sr

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

CO

1

CO

XI

CO

M 2^

?o

CO

CD

CD

CO

CO

CD

CD

CD

ai

<s

fcc

be

<u

>>

cS

Oj

03 '-'

c>

CO

'^

lO

CO

t-

00

OS

o

;^

C3

1 ^

Oi

OJ

-rj

c?

CJ

OJ

o<

o>

CO

>

<

Ahtipyrin, and Antifehrln on. Proteid Metabolism. 59

We must conclude, therefore, that acetanilide tends to increase some-
what the excretion of urea, but that with such doses as we have era-
ployed the increase in proteid metabolism cannot be great. This is
further indicated by the lack of any corresponding change in the
excretion of sulphur.

The excretion of phosphorus is also unaffected by antifebrin.

On the excretion of uric acid, however, our results indicate a
special inliibitory influence. This is quite apparent both in the
averages of the different series and in the individual results, and, if
correct, would appear to be the most marked characteristic of
antifebrin, so far as its influence on proteid metabolism is concerned.
Various observers have stated that antifebrin acts as a diuretic,
others that it decreases the secretion of water, and while doubtless
both results have been seen to follow its administration in diseased
conditions of the system, our experiment on a healthy man gives no
evidence of any action of this kind.

Since the foregoing was written we have seen the results of
Kumagawa's* experiment with antifebrin on a dog, from which he
concludes that acetanilide taken in small doses (2-3 grams per day)
does not give rise to any apprecial)le increase in the decomposition of
proteid matter, but that larger doses (4-5 grams per day) cause a very
marked increase, as indicated by the increased excretion of nitrogen.
Such doses are, however, as Kumagawa liimself admits, too large,
especially when given to a moderate sized dog, to have the results of
any practical value. Lepine,f too, experimenting on a hungry dog,
thought he found an increase in the excretion of nitrogen after giv-
ing two doses of one and two grams of antifebrin. Further, Ademski];
is quoted as considering that urea is increased, but the total quan-
tity of nitrogen decreased by antifebrin. Bokai, that the amount of
nitrogen is diminished and Berezooski that the urea decreases with
the fall of temperature. Whether these latter views are founded on
actual experiments or are mere conjecture I do not know.

According to Jaffe and Hilbert,§ rabbits fed upon antifebrin excrete
it mainly as paramidophenol-sulphuric acid, and Kumagawa has like-
wise found, in the case of a dog, that neither acetanilide nor aniline
appear in the urine, but that the antifebrin is excreted mainly as
paramidophenol united to sulphuric acid.

* Virchow's Archiv. Band cxiii, p. 171.

f See Salkowski's Bemerkung in Virchow's Archiv, Band cxiii, p. 394.
X See Report on Antifebrin in the Therapeutic Gazette, vol. xii, p. 571.
§ Zeitschrift fur phyaiologisohe chemie, xii, p. 307.

fV. — The influence of several new therapeutic agents on

AMTLOLYTIC AND PROTEOLYTIC ACTION. By R. H. ChITTEN-

DEN AND C. W. Stewart, Ph.B.

In view of the pronounced action of a number of newly discovered
therapeutic agents on metabolism, we have deemed it of importancfe
to widen our knowledge regarding their physiological action by
attempting a study of their behavior towards the amylolytic and
proteolytic ferments, with the hope of gaining some insight into
their influence on normal digestion.

The methods employed were similar to those used in previous ex-
periments of this kind,* in which the action of varying percentages
of the drug were determined quantitatively.

Influence on amylolytic action.

As amylolytic ferment, human mixed saliva was employed, filtered
and carefully neutralized, and then diluted with distilled water in the
proportion of 1 to 5. The experiments were made in series, in which
one digestion of each series served as a control for comparison. The
volume of each digestive mixture was 100 c. c, in which was present
1 gram of perfectly neutral potato starch previously boiled with a
portion of the water, 10 c. c. of diluted neutral saliva and a given
quantity of the substance to be experimented with. The mixtures
were warmed at 40° C. for thirty minutes, after which further action
of the ferment was stopped by heating the solution to boiling. The
extent of amylolytic action was then ascertained, by determining in
one-fourth of the solution the amount of reducing substances by
Allihn's gravimetric method. f For the sake of convenience, the
total amount of reducing substance was calculated as dextrose, from
which in turn was calculated the percentage of starch converted.

Antipyrin.

With this new antipyretic, several series of experiments with small
percentages were made which show clearly that the substance is

* Studies from the Laboratory of Pbysiological Chemistry, Yale University, vols, i
and ii.

f Zeitschrift fiir aualytische chemie, xxii, p. 448.

Therapeutic Agents on Amylolytic and Proteolytic Action. 6 1

without any appreciable influence. When present in larger percent-
ages, the drug was found to have a slight inhibitory influence on
amylolytic action, as the following series of experiments show :

Per cent, of
Antlpyrln.

Total amount of
reducing substances.

Starch
converted.

Relative
amylolytic action

0

0-3446 gram.

31-01 per

cent.

100-0

0-5

0-3446

31-01

100-0

10

0-3424

30-82

99-4

30

0-3278

2950

95-1

5-0

0-3112

28-01

93-6

Coppola,* in studying the physiological action of antipyrin, found
that three per cent, of the substance did not hinder the inversion of
cane sugar by yeast, but did prevent alcoholic fermentation. Fur-
ther, that the same percentage hindered slightly the action of malt
diastase on starch, and had a decided inhibitory influence on the
alkaline fermentation of urine.

Antifebrin.

Owing to the comparative insolubility of antifebrin or acetanilide
in water, large percentages could not be employed. Such as were
used, however, clearly show that this antipyretic has little influence
on amylolytic action.

Per cent, of
Antifebrin.

Total amouDt of
reducing substances.

starch
converted.

Relative
amylolytic action.

0

0-3604

gram.

32-44 per

cent.

100(1

0-10

0-3600

32-40

99-9

0-25

0-3638

32-70

100-8

0-50

0-3550

3200

98-6

0

0-3382

30-44

100-0

2-0

0 3298

29-68

97-5

In this cormection, it is interesting to notice that Kumagawa* has
found antifebrin to have a strong antiseptic action on the putrefac-
tive processes of the intestinal canal, and Van Seer has observed that
milk does not undergo fermentation if saturated with it, and also
that it will prevent albumin becoming ])utrid.f

Urethan.

With ethyl-urethan, two series of experiments were tried, with the
following results :

* Jahresbericht fur Thierchemie. 1885, p. 98.

f Virchow's Archiv, Band cxiii, p. 184.

\ See The Therapeutic Gazette, vol. xii, p. 566.

62 Chittenden and Stevmrt — Injhience of several new

Per cent, of
Urethan.

Total amount of
reducing substances.

Starch
converted.

Relative
amylolytlc action.

0

0-3382 gram.

30-44 per cent.

100-0

0-5

0-3550

31-95

104-6

0

0-3402

30-62

100-0

2-0

0-3446

31-01

101-3

3-0

0-3352

30-n

98-5

5-0

0-3268

29-40

96-0

Here, there is noticeable, with the smaller percentages, a slight
stimulation of amylolytic action, but it is not sufficiently large to be
very marked.

Paraldehyde.

This substance shows very strong inhibitory action, even 0*5 percent,
diminishing the amount of starch converted by 30 per cent. It must
be remembered, however, that the aldehyde is only slightly soluble
in water, and that it is more or less volatile. The experiments were
conducted in .small flasks and the aldehyde kept more or less emul-
sionized with the aqueous solution by shaking the mixtures, but ob-
viously the percentages given can only approximately represent the
amount actually taking part in the reaction.

Following are the results of two series of experiments :

Per cent, of
Paraldehyde.

Total amount of
reducing substances.

Starch
converted.

Relative
amylolytic action.

0

0-3554 gram.

31-98 per cent.

100-0

0-1

0-3534

31-81

99-5

0-2

0-3528

31-75

99-3

0-5

0-2468

22-21

69-5

1-0

0-1066

9-59

30-0

0

0-3554

3 1 -98

100-0

0-8

0-1392

1-2-52

39-1

10

0-0948

8-53

26-6

1-5

00620

5-58

14-3

2-0

0-0446

4-01

12-5

T/i<iIIin Sulphate.

This salt has a more marked influence on the amylolytic action of
saliva than any of the preceding substances. Very small percentages
have a noticeable stimulating action, while the presence of 0*2 per
cent, of the salt almost entirely stops the action of the ferment. The
results of the following two series show one or two small points of
diflerence, but in the main they jioint to the same general action.

Therapeutic Agents on Amylolytic and Proteolytic Action. 63

Per cent, of
ThalUn Sulphate.

Total amount of
reducing substances.

Starcli
couverteri.

Relative
amylolytic action.

0

0-3534 gram.

31-81 per cent.

100-0

0-025

0-3648

32-83

103 2

0-050

0-3810

34-36

108-0

0-100

0-3540

31-86

1001

0-200

0-0690

6-21

19-5

0-300

trace.

0

0-3652

32-86

100-0

0-025

0-3798

3418

104-0

0-050

0-3872

34-89

1061

0-080

0-3812

34-81

105-9

O'lO

0-3148

28-33

86-2

Starch
converted.

Kelative
amylolytic action

32-57 per

cent.

1000

30-08

92-4

32-97

100-0

30-96

93-9

Caffein and Thein.

These two closely related alkaloids were found to have only a
slight action on the amylolytic ferment, producing when present in
considerable amount a slight diminution in the amount of starch con-
verted. With two per cent, of the alkaloids, the following results
were obtained :

Per cent, of Total amount of

alkaloid. reducing substances.

0 0-3620 gram.

20 CafEein. 0-3342

0 0-3664

0-2 Thein. 03440

Influence on proteolytic action.

The influence of the above therapeutic agents on the proteolytic
action of pepsin-hydrochloric acid was determined, as in preceding
work of this kind,* by ascertaining the amount of fibrin digested or
dissolved in a given time, by a definite volume of standard, artificial
gastric juice, in the presence of varying amounts of the substances to
be tested. The gastric juice was made by dissolving 10 c. c. of a
glycerin extract of pepsin in one litre of 0*2 per cent, hydrochloric
acid. The volume of each digestive mixture was 50 c. c, composed
of 25 c. c. of the above mentioned artificial gastric juice, and 25 c. c.
of 0-2 per cent, hydrochloric acid containing the desired amounts of
the substances to be tested. The proteid material consisted of puri-
fied fibrin, coarsely powdered and dried at 110° C. One gram of
fibrin was used in each experiment. The digestive mixtures were
warmed at 40° C. for a certain length of time, usually two hours,

* Studies from the Laboratory of Physiological Chemistry of Yale University, vol?,
i and ii.

64

Chittenden and Stewart — Influence of several new

after which further proteolytic action was stopped by heating the
mixtures to boiling. The undissolved residues were then collected
on dried, weighed filtei's, washed thoroughly with boiling water, and
finally dried at 110° C. until of constant weight. The amount of
fibrin dissolved is taken as a measure of proteolytic action.

Following are the results obtained with the various substances
tested :

Fer cent, of
Antipyrin.

0

0-2

0-5

10

0
0-5
30
5-0

Per cent, of
Antlfebrln.

0

0-1

0-2

0-5

1-5

Antipyrin.

Undigested
residue.

Fibrin
digested.

RelHtlve
proteolytic action

0-507 gram

49-3 per cent.

100-0

0-622

47-8

96-9

0-573

42-7

86-6

0-688

31-2

63-3

Longer

time at 40

°C.

0-143

85-7

100-0

0-213

78-7

91-8

0-964

3-6

4-2

1-008

0

0

A)

tifehrin

Undigested
residue.

Fibrin
digested.

Kelative
proteolytic aciion

0-129 gram.

87-1 per cent.

100-0

0-145

85-5

98-1

0-166

83-4

95-8

0-212

78-8

90-5

0-371

62-9

72-2

Urethan.

'er cent.
Urethan

of

0

02

10

30

5-0

Per cent, of
Paraldetiyde.

0

0-05

0-10

0-30

1-00

2-00

Undigested
residue.

Fibrin
digested.

Relative
proteolytic action

0-148

gram.

85-2 per cent.

1000

0138

86-2

101-2

0-171

82-9

97-2

0-224

77-6

90-9

0-240

76-0

89-4

Paraldehyde.

Undigested
residue.

Fibrin
digested.

Relative
proteolytic action.

0-263

gram.

73-7 per cent.

100-0

0-219

78-1

105-9

0-246

75-4

102-3

0-255

74-5

101-1

0-264

73-6

99-9

0-269

73-1

99-2

Therapeutic Agents on Amylolytic and Proteolytic Action. 65
Thallin sulphate.

Per cent, of
lallin sulphate..

Undigested
residue.

Fibrin
digested.

Relative
proteolytic action.

0

0-379 gram.

62-1 2)ez- cent.

100-0

0-05

0-248

75-7

121-9

0-10

0-327

67-3

108-4

0-30

0-395

60-5

97-4

Thein and Cafein.

'er cent, of
alkaloid.

Undigested
residue.

0

0-105 gram.

1 -0 Thein.

0-252

4-0 "

0-179

4-0 Caffein.

0-584

Fibrin
digested.

89-5 per cent.

74-8
82-1
41-6

Relative
proteolytic action.

100-0

84-7 ■

91-8

46-5

These results show that autipyrin has a decided inhibitory influ-
ence on the action of the proteolytic ferment, and that when present
to the extent of 3'0 per cent, it practically stops all digestive action.
Antifebrin has also an inhibitory action, perhaps equal to that of anti-
pyrin, but owing to its greater insolubility in acid fluids large per-
centages of the substance could not be tested.

Uretban has only a slight retarding action, even when present to
the extent of 5 per cent.

Paraldehyde and thallin sulphate both show a very decided stimu-
lating action when small fractions of one per cent, are present, the lat-
ter, particularly, causing a much larger amount of fibrin to be di-
gested than in the control experiment.

Thein and cafFein both show an inhibitory influence on the ferment,
that of cafFein being much greater than that of thein.

On the proteolytic action of trypsin in an alkaline solution, two
substances only were tested, antifebrin and paraldehyde. The ex-
periments were conducted in the same manner as with pepsin-hydro-
chloric acid, except that a solution of trypsin in 0*3 per cent, sodium
cai'bonate was employed in place of the pepsin-acid, and the mixture
warmed for a longer time at 40° C. Following are the results ob-
tained, showing a much more pronounced inhibitory action on this
ferment than on pepsin.

Per cent, of
substance.

0

Undigested
residue.

0-2 antifebrin.
1*0

0-2 paraldehyde
20

Trans. Conn. A.cad., Vol. VIII

0-159 gram.

0-368

0-741

0-368
0-959

Fibrin
digested.

84-1 per cent.

63-2

25-9

63-2

4-1

Relative
proteolytic action.

1000

75-1

30-8

75-1

4-9

Nov., 1888.

V. — Caseoses, Casein Dtspeptone, and Casein Peptone. By
R. PI. Chittenden.

In a previous paper on " Casein and its Primary Cleavage Pro-
ducts,"* the writer expressed the intention of continuing the study of
the caseoses formed in pepsin digestion, and also of studying pure
casein peptone and the so-called casein dyspeptone. In the fulfillment
of this intention, experiments upon these subjects have been carried
on in this laboratory during the past two years, with the aid of sev-
eral co-workers, and the results are here presented collectively.

I. — Casein Dyspeptone ; — from experiments by L. ^4. Conner, Ph. B., axiA

C. A. Tuttle, Pli.B.

When casein is exposed to the action of pepsin-hydrochloric acid
at 40° C, or even at ordinary temperatures,-it is decomposed, as is
well known, into soluble caseoses and peptone. In every such diges-
tion, however, there always remains a certain amount of an insoluble
pasty, grayish white substance, which apparently is not susceptible
to the further action of gastric juice, no matter how long continued.
This insoluble substance, which is noticeable to a greater or less extent
in the pepsin digestion of all proteids, but particularly so with casein,
and which received from Meissner the name of dyspeptone, was
examined somewhat carefully by Lubavin in 1876,f who described
some of its properties. lie considered this casein dyspeptone as a
mixture of two distinct bodies, separable from each other by the
action of sodium carbonate. Substance A^ that portion of the dys-
peptone soluble in sodium carbonate, was described by Lubavin as a
body containing 4-6 per cent, of phosphorus, 13*3 per cent, of nitro-
gen, 48*5 per cent, of carbon and no sulphur, corresponding to the
formula C^^H^^N^POj^. Substance J5, insoluble in sodium carbonate,
was slowly soluble in sodium hydroxide, contained sulphur, but only
a small trace of phosphorus and evidently contained more or less

* Chittenden and Painter. Studies from Laboratory of Physiological Chemistry
Yale University, vol. ii., p. 156.

f Hoppe-Seyler. Med. Chem. Untersuchungeu, p. 463.

Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Di/speptone, and Casein Peptone. 67

admixture of fat. Judging from tiie description, substance A must
have been an acid compound of the body studied, mixed witli more
or less undigested casein ; while substance J^ was doubtless a mixture
of fat and the body -1. However this may be, our results show
conclusively that no body having the formula ascribed by Lubavin
to his substance A, can be separated IVom the undigestible residue
of casein in pepsin-hydrochloric acid.

In all of the experiments to be described, the casein employed was
freshly prepared from skim milk by precipitating the greatly diluted
fluid with dilute acetic acid, washing thoroughly with water, redis-
solving the precipitate in water containing a trace of ammonia and
reprecipitating, repeating this operation three or four times.

In subjecting casein to the action of artificial gastric juice the con-
ditions were varied more or less in the individual experiments, so
that if the so-called dyspeptone be a mixture of two or more sub-
stances, the varying conditions under which the digestions were
made might so change the nature of the mixture, that on analysis, it
would become apparent.

Digestion A.

The casein from five gallons of milk was placed in four litres of
0"4 per cent, hydrochloric acid and warmed to 40° C. To this was
added 200 c. c. of a dialyzed pepsin solution, prepared from a glyc-
erin extract of the ferment, and the mixture kept at 40-45° C. for
forty-eight hours. At the end of this time there was still a compara-
tively large mass of gelatinous matter undissolved, composed in part
no doubt, of swollen casein. The entire mixture was then dihited con-
siderably with water and treated with dilute alkali to near neutraliza-
tion, leaving the fluid, however, distinctly acid. The undio-ested
matter was then filtered ofl" and washed thoroughly with water. This
partial neutralization of the digestive mixture was found necessary,
owing to the extreme slowness with which the acid fluid filtered.
The undigested matter was again warmed at 40° C. for forty-eight
hours, with four litres of a much more vigorous pepsin mixture con-
taining 0*4 per cent, hydrochloric acid. The residue still undissolved
was filtered off and washed with water. The acid filtrate gave no
precipitate whatever on neutralization. A third time the undigested
matter was warmed at 40° C. for sixty hours, with four litres of a still
stronger artificial gastric juice. The cpiantity of insoluble matter did
not appear to be diminished at all by this third treatment with pep-
sin and acid. The substance was thereupon filtered from the acid

68 (Jhittexden — Caseoses, Casern Di/sjyeptone, and Casein Peptone.

fluid, and washed with water uutil the washings gave no reaction for
chlorides. It was then treated in the cold with one litre of one per
cent, sodium carbonate, in which it appeared to dissolve completely.
On filtration there appeared a small whitish residue, which on treat-
ment with ether, dissolved in great part, thus showing its fatty
nature. There remained, however, a very small residue of a heavy,
browiiish substance too small in quantity to be considered other than
as an impurity. On adding dilute hydrochloric acid to the alkaline
fluid, no precipitate was obtained until the fluid was made distinctly
acid, when the dyspeptone was thrown down as a heavy flocculent
precipitate. In the filtrate, the biuret and Millon's test showed only
a faint trace of an albuminous body. The precipitate of dyspeptone
was washed with water until the washings gave no reaction with
silver nitrate, after which it was dissolved in one per cent, sodium
carbonate, the fluid made exactly neutral with dilute hydrochloric
acid, thymolized, and then dialyzed in running water until all chlo-
ride was removed from the fluid.

The neutral fluid of dyspeptone so obtained, was concentrated to a
thick syrup on the water-bath, and then while still warm, it was
treated with 95 per cent, alcohol and a little absolute alcohol.
A moderately heavy precipitate of dyspeptone resulted, but appar-
ently not all of the substance was precipitated. On standing for
forty-eight hours, the fluid was found in a thick, gelatinous condition.
The coagulum was insoluble in 95 per cent, alcohol, but readily and
completely soluble in water. It was therefore washed thoroughly
with alcohol, allowed to stand under absolute alcohol for several
days, then treated with cold ether, after which it was dried, pow-
dered and placed in a fat extractor and extracted with boiling ether
as long as any fatty matter Avas dissolved, a process which took sev-
eral days. About nine grams of the pure, dry substance were
obtained.

A portion was then dried at 110° C. until of constant weight,
for analysis. Its composition is shown in the accompanying table.

The methods of analysis employed were the same as those previ-
ously described. Phosphorus was determined by fusing the sub-
stance in a silver crucible with potassium hydroxide and potassium
nitrate, acidifying the mixture with nitric acid, evaporating to dry-
ness, dissolving the residue in water acidified with nitric acid and
precipitation of the phosphoric acid, first with raolybdic solution, and
lastly with magnesia mixture and final weighing of the phosphorus
as magnesium pyrophosphate.

Z 32 Cli O

VO Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone, and Casein Peptone.

It is to be seen from the table of aualytical results tliat the total
phosphorus is exactly equal to the phosphorus of the ash. The ash,
as examination showed, was composed almost entirely of calcium
phosphate with a trace of iron. There was no calcium sulphate.
Taking the percentage of phosphorus at the highest figure, viz: 2*67,
and calculating it to calcium phosphate Gdi^(Vo^„, it would be equal
to 13'3 per cent, of calcium phosphate, or within 0*3 per cent, of the
ash found. Hence, it would appear that the phosphorus present in
the substance probably existed there wholly as calcium phosphate.

Digestion B.

A quantity of pure casein, equal in amount to that used in digestion
A, was warmed at 40° C. with seven litres of 0*4 per cent. hydi'O-
chloric acid, to which a quantity of purified and vigorous pepsin solu-
tion was added. After being kept at 40° C. for fifty hours, two
litres more of 0*4 per cent, hydrochloric acid, together with some
pepsin solution, were added and the mixture warmed at 40° C. for
two days more, after which it was diluted with water and the undi-
gested residue allowed to settle out. The supernatant fluid was
syphoned off, the residue washed by decantation and then again
treated at 40° C. with five litres of an active pepsin-hydrochloric acid
solution for four days. The residue still undigested was filtered ofl',
washed with water, dissolved in one per cent, sodium carbonate solu-
tion and the alkaline fluid filtered from the small amount of undis-
solved matter. From this fluid, the dyspeptone was precipitated by
hydrochloric acid, the acid compound washed thoroughly with water,
after which it was warmed at 40° C. for forty-eight hours with 1200
c. c. of 0*2 per cent, hydrochloric acid, and 50 c. c. of a strong pepsin
solution. The undigested residue, after being thoroughly washed,
was dissolved in 800 c. c. of one per cent, sodium carbonate, the solu-
tion exactly neutralized with hydrochloric a-cid and dialyzed until
chlorides were entirely removed. The clear aqueous solution was
evaporated to a syrup and the dyspeptone j^recipitated with alcohol,
after which it was treated exactly as preparation A. 9*5 grams
of pure, dried substance were obtained.

For analysis, the dyspeptone was dried at 110° C. until of constant
weight. The analytical results are shown in the accompanying
table.

The ash which was larger than in the first preparation, contained
no sulphate whatever, but was composed in great part of calcium
phosphate.

P after
deducting
P of Ash.

;;;;;;;;;; 0

CU t5.

1 1 1 . t , ' C.-J (?}

CO «5

; ! CO X-

;;;:;;;;;.§§

0 0

^r^ ...iiilliO,,

from the
Ash.
gram.

0-0484

, , , , 1 . . 00 Ol , , 1

» -6^ O cp , , ,

1 ' ' ' ' ' o C ' ' '

^ B + CO

oQ-sin M

1

^ ^ . • .

60 ' '

1 ^

00 m

CO -* ' 1 ■ ' i

Ash
found,
gram.

1 ■ . . OS 0 1 • 1 ' '
c- t. , . , ■

00

(N -"IH !0

^^ ^ . . O 00 Cv}

•^ ^ ; ; eb o> CO ; ; ; 1 ; ; ;

,-H rH ,-H

O

0

oil

4h 3D x> ', '

0 10 10 ' ' '
1 ; t- t- I- ; ! 1 1 1 1 ;

Hp

,,<J»T--|-*,

''ooos'''''''

'' 0} « T-H ''''■' '

, i;H TjH 0 ,,,,,, ,

' iO CO ^ '■'''' '

o ■&?.

so t- .

T^ Ct 1

CO CO ','.','.',',' I ' '.

OU2
found,
gram.

0-6680
0-4465

1 GO lO

a x^ 1 ?» "?'

1 loo ' '

H.,0
fouud.
gram.

10 OJ Ill

00 3D •

CO 0

0 0 i 1 ! ! ' ! ! 1 I 1

Substance
used,
gram.

OTtiQO-rHiOT-ieo-rf<oeOT(<i:o
o}Q03scQ-^i-HOOcooobeoo

-^ 01 -^ CO ^ iO ^ 0 IC H^ 50 «p

000000000000

d

"-I ?^ «5 ^

1^ t-

o W ;?; .7: Hh o

72 Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone, and Casein Peptone.

Digestions C and D.

These digestions were conducted in much the same manner as the
preceding. In C, the casein was first subjected to the action of four
litres of vigorous, but purified, artificial gastric juice containing 0-4
per cent, acid, for four consecutive days. The undigested residue
was then filtered off, washed, and again treated with a vigorous pep-
sin-acid mixture for three days longer, in both cases at 40° C, The
residue still undigested was washed thoroughly with water and then
dissolved in one per cent, sodium carbonate, after which it was treated
exactly as pi-eparation A,

In 2>, the casein was warmed for three days with six litres of a
similar pepsin-acid mixture, when the undissolved residue, after being
filtered and thoroughly washed, was dissolved in diluted sodium
carbonate and reprecipitated by dilute hydrochloric acid. Then, as
in B^ the washed precipitate was redigested with a vigorous gastric
juice for several days and the residue again dissolved, after thorough
washing, in one per cent, sodium carbonate and treated exactly as
the preceding preparation.

For analysis, both products were freed entirely from fat, and ulti-
mately dried at 110° C, until of constant weight. Their composition
is shown in the accompanying tables.

Three other distinct preparations of dyspeptone were made in man-
ner similar to the preceding, except that in all, larger quantities of
pepsin-hydrochloric acid were employed and the mixtures warmed
for a longer time at 40° C. Tims in digestion E, 1562 grams of
moist casein were warmed with 9-5 litres of 0*4 per cent, hydrochloric
acid and pepsin for two days, and the undigested residue again treated
at 40° C. with 3 litres of a like pepsin-acid for seven days, and finally
treated a third time with pepsin and acid for four days, before solu-
tion in sodium carbonate, etc. Likewise in digestion 6^, 2000 grams
of moist casein were warmed at 40° C. with 11 litres of 0*4 per cent,
acid and pepsin for 21 days and the residue warmed again at 40° C.
for several days, with a fresh pepsin-acid mixture. Ultimately, all of
the three products Avere treated as previously described, and finally
dried at 110° C. prior to analysis. The analytical results are shown
in the accompanying tables.

P after
deducting
P of ash.

\ \ \ \ \

i

i

r-t
O

CO

6

pLl-fcR

\ \ \ \ \

'.

:

;

;

bos O

■;;:;;

i

\

i

1

o

p
o

•

;

\

T- 1

so

!

1

•^ g 03 ?3
. boo ■* 5b

05

O 1 ■

1 1 1 I 1 ■ 1 -^ 1 1

' ' ' ; ' ' ; I ■?

' ' ' ' o ' '

M "teS.

i

o

o
6

\

;

;

c3 ^M S

o 9 + S

; ; ; ; :

;

o
o

CO
Ol

o
o

•

:

;

1^

CO

\ \ \ \ ^
1 i' i i <ri

1-1

CO

J

;

[

;

;

£ a

^

05 =

=2 be

trj^^

9, fl a

; 13 £

hH I— I I— I ►> K. I— I

I ^ a ^ ^ >

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII.

s a X «

t> HH M

10

M

V

'^ i^ ^O ':::i

O K Iz; M PL^ O

Nov., 1888,

r- ^ -^ I

o _

+ cs I

&D3 0

^5 ^- a

^ S a= 2

TiO

cs &M a

,

,

,

,

O

OS

,

,

,

sli&

:

;

'.

:

;

CO

o

o

6

:

1

"^S

o

00

-S

1

1

1

o*

1

1

1

1

1

'

'

'

'

^

-*

■

'

'

'

'

i— 1

Ash
fouad.
gram.

-*

to

'

'

1

;

o

CO

'

' •

;

'

1

'

■

'

o
o

o
6

•

05

OS

1

1

o*

04

1

1

1

1

!z; \R

'

■

CO

T-H

CO
■1-1

•

■

'

''

•'

•

''

S a

,

,

00

o

1

,

,

1

,

"

<

t--

J>

'

•

'

•

•

2 a

'

'

lO

'

'

'

'

t~

Ti

Oh

o

«

d

,

^

1—1

,

<4-(

° .

1

00

o

1

r

1

1

1

1

1

!zi

H

1

T-l

Ci

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

d

1

,

o

05

,

,

,

,

1

,

'

'

00

o

t

1

I

t

1

1

-*

CO

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

«o

t-

,

'' 1

1

,

^

,

O-^

CO

CO

;

:

;

''

I

•

\

;

'•

o

o

OS

,

,

1

1

,

1

1

CO

lO

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CO

CO

•

1

1

1

1

1

1

c2 t*

o

o

'tH

GO

,

,

,

,

,

,

trt^a

CO

1

;

;

;

;

;

;

!

;

o

?o

o "S a

o

CO

1

1

1

1

1

1

I

t

1

^ s §

CQ

*J

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

«|i=

1—1
O

o

■

•

'

'

■

■

'

'

■

O

o

GO

OD

T-t

o

00

CO

CO

00

CO

CO

c« -a a

t-

»o

CO

T-H

i^

to

CO

OT

CO

1—1

-s « §

o

o>

c-

o

-*

CD

OJ

-*

CO

S 2 £

o

o

1**
o

o

o

6

CO

o

lO

o

o

CO

o

o

OT

d

1 ^

HH

h- 1
1— 1
1— 1

>

1— 1

>

>

>

1— 1
1— 1

>

hH

X

l-H

X

n

^
^

^

^

^^

e^

^

^

<1~l

00 -rH

&5

CD ^

c

i-H t.

05 ^

o ffi ;zi cc PM o

Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone, and Casein Peptone. 75

Dyspeptone E.

Sub-
stance
used,
gram.

found,
gram.

H

N found.

N
%

Ash
found,
gram.

No.

COo
found,
gram.

C

c. c.

T.
°C.

Pres-
sure,
mm.

Ash
%

I

II

III

IV

V

VI

0-7272
0-3746
0-3177
0-5570
0-3319
0-3330

0-3758
0-1927

5-74
5-71

1-1528
0-5967

43-23

43-17

34-06
58-33

13-0
12-2

759-6
760-3

12-84
12-61

0-0496
0-0499

14-94
14-98

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

C
H

N

50-84
6-75

50-75
6-72

15-10

15-15

Average.

50-80

6-73

15-12

Dyspeptone F.

Sub-
stance
used,
gram.

found,
gram.

CO2
found,
gram.

C

%

N found.

N
%

Ash
found,
gram.

No.

c. c.

T.

° G.

Pres-
sure
mm.

Ash

fo

I

0-5375

0-2837

5-86

0-8772

44-50

....

'

II

0-5686

0-3039

5-93

0-9317

44-68

... -

III

0-4649

50-3

12-4

764-0

13-11

IV

0-4100

44-7

13-0

765-5

13-16

.-..

V

VI

0-3938
0-4347

-- —

0-0536
0-0590

13-61
13-59

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

c

51-50

51-70

H

6-78

6-87

N

15-17
Dyspeptone G

15-21

Average.

51-60

6-83

15-19

Sub-
stance

used,
gram.

H.,0
found,
gram.

H

%

CO2
found,
gram.

0

fo

N found.

N

%

Ash
found,
gram.

No.

c. c.

T.
" 0.

Pres-
sure
mm.

Ash

%

I

0-7545

0-3915

5-76

1-2148

43-90

....

n

0-4094

0-2137

5-79

0-6604

43-98

III

0-6268

- . - -

....

70-6

13-8

760-5

13-56

IV

0-7803

88-8

14-0

760-3

13-61

....

V

0-4356

0-0552

12-66

VI

0-5654

----

----

----

----

,----

0-0722

12-76

Preeentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.
C 50-35 50-44 .... .... 50-39

H 6-61 6-65 .... .... 6-63

N 15-55 15-61 15-58

76

R. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone^

Table Showing the Average Composition of the Several Dyspep-

TONES.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

P.

G.

Casein.*

C -

51-15

51-07

51-29

51-82

50-80

51-60

50-39

53-30

H

7-18

7-41

7-26

7-44

6-73

6-83

6-63

7-07

N ._.

15-16

15-41

15-23

15-48

15-13

15-19

15-58

15-91

S - ------

0-71

0-71

0-68

0-78

0-83

P

0

0

0

0

0-87

0

25-80

25-40

25-54

24-48

....

----

....

23-03

Ash.-.. -

13-67

15-41

12-43

14-19

14-96

13-60

12-71

0-98

It is evident from the more complete analyses of the first four
products, that the dyspeptone as prepared by us contains essentially
the same percentage of sulphur as the original casein ; further, that
instead of being a phosphorized compound, it apparently contains no
phosphorus whatever, other than that combined with calcium. Very
noticeable, is the large percentage of ash in all of the preparations.
This we were not able to materially reduce by any process of purifica-
tion, and as the ash of the original casein, like that of the dys-
peptone, was composed almost wholly of calcium phosphate, it would
appear as if all of the phosphate from the mother substance had
attached itself to the dyspeptone.

In their content of carbon, all of the seven preparations show a very
close agreement, while they differ from casein by containing two per
cent, less carbon. The nitrogen of the dyspeptone is, likewise, a little
less tlian that of casein, while the individual preparations show
throughout a very close agreement in their content of this element.
In composition, therefore, all of the seven preparations, although rep-
resenting considerable variation in the method of production, show a
sufficiently close agreement to indicate their identity. Compared
with casein, the lower percentage of carbon would point to their
production by hydration, and it would appear from the analytical
data that the so-called casein dysjjeptone, formed by gastric digestion,
is a mixture of calcium phosphate with a hydration product of casein,

*CbitteDden and Painter. Studies from Laboratory, vol. ii. p. 113.

and Casein. Peptone. 77

the hydrochloric acid compound of which is insoluble in water and
dilute acid. The dyspeptone itself is quite readily soluble in cold
water, the solution remaining unchanged on boiling.

Following are some of the reactions of dyspeptone.

Addition of acetic acid to an aqueous solution of the substance
produces a heavy white precipitate insoluble in moderate excess, but
partially soluble in a large excess of the acid. On heating the strongly
acid fluid, the precipitate dissolves completely and the fluid remains
clear on cooling. Addition of potassium ferrocyanide to the clear
acid fluid gives only a slight turbidity.

Dilute hydrochloric and sulphuric acid both give a heavy white
precipitate, insoluble in slight excess of acid, but entirely soluble
in a large excess on application of heat. Even 0-2 per cent, hydro-
chloric acid precipitates the dyspeptone completely.

Dilute nitric acid, likewise, precipitates the dyspeptone, but the
precipitate is far more soluble in excess of the acid. On w^arming the"
acid solution, it quickly turns yellow, and with ammonia gives the
orange yellow color of the xanthoprotein reaction.

Cupric sulphate and potassium hydroxide give the violet color of
the biuret reaction.

Cupric sulphate and ferric chloride both give heavy precipitates,
insoluble in excess.

Potassium hydroxide and lead acetate give, on boiling, a distinct
reaction for sulphur.

Mercuric chloride, added in small quantity to a cold aqueous solu-
tion of the dyspeptone, gives no precipitate, but when added in
excess and the mixture is heated, a heavy white i^recipitate is formed,
insoluble on cooling.

The dyspeptone is precipitated by saturation of its aqueous solution
with ammonium sulphate, but not by sodium chloride, even on heat-
ing. Addition of acetic acid, however, to the salt-saturated fluid
gives the usual precipitate of dyspeptone.

Casein antialbumid.

On heating casein with sulphuric acid and water at 100° C, it is
decomposed, as is well known, into soluble products and an insoluble
antialbumid. We have found, however, that the antialbumid pre-
pared in this manner is quite difierent in composition from the dys-
peptone formed in gastric digestion. In one experiment, where about
two kilograms of pure, moist casein were heated with two litres of
water and 100 grams of concentrated sulphuric acid for seven hours

'78 i?. H. ChitteMflen — Gaseoses, Casein Dyspeptone,

at 100° C, and the residue so obtained treated again in a like man-
ner with the same strength of acid, a comparatively large amount of
casein antialburaid was obtained, which unlike the dyspeptone from
a gastric digestion, was only slowly soluble in dilute sodium carbon-
ate. Freed from any adhering soluble products by treatment with
several litres of a vigorous gastric juice for two days at 40° C, it still
dissolved slowly in dilute sodium carbonate. By long contact with
a one per cent, solution of the alkaline carbonate it finally dissolved,
leaving but a small residue. From this solution, the antialbumid
was reprecipitated by hydrochloric acid, and after thorough washing
with water, it was again dissolved in sodium carbonate, the fluid
made exactly neutral and then dialyzed until all chloride was re-
moved. After concentration of the fluid and precipitation with alco-
hol, etc., the antialbumid was dried and analyzed. It contained 18
percent, of ash. The ash-free substance contained 54*4 per cent, of
carbon, 68 per cent, of hydrogen, and 14"8 per cent, of nitrogen;
showing thus a much higher percentage of carbon, and a lower per-
centage of nitrogen than the dyspeptone formed by pepsin-hydro-
chloric acid.

Both casein antialbumid and dyspeptone are dissolved with more
or less readiness by alkaline solution of trypsin and are converted
by long warming at 40° C. into a peptone-like body, presumably
antipeptone.

II. Caseoses ;— from experiments by Charles Norris, Jr., Plt.B., and

C. A. Tuttle, Ph.B.

In a previous study of the caseoses formed in pepsin digestion,* we
were much impressed with the peculiar behavior of protocaseose
towards acids. Unlike the proto bodies from other proteids pre-
viously studied, aqueous solutions of the substance gave heavy pre-
cipitates with dilute acids. Protocaseose, as then separated, was
readily soluble in 0-4 per cent, hydrochloric acid, but addition of
stronger acid invariably produced a decided precipitale, soluble,
however, in a still larger excess of acid. This peculiarity rendered
the protocaseose an object of some interest to us, and further study
of the conditions favoring its formation in gastric digestion has
shown us that, apparently, the nature of the body precipitated by
saturation with salt, as well as the body precipitated by salt-satu-
rated acetic acid is modified by the strength of the pepsin solution,

* Chittenden and Painter. Studies from Laboratory of Physiological Chemistry,
vol. ii, p. 195.

a7id Casein Peptone. 79

and the length of time the casein is subjected to the action of the
ferment. In our earlier work with the proteoses, we deemed it es-
sential in attempting a study of the primary products of proteolytic
action to use as weak a ferment solution as possible, and to discon-
tinue its action as soon as solution of the proteid was complete, in
order that there might not be too great a loss through formation of
peptone. Further study, however, especially by use of the am-
monium sulphate reaction, has shown us that the formation of pep-
tone is a far less rapid process than generally supposed. Indeed, in the
majority of artificial digestions with pepsin-hydrochloric acid, as or-
dinarily conducted, the ammonium sulphate reaction will show the
entire absence of peptone. True peptone appears to be formed only
by the action of a very vigorous pepsin mixture and that long con-
tinued.

In all of our previous experiments, the casein was either subjected
to the action of a very weak pepsin mixture or else, in the use of a
stronger ferment, exposed to its action for a few hours only. We
now find that by using a far more vigorous pepsin mixture and by
continuing its action for several days instead of hours, there is still
not a trace of [jeptone to be found in the filtrate from the ammonium
sulphate precipitate of the caseoses, but that the caseoses them-
selves, particularly the proto and deuterocaseose, differ somewhat,
both in composition and reactions from the products previously sep-
arated. The discovery of this fact has led us to a further study of
the caseoses formed in pepsin digestion, by which we have been able
in many ways to verify our former observations and at the same
time extend our knowledge of these interesting primary cleavage
products of casein. We have also extended our work by studying
the caseoses formed through the action of try|)sin, and dilute sul-
phuric acid.

A. Caseoses formed by pepshi-hydrochloric acid.

In all of these experiments the pepsin mixture was very power-
ful, and was especially prepared to insure freedom from both albu-
moses and peptone.* The casein was, likewise, thoroughly pure,
having been freshly prepared from skim milk by precipitation
with 0'2 per cent, hydrochloric acid, and reprecipilation three or four
times after ■solution in ammoniacal water.

* Studies from the Laboratory of Physiological Chemistry, vol. ii, p. 133.

80 R. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone,

Digestion A.

Nearly 2 kilos, of moist casein were warmed at 40° C. for a
little more than two days, with 10 litres of 0*4 per cent, hydro-
chloric acid containing sufficient of the pepsin mixture to insure vig-
orous action. After partial neutralization of the acid, the clear fluid
was filtered from the semi-gelatinous dyspeptone, made exactly neu-
tral with sodium hydroxide and then evaporated until moderately
concentrated. On filtering the concentrated fluid through paper, a
small residue remained, somewhat gummy, insoluble in dilute acid,
but readily soluble in dilute sodium carbonate, from which it was
precipitated by either hydrochloric or acetic acid. The amount was
too small for study, but it seemed to resemble in reactions casein
dyspeptone.

The neutral fluid containing the caseoses gave no precipitate
whatever on addition of 0*4 per cent, hydrochloric acid or even
stronger acid, and in this respect differs from the earlier diges-
tions in which the ferment action was continued for a short time
only. With dilute acetic acid, however, a slight turbidity was pro-
duced, the amount of which was too small to admit of any study of
its character.

The caseoses were precipitated collectively in the form of a heavy
gummy precipitate, by saturation of the neutral fluid with ammo-
nium sulphate. On boiling the filtrate from this ammonium sulphate
precipitate, a small quantity of a second gummy precipitate was
obtained. In the filtrate from this second precipitate, no trace of a
peptone-like body could be discovered by any of the ordinary tests.
Apparently only caseose bodies had been formed.

The first and main ammonium sulphate precipitate, after being
washed by trituration with a saturated solution of ammonium sul-
phate, was dissolved in water and the perfectly neutral fluid satu-
rated in the cold with sodium chloride. By this means a heavy
gummy precipitate was formed, which after being washed with a
saturated solution of sodium chloride was redissolved in water, and
reprecipitated by saturation of the neutral fluid with salt. After
three or four reprecipitations, the protocaseose was considered suffi-
ciently pure.

In this digestion, there appeared to be present more heterocaseose
and dyscaseose than in our former experiments, as was evidenced by
the small insoluble residues remaining each time the precipitated
protocaseose was redissolved in water. These residues of hetero- and

and Casein Peptone. 81

dyscaseose were very small, but still sufficiently laro-e to enable us
to make out their general characters. Similarly, Dr. Thierfelder*
found in the purification of his protocaseose, or " propeptone I" as
he terms it, a small, insoluble residue each time he dissolved the
sodium chloride precipitate in water. It would appear, therefore,
that in a vigorous or long continued digestion there is a much greater
probability of the hetero body being formed than when the ferment
is allowed to act only a short time on the casein. This, however, is
contrary to Neumeister's views regarding the order of formation of
the proteoses.

In order to free the precipitated protocaseose from salt and any
adhering heterocaseose, it was dissolved in water and dialyzed until
all chloride was removed. The neutral solution was then concen-
trated to a syrup, and the proto body precipitated by alcohol.
During the concentration of the fluid, a gummy-like mass separated,
similar tothe separation of protoelastose. This, however, dissolved
more or less completely as the mixture cooled. The precipitated
caseose, after being extracted several times with alcohol and with
warm ether, was partially dried, ground to a fine powder, re-
extracted with ether in a fat extractor and finally dried at 110° C.
until of constant weight.

On analysis it gave the following results :

Protocaseose A.

I. 0-4947 gram substance gave 0-9794 gram CO„ = 53-98 per cent. C.

II. 0-380-2 gram substance gave 0-2397 gram H.,O = 7-00 per cent. H.

III. 0-3862 gram substance gave 0-2467 gram H.,O = 7-09 per cent.
H and 0'7670gram CO„i=54-15 per cent. C.

IV. 0-4953 gram substance gave 64-8 c. c. N at 20-8° C. and
760-3 mm pressure = 15-72 per cent. N.

V. 0-3764 gram substance gave 50-1 c. c. N at 22-5° C. and 760-6
mm pressure = 15-95 per cent. N.

VI. 0-4599 gram substance gave 0-0046 gram ash = 1-00 per cent.

VII. 0-4103 gram substance gave 0-0041 gram ash = 0-99 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

C 54-53 54-69 ..- --.. 54-61

H .... 7-1] 7-07 ' 7-11

N .... 15-88 16-11 15-99

* Zur Kenntniss der Cfiseinpeptone, Zeitsclirifit fur ph3'siologiselie Chemie, x, p. 577.
Tkans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 11 Nov., 1888.

82 R. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein D^speptone,

This protocaseose is thus seen to have a higher percentage of car-
bon than the proto bodies previously* studied, although one prod-
uct was then obtained with 53-93 per cent. C, 7' 1 7 per cent. H, and
16-05 per cent, N.

In reactions, likewise, this protocaseose differs somewhat from the
protocaseoses previously obtained, and as the characters of the pres-
ent body have been verified by the reactions of several other prod-
ucts similarly prodiiced, we are led to believe in their constancy.
Moistened with water, the powdered protocaseose becomes immedi-
ately gummy and soon dissolves to a perfectly clear fluid, which on
addition of considerable water becomes decidedly cloudy or tur-
bid. Treated with a large amount of water at the outset, the pro-
tocaseose dissolves more slowly, giving a more or less turbid fluid.
In dilute acid and in dilute sodium carbonate it dissolves to a per-
fectly clear fluid.

Towards heat, aqueous solutions of protocaseose act exactly like
protoelastose. Even when warmed very gently, the solution be-
comes quickly turbid and if concentrated gives more or less of a floccu-
lent precipitate. On cooling, the turbidity disappears, reappearing
as the fluid is heated. Like protoelastose also, a solution of the
caseose body on being rapidly concentrated deposits more or
less of the substance as a gummy mass, which, however, will dis-
solve in cold water, or if the fluid is not too concentrated will dis-
solve in the mother liquid as it cools. Dilute acetic acid added to
an aqueous solution of protocaseose gives no precipitate whatever,
but potassium ferrocyanide added to the acid fluid gives a heavy
precipitate.

Dilute hydrochloric acid produces no precipitate.

Dilute nitric acid added to an aqueous solution of the caseose
gives a heavy white precipitate, which on gently warming, quickly
dissolves while the fluid takes on a faint pink or rose color, wliich
on further warming changes to a bright yellow or reddish yellow
color. If the nitric acid solution is not warmed too long, the pre-
cipitate reappears as the mixture cools.

Solution of cupric sulphate gives a heavy, greenish white precipi-
tate when added to an aqueous solution of protocaseose.

As already stated, the first precipitates of protocaseose obtained
by saturating the neutralized digestive fluid with salt, were not en-
tirely soluble in water; a small residue remained, apparently

* See Chittenden and Painter. Studies from Laboratory of Physiological Chem-
istry, Yale University, vol. ii, p. 197.

and Casein Pejitone. 83

wholly insoluble. This residue, whicli by analogy should consist of
hetero and dyscaseose was somewhat soluble in salt solution and
wholly soluble in dilute sodium carbonate and dilute acid, both acetic
and hydrochloric, even dissolving in 0-2 per cent, hydrochloric acid.
It was dissolved in sodium carbonate, the fluid neutralized without
giving any precipitate, and dialyzed until the sodium chloride was
entirely removed. The neutral and clear fluid was then concentrated
to a syrup, precipitated by alcohol and the precipitate dried at 110° C.
On treatment with cold water, it was now found soluble to a large
extent, though a certain amount of gummy matter was still insolu-
ble. The soluble portion showed all of the reactions of the proto
body ; the solution being rendered turbid by heat, clear again on
cooling, and giving in the cold a heavy precipitate with nitric acid,
soluble when heated. This behavior of the insoluble heterocaseose
towards dilute sodium carbonate would seem to imply a conversion
of this substance into protocaseose, or perhaps a reconversion of the
coagulated heterocaseose dyscaseose, into heterocaseose proper.

Acetic acid precipitate.

On adding a little 30 per cent, acetic acid to the oi'iginal salt-
saturated filtrate from the first sodium chloride precipitate of proto-
caseose, etc., a heavy, flocculent precipitate settled out, which in
amount far exceeded the protocaseose and which on standing, soon
became gummy. Excess of acid was avoided, as the precipitate
was somewhat soluble in a large amount of the reagent. The
gummy mass, after being washed as thoroughly as possible with
saturated salt solution, was treated with cold water, in which the
greater portion of the substance dissolved, the solution made neu-
tral, dialyzed, concentrated to a syrup, and the substance precipitated
with alcohol. It was then thoroughly extracted with ether and
finally dried at 110° C.

In reactions, it diftered decidedly from protocaseose; in water
it was quickly and completely soluble and the solution when heated
gave no coagulum whatever, or at the most only the slightest ap-
proach to a turbidity.

Dilute nitric acid, in the cold, gave no precipitate ; when heated, the
acid fluid changed to a reddish yellow color, which quickly turned
yellow.

With acetic acid, an aqueous solution of the substance remained
perfectly clear. Potassium ferrocyanide, however, when added to
the acid fluid gave a heavy precipitate.

84 R. H. Chittenden. — Caseoses, Caaein Dyspeptone^

Saturation of the aqueous solution with salt gave a slight turbidity.
Cupric sulphate gave a heavy precipitate, soluble in excess.
On analysis, the substance gave the following results, which show
a composition quite different from that of protocaseose.

Acetic Acid Precipitate A.

I. 0*4629 gram substance gave 0-2812 gram H„0=r6'74 per cent.
H and 0-8608 gram 00^=50-71 per cent. C.

II. 0-3277 gram substance gave 0-1977 gram H2O = 6'70 ])er cent.
H and 0-GOoO gram CO3=50-34 per cent. C.

III. 0-4253 gram substance gave 53-1 c. c. N at 130" C. and 761-8
mm pressui-e=: 15-01 per cent. N.

IV. 0-4843 gram substance gave 60-8 c. c. N at 13-0° C. and
760-8 mm pressure= 15-07 per cent. N.

V. 0-3649 gram substance gave 0-0108 gram ash = 2-96 per cent.

VI. 0-3947 gram substance gave 0*0124 gram ash = 3-14 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

C 52-30 51-92 .-.- 5S-10

H 6-96 6-90 6-93

N 15-48 15-54 .15-51

As previously stated, the above original precipitate produced by
acetic acid was not entirely soluble in water. A small residue
remained, which after being washed with water was dissolved in
dilute sodium carbonate, and the solution neutralized with dilute
hydrochloric acid, without yielding any neutralization precipitate.
The solution was then dialyzed, concentrated to a syrup and the
substance precipitated by alcohol. It was now found, to a great
extent, soluble in water, the solution showing no turbidity by heat
and giving no precipitate with nitric acid. Cupric sulphate gave a
heavy precipitate, and dilute acetic acid added to the aqueous solu-
tion produced quite a heavy precipitate, not readily soluble in excess
of the acid. The amount of substance was too small to admit of
analysis, and the reactions are hardly sufficient to identify it. It is
evidently not heterocaseose, for it is only the acetic acid compound
that is insoluble in water, not the caseose substance itself. In many
respects it appears like casein dyspeptone, and as this substance
is precipitated by saturation of its aqueous solution with ammonium
sulphate and not by sodium chloride, the presence of a trace of this
body might not be impossible.

and Casein Peptone. 85

Amnwniiun sulphate precipitate.

On adding ammonium sulphate in substance to the above salt-
saturated acetic acid fluid, a slight gummy precipitate was obtained,
readily and completely soluble in water, and which, after removal of
the salts by dialysis and concentration of the fluid, was precipitated
by alcohol. In reactions it did not differ materially from the body
obtained by precipitation with acetic acid, except that with cupric
sulphate only a slight precipitate was produced. With acetic acid
and potassium ferrocyanide, on the other hand, a distinct precipitate
Avas obtained, while with nitric acid in the cold no turbidity whatever
was produced.

In composition, however, it differed decidedly from the preceding
preparations, although as it contained considerable ash, nearly 10 per
cent., the result perhaps can be considered only as an approximation
to the truth.

Following is the percentage composition of the ash-free substance :

Average.

48-23

6-94.

15-63 15-75 15-69

This body, which by analogy should be nearly pure deutero-
caseose, evidently approaches much nearer to our conception of a
true casein peptone than any of the preceding preparations. Another
body, however, has been obtained with a still lower content of
carbon and with reactions still more closely approximating to true
peptone.

In the first precipitation of the caseoses fi-om this digestion by
saturation of the original fluid with ammonium sulphate, it will be
remembered that a small amount of a second gummy precipitate was
obtained on heating the cold saturated ammonium sulphate filtrate.
This gummy precipitate of a caseose body, after purification by
dialysis and precipitation with alcohol, was found to consist of a
substance extremely soluble in water, the solution giving no precipi-
tate with acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide, neither with nitric
acid nor with cupric sulphate. After being dried at 110° C. it gave
on analysis the following results :

I. 0*7280 gram substance gave 0-4239 gram 11.^0=0-46 per cent.
H and 1*2160 grams 00^ = 45 -54 per cent. C.

II. 0*5020 gram substance gave 0-2905 gram 1120 = 6*40 per cent.
H and 0*8442 gram C0„ = 45'85 per cent. C.

c

48.33

48-13

H

6*88

7-01

N

86 R. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspe^'itone,

III. 0-3291 gram substance gave 42-1 c. c. N at 13-9° C. and
756 mm pressure = 15-33 per cent. N.

IV. 0-6835 gram substance gave 87*0 c. c. N at 14-5° C. and
756 mm pressure= 15*30 per cent. N.

V. 0-5370 gram substance gave 0*0230 gram asli=4*28 per cent.

VI. 0-3525 gram substance gave 0-0154 gram ash = 4*36 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

C 47-57 47-87 .... 47-7^

H 6-75 6-70 .... 6-73

N .... 15-99 15-96 15-97

This substance, since it is precipitable by ammonium sulpliate,
cannot be considered a true peptone, yet in composition it closely
approaches both the ampho- and antipeptone from fibrin,* which it
also resembles somewhat in reactions, except in its behavior towards
ammonium sulphate.

It is thus evident from the foregoing, that in this active and com-
paratively long continued digestion there is a much smaller amount
of protocaseose present than was found in our former experiments.
Indeed, deuterocaseose appears to predominate, while at the same
time the protocaseose is modified both in composition and reactions,
due in part without doubt, to adhering heterocaseose. Further,
we are inclined to consider the presence of at least two forms of deu-
terocaseose. We have generally considered that a proto body is never
completely precipitated by saturation of its aqueous solution with
salt, and that consequently the precipitate produced by acid in the
salt-saturated fluid must be a mixture of proto and deuteroproteose, and
this we have usually found to be the case. In the present diges-
tion, however, the acetic acid precipitate contained only a very small
amount of protocaseose, for as previously stated this precipitate when
purified gave only a slight turbidity on saturation of its aqueous solu-
tion with salt and no precipitate whatever with nitric acid ; both of
which reactions would indicate freedom from any large amount of pro-
tocaseose. This view is further substantiated by the great difference
in the percentage of carbon of the two bodies. To be sure we have,
with Nenmeister, looked on the cupric sulphate reaction as a means
of distinguishing between proto and deuteroalbumose, but it does
not necessarily follow that the same reaction will hold good for all
proteoses. The acetic acid precipitate does indeed give a strong

* Kviline and Cbittenden, Studies, vol. ii, p. 40.

and Casein Peptone. 87

reaction with cupric sulphate, but the striking differences in composi-
tion and reactions between the purified sodium cliloride precipitate
and the acetic acid precipitate (when freed from acid) point to a
totally different nature, and we are inclined to consider the latter as
a deutero body, probably contaminated with a little protocaseose,
and for convenience we propose to call it a deuterocaseose.

It is unquestionably very difficult, if not almost impossible, to isolate
the individual caseoses in a state of perfect purity. Whenever one
is precipitated, it usually brings down with it more or less of any
other caseose present and such admixtures are very hard to remove.
It is, we think, owing to this fact that we have not been able to
obtain a deuterocaseose sufficiently free from protocaseose as not to
give any precipitate on saturation with sodium chloride.

That form of caseose in this digestion which was not precipitated
by salt, or by salt and acetic acid, but which appeared on addition of
ammonium sulphate in the cold, is probably a mixture of a deutero and
and what we term (3 deuterocaseose, with possibly an intermediate
body.

The name (3 deuterocaseose, we apply to that caseose not readily
precipitable by saturation with ammonium sulphate in the cold, and
which is generally found in a greater or less quantity in the filtrate
from the precipitate produced by saturation with ammonium sulphate.
It is precipitated fairly pure, as a sticky gum, by simply boiling the
saturated ammonium sulphate filtrate and is especially characterized
by its low content of carbon, and by its non-precipitation with acetic
acid and potassium ferrocyanide, with nitric acid, and with cupric sul-
phate. It stands, unquestionably, nearer to peptone than a deu-
terocaseose and is doubtless formed from the latter by the continued
action of the ferment.

Digestion B.

In this digestion, 2 kilos, of moist casein were warmed at 40° C.
for eight days, with about 5 litres of 0*4 per cent, hydrochloric acid
containing an active pepsin solution, after which the mixture was
partially neutralized with sodium carbonate and filtered from the
dyspeptone. The clear fluid was then made exactly neutral (no neu-
tralization precipitate) and concentrated to a thin syrup. When cold,
proto and heterocaseose were directly precipitated by satm-ation
of the solution with salt. Protocaseose was purified by repeated
precipitation with salt, etc., as described under A. In this process,
the same insoluble residues of hetero and dyscaseose were met witii

88 H. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone,

as in the previous digestion. The purified protocaseose showed the
same peculiar reactions as protocaseose A., viz: with nitric acid a
heavy white precipitate, soluble on warming; with heat alone, a dis-
tinct turbidity or coagulum, disappearing as the solution cooled ; and
giving with a large amount of water a more or less turbid fluid, from
whiich on standing a little gummy matter separated.

Dried at 110° C. and analyzed, the following results were obtained.

Protocaseose B.

I. 0-3470 gram substance gave 0-2192 gram H.,O = 7'02 per cent. H.

II. 0-2935 gram substance gave 0"1854 gram II„O = 7-01 per cent.
H and 0-5779 gram 002 = 53-69 per cent. C.

III. 0-2952 gram substance gave 0-5853 gram CO^ = bA-0l jDer
cent. C.

lY. 0-2989 gram substance gave 38-6 c. c. N at 13-8° C. and
760-1 mm pressure =15*52 per cent. N.

V. 0-5564 gram substance gave 72-8 c.c. N at 13-1° C. and
760*1 mm pressure=15'69 per cent. N.

VI. 0*3594 gram substance gave 0*0047 gram ash=r30 per cent.

VII. .0*3523 gram substance gave 0*0045 gram ash = l*27 per
cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

54-39 54-58

7-10
15*71 15*90 15-80

In composition, therefore, as in reactions, this body is apparently
identical with protocaseose A.

In the oi'iginal salt-saturated filtrate from protocaseose, acetic
acid produced a heavy, gummy precipitate, which was dissolved in
water and purified in the same manner as the corresponding body in
digestion A. Like the latter, it was readily and completely soluble
in water, the solution giving no turbidity whatever by heat, nor on
the addition of either nitric or acetic acid. With cupric sulphate, a
heavy precipitate was formed, as also with acetic acid and potassium
ferrocyanide.

Dried at 110" C it gave the following results on analysis:

Acetic acid precipitate B.

I. 0*3429 gram substance gave 0-2057 gram H.,0 = 6*66 ])er cent.
H and 0*6315 gram CO.,=50*22 per cent. C.

c

54-77

H

7-10

7-09

N

and Casein Peptone. 89

II. 0-4345 gram substance gave 0-2734 gram H^O = 6*72 per cent.
H and 0-8358 gram CO„ = 50-48 per cent. C.

III. 0-3316 gram substance gave 43-5 c. c. N at 13-7" C. and
756-3 mm pressures 15-70 per cent. N.

IV. 0-3258 gram substance gave 43*1 c. c. N at 13 2° C. and 759-1
mm pressure= 15*86 per cent. N.

V. 0-3306 gram substance gave 0-0126 gram ash=3-81 per cent.

VI. 0-2262 gram substance gave 0-0085 gram ash = 3-76 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash -free substance.

Average.
C 53-17 52-43 .... .... 5^-30

H 6-93 6-99 .... .... 6-95

N .... .... 16-32 16-49 16-40

This body appears to differ from a deuterocaseose obtained in
digestion A by nearly 1 per cent, of nitrogen, but in all other respects
is practically identical with it.

As in digestion A, the precipitate first obtained by the addition of
acetic acid was not entirely soluble in water, a residue remained
soluble in dilute sodium carbonate, and which comported itself
exactly like the insoluble residue obtained in the preceding diges-
tion, apparently being a trace of casein dyspeptone.

The original filtrate from the above acetic acid precipitate, on
saturation with ammonium sulphate, gave an additional precipitate,
hardly sufficient for analysis, but which when purified proved to be
identical with the corresponding body fi'om A and like it giving
with cupric sulphate only a very slight precipitate.

It is thus seen that in a vigorous pepsin digestion of casein there
are formed, in addition to dyspeptone and heterocaseose, at least three
distinct caseoses all soluble and differing from each other both in
composition and reactions. As compared with casein, protocaseose
is somewhat peculiar in containing a higher percentage of carbon
than the mother substance. All of the other products show a very
much smaller content of carbon. The relative composition of the
products is shown in the following table :

Casein.

Proto-
caseose
A.

Proto-
caseose
B.

a Deutero-
caseose
A.

a Deutero-
caseose
B.

/? Deutero-
caseose
A.

c

53-30

54-61

54-58

52-10

52-30

47-72

H

7-07

7-11

7-10

6-93

6-95

6-73

N

15-91

15-99

15-80

15-51

16-40

15-97

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VI FF. 12 Nov., 18SS.

90 It. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone,

Protocaseose agrees closely in its content of carbon with the
" propeptone I " of Thicrfelder.* This investigator has separated
from a pepsin digestion of casein, by a process similar to our method
of separating the proto body, a substance to which he gives the
above name and which contained 54'63 per cent, of carbon and 7-45
per cent, of hydrogen. In reactions it was similar to protocaseose,
except that aqueous solutions of the substance remained perfectly
clear on warming. Nitrogen was not determined. Thierfelder also
separated from the filtrate from his " propeptone I," a second body,
by addition of hydrochloric acid, to which he gives the name " pro-
peptone II." This substance, which corresponds to our a deutero-
caseose, he found to contain 49-8 per cent, carbon, 7"1S per cent,
hydrogen and 14-23 per cent, nitrogen. Judging from the method
of separation, however, the body analyzed must liave been an acid
compound of the caseose and not the caseose body itself. In reac-
tions, so far as they are given, the substance was not different from
a deuterocaseose.

b. Caseoses from WeyVs casehi 23eptone.

This commercial product, sent to lis from Germany, we have
examined according to the foregoing methods and have found it, as
might be expected, composed almost entirely of caseoses. It was
completely soluble in water and gave with acetic acid a slight tur-
bidity, somewhat increased by addition of potassium ferrocyanide.
By saturation of its aqueous solution with sodium chloride, only a
comparatively small precipitate was obtained, greatly increased, how-
ever, by addition of acetic acid.

200 grams of the powder were dissolved in water and the caseoses
precipitated collectively by saturation of the fluid with ammonium
sulphate, in the form of a heavy gummy precipitate. On heating
the filtrate from this precipitate of caseoses until a crust of ammo-
nium sulphate formed on the surface of the hot fluid, a second
gummy precipitate gradually separated, which after purification by
dialysis, etc., was finally precipitated by alcohol, and a portion dried
at 110° C. for analysis.

This substance, representing a form of caseose not readily precipi-
table by ammonium sulphate and thus indicating its close approach
to true peptone, is apparently identical with the ft deuterocaseose
similarly obtained in our own digestion, but present here in much

* Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, Band x, p. 585.

and Casein Peptone. 91

larger quantity. In water it was readily and completely soluble,
the solution giving no turbidity whatever by heat, nor with dilute
nitric acid. With cupric sulphate only a very slight turbidity was
produced, and with acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide a corre-
spondingly slight turbidity. Its aqueous solution on being saturated
with salt and then made slightly acid with acetic acid showed a small
flocculent precipitate, doubtless representing the substance which
gave the slight turbidity with cupric sulphate and potassium ferro-
cyanide, viz : a deuterocaseose. On analysis the following results
were obtained :

ft deuterocaseose from WeyVs casein peptone.

I. 0-3641 gram substance gave 0*2121 gram H„0 = r47 per cent.
II and 0-6087 gram CO^=45-58 per cent. C.

II. 0-4600 gram substance gave 0-2708 gram H„0 = 6-54 per cent.
H and 0-7652 gram CO.^ = 45-36 per cent. C.

III. 0-3298 gram substance gave 42-2 c. c. N at 13-9° C. and
755*4 mm pressure =15-31 per cent. N.

IV. 0-3418 gram substance gave 43-5 c. c. N at 14-4° C. and
756-1 mm pressure =15-31 per cent. N.

V. 0-3514 gram substance gave 0-0153 gram ash =4-35 per cent.

VI. 0-3599 gram substance gave 0-0155 gram ash =4-30 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash- free substance.

Average.
47-50

_6'79

16-00 15-84 15-92

In composition, therefore, as well as in reactions, this body re-
sembles the ft deutero described under A, and like it is especially
characterized by its exceedingly low percentage of carbon.

F'rom the first ammonium sulphate precipitate of caseoses, proto-
caseose Avas separated by saturation of the aqueous solution of the
above precipitate with salt. As in similar precipitates from the
preceding digestions, there was considerable heterocaseose present,
showing itself as an insoluble residue when the sodium chloride pre-
cipitate was dissolved in water for reprecipitation. Purified after
the methods previously described, the protocaseose showed the usual
reactions characteristic of this body, its aqueous solution growing
turbid when heated, giving a precipitate with nitric acid, etc.

Dried at 110° C. it gave on analysis the following results :

c

47-61

47-40

H

6-76

6-83

N

92 M. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone^

Protocaseose, from WeyVs casein 2)eptone.

I. 0-4291 gram substance gave 0-259'7 gram Iljd^%-12 percent.
H and 0-8140 gram CO.,=51-'70 per cent. C.

II. 0-364'7 gram substance gave 0-2155 gram H„Or=6'56 per cent.
H and 0-6935 gram 00^=51-85 per cent. C.

III. 0-4115 gram substance gave 52-5 c. c. N at 136° C. and
760-8 ram pressure= 15-11 per cent. N.

IV. 0-7730 gram substance gave 96-9 c. c. N at 13-8° C. and 761-2
mm pressure:z= 15-10 per cent N.

V. 0-2901 gram substance gave 0-0121 gram ash=:4-16 per cent.

VI. 0-2959 gram substance gave 0*0120 gram ash=:4-05 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

c

53-93

54-08

1

54-01

H

7-01

6-84

6-92

N

15-75

15-70

15-72

Addition of salt-saturated acetic acid to the filtrate from proto-
caseose, gave a moderately heavy, gummy precipitate which, after
purification and removal of the acid, was completely soluble in
water, the solution showing no turbidity by heat, but giving a slight
turbidity with dilute nitric acid. It gave all of the reactions men-
tioned as characteristic of this precipitate. It w^as not analyzed.

The original filtrate from the acetic acid precipitate gave on sat-
uration with ammonium sulphate, a small gummy precipitate which
after purification was found wholly soluble in water, the solution
giving no turbidity by heat and no precipitate with nitric or acetic
acid. With acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide, however, a dis-
tinct turbidity was produced and with cupric sulphate a heavy pre-
cipitate. The substance was not analyzed.

It is thus evident that Weyl's so-called casein peptone, however it
may be prepared, contains essentially the same kind of caseoses
found in our own digestions with pepsin-hydrochloric acid. In addi-
tion, a small amount of a substance was found not precipitable by
saturation with ammonium sulphate and Avhich gave no precipitate
with nitric or acetic acid, nor with acetic acid and potassium ferro-
cyanide, and with cupric sulphate only a slight turbidity. This
body, which doubtless was amphopeptone mixed with a little
caseose, was obtained in too small quantity for analysis.

and Casein Peptone. 93

c. Caseoses formed hy dilute sulpJmric acid at 100° C.

Two kilos, of pure moist casein were heated in a flask with 2
litres of water and 100 grams of pure sulphuric acid at 100° C. for
seven hours. The residue of casein and antialbumid was again
warmed with a like amount of fresh acid and water for six hours.
The acid fluids were united, neutralized with sodium carbonate with-
out giving any noticeable precipitate, and then evaporated until
moderately concentrated. On cooling, considerable tyrosin and
leucin crystallized from the fluid. With cupric sulphate, the solution
gave a heavy precipitate which dissolved in sodium hydroxide with
a reddish color. Sodium chloride and ammonium sulphate both pro-
duced heavy ])recipitates when added to saturation.

The caseoses were separated from the fluid by saturation in the
cold with ammonium sulphate, and from this precipitate, protocaseose
was separated by solution in water and precipitation with sodium
chloride. The sodium chloride precipitate was dissolved in water,
the substance roprecipitated by saturation with salt, and again dis-
solved in water to which a trace of sodium carbonate was added
to make the mixture quite neutral. On dialysis, a small amount of
gummy heterocaseose separated, mixed with a little tyrosin. The
clear fluid, now free from salts, was concentrated on a water-bath.
As the evaporation advanced, a brown gummy mass settled out,
which was, however, readily soluble in cold water, for as the concen-
trated fluid cooled at night the gummy matter entirely disappeared,
reappearing as the fluid was again heated. The final concentrated
fluid was treated with alcohol, the gummy precipitate boiled with
alcohol repeatedly to free it from any adhering tyrosin, and finally
extracted with ether and dried at 110° C.

Analyzed, it gave the following results :

Frotocaseose, formed by sulphuric acid.

I. 0"4405 gram substance gave 0.2*718 gram H^OrzG'SS per cent.
H and 0-8756 gram CO„=54"20 per cent. C.

II. 0*;3783 gram substance gave 0'2341 gram H„0 = 6'87 per cent.
H and 0.7604 gram C02=ro4-81 per cent. C.

III. 0*3786 gram substance gave 48-3 c. c. N at 17-5° C. and 753*4
mm pressure= 14*93 per cent. N.

IV. 0*3780 gram substance gave 47*8 c. c. N at 17*0° C. and 754*0
mm pressure=:14*84 per cent. N.

V. 0*3701 gram substance gave 0*0113 gram ash = 3*05 per cent.

VI. 0*5112 gram substance gave 0*0154 gram ash = 3*02 per cent.

94 M. II. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Di/speptone,

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

C 55-90 56-50 56-20

H 7-07 7-09 .... .... 7-08

N --.- -..- 15-40 15-31 15-S6

Alter being dried at "110° C. the substance dissolved with diffi-
culty in water, leaving a large residue, but was readily and com-
pletely soluble in 0-2 per cent, hydrochloric acid and in 0*2 per cent,
sodium carbonate. From the alkaline solution it was reprecipitated
by hydrochloric acid, and not readily dissolved by an excess of the
acid. Aqueous solution of the substance was rendered turbid by heat,
the turbidity disappearing as the solution cooled. With dilute nitric
acid, a white precipitate was formed, readily soluble on warming and
I'eappearing as the solution cooled. Acetic acid and potassium ferro-
cyanide gave a heavy precipitate.

Thus in many respects this body resembles protocaseose formed
by pepsin-hydrochloric acid, but is apparently characterized by a
somewhat higher percentage of carbon.

The filtrate from the original sodium chloride precipitate, treated
with salt-saturated 30 per cent, acetic acid, gave a flocculent, chang-
ing to gummy precipitate which was readily and completely soluble
in water. The solution made exactly neutral was dialyzed without
showing any evidence of a hetero-like body, finally concentrated and
precipitated by alcohol. After being dried at 110° C, the substance
was only partially soluble in water. The aqueous solution was ren-
dered turbid by heat, clear again on cooling, and gave with nitric
acid a heavy white precipitate as also with acetic acid and potassium
ferrocyanide.

Analyzed, it gave the following results :

Acetic acid precqntate of easeose (a deuterocaseose ?) formed hy
dilute sidphnric acid.

I. 0-4056 gram substance gave 0-2383 gram H„0 = 6-52 per cent.
li and 0-7733 gram CO^=5l-99 per cent. C.

II. 0-4697 gram substance gave 0*2740 gram H,^0 = 6-48 per cent.
H and 0'8910 gram CO„ = 51-73 per cent. C.

III. 0-5379 gram substance gave 66-5 c. c. N at 14-9° C. and 752-1
mm pressure= 14-58 per cent. N.

IV. 0*4150 gram substance gave 0-0210 gram ash = 5'06 per cent.

V. 0*5136 gram substance gave 0*0247 gram ash=4*80 per cent.

mid Casein Peptone. 95

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

C S4-68 54-42 54-55

H 6-86 6-81 .... 6-84.

N ---- 15-33 15-33

This caseose, instead of being a pure cleutero boclj^, appears to be
a mixture of proto and a deutero as indicated by its behavior towards
heat and nitric acid ; indeed, the behavior of this acetic acid precipi-
tate resembles the acetic acid precipitate of caseose obtained in our
previous work, where the two bodies were plainly precipitated to-
gether. In composition, while it agrees closely with protocaseose
formed by pepsin-hydrochloric acid, it has a higher content of carbon
than the corresponding a deutero, but bears about the same relation
to the sulphuric acid protocaseose as the a deutero formed by pepsin
to its corresponding protocaseose.

On boiling the original ammonium sulphate-saturated filtrate, a
second gummy precipitate gradually separated from the hot fluid.
This caseose, after purification by the usual methods and drying
at 110° C, was entirely soluble in hot and cold water, and
was especially characterized by yielding with acetic acid a heavy
white precipitate, soluble in excess of the acid. With nitric acid it
also gave a white precipitate, soluble in excess of acid. Cupric
sulphate likewise gave a heavy precipitate. The cold water solution
was not rendered turbid by heat.

Analyzed it gave the following results:

yS deuterocaseose, formed hy dilute sulplmrlc acid.

I. 0*3952 gram substance gave 0-2308 gram H.,0 = 6-49 per cent,
H and 0*7282 gram GO^=bO-2o per cent. C.

II. 0*3518 gram substance gave 0*2064 gram H.,0 = 6*51 per cent.
H and 0*6440 gram CO„ = 49-92 per cent. C.

III. 0*4727 gram substance gave 59*2 c. c. N at 15-0° C. and
754*9 mm pressure = 14*81 per cent. N.

IV. 0-4279 gram substance gave 0*0233 gram ash = 5*44 per cent.

V. 0*5184 gram substance gave 0*0219 gram ash = 5*38 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.
C 53*10 52-77 .... 52-93

H 6-86 6-89 .... 6-87

N 15.66 15-66

96 i?. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone,

Thus, this body, which corresponds to the ji deuterocaseose
formed by pepsin-acid, has a relatively higher content of carbon and
also varies in certain of its reactions, which resemble rather those
of a deutero, and even the protocaseose of a pepsin digestion, than
those of a genuine ji deutero.

Altogether, the three caseoses separated from the sulphuric acid
solution of casein, while showing a certain general relationship to
the caseoses formed by pepsin-hydrochloric acid, are sufficiently
diflferent in their individual reactions to suggest at least some differ-
ence in their nature.

d. Caseoses formed hy the action of trypsin.

In subjecting casein to the action of trypsin, care was taken that
the ferment solution should be as free as possible from all products
of the self-digestion of the pancreatic tissue. Dried pancreas from
the ox, prepared according to Kiihne's method, was warmed with
0-1 per cent, salicylic acid at 40° C for 24 hours, after which the acid
extract was neutralized and made alkaline with sodium carbonate to
the extent 0-3 per cent. The alkaline solution, well thyniolized, was
warmed at 40° C. for several days in order to convert the albuminous
matters present into easily diffusible products, after which it was
dialyzed in running water for some time, and the solution ultimately
evaporated to dryness at 40° C. This residue, being extracted with
a small volume of water, gives a fairly pure solution of trypsin, free
from objectionable impurities.

In the formation of the caseoses, 2200 grams of pure, moist casein
were soaked in 3 litres of 1 per cent, sodium carbonate for several
days, and the mixture well thymolized to prevent putrefaction. The
trypsin solution was then added, together with some water, and the
whole warmed at 40° C. At first, the mixture was quite limpid, the
casein being dissolved in the alkaline fluid, but after two or three
days, gelatinous lumps began to appear on the bottom of the dish
and finally a soft coagulum appeared on the surface and all through
the mixture, resembling the separation of antialbumid. This coagu-
lum gradually disappeared and at the end of five days the digestion
was stopped, and the alkaline fluid filtered from the undigested resi-
due. The latter was thoroughly washed with thymolized water and
the washings added to the filtrate. This residue of undigested mat-
ter was found to be insoluble in 0-5 per cent, sodium carbonate and
also in 0*2 per cent, hydrochloric acid, but on being warmed with
pepsin-hydrochloric acid it was in time almost completely dissolved.

and Casein Peptone. 97

Foi; separation of the caseoses the digestive fluid was neutralized
with dilute hydrochloric acid, giving only a slight neutralization
precipitate, and the neutral fluid concentrated. When moderately
concentrated, the solution was placed in a cool place for several
days to allow as much of the leucin and tyrosin to crystallize as
possible. The caseoses were then separated from the filtrate, in
the form of a gummy precipitate, by saturation of the fluid with
ammonium sulphate. On boiling the filtrate from the first precipi-
tate, and adding still more ammonium sulphate, a second gummy
precipitate gradually settled out of the hot saturated fluid. This
precipitate was separated from the fluid, the latter being saved for
the detection of any peptone formed, washed with hot saturated
ammonium sulphate solution, then dissolved in water and dialyzed
until all traces of sulphate were removed. In the dialysis, no signs
of any gummy heterocaseose or other like body was noticed. The
caseose was precipitated from the suitably concentrated fluid with
alcohol, boiled repeatedly with alcohol to free it from any adhering
tyrosin, and finally dried at 110° C.

The substance was extremely soluble in water, the fluid remaining
perfectly clear when heated. Acetic acid produced a heavy precipi-
tate, soluble in excess, and in the acid fluid potassium ferrocyanide
gave a heavy precipitate. Dilute nitric acid, added to the aqueous
solution produced a white precipitate readily soluble in excess of acid,
and when heated showed the xanthoprotein reaction.

Cupric sulphate also gave a heavy white precipitate. On analysis,
the following results were obtained :

fi deiiterocaseose, formed by trypsin.

I. 0"3355 gram substance gave 0*1847 gram H30 = 6*ll per cent.
H and 0-5990 gram C02 = 48-68 per cent. C.

II. 0-3459 gram substance gave 0*1871 gram H„O = 6*01 per cent.
H and 0*6120 gram 00^ = 48*24 per cent. C.

III. 0*5399 gram substance gave 63*0 c.c. Nat 13*8° C. and
762*6 mm pressure = 13*63 per cent. N.

IV. 0*4166 gram substance gave by fusion with koh + kno,
0*0300 gram BaSO^=:0*98 per cent. S ; after deducting sulphur of
ash = 0*95 per cent.

V. 0*5496 gram substance gave by fusion with koh + kno,
0*0380 gram BaSO_=0'95 per cent. S ; after deducting sulphur of ash
= 0*91 per cent.

Teans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 13 Nov., 1888

c

53-81

53-31

H

6-76

6.64

N

....

S

o

98 M. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone,

VI. 0-4804 gram substance gave 0-0365 gram = 9-59 per cent.

VII. 0-4272 gram substance gave 0-0405 gram ash=9-43 per cent.

VIII. Ash from 0-8070 gram substance gave 0-0181 gram BaSO^
=0-03 per cent. S,

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

53-36

6-70

15-07 15-07

0-95 0-91 0-93

23-74

100-00

This sample of /5 deutero shows very close agreement in composition
and reactions with the like body formed by dilute sulphuric acid ;
both being characterized by the reaction with acetic acid and show-
ing, by their reactions and composition, a closer relationship to the
proto-like bodies than their non-precipitation by ammonium sulphate
would appear to warrant. In composition, however, this body
shows a much smaller percentage of cai'bon than the caseose precipi-
tated by acetic acid.

For separation of the other caseoses formed in this digestion,
the first ammonium sulphate precipitate was dissolved in water
and protocaseose precipitated by saturation of the solution with
sodium chloride. The precipitate, which was not very heavy, was
purified by reprecipitation and dialysis. On dissolving the first salt
precipitate in water quite a little residue was noticed, soluble in
dilute sodium carbonate, but readily precipitated by the least trace
of acid. The final neutral solution was concentrated, giving when
heated a heavy coagulum which finally came together as a gummy
mass. The clear fluid, separated from the gum, gave still another
coagulum as the heating was continued. On cooling, the gummy
matter readily dissolved. As the evaporation continued and the
fluid became concentrated the gummy matter dissolved even in the
hot fluid, and the caseose was finally precipitated while hot with
alcohol, and the precipitate boiled repeatedly with alcohol for the
complete removal of leucin and tyrosin.

In reactions, this body was apparently identical with protocaseose
formed by pepsin-hydrochloric acid, except that with acetic acid and
also with hydrochloric acid it yielded a heavy white pi-ecipitate, sol-
uble in excess of acid. In water it dissolved almost completely,
the solution, however, becoming turbid when heated and if sufficiently

and Casein Peptone, 99

concentrated giving a gummy , deposit as the heating continued.
Further, the reaction with heat was the only respect in which this
body differed from the preceding ammonium sulphate pi-ecipitate.
Owing to insufficient quantity it was not analyzed.

In the filtrate from the first sodium chloride precipitate, a second
caseose was precipitated by addition of a little 30 per cent, acetic
acid. At first it separated as a flocculent precipitate, but on stand-
ing changed to a gummy mass, which dissolved more or less readily
in water, and completely so when a little sodium carbonate was added
to neutral reaction. After reprecipitation, the aqueous solution of the
substance was neutralized, dialyzed, the solution concentrated without
separation of any gummy matter, and the substance finally precipitated
with alcohol. The precipitate was boiled repeatedly with alcohol and
finally dried at 110° C. The dried substance was readily soluble in
water and also in dilute acetic acid, potassium ferrocyanide producing
in the latter solution a slight turbidity only. Added to an aqueous
solution of the substance, acetic acid produced a heavy white pre-
cipitate readily soluble in excess of the acid. Nitric acid, likewise,
produced a heavy white precipitate not so readily soluble in excess.
Cupric sulphate also gave a heavy white precipitate. The aqueous
solution of the caseose gave no turbidity whatever, when heated.

Analyzed it yielded the following results :

Acetic acid precipitate of caseose {a deuterocaseose f) formed by

trypsin.

I. 0-5594 gram substance gave 0-3300 gram H.p = 6-55 per cent.
H and 1-0924 grams CO^=53-25 per cent. C.

II. 0-3670 gram substance gave 0-2157 gram H„0 = 6-53 per cent.
II and 0-7158 gram CO^=53-19 per cent. C.

III. 0-3811 gram substance gave 44-4 c. c. N at 12-8° C. and
765-1 mm pressure =14-07 per cent. N.

IV. 0-2848 gram substance gave 33-0 c. c. ISl at 13-4° C. and
765-5 mm pressure =13-98 per cent. N.

V. 0-4351 gram substance gave 0-0230 gram ash =5-28 per cent.

VI. 0-4033 gram substance gave 0-0210 gram ash =5-26 per cent.

Percentage conqwsition of ash-free substance.

Average.
C 56-20 56-14 .-. ..-- 56-17

H 6-91 6-89 .... 6-90

N .... .... 14-85 14-75 U'SO

100 M. II. ChUtenden — Caseoses, Casein. Dyspeptone,

It is thus obvious from the foregoing that by the action of trypsin,
caseoses are formed of the same general nature as those formed by
the action of pepsin-hydrochloric acid, and by hot dilute sulphuric
acid, but with higher contents of carbon.

In other digestions with trypsin, made especially for the prepara-
tion of casein peptone, these caseoses were again separated and the
foregoing reactions verified. The quantities, however, were too
small to admit of their analysis.

III. Casein peptone ; — from experiments by Charles Norris, Jr., Ph.B.

Supersaturation of a digestive fluid with ammonium sulphate,
under proper conditions, suffices to entirely remove the preliminary
products of proteolytic action. Proper conditions, however, are not
obtained by simply adding the ammonivim salt to a cold fluid, for as
has been already pointed out an additional precipitate of proteose
can nearly always be obtained, by heating the cold saturated solution
until a thick crust of the ammonium salt forms on the hot fluid. In
the present state of knowledge, we assume as peptone any amorphous
product of proteolytic action precipitable by alcohol, and not pre-
cipitable by heating with ammonium sulphate added to saturation.
Unquestionably, the albumose precipitated only by long boiling of a
saturated ammonium sulphate solution, is much nearer to true pep-
tone than those bodies more easily precipitated, but at present we
are not inclined to accept as true peptone any body precipitable by
ammonium sulphate under any conditions whatever. In the present
series of experiments we have aimed to prepare a casein peptone,
by the action of trypsin, entirely free from albumose in order to
study its composition and reactions.

In the digestion of casein with trypsin, described in the preced-
ing section, the filtrate from the ammonium sulphate saturation was
heated for some time and the slight gummy film of caseose sep-
arated, after which as much of the ammonium sulphate as possible
was removed by alternate crystallization, treatment with alcohol, etc.
The last traces of the ammonium salt were removed by long con-
tinued dialysis in running water, and when finally the fluid gave no
reaction with barium chloride it was evaporated to a syrup and pre-
cipitated with alcohol. The precipitated peptone was freed from
any adhering tyrosin and leucin by repeated treatment with boiling
alcohol, and finally dried at 110° C. until of constant weight. This
proved a long operation. The peptone was so exceedingly Hygro-
scopic and held on so tenaciously to the water, that it was only after

and Casein Peptone. 101

long-continued drying that a constant weight was reached and then
the odor was strongly suggestive of partial dissociation. In a pre-
vious article* on peptone, attention was called to the peculiar odor of
valerianic acid almost invariably noticed when the fibrin peptone was
dried at 110° C, but in that case it was found impossible to bring
the product to a constant w^eight. With casein peptone, the same
odor was noticeable on drying the product for analysis, but after a
few days heating at 110° C, the weight of the pi-oduct remained
fairly constant.

On analysis, the casein peptone yielded the following results :

Casein antipeptone A.

I. 0 5792 gram substance gave 0*3185 gram H^O — 6'11 per cent.
H and 0-9951 gram CO,,=46'85 per cent. C.

II. 0'4692 gram substance gave 0-2562 gram H„O = 6-07 per cent.
H and 0-8060 gram C0.^ = 46-84 per cent C.

III. 0-4357 gram substance gave 55-5 c. c. N at 14-0° C. and 762*0
mm pressure = 15-27 per cent. N.

IV. 0-6534 gram substance gave 83*0 c. c. N at 14*0° C. and 761*0
mm pressure^ 15*18 per cent. N.

V. 0*9703 gram substance gave 0 0656 gram ash=6*76 per cent.

VI. 0*4939 gram substance gave 0-0326 gram ash = 6*60 per cent.

VII. 0*7032 gram substance gave by fusion with koh + knOj
0*0386 gram BaSO^=0-75 per cent. S.

VIII. 0-6526 gram substance gave by fusion with koh + knGj
0-0337 gram BaSO^=0-71 per cent. S.f

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

C 49-94 49-93 .... .... j^9-94

H 6-51 6-50 .--. 6-51

N .... .... 16*35 16*26 .... ... 16-30

S .... 0*70 0-66 0-68

O - ^6-57

100-00

Somewhat to our surprise, on testing the purified and dried pep-
tone, we found that its aqueous solution gave a heavy wiiite precipi-
tate with nitric acid, soluble in excess of acid ; likewise, a heavy
precipitate with acetic acid, also soluble in excess ; with cupric sul-

* Kuhne and Chittenden, Peptone. Studies, vol. ii.

f The ash contained only a slight iinweighable trace of sulphate.

102 B. H. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone,

phate a heavy precipitate; and on saturation with ammoninm sul-
phate in the cold an abundant gummy precipitate, the latter plainly
indicating the presence of caseose. As the product originally
gave no precipitate with ammonium sulphate, it would apparently
follow that the peptone hy long drying at 110° C. had been, in
part, reconverted into caseose, and as the solution gave no turbid-
ity by heat it would imply that the caseose formed by the recon-
version of the peptone was the deutero body. Results similar to
these were obtained by Kiihne and Chittenden with fibrin peptone.

In a second digestion of trypsin, 1 kilo, of moist casein was
warmed at 40° C. with 4 litres of 0*6 per cent, sodium carbonate
solution containing trypsin, well thymolized, for one week. On
the third day, the gelatinous coagulum already described made its
appearance, but gradually disappeared and at the end of the week
there was only a very small residue remaining. The neutralized and
concentrated digestive fluid, freed from more or less tyrosin by cool-
ing and crystallization, was in this case treated with rock salt to sat-
uration, yielding, however, only a small precipitate of proto- and
heterocaseose, which on purification agreed in reactions with the
caseoses previously described. Addition of salt-saturated acetic
acid to the sodium chloride filtrate from the foregoing caseoses, failed
to give any precipitate whatever, and as the saturation of the fluid
with ammonium sulphate gave only a slight gummy precipitate it is
evident that in this digestion the casein was almost completely con-
verted into peptone. In order to be quite sure of the complete re-
moval of everything precipitable by the ammonium salt the mixture
was boiled for some time with an excess of ammonium sulphate, and
the filtrate treated as described under peptone A for the complete
removal of tyrosin and ammonium sulphate.

The final product was exceedingly gummy and parted with the
last traces of adhering alcohol very slowly. In fact, we found it best
to dissolve the final alcoholic precipitate of peptone in a little water,
and to drive ofi" the alcohol from the solution by heat, after which the
fluid was evaporated and the gummy peptone finally transformed
into a friable mass by drying on a water-bath, and at last completely
dried at 110° C. After its final precipitation with alcohol, an aque-
ous solution of the peptone gave no precipitate whatever, with nitric
or acetic acid, neither with acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide
nor with cupric sulphate, or at the most nothing more than a faint
turbidity. After being dried at 110° C. until of constant weight,
the product then gave a decided gummy precipitate by saturation

and Casein Peptone. 103

of its aqueous solution with ammonium sulphate, and like peptone A
gave precipitates with nitric and acetic acid and with cupric sul-
phate.

On analysis the following results were obtained :

Casein antipeptone £.

I. 0-3770 gram substance gave 0-2023 gram lrLfi = b-QQ per cent.
H and 0-6535 gram CO„=47-25 per cent. C.

II. 0-2687 gram substance gave 0-1442 gram H„0=5-96 per cent.
H and 0-4667 gram 00^=47-36 per cent. C.

III. 0-3732 gram substance gave 44-9 c. c. N at 14-4° C. and 757-0
mm pressures 14-31 per cent. N.

IV. 0-3801 gram substance gave 46-0 c. c. N at 14-0° C. and 756-0
mm pressure =14 -3 8 per cent. N.

V. 0-4760 gram substance gave 0-0374 gram ash=:7-86 per cent.

VI. 0-5396 gram substance gave 0-0429 gram ash = 7-95 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.

C 51-35 51-42 51-38

H 6-47 6-47 .... ..- 6-47

N 15-54 15-61 15-57

In a third digestion with trypsin, 2 kilos, of casein were warmed at
40° C. for five days with 3 litres of 0-5 per cent, sodium carbonate
containing an active trypsin solution, well thymolized. At the end of
the second day, considerable casein antialbumid separated from the
solution, this time more as a gummy precipitate than as a gelatinous
coagulum. On the sixth day, the alkaline fluid was filtered from
the small undigested residue, neutralized, concentrated, and the
caseoses precipitated by saturation with ammonium sulphate. In
this digestion, there was present only a very small trace of caseose
precipitable by saturation with salt, but considerable precipitable by
salt-saturated acetic acid. After repeated boiling of the ammonium
sulphate-saturated fluid, for complete removal of caseoses, the peptone
remaining was separated, purified and dried as already described.
The prodiict dried at 110° C. gave on analysis the following results.

Casein antipepto7ie C.

I. 0-3104 gram substance gave 0-1720 gram H„0 = 6-15 per cent.
H and 0*5252 gram CO., = 4614 per cent. C.

II. 0-2756 gram substance gave 0-1513 gram H^O = 6-10 per cent.
II and 0-4638 gram CO, = 45 -89 per cent. C.

c

49-64

49-40

H

6-63

6-57

N

104 R. IT. Chittenden — Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone,

III. 0-5432 gram substance gave 68-0 c. c. N at 14-6° C. and
756-4 mm pressure= 14-88 per cent. N.

IV. 0-6280 gram substance gave 0*0449 gram ash = 7-15 per cent.

V. 0*4060 gram substance gave 0-0288 gram ash = 7 -09 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free substance.

Average.
49-52

6-60

15-99 15-99

This peptone, like the preceding, after being dried at 110° C, gave
a small gummy precipitate on saturation of its solution with ammonium
sulphate, and also gave a precipitate with nitric and acetic acid, and
a slight turbidity with cupric sulphate.

In composition, all three of the peptones show a smaller
percentage of carbon than the caseoses formed by trypsin, but
somewhat to our surprise the percentage of carbon is higher
than in some of the caseoses formed by pepsin-hydrochloric acid.
The nature of the substance, however, which at present affords
but little proof that we have to deal with a single body, the
extreme difficulty of obtaining it in a condition of dryness suit-
able for analysis, and the almost utter impossibility of freeing
it from adhering inorganic salts, all tend to throw doubt on the
analytical data as expressing the composition of pure casein pep-
tone. As already stated, there is unquestionably more or less of a
decomposition or change attending the drying of the peptone. So
pronounced is the hygroscopic character of these bodies, that when
partially dried they will gain weight over strong sulphuric acid, and on
being taken from the air bath Avhile drying at 110° C. we often no-
ticed on damp days a hissing noise as if from the rapid absorption of
water. Further, as the drying progressed the odor of valerianic acid
became quite pronounced and on testing the dried product, it was
often found to have an acid reaction so pronounced in many cases as
to give a sour taste to the peptone, in addition to the characteristic
bitter. Before drying, the peptones were usually found to have a
neutral reaction. These facts coupled with the changed behavior of
the product towards ammonium sulphate, point to a change in the
nature of the peptone, which may well be assumed to affect its com-
position, and hence we would have our analytical figures taken with
some allowance.

and Casein Peptone. 105

We also prepared a peptone, entirely non-precipitable by saturation
with ammoniuni sulphate, by boiling 20 grams of pure deuterocaseose
with 500 c, c. of 3 per cent, sulphuric acid for 14 hours. This prepara-
tion, after purification, was too small in quantity for analysis, but in
reactions it showed close agreement with the antipeptones prior to
their long drying at 110° C, viz: non-precipitation by acetic acid and
potassium ferrocyanide, by nitric acid, by cupric sulphate, and by
saturation with ammonium sulphate both in neutral and in acid
solutions.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 14 Nov., If

VI. — Some Expekiments on the Influence op Arsenic and
Antimony on Glycogenic Function and Fatty Degenera-
tion OF THE Liver. By R, H. Chittenden, and J. A.
Blake, B.A., Ph.B.

Saikowsky's* oft-quoted experiments on rabbits with antimonic
and arsenious acids have made clear that in both arsenical and anti-
monial poisoning there is pronounced fatty degeneration of the liver,
with a lessening of the hepatic glycogen and in some cases even a total
disappearance of it. With antimonic acid, Saikowsky found in his
original experiments, that one-half to one gram of antimonic acid or
other preparation of antimony per day, for fourteen or nineteen days
in succession, gave rise to a fatty degeneration embracing the liver,
kidneys, and even the heart. This has been verified by the experi-
ments of Grohe and Hosier, who also state that in the duchy of
Brunswick the peasantry give to the geese, when producing the
famous fatty livers, a certain quantity of the white oxide of antimony
every day.f With arsenic, Saikowsky likewise found that when
rabbits are poisoned by a small dose so as to live from three to six
days, the liver becomes much enlarged and very fatty and the glyco-
genic function nearly or quite abolished.

It is very evident, therefore, that in large quantities both arsenic
and antimony have a special action on tissue changes, particularly
on the liver. In the experiments referred to above, the quantities of
poison given were quite large and with arsenic, particularly, their ad-
ministration was soon followed by death. As neither of these sub-
stances are ordinarily used in medicine for an acute eifect, it seemed to
us of interest to study the action of small doses on the tissue changes of
the liver, with a view to ascertaining whether non-toxic doses of these
two poisons would produce a similar effect. It is ordinarily stated
that in poisoning with antimony, phosphorus, and arsenic the nitro-
genous products of tissue waste appear in the urine in much larger
quantity than normally, owing to the increased decomposition which
is going on. I Experiments of our own, however, have shown that

*Virchow's Archives, Band xxxiv, p. 78.

•)• Quoted from H. C.Wood's Therapeutics, p. 161.

Ij. Brunton's Pharmacology, Therapeutics and Materia Medica, p. :^60.

Chittenden and Slake — Influence of Arsenic and Antimony/. 107

small repeated doses of antimonious oxide are without influence on
the excretion of nitrogen, sulphur, and phosphorus, and that hence
when taken in non-toxic doses it has no noticeable action on proteid
metabolism.* Without doubt, toxic doses do materially aifect the
nutrition of the body, but with a dog of 13 kilos, weight the admin-
istration of repeated doses of antimonious oxide, to the extent of 17
grains in 13 days, led to no apparent change in the amount of nitrogen
etc. excreted, although the presence in the 24 hours' urine of 13-23
milligrams of antimony (Sb) gave evidence of decided absorption.

We have therefore tried a few experiments on rabbits and fowls
to see what effect small Repeated doses of arsenic and antimony would
have on the liver, as indicated by its content of fat, glycogen, and
sugar. The experiments were made in pairs, in which one animal of
each pair served as a control for comparison, while the other, kept
under the same conditions of diet, etc. so far as possible, was fed
each day with arsenic or antimony as the case might be. At the end
of the period both animals were killed and the livers analyzed.
Naturally, the animals of each pair were of the same age, from the
same brood, and so far as possible of the same body weight. During
the experiment they were kept on a weighed diet of cracked corn,
meal, etc., and were confined in suitable cages.

The methods of analysis were as follows : after determining the
body weight, the liver was quickly removed, weighed and sampled
by chopping, 10 grams or thereabouts were then weighed out accu-
rately, dried on a water bath, ground to a fine powder and extracted
in a fat extractor with warm ether until the fat was entirely removed.

For glycogen and sugar, 20-40 grams of the sampled liver were
thoroughly extracted with hot water, (continuous extraction with
water, frequently renewed, for several days) the extracts united, con-
centrated to a very small volume and precipitated with a large excess
of 95 per cent, alcohol. The precipitate of glycogen, etc., was washed
with alcohol, dissolved in a small volume of cold water to 100 c. c,
sufficient hydrochloric acid added to make the fluid contain 2 per
cent. HCl and heated on a water-bath for 15 hours. After neutrali-
zation, the volume was made up to 200 c. c. and the sugar determined in
25 c. c. of the fluid by Allihn's gravimetric method, and the glycogen
calculated therefrom. The liver sugar was determined by evaporating
the alcoholic fluid from the glycogen precipitate, dissolving the x'esi-
due in a little water, adding sufficient sulphuric acid to make the mix-

* Ghitteaden and Blake. Studies from Laboratory of Physiological Chemistry, Yale
University, vol. ii, p. 94.

108 Chittenden and Slake — Influence of Arsenic

ture contain 2 per cent. H^SO^, boiling for two hours to convert the
sugar wholly into dextrose, and then, after neutralization of the acid
fluid and diluting to 200 c. c, testing its reducing power by Allihn's
method.

Experiment I.

Action of arsenic on a fowl.

Period of dosing.

May 20-24, 0-1 grain AsoOa daily.

" 25-31, 0-2 " " "

June 1-15, 0-3 " " "

6*4 grains.

A, control fowl. B, arsenic foivl.

Body weight May 20, 1814 grams. 1814 grams.

" " June 16, 1871 " 1686 "

+ 57 -128

Weight of liver, June 16, 28-378 grams. 34-635 grams.

The liver of B, showed unmislakedble signs of fatty degeneration.

Determination of fat in liver.

A. control, 9210 grams liver gave 0-3347 gram fat, = 3-63 per cent.

B. arsenic, 13848 " " " 1-8561 " " = 13-40 "

+ 9-77 per cent.
Determination of glycogen and sugar.

A. B.

Weight of liver used, 20-167 grams. 20-787 grams.

Glycogen A, control.

Volume Equivalent Equivalent Total Per

used. Weight Cu. in dextrose. in glycogen. amount. cent.

25 c. c. 00744 gram. 0-0380 gram. 0-0342 gram. 02736 gram. 1-35

25 00727 0-0371 0-0334 0-2672 1-32

Glycogen B, arsenic.
25 c. c. 0-1720 gram. 0-0879 gram. 0-0791 gram. 0-6328 gram. 3-04

25 0-1713 0-0875 00787 0-6296 3-02

Sugar A, control.

25 c. c. 0-0299 gram. 0-0159 gram. 0-1272 gram. 063

25 0-0332 0-0176 0-1408 0-69

Sugar B, arsenic.

25 c. c. 0-0185 gram. 0-0102 gram. 0-0816gram. 039

25 0-0162 0-0091 0-0728 0-35

100 grams of breast muscle from £ gave 04 milligram of ^s.

In this experiment, then, we have as the apparent result of the long-
continued feeding of arsenic a loss of body weight, a decided increase

and Antiinony on Glycogenic function^ etc.

109

in the weight of the liver, a large increase in the liver fat, a gain in
the amount of liver glycogen, and a loss in liver sugar.

Experiment II.
Action of arsenic on a fowl.

Period of dosing.
May 20-24, 0-1 grain AsjOa daily.

" 25-31, 0-2 " "

June 1-15, 0-3 " " "

'' 16-18, 0-4 " " "

T'G grains.

Towards the end of the experiment the arsenic fowl appeared to
be suffering somewhat from the toxic action of the poison, consequently
the arsenic was discontinued after the 18th, but the fowl died on the
21st, and was immediately analyzed.

A, control fowl.

B, arsenic foiul.

Body weight May 20, 1644 grams.

1531 grams.

" June 21, 1757

1247

+ 113

-284

Weight of liver, June 21, 55830 grams.

33-729 grams,

Determination of fat in liver.

A, control, 13740 grams liver gave 0-7462 gram fat.

= 5-40 per cent.

B, arsenic, 10-179 " " " 0-4925 "

= 4-83

—0-57 per cent.

Determination of glycogen and sugar.

A.

B.

Weight of liver used, 42-090 grams.

23-550 grams.

Glycogen A, control.

Volume Equivalent Equivalent
used. Weight Cu. in dextrose. In glycogen.

Total
amount.

Per
cent.

25 c. c. 0-5213 gram. 0-2500 gram. 0-2250 gram.

1-8000 gram.

4-27

25 0-5228 0-2504 0-2253

1-8024

4-28

Sugar A, control.

25 c. c. 0-0359 gram. 0-0188 gram.

0-1504 gram.

0-35

25 0-0379 00198

0-1584

0-37

In J5, no trace of a reduction could be obtained for glycogen and
only an unweighable trace for sugar.

In this experiment, therefore, we find a decided loss in body weight
under the influence of the arsenic, a loss in the weight of the liver, a
slight diminution in the liver fat and neai'ly a complete disappear-
ance of both glycogen and sugar.

110

Chittenden and Blake — Influence of Arsenic

Experiment III,

Action of arsenic on a rabbit.

Period of dosing.
May 25-31, 02 grain AsoOs daily.

June 1-15, 0-3 " " "

" 16-23, 0-4 " " "

9'1 grains.

A, control rabbit. B, arsenic rabbit.

Body weight May 25, 1644 grams. 1502 grams.

" " June 24, 16l6 " 1586

— 28 +84

Weight of liver June 24, 61'360 grams. 46'760 grams.

Determination of fat in liver.

A, control, 15'320 grams liver gave 0*4126 gram fat, := 2"69 per cent.

B, arsenic, 14-435 " " " 0-2888 " " = 2-00 "

—0*69 per cent.
Determination of glycogen and sugar.

A. B.

Weight of liver used, 45'940 grams. 32-325 grams.

Glycogen A,* control.

Volume used Equivaleut Equivalent Total Per

lor reduction. Weight Cu. in dextrose. in glycogen. amount. cent.

25 c. c. 0-2036 gram. 0-1045 gram. 0-0940 gram. 1-8800 grams. 4-13

25 0-2027 01041 0-0937 1-8740 4-07

Glycogen B, arsenic.

25 c. c. 0-5230 gram. 0-2503 gram. 0*2252 gram. 1-8016 grams. 5-57

25 0-5223 0-2500 0'2250 1-8000 5-54

Sugar A, control.

25 0. c. 0-0177 gram. 0-0098 gram. 0-0784 gram. 0-lt

25 0-0173 0-0097 0-0776 0-16

Sugar B, arsenic.

25 c. c. 0-0254 gram. 0-0137 gram. 0-1096 gram. 0-34

25 0-0232 0-0126 0-1008 0-31

100 grams of muscle tissue yielded 0-3 milligram of J.5.

Here, we find under the influence of the arsenic, an apparent gain,
though slight, in body weight, an evident diminution in the weight
of the liver, together with a diminished percentage of liver fat. Ap-
parently, however, the amount of liver glycogen and sugar are some-
what increased. The liver showed no approach to fatty degeneration
on microscopic examination.

* The glycogen solution after boiling with acid, etc., was made up to 500 c. c. instead
of 200 c. c.

and Antimony on Glycogenic function., etc. Ill

Experiment IV.
Action of antimony on a fowl.

Period of dosing.
May 20-24, 0-2 grain SbjOa daily.

." 25-31. 0-4 "

June 1-7, 0-6 " " "

" 8-14, 0-8 " " "

13-6 grains.

A, control fowl. B, antimony fowl.

Body weight May 20, 1559 grams, 1616 grams,

" " June 15, 1531 " 1828 "

— 28 +212

"Weight of liver June 15, 22'995 grams. 31-799 grams.

Determination of fat in liver.

A, control, 7*985 grams liver gave 0-4600 gram fat, = 5-76 per cent.

B, antimony, 11-409 " " " 0-6741 " " = 5-91 "

+ 015 percent.
Determination of glycogen and Sugar.

A. B.

Weight of liver used, 15-010 grams. 20390 grams.

Glycogen A, control.

Volume used Equivalent Equivalent Total Per

for reduction. Weight Cu. in dextrose. in glycogen. amount. cent.

25 c. c. 0-0577 gram. 0-029G gram. 0-02C6 gram. 0-2128 gram. 1-41

25 0-0563 0-0289 0-0260 0-2080 1-38

Glycogen B, antimony.
25 c. c. 0-1011 gram. 0-0514 gram. 0-0462 gram. 0-3696 gram. 1-81

25 0-1015 00516 0-0464 0-3712 1-82

Sugar A, control.

25 c. c. 0-0198 gram, 0-0109 gram. 0-0872 gram. 0-58

25 00211 0-0115 0-0920 0-61

Sugar B, antimony.

25 c. c. 0-0300 gram. 0 0160 gram. 0-1280 gram. 0-62

26 0-0277 0-0148 0-1184 0-58

100 grams of breast muscle gave 1-2 milligrams Sb.

These results would seem to indicate that antiraonious oxide tends
to increase the body weight, and apparently also that of the liver.
The liver fat is obviously not much affected in this experiment, while
the glycogen shows a slight increase in the antimonial fowl.

112 Chittenden and Blake — Influence of Arsenic

Experiment V.
Action of antimony on a fowl.

Period of dosing.
May 20-24, 0-2 grain Sb^Os daily.

" 25-31, 0-4 "

June 1- 7, 0-6 " " " .

" 8-15, 0-8 " " "

" 16-19, 1-0 " " "

18*4 grains.

^, control fowl. B, antimony fowl.

Body weight May 20, 1701 grams. 1757 grams.

" " June 20, 1644 " 1814

-57 +57

Weight of liver June 20, 34'177 grams. 35'440 grams.

Determination of fat in liver.

A, control, 9*477 grams liver gave 0-3890 gram fat, ^=. 4'10 per cent.

B, antimony, 9-579 " " " 0-5088 " " = 5-31 "

+ 1-21 per cent.
The appearance of the liver in B indicated fatty degeneration.

Determination of glycogen and sugar.

A. B.

Weight of liver used, 24-700 grams. • 25-871 grams.

Glycogen A, control.

Volume used Equivalent Equivalent Total Per

for redaction. Weight Cu. in dextrose. in glycogen. amount. cent.

25 c. c. 0-2253 gram. 0-1160 gram. 0-1044 gram. 0-8352 gram. 3-38

25 0-2253 01160 01044 0-8352 3-38

Glycogen B, antimony.
25 c. c. 0-2480 gram. 0-1281 gram. 0-1153 gram. 0-9224 gram. 3-56

25 0-2479 0-1280 0-1150 0-9200 3*55

Sugar A^ control.

25 c. c. 0-0360 gram. 0'0189 gram 0-1512 gram. 0-61

25 00360 00189 0-1512 0-61

Sugar B, antimony.

25 c. c. 0-0383 gram. 0-0200 gram. 0-1600 gram. 0-62

25 0-0372 00195 0-1560 0-60

100 grams of breast muscle gave I'S miUigrams Sb.

In this experiment, there was pronounced fatty degeneration of the
liver in the antimonial fowl. Further, as in the last experiment, there
was apparently a slight increase both in body weight and in the
weisrht of the liver.

and Anthnony on Glycogenic function, etc.

113

Corresponding with the fatty degeneration, there was found 1 -2 per
cent, more fat in the antimonial liver than in the control.

The liver glycogen was also slightly increased under the influence
of the antimony.

Experiment VI.

Action of anti'mony on a rahhit.

Period of dosing.

May 25-31, 0-4 grain SboOa daily.

June

" 1

1- 7, 0-6 "
8-15, 0-8 " ''• ''
16-21, 1-0 "

19-4 grains.

A, control rabbit. B*

antimony rabbit.

Body weight May

25, 2012 grams.

1814 grams.

" June 23, 1998 "

1701 "

— 14

-113

Weight of liver June 23, 38-219 grams.

42-741 grams.

Determination of fat in liver.

A, control, 9-375 grams liver gave 0-3575 gram fat,

= 3-81 percent

B, antimony, 10-971

" 0-3422 " "

= 3-12

— 0-69 per cent

Determination of glycogen and sugar.

A.

B.

Weight of liver used,

28-844 grams.
Glycogen A, control.

31-770 grams.

Volume used

for reduction. Weight Cu.

Equivalent Equivalent
in (le.xtrose. in glycogen.

Total
amount.

Per
cent.

25 c. c. 0 0431 gram.
25 0-0441

0-0224 gram. 0-0201 gram.
00229 0-0206

Sugar A, control.

0-1608 gram.
0-1648

0-55
0-57

25 c. 0. 0-0445 gram.

0-0231 gram

0-1848 gram.

0-64

25 0-0440

0-0229

0-1832

0-63

In B, there was no reduction for eitlier glycogen or sugar.
100 grams of muscle gave TO milligram Sb.

In this experiment, towards the end, the animal was evidently suf-
fering from the toxic action of the antimony, and the body weight is
seen to be noticeably diminished. The weight of the liver, however,
was apparently increased by the antimony, although there was a

*The last two days the antimony rabbit ate very little. Hence, the o-tide was not
given after the 21st. The animal was evidently much affected by the antimony and
its general nutrition was at the last very poor.

Trans. Con.v. Acau., Vol. VIII. 15 Dec, 1888.

114 Chittenden and Slake — Influence of Arsenic and Antimony.

diminution in the liver fat, and a complete disappearance of both
glycogen and sugar.

While these experiments are far too few in number to generalize
from, yet it would appear that small doses of antimonious oxide long
continued tend to increase body weight, and particularly the weight
of the liver. Further, the increase in liver weight is accompanied
by an increased percentage of fat and a slight increase of liver
glycogen.

With corresponding doses of arsenious oxide, on the other hand,
the results would indicate a diminution in body weight, likewise a
diminution in the weight of the liver and also in the amount of liver
fat. As regards glycogen, two of the results show an increased
amount in the arsenical livers, while in one experiment there was a
total disappearance of glycogen. On the other hand, as Experiment
No. I indicates, there may be, with small doses of arsenic, a very
pronounced fatty degeneration of the liver, accompanied by an in-
creased liver weight and an increase in the percentage of liver
glycogen.

VII. — The Nature and Chemical Composition of the Myosin
OF Muscle Tissue. By R. H. Chittenden and G. Wyckoff
Cummins, Ph.D.

In spite of the interest attached to this peculiar proteid substance,
little attention has been directed to its chemical nature since the
time of its discovery by Kiihne.* In fact, Danilewskyf is the only
investigator who appears to have studied its chemical relations to
any extent, and so far as we are aware no attempt has ever been
made to ascertain its chemical composition. With this fact in mind,
it has been the main object of the present investigation to study the
chemical composition of pure myosin, and to determine the diffei'-
ences that may exist in the chemical nature, or in the properties, of
myosin prepared from various animal sources. Unfortunately, our
work was completed before Halliburton's]; recent paper on muscle-
plasma was published, otherwise we should have attempted to verify
some of his interesting discoveries i-egarding the muscle clot, and
possibly have modified somewhat the character of our work.

The researches of Kiihne, IIoppe-Seyler,§ Weyl,|| and Danilewsky
have shown that myosin, both from the animal and vegetable king-
doms, is a globulin body, soluble in dilute sodium and ammonium
chloride solutions, as well as in sulphate of magnesia and sulphates
of the alkalies, and precipitable therefrom either by the addition of
salt in substance or by dilution with much water. As stated by
Danilewsky, myosin is most advantageously extracted from muscle
tissue by ammonium chloride, in solutions of from 7-20 per cent.
We have, likewise, found this to be the case by comparative tests,
and have, therefore, in all of our preparations of myosin for analysis,
used ammonium chloride as the extractive, preferably of 15 percent,
strength. For separation of myosin from the ammonium chloride

* Kiihne, Protoplasma, Leipzig, 18G4. Also Lehrbuch der physiologische Chemie.

\ Myosin, seine Darstellung, Eigenschaften, Umwancllimg in Sjmtonin und Riickbil-
dung aus demselben. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische chemie. Band v, p. 158.

:]: Journal of Physiology, vol. viii, p. 133.

§ Handbuch der Chem. Analyse, 4 Auflage, p. 236.

H Beitrage zur kenntniss thierischei* und pflanzlicher eiweisskorper, Zeitschrift fiir
physiologische Chemie, Band i, p. 72.

116 Chittenden and Cummins — Nature and Chemical

solution we have mainly employed two methods, either dilution with
a large volume of distilled water, or dialysis of the ammonium
chloride solution until the salt is entirely removed. In this latter
process, we have often observed that the sepai'ation of myosin
partakes more of the nature of a coagulation than of an ordinary
precipitation. A moderately strong ammonium chloride solution
of myosin, on being placed in a parchment bag and suspended in
running watei", will ordinarily at the end of two or three days be
converted into a semi-solid, jelly-like mass, which later on contracts
more or less, but still shows all the characters of a genuine clot.
In fact, we are inclined, with Halliburton, to consider this a genuine
re-coagulation rather than a j^recipitation. We are inclined, how-
ever, to believe that separation of myosin by dialysis is hardly as
satisfactory in the preparation of small quantities, as precipitation by
water, since on dialysis the jellying of the myosin naturally tends to
enclose some of the salt and also any other proteids possibly present
in the solution, while by precipitation with water the myosin is floc-
culent, easily washed and thus more surely freed from both salt and
albumin.

Myosin A, from ox muscle.

The first sample of myosin was prepared from a freshly killed ox.
The finely chopped muscle from the thigh was freed, so far as possi-
ble, from all traces of blood and soluble albumin by long soaking
and frequent kneading with water. The water was frequently
changed and kept thoroughly thymolized so as to prevent any ap-
proach to putrefaction. When the washings failed to give any tur-
bidity by heat, or by acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide, the
washed tissue was placed in 10 litres of a 15 per cent, solution of am-
monium chloride for extraction of the myosin. The resultant opales-
cent fluid was filtered through paper and the myosin precipitated
by saturation with sodium chloride. The precipitate was quickly
strained off, dried somewhat between folds of filter paper, dissolved
in a small amount of water and reprecipitated by treatment of the
fluid witli a large volume of water. The precipitate so obtained
was washed with water until the washings gave no reaction for
chlorides, when it was treated with weak alcohol and finally with
95 per cent, and absolute alcohol, and ether.

When partially dried, it was ground tine and further dried at 110°
C. until of constant weight, for analysis.

Its composition is shown in the accompanying table.

Cotnposition of the Myosin of Muscle Tissue.

117

^

CO ^ bd £

_r (3 4- 03

CO «t3 'SR m

g 02 K

^

o»

00 , , ,

(C

"e^

1 1 1

■*

■^ , , 1

<1

1 1 1

'

1-1

T-l ' ' '

y—i

tH

^

T3

S

CS

bO

1 1 1

•

O

C<J , 1 ,

't»

□

1 1 1

1

■r-l

<

<2

,

'

o
o

0-0

tH

OS

1 , CD

?o

1

1 1 1 1

1^

"^

! i o

•

1 I 1 1

<D

3 _•

1 I ■*

! 1 <x>

^- ! 1 ! I I
^11111

(» g

' lO

lO ' ' ' '

t^

! ; c-

^ 1 1 i 1 I

PL|

1 1 t-

o , , , , .

H^

I I '^

<=> ; I ' : !

°

1—1'''''

d

1 1 i>

■7^ 1 1 1 > '

1 * ■,_<

0

"

' 00

00

S be

'^ o bb

> >

I— I It-I K<(

?^ 1^ >H >~t

-si -

s

o

CO

o

a,

O K 1^ 03 O

118 Chittenden and Oronmins — N'ature and Chemical

Myosin B^froin ox muscle.

A solution of myosin in 15 per cent, ammonium chloride was pre-
pared from 4 kilos, of fi-eshly killed beef, as described under A.
The myosin was then separated from the solution by dialysis, con-
tinued until nearly all of the chloride was removed. The last traces
of the ammonium salt were separated by filtration of the gelatinous
myosin through chamois skin, and washing with water. The prepa-
ration was then treated exactly as A, and dried at 110° C. for analysis.

By long continued contact with water, as in dialysis, the precipi-
tated or coagulated myosin is rendered insoluble in dilute salt solu-
tions, as noticed by Weyl and others, hence in this preparation it was
not possible to purify the substance by reprecipitation.

The composition of the product (see the accompanying table) is
essentially the same as that of the preceding preparation.

Myosin C, from sheep's muscle.

This sample of myosin was obtained from fresh mutton in essen-
tially the same manner as tlie preceding preparation, viz : by extrac-
tion of the thoroughly washed tissue with 15 per cent, ammonium
chloride, and separation of the myosin by dialysis.

On analysis, it was found to possess a somewhat higher percentage
of carbon than the two myosins from ox muscle, but in other respects
it was identical with them.

Myosin D, from calfs muscle.

A solution of myosin was prepared from 3 kilos, of fresh, lean mus-
cle from a young calf, by extraction of the thoroughly washed tissue
with 15 per cent, ammonium chloride solution.

From one-half of the filtered fluid, myosin was precipitated by
dilution with water and purified by washing with water until chlo-
rides were entirely removed. It was then washed with weak alcohol,
finally with absolute alcohol and ether, and then dried at 110° C. for
analysis (D').

From the other half of the ammonium chloride solution, myosin
was separated by addition of ammonium chloride in substance. The
precipitate was freed from excess of ammonium chloride by addi.
tion of just enough water to dissolve the salt, after which the floc-
culent myosin was strained off, dissolved in a little water, and precip-
itated by pouring the solution into a large volume of water. It was

Composition of the Myosin of Muscle Tissue. 119

S after
deducting
S of Ash.

1-26
1-24

aj-^

1-31
1-29

SZ '^ ^

o g + 2

0-0597
0-0594

Sof
Ash.

sub.
0-05

BaSOi

from the

Ash.

gram.

0-0046

j2 1 , , ' , 05 OS , , ,
OJ-^ , , , , cp O , , ,
< ' i ' ' o o ' ' '

Ash
found,
gram.

00072
0-0046

iz;^

16-34

16-48

'6

a

a
t5

CL,

764-6
762-6

hP

1 1 00 J> 1 1 ■ 1 1

I ! OS OS ! 1 1 ! !

ci

67-8
81-3

C)"6S.

52-16
52-12

CO2

found,
gram.

0-8237
0-7515

^ CO

fr|-^ <? 9

'^ ^

q^p Si;;;;':;

"^ &c 06;;:;;;;

Substance
used,
gram.

0-4306
0-3932
0.5061
0-6005
1-0425
0-6690
1-7115
0-6277
0-6358

6

!2h

1— II— lh-|i-~,i-i.l— II— II— 1^^

1— (1— ii^r*K>i— II— ii-<(

^ - > ^ ^ ^

«3^

CO

"^ t^

CO

■M

?^

iS ^ T-l

O ffi » CO O

120

Chittenden and Cummins — Nature and Chemical

S after
deducting
S of asli.

1-20
1-25

1

1-24
1-29

0^ + 2

0-0699
0-0667

CD

"o-go-l ; ; ; ; ; ; g ; ;

BaSOi

from the

ash.

gram.

0-0037

Si , , , , o t- , , ,

00 -^ , , , , <p »p , , ,

<j 1 , 1 1 <^ J^ 1 . ,

Ash
found,
gram.

0-0031
0-0051

Jz;-^

16-29
16-41

p

0)

i e
£ s

761-1
762-1

10-2
10-2

c3

61-8
101-3

o-^

52-95

52-88

o g £

0-9603
0-6863

W^

7-08
7-08

....

0-3150
0-2255

Substance
used,
gram.

0-4945
0-3539
0-4600

0-7477
0-5170
0-8969
1-4139
0-7761
0-7059

i^ to >~l >-H

o tri ^

cc O

Composition of the Myosin of Mtiscle Tissue. 121

then washed with water, alcohol, and ether, and dried at 110° C.
(D").

The composition of both products is shown in the accompanying
tables.

From the analytical data it is seen that the two preparations show
close agreement, although there are minor differences ; D", for exam,
pie, containing a slightly higher percentage of cai-bon and a corres-
pondingly lower percentage of nitrogen than D\ Further, D" con-
tains less than half as much ash as the other pi-eparation. Both show
fairly close agreement with the my(tsins from ox muscle, with per-
haps a slightly higher average percentage of nitrogen.

Myosin E, from fish.

So far as we are aware, little attention has been paid to the my-
osin from fish flesh. Myosin is assumed to be present and is supposed
to be of the same general nature as the myosin from other forms of
muscle tissue.

We first ti'ied the separation of myosin from fresh cod (Gadiis
callarias or G. morrhna), using 2 kilos, of the fresh, lean tissue ob-
tained in market. The final ammonium chloride extract (15 per
cent.) failed to give anything more than an insignificant precipitate,
either by dilution with water or by saturation of the fluid with
sodium chloride.

A second preparation was attempted from the flesh of the halibut
[Hippoglossus vulgaris) ; 2*5 kilos, of fresh tissue, free from fasciae, fat
and integument were thoroughly extracted with thymolized water
for several days, the chopped tissue being well rubbed up with the
water to insure complete removal of soluble albumins, etc. The
thoroughly washed fibre was then triturated with a 15 per cent,
ammonium chloride solution and allowed to stand in contact with it
for 24 hours. The filtered fluid gave a decided precipitate on boiling,
and also on addition of salt to saturation.

Myosin was separated from the ammonium chloride solution by
dialysis as a more or less gelatinous precipitate, and was prepared
for analysis by washing with thymolized water, and treatment with
alcohol and ether.

Dried at 110° C. until of constant weight, it yielded the following
results :

I. 0-3335 gram substance gave 0*2043 gram H„0 = 6 08 per cent.
H and 0-6267 gram C0,= 51-16 per cent. C.

Trans. Conn. a.cad., Vol. VIII. lu Dec, 1888.

122

Chittenden and Cummins — Natxire and Chemical

S after
deducting
S of ash.

1-29
1-29

M-eR

1-39
1-39

S50

rT O + 2

0-0679
0-0575

Sof
Ash.
% of
sub.

•

0-10

BaSOi

from the

ash.

gram.

0-0130

<1

2-95
3-91

Ash
found,
gram.

0-0291
0-0214

1 , «> «) 1 1 1 . 1
^^ 1 I i «b 1 ! i ! I

tH T-H

Pi
O

S-l

!2i

Pressure
mm.

749-8
768-1

c. c.

87-4
82-6

00 CO .... 11 .
tH CO 1 1 1 1 •' •

»o o '■'''' ■

CO2

found,
gram.

0-6646
0-7395

W^

6-91
6-93

found,
gram.

0-2301
0-3439

Substance
used,
gram.

0-3541
0-3925
0-6283
0-6065
0-9821
0-7361
1-7182
0-6707
0-5690

d

>

e^ t^ *N '~H

I Tj<

O K ^ cc O

Composition of the Myosin of Muscle Tissue.

123

5>0 .

t« a j3

1

St:3 M

J

,

,

,

1

,

^

CO

[ ;

;

[

''

:

''

'

T-l

T3 03

00

t-

OJ-feS.

''

■

1

\

1

:

'

T-l

Sn-C o

\

1

\

\

1-1
o

CO

ta
o

M-SM t*)

'

'

o

o

* 3 O

o-So-i

•

■

;

;

'

•

CO

CO

o

•

■

CO <5 -^ OT

'

'

'

'

'

'

o

'

'

CB g c3 t-

i

;

;

;

■

CO

o

o

:

;

pq o fao

'

'

'

'

o

'

d

.d
m"^?.

c-

OS

1

,

1

1

tH

T— 1

1

1

-^

'

'

'

'

T-f

tH

'

'

'

. .

o

CD

Ash
found
gram

1

■

1

1

o

OS

o

;

;

1

''

'

•

o
o

o
o

•

'

■

1-1

T-(

1

1

00

c-

1

1

1

1

tzjts.

'

1»

CO

1—1

■

•

•

'

'

Q)

m fl

'

T-H

iO

]

1

1

,

1

00

o?

1

,

1

,

sa

I

.

«o

!

I

I

,'

a
1

&H

EH^

1

:

cp

T-H

:

;

;

;

1

14

'

^

T-l

'

d

,

,

00

o

,

,

,

,

,

'

'

(N

00

'

'

'

'

'

" I

00

t-

'

'

-*

iO

1

,

1

1

1

1

,

CO

CO

1

'

■

'

■

'

'

*

. . 1

cc

!0

,

,

,

,

,

,

i

CO,
found
gram

o

OS

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

00

o

CO

o

:

!

;

1

•

.

1

(

CO

c-

W^

o

o

'

■

'

■

'

■

:

GO

t-

,

,

,

,

,

1

1

<^ a a

^ o bo

o

^

1

[

;

,

I

;

o

1-\

o

''

;

'

;

;

;

01

-*

o

Ci

CQ

'JlH

.,—1

»o

iO

lO

a-6 '^

OS

T— t

OJ

c-

CO

-^ o n

CJ

w

o

CO

OS

o

o

la

(M

-g 3 &

CO

c^

CO

to

lO

CO

■^

iO

CO

o

o

o

o

o

o

t-t

o

o

to

d

h- 1

1— 1
1— 1

1— 1
1— 1

>

>

1— 1
>

1— 1
1— 1

1— 1

X

^ 1

1

1— 1

>

>

'S') J-^ Co '-^ ■^

'e;

a*

a

o

o

«)

r-

en

os

«

o>

^

to

C-)

s«

(Ah

f-

o K ^ 02 o

124

(Jhittenden and Cummins — Nature and Chemical

S after
deducting
S of ash.

1-25
1-35

1 ■ 1 1 1 1 1 o o t-
OQ-^ ,iiiiiiCp-rt<<?4

' ' ' ' ' ' ' -1-1 T-l 1-1

og + 2

OS Ol JO

C- OT -*

' ' ' ' 1 ' iO O IC

! 1 I I 1 I 1 "^ ■? 9^

' ' ' 6 o o

OQ < ^ m

lO , 1 1

1 , 1 I . O . 1 1

' ' ' ' ' o ' ' '

* 2 . o

'>< -^ -c2 P , 1 , 1 1 • o ' 1 '

eg a S 2 o ■

A 11 , CO 35 , 11 1
M -^ , , 1 1 OJ (M , , , ,
<1 iiii^t1|"'i'

Ash
found,
gram.

00 o
' o o '

l2;\R.

lO t-

1 -* ip ' ; ; ; ;
! ! «b <£> 1 ! 1 ! ! i

t3

a
o

2
i a

oa "

£ a

Oh

! 1 '^p t- ; ; 1 ! ; 1

> ' lo LO ; ; ' ;
I ; t- c- ; ; ; ; ; I

^o"

, , tH (J}

' ! o o* I 1 1 ; 1 !
11,^ 1 1 1 . ■ .

, 1 CO ^ 1 1 1 . . .

' ' xH M I ! ! 1 ! ;

' 00 00 ' '

o> «o . , , , , 1 , ,
e* ep

CO,
found,
gram.

0-8109
0-7019

w ■««.

05 CO Ill

OS o 1 . 1 ■ 1 1 1 '
i) t- ''''■'' '

H,0
found,
gram.

0-3661
0-2315

Substance
used,
gram.

0-4339
0-3655
0-6159
0-6100
0-7144
0-7000
1-4144
0-6112
0-5189
0-5882

6

'^ B ^ "^ > tt

5B 3i '--'

I* €» t^ li)

V.

S? Oi ?o

*> "S'i "iP

!* CO t-

o W !z; oj o

Composition of the Myosin of Muscle Tissue.

125

bo •

^^ 3 'S

® '^ en

1

1

'

'

o

^

•

•

CO

o*

^-o °

'

T-H

T-H

"^^^

^

,

00

<M

CC1^

1

:

1

:

1

•

1

00

T-l

CO

T-H

,

,

,

,

,

lO

o

^ fl + 03

1

:

j

J

1

1

;

o

o

^KM i^o

o

o

1

,

,

,

,

,

1

^ * :=i

o

«3 <5 ^ M

'

'

'

'

'

'

o

'

'

(P

^^ . •

■«4<

CQ c 03 CB

;

'

'

;

1

t-

',

;

es " « >-

'

'

•

•

o

•

m 2 ^

'

■

'

'

'

'

o

'

'

t«

m \i^

00

OJ

1

o

o

1

1

1

<1

'

'

'

'

c*

<f*

'

'

'

-§"1

'~~eo~

~~5D~"

1

\

;

1

;

;

1

CO 3 05
^c2 &

!

'•

•

5

o

o

o
o

I

j

]

CO

00

1

t

CO

Tt<

1

1

1

1

125 "fc^

'

'

■i-i

•

■

'

•

■

d

d

1

o

c^

1

J

1

S s

1

00

-^

.

1

1

•

iQ g

'

'

ta

lO

'

'

'

'

CD "^

t-

t-

T5

o

i£^

'

'

'

^

,

Qp

^

,

,

,

,

,

«tH

1

'

O

6

t

'

'

'

'

!^

'

T-l

'

'

'

,

,

"?

iffl

,

,

,

,

,

'

'

-^

ib

'

'

'

'

'

O

'

CO

o

'

'

'

'

'

«o~

CO

«>

op

o-^

Ah
JO

tH

'

'

'

'

'

'

'

T-l

«

1

,

,

,

,

S 5 2

CD

00

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CO

to
CO

!

1

;

i

j

1

45 bo

o

6

'

'

'

o

«

ffi XR

o

OS

■

•

'

•

[

■

'

10

:S

,

,

,

,

,

,

^'"^i

;:^

S

,

1

'

I

'

'

1

«ll

o

o

:

:

'

:

;

■

;

o 1

y . ■

05

IC

00

o

lO

OS

5!

^

CO

Stan
ised
ram

«D

w

o

o

«

CO

CO

'^

CO

lO

w

o

OS

OJ

T-H

?o

w

CO

-it<

o

1**

ta

J>

CO

ip

t-

^ - &o

6

o

o

o

o

o

1^

o

o

IX>

d

12;

1

1— 1

1— 1

1— 1

l-H

l-H

>

>

l-H

>

h- 1
>

1— 1
>

h- 1

a

■30

Ci

^

a>

>^

f^

i^-

<5^

?^

Vi

<

«5

^-i

<ii

«

s

1

,

1

c

'

V

§<

O W i5 c/:' O

126 Chittenden and Gtmxmins — Nature and Chemical

II. 0-4895 gram substance gave 67-8'='= N at 15-4* C. and 761-6'"'"
pressure = 16-50 per cent. N.

III. 0-4939 gram substance gave 0-0116 gram ash = 2-35 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free substance,
C 52-39, H 6-97, N 16-74.

The amount of myosin obtained from the fish muscle was not at
all commensurate with the amount of flesh experimented with.
Danilewsky,* however, found in the muscle tissue of the perch 8-56
per cent, of myosin as contrasted with 7-5 per cent, in ox muscle.
Whether our inability to separate a corresponding amount from the
tissue of the cod and halibut was due to the character of the tissue,
to its possible staleness, or to inferior methods of separation we
cannot say. Certainly, the yield of myosin in oar case was not as
great as from the muscle tissue of the ox, calf, lamb or sheep.

In composition, and in such reactions as we were able to try, the
fish myosin was not unlike the myosin from other preparations.

Myosin F^ from ox muscle.

A solution in 15 per cent, ammonium chloride was prepared as in
preceding cases and the myosin precipitated by addition of a large
amount of water.

One half of the precipitated myosin was washed with water until
all ammonium chloride was removed, then with alcohol and ether,
and dried for analysis (F').

The otlier half of the myosin was washed somewhat with water,
not enough to render it insoluble, then dissolved in 10 per cent,
sodium chloride solution, reprecipitated by dilution with water, thor-
oughly washed and dried (F").

The composition of the two products is shown in the accompanying
tables. The i-esults show close agreement with each other, and with
the preceding preparations.

Myosin G^ from ox muscle.

According to Danilejvsky, a 15 per cent, solution of ammonium
chloride is stronger than necessary for the extraction of ^myosin from

* Ueber die Abhanghigkeit der coDtractionsart der muskeln von der mengen ver-
haltnissen einiger ihrer Bestandtheile. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Cliemie. Band
vii, p. 124.

Composition of the Myosiyi of Muscle Tissue. 127

muscle tissue. In fact, microscopic examination showed that 15 per
cent, solutions of this salt generally cause destruction of the muscle
fibres, while weaker solutions of the ammonium salt, as 5 per cent.,
extract the myosin equally well, without injuring the structural
elements in the least.

Thinking that possibly a purer myosin might be obtained by the
use of a weaker salt solution, several kilos, of thoroughly washed
muscle tissue were rubbed up with an excess of 5 per cent, ammo-
nium chloride and kept in contact with it for 48 hours. From the
filtered solution, myosin was separated by addition of a large volume
of water and the product washed and dried for analysis (G').

The tissue remaining after extraction as described, was treated
with a fresh 5 per cent, solution of ammonium chloride, and from
this fluid a second precipitate of myosin was obtained by addition of
water. This also was washed and dried for analysis (Gr").

The residue of tissue still i-emaining was then extracted with a 15
per cent, solution of ammonium chloride. The extract so obtained
gave a flocculent precipitate on saturation with sodium chloride, and
a coagulum appeared on boiling the solution, but no precipitate could
be obtained on addition of a large volume of water. It is thus evi-
dent that there was an almost complete extraction of myosin by the 5
per cent, solution of the ammonium salt.

On precipitating the small amount of myosin present in the 15 per
cent, ammonium chloride solution by saturation of the fluid with
salt, a clear filtrate was obtained which gave a turbidity on boiling
and also on addition of acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide, thus
showing the presence of a small amount of soluble albumin.

The composition of the two myosins, as seen from the accompany-
ing tables, does not differ at all from that of other preparations.

Myosin H., from muscle of sheep.

In this preparation, the thoroughly washed and chopped muscle
was pai'tially extracted with a 5 per cent, ammonium chloride solu-
tion, and the myosin separated by addition of water. It was then
washed and dried for analysis (H^).

The residue of tissue was extracted with a 15 per cent, solution of
ammonium chloride and the myosin separated from this solution,
likewise, by addition of water (H").

128

Chittenden a^id Cummins — Nature and Chemical

S after
deducting
S of ash.

1-18
1-14

m\K

1-26

1-22

BaS04 after

fusion with

KOH + KNO,

gram.

0-0484
0-0506

S of
Ash.
% of
sub.

0-08

o^^" a

Mi a CO ^

05 5 C3 £

0-0071

■

1-47
1-51

Ash
found,
gram.

0-0071
0-0109

J^J-fis.

16-24
16-32

a

Pressure,
mm.

761-8
765-6

12-0
13-6

d

85-5
77-6

0-fe%,

52-31
52-21

o § §

0-7437
0-8979

M^

7-11

7-05

H2O
found,
gram.

0-2482
0-2974

Substance
used,
gram.

0-3877
0-4690
0-6343
0.5718
0-4814
0-7234
1-2048
0-5281
0-5719

6

>5

1— 11— (1— l»>t>l— II— II— (M

»Ci

o^

^

<^

^

>

■Cl

f^i

»^

>s

C>

^

?^

VI

'"H

5^>

<

>J^

"^

<^

'^

0

,

,

0

,

s

1

,

1

T-H

1

\

■^

eo

JD

S

V

u K !z; 02 o

Composition of the Myosin of Muscle Tissue.

129

S after
deducting

S of Ash.

1-14
1-13

ca m

1 , , , ■ . oj oi

' ' ' ' ' ' ' 1-1 T-l

d § + 2

§8 S

6 6

BaSOi
from the

Ash.
gram.

0-0055

-^ , , , , T-l CO , , ,
^•^ ,,,, -rH OS ,, .

Ash
found,
gram.

1-1 lO
. . « O '

1 1 ! ! o o i ■ I
X o o

1 CO OS

^ . . ^ -*

^^^ ; ; cb «b ; , ; : :

g

£ , , 1

^ ^ , , GO >*

S 9 ' ' '^'^ ^ ' ! ! 1 !

|g , ; ^ g ; ; ; ; :

Cu

, , CO 1— 1 , , , , 1

CO »o

00 00

CO t- • I 1

lO Id '

CO,
found,
gram.

r- c« '

O CQ '

OS t- ' 1 ■ ' ■ ■ •

o o 1 I I I 1 ! '

td -^

^ o , , , 1 , , ,

O OS 1 , , 1 1 1 1

j^ 50 '''''' '

oi^ a

OCJ CO ' ' 1 ' ' ' '

O CO

CO CQ 1 1 1 1 ■ 1 I

o o ! ! ' ' 1 1 1

Substance
used,
gram

0-4788
0-3802
0-8286
0-4869
0-5740
0-5348
1-0088
0-5490
0-5918

d

h— < 1— I ^"^ f^ ^-i. HH HH '^■^

- ^ ^ > ^ -

>-H !i) Co 1--I
1-^ Cci -^1 '~H

't^.

=

o

o

CO

lO

<»

00

o

Ol

o>

r-

h?

»o

s

li)

o

!~

t-

CO

n^

t-

O M ^ cc O

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIU.

17

Dec, 1888.

130

Chittenden and Cummins — Nature and Chemical

^

.2- <n

•^

1-1

-^

11^^^

;

;

:

1

1

'•

1—1

T-l

CO

CO

1—1

m'%°

'o m

00

ts

00

(ji>^

;

;

1

:

'

'

1-1
1^

00

1^

op

1^

■«1<

CO

CO

"S &M g

;

;

1

j

in

iO

lO

'^ d + CO

1

1

f

o

o

o

§•1^5.

'

'

'

o

« = o

pqv^g

;

■

■

;

s

;

;

;

'

'

■

'

o

'

H

'

;

;

1

;

;

S

;

:

:

CO 00 c«

«8 a «d b

;

1

\

1

;

o
o

;

'

1

^

t-

1

1

1

t-

50

1

1

1

<!

'

'

*

T-(

T-l

'

'

«o

00

-^ a a

;

'

1

OS

o

o

'

'

« 3 g

;

:

1

o
o

o

o

■

■

■

eo

CO

!zi-«^

:

J

«o
1-1

J

'

•

'■

'

'■

di

Ss

,

;

1**

]

;

;

1

;

;

<u H

'

I

'

!

1

J

1

T3

P

B

Ou

O

eo

,

,

,

1

,

,

«^

H' P

1

■

"*

•

■

■

1

•

'

;<

'

TH

OS

CJ

.

.

o

•

I

>

•

■

■

"

'

'

■*

'

'

«o

^

OS

OS

1

1

1

1

1

1

Q-6S,

Jo

tH
iO

■

'

'

'

'

'

•

^

t-

,

1

1

,

,

,

,

C.TJ a

O 3 b

t-

i

!

;

;

;

;

;

;

^ O bD

o

o

'

'

'

'

'

lO

^

,

,

,

hC "^

o

\

:

''

■

1

'

'

T-l

-<*

,

,

,

,

,

,

,

o'B s

:^

00

l

',

1

I

1

_'

;

CQ

c«

t

1

1

1

t

•

t

Wo ^

o

o

•

'

'

'

'

o

o

-*

t-

o

ic

o

IC

CO

OS

CO

S-^' a

o

so

CD

o

OS

OS

CJ

00

CO

35

o

'^

o

-5t<

m

OJ

« » g

!>3

-*

O-t

iC

®

CJ

IC

m

to

^ 3 fcc

O

o

o

o

o

1-1

o

o

o

CO

d

!2i

HH

t— 1

1— 1
1— t

>

HH

>

>

1— 1
1— 1

>

HH
HH
»— 1

>

X

^

1^

OS

OS

§

»^

»-<

^

"-H

^i^

S 00 r^

o W t<; a: C

Composition oj the Myosin of Muscle Tissiie.

131

deducting
Sof Ash.

1-17
1-11

, OJ o

' 1 ' ' ' ' ' I-l T-l

0^ + 2
g.9g^

S8 §

■* 1*

1 . 1 1 1 p p

'■'''' o 6

BaSOi

from the

Ash.

gram.

1 t • 1 1 1 •'^ 1 1

1 1 1 1 O ' 1
1 , 1 1 , 1 O 1 ,

' ' ' o ' '

<

1 CO CO , 1 1

1 -jtH TlJ , ,
' ' ' ' 1^ rH ' ■ '

Ash.
found,
gram.

' ' ' o 6 ' ' '

l-H «D 1
, 1 «0 JO ' ' 1 1 >

^^ ; ; i cb : ; ; ; ;

1 l-H l-H

n

.2

S a I 1 t- lo ■ 1 • . 1

aj a . 1 o CD " ' 1 1 ■
^ II * t 1 1 1

^"

"* Oi . 1 1 1 1

: ' -^ -^ ; ; ' ; '
' ' 1-1 1— 1 ' 1 1 1 1

1 op O 1 , , , ,

: : ■^ <© 1 1 ! I '

00 CO ' ' ' ' '

o-^

e« OS

T-t 1^ i ! 1 1 i I 1

COj
found,
gram.

0-7716
0-4526

M>^

i> -rH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P P 1 • . I 1 1 ,
<0 t- '■'''' '

OS J> 1 . . 1 . . 1

»o OS 1 1 1 ' I I 1

lO TfH

o o 1 1 I I 1 I I

Substance
used,
gram.

0-4075
0-2374
0-5898
0-2675
0-6164
0-5958
1-3133
0-5413
0-4759

d

'^

13

i^

^

a<

<» l— tH
S^l CJ £^

O S !2; CO o

1.S2

Chittenden and Cummins — Nature and Chemical

deducting
S of Ash.

1-23
1-25

co-^

1-26
1-28

0-0458
0-0552

»o

o-g o^ ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 9 ; ;

CO ^ ts, 55 . •' 1 1 1 , ' . 1 o \

BaSOi

from the

Ash.

gram

0-0020

Ash.

0-65
0-68

Ash
found,
gram.

0-0043
0-0046

^zj-^

16-73
16-72
16-77

a
.2

6

CO Q

CO a

— —

759-8

757-8
760-7

15-4
14-7
15-0

d

109-1

70-6

105-9

0-6R,

52-48
52-48
52-38

c-vs a

OSS

0-7053
0-9404
0-5596

K^

7-01
7-13

HoO
found,
gram.

0-2318
0-1868

Substance
used
gram.

0-3665
0-4900
0-2913
0-7746
0-5013
0-7524
0-6629
0-6741
1-0959
0-4967
0-5992

No.

HHI— IHHK.^1— II— II— ItxjMl— 1

i-it-iEL'^t>'-ii-iLJ^t<i

,_| 1— t I-' [^ )_H 1— 1 '■^

>

V

o td £5 cC o

Composition of the Myosin of Muscle Tissue.

133

Resume of the Analytical Results.

My

osin A, from ox._.
B, " '•_.

C,

D",

D",

E,

F',

F",

G',

G",

H',

H",

I,

Average -

Fibrinogen* - _ .
Fibrin* ......

Paraglobulin*
Egg albuminf

sheep
calf . -

halibut

sheep

c

H

N

S

52-84

7-12

16-89

1-49

52-51

7-09

16-53

1-25

53-24

7-12

16-45

1-23

52-84

7-11

17-14

1-33

52-97

7-13

16-96

1-25

52-39

6-97

16-74

52-99

7-11

16-73

1-29

52-83

7-10

16-74

1-31

53-05

7-19

16-52

1-18

52-82

7-11

16-80

1-16

52-84

7-10

16-91

1-28

52-57,

7-10

16-84

116

52-79

7-12

16-86

1-26

52-82

7-11

16-77

1-27

52-93

6-90

16-66

1-25

52-68

6-88

16-91

1-10

52-71

7-01

15-85

1-11

52-18

6-93

15-81

1-87

0
21-66
22-62
21-96
21-58
21-69

21-88
22-02
22-06
22-11
21-87
22-33
21-97

21-90

22-26
22-48
23-32
23-21

* Hammarsteu, Jahresbericht der Thierchemie, vol. x, p. U.

f Chittenden and Bolton. Studies from Laboratory of Physiological Chenfiistry,
Yale University, vol. ii, p. 134.

134 Chittenden and Gurmnins — Nature and Gheudcal

The two products are seen to be pi'actically identical in compo-
sition, and show close agreement with the other preparations of
myosin.

Myosin I, from mitscle of ox.

This, the last product analyzed, was obtained from an ammonium
chloride extract of the washed muscle tissue from a freshly killed
ox, by dialysis. After being washed and dried at 110° C. it was ana-
lyzed with the results shown in the accompanying table.

On comparing now the composition of the thirteen preparations of
myosin analyzed, there is seen to be a very close agreement through-
out. Further, on comparing the average of the analytical results
with Hammarsten's figures for fibrinogen, the composition of the
two bodies is seen to be almost identical. Compared with egg
albumin, the most striking difference in composition is the low
content of sulphur, and even if we assume with Danilewsky* that
the sulphur of the ash comes from the sulphur of the myosin the
correction therefor would not materially lessen the difference.
Myosin also contains nearly one per cent, more nitrogen than egg
albumin.

Goagxdation of niyosi^i solutions.

According to Kuhne,f the coagulation of myosin in a 10 per cent,
sodium chloride solution occurs at 55-60° C. WeylJ obtained similar
results. Danilewsky§ states that a 12-15 per cent, ammonium chloride
solution of myosin becomes somewhat turbid at 42-43° C, decidedly
turbid at 45-50° C, while at 55° C. a flocculent precipitate sep-
arates. The same investigator also found that the more concentrated
the ammonium chloride solution was, the lower the temperature at
which the turbidity and separation of a precipitate occurred, although
never below 40° C. In common witli other proteid bodies a slight
degree of acidity lowers the temperature of coagulation, while a cor-
responding degree of alkalinity raises it. According to the recent

* Zeitschrift fiir Physiologische Chemie, Band v, p. 161.
f Lehrbuch der Physiologischen Chemie, p. 275.
\ Zeitschrift fiir Physiologische Chemie, Band i, p. 77.
§ Zeitschrift fiir Physiologische Chemie, Band v, p. 160.

Composition of the Myosin of Muscle Tissue. 135

work of Halliburton,* muscle-clot or myosin is formed from a sub-
stance (myosinogen) in the muscle-plasma which coagulates by heat
at 47° C. and 56° C, thus indicating that it probably consists of two
distinct proteids which coagulate at these temperatures respectively.
Further, Halliburton considers that whenever myosin is dissolved in
a suitable saline solution, it is at once re-converted into myosinogen,
or rather into two proteids which resemble myosinogen in that they
have the same heat coagulation temperatures and that they are con-
vertible into myosin by dilution of their saline solutions. In salted
muscle-plasma, Halliburton recognizes five distinct proteid bodies,
distinguishable by fractional heat coagulation, viz :

47° C, a flocculent, somewhat sticky precipitate.
56° C, a more abundant and very sticky precipitate.
63° C, a finely flocculent precipitate, not sticky.
73° C, a finely flocculent precipitate, not sticky.
A non-coagulable albumose.

Of these, the two proteids coagulating at 47° C. and 56° C, make
up the muscle-clot or myosin.

With these preliminary statements, we proceed to the results ob-
tained in our study of the coagulation points of the diff'erent myo-
sins, simply prefacing it with the explanation that our experi-
ments were performed previous to reading Halliburton's paper.
Naturally, the temperature of coagulation offers the simplest and
surest means, in conjunction with the determination of composition,
of detecting any difierence in the character of the myosins from
different sources. And with this as the main object the following
experiments were tried. In every experiment, the muscle tissue was
chopped quite fine and very thoroughly extracted with water, well
thymolized, prior to solution of the myosin with the saline fluid.

We first demonstrated to our satisfaction that a 5 per cent, ammo-
nium chloride solution of myosin invariably coagulates at a lower
temperature than a 5 per cent, sodium chloride solution, and further,
that the original saline extract of washed muscle shows approxi-
mately the same temperature of coagulation as the salt solution of
precipitated myosin.

* Journal of Pli}'siology, vol. viil, p. 14S.

136 Chittenden and Cummins — N'ature and Chemical

Flocculent
Turbidity. precipitate.

A. 5 per cent. NH^Cl extract of sheep's muscle. 43° C. 47° C.

B. 5 per cent. NH^Cl solution of II„0 precipi-

tate of myosin, from A. 44° 48°

C. 5 per cent. NaCl solution of II^O precipitate

of myosin, from A.

D. 5 per cent. NH^Cl extract of ox muscle.

E. 5 per cent. NaCl solution of H^O precipitate

of myosin, from D.

F. 5 per cent. NH^Cl extract of lamb's muscle,

G. 5 per cent. NaCl solution of H^O precipitate

of myosin, from F.
H, 5 per cent. NH^Cl extract of calf's muscle. 41°
I. 5 per cent. NaCI extract of same.

J. 5 per cent. NH^Cl extract of breast muscle

from chicken.
K. 5 per cent. NaCl extract of same.

L. 5 per cent. NH^Cl extract of leg muscle from

chicken.
M. 5 per cent. NaCl extract of same.

In all of these trials, the filtrate from the flocculent precipitate
failed to show any further coagulation, although the temperature
was raised to above 75" C.

The results show a varying difference in the coagialation points of
the ammonium and sodium chloride solutions, but on an average the
difference amounts to eleven degrees. It further appears that the
myosin sohitions (in NaCl) from lamb, calf, and chicken muscle have
a somewhat lower coagulating point than the corresponding extracts
from ox and sheep muscle.

In another series of results, shown in the accompanying table, the
same difference in coagulation point shows itself, and it is further seen
that the extracts from rabbit's and halibut's muscle have a still lower
coagulating point. Further, in this series of experiments, the filtrate
from the first coagulum gave a second precipitate on raising the tem-
perature, and in the case of the muscle from ox and lamb, a third
coaffulum was obtained at 74^ C.

57°

62°

40°

44°

57°

62°

44°

47°

51°

57°

41°

44°

53°

56°

43°

46°

53°

57°

45°

48°

56°

61°

(Jomposition of the Myosin of Muscle Tissue.

137

Coagulation of Myosin Solutions.

Nature of the Solutiou.

5 per cent. NaCl.
Sheep's muscle.
Ox

Rabbit's "
Pig's

Lamb's ' '
Calf's

Halibut's "
Ox

Lamb's "
Calf's
Chicken

(breast)
(leg)

Coagulation of the Solution.

Lobster*

Plocculent

Turbidity.

precipitate.

57" C.

63 C.

58^

63°

52°

57°

56°

60

53°

60°

53°

57°

47"

53°

57°

62°

55°

62°

53°

59°

53°

57°

56°

61°

65°

Coagulation of the filtrate.

Turbidity.

Flocculent
precipitate.

68° C.

73° C.

66°

72°

62°

66°

65"

70°

66°

70°

55°

60°

64°

66°

63°

68°

63°

66°

61°

67°

The results collectively fail to show the presence of a proteid
coagulating at 47° C, given by Halliburton as characteristic of myo-
sin, but they do show a coagulutn at 56° C. or thereabouts, correspond-
ing to Halliburton's second proteid. This diflference is possibly due
to the character of the saline solution, Halliburton having used a
magnesium or ammonium sulphate solution. The coagulums obtained
at higher temperatures show an approach, at least, to the figures found
by Halliburton in his fractional coagulation of salted muscle-plasma.

* Lobster did not yield enough myosin to permit of an exact determination, still a
decided turbidity was present at 65° C. The addition of water to the 5 per cent. NaCj
solution, gave a flocculent precipitate which changed to a glairy mass resembling much
the white of an egg. On washing with water it became insoluble, but differed in
general appearance from similar precipitates from other sources.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII.

18

Deo., 1888.

138 Chittenden and Cummins — My om,n of Muscle Tissue.

A careful study of the preceding results, combined with what has
been known concerning the chemical properties of myosin, seems to
justify the assumption that myosin, as it occurs throughout the ani-
mal kingdom, is a single chemical compound, doubtless formed, as
suggested by Halliburton, by the interaction of one or more myosin-
ogens and a ferment body. That myosin is a single body, is sup-
ported by the observed agreement in chemical composition and the
general uniformity in the temperature of coagulation of myosin from
various animal sources, and is furthermore to be inferred from the
similarity in function of the tissue in which it occurs most abun-
dantly.

VIII. — Myosinoses, By W. Kuhne and R. H. Chittenden.

Of the primary digestion jDroducts of the various proteids, the
albumoses from fibrin * and egg albumin f have been more or less
carefully examined and analyzed, as also the globuloses,J the case-
oses,§ and elastinoses. || Further, the vitelloses ^ have likewise been
prepared from crystalline phyto-vitellin and their properties ascer-
tained. With the hope of gradually completing the list we have
undertaken a study of the primary digestion products of myosin, the
results of which we now present.

For the preparation of myosin, large quantities of finely divided
ox muscle were extracted with cold water until the fluid no longer
gave reaction for albumin, after which the tissue was placed in an
excess of a 15 per cent, ammonium chloride solution, and the myosin
ultimately precipitated from the filtered fluid by dialysis.** The ex-
traction of myosin with ammonium chloride, after the method of
Danilewsky,ff is far better in every way than the older method of
extraction with 10 per cent, sodium chloride, since myosin is dis-
solved more rapidly and completely by the ammonium salt, even
from coarsely divided muscle, and at the same time forms a more
easily filterable fluid. Further, the advantage of precipitating the
myosin by dialysis in running water, instead of pouring the ammo-
nium chloride solution into a large excess of water, consists in the
avoidance of the large volumes of fluid necessary in the preparation
of such a large quantity of myosin, while at the same time the my-
osin is obtained equally free from soluble salts. At the best, how-
ever, the preparation of such a quantity of myosin as was needed in
the present investigation involved a large amount of labor and a
comparatively low temperature, hence compelling us to take the
winter season for the work. The united products obtained in this
manner were treated ultimately with dilute alcohol, whereby the
semi-gelatinous mass was naturally more or less shrunken, and finally
with ether.

* Zeitschrift fiir Biologic, Band xix, p. 159 and Band xx, p. 11.

f Studies from Laboratory of Physiological Ciiemistry, Yale University, vol. ii, p. 126.

J Zeitschrift fiir Biologic, Band xxii, p. 409.

§ This volume, p. 66. ||This volume, p. 19.

^ Ueber vitellogen, by Dr. R. Neumcister. Zeitschrift fiir Biologic. Baad xxiii, p. 2.

** See the preceding article.

ff Zeitschrift fiir Physiologische Chemie, Band v, p. 158.

140 W. Kiihne and R. H. Chittenden — Myosinoses.

A sample of the product, carefully dried at 110° C. until of con-
stant weight, yielded the following results on analysis.

Myosm.

I. 0-3665 gram substance gave 0'2313 gram H„0 = 7*01 percent.
H and 0-7053 gram C0^= 52-48 per cent. C.

II. 0-4900 gram substance gave 0*9404 gram 00.^= 52-48 per cent.
C.

III. 0-2913 gram substance gave 0-1868 gram \{JJ=z1-Vi per
cent. H and 0-5596 gram CO^ = 52-38 per cent. C.

IV. 0-7740 gram substance gave 109-1 c.c. N at 15-4° C. and 759-8
mm pressure = 16-73 per cent. N.

V. 0-5013 gram substance gave 70-6 c.c. N at 14-7° C. and 757-8
mm pressure = 16-72 per cent. N.

VI. 0-7524 gram substance gave 105-9 c.c. N- at 15-0° C. and 760-7
mm pressure = 16-77 per cent. N.

VII. 0-6629 gram substance gave 0-0043 gram ash =r 0-65 per
cent.

VIII. 0*6741 gram substance gave 0-0046 gram ash = 0-68 per
cent.

IX. The ash from 1-3370 grams substance gave 0-002 gram BaSO^
= 0-02 per cent. S.

X. 0-4967 gram substance gave by fusion with koh + KNO3, after
Hammarsten's method, 0-0458 gram BaSO^:=r26 per cent. S; de-
ducting 0-02 per cent. S of ash = 1*24 per cent.

XI. 0-5992 gram substance gave after fusion with koii + knOj
0-0552 gram BaSO^=l-28 percent. S; deducting 0-02 per cent.=i 1-26
per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free myosin.

Average.

- 52-79

.... 712

16-86 16-83 16-88 16-86

- 1-35 1-27 1-26

21-97

c

52-82

53-83

52-73

H

7-06

7-17

N

s

....

....

....

0

100-00

The ash consisted almost entirely of calcium phosphate.

Digestion of Myosin.

The myosin purified as described with alcohol and ether, proved
so resistant to the action of pepsin-hydrochloric acid, tliat its diges-

TT^. Kilhne mid R. H. Chittenden — Myosinoses. 141

tioii could be accomplished only by repeated treatment with the fer-
ment. The gastric j nice at first emyloyed was prepared by warming
120 grams of mucous membrane from a pig's stomach with 1200 c. c.
0-4 per cent, hydrochloric acid for 24 hours at 41° C, filtration
through paper, dilution of the acid fluid with an equal volume of
water and further exposure to a temperature of 40° C. for four days,
in order to convert any dissolved albumoses into peptone.

The digestive fluid so obtained contained 0"2 per cent. HCl and
0-5 per cent, solid matter.

200 grams of finely powdered myosin were placed in 2 litres of
this gastric juice, 2 litres of 0*2 per cent, hydrochloric acid added
and the whole warmed at 40° C. for two days. As only a little of
the myosin appeared to be dissolved, the acidity was increased to
0*4 per cent, and the mixture continued at 40° C. for 24 hours longer.
Although a large residue still remained undissolved, the entire
mixture was made neutral with sodium hydroxide and strained
through a cloth filter. The undigested residue, together with the
abundant neutralization precipitate, was again warmed for several
days at 40° C. with 2 litres of 0*4 per cent, hydrochloric acid con-
taining 7 "5 grams of scrapings from a stomach mucous membrane.
After stopping the action of the pepsin by neutralization, this second
digestive fluid was added to the first. In spite of the energetic
action of the pepsin (tested by allowing a little of the solution to
act on boiled fibrin), there still remained considerable undissolved
substance together with considerable neutralization precipitate, the
whole apparently very resistant to the action of the ferment. In the
united solutions there was present less than 100 grams of organic
matter, of which it is fair to presume about 10-5 grams consisted of
impurity in the form of substances from the stomach membrane.
When it is remembered, however, that well prepared gastric juice
contains only a very small amount of substances precipitable by the
salts used in separation of the proteoses, it is fair to assume that this
impurity in the digestive fluid is unimportant in the study of the
myosinoses. In all, nearly 60 grams of myosinoses were obtained.

For separation of the myosinoses, the united neutral filtrates were
concentrated to about one-sixth of their volume and saturated with
crystals of rock salt, by which the fluid was converted into a gelatinous
mass. On adding saturated salt solution to a portion of the filtered
fluid it was rendered decidedly turbid ; consequently, three volumes
of a saturated sodium chloride solution were added to the mixture,
after which it was found that neither salt in substance or in solution

142 W. KiXhiie and R. H. Chittenden — Myosinoses.

would give any further turbidity. From this it is evident that the
neutral digestive fluid is not completely precipitated by simple satu-
ration with sodium chloride, but that complete precipitation is
reached only when the absolute quantity of salt stands in a certain
proportion to the proteoses present.

After this separation of the first portion of the myosinoses, which
would naturally consist of proto, hetero, and dysmyosinose, the re-
mainder were precipitated first with salt-saturated 30 per cent,
acetic acid and then, after removal of the sodium chloride by dialy-
sis, with neutral ammonium sulphate. In the solution i-emaining
from this last precipitation, peptone was detected by the biuret re-
action.

Protomyosinose.

The sodium chloride precipitate, after thorough washing with
saturated salt solution, dissolved almost entirely on being rubbed up
with water.

What did remain undissolved, showed the reactions of dysalbu-
mose. it was insoluble in water and in salt solutions of all strengths,
but easily soluble in 0*1 per cent, hydrochloric acid, much more diffi-
cultly soluble in 0*5 per cent, sodium carbonate, by neutralization
only partially precipitated and gave the biuret reaction. From the
filtrate of the neutralized hydrochloric acid solution, some hetero-
myosinosc in the form of a flocculent precipitate was obtained by
dialysis. This hetero body was soluble in dilute sodium chloride
solutions, insoluble in water, precipitable by salt in substance, and
after the manner of the albumoses gave a precipitate with nitric acid
in tlie cold, which disappeared as the mixture was warmed, reappear-
ing as the solution cooled. This heteromyosinose, formed from dys-
myosinose by a process of retrogression, amounted to considerable ;
about 1'5 grams.

Reactions of Protomyosinose.

In order to purify protomyosinose the aqueous solution of the
substance was freed from sodium chloride by dialysis, by which only
traces of heteromyosinose separated, and the solution evaporated to a
thin syrup. The fluid was filtered from a slight flocculent albumin-
like prccii)itate insoluble in hot water, somewhat further concen-
trated and the pure myosinose separated by alcohol. After washing
with alcohol and ether it appeared as a light, white powder. The
yield amounted to about ten grams.

Wl Kilhne and R. H. Chittenden — Myosinoses. 143

The reactions of protomyosinose agree in general with those of
protoalbumose, but with one important difference, viz : that an
aqueous solution of the former, free from salt, of whatever concen-
tration, is not rendered turbid by nitric acid. Addition of even a
little sodium chloride to the acid fluid, however, is sufficient to cause
a heavy precipitate, soluble as the mixture is warmed but reappear-
ing as the solution cools. The precipitate is also soluble in an ex-
cess of the acid in the cold.

Protomyosinose is readily soluble in distilled w^ater, the solution
showing a weak, but unquestionably alkaline reaction. In this solu-
tion, as well as in a solution rendered acid by acetic acid, cupric sul-
phate produces a heavy turbidity, which on boiling almost entirely
disappears. Acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide produce a heavy
precipitate, insoluble in glacial acetic acid. Neutral lead acetate
gives no precipitate. Basic lead acetate and mercuric chloride
both produce a heavy turbidity. An aqueous solution of the
myosinose boiled with sodium hydroxide and lead acetate is colored
deep bi'own or black; with sodium hydroxide and cupric sulphate a
beautiful red. Concentrated sodium hydroxide, as in protoelastose,
produces a heavy flocculent, gelatinous precipitate. By saturation
of an aqueous solution of protomyosinose with sodium chloride, only
a portion of the substance is precipitated ; the portion remaining dis-
solved is precipitable by acid.

The composition of the substance, dried at 110° C. until of con-
stant weight, is shown by the following analysis.

Protomyosinose.

I. 0-3'722 gram substance gave 0-2387 gram H^O = 7"12 per cent.
H and 0-7090 gram C0^= 51-95 per cent. C.

II. 0-4239 gram substance gave 0-2688 gram H^O = 7-05 per cent.
H and 0-8048 gram CO^= 51-77 per cent. C.

III. 0-3319 gram substance gave 0-2138 gram IT.^0 = 7-15 per cent.
H and 0-6308 gram C0^= 51-83 per cent. C.

IV. 0-4798 gram substance gave 67-5 c. c. N at 14-8° C. and 762-1
mm pressure = 16*79 per cent. N,

V. 0-5663 gram substance gave 78-3 c. c. N at 15-1° V. and 768-2
mm pressure = 16-64 per cent. N.

VI. 0-4429 gram substance gave 62-7 c. c. N at 15-8° C. and 758-2
mm pressure = 16-77 per cent. N.

VII. (»-5494 gi-am substance gave 0-0062 gram ash = 1-13 percent.

VIII. 0-7080 gram substance gave 0-0081 gram ash=l-14 per cent.

1 44 W. JKiihne and R. S. Chittenden — Myosinoses.

IX. The ash from 1-2574 grams substance gave 0-0132 gram BaSO^
= 0-14 per cent. S,

X. 0-4183 gram substance gave after fusion with koh + kno^
0-0450 gram BaSO^=l-47 per cent. S ; after deducting 0-14 per cent.
S of the ash = 1-33 per cent.

XI. 0-3963 gram substance gave after fusion witli koh 4- kno^
0-0411 gram BaSO^=: 1-42 per cent. S; deducting 0*14 per cent.rr
1-28 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free protomyosinose.

Average.

--- .. .--. o3-4a

-... 7-17

16-98 16-83 16-96 16-93

1-35 1-80 1-33
32-16

c

52-53

53-35

52-41

H

N

7-19

7-13

7-32

S

o

100-00

The ash contained only calcium phosphate and sulphate, with a
little ferric oxide.

Deuteromyosinose.

This myosinose, as we have before mentioned, was obtained mainly
by saturation with ammonium sulphate. After removal of the
greater portion of protomyosinose by saturation with salt as de-
scribed, deuteromyosinose was in part precipitated by salt-saturated
acetic acid, but this precipitate could not be used on account of the
large amount of proto body precipitated with it, as shown by the
cupric sulphate reaction. This method of treatment, however,
although necessitating the loss of considerable deuteromyosinose,
enabled us to remove the proto body completely and thus ensure a
pure specimen of deuteromyosinose on treatment of the filtrate with
ammonium sulphate. Naturally, before saturating the fluid with the
ammonium salt, the sodium chloride was removed by dialysis. The
myosinose thus precipitated by saturation with ammonium sulphate
was dissolved in water and dialyzed until the sulphate was entirely
removed, or to such an extent that the fluid gave only the slightest
turbidity with barium chloride even on long standing. We hastened
the removal of the sulphate by repeated evaporation and renewed
dialysis of the concentrated fluid. The substance was finally pre-
cipitated from the suitably concentrated fluid, as a white powder, by
alcohol and washed with alcohol and ether. It weighed forty-five
grams.

W. Kuhne and It. H. Chittenden — Myosinoses. 145

Reactions of deuteromyosinose.

Like the preceding myosinose, this body also reacts alkaline in an
aqueous solution and this property exercises more or less of an influ-
ence on certain of its reactions. In order to convince ourselves of the
absence of traces of either proto or heteromyosinose, we paid particu-
lar attention to the behavior of the deutero body towards the cupric
sulphate reaction, which according to Neumeister's observations is a
decisive test on this point. A fairly concentrated solution of our
preparation was not rendered turbid by cupric sulj^hate in the cold,
but after boiling and then cooling the mixture, a slight turbidity
appeared. Solutions of the substance so concentrated as to be
almost syrupy, gave a slight turbidity at once, the turbidity disap-
pearing when the solution was heated and reappearing as the fluid
cooled. By partial neutralization of the alkalinity of the myosinose
solution, leaving the fluid, however, still alkaline to delicate test
papers, precipitation by cupric sulphate was entirely prevented. As
protomyosinose is precipitated by the copper salt equally well in an
acid fluid, we are led to consider our deuteromyosinose entirely free
from this impurity.

In general, deuteromyosinose shows much the same reactions as
deuteroalbumose, but is somewhat different from the latter in that it
is more difficultly precipitable. Acetic acid and nitric acid produce
a precipitate only after addition of sodium chloride to saturation.
Acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide give a decided turbidity, not
soluble in glacial aectic acid. Basic lead acetate and mercuric
chloride both produce a precipitate, insoluble in excess of the rea-
gent. Cold nitric acid quickly produces an intense yellow color.
The biuret reaction comes out distinctly, but on boiling the my-
osinose with sodium hydroxide and lead acetate only a faint brown-
ing of the fluid is obtained.

The composition of the substance, dried at 110° C, is shown by
the following analysis :

Deuteromyosinose.

I. 0-2121 gram substance gave 0-1394 gram 11^0= 7-30 per cent.
H and 0-3896 gram C0„=: 50*09 per cent. C.

II. 0-2115 gram substance gave 0-1390 gram H^O = Y'30 per cent.
H and 0-3891 gram 00^= 50-12 per cent. C.

III. 0-3830 gram substance gave 53-6 c. c. N at 15*0° C. and
762-5 mm pressure = 16-71 per cent. N.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 19 Dec, 1888.

146 W. Kilhne and It. H. Chittenden — Myosinoses.

ly. 0-2940 gram substance gave 41*4 c. c. N at 15-7° C. and 759-V
mm pressure = 16*'72 per cent. N.

V. 0-4672 gram substance gave 0-0080 gram ash =1-77 per cent.

VI. 0-5462 gram substance gave 0-0094 gram ash = 1-72 per
cent.

VII. The ash from r0034 grams substance gave 0-0116 gram
BaSO^=0-15 per cent. S.

VIII. 0-3343 gram substance gave after fusion with koh + KXOg
0-0315 gram BaSO^= 1-29 per cent. S ; after deducting 0-15 percent.
S of the ash = 1-14 per cent.

IX. 0-4050 gram substance gave after fusion with koh + kno
0-0420 gram BaSO^rr: 1-42 per cent. S; deducting 0-15 per cent.:=
1-27 per cent.

Percentage composition of ash-free deuteromyosinose.

Average.

C 50-95 50-98 .... ..-. 5097

H 7-42 7-42 • .... 7-43

N 17-00 17-01 17-00

S .... -. .... 1-16 1-28 1-22

O 23-.39

100-00
The ash consisted only of calcium pliospiiate and sulphate, with
some oxide of iron.

This is as far as we have been able at present to carry our study of
the myosinoses, since hetero and dysmyosinose appear to have been
oresent in the digestions only in very small quantity. Myosin
purified by alcohol, as was the preparation employed by us, is so diffi-
cultly digestible that it is attacked only by the most energetic pepsin
mixture, and this has the disadvantage of rapidly converting hetero
and protoproteose, which according to Neumeister's * investigations
are formed in the beginning of digestion, into the deutero body ; con-
sequently in the present instance we could expect a large amount only
of deuteromyosinose. Corresponding with this view, we obtained for
45 grams of deuteromyosinose, only 10 grams of protomyosinose and
but 3 grams of hetero and dysmyosinose. Further, the unavoidable
loss attending the separation of these bodies was probably greater
with deuteromyosinose than with the others. Portions of the fluid
from the first and second digestion, tested before they were united,
showed also a difference in that the fluid from the first digestion con-

* Loc. cit.

H

N

s

0

7-12

16-86

1-26

21-97

7-17

16-93

1-32

23-16

7-42

17-00

1-23 ■

33-39

W. Kuline and R. II. Chittenden — llyosinoses. 147

tained far more proto and dysmyosinose than the latter, which, on the
other hand, was particularly rich in deuteromyosinose. From this it
is evident how an albuminous body can in one sense be difficultly
digestible, in that its solution takes place slowly and its primary
cleavage products form . gradually, and yet the latter be further
transformed, under the continued action of the ferment, far more
readily and completely. Our conception of digestibility needs there-
fore to be broadened, after having for so long embraced simply
the time required for solution of the proteid, or, in the case of pep-
sin digestion, the hardly attainable extreme of complete conversion
into peptone.

On comparing now the results of the analyses of myosin and the
two myosinoses in the following table,

C

Myosin 52-79

Protomyosinose. - _ 52-43
Deuteromyosinose .50-79

there is seen to be only a small ditference in composition between
myosin and protomyosinose. The content of cai-bon in the latter is
only 0-36 per cent, less than in the former, that of nitrogen 0-06 per
cent, greater and oxygen only 0-17 per cent, greater. Between deu-
teromyosinose and the undigested proteid, on the other hand, there
is a far greater difference in composition, the content of carbon being
1-82 per cent, less, while nitrogen is 0-14 per cent, greater and oxy-
gen 1-42 per cent, greater. In hydrogen, both myosinoses show a
small increase over myosin, while the content of sulphur is practi-
cally unaltered.

That portion of the myosin, which was apparently not further
alterable by gastric juice, together with the somewhat large neutral-
ization precipitate, we attempted to digest by the action of trypsin.
This was only partially successful, for although the trypsin solution
consisted of an extract from 20 grams of dry pancreas in 2 litres of
0*4 per cent, sodium carbonate, and the proteid matter was warmed
with it at 40*^ C. for six days, we were not able to bring more than
half of the material into solution. The digestive fluid behaved some-
what peculiarly, in that with a certain excess of acetic acid it gave
a fine pulverulent white precipitate. After removal of this substance,
the solution gave no turbidity whatever with sodium chloride, or
with sodium chloride and nitric acid, and only a very slight one with
ammonium sulpliate ; hence it contained no myosinoses. Peptone,
however, was formed in considerable quantity.

IX. — The Relative Absorption of Nickel and Cobalt, By
R. H. Chittenden and Charles Norris, Jr., Ph.B.

When nickel and cobalt were first discovered they were supposed
to be possessed of decided toxic properties, and nickel particularly
was looked on as more poisonous than copper. Examination, how-
ever, of many of the supposed cases of nickel poisoning led to the
view that toxic action was due, mainly at least, to the presence of
arsenical impurities, with which German nickel particularly was
known to be contaminated. Gradually, therefore, the view has be-
come widespread that nickel and cobalt are no more poisonous than
iron, with which chemically they are so closely related. We have
not, however, been able to find many very definite statements re-
garding their physiological or toxic action. Blake * in his study of
the relation between isomorphism, molecular weight, and physiolog-
ical action, places the sulphates of nickel and cobalt in the same
group with copper, zinc, iron, etc., and further arranges cobalt, cop-
per and zinc together in a sub-group, on account of their arresting
the action of the heart and preventing the coagulation of the blood.
Nickel, liowever, is placed with manganese on account of its exert-
ing a marked influence on the nervous system. As to the intensity
of their physiological action, Blake apparently considers nickel and
copper of the same strength, while cobalt is figured as one-twentieth
stronger. Both salts, liowever, kill by arresting the action of the
heart and in lethal action cobalt stands first.f Woodman and Tidy J
state that 30 grains of the oxide of cobalt given to a dog proved
fatal in a few hours, whilst 3 grains of the sulphate injected into a
vein proved fatal in four days. With nickel, the same writers state
that vomiting is freely induced in a dog by a dose of 20 grains of
the sulphate, whilst 10 grains injected into the jugular vein will de-
stroy life instantly. Finally, Brunton and Cash have found that
nickel and cobalt, like most other metallic salts, cause slight contrac-
tion of the blood vessels. §

* American Jouraal of Science and Arts, vol. vii, p. 194.
f See Brunton's Pharmacology and Therapeutics, p. 51.
X Forensic Medicine and Toxicology, p. 171 and p. 214.
gBruDton's Pharmacology, p. 246.

Chittenden and JVbrris — Absorption of Nickel and Cobalt. 149

Our experiments have been conducted wholly upon rabbits, the
main object being to study the distribution of the absorbed poison.
The salts used were chemically pure cobalt and nickel nitrates, dried
over sulphuric acid. They were administered by mouth in gelatin
capsules.

We first endeavored to gain some idea of the relative toxic action
of the two salts. For this purpose two rabbits, weigliing 2 kilos,
each, were dosed as follows :

Experiment I.

Kabbit A.

Rabbit B.

Oct.

1,

10 a.

m.

0-150 gram

Ni(N03).

0-150

gram

CO(N03)..

1,

4 p.

m.

0-102

0-100

2,

10 a.

ni.

0-150

0-150

2,

5 p.

m.

0-101

0-100

3,

9 a.

m.

0-200

0-200

3,

4 p.

m.

0-200

0-200

4,

9 a,

,m.

0-251

0-250

4,

5 p.

in.

0-250

0-250

5,

10 a.m.

0-350

0-350

5,

4 p.

m.

0-350

0-350

6,

9 a.

m.

0-500

0-500

6,

3p,

.ni.

0-500

rams

0-500

grams

3-104 g:

3-100

Both rabbits died on the morning of the Yth, apparently from
heart failure. The urine was examined each day, but in both cases
was entirely free from either sugar or albumin. On the 3d, the
cobalt rabbit appeared troubled with involuntary micturition and
defecation, and on the 5th there was quite pronounced partial paral-
ysis of the hind quarters. The appetite remained good up to the
6th. On the 6th instant, after administration of 500 milligrams of
the cobalt salt, there was a loose diarrhoea continuous till death, de-
cided pai-alysis of the hind legs, total loss of appetite with a decided
lowering of the body temperature. After death, the body weight
was found to have diminished three-fifths of a kilo. With the nickel
rabbit, there was no diarrhoea whatever and the paralysis of the
hind legs, visible on the 6th, was not as pronounced as with cobalt.
The loss of body weight was the same as in the cobalt rabbit.

On post-mortem, the only noticeable abnormal feature with either
cobalt or nickel was a slight congestion of the lining membrane of
the stomach and intestines. The stomach, however, was found full
of undigested food, as if the salt had interfered with the digestive
process.

150 R. n. Chittenden and C. JSTorris — 77ie Relative

It is thus seen that neither the cobalt or nickel salt can be called a
violent poison, since comparatively large amounts are required to
produce a toxic eiFect, and even then the action is somewhat slow.
This is still more clearly seen in the next experiment.

Mxperiment II, with cobalt.

A vigorous black doe, weighing 2 kilos., was dosed as follows :

Oct. 8, --- 0-200 gram cobalt nitrate.

9, 0-400 "

" 10, 0-600 "

" 11, 0-700 "

" 12, 0-250 "

" 13, 0-250 "

" 14, 0-250 " " " •

" 15, ...0-550 "

" 16,. .1-000 "

" 17, 1-500 "

" 18, ...2-000 "

7-700 grams.

The animal died on the 19th, of heart failure. On the 11th, when
7 decigrams of the salt were given, the animal appeared sickly, with
loss of appetite, high rectal temperature, etc., but by diminishing
the dose of cobalt the animal rapidly recovered. On the 1 7th, how-
ever, with increase in the dose of salt there was diarrhoea, with a
slight indication of paralysis of the extremities. At no time did the
urine contain either sugar or albumin. There was a decided loss of
body weight, nearly one-third. On post-mortem, the stomach and
small intestines were found somewhat inflamed, and the liver showed
signs of a slight fatty degeneration.

Immediately on the death of the animal the internal organs were
removed 'and the absorbed cobalt determined.

The method of analysis, both for cobalt and nickel, was as follows :
The finely divided tissue was oxidized with dilute hydrochloric acid
and potassium chlorate, after the usual method. From the solution
so obtained, chlorine was removed by evaporation, the fluid made
alkaline with ammonia and the cobalt or nickel precipitated by a
stream of hydrogen sulphide gas. The washed sulphide, after igni-
tion, was then dissolved in nitro-hydrochloric acid, the free acid en-
tirely removed by heat and the chloride converted into sulphate by
addition of concentrated sulphuric acid. Ultimately, the sulphuric
acid solution of sulphate was diluted somewhat with water, made
strongly alkaline with ammonia and the metal separated by elec-
trolysis.

Absorption of Nickel and Cobalt. 151

Following are the amounts of absorbed cobalt found in experi-
ment II :

Total weight Weight Co per 100

of organ. of Co. grams of tissue,

grams. milligrams, milligrams.

Stomach and contents. 81-75 57-5 70-34

Small intestines - 43-90 13-8 31-44

Large intestines... 26-40 40-3 15210

Cgecum .-- 154-00 302-5 196-43

Liver.. .-.. 45-75 8-9 19-43

Kidneys 10-30 lost

Heart.. 8-80 0-7 7-95

Lungs 5-82 0-9 15-46

Muscleof legs- 100-00 1-9 1-90

Muscleofback 27-45 1-5 5-46

Brain 8-75

a • 1 ^ Q «Q k 0-8 6-45

Spmal cord - 3-63 )

Considering the large amount of cobalt nitrate administered, the
extreme solubility oi the salt, and the length of time intervening
between the iirst and last dose, it is somewhat surprising that the
amount absorbed was not greater. Evidently a large portion of the
cobalt passes directly through the alimentary canal, pi'obably com-
bining with the proteid matter of the food to form an insoluble and
indigestible compound.

Experiment III, with nickel.

A black and white doe of 4 kilos, body weight was dosed as fol-
lows :

Oct. 15, 0-200 gram nickel nitrate.

" 16, 0-400 " "

" 17, 0-600 "

-' 18, 0-800 "

" 19, 0-500 " " "

2-500 grams.

On the morning of the '20th, the animal was found dead, the only
noticeable symptoms having been general weakness, loss of appetite
and diarrhoea. The loss of body weight was quite pronounced,
amounting in the six days to 1-4 kilos. The urine was entirely free
from albumin and sugar. There was a little inflammation of the
stomach. In this experiment, the toxic action would appear to have
been greater than that of the cobalt in the preceding experiment.
The distribution of the absorbed poison was as follows ;

152 R. H. Chittenden and C. Norris — The Relative

Total weight Nl per 100 grams

of organ. Weight of Ni. of tisaue.

grams. milligrams. milligrams.

Stomach and contents 115-00 12-2 10-68

Small intestines _.. 67-87 11-4 16-88

Large intestines 37-45 3-9 10-41

Cajcum 190-00 9-4 4-95

Liver - 87-50 5-1 5-83

Kidneys 18-85 0-8 4-24

Heart .-. • 8-90 1-3 14-60

Lungs 14-15 0-9 6-36

Muscle of legs 292-00 1-2 0-41

Muscle of back-.. 129-00 3-8 2-95

Brain... 875 21 2400

Spinal cord 500 1-0 20-00

Spleen-..- 2-00 0-6 30-00

The amount of nickel found in the alimentai-y tract is naturally
not so large as in the case of cobalt, where the final doses were larger
and the diarrhoea not so bad. Of the absorbed nickel, the distribu-
tion is essentially the same as with cobalt. The amount in the kidneys
and liver is not as large as would be expected from the size of the
doses and the soluble character of the salt. It suggests that only
a small portion of the salt given is absorbed, and that elimina-
tion goes on with comparative slowness. Quite striking is the
peculiar distribution of the nickel in the muscle tissue, the amount
in the muscles from the back being seven times as large as in the leg
muscles. The same peculiarity is likewise noticeable with cobalt.
Also noticeable is the comparatively large amount in the brain and
spinal cord, more of the poison in proportion to the weight of the
organ being found here than in either the liver or kidneys.

Experiment lY^ with cobalt and nickel.

In this experiment, two rabbits of approximately the same body
weight were dosed with nickel and cobalt respectively as follows :

Nov. 1,

RabUt A.

Rabbit B.

1,

0-200

gram C0(N03)...

0-200

gram Ni(N03

2

0-150

0-350

3,

0-250

0-200

4,

0-400

0-300

5,

0-250

0-500

6,

0-800

0-300

7,

0-500

0-800

8,

0

0-500

2-550

grams.

3-150

grams.

Absorption of Nickel and Cobalt.

163

Both animals were found dead on the 9th, In the cobalt rabbit,
the stomach, lungs, kidneys and brain were found more or less
congested and there was considerable diarrhoea before death. In the
nickel rabbit, there was no diarrhoea and but little congestion. Rec-
tum was found full of hard faeces.

Following is the distribution of the poison in the two rabbits.

Rabbit A, cobalt.

Total weight
of organ.

grams.

Stomach and contents 76-65

Small intestines 58'70

Large intestines - 20'10

Caecum -. 108-00

Liver... ... 91-08

Kidneys 13-55

Heart ... 13-37

Lungs - - 9-62

Muscle of legs 196-00

Muscle of back 95-85

Brain 8-87

Spinal cord 4-95

Veight of Co.

Co per 100 grams
ol tissue.

milligrams.

milligrams.

10-8

14-09

7-5

13-77

JO-9

54-23

50-5

46-76

3-3

3-62

0-8

5-90

0-9

6-73

1-8

13-50

1-2

0-61

1-7

1-77

1-2

18-53

0-9

18-18

Rabbit B, nickel.

Total weight
of organ.

grams.

Stomach and contents 64 80

Small intestines 53-30

Large intestines 13-10

Liver 70-00

Kidneys 11-30

Heart.-.. 6-72

Lungs 7-93

Muscle of leg 157-00

Muscle of back.... 82-00

Brain ...:.. 9-00

Spinal cord 3-98

Very noticeable in both of these results, as in the preceding ex-
periments, is the comparatively large amount of poison in the brain
and spinal cord, also the same relative distribution in the muscle
tissue of the legs and back previously commented upon. The large
amount of j^oison in the lungs and heart, as contrasted with the liver
and kidneys, is also quite noticeable.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 20 Dec, 1888.

Weight of Ni.
milligrams.

18-4

Niper 100 grams
of tissue.

milligrams.

38-39

2-0

3-83

2-0

16-53

5-6

8-00

0-8

7-05

0-8

11-90

2-1

26-51

1-1

0-70

2-0

3-44

1-2

13-33

1-7

42-71

154

a. H. Chittenden and C. JVbrris — The Relative

Experiment V, with nickel.
In this experiment, 1-8 grams of nickel nitrate were grven by
mouth during five days to a rabbit ofr5 kilos, weight, the individual
doses being of about the same size as in preceding experiments. On
the sixth day, the animal died of heart failure. Following is the
distribution of the poison.

Total weight Ni per 100 grams

of organ. Weiglit of Ni. of tissue.

grams. milligrams. milligrams.

Stomach and contents 73-00 3-2 4-38

Small intestines 59-10 1-8 3-04

Large intestines 36-40 9-9 27-20

Caecum 176-00 36-5+ 20-74 +

Liver.-. 58-00 8-1 13-96

Kidneys '. 10-27 0-8 7-79

Heart 7-42 1-3 16-63

Lungs. 6-52 0-2 3-06

Muscle of legs 97-30 2-6 2-67

Muscle of back 35-00 3-7 10-'57

Experiment VJ, with cobalt.

In this experiment, an attempt was made to ascertain something-
regarding the elimination of the cobalt through the kidneys. For
this purpose, the urine was collected each day and the cobalt deter-
mined by the same method as used in the analysis of the organs.
The rabbit (body weight 2-5 kilos.) was dosed as follows :

Nov,

Dec.

27,

0-100 gram

CO(N03)2

28,

0-200 "

"

29,

0

"

30,

0-300 "

a

1,

0-200 "

ii

2,

0

a

3,

0-400 "

"

4,

0-400 '•

"

5,

0-400 "

"

6,

0-400 "

"

7.

0-400 "

"

8,

0-500 "

"

9,

0

10,

0-500 -

11,

0-500 "

ns.

••

4-300 grai

Examination of the 2^ hours' urine.
30 c.c. contained 1-3 milligrams Co.
50 " " 6-1

73

120

6-

23-3

Absorption of Nickel and Cobalt. 155

The animal died on the 12th. On the last day, 15 c. c. of thick, dark
brown, viscid urine were voided which contained 1'8 milligrams of
cobalt. 7-15 grams of fseces excreted during the last 24 hours were
found to contain about 100 milligrams of cobalt. Obviously a large
amount of the cobalt passes directly through the alimentary canal,
while of the absorbed portion considerable is eliminated through' the
urine, much more indeed than the small amounts found in the kidneys
would appear to warrant.

On analysis of the organs of this rabbit, the folloAving results
were obtained :

Total weight Co per 100 grams

of organ. Weight of Co. of tissue,

grams. milligrams. milligrams.

Liver-.... 66-00 2-6 3-94

Spleen.-.. 0-40 0-5 125-00

Kidneys 15-30 0-5 8-27

Heart.. 10-73 0-1 0-93

Lungs 7-02 1-0 14-24

Muscle of leg 140-00 9-8 7-00

Muscle of back 130-00 4-7 3-61

Brain.. 8-35 1-5 17-96

Spinal cord 4-10 2-0 48-78

Here, as in many of the preceding cases, the lungs contain a
higher percentage of the poison than either the liver or kidneys,
while the brain and spinal cord contain a still higher percentage.

With this rabbit, convulsions were noticed shortly before death
and the breathing was very labored, as if the respiratory muscles
were aftected.

An experiment, similar to the preceding, tried with nickel, led to
a like result as regards the elimination of the poison. The first 24
hours' urine (25 c. c.) contained 1-6 milligrams of nickel, while the
portion (70 c. c.) passed during the 24 hours preceding death con-
tained 8-1 milligrams of the metal. Further, 3-5 grams of faeces
excreted during the last 24 hours contained 17*5 milligrams of nickel.

It is obvious from the foregoing that soluble nickel and cobalt
salts are possessed of decided toxic properties, but that their poison-
ous action is somewhat slow and manifested only when compara-
tively large amounts of the salts are administered. Further, so far
as our experiments show, the two salts act very much alike. Both
apparently cause death by stopping the action of the heart and also
produce more or less disturbance in the alimentary tract, interfering
with digestion, producing more or less inflammation of the mucous

156 Chittenden and JSTorris — The Relative

membrane of the stomach and intestines, and causing a more or less
persistent diarrhoea. Unlike ui-anium, these salts have no apparent
action on the kidneys or liver, sections of hardened tissue from these
organs showing no change of structure. Further, in every case the
urine of the poisoned animal was entirely free from sugar and albu-
min throughout the experiment. Both salts tend to produce a par-
tial paralysis of the extremities, more pronounced possibly with
cobalt than with nickel. They enter the circulation quickly, are
rapidly distributed to all parts of the body and are in turn more or
less rapidly eliminated by the kidneys. Considerable, however, evi-
dently passes directly through the alimentary tract and is excreted
through the faeces.

Both salts appear to raise the internal body temperature quite
decidedly, the rectal temperature rising even two or three degrees
centigrade. The blood vessels of the eai's, on the contrary, quickly
become constricted under the influence of the salts, and the ears ap-
pear white and quite cold.

The storage power of the individual organs is somewhat peculiar.
The spinal cord and brain, in the majority of the experiments, stand
first in their power of picking up and retaining the nickel and cobalt.
This is in close accord with what has already been found with solu-
ble forms of arsenic,* and more recently with strychnine sulphate.f
It would have been interesting in this connection to have seen
whether, as with arsenic, the form of the poison modifies the
relatiA'e amount absorbed by the brain and spinal cord, but this we
did not have time to try. Again, as with soluble forms of arsenic,
the muscle tissue shows in several of the experiments, as Nos. V and
VI, a marked affinity for nickel and cobalt, retaining a larger percent-
age of the metals than either the liver or kidneys. Still more notice-
able, in all of the experiments but one, is the much larger amount of
poison in the muscles of the back than in the muscles of the leg; a
constant difference occurring in a tissue of the same kind, and hardly
explainable on the ground of difference in vascularity. A somewdiat
similar distribution of arsenic in the muscle tissue was found by
one of us a few years ago in an arsenical poison case.J

* Chittenden, Amer. Chem. Journal, vol. v, p. 8, also Studies from Laboratory of
Physiological Chemistry, vol. i, p. 141. Scolosuboff, Bulletin de la Societe Chiraique
de Paris, vol. xxiv, p. 125.

f R. W. Lovett, Journal of Physiology, vol. ix, p. 99.

\ Chittenden, Amer. Chem. Journal, vol. v, p. 12.

Absorption of Nickel and Cobalt. 157

Another striking featiu-e in the storage of nickel and cobalt by
the tissues, is the comparatively large amount retained by the lungs
and heart, the amount found in these organs generally exceeding the
amounts stored up in the liver and kidneys.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 21 March, 1889.

X. — Results obtained by Etching a Sphere and Crystals op
Quartz with Hydrofluoric Acid. By Dr. Otto Meyer and
Samuel L. Penfield.

A few years ago one of us * published the results of an experiment
of etching a sphere of calcite with acetic acid in which the symmetry
of a calcite crystal was brought out by the character of the etchings
on the sphere and the final result of eating away the greater part of
the calcite was a crystalline figure with rounded faces, but with a
decided steep scalenohedral habit with truncations at the extremities
of the vertical axis. This suggested to us the idea of trying similar
experiments on spheres cut from other crystals. The difficulty of
course lies in obtaining spheres of perfectly pure homogeneous ma-
terial ; the results furnish, however, an interesting and instructive
means of studying the symmetry of any crystalline substance and as
parts of the sphere are parallel to all possible faces of a crystal, as
soon as the relation of the sphere to the axes of the crystal is made
out the character of the etchings in any particular part of the sphere
will determine the character of the etching produced by the solvent
on any crystal face parallel to that particular part of the sphere.
The ease with which spheres of Japanese quartz can be obtained and
the readiness with which quartz yields in certain directions, to the
action of hydrofluoric acid, made the following experiments quite
easy, while the results as will be seen are far more striking than one
would at first suj^pose.

The results of our experiments will be better understood by re-
viewing some experiments made in 1855 by F. Leydolt f on quartz
crystals in which he showed that hydrofluoric acid acts very un-
equally on the diflerent kinds of faces, so that not only the right and
left-handed character of the crystals, but also all the complexity of
twinning can be made to appear by etching. The experiments were
repeated by us by placing simple quartz cx'ystals from Herkimer,
N. Y., in strong hydrofluoric acid and leaving them till sufficiently
distinct etchings were produced. In these experiments, some of
which were carried on in cold and some in hot acid, the character of

* Meyer, Jahrb. Min., 1883, i, 74.

f Sitz-ber. der Wiener Akad., 1855, xv, p. 59.

Etching a Sphere of Quartz with hydroflnoria acid. 159

the etching was in all cases the same, and as qiiartz is dissolved by
the acid very slowly it is not probable that slight changes in the tem-
perature or strength of the acid would have made any appreciable
difference. On the ordinary quartz combination of prism, ni, I, lolo,
positive rhombohedron r, 1, lOii and negative rhombohedron 2,-1,
0111 the following etchings are very easily developed. The positive
rhombohedron r yields most readily to the action of the acid becom-
ing covered with elongated unsymraetrical depressions having a hori-
zontal direction, the heaviest part being to the right in a right
handed crystal, fig. 1, plate I, and to the left in a left handed crystal
fig. 2, plate I. The top and middle edges of these depressions are
nearly straight, the bottom slightly curved, the widest end is ter-
minated by a straight edge having the direction of the zonal edge
between r and the adjacent z face. These etchings are distributed
thickly over the r faces, and although they are not all exactly alike,
their general character is well represented in figs. 1 and 2. The
effect of this action is also to eat away and replace all of the edges of
the crystal toward which the heaviest ends of the etchings are turned ;
thus in a right-handed crystal between r and r (lOll and ilOl), r and
z (lOll and OlTl) and r and m (lOll and Ollo) all to the right, while
the corresponding edges to the left toward which the points of the
depressions on r are turned, are left perfectly sharp, except of course
the upper parts where r, loli forms a short edge with the adjacent
r, on 1 face to the left. In a left-handed crystal, this same phenomena
can be observed only with the corresponding edges eaten away to
the left instead of to the right. This replacement of the edges is not
shown in figs. 1 and 2, but is shown in the original figures of Leydolt,
who also determined the symbols of the faces replacing the different
edges. According to our experience the replacement of the edges
appears more like an accumulation of little facets, all reflecting the
light simultaneously, than a replacement made by a single face and
for a discussion of the symbols of the faces and the determination of
the twinning structure of quartz as shown by the etchings we refer
our readers to the original paper of Leydolt. If the crystals are left
in the acid for a sufl&ciently long time the edges between the rhombo-
hedron faces become so far eaten away that nothing is left of the
original rhombohedron faces and the prism is left terminated by the
etching faces alone, which flatten out the crystal very much in the di-
rection of the vertical axis.

On the negative rhombohedron z^ the etchings are of an entirely
different character, composed of a system of shallow depressions

160 Meyer and Penfield — Residts obtained by Etching a Sphere

with curved contours, giving a sort of feather-like marking with the
direction of greatest action turned toward the heaviest etching on
the positive rliombohedron, figs. 1 and 2, plate I.*

The prismatic faces are much less acted upon than the rhombo-
hedron faces, the etchings varying somewhat in character but con-
sisting essentially of four sided depressions with long and short
vertical edges parallel to the edges of the prism, one straight steep
edge on the side of the positive rhombohedron r and parallel to the
zonal edge between m, and 2, and a shorter slightly curved edge on
the side of the negative rhombohedron z. These etchings have
definite relations to the symmetry of the crystals and are of reverse
character on right, fig. 1, plate I, and left, fig. 2, plate I, handed
crystals. On adjacent prismatic faces, the longer or shorter vertical
edges are turned toward each other, and by prolonged etching the
alternating prismatic edges, toward which the shorter vertical edges
of the etchings are directed, are slightly eaten away while the other
prismatic edges remain sharp and perfect.

From a consideration of the above we can now more readily under-
stand the action of hydrofluoric acid on a sphere cut from a simple
quartz crystal. A sphere of about 2'tt4 c. m. diameter was purchased in
New York, and etched by placing it in a lead crucible containing rather
a strong commercial hydrofluoric acid, such as can be bought in rubber
bottles from dealers in chemicals. The exact strength of the acid
was not determined. No special care was taken to place the sphere
in any particular position in the acid, its position being accidentally
changed nearly every day when the acid was removed, and the solu-
tion of the quartz going on so slowly that the acid had a chance to
act apparently equally on all similar parts of the sphere. During
the progress of the etching, which was carried on slowly in the cold,
photographs of the etched sphere were obtained at three stages, which
seemed well suited for illustration.

* According to my experience these etchings on the rhombohedron faces furnish
one of the best methods of showing to a beginner in crystallography that the six faces
which usually terminate a quartz crystal, are not the faces of an hexagonal pyramid,
and all alike, but are those of a positive and negative rhombohedron. To prepare
sections for showing this with a microscope, crystals should be etched till the mark-
ings are sufficiently distinct, tlien by cementing the crystal, with the etched face down,
to a glass plate with Canada balsam and cementing glass plates on either side, the
quartz can be ground away witli emery till the glass plates form a large wearing sur-
face and the quartz is ground to just tlie thickness of the glass plates ; tiien after re-
moving the slice of quartz and cleaning it, it can be cemented to an object glass with
the etched surface up and is ready for examination with the microscope. — Penfield.

and Crystals of Quartz loith hydrofluoric acid. 161

After leaving the sphere in the acid for a few hours, the etchings
were distinctly observed and their arrangement on the sphere was
such that its crystalline nature and relation to hexagonal axes could
be determined. The location of the extremities of the vertical axis
was marked by the centers of two triangular patches on opposite
sides of the sphere, while tlie character and arrangement of the
prominent etchings on the positive rhombohedron indicated the right
handed character of the crystal from which the sphere was cut as
well as tlie location of the extremities of the lateral axes. After
being in the acid for about four days some of the etchings were very
prominent, and the spliere had the appearance represented in figures
1 and 2, plate II. In figure 1 we are looking down upon the sphere
in the direction of the vertical axis. In the centre there is a distinct,
somewhat hexagonal field, the center of whicli marks the extremity
of the vertical axis. This whole portion is one where the etching
has gone on very vigorously, and with the microscope it can be seen
that the surface is composed of minute triangular pyramids grouped
closely together. About this, three prominent parts, which are ar-
ranged in the alternating sections of the hexagon, indicate the
position of the positive rhombohedron by the greater extent of the
etching, leaving very distinct prominences with their steep sides
turned to the right. A distinct ridge or marking, from which the
lines of etching go ofl" very distinctly, can also be seen about in the
center of each negative rhombohedron. In fig. 2, we are looking at
the sphere about at right angles to a prismatic face. A little above
the center of the figure and trending to the right, the prominent
etchings, indicating the position of the positive rhombohedron, can
be seen, while below and to the right they can also be seen in the
position of the lower positive rhombohedron. On what may be
called the equator of the sphere, midway between the above men-
tioned prominent etchings on the positive rhombohedrons above and
below, the extremity of one of the lateral axes can be located a little
to the right of the center of the figure. On much of the surface near
the equator of the sphere, the original polish has not been destroyed.
The vigorous action of the acid at the extremities of the vertical axis
is plainly seen accompanied already by a slight flattening of the
sphere.

After exposing the sphere again to the action of the acid for about
two weeks it had the appearance represented in figures '6 and 4, plate
11, In figure 3, where we are looking down upon the sphere in the
direction of the vertical axis, three parts on the equator, located by

162 Meyer and Penfield — Results obtained hy Etching a Sphere

the right hand and upper and lower left hand angles of the hexagon,
indicate one extremity of each of the three lateral axes and from
these parts the lines of etching run out very beautifully toward the
center and the prominent marking on the rhombohedron faces. In
figure 4, where we are looking at right angles to the vertical axis,
besides the decided flattening, a rhombic portion, about in the center
of the field, is conspicuous, the center of which locates the extremity
of one of the lateral axes. On this portion not only could the origi-
nal curved surface of the sphere be detected but also the original
polish. The acid having had apparently no action on this portion
of the sphere, while the etched portions come up to meet this with
sharp and distinct angles. Owing to a slight misunderstanding a
mistake was made in photographing figure 4, which was not discov-
ered till it was too late to correct it. If we imagine the sphere
turned 90° so that the unattacked portion would appear at the right
and seen at a tangent, while one of the two similar portions which
are now behind and out of sight would appear in the front and a
little to the left, the quartz would appear in just the right position
to compare with figures 2 and 6. As it is we are looking at the
crystal not at right angles to a prism in but at right angles to a prism
of the second order I2l0.

By exposing the quartz for about one month longer to the action
of the acid it appeared as represented in figures 5 and 6, plate II. In
figure 5, which is again a vertical view, we can readily locate the ex-
tremities of the three lateral axes by the right hand and upper and
lower left hand angles of the hexagon. At these parts the curved
contour of the sphere is preserved for a short distance, but between
them there is a decided tendency toward a triangular cross section.
The sphere as will be seen from figure 6 has become extremely flat-
tened and the upper and lower portions meet along a very sharply
defined line. The etchings seem to arrange themselves along parallel
lines or ridges and some idea of their beautiful arrangement can be
obtained from the larger reproduction shown in figure 3, plate I. In
figure 6 we notice, in addition to the extreme flattening, two of the
three portions where the acid has had very little action, one taken at
a tangent to the right, the other a little to the left of the center ;
these appear as very conspicuous parallelograms ; they have a
curved surface similar to that of the original sphere, and although
the original polish has disappeared from them only the finest etchings
can be detected with the microscope. It can almost be said that the
acid has had no action on these three surfaces, at least not enough to

and Crystals of Quartz with hydrofluoric acid. 163

destroy the original polish of the sphere till toward the very end of
the experiment and not enough to appreciably diminish the diameter
of the sphere. Although the original diameter was not accurately
measured care was taken soon after commencing the etching to cut a
hole in a card board very carefully just large enough to allow the
sphere to pass and at the conclusion of the etching the quartz just
touched at these three points when passed through the same hole.

The quartz was still exposed to the action of this acid for about a
week, but the general eftect was not different from that shown in
figures 5 and 6. Of course the sphere was still further flattened in
the direction of the vertical axis and the three parts at the extremi-
ties of the lateral axes where the acid had acted least, became con-
siderably changed, being flattened out more in a vertical direction
and therefore appearing as parallelograms, relatively much more
elongated horizontally. Figure 3, plate I, is from a photograph
taken at this stage in which the relation of these parts to the longer
sharp edge between them is less than in figure 5, plate II. At this
stage also the etching of the sphere was stopped and the specimen
deposited in the collection of Professor George J. Brush, New
Haven, Conn.

In review it will be noticed, as is the case in all etching, that the
acid acts very unequally on different faces of a crystal and therefore
on different parts of the sphere, equally, however, on those similar
parts of the sphere which are similarly situated with reference to
hexagonal axes. The action is greatest at the two extremities of the
vertical axis. The action seems to be, especially toward the end, to
lift off" or dissolve away layers of molecules from above and below
while there are three parts, which are each one of the ends of three
lateral axes, where the acid exerts practically no solvent action.
These parts diminish in size as the action of the acid continues but
not by any action of the acid upon them directly, except as the
molecules were taken away from above, below and at the sides.
This is one of the most striking features of the experiment that in
these three directions quartz is almost absolutely insoluble in hydro-
fluoric acid. As a study in symmetry the experiment all along was a
very interesting one. The etched sphere could never be divided by
a plane into symmetrical halves and showed throughout all of the
experiment the tetratohedral character of a right-handed quartz
crystal. The sphere was cut from a crystal which would have shown
etchings like those in figure 1, plate I. The accompanying illustra-
tions give only a faint idea of the beauty of the etched sphere, it

164 Meyer and Penfield — Mesults ohtahied by Etching a Sphere

being impossible to reproduce the delicacy and beauty of the mark-
ings as they appeared on the perfectly transparent material of the
quartz.

Pyro-electrrical experiments. — To further test the relation of the
sphere to crystallographic axes, it was heated for some hours in an
air bath to 100° C, and on cooling dusted with a mixture of red oxide
of lead and sulphur, according to the excellent method described by
Professor A. Kundt of Strassburg.* The red oxide of lead and
yellow sulphur arranged themselves in six alternating vertical bands
about the equator of the sphere, the red bands being located midway
between the heaviest parts of the etchings on the positive rhombohe-
drons above and below. On the etched sphere represented in figure
2, plate II, a red band ran vertically a little to the right of the cen-
ter, a yellow one a little to the left of the center and so on, three red
alternating with three yellow about the equator of the sphere. On
the etched sphere represented in figures 5 and 6, plate II, the slightly
attacked parallelogram parts, representing the ends of the lateral
axes, were yellow while the center of the sharp edges midway be-
tween them were red. These pyro-electrical phenomena, according
to B. von Kolenko,! indicate that the crystals from which our sphere
was cut was a right-handed one ; that part of the sphere where neg-
ative electricity develops on cooling and where the positively elec-
trified red oxide of lead deposits, indicating the position of the pris-
matic edge, where the right-handed trapezohedral faces above and
below would occur. The even distribution of the pyro-electricity
into six alternating positive and negative sections prove the simple
character of the sphere and the absence of twinning. This latter
was very important for the success of our experiment, lor if the
sphere had been cut from a complicated twin crystal the etchings
would have arranged themselves in a very confused manner, and the
shapes produced by the etching would have been very much modified.

In closing we wish to express our thanks to Mr. J. M. Blake of
New Haven, for the care which he took in photographing such a
difficult, transparent object, and to Mr. E. Bierstadt of New York,
for the pains which he took in the preparation of the plates,

Mineralogical Laboratory, Sheffield Scientific School, Feb. 4th, 1889.

* Ann. d. Phys. u. Chera., 1 883, xx, p. 592.
t Zeitsch. f. Kryst, ix, 1884, p. 1.

and Crystals of Quartz toith hydrofluoric acid. 165

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate I.

1. Etchings produced ou the faces of a right handed quartz crystal by hydrofluoric
acid.

2. Etchings produced on the faces of a left handed quartz crystal by hydrofluoric
acid.

3. Final result of eating away the greater part of a sphere (cut from a right handed
quartz crystal) with hydrofluoric acid during a period of about eight weeks. Seen in
the direction of the vertical axis. Tiie angles of the hexagon mark the extremities of
the lateral axes.

Plate fl.

'1 and 2. Appearance of the etched sphere after being in the acid about four days.
1. Seen in the direction of the vertical axis. 2. Seen in the direction at right angles
to the vertical axis and a prism of the first order.

3 and 4. Appearance of the etched sphere after being in the acid about three
weeks. 3. Seen as in 1. 4. Owing to a mistake in taking the photograph seen about
at right angles to a prism of the second order.

5 and 6. Appearance of the etched sphere after being in the acid about seven
weeks. 5. Seen as in 1 and 3. 6. Seen as in 2.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIIT. 22 Dec, 1889.

XI. — New England Spiders of the Families Dbassid^,
Agalenid^e and Dysderid^e. By J. H. Emerton.

Drassidse.

The Drassidm have long bodies like the Agalenidce and Lycosidce,
but most of them are a little flattened above and walk with their
bodies near the ground ; the first and second feet are directed for-
ward and the third and fourth backward. The feet have but two
claws, under which is usually a cluster of hairs sometimes so thick
as to conceal the claws. The under sides of the tarsus and metatarsus
are sometimes covered with hairs, especially on the first and second
legs, and these hairs are often flattened or thickened at the end.
The ce})halothorax is low in front, the highest part being in the
middle or farther back. The eyes are in two nearh^ straight rows.
The spinnerets are cylindrical with the tubes on the end, and the
upper and under pairs are nearly equal in length.

None of the Drassidm make webs for catching insects, though
many of them make nests, usually flattened tubes, in which they
hide in winter or while moulting or laying eggs. Most of them live
on the ground and hide under leaves and stones. A few, as Gluhiona,
Ghiracanthium, and Anyphmna live in summer on plants several
feet above the ground.

Many species are found adult at all seasons and probably live
several years.

The cocoons are flat, some are attached by one side, but most of
them lie loose in the nest or hiding place.

A large number of American species were described and figured
by Hentz, most of them under the generic name Herpyllus. Of
these I have identified nine : II. descriptus., crocatus, alarms, ecclesi-
asticus, ater, h'dineatus, variegatiis, and Cluhiona saltahunda, pallens.
Several others have been described by Thorell, and of these I have
identified Gnaphosa hrumalis Thor., Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.,
vol. xvii, 1875, and Gnaphosa conspersa, G. scudderi, and Prosthe-
sima melancholia Thor., Bulletin Hayden's U. S. Geol. Survey, vol.
iii, No. 2, 1877. The specimens of this family in the Museum of
Comparative Zoology in Cambridge, Mass., have been named by
Keyserling, and I have adopted his names for several species though
they are not yet published.

Neto England Brass khe, Agalenidm and Dysderidm. 167

Micaria Westdug.

This genus was first separated from Drassus by C. Koch under
the name of Macaria, which had before been used for a genus of Lepi-
doptera, and was therefore changed by Westring to Micaria in 1851.
They are all small and slender spiders with the cephalothorax arched
upward in the middle, without any dorsal groove or o\^\y a thick
opaque spot in place of it. The abdomen and usually the cephalo-
thorax are covered with flattened scales sometimes brightly colored
and ii-idescent. The tarsus and metatarsus of the first and second
feet have a double row of flattened hairs on the under side.

Plentz's Herpyllus auratas, found farther south, belongs to this
genus and is nearly related to 31. longipes.

Micaria longipes, uew sp.

Plate III, figures la, 1&, Ic, \d, It;, ]/; 1//.

Largest specimen 5"'"^ long. PI, iii, fig. 1. The cephalothorax
is twice as long as wide, widest across the middle. Head not much
narrowed. The eyes occupy half the width of the head. The front
row is nearly straight, the upper row with the middle eyes highest.
Eyes all nearly of the same size. The cephalothorax is highest in
the middle, curving downward toward both ends. The abdomen is
one-half longer than the cephalothorax and about as wide, blunt at
both ends and drawn in a little at the sides and above about one-
third its length from the front. The legs are long and slender, the
fourth pair longest. The colors are light yellowish brown with gray
hairs and scales which have green and red metallic reflections on the
abdomen. The legs are darker from before backward, the front
pair all light yellow except the femur, and the fourth and third pairs
with longitudinal brown stri})es that nearly cover the tarsal joints.
The cephalothorax is without markings. The abdomen has a pair of
white stripes at the constricted spot and a less distinct pair near the
front end. At the hinder end it is almost black. The scales of the
abdomen are of various forms, those of the white spot are long with
several branches at the base figs. U, le, those of the front of the
abdomen are more simple, fig, Ic, and those behind the white mark
ings are half as Avide as long \vith two rows of short branches fig. \f
at some distance from their edges. The under side of the abdomen
is as dark as the upper side. The white markings extend under half
way to the middle line. The sternum is nearly twice as long as
wide, widest at the second pair of legs and narrowed to a point
behind.

168 J. H. Emerton — Kew England Drassidm,

The maxilhe are a little notched on the oiiter sides and straight
on the ends except at the inner corners. The labium is two-thirds
as long as the maxillte. It is narrowed toward the tip, where it is
about half as wide as at the base, fig. \c(.

The male palpi are small, the patella and tibia are about of the
same length ; at the base of the tibia on the upper side is a large
tooth nearly as long as the diameter of the palpus, and curved
strongly forward, fig. \h. The tarsus is as long as the tibia and
patella together, and pointed at the end. The palj^al organ is small,
fig. \h.

The epigynum of a female from Salem, Mass., appears as in tig. lA
with two oblique openings near the posterior edge.

Salem and Medford, Mass., under stones and leaves. Adult male
in August and adult female in June.

Micaria montana, new sp.

Plate III, figures 2, 2a.

This is smaller than the common species. A female measures 4™™
long. The cephalothorax is not twice as long as wide and the widest
part is behind the middle. The abdomen is twice as long as wide,
not constricted or truncated at either end. The cephalothorax and
legs are light yellow-brown, the legs lighter toward the ends. The
abdomen is greenish brown with iridescent scales. Across the mid -
die is a distinct narrow white line and a less distinct one crosses the
front of the abdomen. On the hinder half of the abdomen are four
or five white spots. The white markings extend a short way under
the abdomen. The epigynum, Plate in, fig. 2a, has two oblique
openings near the posterior edge turned more toward each other and
less downward than in Micaria longipes.

Mt. Washington, N. H., July 1, 1874, east side, near the Ledge.

G-eotrecha, uew genus.

This genus includes a number of American spiders described by
Hentz, under the name of Herpyllus. Besides Ilerpyllus descrijAus
and crocatus, H. ornatus, H. long'qyalpus, H. marmoratus, II. cruci-
ger^ H. conarius^ H. triUneatus, probably belong in it. II. descrip-
tus and H. crocatus were placed by Koch in the genus Agrmca,
with which they agree in the shape of the maxillae and position
of the eyes. In this, he was followed by Keyserling, who named
the specimens of that species in the Museum of Comparative
Zoology, in Cambridge, Mass., Agreeca crocata. In the same collec-

Agalenidm and Dysderidm. 169

tion another species, Geotrecha hivittata, is named by Keyserling
Gastlaneira hiinttata, the genus Castianeira having been named by
Keyserling, in 1879, for a South American spider, with a long,
slender cephalothorax and a slender abdomen with the front part
hardened and differently colored from the softer part.

In our species of Geotrecha, the cephalothorax is about two-thirds
as wide as long and narrowed in front, more in some species than in
others. The abdomen is longer and a little wider than the cephalo-
thorax. It sometimes has a small, hard patch at the front end which
is of the same color as the rest of the back and not easilj'^ seen. The
abdomen is round, not flattened above as it usually is in Prosthesima.
The legs are long and slender. The hairs on the under side of the
first and second legs are only slightly flattened and thickened, and the
claws concealed by a thick bunch of hairs. The maxillae are nearly
sti'aight as in Agroeca and the labium is as short as wide. The eyes
are close together in the middle of the front of the head, the front
row nearly straight and the hind row with the middle eyes highest.
The middle eyes of both rows are largest and farther apart than
they are from the lateral eyes. The spinnerets are very small and
close together. The colors are dark brown and black, with white or
bright colored markings.

The male palpi have the patella and tibia both short and the tarsus
long and tapering. The palpal organ is round at the base and tajjers
to a fine point. The epigynum has two simple openings dii'ected
backward, and differing in size and distance apart in different species.

G-eotrecha bivittata.

Castianeira bivitkita Keyserling, specimens in Cambridge Museum.
Plate III, figures 3a, 36, 3c, 3d.

Length, 7 or 8"'™. Legs of fourth pair, 10 or 11™'". The cepha-
lothorax is widest across the middle in front of the dorsal groove,
Plate III, fig. 3a, and is about half as wide at either the front or
hinder end. The abdomen is usually about as long as the cephalo-
thorax and widest at the hinder third. It is sometimes slightly
drawn in at the sides and above over the front white marking. This
is caused by contraction in alcohol, the front end of the abdomen
being hardest contracts less than that part just behind it. The legs
are long and tapering, the fourth pair longest.

The cephalothorax is dark brown. The abdomen is of the same
color, a little lighter, with two white cross stripes, one about the
middle of the back and the other, a less distinct one, farther for-

1*70 -T. H. Emerton — New England Drassiclw,

ward. The femora of all the legs are striped lengthwise with brown
and yellow. The hind legs are brown with a little yellow on the
upper side of the patella and tibia. The other legs are yellow, some-
times with brown stripes on the under side. The white marks on
the abdomen extend underneath half way to the middle line. The
front hard part of the under side of the abdomen is lighter than the
hinder part, and the sternum is of the same color. The coxa? are
lighter yellowish brown.

The cpigynum shows through the skin as three dai-k spots and has
two openings directed backward, fig. 8f7.

The male palpi have the patella very short, about half as long as
the tibia, fig. 2>h. The tarsus is very large and dark colored, wide at
the base and tapering toward the tip. The palpal organ is simi-
larly shaped, with a rounded bulb through which the coiled tube
can be seen, and a slender tip lying in a groove in the tarsus, fig. 3c.

Hentz's Herpyllus zonarius and trilineattis seem to be near this
species.

It lives under leaves at all seasons of the yeai", and though not so
quick in its motions as crocata is a difficult spider to catch except in
cold weather, when it is often sifted from leaves in a torpid condi-
tion.

Massachusetts, Connecticut, and in N. Pike's Long Island collection.

The color is sometimes lighter, the whole cephalothorax above
and below being light orange color, and the legs the same color, with
the longitudinal brown stripes very narrow and indistinct.

In young individuals of both varieties the sternum is wider and
more convex than in adults.

Geotrecha pinnata, new sp.

Plate III, figures 4, 4a.

The largest specimen is 7™"^ long, cephalothorax, S"*™.

The cephalothorax is shaped much as in G. crocata. The abdo-
men is oval, not so much narrowed in front as in the other species.

The cephalothorax is light brown. The abdomen is grayish
brown with several white transverse stripes. The two widest
stripes are in the same position as the two stripes of C. bivittata.
On the front of the abdomen is another stripe, and on the posterior
half are four or five others, some of them incomplete on the middle
of the back. The femora of all the legs are light brown, the first,
second and third legs are yellow, except the femora. The fourth
legs have the tarsus and the ends of the tibia yellow, the rest light
brown. Plate iii, fig. 4.

Agalenidm and Dysderidce. 171

Epigynum, like that of crocata, but with the holes larger and
nearer together, fig. ^a.

The palpal organs and male palpi resemble those of crocata, but
are a little larger.

Three specimens, of different ages, from Medford, Mass., under
leaves with C. bivittata. Three adult females from Topsfield, Mass.,
Sept. 3d, under log in woods. Males and females in N. Pike's Long-
Island collection.

Geotrecha crocata.

Agroeca crocata Keys., specimens iu Miis. Comp. Zool , Cambridge, Mass.
S Herpyllus descriptus Hentz.
S Herpyllus crocatus Hentz.

Plate III, figures 3Z;, 3c, 3d.

Length of female, 8 to 10'""^ ; cephalothorax, 4™'". The cephalo-
thorax is nearly twice as long as wide and widest across the dorsal
groove. It is not narrowed behind as much as in G. bivittata. The
abdomen is usually longer than the cephalothorax and a little wider
at the widest part.

The cephalothorax is very dark brown or black, and the femora
and coxa? of all the legs are the same color. The abdomen is black
with a bright red spot of variable shape and size at the posterior end.
The spot turns yellow in alcohol. In some specimens it is wanting.
In the males the red spot is usually larger, sometimes extending the
whole length of the abdomen. The hind legs are black or brown
their whole length, a little lighter at the ends ; the other legs are
yellow, except the femora. The under side of the body is all black.

The epigynum has two small round openings, wide apart, a little
in front of the transverse fold. Plate iii, fig. 3d.

The male palpi are much like those of C. bivittata, but the tarsus
and palpal organ are only about half as large and the patella and
tibia are nearly equal in length. The tibia has a short process on
the under side. Figs. 3b, 3c.

This spider lives among stones in dry, open places. It is easily
alarmed and moves very rapidly. The flat, parchment-like cocoons
common on stones in pastures are probably made by this species,

Massachusetts and Connecticut, and in N. Pike's Long Island col-
lection.

172 J. H. Emert07i — N'ew England Drassidm,

Prosthesima l. Koch.

Ceplialothorax widest in the middle and more than half as wide in
front. Eyes near together, occupying about half the width of the
head. The middle eyes of both rows smaller than the lateral and
nearer together than they are 'to the lateral eyes. Upper row
straight, or the lateral eyes a little farther back. Sternum large
and nearly as wide as long. Maxillae wide in the middle and but
little widened at the ends, PI. iii, fig. 6a. First and second legs with
flattened haii'S under the tarsus and part of the metatarsus.

Prosthesima atra.

Herpyllns ater Hentz.

Prosthesima funesta Keyserling, speeiraens in Mus. Comp. Zool., Cambridf^e, Mass.

Prosthesima melancholica Tliorell, Bull. Hayden's U. S. Geol. Survey, Yol. Ill, 1877.

FL.A.TE III, FIGURES 6, 6c, Gcl.

Female, 8""" long ; cephalothorax, 3™"\ Male smaller. Ceplialo-
thorax and abdomen both a little flattened above. Cephalothorax
narrow in front, about half as wide as in the middle. Plate iii, fig. 6.
Abdomen oval, the hinder half usually a little wider than the front.
Sternum very large, almost as wide as long, fig. 6a. Maxillae and
labium large and a little shorter and wider than in P. ecdesiasHca.
Feet 1 and 2 with flattened hairs under the tarsus and half the
metatarsus. Feet 3 and 4 with fine hairs in the same places.

The whole body is black in most individuals, sometimes, especially
in the young, yellowish broAvn on the ends of the feet and under the
abdomen.

Epigynum large and distinct with two small depressions in front
and large openings behind surrounded by a thick brown rim, fig. 6d.

The male palpus is short with a very large tursus, as long as the
tibia and patella together and more than half as wide. The process
on the outside of the tibia is about as long as the tibia itself and
nearly straight. The palpal organ has a small fine tube and several
small hooks and processes all at the tip end of the palpus, fig. 6c.

This spider lives under stones and leaves. The cocoon is flat on
one side, by which it is attached, and convex on the other. It is
white, or sometimes a little pink.

Mt. Washington, N. H., Eastport, Me., Massachusetts, and in
N, Pike's Long Island, N. Y., collection.

P. melancholica was found by Dr. A. S. Packard at Monitou,
Colorado, 1875.

Agalenidce and Dysderidm. 173

Prosthesima depressa, new sp.

Plate III, figures 8, 8a.

A smaller species than atra. Female, 6™™ long. The head is
much smaller than in atra and the eyes larger and closer together.
Plate III, fig. ft. The cephalothorax and abdomen are black. The
first and second legs have the tarsus and metatarsus pale yellow, the
rest of the legs black except a pale spot on the outside of each
femur. The third and fourth legs have the tarsus and metatarsus
pale, the tibia black at the distal end, the leg becoming lighter from
this point to the base. Underneath, the coxae are darker from
behind forward.

The epigynum has the openings at the sides, farther forward, and
the ridges over them thicker and shorter than in atra, and the two
little depressions in front appear to be wanting, fig, 8«.

Medford, Mass., July 23.

Prosthesima ecclesiastica.

Prosthesima profiinqua Keys.
Herpyllus ecdesiasticm Ilentz.

Plate III, figure 7, In, lb, 1c, Id.

This spider is about 8 or 10™"' long, a little smaller than Gnaphosa
conspersa which it resembles in foi'm and habits, but from which it
is easily distinguished by its colors. The cephalothorax is black at
the sides and has a whitish stripe in the middle. The abdomen is
black at the sides with a bright white stripe in the middle that
extends from the front end about two-thirds its length. At the
hind end of the abdomen, just over the spinnerets, is another white
spot. The legs are dull black turning to brown in alcohol, as does
the cephalothorax. The under side of the abdomen is dark at the
sides and light in the middle.

The eyes cover about half the width of the head. The two rows
are nearly equal in length, the hinder only a little the longer. Seen
from above, both rows appear straight. PI. iir, fig. 7.

The maxillae are widened at the end, the outer corner sharp and
the inner rounded off down to the lip. Fig. 7«.

The male is much smaller than the female but similarly marked.
The male palpi are small. The patella and tibia are short, and the
tarsus is as long as both together. The process on the tibia is slender
and about equals the tibia in length. It is on the outer side, show-
ing indistinctly from above. It is slightly forked at the tip. The

Trans. Conn. Acad, Vol. VIII. 23 Dec, 1889.

174 J. H. Emerton — N'eio England DrassidfB,

palpal oi'gan is simple, with two short processes on the outer end.
Fig, 7 c, 7 c?.

The epigynum has a small oval opening at the posterior end of a
dark area. Fig. 1h.'

Under stones. Boston, Salem, Danvers, Wood's Holl, Mass.; Al-
bany, N. Y. ; Providence, R. I.

Poecilochroa Westr., Simon.
Plate IV, figures la, 3a.

The cephalothorax is narrowed towai'd the front, as in Prosthe-
sima, and more narrowed in males than in females. The two rows of
eyes are far ai)art, the hinder row a little longer than the front row,
with the lateral eyes farther back than the middle ones. The middle
eyes are farther apart than they are from the lateral eyes. The
labium is not much longer than wide and a little narrowed toward the
end. The maxillae are about twice as long as the labium. They are
narrower at the base and widen to the insertion of the pal])i. From
the palpi the maxillte curve inward and nearly meet in front of the
lip. The outer corners are turned outward. PI. iv, figs, la, 3a.
The colors are bright and the markings distinct.

Poecilochroa variegata.

Ilerpyllus va.riegatus Hentz.

Drassiis variegatus Keyscrling, specimens in Mus. Com p. Zool , Carabfidp^e, Mass.

Plate IV, figures 1, 1&, Ic.

This is one of the most distinct and brightly colored species of the
family. PI. iv, fig. 1. The cephalothorax is bright orange, a little
darker toward the eyes. The abdomen is black with three white
transverse stripes from the middle of which a T-shaped white mark
extends half way to the front stripe. On the front half of the ab-
domen the white stripes are usually partly colored with orange. The
femora of the first and second legs are black. The distal end of the
femur and both ends of the tibia of the fourth legs are black. The
legs are otherwise orange colored. The hinder row of eyes is con-
siderably longer than the front row, the rear lateral eyes being
their diameter nearer the sides of the head than those of the front
row. The head of the male is much narrower than that of the
female. The male palpus has a process on the outer side of the tibia
half as long as the tarsus, tapering toward the end and slightly bent
inward at the tip. The tube ends near the outer end of the tarsus
and is supported by a short thick process. Figs, lb, le.

Agalenidm and DysderidoB. 175

This spider is common under leaves in dry Avoods. Eastern Massa-
chusetts; Dublin, N, H.; New Haven, Conn.

Poecilochroa montana, new sp.

Plate IV, figures 'J, 2a.

This species is a little larger and less brightly colored than
P. variegatai PI. iv, fig. 2. Female 8""" long, cephalothorax
3.5™'". The arrangement of the eyes and proportions of the body
are about the same. The cephalothorax and legs are dark brown,
the hinder ones a little the lighter. The abdomen is black with a
pair of white spots near the front end and another pair across the
middle nearly united in the middle. The sternum and coxae are
dark brown. The epigynum is dark brown with a small opening at
the hind end. Fig. 2a.

Mt. Washington, N. H., on the road to Gorham.

PcBcilochroa bilineata.

HeTpyllus hilintatus Heutz.

Plate IV, figure 3, 'da.

A very distinct species on account of its markings. Cephalothorax
white, with two black stripes and a fine black line on the edge,
each side. PL iv, fig. 3. Abdomen thickly covered with long hairs,
white in the middle and at the sides, and with two wide black stripes
that do not extend quite to the end. The under side of the abdo-
men is white with a black stripe each side. Fig. 3a. The legs are
covered with gray and white hairs.

The female is 7™™ long, cephalothorax 3""". The head is about
half as wide as the middle of the thorax. The eyes are small, the
middle pair in each row farther apart than they are from the lateral
eyes. The two rows are widely separated. Sternum oval, widest
in the middle. Spinnerets long. Epigynum small, with a single
opening directed backward just in front of the transverse fold.

Gnaphosa Latr., 1804.

GnaphOSa brumaliS Thorell, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. xvii, 1875.
Gnaphosa scudderi Thorell, Bull. Hayden's U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. iii, 1877.
Plate IV, figures 5, 5a, 56.

This species is a little smaller than G. conspersa. A female of the
usual size is 10™'" long, cephalothorax 4™™, while conspersa grows to
the length of 12 or 15""".

176 J. H. Enierton — Neio England DrassidcB,

The colors are the same as those of conspersa ; cephalothorax and
legs dark brown and abdomen rusty black.

The epigynum has the openings rather wider apart, and the front
middle appendage flat, wrinkled at the edges, and with a hard spot
in which is a small hole near the end. This apj^endage resembles
the finger in the same position in Ex>eira. PI. iv, fig. hh.

The male palpus has the tibia rather shorter and its outer process
longer than in conspersa, fig. 5. The tube of the palpal organ
is only about half as long, its base being nearer the middle of the
tarsus. The middle hooked appendage is as long as in conspersa,
but much more slender, fig. ha.

Under stones on Mt. Washington, Ni H., from the ledge upward,
with cocoons of eggs July 1.

Males and females from Ellis Bay, Anticosti, July 23, S. Hen-
shaw in collection of Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.; females with cocoons of
eggs.

The specimen named by Thorell was from Strawberi-y Harbor,
Labrador, collected by A. S. Packard in 1864.

G. scudderi was found by A. S. Packard at the Garden of the
Gods, Colorado, in 1875.

G-naphoSa conspersa Thorell, Bull. Ilayden's U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. iii,
1877.
Gnaphosa giganfea Keysorliug, spueiraeus in Mus. Comp. Zool., Cambridge, Mass.
Plate IV, figures 4, 4a, ib, 4c, 4rf, 4e.

This spider is 12 to 15'"'" long and rusty black in color. Some
specimens freshly moulted are dull yellowish or greenish gray, and
old individuals have a. brownish color. The whole body and the legs
are covered with long hairs. The cephalothorax is wide in front and
the eyes are not so close together as in Pythonissa hnhecilla, or in
Prosthesima, The hinder row of eyes is a little longer than the front
row, and the lateral eyes are larger and farther back than the middle
ones. PI. IV, fig. 4. The middle hinder ej^es are a little oval and
oblique, diverging toward the front. The mandibles are large and
strong, on the inner side under the claw they have a wide flat tooth
with irregular and serrated edge, and near the inner corner two large
pointed teeth, fig. Ah. The maxillae are very wide and curve inward
so as nearly to meet ai'ound the end of the lip. Their outer corners
are rounded, tig. 4«. The spinnerets are stout and the lower pair
are widely separated. The male differs but little from the female.
The male palpi have the patella and tarsus both short and the

AgalenidcB and Dysderidce. 177

tarsus as long as both of tliem. The tibia has a short pointed pro-
cess extending forward over the tarsus, fig. 4c. The tarsus is curved
outward at the end. The tube of the palpal organ is slender and
extends along the outer edge of the tarsus for its whole length. At
the outer end of the palpal organ is a short process flat at the end
and curved downward, fig. 4c?. The epigynum has a long opening
on each side and a short transverse pit in front of them in the
middle, fig. 4e. In western specimens the opening at the hinder
part of the epigynum has the sides more nearly parallel, not diverg-
ing forward as much as in those from New England.

It lives under stones and leaves. The cocoon is white and flat,
with its diameter as great or greater than the length of the spider.
The female stays near the cocoon, but makes no nest.

All over New England, from the White Mountains, N. H., to New
Haven, Connecticut ; Adirondacks, N. Y.

Thorell's specimens were collected by A. S. Packard in 1875. A
female with cocoon of eggs on Gray's Peak, Colorado, over 11,000
feet high, on fir, Kelso's cabin, Colorado, and a small one from
Idaho, all adult females and all smaller than most eastern specimens.

Pythonissa Koch.

Pythonissa imbecilla Keyserling, speeimen fioni Kentucky iu Mus. Coinp

Zool., Cambridge, Mass.

Plate IV. figures Ga, G?;, 6c, <6d.

The male is about 4'""' long and the female 5""". The two rows
of eyes are nearly of the same length, the hindei" row almost straight,
with the lateral eyes only slightly farther back than the middle
ones. The lateral eyes of both rows are larger than the middle eyes.
The maxilhe are almost as wide as long and are curved inward so as
to touch in front of the lip. PI. iv, fig. 6«. The front edge of the
maxilhe is straight with the corners only slightly rounded. The
mandibles are small and the wide tooth under the claw, fig. 6^, can
be plainly seen just in front of the maxillae with another pointed
tooth on its inner side. The cephalothorax, both above and below,
and the legs are orange-brown with black hairs. The abdomen is
bluish black with a few v/hitish hairs at the hind end and around
the four muscular spots near the middle. The epigynum, as in fig. <od.
The patella and tibia of the male palpus are very short and not so
thick as the femur. The tarsus is as long as the patella and tibia
together. The palpal organ is large and complicated, the tube show-
ing plainly across the outer end, fig. 6c.

178 J. H. Emerton — Neio England Drassidoe,^

Under stones. IMales from Dublin, N. H., and Dedbam, Mass.
Females from Bliiehill, Milton, Mass,

Drassus.

Plate IV, figure la.

Tbe genus Drassus of Walckenaer included tbe greater part of
tbe present family DrassidiB, as well as some Agalenidai and Cini-
Jlonidm. From tbis, various genera bave been separated from time
to time, leaving tbe present Drassus an ill defined group containing
species differing greatly among tbemselves and forming several
groups, whicb f urtber study will no doubt make it possible to sepa-
rate. Tbe only two species wbicb I place in tbis genus belong, one
near tbe Eui'opean D. lapidosus and tbe otber near D. troglodytes.
In tbese species the cepbalotborax is wider in front and less flattened
tban in Gnaphosa and Prosthesima. The eyes are small and sepa-
rated by spaces at least as wide as tbeir diameter. Tbe front row is
nearly straight. Tbe posterior row is longer, and curved with the
lateral eyes lower tban tbe middle. The middle hinder eyes are oval
and turned apart toward tbe front, and are nearer together than to
the lateral eyes. The mandibles and maxillae are large and stout.
Tbe maxillje are widened on both sides bej'ond tbe insertion of tbe
palpi, the outer corners are slightly rounded and tbe inner corners
slope obliquely toward the lip. PI. iv, fig. 7 a. Tbe lip is about
half as long as the maxilhe. The colors are gray and drab with fine
short, white or gray hairs, and only faint markings on tbe abdomen.

Drassus saccatus, new sp.

Plate IV, figures 7, 7c, Id.

Tbis is one of tbe most common of our Drassidce. PI. iv, fig. 7.
The female grows to be 12""" long, with legs 10""" to I5™"\ The
color is light gray sometimes with indistinct transverse dark mark-
ings on tbe abdomen. The color of the front part of the bead is a
little darker and the feet and mandibles and maxillae are brown.
Tbe abdomen is long and slender as in Clubwna. The epigynum is
small and has two dark round depressions just in front of the fold,
fig. Id.

Tbe male is smaller and more slender. Tbe male palpi are very
long tbe patella, and tibia are together as long as the femur, and all
are as long as tbe femur of tbe first legs. The tibia has a small
process on tbe outer side, fig. 7c. Tbe tarsus is long and narrow.

Agalenidm and DysderidcB. 179

and the palpal organ is small with a short tube near the distal end,
fig. 7c.

These spiders live under stones in a large bag of silk in which the
female stays with her cocoon of eggs. In the early summer a male
and female live together in the nest, the female often being imma-
ture.

White Mountains, N. H., to Connecticut,

Drassus robustus, new sp.

Plate IV", figures 8, 8a, 86, 8c.

This is a smaller and shorter legged species than the preceding.
PI. IV, fig. 8. The female is 8'"™ long. The colors are darker and
redder, especially toward the head. The sternum, maxillje and man-
dibles are dark brown. The head is as wide as in D. saccatus, and
the eyes are a little closer. The epigynum is large, light colored in
the middle, and with a dark ridge each side, fig. 8a. The male is
much smaller than the female. The palpal organs and tarsi are large
and round. The tarsus is short and has a short curved process that
extends over the tarsus on the upper side, fig. 8^, 8c.

Medford, Mass., July.

Clubiona Latr.

Cephalothorax very wide in front. Front row of eyes straight, or
with the middle pair a little higher than the lateral, nearly equal in
size and equidistant, or the middle a little larger or farther apart
than they are from the lateral. Upper line of eyes longer and slightly
curved with the middle pair highest, the eyes all larger than those of
the front row, and the middle pair usually farthest apart. Plate v,
fig. 8c. Maxilla? long, narrow at the base, and much widened beyond
the insertion j)f the palpi. Fig. 10. The mandibles are stout and
convex at the base in the females. In the males the mandibles are
more slender, longer and tapering at the tips, sometimes with sharp
ridges along the sides. Legs slender, the fourth pair longest. Feet
with long claws, the first and second pairs with the under side of
tarsus and metatarsus covered thickly with hairs widened at the end.
The abdomen is truncated in front and tapering behind. The colors
are always pale gray and drab, usually with darker brown on the
head around the eyes, and rarely a light brown or gray pattern on the
back of the abdomen. The body is covered with short and fine hairs
which give it a soft silky appearance without concealing the color of
the skin.

180 J. n. Emerton — Keto England Drassidoe^

Most species vary greatly in size, some mature individuals being
twice as large as others of the same age and sex. They live on
plants in summer, and in winter hide under bark or stones, and have
at all seasons flat tubular nests of silk.

Clubiona crassipalpis Keyserling, specimens in Mus. Comp. Zool., Cam-
bridge, Mass.

Plate V, figures 1, la, Ih.

Male 8"^™ long, sometimes smaller. Cephalothorax two-thirds as
wide as long. Male mandibles convex in front for two-thirds their
length, with a low ridge along the inner side and around the end of
the convex portion. The thin keel on the front outer edge is sharp
but short, extending only a little over the convex part.

The tibia of the male palpus is as long as the patella. The process
on the outer side is long and slender, the end curved inward over the
tarsus. Plate v, figs. 1, \a, \h.

Abdomen marked with brown irregular veins, the rest of the body
pale. Head a little darker toward the front.

Massachusetts, Connecticut, Albany, N. Y., Providence, R. I., and
in N. Pike's Long Island collection.

Clubiona mixta, new sp.

Plate V, figures 'la, Ih.

Resembles C. crassipalpis and of about the same size. The man-
dibles of the male are similarly shaped, l)ut the convexity and the
internal ridge are less prominent. The male palpi are a little more
slender and the patella proportionally longer. The process of the
tibia has the upper tooth nearer the hook than in crassipalpis, mak-
ing the process appear wider and stouter, fig. 2. The tarsus is a little
smaller than in crassipalpis. Plate v, figs. 2rt, 2&.

Salem and Marblehead, Mass.

Clubiona tibialis, new sp.

Plate V, figures 3, .'{«, 3&.
Male 6*5""" long, another 5"'"' long. The male mandibles are slen-
der and tapering, without any distinct ridges on the front. The male
palpi are short and the tibia and tarsus both ver;y large. The tibia
is very complicated in shape, having a large hook on the outer side, a
short thick process on the inner side, and a thickened edge in front
that meets a slight elevation on the back of the tarsus. The tarsus
is long and large, and so is the palpal organ. Plate v, figs. 3, 3«.

Agalenidce and Dysderidce. 181

A female, apparently of this species, is 6""° long. The front legs
are shorter than in the male ; the mandibles are stout and convex in
front. The epigynum is large with a deep rounded notch in the
middle and a slight ridge each side. Fig. Zb.

Eastern Massachusetts, and in N. Pike's Long Island collection.

Clubiona canadensis, new sp.

Plate V, figures 4, 4a, Ah, 4c.

Male V"^'" long, others smaller. Mandibles tapering and rounded,
without ridges on the upper side. Male palpi short, tibia shorter
than patella, with a complicated process on the outer side ending in a
long sharp point with a round notch in the upper edge. Plate v
figs. 4, 4a. The tarsus is more than twice as long as wide, bent
downward at the end. The palpal organ has a large bulb with small
appendages at the end. Fig. 4J.

Female a little larger, epigynum with only two depressed spots
just in front of the transverse fold. Fig. 4c.

Abdomen dark, with brown irregular lines. Cephalothorax pale,
not darkened toward the front.

The common species on Mt. Washington, N. H., from the Glen to
the highest trees, under stones and in moss ; also from Montreal,
Canada.

Clubiona minuta, new sp.

Plate V, figures 11, lla, \]h.

This little spider is about 3'"" long and in its general appearance
resembles a pale C. rubra. The male palpi, however, show it plainly
to be a different species. The patella is longer than wide, as in
rubra, and the tibia is short and wide at the end. Its appendage
on the outer side is very simple, appearing from above like a thin
spine at the side of the tarsus and not overlapping it. PI. v, fig.
11. From the outer side it is seen to be flat, wide at the base, and
tapering from the middle to a blunt point, fig. 11a. The palpal
organ has a small hook on the inner side, fig. \\b, very different
from the large hook of C. rubra.

Male from Readville, Mass., June 15, on bushes.

Clubiona pusilla, new sp.

Plate V, figures 5, 5a, 5&.

One male 6™"^ long, another only 4"'°\ Head nearly as wide as
the thorax.
Trans. Conn. Acad.. Vol. Till. 24 Jan., 1890.

182 J. H. Emerton — N'eto England Drassidce,

Front row of eyes half as loug as the head is wide, the eyes of
equal size and equidistant; upper row, longer by the diameter of
the lateral eyes. The upper eyes are larger than those of the front
row, and all about the same size, the middle pair a little farther
apart than they are from the lateral eyes.

Mandibles with a thin keel on the front outer edge, half as long as
the mandible.

Colors, pale on the legs and palpi; cephalothorax brownish yellow,
darkest in front; abdomen covered with fine brown markings.

Male palpi with the tibia shorter than the patella, A flat wide
process on the outer side, PI. v, fig. 5 a, extends forward over the
tarsus. The bulb of the palpal organ nearly fills the under side of
the tarsus, the tube is short and curved round the end of the tarsus
so as to point backward ; over the base of the tube is a short stout
hook, instead of a large hook as in rubra, fig. 5.

Salem and Beverly, Mass.

Clubiona rubra Keyserling, specimeus in Mus. Com p. Zool., Cambridge, Mass.
Plate V, figures 6, Ga, 6&, 7, la, 1h, 8, 8ffl, Sb.

This is one of several closely similar species, the classification of
which cannot M^ell be understood without comparing large numbers
from many diiferent i)laces. Chihlona ahhottii L. Koch, is this spe-
cies or very close to it.

Males and females are 3 to 4"""' long. The eyes are large in pro-
portion to the size of the spider, and cover the whole width of the
front of the head.

The color after keeping in alcohol is redder than in most species.

The epigynum is notched at the hinder edge, the depth of the
notch varying in diflferent individuals. PI. v, figs. 6c, 7c.

The male palpi have the patella and tibia of the same length.
The relative length of these joints differs in the allied species. The
tibia is wider than long and has a large appendage on the outer side,
divided from the main part of the tibia by a deep notch on the
under side, figs. 6, 7, 8. The appendage consists of two parts, figs,
6a, 7a, 8a, the under one longest and a little notched at the end.
The size and length of this process varies in different individuals.
On the dorsal side of the tibia, on the front edge, is a small tooth,
varying in size in different spiders, figs. 6, 7, 8, The palpal organ
has a very large middle process, figs. 6^, 7^*, 8/>.

White Mountains, N. H., to Connecticut,

Agalenidm and Dysderidce. 183

Clubiona ornata, new sp.

Plate V, figures 9, 9a.

Female 8""" long. The abdomen is pointed behind and more
narrowed in front than in most species. Both abdomen and cepha-
lothorax are less flattened than in most species. The mandibles of
the female are not very stout and less swelled at the base than usual.

This is one of the few sjDecies with a colored pattern on the ab-
domen. A dark stripe runs along the middle, of a different width in
different individuals, but generally narrow and tapering behind. At
the sides of this are two white or light yellow stripes with irregular
edges, and beyond this the bi'own sides of the abdomen. PI. v, fig.
9. The body is pale underneath. The epigynum is notched at the
edge of the transverse fold, fig. 9a.

Mt. Washington, Dublin, N. H., and Massachusetts.

Clubiona excepta L. Koch.

Clubiona pallens Heutz.

Plate V, figures 10, 10«, 10^ 10c, \Qd.

Female 7'"™ long, cephalothorax 3""". The abdomen is not usually
much larger than the cephalothorax and unlike most species has a
pattern on the back similar to that of Aniaurohius and Tegenaria,
or in very light individuals consisting of three roAvs of gray spots
on a white or pale yellow ground. PI. v, fig. 10«. The cephalothorax
and legs are light yellowish brown, dai'kest on the head and mandi-
bles. The spinnerets are rather long. The epigynum has two round
brown spermathecae that show through the skin, close together just
in front of the transverse fold. In front of these are two oblicjue
openings directed forward and inward.

The males are not much smaller than the females. The male
palpi are slender, the tibia only a little longer than the patella, and
the tarsus nearly as long as both together. The tarsus is oval, about
half as wide as long, and rounded on the upper side. The papal
organ is narrow and covered by the tarsus. On the inner side is a
thin appendage, the free edge of which lies along the middle line
and covers the long straight tube. On the outer side near the end
of the tube is a straight process directed forward, and at its base a
hook directed backward, fig. 10c. At the end of the tibia on the
outer side is a short flat process with a small curved tooth on the
upper corner, tig. 1()^>.

Massachusetts, Conneaticut, and in N. Pike's Long Island collec-
tion. Under stones and leaves, sometimes in white cocoons.

184 J. H. Emerton — N'eio England Drassidce,

Chiracanthium C Koch.
Chiracanthium viride, new sp.

Plate V, figures 12, 12a, 126, \2d.

Female 8™'" long, cephalothorax: S™"". Ceplialothorax three-fourths
as wide in front as at the widest part, fig. 12a. Eyes spreading over
nearly the whole width of the head; the lateral eyes close together;
the upper row a little longer than the front row, eyes in both rows
at equal distances apart. Abdomen widest in the middle, tapering
behind. First pair of legs a third longer than the fourth. Sternum
widest just behind the first pair of legs and tapering to a point
between the fourth coxae. The mandibles and maxill?e are dark
brown. The rest of the body is pale yellow, the cephalothorax a
little darker than the rest, and a gray stripe covers the middle of
the front of the abdomen. The epigynum has a large oval opening
covered by a hard dark brown lump. PI. v, fig. \2d.

In the male the mandibles and legs are longer and the difference
in length between the first and fourth legs is greater. The palpi
are as long as the second femur. The tibia is twice as long as the
patella, and has on the outer side a tliin black process, a little curved
toward the tarsus, and on the upper side a thick blunt process ex-
tending a little way over the back of the tarsus. Between the tw^o
processes of the tibia a sharp process of the tarsus extends backward,
a little curved down at the end, figs. Via, 126.

Female, Dedham, Mass., July 26. Male, Saugus, Mass., June 12.

Trachelas L. Koch.
Trachelas ruber Kejseriing.

Plate V, figures 13, 13a, 13c, 13c?.

Female 10'"™ long, cephalothorax 4'""' long and 3'"'" wide. The
cephalothorax is widest in the middle opposite the second pair of
legs and narrows to 2'"'" at the hinder end, the sides of the hinder
half being nearly straight. The head is very wide and high, the
highest part half way between the eyes and the dorsal groove.

The eyes are all about the same size and far apart. The front
row is nearly straight, the middle eyes a little higher than the
lateral, this row is half as long as the head is wide. The hinder
row is much longer, the middle eyes are about as far from the front
middle pair as they are from each other, the lateral eyes are about
the same distance from the middle ones, but much farther back on
the head, figure 13. The mandibles and maxillte are large and resem-

Agalenidm and Dysderidm. 185

ble those of Cluhiona. The abdomen is oval and very regnlar in
shape. PI. V, fig. 13. The eephalothorax is very thick and hard,
and dark brown. The abdomen is light yellow with no markings,
except four small brown spots near the middle, and a gray streak
over the dorsal vessel. The hairs are very short and scattered so
that the skin appears soft and smooth.

The first pair of legs is a little the longest insteacl of the fourth
pair, as in the European species, and both the first and second pairs
are much stouter than the third and fourth. The palpi are slender,
the tarsal joint thickened at the tip. The legs are darker fi*om back
to fi'ont, the front pair reddish brown, not so dark as the eephalo-
thorax, and the hind pair is yellow. The epigynum has two dark
brown round depressions close together.

Pale individuals are sometimes found with all the legs yelloAvish
white, eephalothorax light brown with white eyes, and the abdomen
light gray.

The males are smaller than the females, sometimes not more than
half as large. The tibia of the palpus is shorter than the patella,
and has a short hook on the outer side. The tarsus is small and the
bulb of the palpal organ is so large that it extends beyond the tar-
sus on both sides. The bulb is round and has a distinct tube which
rests in a groove of the end of the tarsus, figs. 13c, 13f7.

Under stones and leaves and sometimes on fences in autumn. In
general appearance and color it resembles Dysdera. Massachusetts
and Connecticut, and in N. Pike's Long Island collection.

Anyphaena Sundeviiii.

Plate Yl, figures 1, la.

eephalothorax highest behind. Eyes of the front row equal in
size and equidistant, the lateral eyes a little the highest. Upper row
of eyes longer than the front row, the middle eyes highest, all of the
same size and larger than those of the front row and at equal dis-
tances apart. Abdomen widest in the middle and a little pointed
behind.

Maxillae long and widened at the tij^s but not so much widened as
in Cluhiona.

The opening of the trachea? is farther forward than in other
genera, in some species approaching nearly to the epigynum. PI.
VI, fig. la.

The colors are pale. The male palpi are large and complicated.

186 J. H. Einertou — JVeio Etigland Drassidm^

Anyphaena rubra, new sp.

Plate VT, figures 1, la, 16.

Female 8 or 9"^"^ long, cephalotliorax 3"'"\ Abdomen half longer
than the ceplialotliorax and about as wide, tapering backward from
the middle to the spinnerets, PI. vi, iig. 1. The cephalothorax and
legs are pale yellowish brown. The cephalothorax has two darker
longitudinal bands. The abdomen is white or light yellow with two
stripes made up of brown or red spots. The mandibles are dark
brown. This is the largest and stoutest species.

The epigynum has two large curved openings, turned toward each
other, between which is a long depression widened at the front end.
The long spermatheca^ show through the skin just behind the open-
ings, fig. 1 h. I have not seen the adult male.

Massachusetts and Connecticut, and in N. Pike's Long Island col-
lection. On plants and under stones.

Anyphaena incerta Keys., specimens in Mus. Comp. Zool., Cambridge, Mass.
Plate VI, figures 2, 2a, 26, 2c, 2d.

Female 5™™ long, cephalothorax 2™"'. The cephalothorax is about
a quarter longer than wide, rounded at the sides, and highest in the
middle. The front of the head is very low, so that the front eyes are
not their diameter from the base of the mandibles. The front row
of eyes is nearl^^ straight. The upper row is longer and more
curved, with the middle eyes highest, and the eyes of this row are
all larger than those of the front row. The abdomen is large in the
female, as in all the species of this genus, widest just behind the
middle and a little pointed behind, PI. vi, fig. 2.

The color is light brownish yellow with gray markings. The
cephalothorax has two indistinct longitudinal stripes and a fine black
line over the leg« on each side. On the abdomen are two rows of
faint spots and oblique lines. The legs have a few faint markings
across the joints.

The maxillje are straight at the sides and rounded at the ends on
the inner side. The labium is small and not half as long as the
maxillae.

The epigynum has a large dark brown process in the middle at
the front end, fig. 2d.

The tibia of the male palpus has a large double process on the
outer side, the upper branch of which is pointed, and the lower blunt
with a rounded tooth on the upper side, figs. 2a, 2b, 2c.

Under leaves in winter, Salem and Swampscot^, Mass.

Agalenidm and Dysderidce. 187

Anyphsena calcarata, new sp.

Plate VI, figures 3, 3a, 3&, 3c, 3d

The same size as A. hicerta, but lighter colored and with longer legs
and longer spines. The front legs are longer than the fourth in both
sexes. The markings are the same as in the other species and the
spots on the front of the abdomen are more distinct than in the
others.

The epigynum has a thin edge extending backward a little over
the transverse fold and reaching from one respiratory opening to the
other. In the middle is a small hole with a short tooth-like ridge
directed backward on each side. PI. vi, fig. '3d.

The male palpi have the outer half of the femur twice as thick as
the base with a few large spines on the upper side near the end.
The patella is as wide as long and shorter than the tibia. The
appendage on the outer side of the tibia is very small and does not
extend forward beyond the base of the tarsus, fig. Zb, 3c ; near the
base of the tibia on the under side is a blunt tooth, fig. 3«, 3c. The
tarsus resembles that of A. incerta. The palpal organ has the
middle process very stout and curved inward at the end, fig. 3a.

The coxa3 of the fourth pair of legs have on the under side a small
pointed process directed outward. The coxge of the third pair have
on th^ under side a curved process directed inward with a short
tooth on the hinder side near the middle, and in front of this a short
blunt tooth directed backward, fig. 3.

West Haven, Conn., July, on plants, and in N. Pike's Long Island
collection.

Anyphsena saltabunda.

Cluhiona saltabunda Hentz.

Plate VI, figures 4, 4a, 4b, 4c, 4d.

This is a veiy long-legged and slender species. The female is 4™""
long, the abdomen but little longer than the cephalothorax. The
front leg is 10"'™ long, fourth leg 7"'"'. The palpi are slender and as
long as the femora of the first legs. The whole body is white with
two broken gray bands on the cephalothorax and two rows of gray
spots on the abdomen.

The male is about as large as the female. The male palpi are lono-,
the tibia of very complicated shape. It is curved outward and has
near the base on the outer side a long, thin forked process. PI. vi,
fig. 4. The tarsus is of the usual shape. The palpal organ has a

188 J. H. Emerton — ISTew England Drassidm,

short slender tube resting against the tip of the tarsus. Behind the
tube is a thin hooked process, and on the inner side a long process
with small black teeth at the end, fig. 4, 4a, \h, 4c.

The epigynum has a long transverse opening a little in front of
the fold, fig. 4f?.

Massachusetts, and Meriden, Conn.

Phrurolithus Koch and Westring.

Micariosoma Simon.

Small spiders sometimes with bright markings and iridescent
scales. The legs of the first and second pairs have a double row of
strong spines under the tibia and metatarsus. PI. vi, fig. bh. The
maxillae are short and wide. The palpi of the males are very large
compared with the size of the spider, and have a long stout process
on the outer side of the tibia. The arrangement of the eyes and the
pattern of the dorsal markings resemble those of jLgroeca.

Phrurolithus pugnatus, new sp.

Plate VI, figfres 6, &a, 6&, 6c.

2™"^ to 3'"™ long. Cephalothorax round, narrowed at the head as
in alarius. Abdomen usually shorter and rounder than in alarms.
PI. VI, fig. 6. Cephalothorax and legs bright yellowish brown.
Abdomen dark brown with transverse light markings which vaiy in
different individuals. Light yellowish beneath, except around the
spinnerets and epigynum.

Epigynum with two oblique openings at the front end fai-thest
from the transverse fold. Parts of the })alpal organ are sometimes
found in the openings of the epigynum, fig. 6e.

The male palpi are large in proportion to the size of the spider.
The femur has a short process near the base on the inner side. The
patella is as short as wide, but the tibia is nearly as large as the
tarsus and wider at the distal end. On its inner side is a long stout
tooth projecting forward, and on the outer side a longer curved one
as in P. alarius. The tibia is oval and the palpal organ short and
round, not extending backward at the base as in alarms, figs. 6a, 6b.

Herpylliis parens Hentz resembles this species.

Massachusetts and Connecticut.

Agalenidce and Dysderidce. 189

Phrurolithus alarius.

Herpyllus alcmus Hentz.

Plate VI, figures 5, 5a, 5&, 5(Z, 5/, 5^^, 5/;.
Full grown female 4'"'" long, cephalothorax 1.5'""\ PI. vi, fig. 5.
The cephalothorax is nearly as wide as long, rounded at the sides.
The head is about half as wide as the thorax and the eyes are close
together and all about the same distance apart, fig. 5a. The middle
eyes of the upper row are oval and turned obliquely, nearest together
towards the front.

The abdomen is oval, widest behind, and a little flattened on top.
The legs are long and slender, except the tibi?e and metatarsi of the
first and second pairs which are twice as thick as the same joints of
the other legs, fig. 5. The legs are light yellow or white with gray
hairs, except the tibia and patella of the first pair, which are black
or dark gray with the tip of the tibia white. The tibia and patella
of the second pair are marked with lighter gray in the same way.
The tibia and metatarsus of the first and second pairs have two rows
of strong black spines on the under side, fig. bb.

The cephalothorax is light yellowish with a black edge each side
and a few irregular radiating gray marks forming two indistinct
longitudinal stripes. The abdomen is gray with transverse white
markings which vary greatly in shape and size in diflrerent individuals,
figs. 5, 5a. The abdomen is covered with fiat branched hairs that
are iridescent, changing from light grayish-green to pink with the
motions of the spider, fig. 5d. The under side of the body is pale
with a dark mark in front of the spinnerets, and in some individuals
a few irregular marks along the sides.

The male palpi are large. The femur is thickened on the under
side near the outer end, forming a short black pi'ocess covered with
short stiff hairs. The patella and tibia are both short. The tibia
has on the outer side a long process slightly curved downward that
extends along the side of the tarsus for half its length, fig. bg. The
palpal organ is so long that its base extends over the end of the
tarsus, fig. 5f.

The epigynum has two lai'ge openings turned toward the sides a
little in front of the transverse fold, fig. 5h.

It lives on and under stones in dry open ground and runs with
great swiftness short distances at a time. When still it lies close to
the stone with the tibiae drawn up over the back, as in fig. 5, the
thickened and colored legs of the first pair are then the parts of the
spider most easily seen.

Massachusetts and Connecticut.

Trans.. Conx. Acad., Vol. VITI. 25 Jan., 1890.

190 J. H. Emerton — IVew England Drassidm,

Agroeca Westriug.

AgrcBca pratensis, new sp.

Plate VI, figures 7, la. lb, 1c, Id, 1e.

Female T'"'" long, cephalothorax S"^-". The cephalothorax is widest
and highest behind the middle, the head a little more than half as
wide as the thorax. The abdomen is widest across the hinder third
and not much pointed behind. PI. vi, fig 7. The front roAV of eyes
are close together, the middle ones half their diameter highest. The
upper eyes are a little larger and about their diameter apart, the raid-
die pair much the highest, fig. 7.

The mandibles are very convex in front and flat at the sides. The
maxillae are straight on both sides and a little roimded on the inner
corners. The labium is half as long as the maxillae and as Avide as
long. The sternum is large and as wide as long, fig. 7a. The legs
are stout, the fourth pair longest. Under each metatarsus are three
pairs of slender spines, under the first and second tibiae two pairs, and
under the third and fourth tibia? three pairs. The cephalothorax,
legs, and mouth parts are light brownish yellow. The cephalothorax
has a fine dark edge on each side and a row of radiating dark lines
each side forming two broken dark longitudinal bands. The abdo-
men has two rows of gray oblique markings on a light ground, fig 7.
Epigynum with a long brown piece in the middle, fig 7e.

Male about the same size with the abdomen a little smaller. The
male palpi are large and stout. The patella and tibiae are the same
length, the latter a little bent and with a short pointed spine on the
outer side. The tarsus and palpal organ are short and wide. The
palpal organ has a short blunt process on the outer side that projects
over the edge of the tarsus, figs. 76, 7c, Id.

This spider lives under leaves and in short grass and resembles a
Lycosa in its gait and genei'al appearance, and also the common
Anyphmna incerta.

Eastern Massachusetts ; Providence, Rhode I. ; Albany, New York.

Agalenidse.

The Agalenidce have the cephalothorax longer than wide, with the
cephalic part higher than the thoracic, and distinctly separated from
it by grooves or marks at the sides. The head is usually higher
than in the DrassidcB and the body less flattened. The upper spinner-
ets are two jointed, the terminal joint pointed and provided with
si)inning tubes along the inner side. In most species these are longer

Agalenidm and JDysderidce. 191

than the other spinnerets. The feet have three claws. The Agalen-
idm make large flat or irregular webs with a tube or hiding place at
one side from which they run out and seize the insects that alight on
the web. The Agalenidm run on the upper side of the web with their
back upward, while LinypMa, which makes similar flat webs, runs on
the under surface, back downwards.

CcBloteS Blackwall.

The difference between Coilotes and Tegenaria is not a very dis-
tinct one. I have placed in Ca?lotes those stouter and shorter legged
species with the mandibles prominent in front, and in which the palpi
of the males have processes on both patella and tibia.

The eyes are in two rows, nearly straight, and differ but little in
size and distance apart. The mandibles are stout and convex. The
maxilh^ are wide at the ends, rounded on the outer corners, and
obliquely truncated on the inner. The labium is about half as long
as the maxilla;, a little narrowed and truncated at the tip. The
colors are dark gray and brown.

Coelotes medicinalis.

Tegenaria medicinalis Hentz.

Plate VII, figures la, \h.

Female 12"^'" long ; cephalothorax 5'"'", fourth leg 15'""', Front
row of eyes straight, the middle eyes largest, eyes of upper row all
of the same size and about equal distances apart, the middle eyes
highest. The lateral eyes of both rows are close together, those of
the upper row farthest toward the sides. Head high and wide, dis-
tinctly separated from the thoi'ax by grooves each side. Abdomen
oval, widest behind. Legs moderately stout.

Cephalothorax yellowish brown, darkest in front, marked with
radiating gray lines forming two longitudinal dark liands. Abdo-
men gray Avith irregular pale spots. A double row of oblique pale
spots in the middle, in most specimens broken and irregular, tig. 1.
The legs are light yellowish brown Avith light indistinct gray rings.

The spinnerets are short.

The epigynum has a large piece in the middle with a branch each
side that extends outward and forward ending in a point. In front
are two small rounded teeth directed inward. PI. vii, fig. la.

Male palpus short, with a large and wide tarsus. The patella and
tibia are both short and of about the same length. The outer pro-

192 J. H. JEmerton — New England Drassidm,

cess of the patella is half as long as the patella and blunt and crooked
at the end. The tibia has on the uppei- side a short pointed process
near the base and a blunt one near the end on the outer side, both
concealed by a curved ridge. On the under side of the tibia is a
process directed forward. The tube of the palpal organ is slender
and supported at the end by two large processes, hg. \h.

Chateaugay Lake, Adirondacks, N. Y., from F. A. Bowditch, 18 7 8 ;
Swampscott, Mass., May 8.

Coelotes longitarsus, new sp.

Plate Vir, figures 2, la.

Male 7™"" ; cephalothorax .3*5'""\ Head wide and high, highest
half way between the eyes and tlie dorsal groove. First leg almost
as long as the fourth. • Legs stout. Abdomeft oval, the hinder half
a little the wider. Cephalothorax and legs yellowish brown, a few
radiating darker lines on the thorax, and the front of the head a little
darker. Legs darker toward the tips. Abdomen dark gray with a
median lighter stripe in front and a double row of lighter oblique
marks on the hinder half, much as in medicinalis.

The patella and tibia of the male })alpi are both as sliort as wide.
The patella has a long tooth, widest and truncated at the tip, directed
forward on the outer side. The tarsus is widest at the base and
pointed at the tip. At the base on the outer side it has a stout
process extending backward and inward as far as the patella. Plate
VII, fig. 2.

A small female found at the same time and probably the same
species has a small, simple oval opening at the posterior part of the
epigynum. Fig. 2a.

Mt. Carmel, Conn.

Coelotes montanus, new sp.

Plate VI I, figures 3, 3a.

12"^°^ long ; cephalothorax S™"" ; 4th leg of female 18'"'", 4th leg of
male 20""".

Epigynum with the holes open, and oblique turned nearly forward.
Plate VII, fig. 3.

Male palpus with short patella and tibia, the tibia shortest. The
patella has a short conical, black spine on the outer side near the
end, directed forward, under this is a smaller spine. On the outer
side of the tibia, which is shorter than the inner side, is a short
process turned forward a little at the tip. Fig. 3a.

Agalenidm and Dysderidm. 193

The colors and markings are like those of the two preceding
species. The legs, especially of the male, are a little longer in pro-
portion to the size of the body.

Chateaugay Lake, Adirondacks, N. Y., from F. A. Bowditch. A
small male from New Haven, Conn., is apparently of this species.
Its palpi differ slightly from those of the Adirondack males as shown
in figs. 4, 4a.

Ccelotes hybridus, new sp.

Plate VII, figures 4, Aa.

This species is only distinguished from C longitarsus by small
differences in the shape of the male palpi. The spur at the base of
the tarsus is very short and extends backward to a short process on
the middle of the tibia. The posterior inner corner of the tarsus is
differently shaped from this part in longitarsus, having a deep notch
shown in figs. 4, Aa. The tibia is a little longer than that of
longitarsus and shaped much like that of niedlcinalis. The patella
resembles that of longitarsus. In size, markings, and colors this is
like both rnedicinalis and longitarsus. The palpal organ is almost
exactly like that of longitarsus.

One male from Chateaugay Lake, Adirondacks, N. Y., from F. A.
Bowditch.

Tegenaria Latr.

These spiders differ from Cmlotes in having the legs longer and
more slender and the abdomen generally rounder and shorter. The
mandibles are less convex in front, the palpi of the males have no
processes on the patella, and the palpal organ is proportionally smaller
than in Coelotes.

Tegenaria derhamii Scopoii, 17G3; Thoreii, i87?..

Tegenaria civilis Blackwall, 1861.
Tegenaria domeslica Simon, 1875.

Plate VII, figures 6, 6a, Gb, 6c.
This is a house spider found all over the world. Female 10"™
long ; cephalothorax S'"'". Plate vii, fig. 6. The legs are long and
tapering, 4th leg 18™'" long. Tarsi and metatarsi slender. The head
is high and wider in front than it is opposite the first pair of legs.
The abdomen is short, only a little longer than the cephalothorax.
The front row of eyes is straight, the middle ones smallest. iTpper
row longer, lateral eyes close to those of the front row, the middle
ones much higher, fig. 6.

194 J. H. Emerton — New England Drassidm,

Cephalothorax and legs light yellowish brown, the legs with some
indistinct gray rings. Abdomen pale with gray markings which are
usually plainest on the hinder half. The upper spinnerets are twice
as long as the lower and the terminal joint is nearly as long as the
basal.

Epigynum with small oblique openings at the sides. Fig. 6c.

The male palpi have the patella and tibia long and both about the
same length. The tibia has on the outer side, about one-fourth its
length from the end, a short blunt process, fig. 6a, under this is a
shorter process lighter colored and directed forward, fig. Qh. The
tarsus is slender and pointed and the appendages of the i:)alpal organ
are small. Figs. 6a, 6^.

Tegenaria brevis, uew sp.

Plate VII, figures 5, 5a, 5/*, 5c.

A small species, 5 to 6""^ long. Cephalothorax two-thirds as wide
as long. Abdomen short and widest behind. The mandibles are
small and but little convex in front. The cephalothorax and legs are
pale yellowish brown with black hairs, the legs and palpi are lightest
at the base and darker toward the ends. The spines are very long
and slender. The abdomen is in some individuals pale with dark
hairs ; in others there is a gray herring-bone marking, and gray
marks along the sides.

The male palpi are slender and without any appendages on the
patella. The tibia has a short stout tooth on the outer side a little
behind the end. The tarsus is small and pointed. The palpal organ
is round and too large to be covered by the tarsus. Plate vii, fig. 5.
The head of the male is narrower than that of the female, and the
thorax wider, figs, bh, 5c.

The epigynum appears to the naked eye like two parallel dark
brown marks. It has a large posterior opening, widest behind, and
partly divided into two at the front edge, fig. 5a.

The short round abdomen and gray markings make this S2)ider
resemble Steatoda marmorata.

Mt. Washington. N. H. ; Massachusetts ; New Haven, Conn.

Cicurina Menge, ]»71. Simon, J875.
This genus differs but little from Coelotes except in the palpi of
the males which have the patella without processes, the tarsus long
and narrow, and the tibia short with a large appendage on the outer
side. The tube of the palpal oi'gan is long and supported in various
complicated ways. .

Agalenidm and Dysderidce, 195

Cicurina complicata, now sp.

Plate VII, figures 7, 7«, 76.

This is a small, stout species, the largest individuals iiieasurinsf
7'"™ in length, and the cephalothorax 3'""\ The cephalothorax, legs,
and palpi are uniform yellowish brown. The abdomen is pale with
scattered gray markings both above and below, in some individuals
forming an indistinct herring-bone pattern on the dorsal side. The
sternum is as wide as long and nearly as wide jn front as in the mid-
dle. The mandibles are stout, and in the females very convex in
front. In the males the head is narrower and the mandibles smaller.

The palpi of the males have the patella simple and about as long
as wide. The tibia has a short tooth near the base on the outer side
the middle part is turned inward, and on the outer side at the end is
a large flat and crooked appendage that in its natural position
appears to be part of the palpal organ. Plate vii, fig. 7. In fig. 7a
the process is shown from the side partly tiirned away from the pal-
pal organ. The tarsus is long and narrow and rounded at the tip,
fig. 76. The tube of the palpal organ is very long, beginning at the
base of the tai'sus it runs along the inner side around the tip, whei-e
it is supported by the edge of a flattened appendage, and backward
along the outer side, the end being under the flat tibial process.

The epigynum has a simple oval opening behind, and the tubes
show through the skin in light-colored individuals.

•Blue hill, Milton, Mass., and Salem, Mass., under leaves, in winter.

Hahnia Koch.

Upper eyes all about the same size, the middle pair, highest and
farthest back and farther from each other than they are from the
lateral eyes. Front eyes nearer together, the middle ones highest.
The lateral eyes of both rows close together.

The spinnerets are in a single transverse row, the upj^er pair being
outside the others. The outer pair has two nearly equal joints and
the next pair have a short second joint at the tip.

The opening of the tracheje is in the middle of the abdomen
instead of dii*ectly in front of the spinnerets, as in most of the
family.

Small spiders resembling Tegenaria and delotes, except in the
spinnerets.

196 J. IS. Emerton — New England Drassidm,

Hahnia bimaculata, new sp.

Plate VII, figures 8, 8a, to 8/.

Length, 2-5""°. Eyes lai-ge, both rows with the lateral eyes low-
est. Lateral eyes much nearer together than the middle pairs.
Front eyes a little the larger, both rows strongly curved, the middle
eyes highest. Maxillae short and wide, the front edge straight
except on the inner corner. Sternum as wide as long, widest oppo-
site the second legs. The spinnerets are long, the terminal joints of
the outer pair nearly as long as the basal joint. The tracheal open-
ing is nearer the epigynum than the spinnerets. Plate vii, fig. 8.

The cephalothorax, sternum, and mouth parts are reddish brown.
The abdomen is light gray with many irregular pale spots and a
double row of pale oblique markings in the middle. In the middle
of the front half of the abdomen are two orange colored spots. The
under side of the abdomen is pale with a few gray spots. The legs
are pale with gray rings, two rings on the femur, tibia, and metatar-
sus. The skin over the epigynum is very transparent and shows
two convoluted tubes almost always unsymmetrical, figs. 8c, c?, e, _/'.
The male palpus has on the outside of the tibia, near the end, a
pointed process as long as the diameter of the tibia. At the base of
the patella on the outer side is a small pointed black process curved
a little forward, fig. 8^. The tarsus is nearly as wide as long but
slightly pointed at the tip. The palpal organ is flat with a long
thin tube extending along the inner side around the end, fig. 8a.

Common under dead leaves. Massachusetts, Connecticut, and Mt.
Washington, N. H.

Hahnia radula,

new sp.

This spider resembles II. bimaculata but is nearly twice as large.
On the under side of the first and second legs and pal])i of the male
the hairs are raised on short transverse ridges so that the leg ajjpears
serrated when seen from the side. Plate vii, figs. 10, 10a. The gray
markings of the abdomen and rings around the legs are less distinct
than in hiinaculata. The little spine at the base of the patella of
the male palpi is shorter than in bimaculata and sharply turned for-
ward. The appendage of the tibia is the same as in bimaculata, and
the tarsi and palpal organs are very similar.

One male, Jaffrey, N. H., Aug. I.

Agalenidce and Dysderidce. 197

Hahnia cinerea, new sp.

Plate VII, figures 9, 9a, 96.

Length, 1-5 to 2™°^.

Cephalothorax light, with dark radiating markings. Abdomen
dark gray with scattered small white spots and a double median
row of oblique light markings somewhat like Cmlotes. Plate vii,
fig. 9. The legs are light yellowish brown Avith patella?, coxae, and
the ends of the longer joints paler than the rest. The basal joints
of the s])innerets are light yellowish brown like the legs. Terminal
joint of outer spinnerets shorter than basal. The tracheal openings
are nearer the spinnerets than the epigynum. The skin over the
epigynum is rather opaque and but little of it can be seen. The
palpi of the male have the patella and tibia both short and each has
a long, slender process on the outer side which is flexible and
variously curved at the end, fig. 9/>. The tarsus is short and oval.
The palpal organ has at the base a short feather-like appendage.
The tube is slender and curved around the distal end of the tarsus.
It has near the end a short soft appendage of the bulb, fig. ^a.

Salem, Beverly, Swampscott, Cambridge, Roxbury, Mt. Tom,
Mass., and New Haven, Conn.

Agalena Waick.

Large hairy spiders with long legs and very long upper spinnerets.
The head is high and the middle eyes of both rows are much higher
than the others. The web is flat and more regular and closely woven
than in Tegenaria.

Agalena naevia Walck. and Bosc, 1841; Heutz, 1848.

^grafena j30<fen Blackwall, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. xvii, 1846.
AgaUnopsis alhipilis G-iebel, Zeitsch. Gesammt. Nat., 1869.

Agalena americana Keys., Zool. botan. Gesellsch., Wien, 18*77, male witli short-
tubed palpal organs, from Illinois.

Plate VIII, figures 1, la, Ic, Id, If, Ig, Ih, li, IJ, Ik, U, Im, bi.

This is the common grass spider all over the United States. It
varies greatly in size. A lajrge male measures 14™'" long, 4th leg
35""". A large female, 18""" long, 4th leg 30""", while a small adult
male is only 7""" long, and the 4th legs 15™"*. Plate viii, fig. 1.

The cephalothorax is long and the cephalic part separated dis-
tinctly from the thoracic by grooves radiating from the dorsal
depression. The head is high and wide in front and contracted a
little just in front of the first pair of legs. The two rows of eyes

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 26 Jan., 1890.

] 98 J. H. Emerton — Neio England Drassidm,

are strongly curved, tlie lateral much lower than the middle pairs, so
that the middle f I'ont eyes and the lateral hinder eyes form together
a nearly horizontal line. The thorax is marked by radiating grooves
between the legs. The abdomen is about twice as long as wide,
widest in the front half, a little truncated in front where it overlaps
the thorax, and tapering behind. The upper spinnerets are two or
three times as long as the under. The legs are long and tapering,
the fourth pair longest. The maxillae are much widened at the tips
and nearly straight on the front edges.

The cephalothorax has two wide longitudinal dark stripes. The
abdomen has a light longitudinal stripe in the middle, straight in
front, and herringbone-shaped in the hinder half, generally a little
darkened in the middle and lightest at the edges. The sides of the
abdomen are dark, or covered with dark spots close together toward
the middle stripe and more scattered toward the sides. On the ven-
tral side the abdomen has a middle dark stripe, sometimes lighter in
the middle.

Though the markings vary but little the colors vary from light
yellow, with pale gray markings, to dark reddish brown, with black
and gray spots, the colors being usually modified by long gray hairs
both in dark and light individuals. The joints of the legs are all
dark toward the end. Large individuals are, as a rule, darker col-
ored than small ones.

The palpi are long in both sexes. In the males the femur is long,
the patella not much longer than wide, and without apjDcndages ;
the tibia about as long as patella, widened at the distal end, the
outer side extending forward along the edge of the tarsus and having
a short blunt tooth, figs. \c, \g, \d. The tarsus is large, the basal
half oval and the tip narrowed into a long point. The palpal
organ, especially the tube, which is largely developed in this species,
instead of having a constant form, as in most spiders, varies
extremely. The most common form is that shown in tigs, la, 1^,
with a stout flat tube coiled in one and a half turns under the tarsus,
and with the tip turned outward away from the tarsus. On the
outer side of the palpal organ near the end of the tube is a short
thin tooth with the outer edge turned downward and the corner
usually forming a blunt tooth directed toward the end of the palpus.
This variety is found in spiders of all sizes and shades of color from
all parts of the country. Among large spiders from various locali-
ties occurs the form of palpal organ shown in fig. \h. In this the
tube is much longer and more slender, and tei'minates in a sharp

Agalenidm and Dysderidm. 199

point tui'iied inward toward the tarsns. A third variety, shown in
fig. 1(7, occurs less often but on spiders of all sizes and from differ-
ent parts of the country. The spiral here hardly makes more than
one turn and is so small as to be covered entirely by the tarsus. At
the tip the tube is twisted so as to turn the opening downward.
This is the form named Agalena americana by Keyserling, in 1877,
from Illinois ; there is one in the Cambridge museum, from Penikese
Island, Mass., named by Keyserling " var. americana,'''' and I have
seen specimens from Indiana, from Providence, R. I., New Bedford,
Mass., and Brooklyn, N. Y., in N. Pike's collection. These three
varieties seem to be distinct and I have seen no intermediate forms.
Fig. le is a palpal organ from Providence, R. I., having an unusually
large tube ; fig. l/'is the palpus of a small spider from Jaifrey, N. H.,
in which the tube is slender and the spiral unusually small.

The shape of the external opening of the epigynum is even more
variable than that of the palpal organ. The most common variety
is shown in fig. \h, taken from a female found in copulation with the
'male from which the palpus fig. \a was drawn. Figs, l^, \j, \Jc,
show a slight variation from this form by short teeth on the front
edge of the opening. Figs. \l, 1/h, Iw, have these teeth united and
extending backward across the opening nearly dividing it into two.
The three last are all fi'om large dark colored spiders like those hav-
ing palpi as in fig. Ih.

Comparison of a large number of specimens from the neighbor-
hood of Boston, Mass., showed that 69 males had palpi like fig. la,
and 5 like fig. \h ', 98 females had the oval epigynum, fig. \h, and 37
the partly divided epigynum, figs. 1/, \m, \n.

The web of this species consists of a flat sheet, shaped accord-
ing to the supports to which it is fastened, from one side of
which extends a tube at the mouth of which the spider usually
stands. The tube is open at the lower end, from which the spider
escapes if the web is entered by too large an enemy.

The webs are made in all kinds of places. In early summer great
numbers are made on short grass, but large webs are seldom made
in such situations and it is probable that spiders that do not find
more favorable places as they grow lai'ger, never live to become
adult. The largest webs and the best developed spiders are found
among stones and shrubs where there are convenient hiding places
and supports for the web, Avhich in a good situation is enlarged as
the spider grows until it becomes a foot or more wide and propor-
tionally thick and strong. The long spinnerets are used in making

200 J. H. Emerton — New l^igland Drassidm,

this flat web, the spider walking along slowly, swinging the spin-
nerets from side to side, making a band of very fine threads at each
stroke. The web does not appear to be at all adhesive, it merely
offers insects a convenient place to rest upon and the spider depends
on his quickness of movement for their capture. Large webs usu-
ally have many supporting threads running up into fences and
bushes and these 'perhaps help to trip the wings of flying insects
and cause them to fall on the web, as similar threads do in the webs
of Linyphia.

The pairing of this spider takes place on the web of the female.
The female lies still with feet drawn up as if dead. The male lays
her on one side under his thorax with her ventral side forward and
inserts one of his palpi into the epigynum at frequent intervals for a
long time, the soft parts of the palpal organ suddenly swelling and
again contracting. When tired with one palpus he turns the female
around and over so that she lies on the other side with her head in
the opposite direction and uses the other palpus. The eggs are laid
in a flat white cocoon, usually covered with a thick flat cone of silk
with which considerable dirt is often mixed. The eggs are laid
under stones or bark and on fences and buildings of all kinds, where
they are partly sheltered, from August to October, and the females
often remain and die on or near the cocoon. Adults are occasionally
found under leaves in winter, but it is doubtful if any live until the
next season. The eggs hatch early in the spring and the young spi-
ders come out in May.

It appears to be the most common spider all over the United
States.

Dysderidse.

Spiders with only six eyes and with the openings of the tracheae in
the front of the abdomen, just behind those of the air sacs, so that
they appear to have four air sacs like the Mycjalidm. The family is
a small one and the genera differ greatly in the structure of the feet
and mouth parts.

Dysdera interrita Hentz.

Plate VIII, figures 2, 2a, Ih, 2c, Id.
Female 12™"^ long. Cephalothorax 5™"> long and S'""^' wide. The
front of the head is wide and curved forward in the middle. The
eyes are small and close together. PI. viii, fig. 2. The mandibles
are half as long as the cephalothorax and inclined forward and much
narrowed toward the end. The maxillae are small, pointed at the

Agalenidoe and Dysderidm. 201

tips and widest half way to the base of the palpus. Fig. 2a. The
labium is long and widened at the base. The sternum is widest in
the middle, narrowed behind, and truncated at the front end. The
coxae are very long, fig. 2«. The first legs are longest and the fourth
next. The feet have only two claws and under them a thick brush of
flattened hairs. Fig. 'ib. The patellne are only about a fourth shorter
than the tibiae. The abdomen is long, oval and a little pointed behind.
The cephalothorax and mandibles are reddish-brown. The legs are
lighter colored and more yellow and become a little darker from behind
forward. The abdomen is dirty white or yellow without markings.

The male differs little from the female. The palpal organ is as
long as patella and tibia of the palpus. The terminal half is a
little curved inward, and on the outer side is a short blunt tooth a
little curved upward. Figs. 2c, 2d.

Swampscott, Brookline, and Roxbury, Massachusetts. This is the
only Dysdera I have seen from New England, and as Hentz's D.
mterrita came from Massachusetts, this is probably the species. It
agrees very closely with D. crocata Koch = D. ruMcunda Blk.
The palpal organ of D. mterrita is straighter, as seen from in front,
than that of crocata.

Ariadne Savigny and Aiulouin.

Ariadne bicolor.

Pylarus hicolor Hentz.

Plate VIII, figure ?,, 3a, 3h, 3c, 3d.

Female 9™"' to 10"^™ long. Plate viii, fig, 3. Cephalothorax long
and narrow, widest opposite the third pair of legs. Jn the male the
cephalothorax is proportionally much wider. The dorsal groove is
very small, and the head is not separated very distinctly from the
thorax. The abdomen is oval, widest across the middle. The first,
second, and third pairs of legs are turned forward. The first pair is
longest, the second next. The legs are all stout and the first and
fourth pairs have the patella and tibia much thickened. The color of
the cephalothorax and legs is darker from behind forward, the fourth
legs being light yellow and the first legs and front of the head dark
brown. The abdomen is pale at the sides and dark purplish-brown
above and below, darkest along the middle of the back.

The feet have three claws, fig. 8c?. The tibia and metatarsus of
the first and second legs have two rows of strong spines on the under
side, four pairs on the tibia and eight or ten pairs on the metatarsus.
The sternum is long and widest in the hinder half. The maxilla? are

202 J. H. Emerton — N'ew England Drassidce, etc.

long and narrow, widened a little half way btween the tip and the
insertion of the palpus. The palpi are short and stout, fig. 3. The
middle eyes are close together. The upper lateral eyes are about
twice their diameter from the middle pair, and the front eyes are
close to them, about half their diameter nearer the middle line.

The male is a little smaller than the female and has the thorax
wider and the legs longer and more slender, fig. 3a. The metatarsus
of the first feet is crooked at the base with a spine on each side, the
outer one nearest the base, fig. 3a. The male palpi are but little
longer or stouter than those of the female. The tibia is a little
thickened. The palpal organ is attached to the under side of the
tarsus ; it has a round bulb about as thick as the tibia is long,
which narrows on the outer side into a short finely pointed tube
tliat curves sharply inward, fig. 3a.

It lives under stones and leaves, or in long yellowish tubes only
wide enough to hold the spider under stones or in cracks of trees.
In July and August the cocoon with twenty or thirty eggs is made
in the tube with the female, and the young come out of the cocoon
and live in the tube for a short time with the female.

Massachusetts, Connecticut, and in N. Pike's Long Island collec-
tion.

INDEX.

Agalena, 107.

americana Kej^s., 197.

na3via, 197.

potteri Blk., 197.
Agaleuidae, 190.

Agalenopsis albipilis Giebel, 197.
Agrceca Wstr., 190.

crocata Keys., 168, 171.

pratensis, 190.
Anyphzena Simd., 185.

calcarata, 186.

incerta Keys., 187.

rubra, 186.

saltabimda, 187.
Ariadne bicolor, 201.
Castianeira Keys., 169.

bivittata Keys., 169.
Chiracanthium Koch, 183.

viride, 183.
Cicurina, 194.

complicata, 195.
Coelotes Blk., 191.

hybrid us, 193.

longitarsus, 192.

modicinalis, 191.

moutanus, 192.
Clnbiona Latr., 179.

abbottii L. Koch, 182.

cauadensis, 181.

crassipalpis, 180.

excepta L Koch, 183.

minuta, 181.

mixta, 180.

ornata, 182.

pallens, 183.

pusilla, 181.

rubra, 182.

saltabunda. 187.

tibialis, 180.
Drassida;, 166.
Drassus, 178.

robustus, 179.

saccatus, 178.

variegatus, 174.
Dysdera interrita, 200.
Dysderidse, 200.
Geotrecha. 168.

bivittata, 169.

crocata, 171.

pinnata, 170.
Gnaphosa Latr., 175.

brumalis, 175.

Gnaphosa consper?a, 176.

gigantea, 176.

sciidderi, 175.
Hahuia Koch, 195.

bimaculata, L96.

cmerea, 197.

radula, 196.
Herpyllus alarius, 188.

ater, 172.

auratiis, 167.

bilineatus, 175.

conarius, 168.

crocatus, 168, 171.

cruciger, 168.

descriptus, 168, 171,

ecclesiasticus, 173.

longi palpus, 168.

marnioratus, 168.

oroatus.

trilineatus, 168, 170.

variegatus, 174.

zonarius, 170.
Micaria, 167.

longipes, 167.

montana, 168.
Micariosoma Simon, 188.
Phrurolithus, 189.

alarius, 188.

pugnatus, 188.
Poeciiochroa, 174.

bilineata, 175.

montana, 175.

variegata, 174.
Prosthesima, 172.

atra, 172.

depressa, 173.

ecclesiastica, 173.

fune.sta. 172.

melancholica, 172.

propinqua, 173.
Pylarus bicolor, 201.
Pythonissa, 177.
Pythonissa imbeciUa, 177.
Trachelas, 184.

ruber, 184.
Tegenaria Latr., 193.

brevis, 194.

civilis Blk., 193.

derhamii, 193.

domestica, 193.

medicinalis, 191.

204 J. H. Mnerton — New England Drassidm^

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate III.

Fig. 1. Micaria longipes, la, maxillaj and mandibles, from below ; \b, palpus of male ;

Ic, scale from front of abdomen; Id, le, white scales from spots on abdomen;

]/, scale from hinder half of abdomen; \h, epigynum.
Fig. 2. Micaria montana ; 2a, epigynum.
Fig. 3. Geotrecha hivittata, ventral view; 3a, dorsal view ; 3&. 3c, palpi of male; Zd,

epigynum; 3e, hair of abdomen.
Fig. 4. Geotrecha, pinnata; 4a, epigj'num.

Fig. 5. Geotrecha crocaia, dorsal view; 56, 5c. palpi of male; 5(Z, epigynum.
Fig. 6. Prosthesima atra; 6a, ventral view ; 6&, (^c, palpi of male; 6rf, epigynum ; 6e,

foot of first pair; 6/, foot of fourth pair; (jg, hair of abdomen.
Fig. 7. Prosthesima ecclesiastica ; la, ventral view; 1h, epigynum: 7c, Id, palpus of

male.
Fig. 8. Prosthesima depressa; 8a, epigynum.

Plate IV.

Fig. 1. Poecilochroa variegata; la, ventral view; \h, \c, palpus of male; \d, epi-
gynum.

Fig. 2. Poecilochroa montana; 2a, epigynum.

Fig. 3. Po&cilochroa hilineata ; 3a, ventral view.

Fig. 4. Gnaphosa conspersa; 4.a, ventral view; 41), end of mandible; 4c, outer side of
male palpus; 4(^, palpal organ ; 4e, epigynum.

Fig. 5. Gnaphosa brumalis, outer side of male palpus ; 5a, palpal organ ; ^b, epi-
gynum.

Fig. 6. Pythonissa imhecilla; 6a, ventral view; 66, mandible; 6(', palpus of male;
Qd, epigj'num.

Fig. 7. Drassus saccatus; la, ventral view; 76, outer side of male palpus; 7c, tibia
and tarsus of male palpus, under side; 7d, epigynum.

Fig. 8. Drassus rohustus; 8a, epigynum; 86, c, palpus of male.

Plate V.

Fig. 1. Clubiona, crassipalpis, male palpus showing palpal organ; la, tiVna of male
palpus; 16, outer side of male palpus.

Fig. 2. Clubiona mixta, male palpus, upper side showing tibia ; 2a, under side, show-
ing palpal organ ; 26, outer side of patella and tibia.

Fig. 3. Clubiona tibialis, male palpus, upper side; 3a, outer side; 36, epigynum.

Fig. 4. Clubiona canadensis, male palpus, upper side of tibia and tarsus; Aa, outer
side of male palpus; 46, under side of tibia and tarsus, showing palpal organ;
4c, epigynum.

Fig. 5. Clubiona pusilla, under side of male palpus, showing palpal organ; 5a, upper
side, showing form of tibia ; 56, inner side.

Fig. 6. Clubiona rubra, male palpus of spider from Saugus, Mass. ; 6a, outer side ;
66, palpal organ; 6c, epigynum.

Agalenidm and Dysderidm. 205

Fig. 7. Gluhiona rubra, palpus of large male from Lynn, Mass.; 7«, outer side; 1h,
palpal organ ; 7c, epigynum.

Fig. 8. Clubiona rubra, palpus of small oiale from New Haven, Conn. ; 8a, outer
side; Sb, palpal organ.

Fig. 9. Clubiona ornata ; da, epigynum.

Fig. 10. Clubiona excepta; 10a, dorsal view; 10&, 10c, palpus of male; \0d, epi-
gynum.

Fig. 11. Clubiona minuta, male palpus, upper side; 11a, outer side; 116, under side.

Fig. 12. Chiracanthium viride; 12a, dorsal view; 126, male palpus, outer side; 12c,
upper side ; 1 2d!, epigynum.

Fig. 13. Trachelas ruber; 13a, sternum and mouth part; 136, epigynum; 13c, 13c?,
male palpus.

Plate VI.

Fig. 1. Anyphoitia rubra; la, ventral view of abdomen, showing at x the tracheal

opening; 16, epigynum.
Fig. 2. Anyphcena incerta; 2a, 26, 2c, palpus of male; 2d, epigynum.
Fig. 3. Anyphcena calcarata, under side of coxae of male, showing spurs on 3d and

4th pairs; 3a, 36. 3c, male palpi; 3d, epigynum.
Fig. 4. Anyphcena saltabunda, male palpus, under side; 4a, 46, 4c, upper and side

views; 4c?, epigynum.
Fig. 5. Phrurolithus alarius, in natural position at rest; 5a, light-colored variety ; 56,

first leg; 5c, maxillae; 5c/, irridescent scales of abdomen; 5e, 5/, bg, male palpi;

5/i, epigynum.
Fig. 6. Phrurolithus pugnatus ; 6a, upper side of male palpus ; 66, outer side ; 6c, epi-
gynum, showing part of palpal organ in one side.
Fig. 7. Agroeca pratensis ; 7a, sternum and mouth part; 76, 7c, 7ci, palpus of male ;

7e, epiigynum.

Plate VII.

Fig. 1. Ocelotes medicinalis, enlarged 4 times; let, epigynum: 16, palpus of male,

under side; Ic, upper side.
Fig. 2. Cidotes longitarsus, palpus of male, upper side ; 2a, epigynum.
Fig. 3. Ccelotes montanus, epigynum ; ?>a, palpus of male ; 36, patella and tibia of male

from New Haven, Conn.
Fig. 4. Ccelotes hybridus, male palpus, upper side of patella and tibia; 4a, under side.
Fig. 5. Tegenaria brevis ; 5a, epigynum; 56, head of female ; 5c, head of male.
Fig. 6. Tegenaria derhmnii, enlarged 4 times; 6a, palpus of male; 66, tarsus and pal-
pal organ; 6c, epigynum.
Figs. 7, 7a, 76. Gicurina complicata, male palpi; 7, under side; 7a, outer side with

large process of the tibia separated from the tarsus; 76, upper side, showing the

narrow tarsus and short curved tibia.
Fig. 8. Hahnia bimaculata, under side of abdomen, showing trachasl opening and

spinnerets ; 8a, male palpus, under side of tibia and tarsus ; 86, outer side of tibia

and tarsus ; 8c, 8c?, 8e, 8/, various forms of epigynum.
Fig. 9. Hahnia cinerea; da, male palpus, under side; 96, outer side.
Fig. 10. Hahnia radula, maxilla of male; 10a, hair of first leg of male.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. Vlll. 27 Jan., 1890.

206 ./. H. Emerton — N'eio England iJrassidce, etc.

Plate VIII.

Pig. 1. Agalena Jicevia. male; la, common form of male palpus from a specimen from
Peabody, Mass. ; \h, long tubed variety of palpal organ from Woodbridge, Conn. ;
Ic, outer side of tibia of same palpus; \d, short tubed form of palpal organ of a
specimen from New Bedford, Mass. ; le, palpal organ with unusually large tube of
a specimen from Providence, R. I. ; 1/, small palpal organ from Jaftrey, N. H. ; Ig-,
outer side of small male palpus from Salem, Mass. ; \h, common form of epi-
gynum from female in copulation with the male from which Fig. 1 was drawn ;
\i and ly, epigynum from Providence, R. I. ; \k. epigynum with small process on
front edge from Salem, Mass.; IZ, Im, Iw, epigynum from several large spiders
from Massachusetts.

Fig. 2. Dysdera interriia; 2a, sternum, coxae, and mouth parts; 2b, foot; 2c, side of
male palpus; 2d, palpal organ from front.

Fig. 3. Ariadne bicolor, female; 3a, male, head, palpi, and front leg; 3b, sternum
and mouth parts of female; 3c, male palpus; 3d, front leg of female.

APR 1^1893

[Presented to the Oouuecticiit Academy of Arts and Sciences, May 20th, 1891.]

XII. — The Development of a Paleozoic Poriferous Coral.
By Charles E. Beecher. (With Plates IX-XIII.)

The origin and affinities of many groups of paleozoic corals are
still obscure. The main elements of the recognized system of
classification seem to be stable, yet so little is known of the
growth and structure of a number of important groups, that they
occupy a different place in almost every arrangement of the genera.
Each fact of development affords data which eliminate, to a degree,
the w^ant of knowledge concerning their origin and relations. Un-
less the growth of the organism is obscured by pronounced acceler-
ated or degradational features, its interpretation is simple, and
throws much light on its ancestral history. Paleozoic types in
general are least modified in their development by acceleration.
They usually show some marked expression of their jjrototype, and
also the succession of changes through which they have passed
during their evolution.

The species here discussed was originally described as Miehelinia
lenticularis. Hall,* from the Lower Helderberg group of New York.
If Miehelinia is entitled to recognition, it will exclude this form, as
it is without tabular. PleurocUctyuni, as now defined, is more in har-
mony with these features, and, therefore, the species M. lenticularis
is here referred to this genus. The large calices and their constant
origin at the basal epitheca are not, however, essential characters of
Pleurodictyimi. The structure and growth of this species indicate
that it represents one of the simpler types of poriferous corals. For
this reason, its development is without the numerous modifications
necessary in more complex forms, and its laws of growth are not
complicated.

Development of Plenrodictyum lenticulare. — The nepionic stage is
well marked. It comprises the growth of the corallum to the com-
pletion of a simple initial cell. This primitive cell or nepionic stage
(Plate IX, figure 1, V, 8) has the foi'm of an oblique inverted cone
flattened on one side. The flattened area represents the lower or
attached side, and the oblique base of the cone is occupied by the

* Twenty-sixth Kept. N. Y. State Museum of Nat. Hist., p. 113, 1874.
Tr.-vns. Conn. Acad., Vol. VTII. 28 July, 1891.

208 C. E. Beecher — Developmoit of a Paleozoic Poriferous Coral.

aperture of the corallite. The apical portion is smooth for about
one-fourth the length of the cell. Then the concentric lines of
growth become apparent, and over the distal half, radiating ribs are
also developed. The interior of the apex is granulose. At about
the middle of the cell, the granules are arranged in rows, forming
the beginnings of the septal lines.

The simple growth of the initial cell continues until the entire
procumbent portion is completed. A thickening of the margin then
takes place, and an upward growth of the corallite is initiated. At
the commencement of this upward growth, the first bud starts out
from the lateral edge of the initial calyx, either to the right or left
of the axis. This condition represents the first nealogic stage. The
bud resembles the parent cell in all particulars, and reaches consider-
able size before the second appears, as shown in Plate IX, figures 9, 10.
The visceral cavities are confluent, as the initial apex of the bud
opens into the calyx of the first cell.

The succeeding nealogic stages, to the completion of the first
circle of peripheral calices, have been observed mainly from the
epithecas of mature or nearly full grown corallums, rejjresented on
Plate X, figures 1, 2. In these examples, the lines of growth are so
perfectly shown, that all the stages are distinctly marked, and may
be satisfactorily studied.

What is here considered as the second nealogic stage is repre-
sented on Plate IX, figure 3, showing the initial corallite, with the
fii'st and second buds on opposite sides. This process of alternate
gemmation from the parent cell continues until the circlet of calices
is completed, as shown in figures 4, 5, and 6. In this species, the
normal number of peripheral calices is seven, making eight corallites
in the completed nealogic corallum. The last cells to be formed are
(1) the sixth and seventh budding from the anterior side of the first
calyx, and (2) the eighth or posterior cell. Plate IX, figure 12, repre-
sents the completed nealogic corallum, with the initial cell and six
well developed peripheral calices. The eighth has just begun to
fill up the space between the second and third. It will be noticed
that there is a direct correspondence in the size of the calices to
their relative age. The first calyx is much the largest. Then, de-
creasing serially, come the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and
seventh, while the eighth is undeveloped. An inspection of the
upper surface of a mature corallum will thus usually determine the
order of successive calical additions. After the ajjpearance of the
posterior, or eighth calyx, the corallum commonly grows to double

C E. lieecher — Development of a Paleozoic Poriferous Coral. 209

the diameter of the completed nealogic stage, resulting in the
normal ephebolic or mature condition, as represented on Plate XI,
figures 1, 2. Nearly all the full grown specimens found agree in
this respect.

A coralhun rarely presents any departure from the normal number
of calices. Plate XII, figure I, is an example of a variation in the
number of peripheral corallities, for in this specimen, there are
eight in the circle, instead of the usual seven. A variation in the
opposite direction is shown in another sjiecimen having five well
develo[)ed corallites about the parent cell. Old age characters are
expressed in two ways : First, the cell walls become thickened
around the margin of the epitheca without destroying the S3anmetry
of the corallum, as shown in Plate XII, figure 2 ; Second, by the
indefinite and unequal development of the peripheral cells, together
with the addition of calices budding from the cells forming the
primary circle. One specimen, appearing at first sight as an exam-
ple of cell division or fission, is shown in Plate XIII, figure 2. It may
be explained as resulting from the abnormal growth of the second
and adjacent calices, four and eight. , This lateral impulse further
resulted in sending off the small, peripheral, tertiary corallites num-
bered in the figures 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13.

It should be understood that this arbitrary expression of normal
and abnormal growths applies only to the species P. lenticulare.
The same numerical arrangement will not hold good for genera like
Favosites, MicheUnia^ Striatopora, etc. Otherwise, it is believed,
the general laws of growth here brought out will hold good for
these and other related genera.

Some doubt may exist as to the propriety of referring the speci-
mens illustrated on Plate IX, figures 9-11, to P. lenticulare. Unfor-
tunately, material of this kind is rare and difficult to obtain. With
the exception of the position and direction of the first bud (figure
10), all the characters agree, so far as can be observed, with ordinary
specimens of P. lenticulare. The second cell of the corallum repre-
sented in Plate X, figure 1, curves rapidly backwards, although at
first the axis has an anterior direction. Taking this view of the
specimen, Plate IX, figure 1 1, it is not difficult to see how the succeed-
ing enlargement and curvature of the bud could extend backwards,
thus properly limiting the size of the eighth or last of the primary
circlet of calices.

The method of determining the relative age and succession of the
corallites can be seen in Plate X, figures 1, 2, and Plate XI, figure 2.

210 C. E. Beecher — Development of a Paleozoic Poriferous Coral.

The initial cell occiqtie.s the central position, and forms the boss or
apex of the basal ejiitheca. The first bud is nearly on a plane with
the base of the initial cell and is the one nearest the apex. The
second and successive buds are respectively more distant, and at a
higher level. Specimens having broad surfaces of attachment to
foreign objects have these distinctive features of the epitheca obliter-
ated, and the only guide to the order of the corallites then lies in
their comparative size and position on the upper surface of the
corallum.

General conclusions. — The first feature to be noted in the develop-
ment of a poriferous coral, as here described, is the simple cyathi-
form character of the initial corallite. This nepionic stage is
without mural pores, and has an epitheca over the entire exterior of
the cup. The septal lines become developed toward the end of
this stage. These features are in harmony with the young of many
paleozoic corals, such as Cladochonus, Aidoiyora, or Syringopora,
and clearly indicate a primitive, simple, and imperforate ancestry
for the Perforata. A similaf origin and development obtains in
Pavosites, as may be seen from the figure of a young colony of P.
Porbesi, var. occidentalis, given by Professor Hall.*

The first nealogic stage, represented by the primitive corallite
with one bud, is the first transition towards both a compound and a
perforate coral, Plate IX, figure 9. This stage has two calices, mak-
ing it a comj)Ound coral, and has an opening through the cell walls
or connecting channel between the corallites, forming the first mural
pore. The manner of growth and the structure of the corallum at
this stage are suggestive of Atdojwnr, and should be given consider-
able significance. The visceral cavities in Atdopora are confluent,
and rudimentary septa or lines of spinules are often present. Poni-
ingeria has a growth resembling Aulopora and Syringojiora. It is
without pores on the portion where the corallities and buds are free,
but when these are in juxtaposition at their bases, mural pores are
developed. The upward groAvth of the initial cell of P. lenticulare
proceeds but a short distance before the circlet of peripheral coral-
lites is completed. Thus at this stage there are at least seven mural
pores opening into the primary calyx. If this tendency to the
formation of numerous buds persists throughout the upward growth

* Indiana Geol. and Nat. Hist., 11th Rept. of tlie State Geologist, pi. i, figure 12,
1881.

(J. E. Beecher — iJevelopment of a Paleozoic Poriferous Coral. 211

of the corallites, the non-development of the buds consequent upon
the adjacent living corallites would naturally result in the produc-
tion of mural pores. The basal epitheca limits the fleshy portion of
the organisms, and represents an area unfavorable to the acquisition
of food or for the natural development of calices. Therefore, it
would prevent both tlie maintenance of mural pores and the growth
of basal buds.*

A Favosites in which one or more cells became inactive or dead
shows in its subsequent growth the closing over of this area by the
budding of the surrounding cells. Each cell is connected with the
parent by an apical pore, Plate XIII, figures 3, 4. Without this
opportunity to bud afforded by the death of one or more corallites, or
by their divergence, the adjacent cells would have developed only
mural pores. In the figure of P. problematicwn given on Plate XIII,
figure 2, three of the initial poi'es are indicated by dotted lines from
23. No distinction can be made between these and the ordinary pores,
except that the latter are usually not as large. Tliis difference in
size would be expected, as the primary pore represents the bud which
succeeded in producing a corallite ; -whereas the other attempts at
budding resulted no further than the production of mural pores. The
conclusion to be drawn is, that the mural pores in such genera as
Favosites, Striatopora, Pleurodictyum, Michelinia, etc., are ineffec-
tual attempts at budding, resulting only in the perforation of the
cell walls. This explanation agrees with the pronounced and per-
sistent tendency to gemmation characteristic of the genera men-
tioned. They also represent compound forms having individualized
epithecas, and this feature naturally arises from the same system of
budding obtaining in the simple corals.

Professor Verrill has shown that the presence or absence of tabulae
is of little or no importance in a natural classification.! Therefore,
the non-tabulate feature of P. lenticulare is without special conse-
quence in a discussion of the relations of this species with Favosites,
or other tabulate poriferous genera.

* The presence of basal mural pores or openings through the epitheca has been
asserted by Meek and Worthen (Pal. Illinois, vol. iii, p. 409, 1868). The specimens
from which this observation was made, are from a friable sandstone, which does not
usually preserve minute details with much distinctness. The depressions between
the spinules on the septal lines could easily be mistaken in a cast for the filliugs of
mural pores, and it is believed by the writer, that this interpretation should be
given. P. lenticulare occurs as calcareous or silicified, and in the condition of casts.
No basal mural pores are present. Also, none can be observed in the casts of P.
pvohlemalicum, from Pelm, Germany.

f Am. Jour. Sci., vol. iii, p. 187, March, 1872,

212 C. E. Beecher — Development of a Paleozoic Poriferous Coral.

If the preceding interpretations of structure and affinites are cor-
rect, a simple, conical imperforate, non-tabulate prototype, or proto-
corallum, may be assumed for the Madreporaria Perforata. The
next derived form, represented by the early nealogic stages of P.
lenticxdare^ has the structure and growth of Aulopora, and consists
of the parent cell with one or more buds. At this stage, which may
be called the Atilopora-stage, the initial eorallite has the same num-
ber of mural pores as developed buds, for each bud leads into the
parent cell by a basal opening or pore. Aulo^yora may thus be con-
sidered as representing a primitive type of a poriferous coral, in
which the number of pores in each eorallite corresponds to the num-
ber of buds given off plus one connecting it with the pai*ent cell.
Some species of this genus are free throughout most of their growth
[A. subtennis, Hall), agreeing closely with the erect growth of
Pomingeria and Syringopora. This fact removes one of the im-
portant arguments against the relations of Aulopora with these
genera. The corallites of Aulopora usually send off buds before
turning out of the common axis of the branch or colony, after which
no gemmation commonly takes places. By the explanation here
advanced, this lack of a tendency to gemmation in the distal por-
tions of the corallites in this genus accounts for the absence of
mural pores when such portions are in contiguity. The periods of
gemmation in Pomingeria are periodic. Several buds, often tonn-
ing a verticil are given off from the parent eorallite. Considerable
elongation of the tubes takes place before other series of buds are
produced. The budding is prolitic at these points, and here also
occur the mural pores. The latter are therefore developed when
the period of gemmation is in force. If pores are formed elsewhere
when the corallites happen to come into juxtaposition, it may pos-
sibly be explained as the result of a stimulus produced by the con-
tiguit}' of the animals. Further observations are necessary to show
that pores exist at other places than the bases of the verticils or
points where numerous buds are given oft' and where from crowding
the corallites are in juxtaposition.

It therefore seems, that, primarily, the development of nuiral
pores is identical or homologous with the process of gemmation.
Whether this cause is operative in such forms as Golumnopora or
Alevopora yet remains for investigation. The porous condition of
the walls in these genera may be an inherited character Avithout an
active exciting cause, or it may be teleologically different.

Tale Museum, New Haven, Conn., May 20th, 1891.

(J. E. Beecher — Development of a Paleozoic Poriferous Coral. 213

Fig.

1

Pig.

2.

Fig.

3.

Fig.

4.

Fig.

5.

Fig.

6.

Fig.

1.

Fig.

8.

Fig.

9.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate IX.

Pkurodictyum lenticulare.
Lower side of initial cell, or nepionic stage. x ?,^.
Lower side of initial cell with one bud ; first nealogie stage, x 3i.
Initial cell with two buds ; second nealogie stage, x 3^.
Initial cell with three buds; tliird nealogie state, x 3i.
Initial cell with four buds ; fourth nealogie stage, x 3^.
Completed nealogie stage; shouing initial corallile (!) and seven peripheral

corallites (2 -8). x 3^.
Interior of nepionic corallite. x 3^.
Exterior of same specimen x 3^.

Upper side of specimen representing first nealogie or Auhpora -stage, con-
sisting of nepionic cell and one bud Apex of bud opens into visceral
cavity of parent cell, x 3i.
Fig. 10. Profile of same; showing obliqne apertures of corallites, and thickened

margin of parent cell x 3|.
Fig, 1 1. Lower side of preceding, x 3i.
Fig. 12. Upper side of completed nealogie stage; showing inception of eighth cell.

Figs. 1-G are taken from epilhecal lines of growth shown in Plate X, figure
2. Remaining figures are from actual specimens. Numbers refer to
order of calical succession.

Lower Helderberg Group. Albany County, New York.

Plate X.

Pleurodictymn lenticulare.

Fig. 1. Lower or epithecal side of specimen; showing successive alternate gemma-
tion from parent coralHte. x 3^.

Fig. 2. Similar specimen with lines of growth more strongly marked. The order of
luidding is opposite to that of preceding specimen, x 3^.
Lower Helderberg Group. Albany County, New York.

Plate XL

Pleurodidyum lenticulare.
Fig. -1. Outline of cahces of specimen Plate X, figure 2; showing central primary
cell and seven peripheral calices numbered in tiie order of their develop-
ment, x 3f .
Fig. 2. The same ; side view.

Lower Helderberg Group. Albany County, Neiv York.

214 C. E. Beecher — Development of a Paleozoic Poi-iferous Coral.

Plate XII.

Pleurodictywii lenticulare.
Fig. 1. Outline of upper side of specimen with eight peripheral calices. x 3^.
Fig. 2. Upper side of symmetrical specimen; showing general features of calices,
mural pores in central eorallite, and thickened epithecal border, x 3|.
Lower Helderberg Group. Albany County^ New York.

Plate XIII.
Pleurodictyum lenticulare.
Fig. 1. Calical diagram of geratologic specimen; showing enlargement of second,
fourth, and eighth corallites, and the addition of tertiarj^ cells, forming a
second series of peripheral calices. x 3^.
Lower Helderberg Group. Albany County, Neiv Torh.

Pleurodictyum prohlematicum.
Pig. 2. Lower side of cast of corallum with epitheca removed ; showing proximal
extremities of several corallites. Upper edge of figure represents portion
of periphery of corallum. Thus, lower angle of each eorallite represents
the point of budding from parent cell, and is connected with it by a pore,
shown for three of the corallites by dotted lines from ^). It will be
noticed that all the pores in the angles are larger than the others. Otlier-
wise, these and the initial pores cannot be distinguished from the ordinary
mural pores between the flat sides of the corallites, x 7.
Devonian. Pelm, Germany.

Favosites epidermatus ?
Fig. 3. Side view of mature eorallite with attached intermural bud. Specimen

broken from interior of a large colony, x 3^.
Fig. 4. The same front view, with bud lemoved ; showing pore or mural opening (p)
at lower point of attachment of bud, corresponding to those indicated in
figure 2. X 3|.
Corniferous limestone. Cherry Valley, Neiv York.

XIII. — Symmetrical Cell Development in the Favositid^.
By Charles E. Bebchbe. (With Plates XIV, XV.)

The majority of compound corals included in the I^avositidce are
composed of polygonal, prismatic cells or corallites in juxta2)osition.
When, however, these cells become free, their form is cylindrical.
The polygonal form of closely arranged cells is therefore explained
as the natural result of crowding.

The species Pleurodictyimi lenticulare, Hall, sp., is an example of
simple cell growth and multiplication. In the development of this
species, as shown by the writer in the previous paper, the initial
corallite is first conical. The growth of a peripheral series of buds
results in changing the sub-circular section of the parent corallite
into a polygon. The buds are angular on the sides in juxtaposition
to the parent cell and adjacent buds, but on the free portion of their
periphery they are cylindrical. The subsequent growth of peri-
pheral buds brings the first series wholly within the cbrallum, and
they are then polygonal in section like the parent corallite.

In compact corals with long cell tubes, as Michelinia and Favosites,
there is a maximum limit to the size of the corallites. Thus, the
form of the cells which have reached this limit of diametral exten-
sion is that of equal hexagonal prisms. This is of course due to the
well known fact of six equal tangent circles about a central circle of
the same size. Then from crowding, or from the elimination of the
interstitial spaces, they assume a regular hexagonal form. The
specimen of Clelstopora geometrica, illustrated by Edwards and
Haime,* represents the maximum size of the cells and their equal
development in this species. Although the tubes are not long, the
calices are nearly of the same size, and regularly hexagonal.

After the completion of a circle of calices about the parent cell of
the corallum, enlargement takes place, (1) by buds from the peri-
phery, and (2) by intermural gemination. The first is not attended
by any phenomena differing from the production of the primary
circlet of calices about the initial cell. The second takes place
under other conditions, and is the chief method of increase in the
growth of large corallums having numerous corallites.

* Monographie des Polypiers Fossiles des Terraiaes Palceozmques, p. 252, pi. 17, fig.
3. 1851.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 29 July, 1891.

216 C. E. Beecher — Symmetrical Cell Development in JFavositidce.

The radial arrangement of the tubes in a large hemispherical or
cylindrical mass tends to make the axes of the corallites diverge.
This divergence can be taken up only by an increase in the diameters
of the tubes, or by the addition of new calices between the others.
The latter mode is called intermural gemmation. In Favosites and
allied genera, the maximum size of the corallites is soon reached,
and the expansion of the coral is mainly derived from intermural
growth. The study of this method of increase, properly begins
after one or more rows of calices have been developed aboixt the
par-ent cell, and the calices have reached their full dimensions.

The following description of a symmetrical system of intermural
cell multiplication was observed in a hemispherical specimen of
Michelinia convexa, D'Orbigny, from the Corniferous limestone of
the Falls of the Ohio. It shows very clearly the stages of develop-
ment of the interstitial buds, and their modifications. Other corals
were examined to the same end, and were found to agree in all
essential particulars, whenever their growth was not irregular from
their condition of fixation, or from the excessive development or
death of a number of the corallites. An exact number of peripheral
buds is not necessary to illustrate the general laws of intermural
growth. The buds produced from any given cell cannot always
agree with symmetrical method here described, on account of the
crowding of similar sei'ies from adjacent or neighboring corallites.
After eliminating these variations, it was found that the process of
intermural gemmation in general is quite uniform, and closely con-
forms to that in 3fichelinia convexa.

Plate XIV, figure 1, represents diagrammatically the top of a coral-
lum composed of a central parent cell and six equal peripheral buds,
making seven nearly equal calices in the corallum. The upward
growth of these corallites and the divergence due to the direction of
their axes tend to separate them from the parent cell. In conse-
quence of this separation of the corallites, they would naturally
assume a cylindrical form, and there would thus appear triangular
interspaces between the tangent points of any three adjacent calices.
These angles, therefore, afford the only opportunities for the intro-
duction of a set of intermural buds, and their initial triangular form
is determined by the conditions of growth. The smallest number of
buds which can be symmetrically placed and compensate for the
divergence of the corallites is three, one from each alternate angle
of the hexagon, Plate XIV, figure 2,

C. E. Beeches — Symmetrical Cell Development ui Favoaitidce. 217

If these interstitial cells were to grow without the introduction of
others, until the original peripheral series was completely separated
from the parent or central cell, there would result a corallum con-
taining only triangular corallites. There is, however, a manifest
tendency of the organism to the production and maintenance of a
cylindrical form, or of a prism with nearly equal radial axes, as in a
hexagonal or polygonal prism. To accomplish this, and further to
take up the divergence of the corallites, three new interstitial buds
are introduced at the remaining three unmodified angles, as shown
in figure 3, At this stage, there are six symmetrically disposed
triangular buds, or intermural cells, about the central corallite,
truncating its original angles, and making it a twelve sided prism.
This stage is the third toward the formation of a series of mature
interstitial calices.

During the third stage, the intermural buds increase in size until
they completely surround the parent cell. Then further growth
truncates their adjacent angles, thus adding two more sides to each
bud, making them pentagonal in section. This marks the fourth
stage of intermural growth. At the same time, the central corallite
loses six of its sides, and returns to its early hexagonal form. The
axes have revolved 30°, and the original sides have now become the
angles of the corallite, Plate XIY, figure 4.

At this period of growth, it is necessary to consider a series of
buds on the periphery of the corallum, marked l", 2", etc., in Plate
XIV, figures 3 and 4, They are first triangular in form like the others,
and of two sizes, owing to their different ages. The growth of this
series continues until they touch and truncate the angles of the first
series (l', 2', etc.), producing the fifth condition or stage. The first
series of buds has now three hexagonal and three pentagonal coral-
lites, Plate XIV, figure 5.

In the last or sixth stage, figure 6, the further growth of all the
intermural cells results in a corallum of nineteen nearly equal hexa-
gonal corallites. The original parent cell (1) is at the center, the
first six intermural cells (1', 2', etc.) completely surround it, and the
six new peripheral corallites (1", 2", etc.) are interposed between the
members of the original circlet (1, 2, etc.). The effect of this inter-
mural growth, then, is to dissociate all the first series of corallites
from the parent cell and from each other.

The changes taking j^lace in the number and form of the cells
may be tabulated as follows :

218 C. E. Beecher — Symmetrical Cell Development in FavositidoB.

stages.

Nepionic.
First completed nea-
logic or first con-
dition requisite to
intermural gem-
mation.

2d stage.

3d stage.

■Ith stage.

5th stage.
6th stage.

I I Number of Number of

Form of primary cell. Whole No. intermural! sides of
of cells. buds. buds.

cone.

6 sided prism.

9 sided prism.

12 sided prism.

6 sided prism.

6 sided prism.
6 sided prism.

7

11
16

19

19

19

Buds are developed in Favosites and Michelinia whenever there
is a space or opporUinity for their growth, unless the corallum is
affected by some abnormal condition. If this tendency to form a
solid mass of corallites were not so strong, and if the process of
budding took place only at comparatively remote intervals, the
corallum would have the form of Romingeria. It is evident in
Michelinia convexa, that if the divergence of the corallites was
considerable and not wholly filled by intermural growths, there
would result a verticil of corallites about the parent cell which
would soon become free. The peripheral corallites, also, would be-
come separated. Then after further growth, the parent cell Avould
give off another verticil of buds, the other corallites, likewise,
develop similar verticils, and the whole form and mode of growth
be like that of Momingeria. From this point of view, Bondngeria
may represent an early form of symmetrical cell development in the
poriferous corals. The acceleration of the periods of gemmation,
and consequent approximation of the corallites carrying their ver-
ticils of buds, would produce all the conditions of cell growth and
intermural gemmation exhibited by Favosites or 3Iichelinia.

Summary : — The growth of intermural buds compensates for the
natural divergence of the corallites. New cells are introduced
whenever the old corallites have reached their maximum size, and
when their divergence approaches a separation of the cell tubes.

The form of the buds is first that of a triangular pyramid or prism,
and is due to the mechanical conditions of growth. During subse-

C E. Beecher — Symmetrical Cell Development in Favositidm. 219

quent increase, they touch and truncate each other, changing from
triangular to five- and six-sided prisms. Complete symmetrical
normal development produces a corallum with equal hexagonal
calices. The process of intermural gemmation changes the sides
of the parent cells to angles, and the older corallites, originally in
juxtaposition, become separated from each other by new series of
interstitial calices.

Yale Museum, New Haven, Conn., May 20th, 1891.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate XIV.

Michelinia convexa.
Pig. 1. Diagrammatic representation of upper surface of corallum; consisting of

parent cell. A, and six peripheral corallites, 1, 2, 3, etc.
Fig. 2. The same; showing the introduction of three triangular intermural buds,

1', 2', 3', etc.
Fig. 3. Third condition; with six triangular buds about the parent corallite, and

three on the periphery of the corallum.
Fig. 4. Top of corallum ; showing further growth of preceding corallites, with the

addition of three peripheral calices, 4", 5", 6".
Fig. 5. The same during a succeeding stage ; showing increase in size of corallites,

and modifications produced.
Fig. 6. Completed growth of first system of intermural gemmation ; showing disso-
ciation of original series of corallites (A, 1, 2, 3, etc.), and representing condition

preparatory for new series of interstitial corallites.

All figures natural size.

Plate XV.

Michelinia convexa.
Fig. 7. Development of a group of corallites from initial conical cell to corallum
with nineteen calices. The figure represents parallel horizontal sections through
the corallum ; showing the number and form of the calices, their order of devel-
opment, and the modifications taking place during growth. The parent cell is
marked A ; first series of calices, 1, 2, 3, etc.; first series of intermural buds,
1', 2', 3', etc.; peripheral series, 1", 2", 3", etc. Notation corresponds with that
of preceding plate.
Natural size.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIIL 30 Oct., 1891.

XIV. — New England Spiders of the family Attid^. By

J. H. Emerton.

The Attidse are distinguislied by a peculiar arrangement of the
eyes. The front of the head is wide and square and the front row
of eyes directed forward and nearly straight or with the lateral pair
a little the highest. The front middle pair are larger than the
others and often much larger, so that at first sight the spider appears
to have but two eyes. Behind the lateral eyes of the front row are
two very small eyes and still farther back, often near the middle of
the cephalothorax, are two others a little larger, sometimes as large as
the front lateral pair. See figures on Plates XVII and XVIII.

The relative length of the legs is very variable. The fourth pair
is usually the longest, but often the first, and even in some species
the third pair. The legs of the first pair are usually thickened, and
often those of the second pair. Most species can jump a considerable
distance and this seems to be done from all the legs at once and does
not depend on their relative length or size. The feet have two
claws, generally long and with many small teeth, and, under the
claws, a bunch of long hairs. The colors of the Attid^e are gen-
erally bright and of great variety. They are partly caused by
colored scales and hairs which in some species cover the whole body
and in others are so small that the color of the skin shows between
them. The scales are usually long and narrow like flattened or
branched hairs, PI. XVI, figs. 1/, \l; others, especially those forming
the white spots, are short and flat, fig. 5(7. Some of the scales of many
species have a metallic luster and their color changes with the direc-
tion of the light. As spiders become older part of their scales rub
off and so change their color. In alcohol great changes in color take
place. The wetting of the scales makes them transparent and the
colors of the skin show through them. For this reason the front of
the head and around the eyes is black or dark colored in most species
in alcohol while the same parts in life are covered with white or
light colored scales. PI. XVII, figs. 2, 2a. Some species that are
yellow or brown when alive turn red in alcohol as Dendryphantes
militaris and cestivalis.

The northern Attidoe, like the Drassidte, are generally of middle
size, none of them being as large as the larger Lycosidai and Epeiridas,

J. H. JEmerton — JVeui England Attida?. 221

or as small as a large part of the TlieridicUe. Some species live on
the ground and under stones and leaves but most of them on plants
and in open places. They make no webs excejit nests in which they
hide in winter, or when moulting or laying eggs. The pairing of
some species takes place in the nest, and the males of several of them
enter the nest of a young female and wait for her to mature. The
habits of the Attidce, especially the fighting and mating habits of
many species, have been described by G. W. and E. G. Peckham, in
the papers of the Wisconsin Nat. Hist. Society of 1889 and 1890.

The palpi of the males are less variable than in most families.
They are usually stout and short with a short tibial hook and short
tube to the palpal organ, the end of the tube resting in a groove in
the end of the tarsus. The end of the tarsus is obliquely flattened
and covered closely with short fine hairs.

A large number of the Amei'ican Attidai have been described.
Hentz described some forty species under fifty-one names. Many of
these are comparatively easy to identify but as with other families
probably a quarter of them will always remain uncertain.

The species described by Walckenaer and Koch are even more
uncertain than those of Hentz. A considerable number of them are
very probably the same as species described here and in the papers
of Mr. Peckham, but the descriptions and figui'es are in most cases
too indefinite to be identified.

The spiders described by Keyserling, in 1885, are, most of them,
in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, at Cambridge, Mass., and I
have examined and identified most of them. More species have
lately been described by G. W. Peckham and Mrs. Peckham, who
have made a specialty of this family, in the Transactions of the
Wisconsin Academy of Sciences for 1888. I have compared speci-
mens of these species with my own. I have also had for comparison
a number of European Attidfe named for me by Mr. Simon. The
classification of the American Attidm needs a more thorough revision
than can be undertaken in a paper dealing with so small a number
of species as the present and it will no doubt soon be done by Mr.
Peckham. The classification of Simon as modified by Peckham has
been followed as far as possible.

The species are included in the following genera :

Phidippus Koch. Large hairy spiders. Mandibles large and
strong and longer than the front of the head. Cephalothorax
widened across the middle. Anterior row of eyes comparatively
small and a little separated from one another, the lateral higher than

222 J. H. Emerton — iVew England AttidcB.

the front pair. Middle eyes nearer the lateral than the dorsal. Legs
short and stout 4, 1, 2, 3 in females and 1, 4, 2, 3 in males. Males
with longer legs and deeper colors than females. Male palpi with a
short tibial hook and short tube of the palpal organ. P. rafns, ruber,
brunnens, mystaceiis, tripunctattis, page 224 to 228.

Dendryphantes Koch. Hairy spiders of moderate size. Front
row of eyes large and short distances apart, the lateral only a little
higher than the front pair. Middle eyes half way between the
lateral and dorsal or a little nearer the lateral. Mandibles large and
strong, those of the males spreading a little apart and having a sharp
edge on the outer side. Legs 4, 1, 2, 3 in females and 1, 4, 2, 3 in
males. Colors of the sexes very different. Females brown and
gray, indistinctly marked. Males darker brown with bright white
markings, color of skin changing to red in alcohol. D. tnilltaris,
montanus, mstivaUs, page 228 to 230.

Icius Simon. I use this genus as it has been used by Keyserling
and Peckham to include several species that must soon be separated
into two or three genera. I.- mitratics and palmarun resemble J)e7i-
drypJuDites, but have the cephalothorax more flattened, the abdomen
narrower and longer, and the front legs of the males more elongated.
The other species approach Epiblemum and Menemerus. They have
the cephalothorax elongated, the colors dark and the hairs and scales
very small and partly iridescent. The legs are marked with longitu-
dinal lines and the front pair much elongated. I. p)almarum, mitra-
tus, elegans, hartii, formicarius, page 232 to 236.

Marptnsa Thorell = Marpissa Simon. Cephalothorax and abdo-
m.en much flattened and both widest across the middle. Cephalo-
thorax very low in front, the front eyes touching its lower edge.
Lateral eyes half their diameter from the front pair. Mandibles
small. Legs 4, 1, 2, 3, in females and 1, 4, 2, 3, in males. 31. fa-
miliar is, p. 237.

Epibleniiutn Hentz = Calliethera Koch and Simon. Cephalothorax
more than half longer than wide, a little widened in the middle and
depressed in the middle between the cephalic and thoracic parts.
Abdomen oval, not much longer than the cephalothorax. Legs
4, 1, 2, 3, in females and 1, 4, 2, 3, in males. Mandibles of the males
elongated and turned forward. Distinct white markings on cephalo-
thorax and abdomen. E. scenicum, page 238.

Mene7yierus Simon. Cephalothorax half longer than wide, widest
a little behind the middle, flattened above, and with a deep groove
across the middle. Legs 4, 1, 2, 3, or 1, 4, 2, 3, front legs thickened.
Colors in longitudinal stripes. 31. binus, lineatus, page 239.

J. H. Emerton — JSfeiv England Attidm. 223

Mmiila Koch. Cepbalothorax high and wide, but little widened
in the middle. Mandibles small. Legs long, slender and tapering,
differing little in length, 4, 1, 2, 8. Hairs and scales short and colors
bright. M. vlttata, page 236.

Zygoballus Peckham, Cephalothorax high. Eye siiace nearly as
long as wide and widest behind. Dorsal eyes very high and wide
apart. Mandibles large in l)oth sexes, those of males with si)ines on
the inner and under sides. Legs 4, 1, 2, 3 and 1, 4, 2, 3. Z. bettini,
terrestris, page 230, 231.

Phlegra Simon. Cephalothorax long with the cephalic part short,
about half as long as the thoracic. Lateral eyes higher than the
front pair. First and second legs short and thickened. Legs 4, 3,
1, 2 or 4, 1, 3, 2. Markings in longitudinal lines. P. leopardus,
page 242,

Ilasarius Simon. Cephalothorax a third longer than wide, widest
in the middle and ilat above. Abdomen larger than cephalothorax,
widest across the middle, and pointed behind. Dorsal eyes as far
apart as lateral. Legs of third and fourth pairs of e^ual length.
First or fourth pair longest. The cephalothorax has usually a band
of light color across the middle behind the eyes. H. hoyi, page 243.
Mabrocestum Simon, Cephalothorax high, longer than in Attus
and the dorsal eyes farther back. Colors black and white in females
and bright and iridescent in males. Third legs longest. H. splen-
dens, peregr'imim, page 244, 245.

Attus Walck,, Simon, Cephalothorax nearly as wide as long,
widest in the middle. Eye space two-thirds as long as wide. Dorsal
eyes as far apart as the lateral. Third legs shortest. Fourth legs
longest in females and usually in males, A. palustris, sylvestris,
page 247,

Saitis Simon. Small spiders with the cephalothorax long and
widest behind. Dorsal eyes nearer together than the front lateral.
Abdomen short and wider than the cephalothorax. Third legs as
long as fourth and longer than first. *S'. pidex, page 246.

Euopltrys Koch, Simon. Cephalothorax low and wide in front,
long and with the sides almost parallel. Legs 4, 1, 2, 3, first and
second pairs thickened. Hairs short and skin in the females marked
with gray and brown spots like Tegenaria, Males darker colored.
Some species with long hairs and scales and markings like Attus.
E. monadnock, page 241,

JVeon Simon. Small spiders with large eyes ; the dorsal pair as
large as the lateral and nearer the back than the front of the cepha-

224 J. H. Emerton — NeAO England Attidce.

lothoiiix. Hairs short and skin marked with gray spots. N. nelllL,
page 240.

Tlie three following genera are ant-like in general appearance.
They are long and narrow. The pedicel of the abdomen is long and
visible from above. Abdomen and cej^halothorax each with a depres-
sion near the middle ; legs slender.

Synageles Sim.on. Dorsal eyes as far back as the middle of the
cephalothorax. Transverse dej)ression very slight. Cephalothorax
flattened above, the hinder half narrowing slightly backward, IS.
picata, page 250.

/SaUicus Latreille, Simon. Cephalic part of cephalothorax higher
than the thoracic. Mandibles large. Palpi of females with tibia
and tarsus thickened. iS. ej^hij^j^iattis, page 249.

Synemosyna Hentz. Very long and narrow. Depressions in
cephalothorax and abdomen deep. Cephalothorax and abdomen both
narrowed toward the pedicel. Middle eyes very large ; the others
all small. S. formica, page 248.

Phidippus multiformis, new sp.

Phidippus rufus Peckham, but not Attus rufus Hentz, nor A. castaneiis Hentz, nor
Phidippus ruber (Keyserling) Peckham. Keyserling has named this species Phi-
dippus auctus Koch in the Cambridge museum.

The female is 8 to 9'"'" long, the male 5 to 7™™. The general color
of the adult female is j^ellowish brown with black and white mark-
ings. Around the front of the abdomen is a white band, and on the
back are two indistinct longitudinal black stripes in which are four
pairs of wdiite spots. The general brown color is produced by a
mixture of scales and hairs of various colors. The females are most
brightly colored just before reaching maturity. The general color is
then a bright orange, mixed with darker red and brown scales and
black hairs. The cephalothorax is covered with yellow scales inclin-
ing to red in the middle of the back. The black stripes on the
abdomen are more distinct and the white spots larger. PI. XVI,
fig. \b. The legs are pale in the middle of the joints and dark toward
the ends and covered with gray and black hairs. The palpi are yel-
low. The hairs and scales are of various shapes, the most common
being that of slightly flattened hairs, fig, 1/, These, with black
hairs, form the darker colors. The yellow and orange scales are
wider and less sharply pointed, fig. \h, and the white spots have
short and wide scales. Under the abdomen the color is light gray
with two parallel darker stripes. In younger spiders the black

J. H. Mnerton — Nevj England Aitidce. 225

markings of the abdomen are larger and the white mai'kings of the
hinder half larger and wider. The yellow parts are paler and the
joints of the legs are less darkened toward the ends. In very young,
just after leaving the cocoon, fig. Id, the legs are entirely pale,
except the claws, which are black; the cephalothorax is black with a
few 5'^ellow scales. The abdomen, which is very short, is black with
a yellow marking along the middle and around the front half. The
two hinder pairs of white spots are twice as wide as long, and the
other pair are very small.

In alcohol the orange color disappears almost entirely. The palpi
remain light yellow and the colors of the legs become lighter and
darker shades of yellowish brown. The cephalothorax is dark brown,
darker on the head, and the abdomen becomes brown with the black
and white markings still distinct but faded.

The colors of the male are entirely different from those of the
female, fig. la. The cephalothorax and legs to the end of the tibia
are black. The metatarsus and tarsus of all the legs are reddish brown
with black ends. The palpi are black with a stripe of white scales
on the upper side of patella, tibia and half of the tarsus. Abdomen
black beneath- and in the middle above. Around the front end is a
white stripe. The sides of the top of the abdomen are briglit orange
and between the orange and black areas are three pairs of white
spots. In the middle of the black area is a lighter stripe of yellowish
iridescent scales which, in some lights, can not be easily seen, and
may be absent altogether.

The epigynum has a round opening in front with the sides slightly
darkened and toothed. The hinder notch is rounded but variable in
shape. PI. I, fig. le, If.

The male palpus has the tibial hook, small and sharp. Fig, Ih, li.

This is one of the most common Attidae on plants throughout the
summer. It matures in July and the males and females may be found
together in a bag of silk among leaves, and in the same bag the
female makes her cocoon of eggs, from which the young come out in
August and become Jialf grown before winter.

Mt. Washington and Dublin, N, H., Eastern Massachusetts, New
Haven, Conn,

Phidippus brunneus, new sp.

This spider closely resembles P. mxdtiformis, and I supposed it to be
a variety of that species. The size is the same and it has indistinctly
the same markings on the abdomen in some individuals. The differ-

226 J. H. Mmerton — New England Attidm.

ences are in the color and the epigynum. The color in life is reddish
brown, covered with gray and black hairs and small gray scales not
close enough to cover the skin. The cephalothorax is a little darker
brown than the abdomen. The abdominal markings are indistinct in
some individuals, and in most entirely absent. The legs are more
uniformly colored than in P. rnfus, the ends of the joints being less
distinctly darkened. The epigynum, PI. I, fig. 2, is more distinct
than in nndtiformis, the dark thickened edges of the anterior opening
are longer and the opening is divided in front by a thick brown
middle line into two.

Salem and Waltham, Mass.

PhidippUS ruber Keys, not P. rufus Peckham.

This species is known to me principally by the males. These are
6 or "Z'^"^ long. The cephalothorax and abdomen are bright orange
above and black beneath. The abdomen is covered with large
orange scales lighter colored than those of the cephalothorax and
mixed with the scales are long black hairs. On the hinder half of
the abdomen are two distinct black longitudinal stripes in which are
two pairs of white spots. PI. XV, fig. 4. These markings vary in
size and in one male are almost covered by orange scales. The
femora of all the legs and tibia of first pair are black, the other joints
orange brown, darker or black toward the tips. The male palpi have
the tibial hook flat and round at the end. Fig. 4h, 4c.

The female which I suppose to belong to this species is 9™™ long.
The abdomen is covered with orange yellow scales and black hairs
finer and shorter than in the male. There are no black stripes.
Around the front of the abdomen is a white stripe. The cephalo-
thorax is brown covered with orange scales. The legs are orange
brown, the front pair darkest and the femora of all the legs darker
than the other joints, all of which are slightly darker toward the tip.
The mandibles ai'e brown in both sexes and not iridescent. The
sternum of the female is dark, almost black, but the abdomen is as
light beneath as it is above. The epigynum hafe two small openings.
Fig. 4a.

Female from Providence, R. I. Males, Topsfield, Mass., Sherborn,
Mass., and House Island near Manchester, Mass.

./. H. Emerton — JSfev) England Attidm. S2Y

Phidippus mystaceus.

Attus mystaceus Hentz, ? Phidnypus albomaculatus Keys., ,? P. purpuiatus Keys., P.
ijalathea Peckham.

The largest of the New England Attidae, females measuring 12 to
15'"™ long. The female is black, covered with gray hairs and scales
closely enough to give the whole spider a gray color. On the abdo-
men are two longitudinal black stripes that do not extend quite to
the front end and in these stripes are four pairs of bright white spots.
The front end of the abdomen is crossed by a white band that ex-
tends back obliquely each side and at the sides of the abdomen are
several oblique white stripes with black edges. PI. XVI, fig. 3.
The hairs of the palpi and front of the head under the eyes are longer
and whiter than on other parts of the body. Under the abdomen is a
middle dark line narrowing behind, on each side of which is a light
gray border. At the sides of this are two wider dark bands and
outside of them lighter gray. Legs gray, not ringed but a little
darker toAvard the ends of the joints.

In alcohol the general color becomes dark brown and later reddish
and all the markings are less distinct.

The male resembles the female but is darker colored. The cepha-
lothorax, palpi and legs are black with a few scattered white scales
and hairs. Abdomen black beneath. Back of abdomen with a
greenish white border and a black area in the middle in which are
four pairs of white spots.

The 'male palpus is large. The tarsal hook is nearly as long as the
tarsus and sharp and slightly curved at the tip. Fig. 3a, 35.

The epigynum has a hard plate with two small openings in front
and a notch of various shapes behind. Fig. 36', 3c?.

It lives under stones at all seasons. In winter or when moulting
or laying eggs it hides in a thick white bag of silk, in which the
cocoons are made early in the summer. The young become nearly
full grown before winter. Adult males are found from May to July
and adult females at all seasons.

Common all over New England. Peckham has not found it in
Wisconsin.

Phidippus tripunctatus.

Attus audax Heutz, Alius tripunctatus Hentz, Phidippus morsilans Peckham.

A large female from Connecticut, measures lo""" long and they
are usually 8 to 9™". Peckham says western specimens are larger,
often as long as 15'"'".

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII, 31 OdT., 1891,

228 J. H. Emerton — Neii:) England Attidm.

The color of both sexes is black, with black mixed with a few white
hairs. The legs are gray in the middle of the joints and black toward
the tips. The abdomen has a white band around the front and is
marked with three large white spots, the middle one corresponding
to the second pair in inuUiforniis and mystaceus and the other two
to the third pair. The other spots are generally present in this species
but so small as not to be readily noticed. The under side of the body
is black with two indistinct light stripes under the abdomen. The
mandibles are metallic green and blue.

The males are 6 or V""" long and colored like the female. The
mandibles have a short blunt tooth in front over the claw. Fig. 5ci.

The male palpi have the tarsal hook pointed and turned down-
ward. Fig. 5c. The palpal organ is wider at the base than in most
species. Fig. 5h.

It lives under bark and stones, hibernating half grown in thick
silk nests and concealing its egg cocoons in the same places. It is
common all over the United States.

Dendryphantes aestivalis Peckham, issa.

D. capitatus Peckham, 1885. Resembles Alius capitatus anA parvus Flentz.

Females 5 or 6"'"' long and males smaller. There are two varieties
in the colors of the females. The light variety, PI, XVII, fig. 2, has
the light parts white or light yellow and the dark parts dark brown
covered with white hairs and scales. The cephalothorax is dark
brown thinly covered with scales so that the dark color shows
between them in spots. The legs are light yellow and translucent,
indistinctly ringed with brown at the base, and near the tij) of each
joint all covered with greenish white hairs. The palpi are light and
Avithout rings except on the femur and patella. Abdomen brighter
yellow than the thorax with four pairs of purplish brown spots, the
second pair largest, connected with a paler brown middle marking.
Abdomen' beneath with a pur2:)le brown stripe in the middle and
oblique brown stripes at the sides. Sternum, maxillje and mandibh's
light brown. Scales smaller than those of the dark variety.

The dark variety, fig. 2h, is generally smaller and covered Avith
longer hairs and scales. The legs and ])alpi are more distinctly
ringed witli dark brown. The dark spots on the abdomen are smaller
and more connected by dark lines than in the other variety. The
under side is dark brown.

In alcohol they become in a few days bright red in the darker
parts which afterward fade and I'emain dull red for a long time.
Both varieties in alcohol look much alike.

J. H. Emerton — JSfexo England Attidce. 229

One of the most common Attidiv, living on plants, especially
evergreen trees, all over New England.

The colors of the male, Fig. 2^*, differ extremely from those of the
female. The legs are ringed as in the female, but the brown parts
are wider and not obscured by white hairs, while the white parts are
whiter. The cephalothorax is dark brown with a white stripe each
side under the eyes, bending toward each other behind but not con-
nected. The front of the head is also white and covered with long
white hairs, "^rhe palpi have the femur dark brown at the base and
white at the end. The patella and tibia are brown and the tarsus is
bi'own with white hairs on the upper side. The abdomen is white in
front and around the sides. The middle is dark brown with a few
yellow and greenish scales in the middle. The brown area is iisually
notched at the sides in four scallops and sometimes indistinctly
divided in four pairs of spots as in the female.

In the female the cepalothorax is a third longer than wide and not
much widened across the middle. In the male the cephalothorax is
only slightly wider. The mandibles are vertical in both sexes and
but little larger in the male than in the female.

The male palpi and the palpal organs are large in i)ro]»ortion to the
size of the spider. The palpal organ extends back beyond the tibia.
The tibial hook is very small. Fig, 2e. The tube of the palpal
organ has a stiff point at its side a little longer than the tube itself.
Fig. 2d.

The epigynum has the front opening small and divided into two
directed sidewise. Fig. 2/",

Dendryphantes montanus, new sp.

Female 7™™ long, a little smaller than militaris, cephalothorax as
long as in militaris but not as wide. , Legs and mouth parts a little
more slender than in militaris. The markings, as far as can be
judged from specimens in alcohol, are like those of militaris.

The male has the cephalothorax nearly as wide as long. PI. XVII,
fig. 3a. The mandibles are as long as in militaris but not as stout,
fig. 3b, and the palpi are as long and much stouter. The femora of
the palpi are thickened towards the end, as in (estivalis, and the tibia
and patella are very short. The palpal organ is long, and the tube
long and stout. Figs. Sd, 3e. The epigynum, fig. 3c, has a single
round opening, and a notch of various shapes, like mstivalis.

Mt. Washington, N. H.

230 J. H. Emerton — Neio England Attidce.

Dendryphantes militaris.

Attus militaris Hentz. Philceus militaris Peckham.

Female 1 or 8'""' long. The cephalothorax is ^ide across the mid-
dle in both sexes, nearly as wide as long. The middle eyes are a
little nearer the front lateral than the dorsal eyes. The mandibles are
a little flattened in front, and in the male, the front outer corner over
the claw is sharp. PI. XVII, fig. la.

The general color is brown, covered with black, and a few gray
hairs, darker and browner than mstivalis. In alcohol it turns red
but not so bright as ciestUHdis. The cephalothorax is ])i-own in
the female, and in the male the same color, with a white stripe
each side under the eyes. Fig. \a. The abdomen of the female is
brown, with four pairs of white, oblique marks in the middle, and
four at the sides. Fig. 1. The front of the abdomen is white. In
the male the middle white spots are absent, and the hiteral and front
white marks are united into a band that extends nearly around the
abdomen. Fig. \a.

The palpi of both sexes are very slender, and the tarsi and palpal
organs of the male are unusually small for so large a spider. The
tube of the palpal organs is hmger than in ct'stivalis -iimX more sim])le.
Fig. Id.

The mandibles of the male are widened at the end, and have a
large two-pointed tooth near the end of the claw. The claw has a
short, flat tooth on the inner side, near the middle. Fig. \h, \c.
The epigynum is like that of aestivalis, but the opening is wider.

Zygoballus bettini Peckham.

A larger and more slender species than terrestris. The body is
higher and narrower, the legs and palpi are larger, and the compli-
cated mandibles of the male are larger in proportion to their thick-
ness. The cephalothorax is almost as high in the middle as it is
wide, and slopes from the hinder eyes steeply backward. Toward
the front the slope is less, and the front of the head is half as high
as the hind pair of eyes. PI. XVII, fig. 4. The abdomen is rounded
above and widest across the hinder half.

In life, the colors are bronze green and yellow, marked with white.
In alcohol the cephalothoi*ax is dark brown with whitish scales. The
abdomen is lighter brown, sometimes reddish, especially in speci-
mens not long preserved, with white markings sometimes forming a
regular herring-bone figure in the middle, and sometimes broken

J. H. Emerton — iVew England Attidce. 231

into irregular dark and light spots. Around the front is a white
band, and there are other slanting white stripes along the sides.

llie femur of the first [tair of legs is very dark brown, the other
joints white. The second and third legs are white, oi" only slightly
darker at the ends of the joints. The fourth legs have the hinder half
of the cox;i?, and the ends of all the joints brown.

In the male the legs and palpi are brown, without the distinct
dark markings of the female. The abdomen is brown with irrides-
cent greenish scales, and a bright, white band around the front, and
two white obliquu stripes each side.

The male has the front legs much larger than the feuTale. His
mandibles are long and stout at the base, and spread apart at the
ends. In the middle of the inner side is a large tooth, directed
downward, and near its base, two smaller ones, on the under side of
the mandible. On the under side, near the outer edge, is a long
ridge, ending in a tooth, curved inward. Fig. Aa. The male palpi
are very slender, and the tarsus and palpal organ long and small.
The patella and tibia are each twice as long as thick. The til)ial
hook is nearly as long as the tibia. Fig. Ah.

Common on plants in summer, and occasionally found under stones
and bai'k.

Massachusetts and Connecticut.

Zygoballus terrestris, new sp.

Length of female 3""". The cephalothorax is two-thirds as wnde
as long, and half as high as long. The posterior eyes are the full
width of the cephalothorax apart, and the thorax slopes backward
from them, but not as steeply as in betti/ni, nor is it as much nar-
rowed behind. PI. XVII, tig. 5.

The color of the cephalothorax in alcohol, is dark brown, covered
thinly with small, light colored scales. The first pair of legs are
dark brown, the femur darkest, and the other joints a little lighter
in the middle. The other legs are lighter Avith the ends of the joints
dark. Fig. 5c. The abdomen is lighter than the thorax, and
marked with irregular and variable dark spots.

In the male the abdomen is brown in the middle, with a distinct
white line around the front and sides. The male palpi are short, the
patella and tibia being not much longer than wide. The tibial hook
is as long as the tibia itself, and only slightly curved. Fig. 5(7.
The j)alpal organ is small and covered by the tarsus. The tube is
moderately long, and lies in the groove at the end of the tarsus for

232 J. H. Eiiierton — Neio England AUidiP..

its whole length. The mandibles are similar to those of bettini, but
smaller. "^I'he epigynum has the anterior opening nearly square,
opening toward the front, and the posterior notch very wide.
Fig. bb.

On fences and under leaves in winter.

Boston and Cambridge, Mass., and New Haven, Conn.

Icius mitratUS Peckbam.

AUus milratus Hentz.

This species resembles closely jyalmarum, differing mainly in
color. The legs are all white in both sexes, and the mandibles of the
male are not long and horizontal as in jxdntarif/n. The male palpi
and palpal organs are like those of palniarxm, with the tibial hook
perhaps a little more slender. The female preserved in alcohol is
still more like pahnamm. The epigynum is of the same shape and
the markings in four large spots on the abdomen, like those of some
females of pahnaruin. The cephalothorax seems to be a little wider,
and the colors of the hairs of the whole body whiter than in ^>«/-
niaruin.

A living male has the legs white, or a little greenish, with long
white hairs, those on the front legs longer than the diameter of the
leg. On the front of the leg and ])alpi are long, white hairs. The
sides of the cephalothorax and abdomen, and the under side of
the abdomen are white. The middle of the cephalothorax and abdo-
men ai"e light brown, covered with light, yellow hairs, through which
three or four dark spots show indistinctly. PI. XVIII, fig. 2.

Brookline and Maiden, Mass., and New Haven, Conn.

Icius palmarum Peckham.

Epihlemum palmarum Hentz.

Female 5'"'" and male 4'""' long. The living female has the legs
and palpi transparent white, and the claws black. The few spines
on the legs are black. The whole body is covered with light gray
or white scales, mixed with short, fine black hairs. The abdomen
has a row of indistinct, darker triangular spots in the middle and
oblique rows of small spots at the sides. PI. XVII, fig. 1. In alco-
hol the legs become dull yellow, and the rest of the body turns red
as in cestivalis, afterwards fading to a dirty yellow. The markings
of the abdomen become more distinct, and in some individuals form
four large, dark brown spots. Fig. 1/".

J. H. Emerton — Neii^ England Attidce. 233

The living males, fig. \g, have the front legs very dark brown,
except the tarsi, which are a little lighter. The other legs are trans-
parent white, cephalothorax and abdomen dark and reddish brown,
mixed with shining, greenish white scales, and sometimes a little
copper red around the eyes. There is a white stripe the whole length
of the body, each side, and across the front of the head below the
eyes. The maxillae and mandibles are dark brown, and the palpi are
the same color, except the tarsi which are light yellow ; sternum and
under side of abdomen dark brown. Some males show indistinctly
dorsal markings of the abdomen, like the female.

The female resembles cestivalis, but is longer in proportion to its
width and has the front legs stouter. The abdomen is usually nearly
twice as long as wide. Fig. 1, The cephalothorax is flattened
above from the front eyes two-thirds its length backward, in both
sexes, fig. 1«, while in (estivalis it is slightly arched upward.

Ill the males, the front legs are, as usual, longer and stouter than
the others and are made very conspicuous by their dark color.
The mandibles of the male are lai'ger than those of the female, and
more or less turned forward, according to their length. In some
males the mandibles are only a little longer than those of the female,
and in these the patella and tibia of the front legs are not much
longer than the femur. Others, usually larger spiders, have the man-
dibles nearly as long as the cephalothorax and extending forward
horizontally, the maxillae are longer, and the first pair of legs have
the patella and tibia one and a half times as long as the femur.
Fig. le. Fig. Ig shows the mandibles of the common length.

The epigynum has two small anterior openings and a large, wide
notch behind, half-way between the anterior openings and the trans-
verse fold.

The male palpus has the tibia as wide as long, and the patella a
little longer. The tibial hook is as long at the joint itself, thin and
curved inward a little at the end. The tube of the palpal organ is
long and curved around the end of the bulb, the point resting in a
groove turned obliquely outward on the end of the tarsus. Figs.
lA, U.

On plants in summer. Massachusetts and Connecticut,

Cius elegans, $ Atlus ekfjans Hentz. S Attus siq)erdliosus Hentz.
Dendryphantes elegans Peckham.

Female 6""" long. Cephalothorax two-thirds as wide as long, and
abdomen half as wide as long. The sides of the cephalothorax are

234 J. II. Emerton — JSTeto England Attidce.

nearly straight and parallel in the female, and widened a little behind
the middle in the male.

The colors of the living female, PL XVIII, fig, 3, are bronze green
which in some lights changes to copper red on the abdomen and
cephalothorax. The legs are yellow, with longitudinal dark stripes,
except the front femora, which are dark brow^n. The palpi are
bright yellow at the end and dark at the base. In alcohol the colors
appear dull and darker.

The males, fig. 3f?, are much more brightly colored. The legs are
orange, darker toward the ends, with fine dark, longitudinal stripes.
The ends of the front tibia? are dark brown, and have long, brown
hairs on the inner and under side. The palpi are orange, darker
toward the end. The sides and hinder part of the cephalothorax are
orange, and there is a white line each side over the coxfe. The
upper part of the cephalothorax and abdomen are covered with
greenish yellow scales. On the front of the head are tufts of long
hairs, yellow, mixed with black, pointing forward and a little inward
between the middle and lateral eyes, fig. 3e. On the hinder end of
the abdomen is an iridescent purple spot. The abdomen is green on
the under side, and the sternum and coxa? are orange. In alcohol
the colors become dull yellow and brown.

The mandibles of this species are slender, and the claw shoi't, and
strongly curved inward toward the point. In the male the mandibles
are a little longer, and have a slight notch on the inner side, one-third
their length from the end. Fig. Se.

The epigynum is M'ide, with two anterior openings more than their
diameter apart, and the ])osterior notch is divided into two. Fig. 3A,

The male palpi have the patella as wide as long, and the tibia still
shorter, Avith a very short and small hook on the outer side. Fig. 3«/.
The tube of the palpal orgau is twisted at the end, and has a
s]»herical base, partly covered by the softer part of the bulb. Fig,
3/". The male has the legs of the first pair much larger than the
others, and all the legs longer than the female. In the female the
fourth legs are longest.

Some males have the (colors darker and the front legs less elongated
than usual, and do not have the black spot and black tuft of longer
hairs on the ends of the tibite. They also have the tufts of hair
over the eyes much smaller. Figs. 4, 4a. The palpal organs are a
little stouter. Figs. Ah, 4e. Specimens from the Adirondacks and
White Mountains are of this variety.

White Mountains, N. H., to New Haven, Conn,

.7. H. Emerton — Neio England Attidcn. 235

Icius hartii, new sp.

Tlie name Icius Hartii was given this species by Mr. Peckbiam,
but not published. A specimen in the Museum of Comparative
Zoology in Cambridge, is named by Keyserling Icius tibialis
Koch.

Of this species I have only one female from Medfoi'd, Mass. This
is Y"""^ long, cephalothorax 2"'™ long, and 1'""" wide. The cephalo-
thorax is straight at the sides, very little narrowed behind. The
abdomen is oval, a little pointed behind. PI. XVIII, fig. 5. The
length of the legs is 4, 1, 2, 3. The front legs are thickest, and the
tibia is more than twice as thick as that of the other legs. In the
male, fig. 5a, the front legs are longest and still more thickened than
in the female. The cephalothorax is dark brown, with gray hairs.
The abdomen has the middle dai*k and the border white ; the middle
area broken at the edges by three or four pairs of white spots. The
under side of the abdomen is light in the middle and black around
the edges up to the white border of the upper surface. The femora
are dark, except the third pair, which has light stripes. The other
joints are dark at the ends, and have dark longitudinal stripes. The
epigynum is small, and has two small openings directed forward
about their diameter apart. Fig. 5d.

Some of the Wisconsin specimens which I have from Mr. Peck-
ham, are a little larger, and the dorsal markings are more broken by
oblique rows of white spots. The males have the abdomen shorter
and the front legs much longer and thicker. The mandibles are a
little longer than in the females. The male palpi are short and stout,
the patella and tibia are as short as wide, and the tibial hook is very
small and pointed, and directed downward. Fig. 5c.

The palpal organ is long enough to nearly cover the tibia. The
tube is short and stout, and a little swelled at the base. Fig. 5h.

Icms formicarius, n. sp.

Length 5""". Cephalothorax and abdomen usually about the same
length. The general appearance is ant-like. The color is black with
dark bronze green scales, except a white line each side of the thorax,
and white stripes on the legs, two above and one beneath. One
specimen has a few white scales on the spinnerets.

The cephalothorax is two-thirds as wide as long and the sides are
nearly straight and parallel. The abdomen is widest across the
hinder half and a little pointed behind. Both cej^halothorax and
abdomen are less flattened than in the other species. The legs are

Trans. Gonw Acad., Vol. VIII. 32 Oct., 1891.

236 J. TL JEmerton — Nexo Miglancl, Attidce,.

long and slender, the fourth pair longest and the first next. The
first pair are only a little stouter than the others. PI. XVII, fig. 6.
The epigynum is large with the anterior openings wide and far apart.
The notch behind is very deep and narrow. Fig. 6 J.

I have seen females only from Salem and Medford, Mass., and
New Haven, Conn.

Msevia vittata.

Aslia vittata Pockham, Attus vittatus Hentz, Attus niger Hentz. i McBvia pencillata
Koch.

This is a large and brightly colored spider with long legs. The
female is 8""" long, the male smaller but with the legs longer. PI.
XIX, figs. 1, la, \h.

The living female has the legs and palpi translucent, a little yellow
or greenish white. They are marked with indistinct light gray rings
and black spots at the base of the hairs and spines. The cephalo-
thorax is dark brown between the eyes and translucent like the legs
in the thoracic part. There is a fine black line in the middle and on
each side and a few gray marks radiating from the dorsal groove.
The whole top of the cephalothorax is covered with greenish yellow
scales mixed with gray hairs. The eyes are black and one female
has a red stripe under the eyes each side. The abdomen is covered
with scales which in the middle and at the sides are gray and mixed
with black hairs. There are two longitudinal bands of light copper
red along the back of the abdomen and indistinct angular marks of
the same color in the middle of the hinder half. The colors of the
under side are light gray and yellow spotted with gray on the
abdomen.

According to Peckham, males of two very different colors belong
to this species. One kind resembles the female. Fig, 1^. The red
bands on the abdomen are broken up into rows of spots connected
with the middle angular markings. The gray and black spots on
the legs and cephalothorax are larger and there are several black
marks on the front of the abdomen.

The palpi are bright orange yellow with the tibial hook black and
a black spot on the inner side of each joint. The size of the black
spot varies in different individuals and so passes into the other variety
in which the cej^halothorax and abdomen are entirely black and the
palpi black except a few orange hairs on the outer side. The black
cephalothorax and abdomen are covered with dark greenish shiny
scales. The legs in this variety are white except the hairs. On the

J. H. Emerton — New England Attidce. 23V

front of the head of the bhiek variety are three tufts of long hairs
which are entirely wanting in lighter colored males. Fig. \a.
Althougli males of both kinds pair with the same female their
behavior Avhen mating is different, for an account of which see
Peckham's article in Occasional Papers of the Nat. Hist. Hoc. of
Wisconsin, vol. i, 1888.

The cephalothorax of the female is widest behind the middle and
is there two thirds as wide as long. It is narrowed to half that
width at the hinder end and slightly narrowed toward the front, the
head being not much more than half as wide as the cephalothorax is
long. Fig. 1. The top of the cephalothorax is flat, rising a little
between the dorsal eyes and the front row of eyes is straight on the
upper edge. The comparative length of the legs is 4, 1, 3, 2 and the
fourth pair is as long as the body.

The male palpi are long. The tibial hook is straight and blunt
and about as long as the tibia itself. The tarsus is short and wide
and turned outward at the tip. The palpal organ is oval with a long
tube bent around the end of the bulb with its point in the groove on
the outer corner of the tarsus. Fig. \c.

The epigynum has a small oval opening very far farward and a
slight notch on the edge of the transverse fold. Fig. \d.

This is an active species, living on plants in summer.

Eastern Massachusetts and New Haven and Meriden, Connecticut.

Marptusa familiaris Peckham.

Attvs familiaris Hentz.

The female is 10"^'" long and the male nearly as large. The fourth
pair of legs is longest in the female and the first pair in the male.
The cephalothorax and abdomen are both much flattened. The
cephalothorax is rounded at the sides and nearly twice as wide in the
middle as in front. The abdomen is twice as long as wide, widest
in the middle and truncated at the front end and sometimes at the
hinder end also. In the latter case the spinnerets are so far under
the abdomen that they cannot be seen from above. The legs are
long and stout, the fourth pair one and a half times as long as the
abdomen.

The general color is gray, covered with long gray and white hairs.
The cephalothorax has a dark brown band along the edge each side
which is larger and darker in the _ males. The abdomen has in the
middle a yellowish white marking, covering half its Avidth, the front
half straight and the hinder half notched at the sides. PI. XIX, fig.

238 J. H. Emerton — Nev) England Attidce.

3. The legs are darker at the ends of the joints and lighter in the
middle. The under side of the abdomen is light at the sides and
has a dark stripe in the middle.

The male palpus has the tibia very short and the tibial hook is
long and slender and slightly thickened at the tip. The tube of the
palpal organ starts from the middle of the inner side of the bulb
and turns obliquely across the end of the tarsus. Near the end of
the tube but not quite reaching the tip is a short flat process. Figs.
•dh, -de.

Epiblemum SCeniCUm Thorell. Epibkmum famtum llentz. Salticus ocenicus
Latr. Calliethera scenica Simon. Epiblemum scenicum Peckham.

Gray with white markings. On some the white marks are much
more definite than on others, the gray ground having very few white
scales mixed with it. I have usually found the spiders of this
variety about houses, while those from the country, living on plants,
have white as well as yellow scales largely mixed with the gray so as
to obscure the white markings. The field specimens are usually
more slender.

The front of the head around and above the eyes is white. There
is a definite white stripe on each side of the cephalothorax and in the
middle of the cephalothorax two white spots one on each side of the
dorsal groove. On the abdomen there is a white stripe across the
anterior end and two oblique marks on each side. PI. XIX, fig. 2.

The legs are gray with white rings not very distinctly marked and
the palpi white. The markings are very different from those of any
other species.

The proportions of the body differ considerably in individuals
some appearing much longer and more slender than others. The
cephalothorax is about two-thirds as wide as long and the abdomen
usually about the same width and longer.

The epigjnium is raised at the hinder edge, a little pointed and
with a round notch about as deep as wide. The anterior half is a
little narrowed and notched in the middle with a depression on each
side, in the bottom of which is a round hole. Fig. 2e. The shape of
the epigynum varies and in pale or freshly moulted females the
internal parts may be seen through the skin as shown in Peckham's
figure.

The males differ but little in color and markings from the females,
but the palpi are large and the mandibles two-thirds as long as the
cephalothorax and turned forward almost horizontally. Fig. 2a, 2c.

./. H. Emerton — Keic England Attidce. 239

The tibia of the male palpus is sliorter than the patelhi and at the
distal end as Avide as long, witli a stout pointed hook directed forward
and a little inward. Fig. 2f.

Found occasionally under stones or on bushes but corninon on the
outside of houses and fences in the warmest and driest places. The
colors resemble closely that of un[)ainted wood stained by the
weather.

Common all over New England. A common Euro[)ean species.

MenemerUS lineatus. Icius Uneatus Peckham. Altus quadriiineatus Peck-
ham, 1883.

A small spider only 4'"'" long and very distinctly marked with two
white longitudinal lines on the middle of the abdomen and two
others on the sides so far down that only the front ends of them can
be seen from above. PI. XIX, fig. 5.

The color in life is dark brown. The Avhite lines on the back
have their edges very dark. The cephalothorax and dark parts of
the abdomen are thinly covered with long, slender, yellow scales
mixed with a few white hairs on the front of the abdomen. On the
under side of the abdomen are four white lines. The legs are dark
brown, the first pair darkest.

The relative length of the legs is 1, 4, 2, 3, The first pair are
twice as thick as the others. The top of the cephalothorax is flat
two-thirds its length from the front. There is a short, transverse
groove a little behind the dorsal eyes. The cephalothorax is widest
across the middle but only very little wider than in front. The
epigynum has a dark ridge behind, curved at the ends around two
round holes. Fig. 5b.

Manchester and Medford, Mass,

Menemerus binus. AUus Unus Hentz, not M. paykuUU Peckham, 1885.

Female 9""" long. Legs 1, 4, 2, 3, The cephalothorax is widest
behind the middle and narrows slightly toward the front of the head
where it is half as wide as long. The cephalothorax is flat above
and a little swelled around the dorsal eyes. There is a short trans-
verse groove behind the eyes. PI. XIX, fig, 4,

The abdomen is half as wide as long, narrowed at both ends. The
first pair of legs are about as long as the fourth pair, but twice as
thick. The second pair of legs are slightly thicker than the third
and fourth.

240 J. H. Emerton — New England Attidce.

I have not seen the colors in life. In alcohol the cephalothorax is
dark brown except around the eda^es where it is yellowish. The
front half of the cephalothorax betAveen the eyes is dark purple
when turned to the light. The abdomen is white with two longitu-
dinal black stri])es that <lo not reach either end. The front legs are
orange color with light brown stripes and a black spot near the end
of each joint on the inner si(h'. The other legs are dirty yellow
with indistinct brownish stripes at the sides. Under the abdomen
is a black middle stripe.

The epigynum has the openings very small and wide ajiart and the
posterior notch very wide with square corners at the ends. Fig. 4a.

One female from Meriden, Conn. Mr. Peckhani has the same
species from Nebraska,

Neon nellii reckham.

This is the smallest of our New England Attidic, being only 2.5
to 3'"™ long with the cephalothorax not much over 1""". The
general color is dark gray, darkest toward the head, so that the
spider is hard to see on gray stones or weathered wood. The cepha-
lothorax is high, the highest part being a little behind the middle,
from which it curves downward to the front eyes and slopes more
abruptly backward. The eyes are large and prominent, the first row
nearly straight and as wide as the widest part of the cejDhalothorax.
The posterior eyes are nearly as large as the front middle pair and
are at the middle of the cephalothorax. The abdomen is a little
pointed behind and the spinnerets are large for the size of the spider.
PI. XX, fig. 1.

The cephalothorax is smoky gray, darker toward the front and
darker in the males than females. The abdomen is gray with
yellowish white markings in a herring-bone pattern through the
middle. The underside of the body is light gray or whitish. The
legs are gray, darker toward the front.

The epigynum is large and has two rounded openings toward the
front. Fig. lb. The male palpi are also large and the palpal organ
extends backward so as to cover the short tibia. The tube lies
obliquely across the end of the bulb, its tip resting in a groove on the
end of the tarsus. Fig. Ic.

A common species under stones and leaves at all seasons. '

J. M. Emerton — ISFew England Attidm. 241

Euophrys monadnock, new sp.

One male was found on the upper part of Mt. Monadnock, N. H.,
on the rocks. PI. XX, fig. 2. It is 4""" long, the cephalothorax and
abdomen about the same length. The legs are all long^ relative
length 4, 1, 3, 2. The ends of the palpi are white as far as the end
of the femur. The tarsi of the first and second legs, and the tips of
the tarsi of the third and fourth are white. The femora of the
third and fourth legs are white, in life, light pink. The rest of the
body is deep black. The first and second legs are a little thickened
and the metatarsus, tibia and patella, and the end of first femur
covered with long scales, as long as the diameter of the leg. The
first and second legs are bright purple toward a bright light.

The front of the head is wide, and the sides of the cephalothorax
nearly straight and parallel. Fig. 2c. The front of the head,
below the eyes, slopes inward, and the sternum is short and wide.
Fig. 2a.

The palpi are long and slender, the tarsus not much wider than
the other joints. The tibial hook is straight and very slender, not
much thicker than one of the hairs. Fig. '2d. The palpal organ is
long and narrow at the base, where it extends over the tibia. The
tube is short and curved around the end of the bulb. Fig. 2e.

A female, which probably belongs to this species, was found in
Dublin, N". H., three miles from Monadnock. It is 5'"'" long, with
short and thin hairs and colors like Tegenaria. The cephalothorax
has the sides straight and parallel, thi-ee-fourths its length from the
front, and is a little rounded behind. Fig, 2/'. The eyes are large
and the lateral are more than half as large as the front pair. The pos-
terior eyes are as far apart as the length of the front row, and little
more than half as far from the lateral. The abdomen is oval, widest
behind the middle. The legs are 4, 1, 2, 3, the front pair much
thickened and the second slightly so. The cephalothorax is dark
brown in front and lighter toward the back, marked with dark
radiating lines. The abdomen is gray, with light, angular markings
along the middle, and irregular oblique lines at the sides. The legs
are without markings, the first pair dai'kest. The epigynum has
two large openings about their diameter from the transverse fold.
Fig. 2^,

Euophrys cruciatus, new sp.

This species is more generally covered with scales than monad'
nock, the front tibiae are less thickened, and do not have the long

242 J. H. JSmerton — JSfeto England Attidce.

scales of that species, and the colors are less bright and more like
those of Attus palustris. The only specimen I have, a male, is 5"""
long. PI. XX, fig. 8. The cephalothorax is three-fonrths as wide as
long, widest behind the middle. It is low in front, and the front row
of eyes are turned a little downward, the lateral pair half their diam-
eter, higher and farther back. The middle eyes are nearer the dorsal
than lateral. The dorsal eyes are nearer together than the lateral
pair. Tlie abdomen is as long and as wide as the cephalothorax,
widest in the middle and pointed behind.

The lengths of the legs are 4, 1, 3, 2, the fourth pair very long.
The first and second pairs are a little thickened.

Tlie ce])halothorax of my specimen is so much rubbed that the
markings are nearly destroyed ; it shows only long black hairs
over the eyes, and irregular white markings behind the eyes and
at the sides. The abdomen is black, with a distinct white cross
in the middle. Fig. 8. The legs have dark and light rings, which
were probably covered with white and black hairs. The tibia of the
palpi is light, and the other joints dark, with long hairs.

The tibia of the male palpus is wider than long. The tibial
hook is nearly as long as the tarsus, and curved to fit along its edge.
The tarsus is strongly curved downward. The palpal organ is oval,
and the tube begins near the outer end, curves around its base and
again outward through a groove in the edge of the tarsus to a notch
near the end of the tibial hook. Figs, 8^, 8c, 8(7.

Dublin, N, H,, July 16.

Phlegra leopardus, Attus leopardus Hentz.

Very distinctly marked with two white lines on the cephalothorax,
as far up as the dorsal eyes, and three white lines on the abdomen.
The female is 8'""^ long, the cephalothorax 3,5'""\ The cepholothorax
is two-thirds as wide as long and a little widest behind the middle.
The lateral front eyes are high enough for their middle to be oppo-
site the top of the middle eyes. The dorsal eyes are unusually far
forward ; they are as far apart as the front lateral eyes, and two-
thirds as far from the front of the head. PI. XXI, tig. 1. The
cephalothorax is rounded upward from the front to the dorsal eyes,
and from there backward is flat more than half-way to the hinder
end. The abdomen is widest in the middle and a little pointed
behind. The legs are short, and their relative length 4, 3, 1, 2. The
first and second pairs are thicker than the other. The cephalothoi-ax
is dark brown, darkest between the eyes. A white stripe extends

J. II. Ern.erton — Nero Migland Attidm. 24S

from the front of the head, over the eyes each side the whole length
of the cephalothorax. A middle white stripe begins between the
middle eyes, but fades out between the dorsal eyes. The legs are
light brown, with two darker rings on each joint. The abdomen is
brown, with a middle and two lateral white stripes. The abdomen
is light on the under side and the sternum, legs and mouth parts
dark brown. The epigynum has two large round openings near the
hinder edge, and a small, square-cornered notch in the edge. Fig. \h.

The male is darker than the female, but marked in the same way
on the cephalothorax and al)domen. The white bands on the cephalo-
thorax are mixed with red between the eyes. The legs are longer
than those of the female, and not marked with rings.

The male palpus has the tibia short and wide on the upper side,
Avith a deep notch on the outer side, and a short hook. Figs. \c, \e.
The bulb of the palpal organ extends backward on the outer side so
as to cover the tibia. Fig. \d.

Female from Mt. Tom, Massachusetts. Male from Blue Hill,
Milton, Mass. Another female was seen in Medford, Mass.

Hasarius Hoyi, Peckham.

Female 6 or 7™'" long. The cephalothorax is shorter and the
abdomen larger than in the nearest species. PI. XXI, fig. 2, 2rt.
The cephalothorax of the female is three-fourths as wide as long,
and a little enlarged in the middle. The posterior eyes are two-
thirds as far from the front row as from each other. Legs 1, 4, 2, 3,
all nearly of the same length. First and second pairs a little thick-
ened.

The markings vary, but in alcohol there is always a light marking
across the back of the cephalothorax, a little behind the dorsal eyes
and turning forward on each side as far as the front eyes. In front
and behind this marking the cephalothorax is dark brown. On the
abdomen there are light and dark oblique markings forming,
especially in young individuals, a regular light herring-bone marking
in the middle.

In life, the light markings are partly white and partly orange-
brown. A brightly marked young male has the cephalothorax white
in front, both above and below the eyes. Fig. 2. A white band on
each side turning upward and inward behind the dorsal eyes, but not
united in the middle. Hinder part of cephalothorax below and between
the white bands black. There are two black bands behind the dorsal
eyes, extending obliquely through the dorsal groove to the white

Trans. Conn. Acao., Vol. VTII. 33 Oct., 1891.

244 J. n. Mmerton — New Mngland Attidm.

bands at the sides. The rest of the top of the cephalotliorax is cov -
ered with orange scales.

Abdomen with a white band around the front and sides. Middle
of the back black, with a few orange scales around the edges. Sides
of the black patch irregularly scalloped. In the middle are oblique
white markings, edged with orange-brown.

The legs are white at the ends and dark on the patella and tibia,
and outer end of the femur. Ends of all the joints darker than the
middle.

The epigynum has two large anterior openings near together, and
behind and each side of them two other large openings near the edge.
Fig. 2e.

The adult male has the colors much like the young male, described
above, with the legs black on the patella and tibia, and part of the
femur, and the rest white, with black at the ends of the tarsus and
metatarsus. The female is various shades of brown, mixed with
white and yellow scales and black hairs. Fig. 2b, 2c.

The male palpi are shoi't, black at the base and white on the top
of the tarsus. The tibial hook is long and blunt, extending along
the side of the tarsus half its length. Fig. 2/, 2g. The palpal organ
has the inner posterior corner swelled and extended inward to a
blunt point. Fig. 2/'. The tube curves around from the base to
the tip of the tarsus.

A common species in eastern Massachusetts. Found also fi'om
the White Mountains to southern Connecticut.

Habrocestum splendens, Peckham. $ Ergane spkndens Keys.

? Pellenes nigriceps Keys.

I have only seen the males of this species. It has been fully de-
scribed by Peckham in his N. A. Attidse in the Transactions of the
Wisconsin Academy, vol. vii, and figured and its mating habits
described in vol. i, of Occasional Papers of the Nat. Hist. Society of
Wisconsin, Milwaukee, 1889.

My males are 5™"^ long, with the cephalotliorax nearly 3™'". The
cephalotliorax is widest and highest behind the second legs. The
front part projects forward beyond the mandibles and the front eyes
look a little downward. PI. XX, figs. 5, 5b. The abdomen is shorter
than the cephalotliorax, widest in the middle, square in front and
pointed behind. The legs are long and stout, the third pair longest.
In alcohol the brilliant colors of the male fade, and the colors and
markings resemble more those of the female. The cephalotliorax is

J. H. Emerton. — Neio England Attidm. 245

dark brown, with a transverso liglit marking- behind the eye.s. The
whole cephalothorax is thickly covered with light scales, and the
front half with black liairs between them. The legs and palpi are
light at tlie base and darker l)rown toward the tips, covered with
scales an<l hairs, either black or various shades of gray. The abdo-
men is marked with three or four ))airs of dark spots, united together
more or less in different spiders, the front pair usually forming a
single transverse mark, with a light mark in front of it. The light
portions of the abdomen are yellowish in the middle, and bright
copper-red at the sides.

The male palpi have the femur long, the patella about as long as
wide, and the tibia half as long as wide. The tibial hook is large
and flat, tig. 5d, and lies against the tarsus, nearly half its length.
The tai'sus is short and Avide, and the bulb of the palpal organ flat
and circular.- The tube starts at the base and curves around the
inner side, ending in a short groove, pointing outward on the end of
the tarsus. Fig. 5 c.

Beverly, Mass. Clarksville, near Albany, N. Y. Young in Avinter
in old cocoons of Argiope, on marshes between Boston and Brook-
line, Mass.

Habrocestum peregrinum, Peckham.

These specimens have been identified for me by Mr. Peckham.

The female is 6™"" long, the male a little smaller ; both sexes smaller
than IT. splendens. The area between the eyes slopes forward and is
covered with short scales mixed with longer hairs, light brown in front
and darker behind, where it meets a white marking pointed forward in
the middle and curved backward and outward behind the eyes. PI.
XX, fig. 6. On each side of the cephalothorax is a white stripe,
extending from the front lateral eyes backward under the eyes, and
then curved upward and again downward to the end of the thorax.
The abdomen has three white stripes, with black between, narrower
and sharper in the male. The under side of the body and legs are
light brown, with white and black hairs.

The legs of the third pair are very long in both sexes, and in the
male there is a peculiar shape to the patella, fig. 66, which is
flattened and widened at the distal end, where there is a stout spine
extending over the tibia. On the front of this flattened patella is a
black spot. Mr. Peckam gives an account of the use of this orna-
mental patella in the pairing of an allied species in " Occasional Papers
of the Nat. Hist. Soc. of Wisconsin, vol. i, No. 3, 1890." Peck-

246 J. H. Emerton — JSfeio England Attidce.

ham's description says, two short spines on tihia of first pair, but my
male has three pairs of spines on tibia and two pairs on metatarsus.

The male palpus differs little from that of splendens. The tibial
hook is a little sharper, and the angle of the tarsus just over it, a
little more prominent.

The epigynum has a simple round opening directed forward, from
which a tube extends backward. Fig. 6(/.

I have only three specimens — an adult male and female, and one
imnuiture male from Hyde Park, Mass. Mr. Peckham has it from
New York and Connecticut.

Saitis pulex, Peckham.

Attus jmJex llewtz. <9aiWs Xno/«to Keyserling. Cyrba pnkx Keyserliug.

A common spider 4 or 5"^'" long, the female gray or brown of dif-
ferent shades, and resembling gray stone or dried leaves, on which
it lives. The cephalothorax and abdomen are of the same length,
the abdomen of the female wider than the cephalothorax, widest
across the middle and pointed behind. PI. XX, fig. 7«. The cepha-
lothorax is half longer than wide, widest behind the middle. The
eye-space is half wider than long, narrower behind than in front.
The third and fourth pairs of legs are of the same length, and longer
than the first and second. The cephalothorax has a light stripe in
the middle, between the eyes, that narrows backward to a point at
the hinder end. The abdomen has two nearly parallel light lines in
the middle of the front half and behind them a transverse marking
pointed at the sides, behind and around which are small, irregular
light marks. The legs ai'e covered with alternate dark and light
spots.

The epigynum has two large openings near together, and near its
hinder edge. Fig. Ig.

In the male the abdomen is smaller and narrower, the head higher
and the colors brighter. Fig. 7. The cephalothorax, between the
eyes and a little behind them, is black. The front and sides of the
head below the eyes, and the hinder half of the cephalothorax are
yellow, or orange. The abdomen is black with markings like the
female. The legs have the tarsi yellow and the other joints indis-
tinctly marked with longitudinal yellow lines. The palpi are yellow,
except the ends of the tarsi which are black: On the under side the
legs and abdomen are black. The coxae are yellow, with a black line
in the middle and the sternum, maxilla? and mandibles are yellow ;
the sternum sometimes with a black middle line. The male palpi

J. H. Einerton — New England Attklm. 247

have the tibia very short, with a flat, thin hook. Fig. 7e, Id. The
tube of the pal})al organ is sliort and curved in a circle on the end
of the bulb so that the tip points inward. Fig. Vr.
Massachusetts and Connecticut.

AttUS palustris, Peckliam.

Female 6"'"' long, male 5""". The cephalothorax is three-fourths
as wide as long. The abdomen is short, a little wider than the
cephalothorax and pointed behind. PI. XX, tig. ;5. The cei)halo-
thorax is light brown in the female and dark in the male, with a
narrow, white stripe in the middle, widened between the dorsal eyes,
and a white stripe each side, as high as the dorsal ej^es. The al^do-
men has a wide, white transverse marking, just l^ehind the middle,
and several angular marks behind it. On the front half are two
white spots. In the male the large middle marking is usually divided
into two white spots.

The relative length of the legs is 4, 1, 2, 3 in the female, and 1,
4,' 2, 3 in the male. The dorsal eyes are very far forward, little
more than half as far from the front eyes as they are from each
other.

The epigynum has a large oval opening divided in front into two.
The hinder edge over the transverse fold has a small projection in
the middle. Fig. 3c.

The hook of the tibia of the male palpus is nearly straight and
has a short piece at the tip very narrow. Fig. 3^. The palpal
organ is oval, and the tube extends from the base around the inner
side, the end pointing outward. Fig. 3«,

Portland, Me. ; Eastern Mass. ; New Haven, Conn.

Attus sylvestris, new sp.

Male 4"^™ long. Cephalothorax abnost as wide as long. Abdomen
smaller than cephalothorax ; legs shorter and stouter than in A. pal-
ustris, and the male palpi nearly as large as in the male palustris,
which is half larger. The colors resemble those of Saitis pulex.
The legs are distinctly ringed with dark and light brown. The
cephalothorax is dark brown, covered with lighter hairs, which are
nearly rubbed off in the specimens. The male palpi have the tarsus
dark brown, and the rest of the palpus lighter above but dark
beneath. The tibia and patella are covered with white hairs that are
very long on the sides of the tibia. The palpal organ resembles
closely that of A. palustris, and is nearly as large. The markings

248 J. H. Euierton — Nevi England Attidm.

of the alxlomon are dark and light l»ro\vii, and resemble those of
Saitis piilex and the female A. x>(diistris. There is a large light
mark across the middle of the abdomen, and behind it several light
angular marks. In colors and general appearance this resembles
Saitis pulex, and lives in the same places under stones and leaves.
Beverly and Middleton, Massachusetts.

Synemosyna formica, Hentz

This is the most common ant-like spider, and the most ant-like
among them. It is 0'"™ long, and the cephalothorax is 2'"'" long and
1""" wide. The cephalothorax is narrowed behind and the abdomen
in front and each has a deep depression near the middle. PI. XXI,
fig. 5. The pedicel of the abdomen is flat and widened behind, so
that it is nearly as wude as the ends of the thorax and abdomen which
it connects. The front middle eyes are large, and cover two-thirds
of the front of the head. The rest of the eyes are very small. The
legs are slender, their relative length 4, 3, 1, 2. The general color
is black, with yellowish white markings. There is a triangular white
spot in front of the dorsal groove, and one on each side widening
downward, under the posterior eyes. On the abdomen there is a
white stripe extending downward from the dorsal groove on each
side, and uniting in a large white patch on the front of the under
side of the abdomen. The second legs ai'e entirely white, the first
have a black stripe along the inner side, the third have the femur
black and a black spot at the base of the tibia, and the fourth have
the femur, the end of the patella and nearly all the tibia black,
and black spots on the front of the coxre and trochanter, and black
lines on the metatarsus. The palpi are white, sometimes with dark
spots on the sides of the joints.

The front end of the abdomen has a hard piece on the under side
from the pedicel to the epigynum, which extends upward on each
side, so that the edges are visible from above. The epigynum has a
wide oval opening, in the front part of which ai'e two small openings
to the tubes.

The males differ but little from the females in color and general
appearance. The head is higher and narrower, and the mandibles a
little longer, turned obliquely forward and curved apart in the
middle. Fig. 5c. The male palpi are large. The tibia is short
and has a very large hook. Fig. 5/". The palpal organ is large and
only half covered by the tarsus. The tube passes completely around

J. S! Emerton — JSFeio Engla7id Attidce. 249

the bulb, then passes through the usual groove to the outside of the
tarsus, where it is coiled once around the flattened end. Fig. be.

This species lives on plants and matures early in the summer. At
first sight it resembles an ant, but its gait is slower and steadier. I
have never seen it jump but it runs quickly when frightened. It lives
in summer on bushes, and matures in June. In the latter part of
summer only young are to be found, and in the winter it hides under
leaves on the ground.

Common at New Haven, Conn., and around Boston, Mass.

SaltiCUS ephippiatUS, Peckham.
Synemosyna ephippiata Hentz.

This spider is 7'""' long, the cephalothorax 3™'" long, and half as
wide. In color and general appearance it resembles orange-brown
ants. The cephalothorax is high in front and low behind the dorsal
groove, which is in a slight depression. PI. XXI, fig. 4a. The sides
of the cephalothorax are nearly straight for two-thirds its length, and
it is only slightly narrowed behind. The abdomen is oval, a little
narrower in front than behind. The legs are long and slender, their
length 4, 1, 3, 2. Fig. 4.

The colors are various shades of orange-brown, some individuals
being very dark, and others pale. There is an indistinct light mark
across the middle of the cephalothorax and across the abdomen, a
little in front of the middle, and sloping backward down the sides
nearly to the spinnerets.

The femoi-a of all the legs are dark, except a light stripe on the
front of those of the first pair. The patella and tibiae are all light
on the upper side and darker beneath. The metatarsi of the hind
legs are dark, the others partly light in the middle, or on the iipper
side. The tarsi of the front legs are dark, the others light. The
coxae of the third legs are dark, the others light. The palpi of the
female have the tibia and tarsus very much thickened and covered
with stiff hairs on the under side. The palpi are colored as dark as
the head. The epigynum has two small openings near together, and
turned toward each other. Fig. 4e.

Eastern Massachusetts and New Haven, Conn., under leaves, and
on plants in summer.

250 ./. II. Emerton — Wew England Attidce.

Synageles picata, Peckham.

Synemosyna picata [lentz.

I have one young male from New Haven, Conn., that appears to
be of this species. PI. XXI, fig-. 8. It is as large as adults sent me
from Wisconsin by Mr. Peckham, but not as distinctly marked. The
ceplialothorax has the two white spots in the middle, but is not
depressed at this part as in the adult. Fig. 3«. The coloring is
more uniform than in the Wisconsin specimens. The white marks
on the abdomen show indistinctly as do the markings of the legs.
The specimen is 3.5""" long.

The adults of both sexes have a slight elevation around the pos-
terior eyes, and a distinct depression across the cephalothorax. Just
behind the eyes. Fig. 35. The front legs of the female are twice
as thick as the other legs, fig. 3c, and the front legs of the male
are still thicker, especially in the femur and tibia. Fig. 3f?. The
patulla and tibia are flattened in front, more in the male than in the
female. The front of these legs, and the front of the cephalothorax
of the male, are purple and iridescent in a bright light. In alcohol
they become dark brown. The abdomen has two white stripes
extending down the sides in the shallow depression across the front
third. The abdomen in front of the depression is rounded, and
sometimes swells in alcohol to an unnatural width. The hinder half
of the cephalothorax and front of the abdomen are lighter colored
than the parts before and behind.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate XVI.

Fig. 1. Phidqypus rufus, female x 4 ; la, male x 4 ; lb, female, nearly full grown;

Ic, young; 1(Z, young soon after leaving the cocoon; le, epigynum; 1/, epigynum

of another female; Ig, immature epigynum; Ih, male palpus; li, male palpus;

Ij, brown scales from young female; Ik, yellow scale from young female.
Fig. 2. Phidippus brunneus, epigynum.
Fig. 3. Phidippus mystaceus, female x 4; 3a, 3&, male palpus; 3c, epigynum; 'id,

posterior notch of epigynum of another female.
Fig. 4. Phidippus ruber Keys; male x 4; 4a, epigynum; 4&, male palpus; 4c, male

palpus.
Fig 5. Phidippus trijmnclatus, female x 4 ; 5a, end of mandibles of male ; 5b, male

palpus; 5c, patella and tibia of male palpus; 5d, white scales from middle of

abdomen.

J. H. Emerton — Wew England Atti elm. 251

Plate XVII.

Fig. 1. Dendryphantes militaris, itixaalcxA] la, male x4; IZ^, mandible of male, un-
der side; Ic, mandible of male, upper side; lot, male palpus.

Fig. 2. Bendryphanfes cestivalis, female of light variety x 4 ; 2a, cephalotliorax of
same female after wetting with alcohol ; 2b, female of small dark variety ;
2c, small male x 8 ; 2d, 2e, male palpus ; 2/, epigynum.

Fig. 3. Dendryphantes montanus, cephalothorax of female; 3a, cephalothorax of
male; 3&, mandible of male; 3c, epigynum with two forms of posterior notch;
'id, 3e, male palpi.

Fig. 4. ZygobaUus bettini, female x 6 ; 4a, mandibles of male under side; 4.b, male
palpus.

Fig. 5. ZygobaUus terrestris, female x 8 ; 5a, mandible of male; 5b, epigynuQi ; 5c,
male palpus ; od, outer side of tibia of male palpus.

Plate XVIII.

Fig. 1. Icius palmarum, female x 4; la, side of cephalothorax of female; 16, front
of head of a male with short mandibles ; Ic, cephalothorax of male with long
mandibles; \d, under side of mandibles of male; \e, epigynum; 1/, another
pattern of dorsal markings of female; \g, malex4; \li, male palpus; \i, male
palpus, showing tibial hook.

Fig. 2. Icius mitratus, male x 4.

Fig. 3. Icius elegans, female x 4 ; 3a, side of cephalothorax ; 3&, front of head of
female ; 3c, under side of cephalothorax ; 'id, male x 4 ; 3e, front of head of
male; if, 3g, male palpus, 3//, epigynum.

Fig. 4. Icius elegans, dark variety of male x 4 ; 4a, front of head ; 4&, 4c, male palpus.

Pig. 5. Jcius hartii, female x 4 ; 5a, male from a Wisconsin specimen from Mr.
Peckham ; 5&, male palpus ; 5c, tibial hook ; 5d, epigynum.

Fig. 6. Icius for micari us, female x 4 ; Ga, side of cephalothorax; Qb, epigynum.

Plate XIX.

Fig. 1. Mcevia vittata, hack of female x 4 ; la, dark variety of male x 4 ; 16, light
variety of male x 4; Ic, male palpus ; Id, epigynum.

Fig. 2. Salticus scenicus, female X i ; 2a, male; 2b, side of cephalothorax of female;
2c, mandibles of male; 2c?, male palpus; 2e, epigynum; 2/; tibial hook from
above ; 2g, tibial hook from side.

Fig. 3. Marptusa familiaris, back of female x 4; 3a, front of head and mandibles;
36, male palpus ; 3c, side of male palpus without tarsus ; M, side of cephalo-
thorax of female ; 3e, 3/, epigynum of two individuals.

Fig. 4. Menemeru^ binvs, female x 4; 4a, epigynum.

Fig. 5. Menemerv^ lineatus, female x 4; 5a, end of mandijjle ; 56, epigynum.

Plate XX.

Fig. 1. Neon 7iellii, hack of female; la, side of female; 16, ei:)igyuum ; Ic, male
palpus.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VTll. 34 Oct., 1891.

252 J. H. Emerton — N'etc England Attidm.

Fig. 2. Ewophrys monadnock, side of male; 2a, under side of ceplialothorax of

male ; 2b, front of head ; 2c, top of ceplialothorax of male ; 2d, 2e, male palpus ;

2/, female ; 2g, epigynum.
Fig. 3. Aiius palustris, iema.\e x 4, legs in a natural position; 3a, male palpus ; 3Z>,

tibial hook from outside ; 3c, epigynum.
Fig. 4. Attus sylvestris, male x 4.
Fig. 5. Habrocesium splendens, male X 6 ; 5a, front of head; 56, side of cephalotho-

rax; 5c, male palpus; 5d, tibial hook.
Fig. 6. Habrocestrum peregriaum, i&va&lQxi:; 6a, epigynum ; 6&, patella and tibia of

third leg of male, front side.
Fig. 7. Saitis pulex, vaale X ^ ; 7 a, female x4; 76. cephalothorax of male, side view ;

7c, male palpus ; Id, 1e, tibial hook ; 7/, face of male ; 1g. epigynum.
Fig. 8. Euophrys cruciata, male x 4 ; 8a, front of head ; 86, male palpus from below :

8c, male palpus from side with tibial hook ; 8d, end of the tarsus of male

palpus ; 8e, side of cephalothorax.

PL.4TE XXI.

Fig. 1. Phlegra leopm-dus, lema\e x i ; la, under side of cephalothorax; 16, epigy-
num ; Ic, male 'palpus from above; If/, male palpus, under side; le, tibial hook,
outer side.

Fig. 2. Ilasariits hoyi, young female x 4; 2a, same individual after keeping in alco-
hol ; 26, 2c, abdominal markings of adult females ; 2c?, dorsal markings of young
female ; 2e, epigynum ; 2/, 2g, male palpus.

Fig. 3. Synageks picaia, young female x 6; 3a, side of young female; 36, side of
cephalothorax of adult female from Wisconsin; 3c, first and second legs of
female x 12 ; 3d, first and second legs of male x 12, from Wisconsin specimens.

Fig. 4 Salticus ephippiatus, female x 6 ; 4a, side of cephalothorax of female ; 46,
palpus of female ; 4c, epigynum.

Fig. 5. Synemosyna formica, female x 6; 5a, side of female; 56, uuder side of mouth
parts of male ; 5c, front of head of male ; M, under side of front of abdomen
of male ; ae, palpus of male ; 5/, tibial hook ; 5g, epigynum.

XV. — A Provisional List of the Hepatic.e of the Hawaiian
Islands. By A. W. Evans.

During the years 18V5 and 1876, Mr. D. D. Baldwin made a
systematic collection of the Hepaticae found growing in the Ha-
waiian Islands, particularly in the island of Maui. These were sent
to Prof. Eaton for determination, and he, in turn, sent many of them
to Mr. Austin, w^ho published descriptions of several new species
and returned to Prof. Eaton a list of his determinations, including
many species previously described. The following list is based
largely upon those determinations, but contains in addition several
of Mr. Baldwin's species which Mr, Austin did not examine. All
other species accredited to the Islands in tlie Synopsis Hepaticarum
and in other publications are also mentioned in the list.

Frullania arietina Tayl. Syn. Hep. p. 413. Oahu (Mann and Brigham).

F. squarrosa Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 416. Oalm (Mann and Brigham); Hawaiian
Islands (Hillebrand).

F. Sandvicensis Angstr. OiVer. af. Kongl. Vet.-Akad Forhandl. 1872, No. 4,
p. 28. Hawaiian Islands (Andersson).

F, hypoleuca Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 443. Oahu (Meyen) ; West Maui (Baldwin, 81 !).

F. Kunzei Lehm. et Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 449. Oahu (Mann and Brigliam) ;
West Maui (Baldwin, 191 !).

F. apiculata Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 452. Oahu (Mann and Brigham); West Maui
^Baldwin, 57! 165!).

F. explicata Mont. Syn. Hep. p. 452. Hawaiian Islands (Gaudichaud).

Jubula piligera {Frullania Huichmsiai Nees, var. 3, Syn. Hep. p. 426; F. pili-
gera Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, vi, p. 301). Hawaiian Islands (Baldwin, 147 !).

Lejeunea alcina Angstr. Ofver. af. Kongl. Vet.-Akad. Forhandl., 1872, No. 4, p.
23. Hawaiian Islands (Andersson).

Xj. Sandvicensis [Phragmicoma Sandvicensis Gottsche, Annal. desSc.Nat. 4me
serie, T. viii, p. 344; F. subsquarrossa Aust. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., Dec.
1869). Hawaiian Islands (Gaudichaud, Andersson, Hillebrand); West Maui
(Baldwin, 113!).

Li. elongata Aust. (Phragmicoma elongata Aust. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil , Dec.
1869). Hawiian Islands (Hillebrand, etc.); Kauai (Baldwin, 273!).

L. Mannii Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, v, p. 15. Oahu (Mann and Brigham!),

L. gibbosa Angstr. 1. c. p. 23. Hawaiian Islands (Andersson).

254 A. W. Evans — A Provisional List of the Hepaticm

L. AnderSSOnii Angstr. l. c. p. 24. Hawaiian Islands (Andersson).

Li. ungulata Angstr. 1. c. p. 25. Hawaiian Islands (Andersson).

L. Owaihiensis Gottsche, Syn. Hep. p. 351. Hawaii (Herb. Hook.)

L. OCUlata Gottsche, Syn. Hep. p. 357. Hawaii (Herb. Hook.).

L. Stenoschiza Angstr. 1. c p. 26. Hawaiian Islands (Andersson).

L. Pacifica Mont. Syn. Hep. p. 378. Hawaiian Islands (Gaudichaud, Andersson),

L. SUbligulata {L. cancellata Lindenb. in Herb, non Nees et Mont.; L. Sandvi-
censis Steph. Hedwigia, xx'\x, p. 88). Hawaiian Islands (Gaudichaud).

Li. albicans Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 386 {L. cucuUata Lindenb. in Herb, non Nees;
vid. Steph. 1. c. p. 89). Oahu (Meyen).

L. CUCUllata Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 390. Hawaiian Islands (Andersson, Hille-
brand).

Li. Calyptrifolia Dum.? (L. cahjptrata Angstr. 1. c. p. 27). Hawaiian Islands
(Andersson).

Li. Hillebrandii Aust. Bot. Gazette, i, p. 35. Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand).

L. CeratOCarpa Angstr. l. c. p. 27 (?!,. ohcordata Aust. Bot. Gazette, i, p. 36).
Hawaiian Islands (Anders.son); West Mauii (Baldwin).

Pladula reflexa Nees et Mont. Syn. Hep. p. 253. Hawaiian Islands (Gaudi-
chaud).

R. Xalapensis Mont. Syu. Hep. p. 255. Hawaiian Islands (Baldwin, 232!).

R. Javanica Gottsche, Syn. Hep. p. 257. Hawaii (Herb. Hook.); East Maui
(Baldwin, 50, 179!).

R. Mannii Aust Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, v, p. 15. Oahu (Mann and Brigharal);
East Maui (Baldwin, 21!).

Porella Ha-waiiensiS u. sp. West Maui (Baldwin!).

Brownish-green, ctespitose ; stems one- to three-pinnate ; leaves
loosely imbricated, s])reading, falcate-ovate, the margins mostly
entire or toothed towards the apex, which is coarsely and irregularly
spinulose-dentate, the ventral margin distinctly folded at about the
middle ; lobule narrow, lingulate-ovate, with entire or undulate
margins ; amphigastria about the width of the stem, ovate, mostly
entire, the apex variously one- to four-toothed ; fruit not seen.

Leaves about l-s™"^ ^ong, 0"5™"' wide ; cells in middle of leaf
0-025""" in diameter.

Allied to Madotheca Ugulifera Tayl. (Syn. Hep. p. 263, n. 1),
from which it diifers in the shape of the leaves, in their mode of
insertion, and, especially, in the peciiliar characters of the amphi-
gastria.

P. Isevigata Lindb. {Madotheca lavigata Dum. Syn. Hep. p. 276). East Maui
(Baldwin, 222!),

of the Hawaiian Islands. 255

PleurOZia gigantea Lindb. {PhysioUum sphagmides Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 235).
Hawaii (Herb. Hook.).
Var. major (Jack), Hedwigia, xxv, p. 65. Hawaii (Herb. Carrington).

P. COChleariformiS Dum. {Physiotium cochlear if or me Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 235).

Hawaii (Herb. Hook.).
P. COnchsefolia Aust. {Physiotium conchcBfolium Syn. Hep. p. 235) Hawaiian

Islands (Beechey, etc.); West Maui (Baldwin, 18 !).

P. SUbinflata Aust. {Physiotium subinflatma Aust. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.,
Dec. 1869). Hawaii (Mann and Brigham); West Maui (Baldwin, 47 !).

TrichOCOlea gracillima Aust. Bot. Gazette, iii, p. 6, West Maui (Baldwin,
134!).

Herberta sanguinea Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, vi, p. 302 {Sendinera juni-
perina, var. sanguinea Mont. Syn. Hep. p. 239). East and West Maui (Baldwin,
15! 92! 98!).

Mastigophora gracilis Mont. {Sendtnera gracilis, Syn. Hep. p. 243; S^. tris-
ticha Aust. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil, Dec. 1869). Oahu (Mann andBrighana!
Baldwin, 274!).

Bazzania? integrifolia {MasHgobrymn ? integrifalium Aust. Bot. Gazette, i,
p. 32). Hawaiian Ishmds (Baldwin).

B. patens {M. patens Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 221; M. parvislipulum Aust. Bull.
Torr. Bot. Club, v, p. 16). Oahu (Mann and Brigham); West Maui (Baldwin, 68 !).

B. Brighami {M. Brighami Aust. 1. c). Oahu (Mann and Brigham); Hawaiian
Islands (Baldwin !).

B. COrdistipula (if. cordistipulum Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 224). Hawaiian
Islands (Gaudichaud, etc.): Oahu (Mann and Brigham); Molokai (Baldwin, 222 !)

B. falcata {M.falcatum Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 231). West Maui (Baldwin, 12!).

B. Baldwinii Aust. Ms. West Maui (Baldwin, 199!).

Stems simple or slitylitlv branched, flagelliferous, clustered ; leaves
approximate or slightly imbricated, usually somewhat deflexed, tri-
angular-ovate, entire, the apex rounded or variously 1-4-toothed, the
dorsal margin arching over the stem, the ventral oblique or some-
what cordate at its insertion ; amphigastria a little wider than the
stem, orbicular-quadrate, entire or crenulate above.

Stems 3-4^^^"' long ; leaves 0-7-0-8""" long by 0-4-0-6™'" wide ; leaf-
cells averaging about 0-024'""' in diameter.

B. deflexa Underw. (J/, deflexum Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 281). East Maui (Baldwin,
231!).

B. minuta (J/, mmutum Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, v, p. 17). Hawaiian Islands
(Hillebrand); East Maui (Baldwin, 65 in part!).

Lepidozia Sandvicensis Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 201 (L. Jilipendula Tayl.
Syn. Hep. p. 713). Hawaiian Islands (Tolmie, etc.); West Maui (Baldwin, 69!).

256 A. W. Evans — A Proinsional List of the Hepaticm

L. reptans Nees. West Maui (Baldwin, 150!).

Cephalozia mtlltiflora Spruce. Oahu (Mann and Brigham).

C Sandvicensis {Jungermannia Sandvicensis Mont. Syn. Hep. p. 142). Ha-
waiian Islands (Gaudichaud).

OdontOSChisma SUbjulacea Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, vi, p. 303 {J. cau-
difera Tayl. Mss., in part). West Maui (Baldwin, 233!).

O. Sandvicensis (SphagnaiceUs Sandvicensis Angstr. Ofver. af Kongl. Yet.-
Akad. Forhandl., 1872, No. 4, p. 22). Hawaiian Islands (Andersson).

Kantia bifurca {Calypogeia hifurca Aust. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., Dec.
1869). Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand).

K. bidentula (C. Udentula Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 199). West Maui (Baldwin, 101 !).

K. Baldwinii (C. Baldwinii Aust. Bot. Gazette, i, p. 32). West Maui (Baldwin,

141 !).
SaCCOgyna? Bolanderi (Gymnanthe? Bolanderi Aust, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.

Phil., Dec. 1869). Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand).
Scapania Undulata Dum. var. West Maui (Baldwin, 94 in parti).
S, Oakesii Aust.? West Maul, young specimens (Baldwin, 94 in part!).
S. nemorosa Dum. East and West Maui, a small form (Baldwin, 149, 214!).
S. planifolia Dum. West Maui (Baldwin, 831).
Diplophyllum albicans Dum. (Jungermannia albicans Linn. Syn. Hep. p. 75).

East Maui (Baldwin, 245!).

Lophocolea COnnata, var. [i? Syn. Hep. p. 153. West Maui (Baldwin, 66!).
The specimens are all sterile and may possibly be L. Martiana Nees.

L. Breutelii Gottsche, Syn. Hep. p. 154, West Maui, mixed with the preceding

species!
L. Columbica Gottsche, Syn. Hep. p. 155. West Maui (Baldwin, 91, in part).
L. Orbigniana Mont, et Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 156. West Maui (Baldwin, 761).

Ij. Gaudichaudii Mont. Syn. Hep. p. 156. Hawaiian Islands (Gaudichaud);

West Maui (Baldwin, 111 !).
Li. bidentata Dum. Syn. Hep. p. 159. West Maui (Baldwin, 140!).
L. Beecheyana Tayl. Syn. Hep* p. 690. Oahu (Beechey in Herb. Hook.).
L. Spinosa Gottsche, Syn. Hep. p. 170. Hawaii (Herb. Hook.).

PlagiOChila simplex Lindeub. Syu. Hep. p. 30. East and West Maui (Bald-
win, 117! 184! 196! 205! 237!).

P. gracillima Aust. Ms. Molokai (Baldwin, 211!).

Much branched, glossy, and bearing numerous flagellae ; leaves
of stem and main branches distant, oblong-ovate, the dorsal margin
curved, usually entire, slightly decurrent at base, the ventral either
entire or bearing 1 or 2 sharp teeth, the apex strongly emarginate-

of the Hawaiian Islands. 25*7

bidentate with sub-equal divergent teeth ; leaves of flagell* minute,
mostly bidentate.

Leaves 0.8""'" long, 0-45""" wide ; cells of leaves averaging O-OIS™""
in diameter.

P. frondescens Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 31. East Maui (Baldwin, 5, 85!).

P. Gaudichaudii Mont, et Gottsclie, Annal. des Sc. Nat. 4me serie, T. vi, p. 193
{P. tenuis Mont, non Lindenb.). Hawaiian Islands (Gaudichaud, Andersson).

P. Baldwinii Aust. Ms. {P.flava Ausl. Ms). West Maui (Baldwin, 115!).

Loosely cjespitose, brownish-yellow, robust ; stems simple or spar-
ingly branched ; leaves sub-imbricated, ovate, slightly curved, the
margins entire or a little undulate, the dorsal decurrent ; the apex
rounded, usually bearing from one to three sharp teeth.

Stem 5-8'='" long ; leaves 2-2-5'"° long, !"■" wide ; cells 0-02'7™'" in
diameter.

P. fissidentoides Tayl. Syu. Hep. p. 636. Hawaiian Islands (Menzies); West
Maui (Baldwin, 95).

P. adiantoides Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 38. Oahu (Mann and Brigham).

P. deflexa Mont et Gottsche, Annal. des. Sc. Nat. 4me serie, T. vi, p. 192 (P.
patuJa Mont, non Nees et Mont. ; P. patens Aust. Ms.). Hawaiian Islands (Gaudi-
chaud); West Maui (Baldwin, 60!).

P. Owaihiensis Nees et Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 46. Hawaii (Herb. Hook.);^
Oahu, West Maui, Kauai (Baldwin, 160! 201 ! 206!).

P. Eatoni Aust. Ms. West Maui (Baldwin, 1091).

Stems mostly simple ; leaves opposite, loosely imbricated, spread-
ing, slightly unsymmetrical (the leaves on one side being more
obliquely inserted than on the other), orbicular-ovate, entire, the
dorsal margins decurrent, the ventral connate at insertion.

Stems 10-12''" long ; leaves l-,5-2'"'" long, 1-1 •S™'" wide, P.
Eatoni is apparently a near ally of P. Brauniana Nees (Syn. Hep.
p. 51, n. 70) but the leaves are distinctly imbricated and somewhat
longer than they are broad,

P.lOppOSitifolia Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, v, p. 16. Hawaiian Islands (Hil-
lebrand); West Maui (Baldwin, 93! 97!).

P. biserialis Lehm. et Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 53. East Maui (Baldwin, 210!).

P. deltoidea Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 55. West Maui (Baldwin, 1981).

P. aCUtiuSCUla Aust. Ms. West Maui (Baldwin, 116!).

Pale brownish-green, cjespitose, glossy ; stems simple ; leaves
imbricated, spreading, ovate, the margins entire exce])t at the apex.

258 A. W. Evans — A Provisional List of the Hepaticce

which is sharply incised-dentate, the apical tooth being larger than
the others and projecting beyond them.

Stems 2-5-4'^™ long ; leaves 1™™ wide, 1-5-2""" long ; leaf-cells aver-
aging 0'033""" in diameter.

Several other possibly distinct Plagiochilce occur in too small
quantity for determination.

Mylia Taylori S. F. Gray {Jungermamia Taylori Hook. Syn Hep. p. 82). Ha-
waii (Herb. Lehm.).

Jungermannia plligera Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 8I. Oahu(Meyen); West Maui
(BaldwiD, 79 !).

J. rigida Aust. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., Dec. 1869. Hawaiian Islands (Hille-
brand); West Maui (Baldwin, 64! 154!).

J. robusta Aust. 1. c. Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand); West Maui (Baldwin,

268!).

J, COriacea Aust. l. c. Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand, Baldwin!).

J. macrophylla Ingstr. Ofver. af. Kongl. Vet.-Akad. Forhandl. 1872, No. 4,
p. 22. Hawaiian Islands (Andersson).

J. SUbulata n. sp. Hawaiian Islands (Baldwin!).

Coespitose, brownish-green ; stems mostly simple, creeping, ascend-
ing at the apex, radiculose ; leaves spreading, imbricated, ovate,
entire, rounded at the apex ; araphigastria wanting ; outer involucral
leaves like the stem-leaves, the inner very small, awl-shaj^ed, slightly
denticulate ; perianth (young), oblong-obovate, contracted at the
denticulate mouth, surpassing the inner involucral leaves, scarcely,
if at all, i)licate.

Leaves 2-2-5"'"' long, 1-1-5"^'° wide; cells oval, about 0-029"^-"^ in
width, those of the inner involucral leaves rapidly increasing in size
at the apex and resembling in character the terminal cells of the
perianth,

J. lurida Dum. {J. nana Nees, Syn. Hep. p 91). Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand).

J, Esenbeckii Mont. Syn. Hep. p. 98. Hawaiian Islands (Gaudichaud, An-
dersson).

J. lucens n. sp. East Maui (Baldwin, 65, in part!).

Loosely tufted, whitish-green ; stems simple or innovating from
beneath the involucre, rootless ; leaves remote, except at the summit
of the stem where they are imbricated, loosely areolate, pellucid,
sub-transverse, entire, complicate, bilobed about one-third their
length, the lobes acute and nearly equal Avith an acute sinus ; invohi-
cral leaves about three, deeply two-lobed, the margins irregularly

of the Hmoaiian Islands. 259

sinuous-denticulate ; perianth ovate-cylindrical, somewhat plicate at
the dentate mouth.

Stems 1-5-2-5''"' long ; leaves 0-5-0-75™'" long, 0-4-0-7""" wide ;
leaf-cells averaging 0'05.5""" long by 0'035'"'" wide.

This species is allied to J. minuta Crantz ; it diifers in its larger
size, in the larger and looser areolation of its leaves, in its pale color,
and in its normally two-cleft involucral leaves. The sinus of the
leaves has an angle of a little less than 90° ; the sinus of the involu-
cral leaves is often much sharjier.

Nardia callithrix Spruce {J. callUhrix Lindenb. et Gottsdie, Syn. Hep. p. 673).
Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand).

N. Mauii (J. Mauii Aust. Bull. ToiT. Bot. Club, vi, p. 303). West Maui (Baldwin,
242!).

N. exserta n. sp. West Maui (Baldwin, 264 I).

Dioecious, ctespitose, dark or hlackish green ; stems simple, radic-
ulose, rigid, erect ; leaves subtransversely inserted, imbricated,
obliquely spreading, orbiculate, entire ; amphigastria none ; involu-
cral leaves tAvo or three, similar to the stem-leaves, slightly connate
with the perianth at its base ; perianth large, long-exsei'ted, obovoid
or camjjanulate, slightly plicate, the mouth open, lacerate.

Stems 2-3'"" long ; leaves about 1""" in diameter, the cells aver-
aging 0"025""" in diameter ; perianth about 3""" in length.

Tylimanthus integrifolius n. sp. East and West Maui (Baldwin, 95!
183!).

Dioecious, csespitose, brownish-green ; stems simple or somewhat
pinnately divided, eradiculose except near the extremity of fruit-
ing stems ; leaves contiguous or slightly imbricated, oblong or ovate,
the margins mostly entire, except near the involucre where they are
irregularly crenulate, the dorsal margin often more or less indented
near the rounded apex ; amphigastria none ; involucre ovoid, thick-
ened, with numerous radicles.

Stems about 4'"^ long ; leaves 1-1 -o""" long, 1""" wide ; cells
0-025'"'" in diam. in middle of leaf, longer towards base ; involucre
2-5-3""" long, 1""" wide.

Pallavicinia Cylindrica {Reetzia cylindrica Aust. Bull. Ton- Bot. Club, v,
p. 17). Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand); West Maui (Baldwin, 70 in part!).

P. Baldwinii [S. Baldwinii Aust. 1. c. vi, p. 303). West Maui (Baldwin, 70 in
part).

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 35 Dec, 1891.

260 A, W. Evans — A Provisional List of the Hepaticm

Symphyogyna semi-involucrata Aust. i. c. v, p. 15. Oahu (Mann and

Brigbam); Hawaiian Islands (Baldwin!).

MetZgeria dichotoma Nees. Syn. Hep. p. 504. West Maui (Baldwin, 106!).

Aneura multifida Dum. Syn. Hep. p. 496. Oahu (Mann and Brigham) ;
Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand).

A', pinnatifida Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 495. West Maui (Baldwin,110 !).

A. palmata Dum. Syn. Hep. p. 498. Oahu (Mann and Brigham); Hawaiian
Islands (Hillebrand).

A. pectinata Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, v, p. 15. Oahu (Mann and Brigham);
Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand); West Maui (Baldwin. 71 !).

A. pinguis num. Syn. Hep. p. 493. West Maui (Baldwiu, 1191).

Dendroceros Clintoni Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, V, p. 14. Hawaiian
Islands (Mann and Brigham).

AnthoCerOS VincentianUS Lehm. et Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 587. Kauai
(Baldwin, 238!).

A. vesiCUlOSnS Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, v, p. 17. Hawaiian Islands (Hille-
brand, Baldwin !).

Marchantia polymorpha Linn. Syn. Hep. p. 522. Hawaiian Islands (Hille-
brand).

M. Crenata Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, v, p. 14. Hilo (Maun and Brigham I).

M. disjuncta Sull. Mem. Amer. Acad. n. ser. iii, p. 63. Hawaiian Islands (Bald-
win, 90! 145 in part!).

The male receptacles agree with Sullivant's description and figures,
but the female are not so deeply parted as he represents.

'Several other species of Marchantia, which were considered new
and named provisionally by Austin, occur in too small quantity for
description.

Fimbriaria innovans Aust. {Marchantia Innovans Aust. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club,
V, p. 14). Hanalei, Kauai (Mann and Brigham); East Maui (Baldwin, 89!).

Dumortiera hirsilta Nees, Syn. Hep. p. 543. Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand);
Maui (Mann and Brigham, Baldwin!).

D, trichocephala Xees, Syn. Hep. p. 545. Hawaiian Islands (Douglas); Oahu
(Maun and Brigham).

D. Nepalensis Nees. Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand).

Aitonia COrdata {Flagiockasma cordaia Lehm. et Lindenb. Syn. Hep. p. 512).
Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand).

of the Hawaiian Islands. 261

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES.

Plate XXII.

Porella Hawaiiensis, n. sp. Fig. 1. Plant x ^; fig. 2, branch, vpntral view x 12 ; fig. 3,
pair of leaves, dorsal view x 12.

Bazzania Baldiuinii Aust. Ms. Figs. 4, 5. Parts of stems, dorsal and ventral views
X 12.

PlagiocMla gracillima Aust. Ms. Figs. G, 7. Parts of stems, dorsal and ventral views
X 12.

P. Baldwinii Aust. Ms. Fig. 8. Stemx^: tigs. 9, 10, parts of stems, dorsal and
ventral views x 6.

P. Eatoni Aust. Ms. Figs. 11, 12. Parts of stems, dorsal and ventral views x 6.

P. oppositi/olia Aust. Fig. 13. Plant x ^- tigs. 14, 15, parts of stems, dorsal and ven-
tral views x6; fig. 16, involucral leaf x6; fig. 17, perianth x 0.

Plate XXIII.

PlagiocMla acutiuscula Aust. Ms. Figs. 1, 2. Parts of stems, dorsal and ventral views
x6.

Jungermannia suhulata, n. sp. Fig. 3. Extremity of fruiting stem with perianth x 6 ;
fig. 4, involucral leaf x 75,

J. lucens, n. sp. Fig. 5. Fertile stem x^; fig. G, extremity of same xG; fig. 7, ex-
tremity of sterile stem x6; fig. 8, leaf expanded xG; fig. 9, involucral leaves
X 6; fig. 10, perianth x 6.

Nardia exserta, n. sp. Fig. 11. Extremity of fertile stem, showing perianth x 6.

Tylimantlms iniegrifolius, n. sp. Fig. 12. Extremity of fertile plant, showing involucre
X 6; figs. 13, 14, parts of sterile stems, dorsal and ventral views x 6.

XVI. — An Arrangement of the Genera of Hepatic^.
By a. W. Evans.

At the beginning- of the present century, the writers on Hepaticae
included nearly the whole of the present order JungermanniacejB
under the single genus Jungermannia. The only exception to this
rule was in the case of Blasia pusilla, which was usually kept as a
distinct genus ; but even this was reduced to a species of Junger-
mannia by Hooker in his " British Jungerraannieae '' finished in 1816.
The splitting-iip of this vast genus Jungermannia was begun by
Raddi (1820), who, in an account of some of the Italian Hepaticse,
arranged his species under a dozen or more distinct genera. He was
quickly followed in this work of division by S. F. Gray (182 1 ) and by
Dumortier (1822). Each of these three investigators worked inde-
pendently, and, in this way, gave rise to a mass of synonym}^ which
has since caused a great deal of confusion. The work of Gray
which remained overlooked by botanists for more than forty years,
has been especially unfortunate in this respect ; and this chiefly on
account of the generic names which he employed. In nearly every
case, these were derived from the names of persons, but, instead of
using the feminine termination, as is usual in such cases, Gray wn-ote
his names in the masculine, and published such genera as Bazzanius,
Kantius, etc. Most recent writers have, nevertheless, adopted these
names in an emended form, the termination being changed into the
feminine.

In the Synopsis Hepaticarum (1844-47), most of the genera of
Raddi and Dumortier were acknowledged ; but, in some cases, the
names adopted for these genera were the later ones of Corda (1829)
and of Nees von Esenbeck (1833-38), so that they ought no longer to
be retained. Since the publication of this volume, there has been
no very comprehensive work on descrij^tive hepaticology. The
numerous shorter works on the species of limited regions or of
special groups, which have appeared from time to time, have, how^-
ever, contained a number of new genera ; and, since many of these
papers appeared in local periodicals or in the transactions of scien-
tific societies, they are now diflicult of access.

Taking these facts into consideration, it has been thought well to
bring together, in an arrangement, the various genera which are

A. W. Evans — Arrangement of Genera of Hepaticm. 263

acknowledged by most recent hepaticologists. Under each genus,
the place and the date of its original publication have been given,
together with enough of the synonymy to show the claims of the
accepted name for recognition. The names of Gray are in all cases
given with the feminine termination.

The arrangement adopted is based on that of Dr. Underwood in
the Sixth Edition of Gray's Manual. It combines peculiarities of
both Lindberg's and Spruce's arrangements. The tribal names are
mostly taken from Lindberg,

In the preparation of this and the preceding paper, my sincere
thanks are due Prof. D. C. Eaton, who has allowed me the use of
his library and herbarium, and who has given me much bibliograph-
ical and critical assistance.

ORDER I. JUNG-ERMANNIACE^.
TRIBE I. FRULLANIE^.

1. Frullania Raddi, Jung. Etr. in Mem. Moden. xviii, p. 30(1820): Dum Rev.

des Genres, p. 12; Hep. Eur. p 26: G. L. & N. S.yn. Hep, p. 408: Spruce, Hep.

Amaz. et And. in Trans. Bot. Soc. Edin. xv, p. 3.
Jubula Dum. Comm. bot. p. 112 (1822), in part.
Jubula, sect Ascolobia Dum. Syll. Jung. p. ;>(>.

Widely distributed ; species about 150. The genus is divided by
Spruce (Hep. Amaz. et And.) into six subgenera: — Ghonanthelia,
Trachycolea, Homotropantha, Meteoriopsls^ TJii/opsiella and Dias-
taloha,

2. Jubula Dum. Comm. bot. p. 112 (1822), in part.
Jubula, sect. Jubulotypus Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 36.

Jubula Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 12 (1835); Hep. Eur. p. 26: Spruce, Hep. Amaz.
et And. p. 59. U.nderwood in Gray's Manual, Ed. vi, p. 708.
Frullaniae sp. G. L. k N. Syn. Hep. p. 426.

Consists of 2 species, — the variable J. Hutchinsiw Dum. of Europe
and America and >T. piligera (Aust.) of the Pacific, which is perhaps
a variety of the first.

3. Lejeunea Lib. in Ann gen. sc. phys. T. 5, p. 372 (1820): Dum. Comm. bot. p.

Ill; Syll. Jung. p. 32; Rev. des Genres, p. 11 ; Hep. Eur. p. 18: G. L. & N.
Syn. Hep. p. 308.

As now defined by most hepaticologists, the genus includes —

Marchesinia S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 689 (1821), (Phragmicoma Dum.
Comm. bot p. 112; Syll. Jung. p. 35; Rev. des Genres, p. 13; Hep. Eur. p. 30: G. L.
& N. Syn. Hep. p. 292);

Colura Dura. Rev. des. Genres, p. 12;

Omphalanthus Lindenb. & Nees in Syn. Hep. p. 303 ;

264 A. W. Evmis — Arrangement of Genera of Sepaticce.

Ptychanthus Nees, Hep. Eur. iii. p. 105: G. L. & N. Syu. Hep. p. 289;
Thysananthus Lindenb. in Syu. Hep. p. 286;
Bryopteris Liudenb. 1. c. p. 284.

The genus Lejeunea is very widely distributed but is especially
abundant in tropical regions. As first published by Mademoiselle
Libert, it contained 2 species, — L. calcarea, and L. serpyllifolia of
Europe and America ; in its j)i'esent extended sense it is the largest
genus of Hepaticse, and contains 300 to 400 species. The genus is
divided by Spruce (Hep. Amaz. et And.) into 2 sections and 38
subgenera, as follows: — §1. Holostipae, comprising the subgenera
Stictolejeunea, Neurolejeunea, Peltolejetmea, Omjjhalolejeunea, Archi-
lejeunea, Ptychol&junea, Mastigolejeunea^ Thysanolejeunea, Dendrole-
jeiinea, Bryolejeimea, Acrolejeunea, Lopholejeunea, Platylejeunea,
Anojylolejeunea, Brachiolejeunea, Homalolejeunea, Dicranolejemiea
and Odontolejeunea. §2. Schizostipae comprising the subgenera
Prio7iolejeunea, Crossotolejeunea, Harpalejeun ea, Trachylejeunea,
Drepanolejeunea, Leptolejeunea, Ceratolejeunea, Taxilejeiinea, Ma-
crolejeunea, Otigoniolejeunea, Hygrolejeunea, Euosmolejeunea, Pyc-
nolejeunea, Potamolejeunea, Cheilolejetmea, Eulejeunea, Microle-
jeunea, Cololejeunea, DiplasioleJeiDiea and Colurolejeiinea.

4. MyrioCOlea Spruce, Hep. Amaz. et Aud. p. 30.5 (1884).

Contains a single species, 31. irrorata Spruce of South Ainerica.

5. Radula Dum. Comm. bot. p. 112 (1822), in part.
Radula, sect. RadiUotypus Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 88 (1831).

Radula Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 14 (1835); Hep. Eur. p. 31 (1874): G. L. & N.
Syn. Hep. p. 253.

CandoUea Raddi, Juno-. Etr. in Mem. Moden. xviii, p. 24 (1820), in part, not Can-
doUea Laljil.

Martinellia S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 690 (1821), in part.

A widely diffused genus of about 75 species, the typical one being
the common R. comjylanata Dum. The genera Rachda and Marti-
nellia, as first proposed by their authors, included the genera Padula,
Scapania and Plagiochila, as these are now understood. In his
Sylloge (pp. 37-43), Dumortier divided his original Radula into
three sections : — Radidotypus, Scapania and Plagiochila ; these he
soon elevated into the genera Radula, Scapania and Plagiochila
with almost their present limitations (Rev. des Genres, p. 14). If
we supersede any of Dumortier's names by the older Martinellia of
Gray, it should be Radida, since the first of Gray's species of Mar-
tinellia belong to that genu^. As, however, Gray's genus is so
loosely defined, and Dumortier's names are in so universal use, it is

A. W. Evans — Arranc/ement of Genera of Hepaticae. 265

best to retain the latter, in accordance with the views of most
authors. (See Carrington, Brit. Hep. p. 52.)

6. Porella Dili. Hist. Muse. p. 459 (1741): Lindb. in Act. Soc. Sc. Fenn. ix. pp.

329-.345 (1869).
Madotheca Duiu. Comm. bot. p. Ill (1822); Syll. Jung. p. J-lO; Rev. des Genres,
p. U: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 262.

Cavendishia S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 689, not Cavendishia Lindl.
Bellincinia and Antoiria Raddi, Jung. Etr. in Mem. Moden. xviii, pp. 18, 19.

A widely distributed genus of 75-100 species. The original
species is P. porella of Linnasus, which both he and Dillenius placed
among the Musci ; here it remained overlooked, until it was brought
to light by Lindberg.

7. PleurOZia Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 15 (1835); Hep. Eur. p. 52.
Radulae sp. Dura. Syll. Jung. p. 38.

Physiotium JSTees, Eur. Leberm. iii, p. 75 (1838): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 234:
Jack, Hedwigia, xxv, p. 49.

Jack enumerates 10 species in his monograph of the genus ; of
these one onl}^, P. cochleariformis, occurs in Europe, the others
being confined to Asia and the Pacific Islands.

TRIBE II. PTILIDIE^.

8. Ptilidium Nees, Eur. Leberm. i, p. 95 (1833): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 249.
Jungermannia, sect. Blepharozia Diim. Syll. Jung. p. 46 (1831).
Blepharozia Dura. Rev. des Genres, p. 16 (1835).

A genus of about 8 species, the typical P. ciliare Nees being
widely distributed.

9- TrichoCOlea Dum. Comm. bot. p. 113 (1822); Syll. .Jung. p. 66; Rev. des
Genres, p. 20; Hep. Eur. p. Ill: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 236.

A small but widely distributed genus of Avhich the tj'pe is T.
tomentella Dum,

The name of the genus was first published by Dumortier in his
Commentationes as " Thricolea,'''' which spelling he retained in his
Sylloge. Nees von Esenbeck corrected the spelling to " Trichocolea "
(Eur. Leberm. iii, ja. 105) ; but Dumortiei', objecting to the sound of
this name, shortened it into " Tricholea " both in his Revision des
Genres and in his Hepaticae Europ^e. As, however, the name " Tri-
chocolea " is preserved by most authors, it has been retained here.

10. Leiomitra Lindb. in Act. Soc. Sc. Fenn. x, 515 (1875).

Lindberg gives 2 species, — L. tonientosa of tropical America and
L. capillata of the Philippine Islands ; several additional species are
described by Spruce.

266 A. W. Evans — Arrangement of Genera of Hepaticoe.

11. ChaetOCOlea Spruce, Hep. Amaz. et And. p. 346 (1885).
Contains a single South American species.

12. Lepidolsena Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 13 (1835): Spruce, Hep. Amaz. et
And. p. 336.

Polyotus Gottsche in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 13 (1845).

A beautiful genus of the Southern Hemisphere ; species 10-15,
among which may be mentioned L. Menziesii, L. clavigera and
L. palpehrifolia, the original species.

13. Herberta S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 705(1821): Spruce, Hep. Amaz.
et And. p. 340. Underw. in Gray's Manual, Ed. vi, p. 709.

Schisma Dum. Comm. bot. p. 114 (1822); Syll. Jung. p. 76; Rev. des. Genres, p.
23; Hep. Eur. p. 123.

Sendtnera Nees in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 238 (1845).

Widely disti'ibuted ; species 10-15 ; the genus is represented in
both Europe and America by H. adunca Gray.

14. LepiCOlea Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 20 (1835): Lindb. in Act. Soc. Sc.
Fenn. x, p. 516.

Iieperoma Mitt in Hook f. Handb. N. Z. Fl. pp. 751, 754 (1867).

Mostly in the Southern Hemisphere ; species 3, — L. scolopendra
Dura., L. oclirolenca. Lindb. and L. prulnosa Spruce.

15. MastigOphora Nees, Eur. Leberm. iii, p. 95 (1833): Mitt, iu Hook. f.
Handb. N. Z Fl. p. 754.

Sendtnera, sect. Mastigophora G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. 241.

Species 10-15, scattered ; M. Woodsii is the only European species.

16. Isotachis Mitt, in Hook. f. Handb. N. Z. Fl. p. 526 (1867): Spruce, Hep.
Amaz. et .\nd. p. 337.

Species 10-15, mostly in the Southern Hemisphere.

TRIBE III. LEPIDOZIE^.

17. Lembidium Mitt, in Hook. f. Handb. N. Z. Fl. p. 754 (1867).

A small genus confined to the islands of the South Seas ; 3 species
are known, — L. nutans Mitt, of New Zealand, L. ventrosum Mitt,
of Kerguelen Land, and L. dendroides Carrington & Pearson of
New South Wales.

18. Mytilopsis Spruce, "On Ceplialozia" (1882); Hep. Amaz. et And. p 387.
Contains one South American species.

19. Micropterygium Lindenb. in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 233 (1845).
Species 5-10, mostly in tropical America.

A. W. Evans — Arrangement of Genera of Hepaticm. 267

20. 'BaZZSHiia, S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 704 (1821): Spruce, Hep. Amaz.
et And. p. 366 : Underw. Cat. Hep. p. 82.
Pleuroschisma, sect. Pleuroschismotypus Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 70 (1831).
Pleuroschisma Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 19 (1835); Hep. Eur. 102.
Herpetium, sect. Mastigobryum Nees, Hep. Eur. iii, p. 43.
Mastigobryum Nees in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 214.

Species 100-125, especially numerous in tropical regions ; the com-
monest northern species is B. trllohata S. F. Gray.

31. Sprucella Stejih. in Engler's Bot. Jahrb. viii, p. 92 (1887); Hedwigia, xxx, p.
215.

Species 1, S. siiccida {Lepidozia sitccida Mitt.) of western Africa.

22. Lepidozia Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 19(1835); Hep. Kur. p. 109: G. L. &
N. Syn. Hep. p. 200.

Pleuroschisma, sect. Lepidozia Dum. Syll. .Jung. p. 69.
Herpetium, sect. Lepidozia Nees, Hep. Eur. iii, p. .^1.

Species 50-75, most abundant in tropical regions ; the typical L.
reptans Dum. is the most frequent northern species.

23. Arachniopsis Spruce, " On Cephalozia " (1882); Hep. Amaz. et And. p. 354.
Contains 3 South American species.

24. Cephalozia Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 19 (1835); Hep. Eur. p. 87: Spruce,
"On Cephalozia"; Hep. Amaz. et And. p. 388.

Jungermannia, sect. Cephalozia Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 60.
Jungermamiiee sp. G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p 131.
Zoopsis Hook. f. & Tayl. Crypt. Ant. p. 55 (1845).
Trigonanthus Spruce, Trans. Bot. Soc. Edin. iii, p. 207 (1850).

A widely distributed genus of 40-50 species ; it may be divided
into the following subgenera (most which wei*e first proposed by Dr.
Spruce) : — Protocejihalozia, Pteropsiella, Zoopsis, AlobieUa, Euce-
phalozia, CepJialoziella, and Prionolohus.

25. Herpocladium Mitt, in Jour. Linn. Soc. xv, p. 69 (1877).
A small genus of the South Pacific.

26. OdontOSChisma Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 19 (1833).
Pleuroschisma, sect. Odontoschisma Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 68.
Sphagnoecetis Nees in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 148 (1845).
Cephalozia, sect. Odontoschisma Spruce, "On Cephalozia."

Species 10-15, scattered ; the typical 0. Sphagni occurs in both
Europe and America.

27. Hygrobiella Spruce, "On Cephalozia" (1882).

Species 3, — H. laxifolia, H. tnyriocarpa and H. -N'evicensis, all of
northern regions.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 36 Jan., 1892.

268 A. W. Etyms — Arrangement of Genera of Hepaticoe.

28. Pigafettoa Mass. in Xuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. xvii, p. 237 (1885).
Consists of a single Patagonian species, P. crenulata.

29. Pleuroclada Spruce, " On Cephalozia."

Species 2, — P. albescens and P. Islandica of Arctic I'egions.

30. Anthelia Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 18 (1835); Hep. Kur. p. 97: Spruce,
" On Cephalozia."

Jungermannia, sect. Anthelia Dum. S.yll. Jung. p. 63.

Contains 4 species, mostly of northern regions ; A. julacea Dura,
is the typical species.

31. BlepharOStoma Dum. Rev. des. Genres, p. 18 (18.35); Hep. Eur. p. 94:
Spruce, "On Cephalozia": Underw. Cat. Hep. p. SO.

Jungermannia, sect Blepharostoma Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 18.
Jungermanniae sp. G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 144.
Chaetopsis Mitt. Jour. Linn. Soc. viii, p. 51 (18G4).

Contains 2 species, — the widely distributed B. trichophylluni
Dum. and P. palmatimi Lindb. of Australia and New Zealand.

32. Chandonanthus Mitt, in Hook. f. Handb. N. Z. Fl. p. 753 (1867): Lindb.
in Act. Soc. Sc. Fenn. x, p. 517 (1875).

Anthelia Dum. in part.

Includes G. setiformis Lindb. of northern regions, C. squarrosa of
New Zealand, and a few other species.

33. Adelanthus Mitt, in Jour. Linn. Soc. vii, p. 243 (1863): Dum Hep. Eur.
p. 46.

The original species of Mitten were A. falcatus, A. 3IageUanicus,
A. Lindbergianvs and A. decipiens. Since his publication of the
genus a few other species have been added. The genus is mostly
tropical, but A. decipiens occurs in Ireland.

34. AnomOClada Spruce, Jour, of Bot. xiv (1876); Hep. Amaz. et And. p. 407.
Species \, A. macosa of South America.

TRIBE IV. SACCOGYNE^.

35. Kantia S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 706 (1821): Underw. in Gray's Man-
ual, Kd. vi, p. 713.

Cincinnulus Dum. Comm. bot. p. 113 (1822); Syll. Jung. p. 72; Rev. des Genres,
p. 21 ; Hep. Eur. p. 115.

Calypogeia (sect. B) Raddi, Jung. Etr. in Mem. Mod. xviii, p. 44 : G. L. & N. Syn.
Hep. p. 198.

Species 10-15, scattered ; the typical K. Trichomanis occurring
in both Europe and America.

A. W. Evans — ArrcfUf/ement of Genera of Hepaticm. 269

36. SaCCOgyna Dum. Comm. bot. p. 113 (1822); Syll. Jung. p. 74; Rev. des
Genres, p. 21 ; Hep. Eur. 117: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 194.

Sykorea Corda in Opiz. Natnrl. p. 652 (1829).

Species 3, — S. viticulosa Dum. of Europe, 8. australis Mitt, of the
South Pacific, and S.jugata Mitt, of Samoa.

37. GeOCalyx Nees, Eur. Leberm. i, p. 97 (18'^3): Dum Rev. des Genres, p. 22 ;
Hep. Eur. p. 118: G. L. & X. Syn. Hep. p. 194.

Contains the common G. graveolens Nees and a doubtful West
Indian species. The genus is inchided by Carrington and Lindberg
under Saccogyna.

TRIBE V. JUNGERMANNIE/E.

38. Scapania Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 14 (1835); Hep. Eur. p. 33: G. L & X.
Syn. Hep. p. 51.

Radula, sect. Scapania Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 38.

Candollea Raddi, in part.

Martinellia S. F. Gray, in part : Lindb. in .\cta Soc. Fenn. x, p. 518.

Species 3(»-40, most numerous in northern regions ; IS. undulata

and aS'. neinorosa are common and typical species.

39. SchistOCalyx Lindb. in Jour. Linn. Soc. xiii, p. 185 (1872); Acta Soc. Sc.
Fenn. x, p. 519.

Blepharidophyllum Angstr. in OIV. Vet.-Akad. Forh. xxx, p. 151 (1873).

A small subtropical genus proposed for Scapania cidoroleuca, IS.
densifolia and their near allies.

40. Diplophyllum Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 15 (1835); llep. Eur. p. 47:
Lindb. in Acta Soc. Sc. Fenn. x, p. 522 : Underw. in Gray's Manual, Ed. vi, p. 715.

Jungermannia, sect. Diplophyllum Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 44.
Jungermanniae sp. G. L & N. Syn. Hep. p. 76.
Scapaniae sp. Mitt, in Hook. f. Fl. Tasm. ii, p. 233.

A small genus of which the typical species is D. albicans Dum.
As defined by Dumortier, the genus includes Jiaigermannia, sect.
Sphenolohus Lindb.

41. ClasmatOCOlea Spruce, Hep. Amaz. et And. p. 440 (1885).
A South American genus of 2 species.

42. LophoCOlea Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 17 (1835); Hep. Eur. p. 83: G. L. &
N. Syn. Hep. p. 151.

Jungermannia, sect. Lophocolea Dum. Syll. .Jung. p. 59.

Species 50-75, especially numerous in tropical regions ; L. biden-
tata and L. heterophylla are typical northern species.

43. DiploSCyphtlS De Not. Mem. Acad. Turin (1874).
Species 1, JJ. Horneensis of Borneo.

270 A. W. Evans — Arrangement of Genera of Hepatiem.

44. ChiloSCyphuS Corda in Opiz. Naturl. p. 651 (1829): Dum. Syll. Jung. p.
67 ;■ Rev. des Genres, p. 19; Hep. Eur. p. 100: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 171.

A widely distributed genus of 30-50 species, the typical one being
C. 2)olyanthos Corda.

45. NotOSCyphuS Mitt, in Seemann, Fl. Vitiensis (1868).
A small genus of the Southern Hemisphere.

46. Psiloclada Mitt, in Hook. f. Fl. Nov. Zel. ii, p. 143 (1853); in Hook. f.
Handb. N. Z. Fl. p. 518.

Species 1, P. clandestina of New Zealand and Tasmania.

47. Plagiochila Dum. Eev des Genres, p. 14(1835); Hep. Eur. p. 42 : G. L. &
N. Syn. Hep. p. 22.

Radula, sect. Plagiochila Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 42.
Candollea Kaddi. in part.
Martinellia S. F. Gray, in part.

Pedinophyllum Lindb. Bot. Not. 1874, p. 155 and in Act. Soc. So. Fenn. x, p. 504
(1875).

Species 125-150, very numerous in tropical regions ; P. asplenoides
is a common northern species.

48. Mylia S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 693 (1821): Lindb. in Act. Soc. Sc.
Fenn. x, p. 525: Undei'w. in Gray's Manual, Ed. vi, p. 717.

Jungermanniae sp. G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 82.

Leptoscyphus Mitt, in Hook. Jour, of Bot. iii, p. 358 (1851), in part.
Leioscyphus Mitt, in Hook. f. Fl. N. Zel. ii. p. 134 (1855), in part.
Coleochila Dum. Hep. Eur. p. 105 (1874).

A small genus of northern regions ; founded upon Jungermannia
Taylori Hook, and the allied J. anomala Hook.

49. IjeptOSCyphuS Mitt, in Hook. Jour, of Bot. iii, p. 358 (1851), in part.
Leioscyphus Mitt, in part.

A small genus occurring in tropical and south temperate regions ;
L. fragilifolius is one of Mitten's original species.

50. Harpanthus Nees, Eur. Leberm. ii, p. 351 (1830): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep.
p. 689 : Dum. Hep. Eur. p. 66.

Pleuranthe Tayl. in Hook. Lond. Jour. Bot. v, p. 282 (1846): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep.
p. 689 (1847).

Species 2, — H. Flotoviamts Nees and H. scutatus Spruce of
Europe and America.

51. Liochlaena Nees in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 150 (1845).
Aploziae sp. Dum. Hep. Eur. p. 58.

Contains 2 or 3 species, the typical one being L. lanceolata of
Europe and America.

A. W. Evans — Arrangenumt of Genera of Hepaticm. 271

52. Symphyomitra Spruce, Hep. Amaz. et And. p. 503 (1885).
A small South American genus.

53. Jungermannia (Rupp.) Mich. Nov. Gen. (1729) : G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 78.
p. 73.

Widel}^ distributed ; species 150-200. In its restricted sense, the
genus may be divided into the following subgenera : — Aplozia Dum.
{Jungermannia proper), Lophozia Dum., Anastrophyllum Spruce,
Sphenolohus Lindb. and Gj/mnocolea Dum. The name "Junger-
mannia" was lirst proposed by Ruppius, but Lindberg states that
none of Ruppius' original species are now retained in the genus.

54. Syzygiella Spruce, Jour, of Bot. xiv (1876); Hep. Amaz. et And. p. 499.
A genus of tropical America, species 5 or 6.

55. Temnoma Mitt, in Hook. f. Handb. N. Z. Fl. p. 753 (1867).

A genus of a few mostly southern species, founded upon Jimc/er-
mannia pulchella and J. qvadrifida.

56. GymnOSCyphuS Cordain Sturm, dents, krypt. fasc. 25, p. 158: Dum. Rev.
des Genres, p. 16; Hep. Eur. p. 112: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 191.

Species 1, G. repens of Europe.

TRIBE VI. CCELOCAULE^.

57. SchistOChila Dum Rev. des Genres, p. 15 (1835).
Gottschea Nees in G. L & N. Syn. Hop. p. 13 (1844).

A beautiful genus, mostly confined to the Southern Hemisphere ;
species 30-40.

58. Marsupella Dum. Comm. bot. p. 114 (1822); Rev. des Genres, p 23; Hep.
Eur. p. 125: Spruce, Revue Bryol. viii. p. 89: Undervv. in Gray's Manual, Ed. vi,
p. 721.

Sarcoscyphus Corda in Opiz. N^aturl. p. 652 (1829): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 6.
Marsupia Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 77.
Nardia S. F. Gray, in part.

A small genus of northei-n regions ; M. einarginata, and M. spha-
celata are widely distributed species.

59. Southbya Spruce in Trans. Bot. Soc. Edin. iii, p. 197 (1850): Dum. Hep,
Eur. p. 133.

A northern genus of 3-5 species.

60. Arnellia Lindb. Kongl. Svenska Vet-Akad. xxiii, No. 5 (1889).
Species 1, A. Fennica of northern regions.

61. Nardia S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 694 (1821): Spruce, Revue Bryol.
viii, p. 89: Underw. in Gray's Manual, Ed. vi, p. 721.

272 A. W. Evans — Arrangennent of Genera of Hepaticce.

Mesophylla Dum. Comm. bot. p. 112 (1822); Syll. Juug. p. 80; Rev. des Gecres,
p. 24; Hep. Eur. p. 129.

Alicularia Corda in Opiz Naturl. p. 652 (1829): Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 79; Hep.
Eur. p. 131 : G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 10.

Solenostoma Mitt. Jour. Linn. Soc. viii, p. 51.

Jungermanniae sp. G L. & N. Syn. Hep. et Auctt.

Aploziae sp. Dum. Hep. Eur.

A widely distributed genus of 15-25 species. As restricted by
Spruce, 1. c, the genus may be divided into the following subgen-
era : — Eunardia Spruce, Eucalyx Lindb., Apotomanthus Spruce
and Chascostoma Lindb.

62. G-ymnomitrium Corda in Oplz. Naturl. p. 651 (1829): G. L. & N. Syn.
Hep. p. 2.

Oesia S. P. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i. p. 705 (1821), not Caesia R. Br. (1810).
Acolea Dimi. Syll. Jung. p. 76 (1831) ; Hep. Eur. p. 121.

Species 10-20, occurring in cold regions ; G. concinnatum is a
common Alpine species.

63. Prasanthus Lindb. Kougl. Svenska Vet -Akad. xxiii, No. 5 (1889).
Species 1, P. Saecicuni of northern Europe and Asia.

64. Dichiton Mont. Sylloge Crypt, p. 52 (185h).
Species 1, D . perpusillum of Algeria.

TRIBE VII. ACROBOLBE^.

65. Lindigina Gottsche, Ann. d So. Nat. 5me serie, T. i, p. 137 (1864): Mitt.
Jour. Linn. Soc. xvi, p. 157.

Lindigia Gottsclie, Mexik. Leverm. p. 216 (1863), non Harape.
Gymnanthe Tayl in part: Mitt, in Hook. f. Handb. N. Z. FL p. 519.
Podanthe Tavl. iu Drumm. Swan Uiver Crypt. (1846): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p.
789, not Podanthes Haw. Syn. PI. Succ. (1812).

Iiethocolea Mitt, in Hook. f. Handb. N. Z. Fl. p. 753.

8 species are enumerated by Mitten, the original ones being L.
Liehmanniana and L. Granatensis of Gottsche.

6(). Acrobolbus Nees in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 5 (1844).

Gymnanthe Tayl. in part: G. L. & N. Sjm. Hep. p. 192: Dum. Hep. Eur. p. 119.

Species 1, A. Wilsonl Nees of Europe and South America.

67. Tylimanthus Mitt, in Hook. f. Handb. N. Z. Fl. p. 753 (1867).

Gymnanthe Tayl. in Lehra. pug. pi. viii, p. 1 (1844), not Gymnanthes Sw. (1788) :^
G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 192.

A small tropical or subtropical genus, proposed by Mitten for
Gymnanthe saccata.

A. W. Evans — Arrangement of Genera of Hepaticce- 273

68. Balantiopsis Mitt. i. c. p. 753.

Gymnanthe Tayl. iu part.

Mitten gives 2 species, — B. dlplophylla and B. erinacea.

69. Marsnpidium Mitt. i. c p. 753.

Gymnanthe Tayl. in part.

A small genus of the South Pacific ; the original species are M.
Orvilleanum, M. settdosurn and 31. Knightii.

70. Calypogeia (sect. A) Raddi, Jung. Etr. in Mem. Moden. xviii, p. 42 (1820):
Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 21 ; Hep. Eur. p. 113.

Gongylanthus Nees, Eur. Leberm. ii, p. 405 (1836): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 196.

A genus of 2-5 species ; the European C ericetoruyn and f. flag-
ellifera are Raddi's typical species.

TRIBE VIII. FOSSOMBRONIE^.

71. Scalia S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. Pi. i, p. 704 (1821): Carringt. Brit. Hep. p. I.
Mniopsis Dum. Comm. bot. p. 114 (1822); Syll. Jung. p. 75; Rev. des Genres, p.

22; Hep. Eur. p. 120.

Haplomitrium Nees, Eur. Leberm. i, p. 109 (1833): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 2.

Species 3, — S. Hookeri of Eui'02:)e, and 2 species of tropical
America.

72. RhopalanthuS Lindb. Mauip. Muse. Scand. p. 390 (1874).
Species 1, R. mnioides of Japan.

73. FosSOmbronia Raddi, Jung. Etr. in Mem. Moden. xviii, p. 40 (1820): Dum.
Rev. des Genres, p. U ; Hep. Eur. pp. 13, 173: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 467.

Codonia Dum. Comm. bot. p. Ill (1822); Syll. Jung. p. 29.

Species 10-20, scattered ; the typical I.piisilla occurs in Europe.

74. Noteroclada Tayl. Hep. Antarc. in Lond. Jour. Bot. 1844, p. 478.
Androcryphia Nees, G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 470 (1846).

A small genus, mostly confined to the Southern Hemisphere.

75. Petalophyllum Gottsche in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 472 (1846).
Codonia Dum. Hep. Eur. p. 16 (1874).

Species 4-8, scattered ; P. Ralfsii occurs in the British Isles.

76. CalyCUlaria Mitt, in Joum. Linn. Soc. v. p. 122 (1861).
A small tropical genus of South Asia, etc.

77. Calobryum Nees in Lindl. lutrod. Ed. ii, p. 414: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p.
507.

A very doubtful genus containing one species, C. Blumii of Java.

274 A. W. EiKcns — Arrangement of Genera of Hepaticoe.

78. Treubia G-obel, Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, ix (1890).
A small Javanese genus.

79. Podoraitrium Mitt, in Hook. f. Fl. Nov. Zel. ii, p. 164 (1853); in Handb.
Z. Fl. p. N. 541.

Species 1, P. Phyllanthus of Tasmania and New Zealand.

SO. Pallavicinia S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 775 (1821): Lindb. in Act.
Soc. Sc. Fenn. x, p. 540: Underw. in Gray's Manual, Ed. vi, p. 723.
Dilaena Dum. Comm. bot. p. 114 (1822); Rev. des Genres, p. 25 ; Hep. Eur. p. 136.
Diplomitrium Corda in Opiz. Naturl. p. 653 (1829).
Diplolffina Dum. Syll. Jung. p. 82 (1831).
Cordaea Nees in Bot. Zeit. 1833, p. 401.

Blyttia Endl. Gen. PI. p. 1339 (1840): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 474.
Steetzia Lelim. PI. Preiss. ii, p. 129 (1846).
Morckia Gottsche in Rabenh. Hep. Eur. Exsic. n. 295.
Mittenia Gottsche in Ann. des Sc. Nat. Sme serie. T. i, p. 177 (1864).

Species 10-15, scattered ; the original P. Lyellil is common and
widely distributed.

81. Hymenophyton Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 25 (1835),
Umbraculum Gottsche in Mohl & Schlect. Bot. Zeit. 1861, pp. 1-3; Ann. des Sc.

Nat. 5me serie, T. i, p. 180 (1864).

Species 3, — H. flahellatum Dum. and H. leptopodon (Tayl.) of New
Zealand, and H. Mulleri (Gottsche) of Australia.

82. Symphyogyna Mont. & Nees in Ann. des Sc. Nat. 2me serie. T. v, p. 66
(1836): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 479.

Species 20-30 ; mostly in the Southern Hemisphere.

83. Pellia Raddi, Jung. Etr. in Mem. Moden. xviil. p. 45 (1820): Dum. Rev. des
Genres, p. 27 ; Hep. Eur. p. 144: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 488.

Scopulina Dum. Comm. bot. p. 115; Syll. Jung. p. 87.

Species 3-5, scattered ; P. epiph,ylla, the original species, is widely
distributed.

84. Blasia Mich. Nov. Gen. p. 14 (1729): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 491 : Dum.
Hep. Eur. p. 134.

Species ] , P. pmsilla Linn, of northern regions.

TRIBE IX. MONOCLES.

85. MonOClea Hook. Muse. Exot. t. 174 (1820): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 508.

Species 2, — M. Forsteri Hook, of New Zealand and M. Gottschei
Lindb. of South America.

A. W.Evans — Arrangement of Genera of Hepaticm. 2*75

TRIBE X. METZGERIE^.

86. MetZgeria Raddi, Jung. Btr. in Mem. Moden. xviii, p. 45 (1820): Dum. Rev.
des Genres, p. 26; Hep. Eur. p 138: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 501.

Pasciola Dum. Comm. bot. p. 114.

Echinogyna Dum. Anal. fam. p. 60; Syll. Juug. p. 83.

Lindberg enumerates 11 species in liis monograpli of the genus ;
the original 31. furcata and M. puhescens are common in Europe.

TRIBE XI. ANEURE^.

87. Aneura Dum. Comm. bot. p. 115 (1822); Syll. Jung. p. 85; Rev. des Genres,
p. 26; Hep. Eur. p. 140: G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 493.

Rcemeria Raddi, Jung. Etr. in Mem. Mod. xviii, p. 46, not Roemeria Medik.
Riccardia S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Br. PI. i, p. 683 (1821), not Richardia Kantli
in Mem. Mus. Paris, iv, p. 430 (1818).

Sarcomitrium Corda in Sturm Deutschl, Fl. 2 fasc. 26 and 27, p. 119.

The genus inchides the following, —
Acrostolia Dum. Rev. des Genres, p. 26 (Pseudoneura Gottsche, Mexik. Leverm.).

A widely distributed genus of 20-30 species, the typical A. pinguis
occurring in Europe and America.

ORDER II. ANTHOCEROTACE^.

88. DendrocerOS Nees in G. L. & N. Syn. Ilep. p. 579 (1846).
Species 10-15, mostly tropical.

89. AnthoceroS Mich. Nov. Gen. p. 11 (1729): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 582.
Species 20-30, most numerous in tropical regions ; A. keels and

A. punctatus are the commonest northern species.

90. Notothylas Sulliv. Mem. Am. Acad. n. ser. iii, p. 65 (1846): Dum. Hep
Eur. p. 161.

Carpolipum Nees in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 591.
Chamaeceros Milde in Nov. Act. N. C. (1856).

A small genus of Europe and North America ; N'. orbicularis
Sulliv. is an original species.

ORDER III. MARCHANTIACE^.
TRIBE I. MARCHANTIE^.

91. Marchantia Marchant. f. in Act. Gall. (1713): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 521 .
Dum. Hep. Eur. p. 150.

Widely distributed ; species 25-30 ; 31. polytnorpha L. ' is the
commonest.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 37 Jan., 1892.

276 A. W. Evans — Arrangement of Genera of Hepaticm.

92. Preissia Corda in Opiz. Natiirl. p. 647 (1829): G. L. & N". Syn. Hep. p. 521.
Ohomiocarpon Corda, 1. c. p. 647.

A small genus, mostly found in northern regions ; P. commutata
Nees is the most widely distributed species.

93. Fimbriaria J>fees, Hor. phys. Berol. p. 44 (1820): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p.
555.

Hypenantron Corda in Opiz. Naturl. p. 648 (1829).

Species 25-30, scattered ; F. tenella is a common American species.

94. ConOCephaluS Necker, Elem. Bot. iii, p. 344(1790): Dum. Hep. Eur. p.
154.

Fegatella Haddi in Opusc. scient. d. Bot. ii. p. 356 (1818): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p.
546.
Hepatica Mich. Nov. Gen. (non Dill.).

Contains 2 species, — the cosmopolitan C. conicus Dum. and C.
Japonicus (Steph.).

95. Sandea Lindb. Acta Soc. pro F. et Fl. Fenn. T. ii, X. 5, p. 3 (1884).
Species 1, S. supradecomposita Lindb. of Japan and India.

96. Sauteria Nees, Eur. Lebertn. iv, p. 139 (1838): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p.
541 : Lindb. Acta Soc. pro F. et Fl. Fenn. T. ii, N". 3, p. 7.

Contains the typical S. alpina Nees and a few doubtful species.

97. Peltolepis Lindb. Bot. Notis. 1877, p. 73; Acta Soc. pro F. et Fl. Fenn. T.
ii, N. 3, p. 3.

Species 1, P. grandis of Northern Europe.

98. Clevea Lindb. Not. Soc. pro F. et Fl. Fenn. ix, p. 289 (1868); Acta Soc. pro
F. et Fl. Fenn. T. ii, N. 3, p. 10: Dum. Hep. Kur. p. 149.

Exormotheca Mitt, in C. Godman's Nat. Hist. Azores, p. 325 (1870).

A small genus of which the typical species is C. hyalina of Europe
and Greenland.

99. Athalamia Falconer in Trans. Linn. Soc. xx, P. 3, p. 397 (1851).
Species 1, A pingitis.

100. Grimaldia Raddi m Opusc. scient. d. Bot. ii, p. 356 (1818): G. L. & N. Syn.
Hep. p. 549: Dum. Hep. Eur. p. 156.

Duvalia Nees in Mag. d. nat. fr. zu Berl. p. 271 (1817): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p.
553, not Duvalia Haw. Syn. PI. Succ. 414 (1812).

A small genus of Europe and America ; the best known species
are G. harblfrons and G. rupestris. The old genera Griiualdla and
Duvalia are here united in accordance with the views of Lindberg,
Underwood and others. (See Bot. Gazette, xiv, p. 197.)

A. W. Evans — Arrangement of Genera of HepaticoB. 277

101. Cryptomitrium Aust. in Uaderw. Cat. Hep. p. 36 (1884).
Species 1, G. tenerum of Mexico and California.

103. Asterella Beanv. in Encycl. raeth. suppl. i, p. 502 (1810): Dum. Hep. Eur.
p. 15-4: Underw. Cat. Hep. p. 37.
Reboulia Raddi in Opusc. scient. d. Bot. ii, p. .56 (1818): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p.
547.

A small genus of wliich the typical species is A. hemisphcerica of
Europe and North America.

103. Askepas Griff. Notula;, p. 341 (1849): Mitt. Jour. Linn. Soc. v, p. 127.
Species 1, A, hrevipes of India.

104. Dumortiera Nees in Nov. Act. Acad. Cass. Leop. xii, P. ], p. 410 (1823):
G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 542.

Species 5-10, scattered ; the typical D. hirsuta is found in both
Europe and America.

105. Rhacotheca BisehofE in Hochst. & Scub. Fl. Azor. p. 12, t. 14 (1846): G.
L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 573.

Species 1, H. Azorica.

TRIBE II. LUNULARIE^.

106. LiUnularia Mich. Nov. Gen. p. 4 (1729): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 510.
Species 1, the common L. vulgaris.

107. Aitonia Forster, Char. gen. pi. p. 147, n. 74 (1776): Lindb. in Act. Soc. Sc
Fenn. x.

Otiona Corda in Opiz. Naturl. i, p. 648 (1829): Dum. Hep. Eur. p. 148.
Plagiocha.sma Lehin. et Lindenb. in Lehm. Pug. pi. iv, p. 13: G. L. & N. Syn.
Hep. p. 511.

Species 15-20, mostly in warm regions.

TRIBE III. TARGIONIE^.

108. Targionia Mich. Nov. Gen. p. 3 (1729): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 574.

A small genus, most frequent in warm countries ; the original T.
hypophijlla occurs in Europe and America.

109. Cyathodium Kunze in Lehm. Pug. pi. vi, p. 17 (1834) : G. L. & N. Syn.
Hep. p. 577.

Synhymenium Griff. Notulag, p. 344 (1849): Mitt, in Jour. Linn. Soc. v, p 124.
(See Stephani in Hedwigia, xxvii, p. 250.)

Monoselenium Griff. 1. c. p. 341 : Mitt. 1. c. p. 127.

Species 1, the tropical C. cavernosuni.

278 A. W. Evans — Arrangement of Genera of JSepaticce.

ORDER IV. RICCIACE^.
TRIBE I. RICCIE^.

110. BoSChia Mont. Ann. des Sc. Nat. 4me serie, T. v, p. 3.51 (1856).
Species 1 , £ Weddellii of Brazil.

111. Riccia Mich. Nov. Gen. p. 107 (1729): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 598.

\Videly distributed ; species 50-00. The genus may be divided
into the subgenera Lichenodes, Spongodes^ Ricciella and Ricciocar-
piis, the last two of which are considered distinct genera by Dumor-
tier and others.

113. TeSSellina Dnm. Comm. hot. p. 78 (1822); Hep. Bur. p. 164.

Oxymitra Bisch. in Lindenb. Syn. Hep. Eur. p. I24];i829): G. L. & N. Syu. Hep.
p. 597.

Rupinia Corda in Opiz. Naturl. p. 650 (1829).

Pycnoscenus Lindb. in Ofv. Vet.-Akad. Forh. xix. p. 606 (1862).

Species 1, T. pyramidata of Europe, etc.

113. Corsinia Raddi in Opiisc. scient. d. Bot. (1818): G. L. &. N. Syn. Hep. p.
596.

Species 1, C. m((roJi((ntioides of Europe.

114. Myriorrhynchus Lindb. Acta Soc. pro P. et Fl. Fenn. T. ii, N. 5, p. 7
(1884).

Species 1, M. fimbriatus Lindb. {Riccia fiinhriata Nees) of South
America.

TRIBE II. SPH^ROCARPE^.

115. Riella Mont. Sylloge Crypt, p. 94 (1856): Dum. Hep. Eur. p. 168.
Duriaea Bory &"Mont. Conipte. rendu, des seances de I'Acad. des Sciences (1843) :

G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. p. 593.

A small genus of Europe and Northern Africa.

116. Sphaerocarpus Mich. Nov. Gen. p. 4 (1729): G. L. & N. Syn. Hep p. 594.

A small genus of Europe and North America ; S. terrestris is the
most widely distributed species.

117. ThalloCarpUS Lindb. in Bull. Torr. Bot. Chib, vi, p. 21 (1875): Underw
Cat. Hep. p. 29.

Cryptocarpus Aust. in Proc. Phil. Acad. Dec. 1869, p. 231.

Species 1, T. Curtisii Aust. of the Southern United States.

INDEX

Synonyms in Italics.

No.

Acolea 62

Acrobolbus 66

AcrosfoUa 87

Adelanthus 33

Aitonia 107

Aliculai-ia 61

Androcryphia 74

Aneura 87

Anomoclada 34

Anthelia 30

Anthoceros 89

Antoiria 6

Aplozia 53,61

Arachniopsis 22

Arnellia 60

Askepas_ 103

Asterella 102

Athalamia 99

Balantiopsis 68

Bazzania 20

Bellincinia 6

Blasia 84

Blepharidoph yllum 39

Blepharostoraa 31

Bltpharozia 8

BlyUia 80

Boschia 110

Bryopteris 3

Calobiyum 77

Calycularia 76

Calypogeia 70

Calypogeia :-'.6

CandoUea . 5, 38, 47

Carpohpum 90

Cavendishia 6

Cephalozia 24

Cesia _ 62

<]haetocolea 11

Chcetops-if! 31

Chamceceros 90

Chandonanthus .. 32

Chiloscyphus 44

■Chomiocaipon 92

Cincinnulus 35

Clasmatocolea 41

Clevea 98

Codonia 73, 75

Coleochila 48

Colura 3

Conocephalus 94

Cordoea 80

Corsinia ., 113

Cryptocarpus 117

Cryptoraitrium 101

Cyathodium 109

Dendroceros ._ 88

Dichitou 64

Dilcena .. 80

Diplolcena 80

Diplomitrimn 80

Diplophyllum .... 40

Diploscyphus 43

Dumortiera . ] 04

Durima 115

Duvalia . 100

Echinogyna _
Exormotheca

98

Fasciola 86

Fegatella 94

Fimbriaria 93

j Fossombronia 73

Frullania 1

i Geocalyx 37

I GongyJiridhus 70

j GvHsclwa 57

i Grimaldia 100

j Gymnanthe 65, 66, 67, 68, 69

Gymnocolea .... 53

Gymnomitriunj 62

Gymnoscyphus 56

Haphmitrium _ 71

Harpjinthus . .. 50

Hejjatka 94

Herberta 13

Herpetium 20, 22

Herpocladium 25

Hygrobiella 27

Hymenopliyton _ 81

Hypenantron . 93

Tsotacbis 16

Jubiila 2

Jtibula 1

Jungermannia 53

Kantia 35

280 A. W. Evans — Arrangement of Genera of Sepaticce.

No

Leiomitra 10

Leijscyphus 48, 49

Lejeunea 3

Lembidium 17

Leperoma 14

Lepicolea .... 14

LepidolEena 12

Lepidozia 22

Leptoscyphus 49

Leptoscyphus 48

Lethocoka 65

Lindigia ... ... 65

Lindigina 65

Liochlfena 51

Lophocolea 42

Lunularia 106

Madotheca 6

Marchantia 91

Marchesinia ... H

Marsupella 58

Marsupia . 58

Marsupidmm 69

Martindlia 5,38,47

Alastigohnjiun 20

Mastigopbora 15

Mesophylla 61

Metzgena 86

Micropterygium 19

Mittenm 80

Mniopsis 71

Monoclea 85

Monoselenium ... 109

Morckia .. 80

Mylia 48

Myriocolea . 4

Myriorrbyncbus 114

Mytilopsis ... ... 18

Nardia 01

Nardia 58

Noteroclada 74

Notoscypbus 45

Nototbylas ._ __. 90

Odontoscbisma 26

Omphalanthus ;<

Otiona 107

Oxymitria 112

Pallavicinia 80

Pedinophyllum 47

Pellia 83

Peltolepis. 97

Petalophyllum 75

Phragm icoma ... 3

Physi'itium 7

Pigafettoa 28

Plagioclmsma ._ 107

Plagiocbila 47

Pleuranthe 50

Pleuroclada 29

No.

Pleuroschisma 20, 22

Pleiirozia 7

Podanthe 65

Podoantrium 79

Polyotus 12

Porella 6

Prasantbus .. 63

Preissia .. _ 92

Pseudoneura 87

Psiloclada 46

Ptilidium _ _ 8

Ptychanthus _ 3

Pycnoscenus 112

Radula 5

Radida 5, 38, 47

Rehoulia 102

Rbacotbeca .. 105

Rbopalanibus 72

Riccardia 87

Riccia 111

Riella 115

Ro&meria 87

Rupinia 112

Saccogyna 36

Sandea 95

Sarcomitrium 87

Sarcoscypfius _. 58

Sauteria 96

ScaHa 71

Scapania 38

Schisma 13

Scbistocalyx . 39

Schistocbila .._ 57

Scopulina 81

Sendtnera 13, 15

Solenostoma .... fil

Soutbbya 59

Spbajrocarpus 116

Sphagno&cetis 25

Sprucella 21

Steetzia 80

Sykorea — 36

Sympbyogyna 82

Symphyomilra 52

Syn/iymeniuni 109

Syzygiella 54

Targionia _. 108

Temnoma 55

Tesselina 112

Tiiallocarpus 117

Tbysananfhus 3

Treubia 78

Tricbocolea . 9

Trigonanlhus 24

Tybmantbus 65

Umbraculum 81

Zoopsis 24

XVII. — On the Ferments contained in the Juice of the
Pineapple [Ananassa satlva), together with some Obser-
vations ON THE Composition and Proteolytic action of
THE Juice. By R. H. Chittenden, assisted by E. P. Joslin
and F. S. Meara,

Some time ago the writer's attention was called to the fact that
SeSor V. Marcano,* of Venezuela, had discovered the existence of
a proteid-digesting principle in plants of the order Bromeliaceae, of
which the pineapple is a well known representative, and that the
juice of the latter fruit was being made use of as a digestive agent
in the preparation of pre-digested foods.f So far as the writer is
aware, there is no scientific record of this discoveiy other than in a
short note contained in a recent number of a pharmaceutical journal, J
in which attention is simply called to Mai'cano's discovery and the
name "Jrome///*." suggested as an appropriate title for the hypotheti-
cal ferment. § Apparently, no study has been made of the nature of
the ferment presumably present in the juice, its mode of action, or
the character of the products resulting from such action.

From a physiological standpoint the discovery of any ferment,
either in the vegetable or animal kingdom, is a matter of consider-
able importance, especially so in the plant kingdom, since the feeling
is widely gaining ground that proteid-splitting ferments must play
an important part in rendering the food material of plants available.
As in the animal kingdom, proteid food to be available for the
needs of the plant must be transformed into soluble forms fitted for
absorption and circulation. Hitherto, the best known illustration of
such a vegetable proteolytic ferment has been papain, present in the
juice of the papaw plant, but in the discovery of the proteolytic
action of pineapple juice we have what promises to be an equally
prominent illustration and one, moreover, which constitutes an addi-

* Recently deceased. f By the Mosqiiera-.hdia Food Co.

I Bulletin of Pharmacy, vol. v, p. 77, 1891.

§ Since the above was written the writer's attention has been called to the follow-
ing reference contained in the Botanisches Centralblatt, No. 44. 1891: ■' E. Kayser,
Note sur les ferments de L'ananas, Annales de I'Institute Pasteur, 1891, No. 7."
To how great an extent this communication treats of the work about to be described
the writer has at present no means of judging, as the above periodical is not at hand.

282 R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

tional reason for believing in the probable wide-spread distribution
of proteid-digesting principles throughout the vegetable kingdom.

The proteid-digesting power* of fresh pineapple juice is something
quite remarkable in its intensity ; it is moreover a constant feature
and one which admits of easy demonstration. During the past few
months great numbers of ripe pineapples have been examined in the
svriter's laboratory and in no instance has the juice failed to show
marked proteolytic power, as evidenced by its ready solvent action
on blood fibrin and other forms of proteid matter.

In addition to this proteid-digesting power, we have discovered
that the juice also possesses in a remarkable degree the power of curd-
ling; or clotting milk. Neutralized pineapple juice added to milk
warmed at 40° C, quickly brings about a separation of the casein, in
the form of a thick clot or curd, the action being apparently exactly
analogous to that of the rennet-ferment or rennin. Boiling the neu-
tralized juice prior to its addition to the milk prevents this separation
of a clot, and hence the action in question must be due to the pres-
ence of a rennet-like ferment. This ferment, indeed, we have been
able to separate from the juice, together with the proteolytic fer-
ment, by saturation of the fluid with ammonium sulphate and with
this preparation we have substantiated its milk-curdling properties.

General character of pineapple juice.

As is well known, the pineapple is an exceedingly juicy fruit, an
average sized one of 1100 grams yielding, after chopping the tissue
and subjecting it to sufficient pressure, 600-800 cubic centimeters,
or considerably more than half its weight, of juice. As it flows
from the press the fluid has a somewhat turbid appearance, not
easily removed by filtration through paper, but eventually, as the
pores of the paper become somewhat filled up, a perfectly clear
yellowish colored filtrate is obtained, of very decided acid reaction
and with an average specific gravity of 1043. The acidity is very
pronounced, but naturally quite variable, being dependent in part
upon the ripeness of the fruit. A determination of the acidity of
twenty distinct samples of filtered juice showed an average acidity
equivalent to 0-45 per cent, hydrochloric acid (HCl), the extremes
being 0'28 per cent, and 0-65 per cent., calculated as HCl. The con-
tent of proteid matter in the clear filtered juice is quite small.
Heated with Millon's reagent, a fairly strong proteid reaction is

* This was referred to by the writer in a paper read before the Philadelphia County
Medical Society, May 13, 1891, an abstract of which was pubh shed in the Medical
News, vol. Iviii, p. 719.

M. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 283

obtained, the intensity of which, however, appears to be due in part
to the presence of tyrosin or some related soluble body.

With acetic acid alone no precipitate is produced, but with acetic
acid and potassium ferrocyanide a slight precipitate or turbidity
results. With the biuret test, the reaction is in great part vitiated
by the large amount of sugar present in the juice, which gives rise to
an intense yellowish-brown color on addition of the strong alkali.

Neutralization of the acid juice with sodium carbonate fails to
give any neutralization precipitate whatever, thus showing the
absence of acid-albumin. Concentrated nitric acid produces in the
clear filtered juice a white precipitate soluble in excess of the acid,
the fluid taking on a bright yellow color.

Fresh pineapple juice filtered clear and Avith average acidity, sub-
jected to fractional heat precipitation grows slightly turbid at
60-62° C, the turbidity increasing graduallj^ as the temperature is
raised until To-'ZS" C, is reached, when a small flocky coagulum
results. The filtrate from this coagulum on being further heated
shows signs of turbidity at about 82° C, increasing with the rise
in temperature, without however any distinct signs of flocking until
the boiling point is reached. As the fluid commences to boil, but
sometimes only after persistent boiling, a fine flocky precipitate sep-
arates, which on filtration leaves a perfectly clear fluid. This fluid,
free from all matter coagulable by heat, gives with Millon's reagent
the usual proteid reaction, while with acetic acid and potassium fer-
rocyanide, it yields a distinct white precipitate. Concentrated nitric
acid alone gives no reaction, but addition of saturated-salt solution
with the acid causes a distinct turbidity, which is increased rather
than diminished by heat. We have thus evidence of the presence in
pineapple juice of what appears to be three distinct proteids ; two
separable from the acid juice by heat alone, one at about 75° C, the
other at 100° C, while the third body is wholly non-coagulable by
heat, but is precipitable by acetic acid and potassium ferrocyanide
This latter proteid can also be precipitated by saturation of its solu-
tion with ammonium sulphate (after removal of the proteids separable
by boiling) together with some non-proteid matter present in the
juice, and after removal of the ammonium sulphate by dialysis o-ives
the reactions above indicated. It is present only in very small
quantity. In some cases, however, this thii'd body is j) resent in the
juice in larger quantity, or to express it more exactly, in some speci-
mens the precipitate produced by acetic acid and potassium fer-
rocyanide in the filtrate from the heat precipitations is considerably
more pronounced than first described.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 38 Jan., 1892.

284 R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

The two precipitates produced by heat alone, viz : at V5-78° C.
and at 100° C. are not coagulated proteids in the ordinary sense of
the term. Unlike an ordinary coagulum of albumin or globulin,
these precipitates, when filtered off and washed with water, dis-
solve readily and almost entirely in dilute solutions of potassium
hj'^droxide ; they are also more or less completely soluble in 0-5 per
cent, solution of sodium carbonate, especially if warmed, and are
somewhat soluble in 0*2 per cent, hydrochloric acid. In strong
nitric acid on the other hand, both precipitates are insoluble unless
a large quantity of the acid is added. They are likewise insoluble
in 10 per cent, solution of sodium chloride. The proteid separable
by heat at about 75° C. appears somewhat more soluble in 0'5 per
cent, sodium carbonate than the substance separating at 100° C, the
latter dissolving completely in 0"5 per cent, sodium carbonate only
when the mixture is heated to boiling. The solution of the above
precipitates in dilute alkali is not alkali-albumin, although the sub-
stance is in part precipitated by neutralization of the alkaline fluid,
since nitric acid gives a precipitate apparently wholly insoluble in
excess of the acid, even on heating.

These two proteids, when dissolved in potassium hydroxide and
tested with a few drops of a dilute solution of cupric sulphate, give
a violet rather than a red biuret reaction.

While thus these two proteids precipitated by heat, at 75° and
100° C. respectively, ai"e not exactly akin to an ordinary albumin or
globulin in their behavior towards heat, neither do they closely
resemble on the other hand an ordinary albumose, like the fi phyt-
albumose of Martin* present in papaw juice, since the precipitates
are not readily soluble in nitric acid, even when heated, and when
once dissolved are not separable on cooling the solution.

As already stated, the amount of proteid matter in pineapple juice
is comparatively small and apparently these two proteids, separable
by boiling, compose the greater part of the albuminous matter. The
amount was determined by simply heating 100'^'= of filtered (acid) juice
to boiling, collecting the precipitate on a weighed filter, washing it
thoroughl}^ with boiling Avater and drying it at 110° C. until of
constant weight. The result showed the presence of only 0-0270
gram in the 100°'^ of juice, or less than 0"025 per cent.

When neutralized pineapple juice is subjected to heat precipita-
tion, the initial turbidity makes its appearance at about 72°-74° C.
with separation of flocks at 82°-83° C. The filtrate from this pre-
* Journal of Physiology, vol. vi, p. 347.

H. a. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 285

cipitate remains clear even when the solution is boiled, but a drop
or two of acetic acid added to the hot fluid produces a turbidity,
which on further heating eventually changes to a flocculent precip-
itate. In the filtrate from this second precipitate, acetic acid and
potassium ferrocyanide show the presence, in small quantity, of
what is presumably a non-coagulable proteose. It is thus evident
that the presence of acid lowers the temperature at which these
bodies are precipitated by heat, and further that the substance pre-
cipitated at 10U° C. can be made to separate only in the presence of
dilute acid. This fact certainly favors the view that the juice
contains two distinct proteids precipitable by heat, the one at
about 75° C. in an acid solution or 82° C. in a neutral fluid, the
other at 100° C. in an acid fluid. On the other hand, the above
reactions might be produced by a single substance slowly or incom-
pletely precipitated by heat, analogous to the separation of Mar-
tin's* /i' phytalbumose, which is described as separating in two dis-
tinct stages, viz: at from 78**-82° C, and from 83°-95° C. As
against this latter view, however, we have the apparent fact that
in the pineapple juice, one of the proteids is precipitated from a
neutral or acid fluid by heat, the other only from an acid fluid.

Long continued dialysis (10-12 days) of neutralized pineapple
juice in running water, protected from putrefaction by addition of
thymol, gives little or no separation of any proteid matter. A faint
turbidity may appear, but no separation suflficiently large to collect
on a filter. Such turbidity as does piake its appearance clears up on
the addition of a few drops of a strong solution of sodium chloride,
or of dilute nitric acid ; two reactions equally characteristic of a
globulin or of heteroproteose.

Saturation of neutralized, or acid, pineapple juice with pure am-
monium sulphate precipitates all of the proteids present in the fluid,
together with a small amount of non-albuminous matter. In this
precipitate are contained both the proteolytic and rennet-like fer-
ments.

Saturation of neutralized pineapple juice with sodium chloride
gives rise to a small flocculent precipitate of proteid matter, which
is not at all increased by the addition of acetic acid to the salt-
saturated fluid. Addition of ammonium sulphate in substance to
the filtrate from the salt-saturation precipitate produces a further
precipitate of proteid matter, thus suggesting a possible separation
of two distinct bodies. Further, simple boiling of the filtrate from

* Journal of Physiology, vol. vi, p. 34.9.

286 R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

the sodium chloride saturation produces a flock}^ precipitate, sub-
stantiating this view.

Saturation of the neutralized juice with magnesium sulphate like-
wise produces a precipitate of proteid raattei", somewhat heavier
than that induced by saturation with sodium chloride. Addition
of crystals of sodium sulphate to the filtrate from the above precip-
itates causes finally a slight additional separation of flocculent mat-
ter containing a little proteid.

Both the sodium chloride precipitate and the magnesium sulphate
precipitate are strongly proteolytic.

The general character of these precipitates will be discussed more
in detail later on, in connection with the isolation of the proteolytic
ferment.

Proteolytic action of fresh pineapple juice under varying conditions.

As already stated, fresh pineapple juice is strongly proteolytic,
and its proteid-digesting power is manifested in a neutral, acid, or
even alkaline-reacting fluid. In this respect, therefore, the ferment
resembles trypsin rather than pepsin.

When blood fibrin is warmed at 40° C, or thereabout, with filtered
pineapple juice of average acidity the fibrin swells up somewhat in
the acid fluid, then quickly becomes disintegrated and in part dis-
solved, the initial action certainly being as vigorous as that of a
moderately strong solution of pepsin-hydrochloric acid. There in-
variably remains, however, even after long-continued warming at
40° C, a fairly large insoluble residue, not of unaltered fibrin, but
of finely divided antialbumid-like matter more or less soluble in
weak alkaline fluids, from which it is reprecipitated by the addition
of dilute acid.

Pineapple juice neutralized, or made very faintly alkaline, with
dilute sodium carbonate acts apparently in much the same manner
as the acid juice, except that in the alkaline-reacting fluid there is
less residue of antialbumid-like matter and in the neutralized juice,
naturally, an utter absence of any swelling of the fibrin. An ex-
amination of the several digestive mixtures, however, shows that the
products formed in a neutral or alkaline solution are different some-
what from those formed in an acid-reacting fluid, a point which will
be referred to again later on.

One of the most noticeable features in the digestive action of the
pineapple ferment is its peculiar softening and disintegration of the
proteid matter. This is most noticeable in a neutral solution; thus

a. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 28*7

when blood fibrin, for example, is warmed with neutralized pine-
apple juice, or better, with a neutral solution of the isolated ferment
there is at first no sign of any digestive action whatever, but on
stirring or shaking the mixture, after a sufficient length of time, the
fibrin falls to pieces completely disintegrated with the production of
a more or less turbid fluid, after which its solution is fairly rapid,
although there invariably remains considerable insoluble matter, the
same as in an acid mixture. While this action of the ferment
resembles somewhat that of trypsin, there is never seen that pecu-
liar eating into the fibrin, so characteristic of the latter ferment; the
fibrin never has the appearance of being full of tiny holes, as if
bored by a host of worms, so often seen in a trypsin digestion. The
pineapple ferment appears simply to soften the fibrin with more or
less solvent action at the same time, so that when stirred or pressed
it breaks apart into larger or smaller pieces, these in turn under-
going a like change until the fibrin is thoroughly disintegrated and
the soluble portion dissolved.

1. — Influence of the reaction of the fluid.

As is well known, trypsin * and papain f act best in an alkaline
medium ; the pineapple ferment on the other hand acts most ener-
getically in a neutral solution, although the ferment is decidedly
active in the presence of both acids and alkali carbonate.

In studying the effect of changes in the reaction of pineapple
juice on its proteolytic power, or in measuring. the proteolytic action
of the ferment under varying conditions, the following method was,
as a rule, made use of ; a given volume of filtered pineapple juice,
usually 100 c. c, was warmed at 40° C. for a given length of time
with 10 grams of moist, freshly coagulated egg-albumin, which had
been completely freed from all soluble matter by thorough washing
with hot water. When the period of digestion was completed the
undissolved matter was collected on a weighed filter, washed with
water until all soluble bodies were removed and then dried at 110° C.
until of constant weight. By subtracting the weight of the insolu-
ble residue so obtained from the weight of dry albuminj equivalent
to the moist albumin used in the experiment, the amount of proteid
matter digested, or rather converted into soluble products, was ascer
tained. Obviously, however, the so-called undissolved portion of

* Studies from the Laboratory of Phj-siological Chem., Yale Uuiversity, vol. i, p. 135.
f Martin, Journal of Physiology, vol. v, p. 221 ; vol. vi, p. 336.

\ Determined by simply drying 1 0 grams of the sampled coagulated albumin at 11 0° C
until of constant weight.

288 H. H. Chittende7i — lerments of Pineapple Juice.

the albumin was in part composed of insoluble antialbumid-like
matter, especially when the digestions were carried on in acid or
neutral media. The method, however, afforded a fairly accurate
means of measuring the proteolytic power of the ferment, as con-
tained in pineapple juice, while the greater resistance of coagulated
albumin as compared with blood fibrin seemed to offer advantages
in the way of accuracy.

Experiment I. — The pineapple juice employed had an acidity
equal to 0-445 per cent. HCl,* requiring 13 c. c. of a 5-0 per cent,
solution of Na^COg to neutralize 100 c. c. The 10 grams of moist co-
agulum used in each digestive mixture contained 1*3G33 grams of
dry albumin (at 110° C). The mixtures were warmed at 40° C. for
3^ hours.

Per cent.
Pineapple Juice. Reaction. Undissolved albumin. digested.

A 100 c. c.f natural acidity 0'8932 gram 345

B 100 neutralized 0-8187 400

Experiment II. — The acidity of the pineapple juice employed
was equal to 0-507 per cent. HCl. Necessary to neutralize 100 c. c,
14*7 c. c. of a 5*0 per cent, solution of Na^CO^. Weight of dry
albumin equivalent to the 10 grams of moist coagulum used in each
mixture, 1-3302 grams. The digestions were carried on at 40° C. for
2 hours.

Per cent.
Pineapple juice. Reaction. Undissolved albumin. digested.

A 100 c. c. natural acidity 1-0536 grams 20-8

B 100 neutralized 0-9355 29-7

Experiment III — The acidit}^ of the pineapple juice was not
accurately determined. 15 c. c. of a dilute solution of sodium carbo-
nate were required to neutralize 100 c. c. of juice. The weight of
dry albumin contained in the 10 grams of moist coagulum used in
the digestions was 1-4583 grams. The mixtures were warmed at
40^ C. for 5^ hours.

A
B

Pineapple juice.

100 c. c.

100

Reaction.

natural acidity
half-neutralized

Undissolved albumin.

0-8936 gram
0-8733

Per cent,
digested.

38-8
40-2

C

100

neutralized

0-8115

44-4

From these results, it is seen that full 40 per cent, or more of
coagulated egg-albumin can be converted into soluble products by
the pineapple ferment, under the conditions of the above experi-

* Determined by titration with a standard solution of ammonium hydroxide,
f Plus the amount of sodium carbonate solution required for neutralization in B, and
of water to make an equal dilution in A.

R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 289

ments, and further that the neutralized juice is considerably more
active than the unneutralized fluid. Apparently, the proteolytic
action of the ferment increases with the decrease in acidity, until the
neutral point is reached.

With blood fibrin, on the other hand, juice of the natural acidity
appears to have a greater digestive power than the neutralized fluid,
although on this point we have only a single experiment to offer.
This may perhaps be explained simply by the swelling of the fibrin
in the dilute organic acid, this condition possibly facilitating the
action of the ferment.

Experiment lY. — The acidity of the pineapple juice was equal to
0*525 per cent. HCl. Necessary to neutralize 100 c. c. of filtered
juice, 15-2 c. c. 5-0 per cent, solution of Na^COg. Weight of dry
albumin contained in 10 grams of moist coagulum, 1 "4486 grams.
Weight of dry fibrin (at 110° C.) contained in 6 grams of washed
blood fibrin,* the amount used in the digestions, 2*5273 grams.
The digestive mixtures were warmed at 40° C. for 2 hours.

Blood tibriu .
Egg-albumin

Pineapple Undissolved Per cent,

juice. Reaction. proteid. digested.

j 100 c. c. natural acidity 1*2435 grams 50*8

i 100 neutralized 1*4321 43*3

j 100 natural acidity 1*0325 28*8

I 100 neutralized 1*0096 30*3

The most noticeable feature in this experiment, aside from the
point already mentioned, is the far greater digestibility of blood
fibrin as compared with egg-albumin, a fact which might naturally
be expected, since the same is true in the case of other well-known
proteolytic fei*ments.

The proteids of muscle tissue are likewise more readily digested
by pineapple juice than coagulated egg-albumin, full 60 per cent, of
the former proteids being converted into soluble products during
one hour's warming at 40° C. This is plainly shown in the follow-
ing experiment, in which also the muscle proteids, like egg-albumin,
are seen to be more rapidly digested in the neutralized juice than in
the acid fluid.

Experiment V. — The acidity of the pineapple juice employed was
equal to 0*507 per cent. HCl. Necessary to neutralize 100 c. c. of
juice, 14*7 c. c. of a 5 per cent, solution of Na^COj. Weight of dry

* Washed with water and salt sohition, then boiled in water, alcohol, and lastly in
water.

Pineapple
juice.

Reaction.

Undissolved
proteid.

Per cent,
digrested.

j 100 C. C.

natural acidity

1 -8945 grams

30-6

i 100

neutralized

1-1366

58-4

i 100

natural acidity

1-6368

40-1

} 100

neutralized

1-0145

62-8

290 M. IT. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

proteids contained in 10 grams of j^repared muscle* tissue, 2-7258
grams.

]4 hour at 40° C.
1 iiour at 40° C.

The acidity of pineapple juice is due to organic acids and acid
salts, far weaker in their action on ferments than mineral acids.
Addition of dilute mineral acid in small quantity to pineapple juice
of natural acidity checks, hut does not prevent the digestive action
of the ferment. Thus, the addition of an equal volume of 0-2 per
cent, hydrochloric acid to pineapple juice diminishes very greatly its
digestive power, but does not prevent it altogether. From this we
may conclude that pineapple juice can exert its proteolytic power,
to a certain extent, Avhen taken into the stomach and mixed with the
acid of the gastric juice. Obviously, the addition of an equal vol-
ume of 0-2 per cent, hydrochloric acid to neutralized pineapple juice
does not necessarily mean the presence of 0*1 per cent. HCl, since
the acid may be in great part used up in decomposing the various
salts present, and in combining with the various forms of organic
matter contained in the juice.

Experiment VI. — The acidity of the pineapple juice employed
was equal to 0-268 per cent. HCl. The 10 grams of moist albumin
coaguluni used in the digestions contained 1*7972 grams of dry
albumin. The mixtures were warmed at 40° C for 17 liours.

Pineapple juice of natural Undissolved Percent,

acidity. albumin. digested.

A 100 c. c. + 100 c. c. H,0 1-2238 grams 32-0

B 100 +100 0-2^ HCl 1-4673 19-0

Were it not for the large quantities of salts, etc., in pineapple
juice the above inhibitory action of the hydrochloric acid on the
ferment Avould be far more pronounced. This is shown by the two
following experiments :

By adding about five volumes of 95 per cent, alcohol to pineapple
juice, a flocculent precipitate results composed of the proteids of the
juice, together with the proteolytic ferment and some salts. On
dissolving this precipitate in water a solution is obtained with
marked proteolytic power.

* Prepared by soaking chopped muscle tissue, freed from lat and tendons, in water
until all blood and soluble extractives were removed.

R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 291

Experiment VII. — Aqueous solution of the above described alco-
holic precipitate. The 10 grams of moist albumin coagulum used in
the digestions contained 1-4138 grams of dry albumin. The mix-
tures were warmed at 40° C. for 4 hours.

Undissolved Per cent.

Ferment solution. Reaction. albumin. digested.

A 100" + 100"='^ H.,0 neutral 1-0881 gi-ams 23-1

B 100 +100 0-2r^HCl 0-lj^HCl 1-4099 0-3 ,

Thus, with this very impure preparation of the ferment the pres-
ence of 0-1 per cent, hydrochloric acid was sufficient to entirely
prevent any digestive action whatever. Doubtless, even smaller
amounts of acid would have the same influence on the more per-
fectly isolated ferment.

As already stated, saturation of pineapple juice, either neutralized
or of natural acidity, with ammonium sulphate precipitates all or
nearly all of the proteids present in the fluid, the precipitate show-
ing by its proteolytic action that it contains the ferment as well.
An aqueous solution of such a pi'ecipitate, dialyzed to free it from
ammonium sulphate, has a marked digestive action, but when mixed
with hydrochloric acid its proteolytic power, like that of the alcohol
precipitate, is immediately checked.

Experiment YIII. — Aqueous, dialyzed solution of the above
described ammonium sulphate precipitate. The amount of dry
albumin equivalent to the 10 grams of moist coagulum used in the
digestions Avas r5120 grams. The mixtures were warmed at 40° C.
for 5 hours.

Undissolved Per cent.

Fenuent solution. Reaction. albumin. digested.

A lOO'^'-flOO''^ H2O neutral 1-1791 grams 23-1

B 100 +100 0-2 ^HCl O-l.'lIHCl 1-4897 1-5

As previously stated, pineapple juice, and the isolated ferment as
as well, manifests its proteolytic action in an alkaline-reacting fluid,
as well as in the presence of an acid or neutral reaction. When,
however, the solution becomes strongly alkaline proteolytic action
is quickly retarded, the ferment in this respect differing very
decidedly from the related ferments papain and trypsin. Thus, the
addition of small quantities of sodium carbonate to neutralized pine-
apple juice, a few hundredths of one per cent., produces no notice-
able effect, but as the quantity is increased the retarding action of
the alkali becomes more pronounced, tintil at last it checks the pro-
teolytic action of the ferment altogether. This is clearly shown in
the following experiments:

Trans. Conn. Acad,. Vol. VIII. 39 Jan., 1892.

292 B. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

Experiment IX. — The acidity of the pineapple juice employed
was equal to 0-462 per cent. HCl. Necessary to neutralize 100*== of
juice, l-S^^'^of 5-0 per cent, solution of IS^CO^. The 10 grams of
moist albumin coagulum used in the digestions contained 1-3516
grams of dry albumin. The mixtures were warmed at 40° C. for 1^
hours.

Pineapple
juice.

Reaction.

Undissolved
albumin.

Per cent,
diuested.

A

100--

1 neutralized

0-9663 gram

28-6

B

100

neutralized

0-9465

30-0

C

100

0-025 rf Na,C03

0-9522

29-6

D

100

0-05

0-9735

28-0

E

100

010

0-9968

26-3

Experiment X. — The acidity of the pineapple juice employed was
equal to 0-656 per cent. HCl. Necessary to neutralize 100="=, 19-1°''
of 5*0 per cent, solution of Na^COj. The amount of dry albumin
equivalent to the 10 grams of moist coagulum used in the digestions
was 1-3468 grams. The mixtures were warmed at 40° C. for 2 hours.

Pineapple
juice.

Reaction.

Undissolved
albumin.

Percent,
digested.

A

100«

neutralized

1-0257 grams

23-9

B

100

0-1 <2 NaoCOs

1-0577

31-5

C

100

0-5

1-2263

9 0

D

100

1-0

1-3520

0

Hence, as is evident from the above experiments, the addition of
sodium carbonate to neutralized pineapple juice to the extent of U-5
per cent., almost completely stops the action of the ferment, while
the presence of 1-0 per cent, of the alkali carbonate checks it
altogether. Doubtless, the isolated ferment would show a still
greater susceptibility to the action of dilute alkaline fluids.

From the foregoing, it is evident that digestion with bromelin,
the ferment of pineapple juice, goes on most vigorously in neu-
tral solutions, but that the presence of small amounts of acid, espe-
cially such as are contained in pineapple juice, and of sodium
carbonate interfere with the proteolytic action only slightly; larger
amounts, however, check the action of the ferment altogether.

It is further evident from the foregoing results that the pro-
teolytic ferment of pineapple juice is an exceedingly vigorous fer-
ment. We cannot say definitely how much pure ferment by weight
is contained in 100*^° of filtered pineapple juice. There is no doubt
that the amount varies greatly in different specimens of fruit; in
fact, our results show plainly differences in proteolytic power hard
to be accounted for in any other way. Experiments to be described

R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 293

later show that the proteolytic ferment is either preeipitable by heat,
or else is associated with proteid bodies so precipitated. Now since
the total amount of matter preeipitable by boiling from 100*^'^ of
filtered pineapple juice amounts to only 27 milligrams, and this obvi-
ously cannot be all j)roteo]ytic ferment, it is probable that the
amount of pui'e ferment contained in the quantity of pineapple
juice used in the various digestions recorded does not amount to
more than a few milligrams, and yet in one experiment with the
above quantity of ferment the equivalent of 1714 milligrams of dry
muscle proteids were dissolved in one hour at 40° C, and of blood
fibrin an amount equivalent to 1283 milligrams of dry proteid in two
hours at 40° C.

With such vigorous digestive action as this, many possibilities
suggest themselves in the way of practical application of the isolated
ferment, or even of the pineapple juice itself. As a means of pep-
tonizing foods it offers peculiar advantages in that the products of
digestion, to be referred to later, are free from the objectionable
taste usually associated with peptones resulting from the proteolytic
action of animal ferments. Again, the ferment cannot but consti-
tute a good solvent for pseudo-membranes, while its vegetable origin
would perhaps recommend it as a more agreeable remedy than the
kindred ferments from animal tissue. In some sections, popular
opinion has already accredited to pineapple juice virtue as a sol-
vent for the false membranes formed in diphtheria, a belief which
is now seen to be founded on a reliable basis.

2. — Influence of temperature.

It is a matter of common observation that the digestive ferments,
or enzymes, present in the animal organism act most energetically
at approximately the body temperature, viz: 38°-40° C. Certain of
the vegetable ferments on the other hand, notably the diastase of
malt, act most vigorously at a higher temperature. With papain,
the proteolytic ferment of papaw juice, Martin demonstrated the
greater activity of the ferment at temperatures between 30° and
36° C. than between 18° and 20° C. in neutral solutions,* but appar-
ently the effect of higher temperatures was not tried.

Experiment XI. — The 10 grams of moist albumin coagulum used
in the digestions contained 1*4990 grams of dry albumin. The
several mixtures were warmed with the albumin at the stated tem-

* Journal of Physiology, vol. v, jx 221.

294 JR. H. Chittenden — Terments of Pineapple Juice.

peratures for 2\ hours, the juice having been first brought to the de-
sired temperature prior to the addition of the albumin.

Neutralized
pineapple juice.

Tempciature.

Undissolved
albumin

Per cent.

digested.

A

100 C.

c.

12°

C.

1-3090 grams

12-7

B

100

20

1-3037

13-1

C

100

40

1-3281

18-1

D

100

49

1-1959

20-3

E

100

56

1-1709

21-9

Although in this experiment, the proteolytic action of the juice,
for some reason, was not as great as usual the results show in a
general way that the activity of the ferment increases with the rise
in temperature up to 56° C. Further, that the ferment is active at
comparatively low temj^eratures, although there is a striking differ-
ence (nearly 50 per cent.) in activity between the two extremes, viz:
at 12'' and 56° C. That this peculiar ferment is truly more active at
50°-60° C. than at 30°-40° C, under the above conditions, is con-
firmed by the two following experiments :

Experiment XII. — The weight of dry albumin equivalent to the
10 grams of moist coagulum used in each digestion was 1-2937
grams. The several portions of neutralized pineapple juice were
brought to the required tempei'atures in carefully regulated water-
baths, and when the desired point was reached the albumin loas at
once added and the mixtures kept at the stated temperatures for two
hoiii's, after which, as in the other experiments, the imdissolved
albumin was filtered off, washed, dried and weighed.

Neutralized
pineapple juice.

Temperature.

Undissolved
albumin.

Per cent,
digested.

A

100 c. c.

40° C.

1-0259 grains

20-7

B

100

49

0-9648

25-5

C

100

58

0-9387

27-8

D

100 .

66

0-9721

24-9

Experiment XIII. — This experiment was conducted in essentially
the same manner as the preceding, but at different temperatures.
The weight of dry albumin equivalent to the 10 grams of moist
coagulum used in the individual digestions was 1-3710 grams. The
ferment was allowed to act on the albumin for two hours at the re-
spective temperatures. In this experiment, duplicate digestions were
made and the results are interesting as showing about how much
variation may be expected from the errors naturally incidental to
methods of this character.

M. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 295

Neutralized
pineapplejuice.

Temperature.

Undissolved
albumin.

Per cent,
digested.

A

100 c. c.

50°

C.

0-9190

gram

33-0

B

100

60

0-9289

32-3

C

100

60

0-9286

32-3

D

100

70

1-0669

22-3

E

100

70

1-0562

230

F

100

80

1-3665

0-4

From these two experiments it is plain that the ferment as con-
tained in neutralized pineapple juice is most active, on coagulated
egg-albumin at least, between the temperatures of 50° and 60° C.
and, further, that even at 70° C. the ferment is decidedly active. At
80° C. there is practically no action whatever. In this connection
it is to be remembered that neutralized pineapple juice when sub-
jected to heat precipitation grows slightly turbid at 72°-74° C, with
separation of a flocky precipitate at about 82° C. Doubtless the
destruction of the ferment by heat above 70° C. is associated with
this precipitation, it being quite possible that it is the destroyed
ferment itself which is so precipitated.

When pineapple juice of natural acidity is warmed wdth egg-
albumin at the above high temperatures, a result quite different from
the preceding is obtained ; under such conditions, the proteolytic
action of the ferment is diminished rather than increased and at 70°
C. or under, the ferment is completeh^ destroyed. This is shown in
the following experiment.

Experiment XIV. — The pineapple juice employed had an acidity
equal to 0-454 per cent. HCl. The 10 grams of moist coagulum
used in the digestions contained 1-2956 grams of dry albumin. The
mixtures of pineapple juice and albumin were warmed at the given
temperatures for two hours, 100 c. c. of pineapple juice being used in
each digestion .

Temperature.

Reaction.

ITndissolv
aihuuiiu

ed

Per cent,
rtifjested.

40° C.

natural acidity*

0-9667 gr

am

25-4

40

neutral

0-9679

35-3

55

natural acidity

1-0672

17-7

55

neutral

0-8968

30-8

70

natural acidity

1-3012

0

70 neutral 1-0581 18-4

From these results it is seen that while the neutralized fluid is
more active at 55° C. than at 40° C, thus confirming the previous

* In this individual experiment, the neutralized and acid fluids, for some reason,
show exactly the same digestive power at 40° C.

296 H. II. Chittende7i — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

data, the acid-reacting fluid, on the other hand, shows far less diges-
tive power at 55° C, than at 40° C. and further, at 70° C. is entirely
devoid of digestive action, while the neutral fluid at the latter
temperature is strongly proteolytic. The general trend of these re-
sults, therefore, is to show that the ferment in a neutral solution
will withstand exposure to high temperatures better than in an acid-
reacting fluid ; and further, that while the ferment in a neutral solu-
tioji, as in neutralized pineapple juice, acts most energetically be-
tween 50° and 60° C, in an acid solution proteolytic action is most
vigorous in the neighborhood of 40° C.

With pepsin, Biernacke* has shown that an acid solution increases
the resistance of the enzyme to the destructive action of a high tem-
perature ; thus this ferment in the presence of 02 per cent, hydro-
chloric acid may be heated up to 60° C. before it is killed, while in a
neutral solution of the same strength the ferment is destroyed at 55° C.
Trypsin, on the other hand, was found more resistant to heat in an
alkaline fluid than in a neutral or weakly acid solution.

In this connection it is interesting to notice that the acid-reacting
pineapple juice (natural acidity) subjected to heat jjrecipitation
grows turbid at 60°-62°, Avith separation of flocks at about 15° C; in
other words, the destruction of the ferment by heat in the acid-react-
ing fluid is coincident with the commencement of the precipitation,
the same as in the neutralized juice.

While neutralized pineapple juice is extremely active on proteid
matter at the high temj^eratures stated, exposure of the ferment
solution by itself in the absence of any proteid matter., to the above
temperatures for even a short time quickly destroys the ferment.
This fact is clearlj^ shown in the following experiment :

Experiment XV. — Given volumes of neutralized pineapple juice
were placed in water-baths having the desired temperatures, and
when the solutions themselves had reached the temperatures stated
in the following table they were kept at that point for fifteen minutes,
after which they were removed from the baths, cooled to 40° C. and
10 grams of coagulated egg-albumin added. The mixtures were then
warmed at 40° C. for two hours and the proteolytic action deter-
mined in the usual manner. The amount of dry albumin (at 110° C.)
equivalent to the 10 grams of moist coagulum used in the individual
digestions was 1-3864 grams.

* Das Yerhalten der Verdauungsenzyme bei TemperaturerhohungeQ. Zeitschrill
fiir Biologie, Band xxviii. p. 49.

a. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 29 V

Neutralized
pineapple juice.

Warmed for 15
minutes at

Undissolved
albumin.

Per cent,
digested.

A

100 C.

c.

40^

C.

1-1060 grams

17-3

B

100

60

1-2049

9-9

C

100

70

1-2971

3-0

D

100

80

1-3420

0

While neutralized pineapple juice is capable of digesting more
proteid matter at 60° C. than under like conditions at 40° C, warm-
ing the ferment solution alone at 60° for fifteen minutes, prior to the
introduction of the albumin, diminishes the proteolytic power of the
ferment full 50 per cent. This result suggests that the products
of digestion protect the ferment, to a certain extent, from the
destructive action of the high temperature. The ferment acts quickly
on proteid matter, so that even after a few minutes exposure of a
mixture of albumin and pineapple juice to 40°-70° C, some proteoses
and peptone are doubtless formed, which can in some manner exert
their protective action. When, however, the i^eutralized juice alone
is heated to 60° C, in the absence of proteoses and peptone, the
ferment is rapidly destroyed. Doubtless, the ferment as contained
in pineapple juice is more resistant to heat, than a solution of the
isolated ferment would be, from the possible protective action of
salts present, although of this point we cannot speak definitely.
These results accord with Biernacki's* observations on the ferments
pepsin, trypsin and ptyalin. This investigator found that albumose,
amphopeptone and antipeptone raised the temperature at which
trypsin was destroyed five degrees or more ; that peptone raised
the temperature at which pepsin was destroyed in acid solution,
from 50°-55° C. up to 7u° C. These results may perhaps be ex-
plained on the ground of a combination of the ferments with the
albuminous bodies, the hypothetical compounds having greater
resistance towards heat than the ferment alone. In any event,
the general statement may be made that the purer the ferment the
less resistant will it probably be to the destructive action of high
temperatures.

While the preceding results show that the pineapple ferment, as
contained in filtered pineapple juice, is liable to be killed on long-
continued exposure to temperatures favorable for its proteolytic
action, the fluid may be heated at temperatures under 40° C. for long-
periods of time, or even evaporated to dryness, without destruction
of the ferment, provided the temperature is carefully regulated and

* Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, Band xxviii, p. 49.

298 a. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

not allowed to pass beyond 40" C. This is demonstrated by the
following experiment :

Experiment XVI. — The pineapple juice employed had an acidity
equal to 0*445 per cent. HCl, 100 c. c. requiring 13 0 c. c. of a 5*0 per
cent, solution of sodium carbonate for neutralization. The 10 arrams
of albumin coagulum used in the digestions contained 1-3633 grams
of dry albumin,

A 100 c. c. pineapple juice + 13-0 c. c. 5 i^er cent. NaaCOa sol.

B 100 •• " +13-0 "

C 100 ■' " +13-0 " H,0

D 100 " " +13-0 "

Solutions B and D were evaporated to dryness on plates at 40° C,
the residues dissolved in water and made up to 113 c. c. respectively.
All four solutions Avere then mixed with 10 grams of albumin coag-
ulum and warmed at 40° C. for 3^ hours, after which the amount of
albumin digested was determined in the usual manner.

Keaction, etc.

Undissolved allmmiu.

Per cent,
digested.

A

neutral

0-8177 gram

40-1

B

' ' evaporated

1-0315

25-1

C

natural acidity

0-893-3

34-5

D

' ' evaporated

0-8638

36-7

From these results, it is plain that pineapple juice of natural
acidity can be evaporated to dryness at a temperature not exceeding
40° C. and still preserve its proteolytic power. With neutralized
juice, however, the above results indicate a partial destruction of the
ferment during the evaporation. Whether this is due to the action
of the neutral salts formed by neutralization of the acid, or to some
other cause we cannot say. Possibly, the solution may have been
made slightly alkaline, which would naturally give rise to some de-
struction of the ferment. Several repetitions of the above experi-
ment, less carefully conducted, have shown that evaporation of the
acid juice, however, is very liable to result in a pai'tial loss of pro-
teolytic power, unless great care is taken in keeping the evaporating
fluid at 40° C. or under.

3. — Mate of action.

Pineapple juice is not only exceedingly active on proteid matter,
but under favorable circumstances the digestive power of the fer-
ment is quickly manifested. On blood fibrin and muscle tissue,
especially, the proteolytic action of the ferment is shown in a rapid

R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 299

solution of the proteid substance ; in fact, a single observation of the
manner in which blood fibrin is attacked by pineapple juice is suf-
ficient to give one a just appreciation of the energy of the ferment.
Thus in Experiment IV, it will be remembered that 50 per cent, of
the blood fibrin used in the experiment was converted into soluble
products in two hours, and that in Experiment V, with the proteid s
of muscle tissue, 58 per cent, of the proteid matter was dissolved
by neutral pineapple juice in half an hour at 40° C. Naturally, on
coagulated egg-albumin the digestive power of the ferment is less
quickly manifested, but the experiments already recorded show that
even with this more difficultly digestible proteid, the rate of action is
faii'ly rapid. The two experiments following give a general impres-
sion of the rate of action of the ferment, in the digestion of coagu-
lated egg-albumin.

Experiment XVII. — The 10 grams of albumin coagulum used in
the digestions contained 1 -3944 grams of dry albumin. The mixtures
were warmed at 45° C. for the periods stated in the following table,
the amount of albumin digested during the periods being then detei'-
mined in the usual manner.

Neutralized Undissolved Per cent,

pineapple juice. Time. albumin. di^fested.

A 100 c. c. A hour 1-3026 grams 6-6

B 100 1 1-3073 13-5

C 100 3 1-0837 33-4

D 100 4 0-8814 36-8

E 100 5 0-8531 38-9

Ex])eriment XVIII. — The 10 grams of albumin coagulum used in
the digestions contained 1-4333 grams of dry albumin. The mix-
tures were warmed at 40° C. for the different periods stated, after
which the undissolved albumin was filtered off, washed and weighed.

Neutral
pineapple

ized
Juice.

Time.

Undissolved
albumin.

Per cent,
digested.

A

100 0.

c.

i hour

1-3301 grams

7-9

B

100

i

1-2473

13-0

C

100

1

1-1554

19-4

D

100

8

1-1366

30-7

E

100

4

1-0117

39-5

F

100

6

1-0013

30-3

While the results of these two experiments differ somewhat from
each other in some respects, they are alike in showing that the fer-
ment commences to act upon the proteid matter at once, and that
this digestive action steadily continues, in the case of the above
proteid, for about four hours, after which time the action becomes
very much slower.

Trans. Comn. Acad., Vql. VIII. 40 Jak., 1892.

300 R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

Separation of the proteolytic ferment.

Saturation of neutralized pineapple juice with ammonium sulphate
precipitates, as already stated, all of the proteid matter contained in
the solution. The filtrate does not give the slightest trace of a tur-
bidity on boiling, even after the addition of acetic acid. Nitric acid
likewise fails to give any reaction. Acetic acid and potassium fer-
rocyanide, however, give a slight flocky precipitate, which does not
appear to be composed of proteid matter. The ammonium sulphate
precipitate contains all of the proteol^^tic ferment and likewise the
milk-curdling ferment, if this is a distinct body. It is readily and
completely soluble in water, and by long continued dialysis the
solution can be freed from ammonium sulphate. Unless every trace
of adherent salt is removed from the solution, the fluid remains
fairly clear, but the reaction so far as our experience extends be-
comes, almost invariably, slightly alkaline. On evaporation of the
fluid, after removal of all, or nearly all of the salt, a scaly residue is
obtained readily soluble in water, or in the slight trace of salt
present, with strong proteolytic power and giving distinct reactions
with the xanthoprotein, biuret and Millon's test. The aqueous
solution is usually slightly turbid, the turbidity however disappear-
ing on the addition of a little salt-solution, especially with the aid
of a gentle heat, also on the addition of 0*2 per cent, hydro-
chloric acid. Evidently, the bodies composing the ammonium sul-
phate precipitate are readily soluble in very dilute salt-solution, if
not in water alone.

This method constitutes a fairly good way of separating the fer-
ments from the bulk of the extraneous matters present in the juice.
We have not, however, spent much time in a close study of the make-
up of this product as it is obviously a mixture of essentially all the
proteid bodies contained in the juice, but it makes a very good
preparation with which to demonstrate the proteolytic and milk-
curdling properties of the ferments.

The most satisfactory method we have thus far found for the
isolation of the proteolytic ferment, and one which yields a product
with very strong digestive power, is by precipitation with common
salt.

Saturation of neuti'alized pineapple juice with sodium chloride
gives rise to a small flocculent precipitate, which is not at all in-
creased by the addition of acetic acid to the salt-saturated fluid.
Obviously, this precipitate might be composed of a globulin, or of a
body akin to heteroproteose. It was studied after the following

B. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 301

plan : a large \'olume of fi'eslily filtered juice was carefully neutral-
ized with sodium carbonate, and then saturated at the temperature of
the room with pure salt. The slight flocculent precipitate which re-
sulted was filtered off, washed with saturated salt-solution, then
dissolved in water and dialyzed in running water, putrefaction being
prevented by addition of thymol. After several days' dialysis,
though still containing some sodium chloride, a portion was tested
as follows : it had the appearance of a somewhat turbid fluid, as
though a separation had commenced to take place, but it could not
be filtered clear. On warming the mixture gently, the turbidity
showed a tendency to clear up somewhat. Subjected to careful
heating, the mixture appeared to show an increased turbidity at 65°
C, while at 72° C. there was a distinct and heavy turbity, but no
separation of flocks. As the temperature was raised, the turbidity
changed to a thick milkiness without, however, any appearance of
flocks even on boiling. The solution seemed perfectly neutral to
delicate test papers. By judicious addition of dilute acetic acid and
renewed heating, the milky fluid was finally made to yield a flocky
precipitate, in the filtrate from which no proteid reaction could be
obtained, thus indicating that the sodium chloride precipitate is
composed wholly of matter precipitable by heat.

Tlie solution taken from the dialyzer showed strong proteolytic
action on blood fibrin.

The remainder of the solution was dialyzed for one week lono-er
until nearly every trace of sodium chloride was removed, and again
tested. The fluid had a very milky appearance, but no distinct
separation of flocculent matter was seen. This heavy turbidity
cleared up somewhat on warming and disappeared completely on
adding a few drops of 20 per cent, salt-solution, also on the
addition of a drop or two of dilute nitric acid. The addition of
more nitric acid to the latter solution was followed by the reappear-
ance of a turbidity, which did not disappear by gentle heat, but
separated into flocks, not readily soluble in a large excess of nitric
acid.

The reaction of the solution taken from the dialyzer was faintly
alkaline. Heated, the solution became distinctly turbid at 65°-70°
C. and quite opaque at 80" C, but without separation of flocks until
after persistent boiling. A drop of acetic acid, however, added to
the boiling fluid quickly caused a flocculent precipitate, the filtrate
from which was practically free from all trace of proteids. The salt-
free solution, although faintly alkaline, still showed strong pro-
teolytic power.

302 JR. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

On cautiously adding 0-2 per cent, hydrochloric acid to the faintly
alkaline fluid a heavy turbidity made its appearance, which changed
to a flocculent precipitate as the fluid became slightly acid ; on
addition of a small excess of acid the precipitate quickly dissolved.
From this it may be inferred that if the solution had been perfectly
neutral, a more pronounced sepai-ation of the proteid might have oc-
curred in the dialyzer tube ; evidently, however, the body is ex-
tremely soluble in veiy dilute acid and alkaline solutions, as well as
in dilute solutions of neutral salts. Thus, the precipitate produced
in this manner by the addition of a little 0*2 per cent, hydrochloric
acid was readily dissolved by 10 per cent, salt-solution, the fluid
becoming turbid again on boiling, with separation of a flocculent
precipitate.

Further, by gently warming the turbid mixture resulting from the
addition of a few drops of 0-2 per cent, hydrochloric acid, the fluid
cleared up almostly completely, the turbidity returning as the mix-
ture cooled.

Addition of dilute hydrochloric acid, however, did not precipitate
all of the proteid ; the filtrate still contained some proteid matter
and, moreover, showed marked proteolytic action on fibrin. Thus
in one instance, 0'2 per cent, hydrochloric acid was added to the
dialyzed solution until a distinct flocky precipitate resulted, this was
filtered off and dissolved in lu-per cent, solution of sodium chloride.
This solution on being heated gradually, grew turbid at GG^-GS" C.
but did not yield any further precipitate even on boiling. The tur-
bidity did not disappear on the addition of 0-5 per cent, sodium car-
bonate, or of 0'2 per cent, hydrochloric acid, but was soluble in dilute
potassium hydroxide.

The filtrate from the above precipitate showed marked proteolytic
action ; it also yielded a slight precipitate with strong nitric acid,
not dissolved by warming; subjected to heat precipitation the solu-
tion grew turbid at 73° C, but did not give any further precipitate
even on boiling. The turbidity did not readily disappear on the
addition of either dilute hydrochloric acid or of 0-5 per cent, sodium
carbonate, but was quickly soluble in very dilute potassium hydrox-
ide. Evidently, the substance precipitated by the acid and that
remaining in solution were essentially the same.

From the foregoing, it is plain that the proteid substance pre-
cipitated by saturation of neutral pineapple juice with sodium chlo-
ride, is a peculiar body partaking both of the characters of a globulin
and of heterojjroteose. That it approximates more closely to the latter

M. H, Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 303

is evident from the fact that the several precipitates produced by
heat are more sohible in dihite alkalies than is customary for coagu-
lated globulin, and that the precipitate produced by addition of
dilute hydrochloric acid is so readily soluble on warming the neutral
or slightly acid mixture, followed by its re-appearance as the tem-
perature is lowered. On the other hand, the pronounced insolubility
of the proteid in warm nitric acid of all strengths is contrary to the
usual behavior of the proteoses. Further, the substance gives a
biuret reaction more violet than red, and when boiled for a short
time with 0*5 per cent, sodium carbonate it is transformed appar-
ently into alkali-albumin, since the precipitate resulting from neu-
tralization of the alkaline fluid is then insoluble in salt solution,
although readily dissolved by a slight excess of dilute hydrochloric
acid.

It is further evident that the proteolytic ferment of pineapple
juice is either associated with this peculiar globulin or proteose-like •
body, or else is the body itself. The above method of precipitating
the proteolytic ferment, by saturation of the juice with sodium
chloride, brings about a complete separation of the ferment, provided
the fluid is fully saturated with the salt. The filtrate, however, still
contains some proteid matter, precipitable by shaking the fluid with
neutral ammonium sulphate. This substance was separated from a
lai'ge quantity of juice, by treating the filtrate from the sodium
chloride precipitate with ammonium sulphate, added to complete
saturation.

The slight stringy precipitate which resulted was filtered off,
dissolved in water and dialyzed. After several days a small portion
of the solution, though still containing some salts, was tested as
follows : heated gradually the solution became slightly turbid at 65°-
70° ('., with separation of flocks at 80°-82° C. The filtrate from this
precipitate gave no further signs of separation even when heated to
boiling, but a drop of acetic acid added to tlie hot fluid })roduced a
slight turbidity.

The dialysis was continued for about ten days longer, until the
salts were almost wholly removed, when the solution was found
faintl}^ alkaline and slightly turbid. This turbidity disappeared
at once on addition of a drop of dilute nitric acid, also on the addi-
tion of a few drops of salt solution. Addition of 0*2 per cent, hydro-
chloric acid to faint acid reaction produced a slight precipitate,
readily soluble in salt solution. Subjected to heat precipitation, the
turbid fluid cleared up somewhat at first, then became slightly turbid

804 R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pinewpple Jaice.

at about 68° C, the turbidity becoming more pronounced at 75°-80°
C, followed by the separation of a fine flocculent precipitate at
85°-S7"' C. A more complete separation was obtained by adding a
drop of acetic acid to the hot fluid. The precipitate produced by
heat at about 85° C. was almost wholly insoluble in dilute alkalies.

This ammonium sulphate precipitate was found wholly free from
any proteolytic power either in neutral, acid or alkaline solutions.
With the biuret test it gave a very faint violet color.

Hence, as already stated, saturation of neutral pineapple juice
with sodium chloride pi'ecipitates all of the proteolytic ferment
present, while there remains in solution some proteid substance, pre-
cipitable by ammonium sulphate, having essentially the same chemi-
cal properties as the preceding body. Certain points of diiference,
however, are noticeable ; thus the body precipitated by sodium
chloride shows more of a tendency to sepai-ate from its solution on
dialysis, than the substance precipitated by ammonium sulphate.
Further, the former body on exposure to heat precipitation separates
less readily from its solution, except on the addition of a drop of
acid, although the solution shows a heavy turbidity at much the
same temperature as the latter body. The one thing, however, to
be emphasized here is that the sodium chloride precipitate is
strongly proteolytic, while the body separated by ammonium sul-
phate is devoid of this property. A more exact study of the chemi-
cal status of these two substances is now in progress, but at present
nothing more definite can be said.

Another method of separating the proteolytic ferment is by pre-
cipitation with magnesium sulphate. Saturation of neutralized pine-
apple juice with this salt gives much the same separation as that
produced by saturation with sodium chloride ; i. e. a slight flocky
precipitate, readily soluble in water and, after removal of the adher-
ent salt, strongly proteolytic. The filtrate still contains some proteid
matter, precipitable in small quantity by the addition of sodium
sulphate in substance.

The magnesium sulphate precipitate was examined with the fol-
lowing results; it was dissolved in water and dialyzed for several
days, until the greater portion of the adherent salt was removed.
On testing the solution by heat precipitation, it grew distinctly
turbid at 62° C, with separation of flocks at 75° C. This precipi-
tate represented practically all of the proteid present in the solution,
for boiling the filtrate, with or without acid, failed to give any
further separation other than a faint turbidity produced by the

R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 305

acetic acid. The dialysis was continued for a week or more longer,
until every trace of sulphate was removed, when the reaction of the
solution was found distinctly alkaline, so much so that no precipi-
tate separated even on boiling the solution, although it became quite
opaque at about 78° C, until a drop of acetic acid was added. In
another preparation, where the alkalinity was less pronounced, the
solution after dialysis of all, or nearly all of the salt, gave a floccu-
lent precipitate at 85° C.

The faintly alkaline solution of the proteid yielded a precipitate
on addition of 0*2 per cent, hydrochloric acid, very soluble in a
little salt solution and in a slight excess of 0-2 j^er cent. acid. Only
a portion of the substance was separated however, by this method
of precipitation. The filtrate, which appeared nearly neutral to
test papers, on being heated grew turbid at 7.3° C, without however
any separation of flocks until the solution was boiled. The slight floc-
culent precipitate which then resulted was wholly soluble in 0-5 per
cent, sodium carbonate, and nearly so in 0-2 per cent, hydrochloric acid.
P^irther, the filtrate had marked proteolytic power and treated with
nitric acid gave a distinct turbidity, not appreciably diminished by
warming the mixture. That portion of the proteid precipitated by the
dilute hydrochloric acid gave, after solution in dilute sodium^ chlo-
ride, essentially the same reactions as the fox*egoing, so that evidently
the two fractions were identical.

This preparation of the ferment agreed fairly well in its reactions
with the substance separated by sodium chloride. Like the latter,
the turbid solution resulting from the dialysis cleared up on addition
of a little salt solution, likewise on the addition of a few drops of
dilute nitric acid, while more acid produced a second turbidity not
readily dissolved by an excess of the acid, or by heat. With the
biuret test, a more distinctly reddish color was produced than here-
tofore seen.

There are, therefore, two good methods for the isolation of the
proteolytic ferment from pineapple juice ; one by saturation of the
neutralized fluid with sodium chloride, the other by saturation with
magnesium sulphate. In our opinion, the former method yields a
product with the strongest proteolytic power, although this needs to
be verified by further observations. As to the exact chemical nature
of the ferment, or of the body it is associated with, we are not yet able
to speak with perfect confidence. It is our opinion that the proteo-
lytic body separated by the above methods is a mixture of a globulin
and a proteose, but as yet we have not been able to accomplish a dis-

306 It. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

tinct separation. On the other hand, it is possible that the sub-
stance is a single body possessed of properties akin to both the above,
but this view seems hardly probable ; its precipitation by saturation
with magnesium sulphate and by sodium chloride possibly favor its
being a globulin, while its extreme solubility in dilute salt solutions,
in dilute acids and alkali are equally characteristic of both bodies.
The more or less constant solubility of the heat precipitates in
dilute alkalies favors its proteose nature, and if a proteose it is most
closely related to heteroproteose. The substances are, moreover,
alkaline reacting bodies completely precipitable by heat, especially
in the presence of a trace of acid.

We are now occupied, with the aid of larger quantities of mate-
rial, in an attempt at a better separation of these bodies with the
hope of acquiring more definite knowledge regarding their chemical
nature, composition, etc.

Whether globulin or proteose, these bodies present in pineapple
juice, are very resistant to the digestive action of the ferment.
Thus, long continued warming (3-5 hours) of fresh pineapple
juice with strong proteolytic power at 40° C does not, in the
least, change the temperature at which the several heat precipita-
tions occur ; a point which certainly indicates the resistance of these
proteids to j)roteolytic, or at least to this particular kind of proteo-
lytic, action ; the bodies in this respect resembling the atmid bodies
described by Neumeister.*

Products formed by the 2>roteolijtic action of the ferment.

On this point, we have made only a few preliminary experiments,
designed simply to throw some light on the nature of the ferment as
a proteolytic agent. The results indicate that the ferment is more
nearly related to trypsin than to pepsin, in that not only are proteoses
and peptone formed by its action, but also leucin and tyrosin.

When washed and boiled blood fibrin, for example, is warmed at
40° C. with fresh pineapple juice of natural acidity for two or three
hours, the proteid matter is thoroughl}^ digested, but, as previously
stated, a fairly large residue of finely divided matter remains undis-
solved, resistant to the further action of the ferment. This anti-
albumid-like matter is readily soluble in weak solutions of sodium
carbonate, from which it is re-precipitated by addition of acetic acid,

* Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, Band xxvi, p. 57. "Ueber die nachste Einwirkung ge-
spannter Wasserdampfe aiif Proteine und iiber eine Gruj^pe cigenthiimlicher Erweiss-
korper und Albumoseu."

M. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice. 307

and not readily dissolved by an excess of the acid. This same body
is likewise formed by the action of fresh pineapple juice in neutral
or weak alkaline solutions, and also by the isolated ferment as pre-
pared by the methods previously described.

Boiling the acid digestive fluid gives no noticeable coagulum, and
addition of moderately strong nitric acid likewise fails to produce
any precipitate. Neutralization of the acid digestive mixtui-e may
give rise to a small amount of a neuti'alization precipitate, resembling
acid-albumin. On evaporation of the neutralized fluid, the solution re-
mains fairly clear, and when sufliciently concentrated addition of strong-
alcohol gives a gummy precipitate of proteose and peptone, while
from the alcoholic solution crystals of tyrosin can be obtained and,
in lesser quantity, leucin also. Tyrosin appears to be present in
much larger amount than leucin. On dissolving the alcohol precipi-
tate in water and saturating the solution with ammonium sulphate a
heavy precipitate of proteose is obtained, while in the flltrate a large
amount of true peptone is found, which after removal of the sulphate
by dialysis gives a bright red color with the biuret test, etc. So far
as our experiments extend, the proteose is composed mainly of a
deutero-like body, only a small precipitate being obtained by satura-
tion with sodium chloride, either in a neutral or slightly acid solution.
An experiment like the preceding carried out with coagulated egg-
albumin gave essentially the same results.

When pineapple juice of neutral or faintly alkaline reaction, or a
neutral or slightly alkaline solution of the proteolytic ferment, is
warmed with blood fibrin, for example, the digestion appears much
the same as the preceding, but on heating the filtered solution a very
pronounced milk}^ turbidity appears, which on addition of a drop
or two of acetic acid changes to a heavy flocculent pi-ecipitate, insol-
uble in excess of the acid.

Further, addition of nitric acid to the neutral or slightly alkaline
digestive fluid gives a heavy curdy white precipitate, insoluble on
application of heat, and likewise insoluble in an excess of the acid.
Heated with an excess of acid, the precipitate takes on an intense
yellow color. This precipitate produced by nitric acid is likewise
insoluble in a 10-per cent, solution of sodium chloride, at least in the
presence of the acid.

This body, so characteristic of bromelin digestion in neutral or
faintly alkaline solutions, is very resistant to the action of the fer-
ment, being still present even after a long-continued digestion. It
seems probable that this substance results from the action of the fer-

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 41 Jan., 1892.

308 R. H. Chittenden — Ferments of Pineapple Juice.

ment in a neutral or alkaline solution, on the insoluble antialbumid-
like body so conspicuous in an acid digestion ; for while the latter
body is also present in neutral and alkaline digestions, the amount
seems smaller, and further, the reactions of the two bodies are very
much alike.

Aside from this one point of difference, the products formed in a
neutral or alkaline digestion are, so far as we have seen, essentially
the same as those formed by pineapple juice of natural acidity. Thus,
on boiling a slightly alkaline digestive mixture resulting from the
action of the isolated ferment on blood fibrin, and adding a drop or
two of acetic acid to facilitate the separation of the coagulum, a
clear filtrate was obtained, without trace of reaction with nitric acid,
except in the presence of salt, and giving the usual reactions for pro-
teose and peptone. Thus, the addition of concentrated salt-solution
to the clear filtrate, followed by a few drops of acid gave more or
less of a turbidity, readily dissolved on application of heat, reappear-
ing on cooling.

We hope soon to present a more detailed report regarding the
properties and composition of the several products resulting from
the action of the isolated ferment on egg-albumin, blood fibrin and
myosin.

Sheffield Btological Laboratory of Yale University.

XVIIl. — ^The Nephrostomes of Rana. By Oliver C. Far-

RINGTOK.

In the Urodela, as is well known, nephrostomes are always present,
serving as a means of free communication between the body cavity
and uriniferous tubules. According- to Hoffman,* both Spengel and
Meyer, whose elaborate investigations independently made, first gave
us accurate knowledge of the structure and office of the nephrostomes
of Urodela, state that these organs exist also in the Anura, but they
were unable to determine with certainty the point of connection
between them and the tubules. The nephrostomes appear, according
to these authors, on the ventral surface of the kidney, where this is
covered by the peritoneum. Their number varies in different genera,
but in Rana there are from 200 to 250. In most genera they open
directly inward, but in some they take a short horizontal course on
the surface before entering the kidney. As before stated, their point
of junction with the tubule is difficult to establish with certainty, but
according to the view of Sjjengel they unite with the fourth, section
of the tubule rather than with the first section or neck as in Urodela.
Nussbaum also investigated this question and his first resultsf con-
firmed Spengel's views. Later investigations,! however, led him to
the belief that although during the tadpole stage the nephrostomes
connect with the neck of the tubule, as development proceeds they
are forced away from it and open, in the adult frog, into the branches
of the renal-portal vein. Haslam,§ the most recent writer on the
subject, controverts all the previous views, stating that neither in
microscopic sections or teased preparations has he been able to find
any trace of such organs. The conclusions which he draws from
various experiments on the frog are as follows : " If the peritoneal
funnels exist in the adult frog, (1) they are very difficult to find ;
(2) they do not form a free communicating path between any part
of the uriniferous tubules and the abdominal cavity ; (3) their super-
ficial terminations have no free cilia." Heidenhain, according to
this author, was also unable to find these organs.

* Bronn's Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier-reichs, vol. vi, p. 461.

f Sitzungsb. d. Niederrheinischen Gesell. in Bonn, 1877, p. 122.

t Zool. Anzeiger, 1880, No. 67, p. 514.

§ Ecker's Anatomy of the Frog. Translated by Geo. Haslam, 1889, p. 336.

310 O. C. Farrington — The Nephrostomes of JRana.

The subject is one of interest, since it is desii-able that we should
know at what point in the ascending scale of animal life these organs,
which probably exist in all vertebrates as an embryonic feature, cease
to characterize the adult forms.

In the hope that the recent improved methods of section cutting
and reconstruction might throw additional light on the question, the
work which is described in the following pages has been done by the
writer.

In carrying on this work, all the experiments which were made on
the frog were duplicated by similar ones on the newt, and the same
is true of all the preparations made for section cutting. This was
done in order to compare directly results obtained in a species
where the nephrostomes are known to exist, with those given by the
frog.

Two species of Rana were used, Mana Catesbicma and Rana
virescens, but no dissimilar results due to difference of species were
noted. Of the newt, the species used was the common Dlemyctylus
virescens.

The investigation has led to the following conclusions :

I. Microscopic sections of the frog's kidney often show, passing
inward from the ventral surface, small tubes which are to be regarded
as nephrostomes.

II. These tubes have free, active cilia.

III. Strong, if not conclusive evidence exists to show that these
open into the blood capillaries of the kidney.

I. Fig. 1 shows a section of the newt's kidney with nephrostomes
appearing at various points indicated by the letter n.

At the surface these have a diameter of about -04'"™, then passing
inward show a slight funnel-like enlargement to about -oe™"'. For
this part of its course the tube is seen to be made up of a ciliated
epithelium, the cells of which are narrow, elongated, somewhat fusi-
form, and have indistinct nuclei. Two of these funnels are seen
uniting in a common tube, in fig. 1, an arrangement stated by Spengel
to be quite common. For the rest of its course the tube, having a
diameter of about -024™'", loses its distinctive epithelium and its
walls are thin and structureless till it opens into the uriniferous
tubule {n. t. fig. 1). Figs. 2, 3 and 4 show sections of the kidney of
the frog prepared similarly to those of the newt. As will be seen,
these show openings or cavities on the ventral surface, about '035™"'
in diameter, lined with a distinctive epithelium and resembling in
every respect those just noted in the newt. The distance to which

0. G. Farriwjton — The Wephrostomei^ of Raua. 311

they can l)e traced inward depends on the favorableness of the sec-
tion. The one shown in fig. 3 extends inward for a distance of -16""",
By tracing the openings onward through successive sections we find
them passing into a tube of an average diameter of -06'"™, which con-
tinues its course near the ventral surface of the kidney [n. t. fig. 2).
The tube finally loses its distinctive structure and opens probably
into the capillaries flowing toward the vena cava inferior. This inner
termination, however, it was found impossible to trace with certainty,
though it was sought for with the greatest care through a large
number of sections. The opening at the point of junction is undoubt-
edly extremely small, so that the chances of finding a section in
which it could be traced with certainty would be few indeed. The
nature of the epithelium lining the nephrostome is shown in fig. 3.
It is seen to be made up of large cuboidal cells having well defined
nuclei and resembling in size and shape the cells of the uriniferous
tubiiles, though they lack the striations which usually characterize
these. At the opening on the surface the cells become flattened and
smaller and the cell outline is less distinct.

The nephrostomes of tadpoles were found to possess a similar epi-
thelium, but in the tadpoles the cells are more nearly like those of
the uriniferous tubules than in the adult frog.

The method of preparation of these kidneys and of those of the
frog was to preserve in Miiller's fluid 24 hrs., transfer to 95 per cent,
alcohol and stain with hsematoxylin.

II. The cilia appear so plainly in sections that there can be no
doubt of their presence. Further evidence of ciliary action was
obtained, however, by adoption of the method proposed by Nuss-
baum (1. c), which he describes as follows : " Chloroform the animal
until respiration has ceased. Inject in the body cavity 0*5 pei" cent,
salt solution containing powdered carmine. Close the body Avail.
Immerse the animal for 3 hrs. in Muller's fluid and after 12-24 hrs.
transfer the kidney to alcohol."

As Nussbaum states, thin sections of the kidney will then show the
carmine distributed through the funnels and tubes, thus giving posi-
tive evidence that its fine particles have been carried inward by ciliary
action. Such a section is shown in fig. 2. Ilaslam states (1. c.) that
having placed properly dissected frogs in 0*6 per cent, sodium chloride
solution in which finely divided gamboge was susi)ended, no trace
of ciliary action was in any case found on either surface of the
kidney. In what way it was anticipated that the ciliary action
would show itself is not stated, but it is doubtful if the cilia of

312 0. C. Farrington — The Nephrostomes of Bana.

openings so minute could produce currents or accumulations of par-
ticles large enough to be seen from the surface. Applying the
experiment of Nussbaum, however, at seven different times to both
male and female frogs of various sizes, the evidences of ciliary action
previously described were observed in every case.

in. Our belief that the nephrostomes in the frog open into the
blood capillaries of the kidney, rests mainly on the fact that sections
prepared after Nussbaum's method show that the carmine is present
not only in the nephrostomes, but in the blood capillaries and large
veins which are near the ventral surface of the kidney. This is shown
in both figs. 2 and 4. Applying the method of Nussbaum to the newt,
we find the cai*mine invariably in the urinif erous tubules and not in any
other part of the kidney. In the frog, however, the carmine is not
found in the tubules at all but only in the blood vessels. This makes
the evidence almost conclusive that the nephrostomes open into the
tubules in the one case and into the blood vessels in the other. We
need, however, to trace the tube directly to its termination before we
can assert positively its connection, since it may be j^ossible that the
carmine could make its way into the circulation by some other course.
Nussbaum states that by sections cut in glycerine he Avas able to fol-
low directly the course of the carmine from the nephrostome into the
blood vessel. It is very doubtful, however, if the evidence from
such sections could be relied upon, since the writer found that unless
some fixative for the carmine was iised the particles were scattered
by the knife through every part of the kidney. To overcome this
difliculty use was made of a method for imbedding proposed by Prof.
S. I. Smith. The kidney was imbedded in celloidin, but instead of
trving to make sections of this block by the usual method of cutting
under alcohol, the block Avas reimbedded in jiaraftine. From this
block, then, sections could be cut as usual with parafiine, and the
celloidin held all particles so firmly in place that there could be no
doubt that the place of the carmine in any part was that it had natu-
rally reached. From fig. 4, which represents a section prepared
after this method, it will be seen that the carmine appears only in
those blood vessels near the ventral surface. This was invariably
true, and hence the conclusion that the nephrostomes open into the
capillaries fiowing into the vena cava. This fact, moreover, makes
it quite unlikely that the carmine could have entered the circulation
in any other way than through the nej^hrostomes, for it would then
be equally distributed through the blood vessels of the kidney. To
test this point further, the vena cava inferior of a live frog was tied

0. C. Farrington — Tfie Nephrostomes of Rana. 313

just above the kidney before injection of the carmine. It was hoped
thus to determine whether the carmine would enter the circulation
through other vessels, if it were not supplied by the kidneys. Upon
examination the particles were found to have entered the nephro-
stomes only a little way, and were not present in any of the blood
vessels ; but, as the stopping of the circulation caused the animal to
die veiy quickly, the test was not regarded decisive.

It seems probable that if the nephrostomes connect with the blood
vessels they would be reached by injections of the latter. As no
mention is made by other writers of experiments of this kind, except
that of the injection of the ureters by Haslam, this point was care-
fully tested. The first injection was made through the vena cava
inferior, the anterior abdominal being also opened. This showed
only the blood vessels to be injected and no passage of the fluid into
any of the nephrostome tubes. The second injection was made in
the same way except that the renal-portal of one side was tied so
that if any extra pressure were needed to force the fluid into the tubes
it might be thus supplied. The results were, however, like those of
the first injection. The third injection was made through the renal-
portal of a very large frog with the anterior abdominal opened. By
this means the nephrostomes were successfully injected, the fluid show-
ing plainly in the tubes and funnels and even coming to the surface,
though it did not flow out to any extent. This result seems to place
the connection of the nephrostomes with the blood vessels almost be-
yond question. On seeking, however, to trace the direct opening of the
nephrostome tube into a blood vessel by means of sections, it w^as found
as before impossible to do so with absolute certainty, though the con-
nection was in many cases very close. Since the nephrostomes prob-
ably serve as lymph vessels, the openings into the capillaries must be
small enough to prevent the passage of the blood corpuscles into them,
so that, as before stated, the chances of tracing them with certainty
are few^ indeed. The experiments seem to teach that the passages
inward from the nephrostomes can be reached by a current going
toward the vena cava but are closed to one coming from it. This is
difficult to explain if true, but needs further proof. The remarkable
change of function which the nephrostomes seem to undergo, from
service as excretory organs to that of lymph vessels, gives rise, also,
to physiological questions of much interest. It is not, however, the
purpose of this paper to discuss these, since they call for much fur-
ther investigation. It is the hope of the author that others may
study these points and bring new facts to light.

314 0. G. Farrington — The JSTephrostomes of Rnna.

A few points may be mentioned regarding the macroscopic appear-
ance of the nephrostomes. The writer found they could be seen
plainly from the surface by staining the kidney in 0*5 per cent, silver
nitrate solution from 3 to 5 minutes. By this treatment the nephro-
stomes are made to appear like minute craters scattered over the sur-
face. As noted by Hoffman, they are most abundant in the region
medianward from the adrenal gland and are especially numerous near
the large branches of the vena cava. Fig. 5 is an attempt to repre-
sent their distribxxtion and appearance, though it is difficult to do this
by a drawing. The nephrostomes are represented by dots and the
little circles indicate lighter spots on the surface Avhich are often
mistaken for their openings but are in reality produced by the
Malpighian capsules showing through. The largest number of
nephrostome openings counted on any one kidney was 150.

In conclusion the writer wishes to acknowledge his indebtedness
to Prof. S. I. Smith, at whose suggestion the investigation was under-
taken and whose valuable advice and assistance have been freely
rendered during the work.

Sheffield Biological Laboratory, June, 1891.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV.

Pig. 1. Dorso-ventral section of kidney of Diemyctylus virescens. 9fj, in thickness.

Fig. 2. Ventral portion of dorso-ventral section of kidney of Bana Cateshiana. 9//
in thickness.

Fig. 3. Similar section showing single nephrostome. 6// in thickness.

Fig. 4. Similar section entire, showing the distribution of the carmine in the blood
vessels.

Fig. 5. Right kidney of Eana Cateshiana, female. Ventral view.

a. artery; h. v. blood vessel; c. carmine; M. Malpighian capsule; n. nephrostome;
n. t. nephrostome tube ; u. t. uriniferous tubule ; v. i. large vein leading
to vena cava. The ventral surface in the figures is to the left, dorsal to
the right. The carmine where not lettered is represented by black dots.

XIX. — Notes on the Fauna of the Island of Dominica,
British West Indies, with Lists op the Species obtained

AND OBSERVED BY G. E. AND A. H. VeRKILL. Bt G. E.

Verrill.

The following collections were obtained by my brother and ray-
self dui'ing March, April, and May, 1890, on the Island of Dominica,
one of the Lesser Antilles, situated in Lat. 15° 18' to 15° 45' N. and
Long. 61° 14' to 61° 30' W.

This island lies approximately north and south, is of volcanic
origin, rising abruptly from the sea, and is about 29 miles long by
17 wide, the whole containing about 290 square miles. Generally
speaking it is composed of a high central ridge or crest running
lengthwise, the crest itself l)eing made up of a number of peaks, the
highest attaining an altitude of about 5300 feet.

From this central crest it slopes down to the east and west in a
succession of lower peaks and ridges with deep valleys and ravines
between, many of which contain rapid mountain streams. Close to
the coast these valleys widen, frequently to quite an extent, giving
chance for sugar plantations, etc. This is particularly the case on
the western, or leeward side, where the slope is much less than on
the windward, or Atlantic side, so that it is possible to cultivate the
ground well up on the mountains on the former side.

The vegetation of the island is of the most luxuriant type, cover-
ing the mountains to their tops and consisting of a very great variety
of trees, palms, tree-ferns, shrubs, vines, etc. The tree-ferns are
very abundant and often twenty feet or more high. Many of the
trees reach a great height, while the smaller ones with the various
vines and lianas form a network almost impassable unless a person is
armed with a *' cutlass " or " machete " almost invariably carried by
the natives to cut their way.

The temperature along the coast averages about 85° F. most of
the time, but back in the interior, among the mountains, it is much
cooler ; so cool, in fact, that at night one needs a pair of good heavy
blankets. The climate is also very damp, especially up in the
mountains where, even during the dryest portion of the year, there
is a succession of short, sharp showers every day, each followed by

Trans. Conn. Ag.vd.. Vol. vril. 42 April, 1892.

316 G. JiJ. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

bright sunshine. In fact it not unfrequently rains from a cloudless
sky, so that one is no sooner dry from one shower than he is j^retty
sure to be drenched by another.

This island appears to have been but vei-y little visited by col-
lectors. So far as I am aware but one collection of any size, that of
Mr. Fred. A. Ober, made in isyv for the Smithsonian Institution,
has previously been sent to this country (cf. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,
vol. i, p. 48.). To this Dr. H. A. A. Nicholls subsequently made some
additions (ib. vol. iii, p. 254). Another collection was, however,
made there in 188*7 and 1888 by Mi-. Geo. A. Ramage, the naturalist
employed by the joint committee of the Royal Society and British
Association for investigation of the fauna and flora of the Lesser
Antilles ; and in 1 863 Rev. E. C. Taylor spent two weeks in Dominica
making a small collection (cf. Ibis, vol. vi, p. 157).

The island itself presents many difticulties to a collector; for, aside
from its being very mountainous and heavily wooded, as mentioned
above, there are no means of transportation for baggage, etc., except
on the heads of natives; while the collector himself must depend upon
his own legs or one of the small, and not too lively, native ponies, there
being but tw^o carriages on the island and their use being restricted
to the immediate vicinity of the towns and along the coast for a few
miles, as there are no carriage roads whatever in the interior, or
crossing the island, and in many places even the trails are very poor.

Our collections were, for the most part, made from four camps,
as follows : at Laudat, a little hamlet at an elevation of about 1600
feet, at the head of the Roseau Valley, and about ten miles from
Roseau, the principal town on the island ; at Spring Hill, situated
on the side of the same valley at about the same elevation as Laudat,
or a little less, and distant about three miles from the latter place ;
at Bass-en-ville, situated on a high plateau in the interior of the island,
about half way across, and at an elevation of about 2000 feet ; and
at Lasswa, situated on the eastern or windward side of the island.

We found the inhabitants uniformly kind, courteous, and anxious
to help us in every way. Our thanks are especially due to the Gov-
ernor of the Leeward Islands, and to the President and Members of
the Council of Dominica for their kindness in giving us permission
to collect there, placing at our disposal the house for the Government
engineers at Bass-en-ville, and for courtesy in many ways. We are
no less indebted to the following named gentlemen residing on the
island : — to Mr. James, the Inspector of Police, for valuable aid in
many ways ; to Dr. H. A. A. Nicholls, well known by his contribu-

G. E. Yerrill — Fauna of the Idmul of JJo)ni)uca. -317

tions to science from the fauna and flora of this ishxnd, for aiding us
by his own knowledge of the birds, the best collecting grounds, and
much genei-al information and help ; to the Bishop of the Roman
Catholic Church and his priests for their hospitality and aid, es)>e-
cially in allowing us to enter the churches in search of some species
of bats and the owl {A. fammea nhjrescen.s Lawr.) ; to Mr. A. Davis
Reviere and his brother Emory Reviere, of Clark Hall, for their great
kindness and hospitality while we were in the Layou Valley ; to Mr.
Hennessey Dupigny, who accompanied ns part of the time, and to
whose consummate woodcraft and knowledge of the habits of the
birds we are in a large measure indebted for our success and for
many valuable specimens, which we should otherwise have been
unable to procure ; and to Mr. Arthur Ogilvy, Mr. A. Frampton, and
Mr, Wm. Gellion, for many acts of kindness and aid. In addition
to these above named gentlemen many others gave us much valuable
assistance and all endeavored to make our stay there as pleasant and
profitable as possible.

For the working up and identification of the collections we are
indebted to the following gentlemen : — to Mr. J. A. Allen of the
Am. Mus. of Nat. Hist, for the identification of the birds and mam-
mals, for certain notes on the same which appear in the following
list, and for valuable advice on the nomenclature used therein ; to
Prof. E. D. Cope for the identification of the Reptiles and Batrach-
ians, and for notes on the same ; to Mr. Sanderson Smith of the Am.
Mus. of Nat. Hist, for the identification of part of the Mollusca ;
and to Prof. S. I. Smith of Yale Univ. for the identification of the
Crustacea.

Notes on the Mammals.

The mammals of Dominica are very few indeed, those indigenous
being mainly bats, of which there are several species that are quite
common, but rather difficult to procure owing to their nocturnal
habits. We procured but one, which Mr, Allen examined and says
is probably Vespertilio nigricans, at least it so nearly resembles it
that he cannot see wherein it differs without having more material.

These small bats, of this species or very closely resembling it,
were very common about Bass-en-ville in the evening, but though I
shot several I lost all but this one among the high grass and bushes,
the light being very dim when they appeared, and in the morning
we could never find any trace of them, they probably having been
eaten or carried off by the crabs {P. dentata) which were always on

318 G. E. Verrill — JBauna of the Island of Dominica.

the watch for anything in the nature of meat that Ave might throw
out. Besides these small bats we several times observed much larger
ones of one or more species which I suj)pose were some kind of
fruit bats, but Ave Avere unable to procure any, as Ave neA'er saAV them
except Avhen it Avas quite dark, too dark to shoot with any accuracy
at an object moving so swiftly and seen for so short a time as they
Avere Avhen suddenly darting across the narrow trail bordered by
thick Avoods on each side. These large bats Avere seen almost ex-
clusiA^ely at a short distance from the coast, and I think they are
confined to the less elevated portions of the island.

Besides the bats, there are found here a species of agouti and an
opossum, or opossum-like animal, called "Manacou" by the natives,
the latter having been introduced, but both are noAv quite common,
and the agouti forms quite an article of diet among the natives.
The common rats and mice are exceedingly abundant, but Ave saAV no
native ones at all.

List of Birds obtained and observed, icith Hotes on their Habits,

Nests, and Eggs.

Plates xxa% xxvi, xxa^ii.

The following notes on the habits are from the combined observa-
tions of my brother, A. H. Verrill, and myself. The descriptions of
the nests and eggs themseh^es, unless otherAvise stated, I ha\'e made
from the specimens actually obtained by my brother and now in the
Peabody Museum, but the notes on the nesting habits, etc., are
mainly by him.*

Unless otherwise stated the measurements given Avere made from
the fresh specimens at the time of collection, and are giA^en in inches
in the following order : length, Aving, tail, extent. In some cases,
AA^here they may be useful for comparison, I haA^e added measure-
ments of the bill (exposed culmen unless otherwise stated), and tarsus,
both made from the skins. The measurements of the eggs are in
decimals of an inch. In most cases I have given the measurements
of several specimens to shoAV the A^ariation.

The sex was carefully determined in all cases by dissection, and in
one or two cases the previous conclusions with regard to the plumage
of the adult female are shown to have been erroneous.

* As I did uot arrive in Dominica until the latter part of April, when tlie breeding
season was nearly over, we took few nests after my arrival.

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Doinluica. 319

The identification, as previously stated, Avas by Mr. J. A. Allen,
whose authority is too well known to admit of any doubt, even had
he not been aided by many of Mr. Ober's type-specimens.

The list probably comprises very nearly all of the land birds, but
comparatively few of the aquatic species, as our time was too limited
to warrant spending it on these latter, which are, for the most part,
much more widely distributed and better known.

It is a rather striking fact that nearly all of these islands have a
number of species of Passerine Birds peculiar to each, though I'epre-
sented in the adjacent ones by closely allied species. The entire'
absence of woodpeckers on this island, covered with trees, is another
peculiarity. In a few cases we have added species not previously
known in Dominica to the fauna of this island, and in several cases
have taken species seen, but not identified, by Mr. Ober.

The vernacular 'names, given in this and the following lists, are
those used by the natives and are commonly in the French patois of
the island. When the native name was evidently derived from the
French, yet differs materially from it, I have given the patois pro-
nunciation, expressed as well as possible by English spelling, with
the original French word and English equivalent in parentheses. In
many cases it has been impossible to even guess at the original from
which the native word has come, and in other cases it has undoubt-
edly been derived from the Caribs, a number of whom still inhabit
the island ; but, as both the Patois and Carib languages are wholly
spoken ones, I have only been able to preserve the sound, as nearly
as possible, by phonetic spelling. The following abbreviations are
used : Fr. = French, Pat. = Patois, Ca. = Carib, Eng. = English.

It is a rather peculiar fact that the natives know nearly all the
birds and distinguish even closely allied species by different names.
They also know and readily recognize them by their notes and are
generally able to identify the nests and eggs.

The arrangement used is that adopted by the Amer. Ornith. Union.

Order, I.ONG-IPENNES,
Famil}^, Larid^e.
1. Sterna fuliginosa Gmel. " Twar-oo " (Pat.).

A number of terns, probably of this species, were seen at different
times flying about the harbor at Roseau. Several other species of
terns were also seen but not near enough to identify with any
certainty. No specimens of these, and many other marine birds
were obtained, owing to lack of time, as has been previously stated.

.'5 20 G. E. VerriU — Fauna of the Island of Donmiica.

Order, TUBINARES.
Family, Pkocellariid^.
Much has been said and many stories are told of the so-called
" Diablotin," which the inliabitants of this island say used to make
its burrows and nests on the mountain which is called Mt. Diablotin,
the highest peak in Dominica. All agree, however, that none have
been seen there for a long time, twenty years or more, so that it is
very difficult to get a good description of what this bird was like.
However, the Bishop of the Roman Catholic Church kindly showed
my brother an old book in his possession which contained a picture
that showed the " Diablotin " to have been some sort of a petrel, but
to what genus or species it belonged it was impossible to tell. Fur-
ther than this we could learn nothing of importance concerning it.
Very likel}^ it was the same as the " Diablotin " of Guadeloupe, (cf.
Auk. viii, p. 61).

Order, STEG-ANOPODES.
Family, Phaethontiu^.

3. Phaethon flavirostris Brandt.

Common. Breeds in the cliffs along the coast on the leeward side
of the island. Though no specimens were taken there is no doubt
of the identity of this bird as tliey could be closely observed.

Mr. Ober took this species in the same localities where it was

observed by us.

Family, Pelecanid.e.

3. PelecanTlS fuSCUS Linn.

Abundant all through the West Indies. Several seen about the

island.

Family, Fregatid^.

4. Fregata aquila (Linn.).

Seen several times flying over, high in the air.

Order, ANSERES.

Family, Anatid.e.

According to the natives, ducks of one or more kinds are sometimes
seen, in the fall, in the Mountain Lake and fresh water streams. We
ourselves saw none at all.

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica. 321

Order, HERODIONES.
Family, Ardbid.k.

5. Ardea herodias Linn. " CraWer noir," Pat. and Fr. (Black Crab-eater).

" Black Crabier," Pat. " Black Gaulin," Pat.

This bird was described to us under the above Patois names by
Mr. Hennessj' Dupigny and others, and one or two were seen in the
river at Bass-en-ville, but no specimens were obtained.

Though not observed by Mr. Ober in Dominica or Guadeloupe, he
took it in nearly, if not all, the other islands visited by him, and Dr.
L'Herminier records it from both Guadeloupe and Martinique in a
" Catalogue des oiseaux observes a la Guadeloupe par le Docteur F.
L'Herminier, de 1827 a 1844," given by Mr. Lawrence in connection
with Mr. Ober's list (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. i, 1878, p. 450).

A smaller " Black Crabier," which was described as being found
in Dominica by several of the inhabitants, is probably A. cmridea,
taken there by Mr. Ober.

6. Ardea egretta Gmel. " Aigrette," Pat. and Fr. (Egret). " White Gaulin,"

Pat.

Not particularly rare ' along the rivers, especially the Layou
River. Seen several times in the neighborhood of Bass-en-ville.
Though several were observed no specimens were secured, partly
owing to the shyness of the birds themselves and partly to our own
lack of time, but I am very sure of the identity, as I am familiar
with the above species, having seen and shot it many times in
Florida. This bird was not observed by Mr. Ober among the Lesser
Antilles at all, though "a large White Heron" was described to him
as visiting Barbuda, but Dr. L'Herminier records it from both
Guadeloupe and Martinique.

As with the last species, the natives also described another
" White Gaulin," smaller than this one, which is probably A. can-
didissima, taken there by Mr, Ober.

7. Ardea virescens Linn. "Kialee," Pat. "Green Crabier," Pat.
Butorides virescens (Linn ) ; Taylor, Lawr., and Sol. Lists.

Resident. Common along all the streams. Habits the same as in
the U. S.

Irides yellow, legs and feet greenish yellow. .^ 18-6^-2f-25, bill
2|, tarsus 2. Sex? (from skin), wing 1\, tail 2 J, bill 2^^^^, tarsus 2.

322 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

8. Nycticorax violaceus (Linn.). "Crabier," Pat. and Fr. (Crab-eater).

" Night Gaulin," Pat.
Nyctiardea violacea (Linn.) ; Scl. List.

Common, but on account of its nocturnal habits not very often
seen. Most of our specimens were procured by Mr. Hennessey
Dupigny near Shawford in the Roseau Valley.

Iris orange, legs and feet yellow, bill black. Sexes alike, young-
very different, somewhat resembling the young of ISf. nycticorax
nmvius. $ 26-12-4^-42, bill 3'1, tarsus 3 '6. In other specimens,
wing ll^-llf, bill 3-0-3-1, tarsus 3-4-3-5.

"Nest built in the tallest trees. Eggs pale bluish green." — (a. h. v.)

Order, PALUDICOL^.
Family, Rallid^.

9. lonornis martinica (Linn.). "Poule d'eau," Pat. and Fr. (Water-hen).
Porphyrio martinicus (Linn.) ; Lawr. List.

A bird described to us by several of the inhabitants iinder the
above Patois name was very likely this species, a specimen of which
was shot there after Mr. Ober's departure but which was saved for
him (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. i, 1878, p. 197). Said by those who
described it to be rare. Given from Guadeloupe and Martinique by
Dr. L'Herminier.

Order, LIMICOL^.
Family, Scolopacid^.

10. Ereunetes pUSillus (Linn.). "Becasse," Pat. and Fr. (Snipe).
Ereunetes iKtrificatus (lUig.) ; Lawr. List Birds Lesser Antilles (P. U. S. N. M., vol. i,

1878, p. 488).

A sandpiper seen by us several times, but not procured, was prob-
ably this species. Mr. Ober also observed a sandpiper here, " Spe-
cies undetermined," which Mr. Lawrence referred to this species in
his " Catalogue of the Birds noted from the Lesser Antilles by Mr.
Ober." Obtained by Dr. Nicholls who states that it is " common at
the mouths of the rivers during the hurricane months." (cf. Proc.
IT. S. Nat. Mus., iii, p. 256).

11. Actitis macularia (Linn.).

Tringoides macularius (Linn.) ; Lawr. List.

Rather common. Seen on the rocks in the beds of streams and
along their shores. No specimens were taken from la(tk of time but
I have no doubt of the identity of this bird, so familiar to evei-y
North American collector. Also taken there bv Dr. Nicholls.

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica. 323

Order, COLUMB^.

Family, Columbid^.

13. Columba COrensis Gmel. "Ramier," Pat. and Fr. (Riugclove). "Black
Ramier," Pat.

Common in the heavy woods in the interior and among the moun-
tains. Very arboreal. Mr. Obev states that it " never touches the
earth " ; whether this be so or not we never observed it except while
in the trees or on the wing. Feeds on the fruit and seeds of certain
trees, particularly the gommier tree. Being excellent eating it is
much hunted for food during the open season, and hence is very
shy and hard to shoot. Its loud cooing, resembling that of the do-
mestic pigeon, but much louder, may be heard for a long distance,
but even when one has carefully followed it up and stands beneath
the very tree where the bird is, it is extremely difficult to actually
see it.

Sexes alike. Iris yellow flecked with red, skin around the eyes
orange, legs and feet dull coral red, bill red at the base and yellow
or horn-color at the tip. 5 16^-9-6-24 ; 16f-8^-6i-26^.

13. Columba leUCOCephala Linn. "White-headed Ramier," Pat.
Rare, When first told of this bird by the native hunters I was

inclined to think they were mistaken, as I did not then know of its
having ever been recorded from this or any of the adjacent islands,
but they were very positive and described it well, but stated that it
was very rare though found in the same localities and in company
with the common "Ramier." While at Bass-en-ville, however, I,
myself, saw several specimens on the wing, the white head showing
very plainly. Though in spite of every endeavor we were unable
to procure any. I do not think there is any doubt about its identity,
and am still in hopes of having one or more sent to me, at no dis-
tant date, by our friends in Dominica.

This species is also recorded by Dr. L'Herminier from Guadeloupe
and Martinique, the islands adjacent to Dominica, and lying respec-
tively north and south of it. Mr. Ober records it from Antigua and
Barbuda, but no further south.

14. Zenaida martinicana Bonap. "Tourterelle," Pat. and Fr. (Turtledove).
Abundant, but shy and retiring. Found principally near the coast,

apparently not reaching to any great altitude. Like the "Ramier"
and " Perdrix " it is much hunted as a game bird and, like the latter,
is often kept in captivity.

Trans. Conn. Acau., Vol. VIII. 43 April, 1892.

324 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

Sexes alike. Iris brown, bill black, legs and feet red. ,^, 12|-
6^-41-20; 1:3-6^-4^. $ 13-6|-4|.

IT). Columbigallina passerina (Lmu.). " Ortolan," Pat. and Fr. "Ground

Dove,'" Eug'.
Chamcepelia imsserina (Linn.) ; Lawr. and Scl. Lists.

Abundant along the edges of ihe cane-fields and in the roads along
the coast, particularly on the leeward side of the island. Not found
among the naountains. Quite tame and unsuspicious. Many are
captured and sold for cage birds.

Sexes similar. Iris orange, legs and feet flesh-color, bill brown,
lower mandible lighter at the base. ^5 7-3^-2^; 7-3^^-2^; 7-3g-2.^;
7-3.j^-2^. $ 7:^-3^2:^-10; 7-3 ^-2 1^. In all the specimens, exposed
culmen JL., tarsus in S 0-67, tarsus in ? 0-01.

16. GeotrygOn montana (Lmu.). S "Perdrix rouge," $ "Perdrix noire,"
Pat. and Fr. (Red Partridge, Black Partridge.).

Rather eommon in heavy woods, particularly near the streams and
rivers. Found mainly among the mountains. Like the "Raraier"
it is much hunted as a game bird and is consequently shy. The na-
tive name of " Perdrix " (Partridge) is very appropriate, as it is very
terrestrial in its habits, spending most of its time on the ground,
frequently running instead of flying to avoid danger, and in many
of its habits and general appearance it more resembles the quails or
partridges than the doves.

It is a very quiet bird, rarely giving utterance to any sound. The
dark colored (perhaps immature), female is much less frequently
shot or seen than her more brilliantly colored mate.* Of the seven
specimens in our collection only one is a female and dark brown,
while the six males are all in the red plumage. Like the last it is
frequently kept in captivity as a cage-bii'd.

Iris of the male varies from ox-ange brown to yellow brown or
ocher yellow, in the female it is yellow. Legs, feet, bill and naked
skin surrounding the eye, pink in the male ; darker r-ed in the female
when in the brown plumage. 6 ll^-6|-8i-19f ; 11^-6-31-19^.
$ ll|-6-3.

" Nest built on or near the ground, geuerally of a few leaves loosely put together.
Eggs slightly tinged with buff, resembling those of Bonasa umbeUiis."—{A. h. v.)

* The adult female has been described as like the male, and the dark-browu
plumage given as that of the young (Ridgway, Man. N. A. Birds), but natives say
that the female is always brown, and our small series seems to bear out this assertion,
for though I looked particularly for a red female or a brown male, I never found
either. Mr. Cory, too, describes the sexes as different in his " Birds of the West
Indies " (Auk, vol. iv, p. 119).

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica. 325

17. G-eotrygon mystacea (Temm). "Perdrix keesong," Pat. (probably

from Fr. Perdrix croissaut, Crescent Partridge.).

The inhabitants told ns of a "perdrix" called by the above Patois
name and stated that it was found in miich the same localities and
had habits very similar to the foi'mer species but was much rarer.

Before I arrived one was shown to my brother, by Mr, Hennessey
Dupigny I think, but it was so badly shot and injured that my
brother, not realizing at the tim^e its rarity on the island, did not
preserve it. Though I saw no specimens myself, I have no doubt
from the descriptions of my brother and Mr. Dupigny that the
Dominican " Perdrix keesong " is the above species, recorded from
both Guadeloupe and Martinique by Dr. L'Herminier, and taken on
the former island only, by Mr. Ober, and according to him, there
called " Perdrix croissant " from the white crescent-shaped mark
under the eye. Also given from St. Lucia and Guadeloupe by Mr.
Cory (Auk, vol. iv, p. 118), and taken at Martinique by Mr. W. B.
Richai'dson (ib. p. 96).

Order, RAPTORES.

Family, Falconid.e.

18. Buteo latissilTlTlS (Wils.). " Malfeenee," Pat.
Buieo pennsylvanicus (Wils.); Lawr. and Sol. Lists.

Common, widely distributed, and much more tame and unsuspicious
than in the ITnited States. We found it particularly common in the
vicinity of Bass-en-ville. Observed from the time Ave arrived till we
left. In several of the specimens taken, the stomach contained
nothing but large caterpillars. All our specimens, six in number,
were in the fully adult plumage.

Sexes alike. Iris white. 5 15^-10^-6f-.32. $ 1.5i-10|-G^-3.3 ;
15^-10|-6i-33. In all specimens ; bill, cere to tip, f ; tarsus 2.

19. FalCO COlumbariuS Linn. "Nonnette," Pat. and Fr. (Osprey); " Gue

Giie,"Pat. ; "Killee Killee," Pat. ; " Mountain Hawk," Eng.

Rather rare but generally veiy tame. Neither Mr. Ober nor Mr.
Ramage took this bird in Dominica, nor is it mentioned at all in Mr.
Lawrence's List of the Birds observed among the Lesser Antilles by
Mr. Ober, and Mr. Taylor does not mention seeing it anywhere
among the West Indies, all of which seems rather strange, as we
took two specimens, a pair (Mar. 7 and A})ril 12), and saw others,
and my brother found its nest, proving it to be a resident, at least
during the breeding season. Dr. L'Herminier, however, gives it

326 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of i>otninica.

fi'om both Guadeloupe and Martinique, it was also taken in the latter
island, by Mr. Richardson (Auk, iv, p. 96), and at St. Kitts by Mr.
C. S. Winch (ib. viii, p. 48) and recorded from the Greater Antilles
and Grenada by Mr. Cory (ib. iv, p. 43).

Apparently it is mainly confined to the mountains, as all we ob-
served were seen at quite an altitude, and the common English name
is " Mountain Hawk," while the other names, with the exception of
the first, are also applied to the following species. I am at a loss to
account for the name " Nonnette " (Osprey) as applied to this bird.

Iris (in specimens taken), brown in the male, red in the female ;
legs and feet yellow ; bill dark horn-color, lighter at the base.
5 TU-'Jf-S. ? lU-74-5.

" Eggs all badly incubated. Breeds in hollow trees or on cliffs." — (a. h. v.)

20. FalCO Caribbaearum Gmel. -'Gue Gue," Pat.; "Killee Killee," Pat.
Tinnunculus sparverius antillarum {Gme\.); Lawr. List.

Tinnunculus caribhcearum (Gmel.) ; Scl. List.

Rather common, but not abundant. It much resembles F. sparve-
rius in its habits and notes. It is a rather peculiar fact that all the
specimens obtained, four in number, were males. Taken from April
14 to May 24.

Irides brown; cere, eyelids, feet and tarsi, orange yellow; bill bluish
grey at the base, black at the tip. $ 11-6-2^-5^-20; 1 1^-6^-5 J^ ;
ll^-6f-.5y=^^. In all specimens, tarsus 1^, bill (cere to tip), ^.

21. Pandion haliaetus carolinensis (Gmel.). Fish Hawk.

Pandion lialiceliis (Linn.) ; Lawr. List.
Seen several times flying over.

Family, Strigidje.

22. Strix flammea nigrescens Lawr. "Shawah," Pat. (probably from

Fr. Chat-huant, Screech Owl) ; " Owl," Eng.

Rather rare. Like the European species, it is found principally
around old deserted houses, in the church towers, and similar places,
where it also breeds. This bird, like many of its family elsewhere,
is regarded wiih superstition by the natives and looked on as a
" Jumbie Bird," or one possessed of evil spirits.

Sexes unlike. Irides dull, yellowish brown ; feet and legs dark
brown ; feet and toes very sparsely feathered ; bill vei-y light yellow.

$ (from skin), wing 9^, tail 4;^, tai'sus 2.

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica. 327

Order, PSITTACI.
Family, Psittacid^.
23. AmaZOna augUSta (Vig.). " Ciceroo," Ca.

Chrysotis augusta (Yig.); Lawr. and Scl. Lists.

Common in the interior and on the windward side of the island
where it is fonnd among the mountains at quite an elevation. This
beautiful bird inhabits the thickest and most impenetrable forests
where the mountain palms and gommier trees grow, the seeds and
fruit of which, together with the young shoots of the former, make
a large part of its diet.

They are much hunted for food during the time the game law is
off, being then occasionally for sale in the market at Roseau, conse-
quently, though common in the particular localities where they live,
they are exceeding shy and difficult to procure. Even when within
gunshot it is very hard to distinguish their green and purple plumage
among the dense foliage of the high trees. They are generally
found in small flocks or in pairs and are not infrequently seen flying
over at a distance. As Mr. Ober has obsei'ved, their calls are heard
mainly for a short time in the early morning and towards evening,
and when disturbed, as by a gunshot. Their notes are mainly a
shrill whistle, a sharp scream, and a series of crescendo yells.

When kept in captivity, as they sometimes are, they make fairly
good talkers. According to the natives, the nest is generally built in
a hole at the top of a dead palm, but it is very rarely found ; one old
Carib, a man who had spent his life in the woods, said he had never
found but one.

It was mainly to procure these truly Imperial Parrots, so seldom
seen in collections, that our trip was made to Bass-en-ville, which is
a single house in the primeval forest, and only to be reached by one
of the worst trails I have ever traveled, and I have spent a number
of months among the Sierra Nevada Mountains. This trip, however,
well repaid us for our trouble, as it was there that we took many of
our best birds and other specimens, but though parrots were seen
nearly every day, and we were accompanied by Mr. Hennessey
Dupigny and another hunter, our united efforts secured but two of
these shy birds in the ten days we were there.

One of our specimens is a female and the other was so mutilated
by a shot as to x'ender the determination of sex impossible, but they
are alike in plumage and I can see no difference between them and
Mr. Lawrence's description of a male taken by Mi*. Ober.

328 G. E. Verri/l — Emma of the island of l^ominica.

Iris red ; bill dark horn-color with a light spot on each side of the
iipper mandible at the base ; legs and feet dark brown. ? 21-11^-
8^-361; sex undetermined, 19|-10^H-35^.

34. Amazona bOUqueti (Wagl.). " Perroquet," Pat. and Fr. (Parrot).
Parrot sp. 2; Lawr. List.

Chrysotis nichollsi Lawr. ; Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. Ill, p. 254, 1880.
Clirysotds houqv.eti (Wagl.); Scl. List.

Found in the same localities, but apparently much rarer than
the "Ciceroo" and like it very wild and difficult to procure.

Generally seen in rather larger flocks, otherwise the remarks with
regard to the habits and notes of C. augnsta apply equally well to
this species. The notes of the two species can generally be distin-
guished by a person familiar with them, but the difference between
the yells of two parrots is something very difficult to indicate on
paper. These latter ai'e also said never to become good talkers.

We succeeded in procuring but one specimen, a male. Mr. Ober
did not take this bird at all, though he mentions a parrot " about
the size of our North Carolina Parrot but more robust"; but in
1879 and 1880 Dr. Nicholls sent two small collections of Dominican
birds to the Smithsonian, and among them were three specimens
that Mr. Lawrence described as C nichollsi, giving several differ-
ences between it and C. cyanopis (Vieill.) and C. honqtieti (Bechat).
Our specimen agrees very closely with his description in all points
but one. Mr. Lawrence says " the breast and abdomen are tinged
with yellow " and mentions this as one of the differences between
G. nichollsi and G. bouqueti, but in our specimen the abdomen is
green with many of the feathers dull red at the base and there is a
band of scarlet f of an inch wide, extending across the upper part
of the breast, and half way around to the back on each side, and
below the band, in the middle of the breast, are two or three
scarlet and yellow feathers. In the specimens at the Am. Mus. of
Nat. Hist, this band is entirely lacking. Mi*. Cory, however, in his
<' Birds of West Indies," 1889, p. 186, mentions a " patch of dull red
mixed with yellow on the upper part of the breast joining the
throat"; but our specimen differs from his description in having the
red, wing speculum covering three instead of two feathers and in a
few other points and he does not mention the red on the base of the
abdominal feathers nor the dark blue on the outer webs of the
primaries and outer tail feather, so that in some respects our bird
more resembles his description of G. versicolor (Miill.).

G. E. Verrill — Fauna oj the Island of Dominica. 329

Judging from the various descriptions and our own specimen this
species is subject to great variation in phimage, perhaps due partly
to sex, age, and season.

Iris orange ; bill light horn-color, running into black at tip of
upper mandible ; legs and feet broAvn. S (from skin), wing 9^, tail
6, bill (chord of culmeu from cere) 1.20.

Order, COCCYGES.

Family, Cuculid.e.

25, CoCCyZUS minor (Gmel.). "Coulaveecon," Pat.; '' Coucoiimioc," Pat.
(Fr. Coucou manioc, Manioc or Cassava, Cuckoo).
Coccyzus seniculus Vieill. ; Tayl. List.

Not uncommon, locally (|uite common, as at Bass-en-ville, where a
number were seen and heard and several taken.

In habits and notes it much resembles our common Yellow-billed
Cuckoo ( C. atnerlcamis).

Iris brown or red ; upper mandible black, lower mandible yellow,
black at the tip ; legs and feet black. Sexes alike in plumage,
female apparently larger than the male. ^ 13-5f-6f-15; 13^-5f-6^;
121-5^-6-16^. ? 13f-5f-6|-17i.

Order, ALCYONES.
Family, Alcedinid^.

36. Ceryle alcyon (Linn.). " Calbasco," Pat.

Rather rare and shy. Seen several times. Though no specimens
were obtained it was undoubtedly this species, which Mr. Ober also
saw but did not take.

The natives insisted that there were two entirely different birds,
both called by the above Patois name, and stated that the other was
rare and had a long bill with teeth or notches along its sides, but
the description was so imperfect that it was impossible to tell what
bird it was, and though we used every endeavor and offered a good
price we were unable to procure any ; still I am in hopes that one of
our friends who helped us to secure so many rare birds, may yet send
us one of these, which I am sure from the description given us is
something unlooked for in the fauna of this islaiul.

330 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

Order, MACROCHIRES.
Family, Micropodid.e.

27. Cypseloides niger (Gmel.). " Hirondelle," Pat. and Fr. (Swallow).
Not so common as the following species, though generally seen in

the same localities and at the same time, but usually flying much
higher, and so is more diflicult to procure. Two specimens only
were obtained. Neither Mr. Ober nor Mr. Ramage procured this
bird in Dominica, though the former gentleman speaks of seeing
" a species of swift intermediate in size between the small swift and
the large martin," which was undoubtedly this bird.
Iris, bill, legs, and feet black. Sex ? 6^-6-2§,

28. Chsetura dominicana Lawr. •' Hirondelle," Pat. and Fr.

Given provisionally as ChcElura poliura (Temtn.) by Mr. Lawrence in his list. After-
wards described as above. (Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., vol. i, 1879, p. 255.)

Very common and widely distributed. Particularly abundant
near Spring Hill and about the head of the Roseau Valley. Also
seen in numbers at Casata Garden and at Bass-en-ville. As Mr.
Ober states, they generally appear for a short time after a rain and
then disappear again. 1 can see no trace in our specimens of the
whitish edging to the upper tail coverts mentioned by Mr. Lawrence.
Very likely it is a seasonal variation.

Sexes alike. Iris and bill black, legs and feet brown. S 5-4^=^^-
If-lOi; 4f-4f-l|-10i. ?4f-4^V-lt-10f ; 4|-4tV1|-101 ; 4^-
4f-l|. Tarsus f in all specimens.

Family, Teochilid^e.

29. EulampiS jugularis (Linn.) "Foa Fou Mardet," Pat. (Fr. Fou Fou,

Crazy Crazy, in allusion to their eccentric motions while on the wing.)

Common, though rarely found in the immediate vicinity of the
coast. Its principal range seems to be from 500-1500 feet elevation
and in this belt it is very common, especially in the plantain, banana,
and lime plantations where it may be seen hovering about the
flowers, perching every now and then on some convenient leaf or
twig to rest and preen itself. Like all of its family that are found
on the island, it is very tame and permits a close approach.

Formerly many of this and other species were slaughtered for
millinery purposes, but of late years they have been strictly pro-
tected by law. Mr. Taylor speaks of finding this bird in Dominica,
but less commonly than the following species, whereas our experi-

G. E. Ven'ill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica. 331

ence was directly the reverse, this species outnumbering E. holo-
sericeics, I should say, by at least four to one, and closely approach-
ing jB. exilis in numbers, so that it may have increased since he was
there. He also speaks of its frequenting "thick shady places," a
habit that we failed to observe.

The females closely resemble the males but the colors are not
quite so bright, particularly the crimson on the throat and breast,
and they seem to be slightly smaller. The bill (exposed culmen),
varies greatly in length. Iris, legs, feet, and bill black. ^ 5|— 3^-
lt-7|, bill -92; 5i-3-lf-H, bill -85 ; 5i-2|-lf, bill 1-03. ? 5f-2i-|-
U-7, bill 1-04 ; 5-2|-Iy\, bill -97 ; 5-3^-l|-, bill -85.

"Nest always placed at a considerable distance from the ground. One taken
April 9th was fully sixty feet from the ground in a catalpa tree." — (a. h. v.)

This nest, though entirely finished, contained no eggs and evi-
dently had not been used. It is saddled on a good sized crotch (the
main branch ^V i"ch in diameter), that grew in a nearly horizontal
position. The nest is very compact, slightly elliptical in shape on
top, and composed of the brown scales from the leaves of ferns,
probably mainly tree-ferns, with a few large pieces of grey lichens
on the outside, mostly near the bottom. The bottom is covei'ed
with greenish white down, probably from young fern leaves, and
the whole nest is very firmly fastened to the branch by the same
material, running entirely around the twig. Inside, it is lined with
down from the silk-cotton tree. From side to side, in the largest
place, it measures 2^Xlf and is If high. The cavity is 1^X1 on
top and f deep. Plate xxv, fig. 1.

30. Eulampis holosericeus (Linn.) "Pou Fou Tete-longue." Pat. and
Fr. (Crazy Crazy Long-head.)

Not so common as the preceding, found at a rather greater ele-
vation (about 750-2000 feet), and principally on the windward side
of the island, though' by no means rare on the leeward side in certain
localities. In common with the last and H. exilis it is particularly
fond of the plantain and banana patches, which were our principal
collecting grounds for these three species.

Mr. Taylor states that he found this the most abundant humming-
bird in Dominica, but according to our experience it was the least so,
with the exception of T. hicolor, which was not observed by him,
so that it seems as though this species must have greatl}'^ decreased
or the others increased since he was there, which well might happen
in the twenty-seven years between his visit and ours.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 4-1 April, 1892.

332 G. E> Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

Sexes much alike, but the male rather brighter than his mate.
Iris, bill, leg, and feet black. As in the last species the length of
the bill is very variable. The measurement given in all cases is the
chord of the exposed culmen. 5 4f-2^-lj'L-5|, bill -80; 4|-2y''^-lJg,
bill -82; 4^-2^-l|, bill -96. $41-21-1^^-6, bill 1.01.

"Nest generally a deep pouch-shaped structure fastened by one side to a perpen-
dicular twig, generally at some height (20-40 feet), from the ground." — (a. it. y.)

Five nests are in the collection.

One taken at Laudat, April 10, contained no eggs, is pouch-shaped,
fastened to the upright stalk of a plant, and is composed of the fine,
brown scales from ferns, mentioned above, with a number of pieces
of bark and leaves, from the plantain and banana plants, hung
loosely on the outside, the whole being bound together by cobweb.
It is '2\ high and H in diameter at the top, continuing the same size
to within an inch of the bottom and from there tapering down to a
point. The cavity is 1 f deep and f in diameter.

The second was taken March 28, and contained two j^oung. This
is like the last except that it is completely covered with pieces of
plantain or banana bark and leaves. It is 2^ high and 1^ in diameter
across the top, sloping gradually down to the bottom, which is f
across. The cavity is 1^ deep and 1 in diameter across the top.
Plate XXVI, fig. 2.

The third, taken April 13th, contained two fresh eggs. It is cup-
shaped, saddled on a small twig inclined upwards at an angle of
about 30°, and is composed like the two already described. It meas-
ures 1^ across the top and is Ij high. The cavity is f across the
top and f deep. The eggs are dead white, elliptical in shape, and
measure '51 X*34 and -SOX "35. Plate xxv, fig. 2.

The fourth, taken April 15th, also contained two fresh eggs. It
is cup-shaped and composed like the former ones but w'ith a little
down from the silk-cotton tree for inside lining^ and very few pieces
of banana and plantain leaves on the ontside. It is 2^ high and 1^
across the top, sloping down to a point at the bottom. The cavity
is f deej) and ^ in diameter. The eggs are like the above and meas-
ure •46X-29 and -47X30.

The last nest contain* two eggs. It is cup-shaped and composed
like the third. It measures 1^ high and 1§ across the top. The
cavity is f deep and 1 across the top. The eggs measure •5lX'33
and 'SIX '34, color and shape like the former ones. Plate xxvi, fig. 1.

G. E. Verrill — JFhuna of the Island of Dominica. 333

31. Thalurania bicolor (Gmel.) •' Fou Fou Bleu," Pat. and Fr. (Blue Crazy
Crazy).
Thalurania wayleri (Less.) ; Lawr. and Sel. Lists.

Rather common. Found mainly at a considerable elevation and
in the heavy woods. We never took it at an elevation of less than
1200 feet and apparenth^ it rarely, if ever, descends to the lowlands.
Taken in the vicinity of Laudat, at Providence (Mr. Hennessey
Dupigny's plantation near Laudat), and near Bass-en-ville. This
beautiful bird seems to prefer the seclusion and shade of the deep
woods to the sunshine and warmth of the plantations and clearings.
In some little opening among the thick mass of trees, vines, lianas,
etc., that comj)ose the forests of this island or along some mountain
trail that runs through the dee]) woods, it is generally seen, either
hovering about some flower, sitting pi'uning itself upon some twig
or stem, or darting past so swiftly that one sees but a gleam of
burnished blue and green. It is rather solitary in its habits, more
than one rarely being seen at a time. Only one female was obtained,
at Bass-en-ville, May 19, and no others were met with, though nine
males were obtained and several others seen. The males too were
observed about the nests and sitting on the eggs, but no females.

Sexes very different in plumage. Iris dark brown or black; legs
and feet dark brown; upper mandible black; in the male the lower
mandible is white, black at the tip ; in the female it is dark brown,
slightly lighter at the base and black at^ the tip. $ 4-2^-1 -^-^ ; 4^-

94— li-fi- ift— 9 S _111_.c;5.. 41 9 5 _15 «. 4.i_93._lii O i._9 S _1 l e; 1

-^8 ^8 "> ^B^ ^16 '^TG' ^-i? *T^^T1J 's "> *4 -8 ^ -L' + ^ '^TT '^2~'^^'

In all the male specimens the exposed culmen measures 0'65 and
in the female it is 0*68.

" This bird builds the handsomest nests of all the hummers on the island. It is
usually built close to the ground, never more than a few feet from it, and generally
placed in a large brake-like fern. A number of sets taken, all at a great elevation,
2000-2500 feet."— (a. h. v.)

One nest, taken April 12, contained "two badly incubated eggs."
It is fastened to the frond of a fern, and composed mainly of a fine,
short, greyish brown, vegetable fibre, much resembling fur, and a few
brown fern scales. On the outside are fastened a few small pieces
of gray lichen and the whole is fastened together with spider-web or
something so closely resembling it as to be indistinguishable without
careful microscopic examination. It measures If across the top, 1^
in height, and the cavity is f deep. The eggs are dead white,
nearly elliptical, and measure •46X'30 and •46x*3]. Plate xxvi,
fig. 5.

334 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Isla)>d of Dominica.

Another iie,st, taken April 14, containing- one fresh egg, is situated
on a twig and much like the last, but slightly lined with silk-cotton,
and is well covered with small pieces of lichen, each 2>laced with
the natural side, of a light greyish green, out. It is If across the
top, 1^ high, and the cavity is f deep. The egg is like the last two
and measures •54X'3'7. Plate xxvi, fig. 4.

A third nest taken near Laudat, March 28, with two badly incu-
bated eggs, is placed in the crotch of a fern frond, but varies from
the other two in being composed, on the outside, of the brown scales
from stems of ferns with no pieces of lichen, and the inside is very
thickly lined with down from the silk-cotton tree. This one meas-
ures \h across the toj), 1:^ in height, and the deptli of cavity is f.
One Qgg is too badly broken to measure, the other is "49 X "32.

32. Bellona exilis (Giuel.) "Fou Fou Bequar," Pat. (Possibly from Fr.
besquee, a beak full.)
Orihorhynchus exilis (Gmnl.); Tayl. Lawr., aud Scl. List.

Very common and widely distributed. Though most abundant in
the low lands and near the coast, it is also found commonly among
the mountains and we took it from every camp. According to our
experience this pretty and diminutive species is the commonest of
the hummers in Dominica.

Sexes unlike. $ -H-ll-l-j^^, exposed culmen -31, bill (from rictus)
•68. $ 3|-m-ly^g^, exposed' culmen '43, bill (from rictus) -70 ; 34-
If-]^, exposed culmen '44, bill (from rictus) 07.

The nests of this species vary considerabh^ in composition, shape,
and mode of attachment. There are nine nests in the collection, no
two just alike, the onh^ characters common to all seem to be the
presence of more or less brown scales from ferns or tree-ferns used
in the composition, and the use of spider w^eb, or some very similar
material, in greater or less quantity, to bind the nest together.

Generally the nest is composed mainly of the fern scales, with
more or less silk-cotton for a lining, it being entirely absent in only
two out of the nine nests, and in three it constitutes about half the
total bulk of material. In a number it is also used on the outside,
in small quantities, to help bind them together. Six nests are more
or less ornamented on the outside with pieces of lichen, after the
manner of T. bicolor. In one of the other nests the lichen is re-
placed by small pieces of brown bark and in one where lichen is
present there are also a few pieces of dark green moss. (Plate xxvi,
fig. 6).

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Domluica. 385

The size is pretty constant but tlie shape varies more or less
according to the location. The usual form is cup-shaped or some
modification of it. When saddled on a horizontal twig the sides
are generally straight and when in a crotch or on an upright
they generally slope somewhat. The diameter across the top is
about 1^, three are If; the height varies from \\ to \%^ with the
exception of one particularly shallow one that is only f high. The
cavity varies in depth from \ to \^ tlie average being about 5, and
in diameter across the top, from % to ^.

The mode of attachment and location is quite various. Two are
saddled on horizontal branches, one of them at the junction of two
smaller twigs ; two more are on twigs inclined' upwards at an angle
of about 45", one at the branching tip and the otlier at a crotch ; one
is in the crotch of a fern leaf, a very pretty and compact nest,
thickly covered with spider-web and lined with silk-cotton (Plate
XXVI, fig. 8.); another is fastened by the side to two twigs near their
junction with a larger branch ; another is fastened to the stem of
a drooping leaf ; and still another by its side to the stem of a vine
at the junction of two leaves.

The eggs are dead white and elliptical in shape, like those of the
other hummers. We never found more than two in a set. One set
of two, taken April 13, Avere slightly incubated and measure •50X'32
and 51X"32; another, taken three days later, had only one egg,
fresh, measuring •47X'32 ; and on March 14 another nest contained
two badly incubated eggs, one only saved, •47x*31; and still an-
other taken more than a month later, April 19, also contained two
eggs badly incubated, so that only one was saved, measuring -45 X '31.
Evidently the breeding season varies much.

Order, PASSERES.
Family, Tyrannid^e.
33. Tyrannus rostratUS Scl. "Pipiree," Pat. (from the note).

Common locally. We found it quite plentiful at Bass-en-ville and
all up and down the Layou Valley, but rare in the Roseau Valley.
A very noisy and lively, but susi^icious l)ird. It delights to perch on
the top of some dead tree and utter its loud cry of " pipiree, pipiree,"
every now and again darting into the air after some passing insect.
Its general habits much resemble those of our common Kingbird
{T. tyrannus).

Sexes much alike. Ii-is browm; bill, legs, and feet black. ^ 10-5-
3^-15; 10-5-4-15; 10-4f-4-15|. ? 9^4|-3|-13^ ; 9|-4^-3j-15,

336 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

3-A. Myiarchus tyrannulus Oberi (Lawr.) "La belle Gotet," Pat. (Fr.
Grostete, Large head). " Soleil Coucher," Pat. aod Fr. "Sunset Bird," Eng.
Myiarchus, sp. ?; Tayl. List. Afterwards referred to M. erythrocercus.
Myiarchus oberi Lawr. ; Lawr. List.
Myiarchus tyrannulus (Miiller). ; Scl. List.

Rather common in certain localities, as at Bass-en-ville, but gen-
erally very shy and suspicious. Mainly confined to the uplands and
mountains. General habits and note somewhat resemble those of
M. crlnUi/.'i. The names " Soleil Coucher " and " Sunset Bird "
come from its uttering its cry at about sunset.

Sexes alike in plumage, female apparently slightly smaller than
the male. Iris dark bi'own ; bill, legs and feet black. S 9|-4-3f-
13^; 9-4-3^-12. 9 9-4-31-12 ; 85-3f-3f-12f. 8-3|-3f ; 8-3|-3j.

In all our specimens the bright ferruginous extends along the
entire length of the inner webs of the tail feathers, instead of being
confined to their outer two-thirds as given by Mr. Lawrence in his
original description (Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., vol. i, p. 48).

The color of the ventral surface is very variable, grading from
light, but bright and pure, yellow in some to dull white, merely
washed or tinged with yellow, in others. This variation is appar-
ently not due to sex, season, or locality, as two males taken within
three days of each other, at the same place, show as much variation
as any.

35. BlacicUS brunneicapillus Lawr. " Gobe-mouche," Pat and Fr. (Fly-
catcher).

Common, particular!}' abundant in the heavy woods fringing the
main road up the Roseau Valley. An inhabitant of the mountains
rather than the lowlands, seeming to generally prefer the deep, high,
woods and their borders to the more open groves and plantations of
less elevated parts of the country.

Sexes similar. Irides dark brown, legs and feet brownish black,
upper mandible black, lower mandible light yellow. S Q^-2^-2^-

2yV-2|-8^. In all specimens, bill -^^, tarsus ^V ^o f.

The only nest obtained was taken with two fresh eggs, April 16.
It was placed on a dead limb and is a very frail, loose sti-ucture of
bark, pieces of banana or plantain leaves, stems, and roots, 2 inches
in diameter and f high.

The eggs are white with a ring of confluent spots and blotches of
a deep reddish brown and a few of lilac, about the large end, in one

G. E. Yerrill — Fauna of tlie Island of Dominica. :33 7

egg completely covering this end ; the other is not so heavily
•marked and has a few small spots and blotches over the rest of the
surface. They measure -Y^X'SG and .VGX'oS. Plate xxv, figs. 5
and 6.

36. Elaenea pagana raartinica (Linn.). '-Cheweck," Pat (from the note)
Elainea martinica (Linn.) ; Tayl., Lavvr., and ScL Lists.

Common. Generally found at quite an elevation. In habits it
much resembles our Pewee {^Sayornis pJuehe).

Sexes alike in plumage. Iris dark brown ; upper mandible dark
horn-color, lower mandible yellow, running into dark horn at the
tip; legs and feet black. <5 6^-3^-8-10| ; 7-3j-2f. ? 6f-3^-2-|-
10; 1-H-n-

" Nest resembles that of Empidonax minimus. Eggs very variable. Generally
white, spotted about the larger end with lilac and brown. Sometimes closely resem-
bling those of the ' Teeteen ' but larger." — (a. h. v.)

A nest in the collection, taken April 16th, contained three fresh
eggs. It is compactly built of dry stems, fine grass, and vegetable
fibre and is lined with the same and some down from the silk-cotton
tree. It measures 2^ in. across the top and If in. high. The cavity
is If across the top and l^ deep.

The eggs are white with fine, light sepia-brown and grey spots
(the brown greatly predominating), confluent, and forming a ring-
about, and even in one case covering, the large end. On the rest of
the egg the spots are much lighter. Taken as a whole the markings
are more in number and finer than in D. petechia nielanoptera. The
eggs measure •68X*49; •68X*48; -eSX'Sl. Plate xxv, figs. 7 and 8.

Family, Feingillid^.

37. Loxigilla noctis SChlateri Allen. ;; "Penwe," ? "Masong," Pat.

(Probably from Fr. Pere noir, Black father, and Mere sang, Blood-colored
mother in allusion to the black male and rather rusty colored female). Also
called "Robin" and "Plantain-eater."
Loxlgilla nodis (Linn.) ; Tayl., Lawr., and Scl. Lists.

Very abundant,' especially in the valleys and about the plantations
and towns. These were generally the first birds to respond to the
call made by sucking the back of the hand, and invariably mani-
fested great anxiety and excitement. The sexes are usually very
different but subject to great variation. In this connection Mr.
Alien, who made a careful examination of our series, wi'ites: "Three
males present much variation in the amount of rufous on the lower
tail-coverts and the size of the supra-loral spot. These, with other
Dominican specimens before me, show that the rufous maj^ be en-

338 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

tirely lacking from the lower tail-coverts, or occupy them to the
exclusion of black. Two of the females have rufous feathers on the
throat, forming, in one of them a small patch ; in this specimen
there is more or less black mixed through the plumage, giving a
patchy effect, suggesting a young male in changing plumage. The
sex, however, was carefully determined by dissection. [This speci-
men also agrees with the other females in size. — g. e. v.] It thus
appears that the female sometimes partially assumes the livery of
the male, as Mr. Cor^- has recently found is the case in Loxigilla
violacea (cf. Auk, viii., 1891, p. 296)."

Irides red or brown ; upper mandible black or dark horn, lower
mandible lighter, particularly in the female ; legs and feet brow^n.
S 6-2i-2i ; H--2i-2i • 5j-2i-2-9f ? 5|-2i-2-8i ; 5i-2f-2i

"Nest a bulky affair of leaves, sticks, etc. Sometimes domed with the opening
on one side. Breeds anywhere. Eggs two to Ave. A number of sets taken March
28-April 9."— (A. H. V.)

There are two nests of this species in the collection, neither of
them domed. One, taken April 1, is composed of pieces of drj^
plantain and banana leaves, fine stems, roots and dead leaves, and is
lined with dried grass, stems, etc. It measures 3 in height and 3f
across the top. The cavity is If deep. This nest contained two
fresh eggs, white, blotched and spotted with reddish brown, con-
fluent at the large end, and measuring •8lX"5'7 and •84X"61.

Another nest taken March 31 contained one fresh egg. The nest
is like the last and about the same size. The egg markings are of
very light brown, not so heavy as in the last, and the large end is
not so heavily ringed. It measures •80X"58. On another egg, from
a third set, the spots are much more even, rather darker, and form
no ring at the large end. This egg measures -85 X "58.

38. Euetheia biCOlor (Linn ) S ''Zee Zee Zeb." ? "Zee Zee Zay" (Pat.).

Phonipara hicolor (Linu ): Lawr., and Scl. Lists.

Phonipara omissa Jard. ; Tayl. List.

Abundant, but like the last, found i»rincipally in. the neighborhood
of plantations and along the trails and paths. Not often seen in the
interior nor far from the settlements and cleared lands.

"Note resembles that of the Yellow-winged S^parrow (Aimnodrcunus savannarum
passerinus)y — (a. h. v.)

Sexes different in plumage. Iris black, legs and feet (hirk brown,
bill black. ,t4f-2-lf-6i; 4^-2-1^6^^; 4-2-lt. ^ ^-2-^-^ ;
4^-2-lf.

"Nest built of grass, near the ground, among tall weeds or in the cane-fields. En-
trance on the side." — (a. h. y.)

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica. 339

The two eggs in the collection are light greenish or dirty white
with a number of dark brown spots at the large end and few of the
same color scattered over the rest of the egg. They measure
•6 IX -48.

Family, Tanagrid^.

39. Euphonia fiavifrons (Sparrm.). '• Peritch," Pat. (Fr. Pernich, Parroqiiet).
" Jaco," Pat. and Fr. (Parrot).

Hare. We obtained all our specimens, nine in number, from the
same tree and saw no others anywhere else. At this particular tree,
however, one or more could almost always be obtained, at least by
waiting a short time. The natives insisted that there was only one
other tree of the same kind on the island and that these two trees
were the only places where the birds were found. The tree in ques-
tion had a parasitic vijie of some sort growing on it and it appeared
to be on the berries of this vine that the birds fed, as their crops
were nearly always full of them.

These birds are very quiet, so that we heard them utter no note
beyond a few- chirps and twitters. In their actions they are slow
and deliberate, crawling rather than hopping about, from which
habit, probably, as well as their bright colors, the natives call them
"Jaco" and " Peritch," apparently fancying they either are parrots
themselves or bear some close relation to them.

The sexes are very similar, the colors of the male brighter than in
the female but otherwise the same. Irides black, bill black, legs
and feet greyish black. 6 5-2f-lf-8i ; 5-2^-1 f. 9 5-2^-lf.

"Nest built of sticks, in a hole in a tree. Egg:s pure white, sometimes slightly
spotted. One nest found, but the eggs were badly incubated and not saved." — (a. h. t.)

40. Saltator guadelupensis Lafr. '-Grosbec," Pat. and Fr. (Grosbeak).

Not common. A shy inhabitant of the thickest underbrush and
bushes, generally found along the borders of the paths and cleared
land. Sexes similar. Of the seasonal variation in this bird Mr.
Allen, who examined our series, writes as follows : " This insular
form of S. alhicollis is represented by seven specimens, showing
considerable variation in color, the March and April specimens being-
much greener, especially below, than those taken during the last
half of May."

Iris Ijrown; legs and feet brown; upper mandible dark horn-color
at the base, yellow at the tip ; lower mandible yellow with a large
dark spot on each side at the base. $, 9-4^3|-13| ; 9-4-3^12^ ;
9i-4-3i-13t; 8-3^-3i; 8-3|-3|. 9 81-4^-3^-13; 81-4^-3^-1. 3i.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 45 April, 1892.

340 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

Family, Hirundinid^.

41. Progne dominicensis (Gmel.). "Hirondelle," Pat. and Fr. (Swallow).

A martin or large swallow was observed rather commonly about
Roseau, but very rarely seen elsewhere. No specimens were taken,
but it was undoubtedly the above species which was obtained by Mr.
Ober.

Family, Vireonid.e.

42. Vireo calidris (Liuu.). "Cheweck Tetlong," Pat. (Fr. Tete longue, Long

head).
Vireosylvia altUoqua (Vieill.) ; Tayl. List.
Vireosylvia calidris var. dominicana Lawr. ; Lawr. List.
Vireosylvia calidris (Linn.); Scl. List.

Common and widely distributed. In habits and note resembling
V. oUvaceus. Very likely, as Mr. Ober thought, this bird is a
summer visitor only, for our first specimen was not taken until
March '27.

Sexes much alike. Iris generally brown, but in one specimen, a
female, it was red ; upper mandible dark hoi"n, the lower bluish-
white. S 671-3^-2^-10 ; 7-31-2^;; -10 ; 6^-3^-2^. ? 6^-3-2-91 ;
6-3|-2y^g-9 ; 6f-3-2i3^-9f. Exposed culmen in S -65, in $ -60 ;
tarsus in both sexes '15.

Family, Ccerebid^.

43. Ccereba dominicana (Taylor). "Sucner," Pat. and Fr. (Sugarmaker.)
Certhiola dominicana Taylor ; Tayl., Lawr., and Scl. Lists.

Abundant almost everywhere. Sexes similar. One of the males
(perhaps immature), differs from the others in having the anterior
half of the superciliary line bright yellow, very little grey on the
forehead, and the back greyish black instead of jet black as in the
others. Bill black, legs and feet dark brown, They seem to vary
much in size, the wings of the males ranging from 2^-2^, the tails
from If-H, the bills from -SS-'SO and the tarsi from •74--66. S 4|-

" Nest built almost anywhere, composed of a great variety of materials, Some-
times it is very beautiful and composed wholly of moss. Generally globular in shape
with the opening on one side. Breeds continually from February to May." — (a. h. v.)

One nest in the collection was taken at Laudat, March 26th, and
contained two slightly incubated eggs. It is globular in shape with
the opening on one side and composed of leaves, grass, roots and
stems. The mouth of the opening is lined with very fine rootlets

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of iJominica. 341

and stems. The total heiglit of this nest is 5f in. ; greatest diameter,
from the bottom of the opening to back of nest outside, is 4^ in.
The opening is 1^ in. high, 1 in. wide and situated 2^ in, from the
bottom of the nest. (Plate xxv, lig. 3.) The eggs measure '74 X "52
and •77X"52. The ground color is Avhite very thickly and finely
spotted with light chocolate-brown (in one so as to entirely obscure
the white, except at the tip of the small end, which is clear white),
heavier at the large end, where are a few fine lines of much darker
brown.

Another nest is composed like the last, but with the outside beauti-
fully covered with dark green moss like that in the nest of the
"Morvy," [Gichlherminia dominieensis).

Another nest with four fresh eggs, taken April \ 0th, is composed
like the first, but much smaller, measuring 3^ in. in height and 3| in,
from fi'ont to back. The opening is round, 1 in. in diameter, and is
1^ in. from the bottom of the nest. The eggs measured 'eQX'Sl,
•70X'51, and •7lX"53, the fourth is badly broken. The first resem-
bles the former set but with the large end darker, Plate xxv, fig, 9 ;
the second has around the large end a much darker band which is
clearly defined toward the small end, but gradually grows a little
lighter at the extreme lai'ge end, the rest of the egg is not so thickly
marked as in the former examples, Plate xxv, fig, 10; in tlie third
the spots are much larger, the large end is very thickly marked and
the rest of the egg not very thickly. The last Qgg, which has been
so broken as to prevent measuring, closely resembles the set first
described.

Two other sets measure as follows: one set'7lX*49; •74X"51 ;
•76 X -52 and the other -70 X -49 ; •70X-51; •73X-51.

The color and markings are much like those previously described.

Family, Mniotiltid^.
44. Dendroica petechia melanoptera Lawr. "Teeteen," Pat.

D. petethia {lAxxn); Tayl. and Lawr. List. Afterwards described by Lawrence as
above (P. U. S. N. M., vol. i, p. 453).

D. melanoptera Sharpe ; Sol. List.

Abundant in low, open woods, lime groves, and on the estates.
Found low down, near the coast, as well as higher up in the moun-
tains. Habits and notes much resemble D. cestiva. Sexes unlike in
color. One female shows a faint trace of rufous on the crown and
has a few light rufous streaks below, Irides dark brown, bill black,
legs and feet light brown.

3 5-21-1^-7 ; 5-21-2-7. ? 5-2f-lt-7 ; 5-2-lf-7,

342 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

Several nests and sets of eggs are in the collection. Two charac-
teristic ones, may he described as follows :

The first nest, taken on April 17, contained two fresh eggs, one
•64 X '49, white with very slight greenish tint, with a ring of small
brown and grey continent spots about the larger end, the rest of the
egg sparingly spotted with the same colors, thickest at the large end,
very lightly toward the small end, the brown predominating over
the whole egg. The other egg is -esx'SO, much like the other, but
with the brown spots much larger, clearer, and of a deeper brown
with no grey spots and fewer brown ones outside of the ring at the
large end. Plate xxv, fig. 11.

The nest is compactly made of dry grass, stems of plants, leaves,
chicken feathers, bits of cloth, colored wool, and several cocoons of
spiders. It is lined with chicken feathers and horse hair, and
measures 2^ in. across the top and 2 in. high ; the cavity is If in.
across the top and H in. deep.

The other nest taken on Aj^ril 9th contained three fresh eggs in-
termediate in color between the two just described and measuring
•65 X*50, '64x*49, and •64X'50. The nest is much like the last but
composed of more dried grasses and quite a little cotton, and contains
no chicken feathers nor bits of cloth. It is lined with horse hair and
a little down from the silk- cotton tree.

45. Dendroica plumbea Lawr. '• Pa-pia," Pat.

Plate xxvii, Fig. 2.

Very abundant, found nearly everywhere. Very tame and unsus-
picious. Generally seen running up and down trunks of trees and
hanging on the terminal twigs and leaves after the manner of the
nuthatches and titmice.

Sexes alike. The green plumage described by. Mr. Lawrence
(Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., vol. i, 1879, p. 47), as that of the female is evi-
dently the livery of the young as we took two females in the full grey
plumage like that of the males, and one young female, April 14, with
the grey feathers appearing on the top of the head, back of neck,
around the bill, and on the throat, but otherwise agreeing with Mr.
Lawrence's description of the female plumage, except that the line
over the eye and the lower eyelid are both bright yellow instead of
white as he describes them.

Iris dark brown ; upper mandible dark horn-color ; the lower
yellowish, grosviog das'kcr at the tip ; leg> and feet brownish yellow.
c5 5i-2J-2-8 ; 5f-2^-2^-8, tarsus i|. ? 51-2^^-2^-71 ; ^-2f-

G. M. Verrill — launa of the Island of Dominica. 343

2^\ ? j'lv. 5^2f-2:^. In all specimens the bill, from front, measures
y''^, and the tarsus (except in one case), f .

" N^est very much like Spinus histis, built in low shrubbery, particularly oleanders
and grape plums. Eggs very much like I), 'petechia melanopiera, but generally larger
and more heavily marked. Laudat, April 1 ; Shawford, April 19." — a. h. v.

46. Seiurus noveboracensis (Gmei.)

A bird described by the natives as being there early in the season,
was doubtless this species, which was taken by Mr. Ober and which
probably occurs sim2:>ly as a migrant,

47. Setophaga ruticilla (Liuu.) "Officer Bird," Kng. "Chat,"Eug.

Probably a migrant only, as none were seen after May 1st. Sexes
unlike. Differs in no way from New England specimens.

6 5-2|-2f; ?5-2f-2i.

Family, Teoglodttid.e.

48. Cinclocerthia ruficauda (Gould). " Trembleur," Pat. and Fr. " Trem-

bler " (Eng.).

Abundant and very widel}^ distributed. Taken at every camp.
Found chiefly in dense shrubbery near the ground, though frequently
seen in the tops of tall trees searching for insects after the manner
of the warblers and vireos. Towards evening it also ascends to the
top of some bush or tree to sing, after the manner of the Brown
Thrasher [Harporhynclws rufus)^ which it resembles in many of its
habits and notes. Its name comes from its peculiar habit of con-
stantly vibrating or "trembling" its wings, which are generally
carried slightly raised from the sides and with the tips beneath the
tail, which is also raised.

Sexes alike. Irides yellow, bill black, legs and feet brown.
3 9i-33-3i-12i; 9i-3|-3-12J: ; 9-3|-3i-12 ; 9^-31-3^-12. ? 9-

" Nest closely resembles that of our Brown Thrush {H. rufus), but often built at a
considerable distance from the ground. It is composed of fine twigs and grasses,
generally with more or less mud. The eggs are said by the natives to be dark bluish
green. All the nests found contained young. Breeds early, about the last of Febru-
ary."— (a. h. v.)

49. ThryothorUS rufescens Lawr. " Rosingnole," Pat. (Fr. Rossignol,

Nightiugale). " Nightingale," Eng.

Plate xxvn, Fig. 1.
Hather common, but shy and diflicult to procure. Found chiefly
near the ground, generally in thickets and heavy undergrowth along

344 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

the borders of trails and openings. Its loud clear song is much
oftener heard than the bird itself is seen, but by dint of quiet and
patient Avaiting I have several times been able to observe its habits,
which, together with its notes, resemble those of our House Wren
{^Troglodytes aedon).

The male only, of this species, was described by Mr. Lawrence, as
Mr. Ober did not take any females. We obtained two, and five
males. The sexes do not differ but little, but the females are a
shade lighter in color than the males, this being most noticeable on
the throat and sides of the head and face. They also ai'e slightly
smaller than most of the males and the bill is very slightly shorter,
about -3V of an inch.

Two of the males vary from the rest ; in one, taken March 8, at
Laudat (the last one given in the list of measurements below), each
feather of the under surface is lightly tipped with dark brown,
strongest across the breast, wanting on the flanks. In the other
specimen there is one white tertiary in the left wing, and on dissec-
tion the left testicle was found to be very rudimentary ; whether
there is any connection between the two facts I cannot say, but
could find no traces of ?ii\y injury.

Iris brown ; upper mandible dark brown ; the lower yellow, grow-
ing brown at the tip ; legs and feet light brown. ,^ 5:^-2-l|-7 ;
5i-2-l^-6^; 5-2-4-61; 5-2^-1^-6^ ; 4^-2-1^. ? 4^-lf-l^-6i ;
4^-2-11^. Ill all specimens, l)ill, from front, A^, from rictus f,
tarsus W-

" Nest built of sticks and roots in lioliow logs, etc. Eggs generally two to six,
very much like those of the 'Sucrier ' (C. dominicana) but generally smaller. A nest
with three eggs taken April 9tli, 189(1, at the Mountain Lake." — a. h. v.

The three eggs mentioned, measure -74 x -51, -73 x '51, -59 x -48, and
do not differ appi'eciably in the color and markings from those of
the "Sucrier."

Family, Turdid.e.

50. Myadestes dominicanus Stejn. "Siffleur Montagae," Pat. and Fr.
••Mountain Whistler," Eng.
Referred to MyiadesteN genibarbis Sw. in Lawr. List.

Common but, from its shy and retiring habits, much more often
heard than seen. Generally found in deep, dark Avoods, at an eleva-
tion of at least 800-1000 feet and for the most part higher. Its shy
and solitary habits, more than two individuals being rarely seen
together, are apparently due to natural disposition rather than

G. E. Yerrill — Fmma of the Island of Dominica. 345

timidity, lor it permits quite a close approach without manifesting
fear or attempting to escape. In its movements it is, for the most
part, slow and deliberate, very different from most of the thrushes.
Its note is perhaps its most striking characteristic, and once heard,
coming from the depths of some dark ravine, the author being usu-
ally entirely invisible, can never be forgotten. It is a loud and clear
but rather melancholy whistle, sloAvly uttered and repeated at inter-
vals, the bird usually remaining in the same place for some little
time.

Sexes much alike. In most of our series of. twelve specimens I
can see no trace whatever of the olivaceous tint on the head, men-
tioned by Mr. Stejneger (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. v, p. 22), and
the same tint on the back does not seem to vary but very little with
the sex, it being almost absent on some females, and quite plain on
some males. Again, the olivaceous on the lores and over the eye
seems to vary greatly, being decided in some, and almost absent in
others, without regard to sex or season; so that I judge it, together
with the tint on the back, to be more a matter of age or individual
variation than a sexual or specific character, as the specimens that
are strongest olivaceous on the back, have the most of the same tint
on the lores and over the eye. In one, a female, taken May 15,
where the tint on the back even approaches rufous and extends on
to the wing coverts, the olivaceous on the head is very decided, the
whole side of the head and some of the ear coverts being washed
with it. Irides brown, legs and feet yellow, bill black 5 8i-3f-3|-
12 ; U-^-^-\^ -, Si-Sf-Sf-H^. $ 8^-3^-3^-111 ; Si-Sf-Si-Hf ;
8-3^-3f. One specimen, sex undetermined owing to mutilation, 7f-
3f-3^-10f

" Nest a very frail structure of hair and roots, sometluDg like that of our Chipping
Sparrow {Sprzella socialis). Eggs, two in number, white, spotted with lilac about the
larger end. One nest taken with badly incubated eggs which could not be saved.
Situated about 8 feet from the ground in a lime tree. Laudat, April 9, 1890." —
(A. ir. V.)

51. Allenia montana (Lafr.). "Grive," "Grivctte," Pat. and Fr. (Small
Thrush).

Afargarops montunufi (Vieill.) ; Lawr., and Scl. List.

Common but, like the following, much hunted and hence rather
shy. Widely distributed and found in much the same places as
the next species, though as a rule nearer the ground, sometimes close
to or on it. Song like that of the " Grosse Grive " but shorter.

346 G. E. Verrill— Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

Sexes alike. Irides of adult, white or pale yellow ; of the young
brown ; bill black ; legs and feet dark brown. 5 9i-4|_3^_14^ ^
9-4f-3i. $ 9-4^-31 ? juv. 9.^-4^-3^-121.

"Nest like that of the 'Grosse Grive ' {C. fuscata densirostris) but smaller."—
(a. h. v.)

One set taken, May 3, at Spring Hill, contained very large em-
bryos. These eggs are of a uniform blue green color and measure
1-14X-78, Mix -80 and 1-23 x -79.

•■iS. Cichlherminia fuscata densirostris (Vieiii). "Grosse Grive,"

Pat. and Fr. (Large Thrush).
Margarops densirostris (Vieill.) ; Lawr. List.

Not common and very wild. This and the foregoing are much
hunted for food, which probably accounts for their shyness. Well
distributed and found mainly in the tops of trees and seen flying
over at considerable height. The song of this and the preceding is
loud and rather pleasing but short, somewhat like that of our Wood
Thrush (Tardus mustelinus), and is mainly uttered late in the after-
noon, a short time before sunset.

Sexes much alike, the male apparently slightly larger. Irides
white; legs, feet, and upper mandible yellowish brown; lower mandi-
ble yellow at the base, dark at the tip. S 1 2^-5^-4^, extent not
taken. ? 1 l|-5f-4^-l7f.

" Nest built of twigs and lianas, closely resembling tliat of the Brown Thrush {Har-
iwrhynrhus rufus). Eggs blue. Several nests found with young. Breeds in February
March."— (A. H. v.)

•53. Cichlherminia dominicensiS (Lawr.). "Morvy," Pat. (Fr. Mauvis,
Redwing).

Referred to Marqarops herminier i (La!r.) in Lawr. List. Afterwards described by
him as M. dominicensis (P. U. S. N. M.. vol. iii, p. 16).

Not common and very shy. Found chiefly near the ground in the
thick woods, Laudat, Bass-en-ville.

Note, a loud whistle somewhat resembling some of the notes of the
Blue Jay ( Gyanocitta cristata).

Sexes much alike, the female appears to have rather more white
on the abdomen. Irides white; legs, feet and bare skin surrounding
eyes, yellow; upper mandible yellowish brown, darker at the base;
lower mandible yellow. .^ 10^-4f-35-irv| ; 10^-0-3^-16. ? 11-5-3^;
ll-5-8i; 1 1-4^-3.

One nest taken at Bass-en-ville, May 1 9th, contained only a few
fragments of the eggs, of a beautiful, uniform blue green about the
color of those of the "Grive" {A. montana). It was in thick,

Gf. E. Verrill — Iiaxma of the Island of Dominica. 34 Y

swampy woods situated in the crotch of a small tree about ten feet
from the ground and is a very handsome structure, composed mainly
of long, dark green moss thickly lined with small roots and stems of
plants. Diameter on top 5^ in., on bottom 8 in., height 4 in. The
cavity measures 3f in. across the top and 2\ in. deep. Plate xxv,
fig. 4.

54. Mimocichla verrillorum Allen. " Perro-vanter," Pat.

Plate xxvir, Fig. ?>.
M. ardesiaca (Vieill.) ; Scl. List.

M. ardesiaca albiventris ; Scl. List, in notes (P. Z. S. 1889, p. 32G).
M. albiveiiirzs (Bc\ ) ; Allen in Auk, vol. viii , No. 3, p. 217.

Very rare and shy. The only two specimens obtained, a pair,
were taken at Lasswa, on the windward or eastern side of the
island, and apparently, from the testimony of the natives and our
own experience, its habitat is mainly confined to that portion of the
island, though once or twice its notes were heard near Bass-en-ville,
and, as mentioned later on, it was taken on the western side the pre-
vious year, by Mr. Ramage.

" Note a shrill, plaintive whistle." — (a. h. v.)

Sexes much alike, but the female "slightly smaller than the male,
with the breast paler and the abdomen more deeply tinted with
yellowish buff." — (Allen.) Bill, legs and feet yellow ; iris dark
brown. Measurements, from skin: 5 length, 10-50; wing, 4*60;
tail, 4*50 ; culmen, 0'85.

Mr. J, A. Allen described this bird under the above name in the
"Auk "for April, 1891 (vol. viii.. No. 2, p. 217), considering it a
new species, but later, in the next number of the same journal
(p. 3\1), refei's it to M. albiventris (Scl.), adopting as specific the
quasi sub-specific name used by Dr. P. L. Sclater in his " List of
Birds Collected by Mr, Ramage in Dominica, West Indies" (P. Z. S.,
1889, p. 326), in speaking of two male specimens collected by Mr.
Geo. A. Ramage at Batalie, on the leeward side of Dominica, in
March, 1889.

In the enumerated list of Dominican birds at the head of his
article. Dr. Sclater mentions the bird in question as 3f. ardesiaca
(Vieill.) from which, as Mr. Allen has shown in his first article, it is
quite distinct, but later on in the article he says, " as might have
been expected the Dominican Mimocichla belongs to the Porto
Rican form. It is, in fact, so nearly similiar that I do not see
sufiicient grounds for making it specifically distinct. The only
difference apparent is the much greater whiteness of the belly in the
Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIIL 46 April, 1892.

348 G. JE. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominicct.

Dominican specimens whence, those who adopt trinomials, would,
no doubt, call it M. ardesiaca albiventris.^^ And again, a little
further on, he alludes tf) it as M. ardesiaca albiventris but gives no
further description, and failed, as Mr. Allen remarks in his second
paper, to point out some of the principal differences between this
and M. ardesiaca (Vieill.) From this and the fact that he calls it
M. ardesiaca (Vieill.) in his enumerated list at the head of his article
it hardly seems as though he intended to recognize it as a sub-species,
and certainly not as a distinct species, which it is clearly shown to
be by the following characters given by Mr. Allen in his first article.
"Similiar to M. ardosciacea oi San Domingo and Porto Rico, but
much smaller, with much more white on the tail, and with the
abdomen strong buff instead of plumbeous fading into white." * * *
" This species finds its nearest relative in Mhnocichla ardosciacea
of Porto Rico and Santo Domingo holding somewhat the same re-
lation to it as regards the color of the ventral surface that M. rubripes
holds to M. phimbea. The wing and tail are each fullj^ three-
fourths of an inch shorter in 31. verrillorum than in M. ardosciacea;
the culmen is also shorter ; but the tarsi are slightly longer and
the wing appreciably more rounded. The white in the tail is much
purer and twice greater in extent, tipping the outer five pairs of
feathers instead of being confined to the outer four, as in the other
species of the genus, and occupying considerably more than the
apical half of th« outer feathers."

■ Not taken by Mr. Ober, but probably the " 5. Thrush V" men-
tioned by Mr. Lawrence (Proc. U. S. Nat, Mus. i., ISVS, p. 5:^), as
having been "described l)y several persons, something like the
Thrush, but with yellow bill and legs." Nest and eggs not taken
but said by the natives to resemble those of the "Trembleur" ( (7.
raficauda.^

Appended is a list, complete so far as I have been able to ascertain,
of all the birds that have been recorded from Dominica. It contains
all the species recorded by Mr. E. C. Taylor, who was there in ISO;?;
Mr. Ober, who was there in 1877; Mr. Ramage, who was there in
1887 and 1888; and my brother and myself, who were there in 1890,
and shows what species were recorded by each collector, and whether
actually obtained .or observed by him.

It is, I believe, the most complete list, so far published, of the birds
of this island, but it is not yet complete, probably by quite a number
of species, and it is, I think, quite probable that in some of the
denser and more unexplored parts of the island there may yet be
found birds entirely unex[)ect<'d there, or even undescribed s])ecies.

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dotntnica. 849

1
2
3

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

n

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

4 0

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

[By whom recorded.

List of Birds recorded from Dominica.

+ 1

Sterna dougalli Montag.

Sterna antillarum (Less.)

[Sterna fuliginosa Gmel.

'sterna an^ethetus Scop

j Anous stolidus (Linn.)

Phaethon flavirostris Brandt.

Pelecanus'Juscus Linn

Fregata aquila (Linn.) j x

lArdea herodias Linn.

Ardea egretta Gmel I

Ardea candidissima Gmel ,

Ardea CEerulea Linn i

Ardea virescens Linn I +

Nycticorax violaceus (Linn.)

Uonornis martinica (Litin.)

Ereunetes piisillus (Linn.)

Actitis macularia (Linn.)

Charadrius dominicus Miill. .
Areuaria I interpres (Linn.) ..

Columba corensis Gmel.

Columba leucocephala Linn.

Zenaida martinicana Bonap | +

Columbigallina passerina (Linn.)

•Geotrygon montana (Linn.)

Geotrygon mystacea (Temm.)

Buteo latissimvis ( Wils.)

Falco columbarius Linn

Falco caribbajarum Gmel. . , . .

Pandion haliaetus carolinensis (liJmel.)

Stri.x fiaramea nigrescens Lawr. .

Amazona augusta (Vig.) ..

Amazona bouqueti (WagL) ..

Coccyzus minor (Gmel.) .-

Ceryle aleyon (Linn.)

Cypseloides niger (Gmel.). _.

Chsetura dominicana Lawr

Eulampis jugularis (Linn.)

Eulampis liolosericeus (Linn.)

Thalurania bicolor (Gmel.)

Bellona exilis (Gmel.)

Tyrannus rostratus Scl

+

4-

Myiarchus tyrannulus oberi (Lawr.) _ .

Blacicus brunneicapillus Lawr

Elfenea pagana martinica (Linn.)

Loxigilla noctis sclateri Allen.

Euetlieia bicolor (Linn.)

Euplionia flavifrons (Sparrm.)

Saltator guadelupensis Lafr.

Progne dominicensis (Gmel.) ...

Vireo calidris (Linn.).

Coereba dominicana (Taylor)

Dendroica petechia melanoptera Lawr.

+ 1
?

+

X

+ 1

+

+
+
+

+
+
?
+

X

?

+
+
+

+

4-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ ?
+

!0

+

__

+

..

+ 1

._

+

?

+

X

X

--

+

--

+ 1

- - i

+

+

(?)
(?)

4-
4-

(?)
?

j 4-
4-
4-

: X

4

4-

4- ?,

X

4- ^
4-

+ f>
4-

X

4-
4-
4-
4-
+
4-
4-
+
+
+
+
4-
+
4-
?■
4-
•h
4-

350

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

53

54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

List of Birds recorded from Dominu^a.

DeBdroica plumbea Lawr ..-

Dendroica virens (Grael.)

Seiurus noveboracensis (Gmel.)

Setophaga ruticilla (Linn.) . -

Cinciocerthia ruflcauda (G-ld.)

Thryothorus rufescens Lawr

Myadestes dominicaniis Stejn.

Allenia montana (Lafr.)

Cichlherrainia fuscata densirostris (VieilL)

Cichlherminia dominieensis (Lawr.)

Mimocichla verrilloruni Allen

By whom recorded.

+

+ 1

+

+

+

+ S

+

+ i
(?)

^

+ 3

t3 •-

a %^

CS 1>

(?)

+
+

+
+
+
+
+
+

The following signs are used in the above table: + = actually obtained; x =
observed and species identified but not obtained; ?= observed and probably of
that species but not positively identified; (?)= described by the inhabitants and
probably of that species but not seen by the collectors themselves ; + 3 or + S
indicates that the sex indicated only was obtained. In several cases only one speci-
men was taken by the former collectors but the sex is not mentioned by them in
their lists, in such cases it is indicated thus. 4- 1 .

To this list should be added Tringa minutilla VieiU. taken in Dominica by Dr.
NichoUs, and sent to the Smithsonian in 1880. He also sent ten other species, all of
them included in the above list; but the three following, though they were observed,
have not been actually taken there by any of the above collectors.

Anous stolidus.

Ereunetes pusillus.

Charadrius dominicus.

List of Batrachians and Reptiles obtained.

BATRACHIA.

Order, ANURA.

Family, Cystignathid.e.

1. LeptodactyluS pentadactylus Lawr. "Crapaud,"Pat. and Fr. (Toad.)

Common and much used for food. When used for the table the

whole animal is eaten, generally as a stew, and not simply the legs,

as is the case with frogs in this country. Prepared in this way it

makes a delicious dish, tasting much like chicken, but more delicate.

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica. 351

2. Hylodes martinicensis D. and B. Tree Toad.

Rather common. All our specimens were taken at a considerable
elevation (1000-2000 feet), and were found under stones or logs.

REPTILIA.

Order, OPHIDIA.

Family, TyphlopidyE.

3. TyphlopS lumbricalis Linn. " Blind Worm."

Apparently rare. We only obtained one specimen and no others
were seen.

Family, Boid^,

4. Boa diviniloquax Daud. "Boa."

Rather common. Our specimens were all obtained in the interior,
near Bass-en-ville, and apparently it is found mainly in the densely
wooded and elevated parts of the island. This species sometimes
attains large size. We heard of their being taken 12 or 13 feet long,
but none of our specimens were over 7 or 8 feet in length. Three
were brought to New Haven alive.

Family, Colubridje.

5. Opheomorphus juliae Cope. "Snake."

Not particularly common. This, the preceding species, and the
" Blind Worm" were the only snakes found by us on the island,
though Mr, Ober took a fourth, Alsophis sibonius Cope, This
species varies much in color and general appearance so that the
natives, and we ourselves, thought there were several species among
them. In one specimen, the largest, 21 inches long, the round yel-
low spots near the base of the scales, spoken of by Mr. Cope, are
entirely lacking.

Order, LACERTILIA.
Family, Geckonid,*:.

6. Sphserodactylus oxyrhinus Gosse. Gecko.

One specimen only obtained, at Bass-en-ville, and no others were
observed.

Family, Iguanid^e.

7. Iguana delicatissima Lawr. "iguana."

Rather common. Frequently used as food. My brother states
that the flesh is very fair eating.

352 G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica.

8. Anolis leachii Gray. "Chameleon."

Very abundant and widely distributed. Found at all elevations.
A very lively and beautiful species. A peculiarity of this lizard is
the effect upon it of whistling or music, causing it to stop and listen
attentively and even allow itself to be caught.

Family, Teiid^.

9. Amiva plei D. aud B., var. brachiosquamatUS, nov. Cope. " Arbalo "

(Pat.).

Prof. E. D. Cope describes this new sub-species as follows :
"Differs from typical forms in having numerous rows of small
brachial scales as in A. major, instead of one large row as in typical
A. plei. Three supraorbital plates. Otherwise as in A. plei.''''

Very abundant in the lowlands, particularly in the cane-fields,
where on a hot, sunny day they may be seen by hundreds. They
are exceedingly quick in their motions and run with great raj^idity,
so that they can only be procured by shooting. This species grows
very large, frequently attaining a length of two or three feet.

I think there are at least two species of " Arbalos," but we only
succeeded in obtaining one.

Family, Scincid^.

10. Mabuia agilis nigropunctata Spix. Skiuk.

Common, but shy and difficult to catch. Generally found in rather
damj) places and at quite an elevation.

Order, C HE L ONI A.
Family, Testudinid.e.

11. Testudo tabulata Liuu. Turtle.

Our specimen came from the island of Tortohi, but we were told
that they were also found in Dominica, though rare.

Species obtained by Mr. Fred. A. Ober, in addition to the above List.

Mr. Ober obtained four species of reptiles (no batrachians), in
Dominica, which are described by Prof. E. D. Cope in the Proc.
Amer. Philos. Soc, vol. xviii, p. 274.

Of these four species one was also obtained by us, Opheoniorphus
jalicB, the others I give below to complete so far as possible, the
herpetology of this' island, though I feel sure the list of species is
still far from complete, especially among the lizards.

12. (1.) Mabuia cepedei Gray.

13. (2.) Xiphosurus oculatns Cope.

14. (3.) Alsophis SiboniuS Cope.

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica. 353

List of Land and Fresh-water Crustacea obtained.

1. Palaemon jamaicensis Oliv. "Crawfish." Prawn.

Common in the fresh-water streams and extensively used as food,
being of excellent flavor.

One or more species of small grey shrimp were frequently seen in
the river at Bass en-ville, but owing to their very lively habits and
our lack of proper means we were unable to procure any,

2. Cenobita diogenes Latr. " Sojer " (Soldier). Hermit Crab.
Not very common.

"Found only on the windward or Atlantic side of the island.'' — (a. h. v.)

3. G-ecarcillUS ruricola Latr. " Crabe." Pat. and Fr. (Crab). Land Crab.
Common, but not found among the mountains nor at any great ele-
vation. Very good eating and much used for food.

4. Pseudotelphusa dentata (H. Milne-Edw.). "Suriqne," Pat. Land Crab.
Pseudotelphusa tenidpes. R. T. Pocock (Ann. and Mag. NTat. FTist., vol. iii, p. 7,

1889).

Very common in the interior and among the mountains. We
found this species extremely abundant in the neighborhood of Bass-
en-ville. They were seen running around everywhere in the woods,
though also found along the shores of the streams and in the streams
themselves, but apparently it made no difference whether water was
near or not, though of course the ground is everywhere very damp
from the frequent rains. When disturbed or pursued they run
very rapidly and generally get into some hole or under a log or stone,
but I could never see that they had any particular hole or burrow.
When unable to reach some such shelter they sit back on the hind
part of the carapax, after the manner of our common Fiddler Crab,
and defend themselves savagely. By throwing out a piece of meat
a number could always be brought around the camp in a very shoi't
time.

Though not usually sold in the market, like the former species,
and not considered so good eating, they are by no means bad, as I
can testify from personal experience, and they are frequentlj^ eaten
by the natives up among the mountains.

Mr. R. I. Pocock in the Ann. and Mag., vol. iii, p. 6, 1889, has
recorded an additional species of land crab {G. lateralis), and sev-
eral additional species of shrimp and prawns collected in Dominica
by Mr, Ram age.

354 G. E. J^errin — Fauna of the Island of Domhiina.

Notes on the Insects.

The collection of insects has not yet been worked up and so no
list of the species can be given.

We found the Coleoptera and Lepidoptera quite abundant, the
other orders much less so.

Our collection contains about twenty species of beetles, some of
which are very interesting, to an ordinary observer at least, on
account of their difference from New England forms.

Probably the most sti-iking is the Hercules Beetle. These enor-
mous beetles are quite rare and found mainly among the mountains.
According to the inhabitants there are several species, but we pro-
cured but one, dark brown with greenish grey wing coverts, spotted
with black. According to my brother, they feed on the locust and
cocobolo trees, and he also says that on the windward side of the
island this species is replaced by another that is still larger and
entirely brown.

Another large brown " horn-bug " has a big white larva, called in
Patois "(rru Gru Worm" which lives in the buds of the palm
trees, and which is roasted and eaten by the natives.

The "lire-beetles" of this island are of several species, very num-
erous, and exceedingly brilliant, the light being constant and com-
ing from the body under the wing coverts and from two round spots
on the side of the thorax. They are a kind of snapping-beetle, dark
brown, and about an inch long. A few of them flying about a room
make enough light to distinguish large objects, and two or three in
a small bottle give light enough, when held near the page, to read
ordinary print. They are found mainly in the interior. At Bass-
en -ville they were very abundant.

We also took a number of large yellow and black Aveevils which
were found on the plantain and banana plants.

The name " La Belle " is applied by the natives to all beetles.

Several large green katydids, called by the inhabitants " Crak
Crak," were also taken, and enormous cockroaches, or " Drummers,"
were very abundant, especially in the houses.

We also found a few raole-crickets and a walking-stick but they
were both rare.

No true scorpions were seen but a large whip-scorpion was ob-
tained and also several large rayriapods or centipedes.

The collection of Land Mollusca, consisting of about twenty
species, several of them probably new, is now in the hands of Mr.
H. A. Pilsbry of Philadelphia, for working up. As soon as this is
done a list will be published.

G. E. Verrill — Fauna of the Island of Dominica. 355

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate XXV.

Fig. I. Nest and female of Eulampis juguiaris, " Fou Poii Mardet," A natural size.

p. 331.
Fig. 2. Cup-shaped nest and eggs of Eulampis holosericeus, "Fou Fou Tete-longue,"

^ natural size. p. 332.
Fig. 3. Nest of Ccureba dominicana, "Sucrier," | natural size. p. 341.
Fig. 4. Nest of Cichlherminia dominicensis, " Morvy," -^-^ natural size. p. 347.
Figs. 5 and 6. Eggs of Blackus hrunneicaxnllus, " Gobe-mouche," natural size. p. 337.
Figs. 7 and 8. Eggs of Elcenea pagana martimca, "Cheweck," natural size. p. 337.
Figs. 9 and 10. Eggs of Ccereba dominicana, "Sucrier," natural size. p. 341.
Fig. II. Egg of J9eracZ/-02'capefec/j2a ?ft(?tawryjfera, "Teeteen," natural size. p. 342.

Plate XXVI.

Figs. I and 2. Nests oi Eulampis holosericeus, "Fou Fou Tete-longue," natural size.

p. 332.
Fig. 3. Nest of Bellona exilis, " Fou Fou Bequar," natural size. p. 335.
Figs. 4 and 5. Nests of Thalurania bicolor, "Fou Fou Bleu," natural size, pp.334

and 333.
Fig. 6. Nest of Bellona exiiis " P'ou Fou Bequar," natural size. p. 334.

Plate XXVIL
Fig. 1. Thryothorus rufescens, " Rosiugnole," adult male, f natural size. p. 343.
Fig. 2. Dendroica plumhea, "Pa-pia," adult female, | natural size. p. 342.
Fig. 3. Mimociclila verrilloi'um, " Perro-vanter," adult female, | natural size. p. 347.

The above photo-lithographic plates, by Mr. E. Crisand, of New Haven, are made
directly from photographs of the original specimens.

Note. — Since the previous pages were printed I find that in preparing my list of
the Reptiles and Batrachiaus, I unfortunately overlooked an article by Dr. A. Giinther
(Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), II, p. 362), on the collection made by Mr. Ramage,
and one by Mr. Samuel Garmaij (Bull. Ess. Inst., XIX, p. 1), on the collections in the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, at Cambridge.

Dr. Giinther enumerates ten species, of which two, Thecadactylus rapicauda (Houtt.)
and Ameiva fuscata Garman (1. c. p .5), are additional to my list, though the latter is
probably the other " Arbalo " seen, but not obtained, by us. Sphcerodactylus copii
(Steind.), also recorded by him, is possibly the same as our /S. oxyrliinus Gosse. In
this paper Dr. Giinther unites Xipliosurus oculatus Cope with Anolis alliaceus Cope,
and Mabuia dominicana Garman with 3L a.gilis (Radde), of these, the two former are
doubtless the same as our A. leachii Gray, and the two latter identical with our il.
agilis nigropunctata Spix.

Ereatdm. — Page 350, fifth line from bottom, and page 351, third line from bottom,
for "Lawr." read "Laur."
Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 47 April, 1892.

XX. — On a Collection of Land Mollusca from the Island
OF Dominica, West Indies. By Henry A, Pilsbry.

Collections of the land raollusks of Dominica have been made
by Mr. R. Lechmere Guppy,* Mr. A. D. Brown, f Mr. G. F. Angas,J
Mr. G. A. Raniageg and Dr. Benj. Sharp. || The present list is
based upon a collection made in March, April and May, 1890, by
Messrs. G. E. and A. H. Yerrill.^i

In Mr. E. A. Smith's reports upon the collections made by Mr.
Ramage, a full list of the land molliiscan fauna of the island is
compiled from the reports of previous investigators. To that paper,
therefore, the student is referred for references to the literature of
the fauna.

HELICID^.
Helix (Dentellaria) nigrescens Wood. (ii845).**

A color variety (11854) is yellowish-olive, becoming brown toward
the lij) and in front of the aperture.

H. (Dentellaria) badia Fer. (ii826).

H. (Dentellaria) josephinae Per. (ii844, 11829).

BULIMULID^.

Bulimulus laticinctus Guppy. (11 846).

This is no doubt a local variety of the five-banded Ji. imiUifascia-
tus, in wliich two of the bands are confluent, the band formula being
1(23)45, whilst that of typical multifasciatus is 12345.

* See Guppy's report in Annals and Magazine of Nat. Hist. (4), I, p. 429, 1868.

\ American Naturalist, 1881, p. 56. Mr. Brown's specimens are now in the collec-
tion of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

X Proc. Zool. Soc, 1883, p. 594.

§ See E A. Smith's .reports in Ann. and Mag. N. H. (6) II, p. 227, 419.

II The specimens collected by Dr. Sharp are in the collection of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

^ This collection is in the Museum of Yale College.

** The figures refer to the museum numbers of the Yale College collection.

H. A. Pilshry — Mollusca from the Island of Dominica. 35 Y

B. exiliS Gmel. (11827, 11856, 11851, 11855, 1184'?).
The following color-forms are represented:

(1) Horn colored, baudless (11827).

(2) Horn colored, having a faint laeripheral band (1184:7, 11851).

(3) Horn colored, having a couspicuous dark band (11856).

(4) Having three dark purple-brown bands, the upper and lower bauds wider

(11855).

B. nichollsii a. D. Brown. (11850, 11848, 11849).

A species peculiar to Dominica.
Amphibulima patula Brug. (ii828, ii835).

STENOGYRID^.
Stenogyra octona Chemn. (iiS52, ii840).

VAG-INULID^.
Vaginula punctatissima Semper. (ii830).

Not before reported from Dominica. The black blotches of the
ventral surface are much more conspicuous than one would suppose
from Sempei"'s figure.

HELICINIDJE.
Helicina rhodostoma Gray. (ii842, ii 853, 11841).

The usual variations in lip coloring, from yellow to deep red, are
represented.

H. epistilia Guppy. (ii839).

A single specimen may be referred to this unfigured and rare
species.

H. velutina Guppy. (11837, 11838).

The specimens are a trifle more depressed than H. rufa Pfr. from
Yuma, Haiti, but the difference is so slight that I am wholly dis-
posed to consider Guppy's species a synonym of the earlier described
Haitian form. Pfeiffer's description of H. rufa is imperfect, as the
delicate velvety character of the cuticle is not noticed by him. I
have, however, compared specimens from Yuma Avith the Dominican
shells, and am satisfied that they are identical.

NERITID^.
Neritina punctulata Lam. (11825).

The specimens were collected from the Layou River at Bass-en-
Ville, at an altitude of about 2000 ft. They are large, and have
the mouth-callus of a dull reddish color.

358 a. A. Pilshry — Mollusea from the Island of Dominica.

CYCLOPHORID^.

Cyclophorus (Amphicyclotus) amethystinus Guppy. (ii843).

There can be no doubt that this species is distinct from C.
scJirammi, althougli the young greatly resemble the latter. It is
known only from Dominica.

Note. — In the above article it will be seen that Mr. Pilsbry
makes but fourteen species and none of them are new, several
specimens Avhich had been supposed, in a hasty examination, to be
different species proving to be only color varieties of the other
described forms.

The small number of species obtained by us was doubtless due to
the fact that our collections, as stated at the beginning of my
article, were made almost exclusively at a considerable elevation
(from 1000 to 2500 feet), and no doubt mainly above the range of
many species such as Succinea approximans, AmphibuliTna, ruhes-
cens, Leptinaria lamellata, Helix dentiens, Helicina fasciata, H.
antillartim, etc.

A large part of the Mollusca wei-e collected in the vicinity of
Bass-en-ville, at about 2000 feet elevation, and in the midst of the
deep woods, which may also account for the absence of some species
that frequent the gardens and plantations.

Here we found Helicina rJiodostoma abundant on the trunks of
trees and old stumps about our camp.

The Layou River flowed past our camp at this point, and in it
Neritina punctulata was exceedingly abundant. All the speci-
mens we saw, and we examined hundreds, were marked by cavities,
varying much in size but often very deep and wide, which had the
appearance of having been drilled or bored out. In many cases
these holes covered the whole shell, but I think we never found
any that had penetrated entirely through it.

Stenogyra octona was very abundant under logs and stones in the
vicinity of all our camps.

Vagimda punctatissima was not common, but we found several
specimens under logs and stones in the vicinity of Spring Hill.

BuUinidus laticinctus was found rather commonly iiear Laudat
on the plantain and banana plants.

In Mr. E. A. Smith's articles, mentioned above by Mr. Pilsbry,
there are enumerated thirty-four species of land mollusks inhabit-
ing Dominica; of these a few seem to be of doubtful identity, or
hardly entitled to specific rank, but there are probably over thirty
crood species now known from this island. — G. E. Verrill.

XXI. — New England Spiders of the Family Thomisid^.

By J. H. Emerton.

Thomisidae.

In the Thomisidm the cephalothorax and abdomen are both flat-
tened. The cephalothorax is about as wide as long, and the abdomen
is usually widest behind. The legs are turned outward and forward
more than downward, so that the body is carried close to the ground,
and some species walk moi*e readily sidewise than forward.

The family consists of two groups or sub-families, the Tho^nisinm
and the Philodrominm.

In the Thomisince the first and second pairs of legs are about
equal in length and much longer than the third and fourth. The feet
have two claws and under them a small cluster of hairs like the rest
of the hairs on the leg.

In the Philodrominoe the legs are more nearly equal in length, all
long and slender, and the second pair usually longest. The feet
have two claws and under them a large cluster of long hairs, wid-
ened and flat at the end.

The eyes of the Thomisidm are small and nearly of the same size
and have a simple arrangement in two I'ows. The maxillse are short
and narrow at the ends. The males usually differ considerably in
size and color from the females, and in some species the males are
very much smaller than the females.

The Thomisidm live mostly on plants, and in winter hide in cracks
and under stones and bark. Their colors resemble the plants on
which they live, most species being marked with gray and brown like
bark, while those living on flowers are brightly colored, white and
yellow. They make no webs and no nests except a few threads to
hold the cocoon and conceal it by drawing together a leaf over it.

A large part of the New England species have been described, a
few of them by Hentz in the Journal of the Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.,
vol. V, but more by E. Keyserling in the Proceedings of the zool.
botan. gesellschaf t of Vienna and in a separate book on the " Spinnen
Americas, Laterigradae," published in 1880. The spiders in the Mu-
seum of Comparative Zoology at Cambridge have been named by
Keyserling and among them are several of the New England species
which have been compared with my own specimens.

While this paper was printing, Mr. Nathan Banks published in
the Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci of Philadelphia, a Catalogue of the spiders

360 J. n. Emerton — Spiders of the Family Thomisidce.

of the upper Cayuga Lake basin (Ithaca, N. Y.), with descriptions
of many new species. Mr. Banks has let me examine liis spiders
and his names have been used for several species.

Xysticus.

The body is short and flat. The cephalothorax is as wide as long,
nearly square in front and half as wide across the eyes as it is at the
widest part.

The front row of eyes is almost straight and the four middle eyes
form a square or a rectangle wider than long.

The abdomen is not much larger than the cephalothorax, widest
across the hinder half and not pointed behind. The legs are short in
the females, the first and second pairs nearly equal and longer than
the third and fourth which are also of nearly the same length. The
males have the legs longer and the first and second pairs proportion-
ally longer than the females.

The males are a little smaller than the females and darker colored.
The male palpi are short. The tibia has a short simple process on
the outer side and a crooked and more complicated one underneath.
The tube of the palpal organ begins on the inner side of the tarsus
and extends around the bulb to the outer side where it rests in a
small thin process turned outward. On the under side of the bulb
are two processes of various shapes in different species.

The epigynum has a rounded opening variable in shape even in
the same species, sometimes simple and sometimes divided by a
median ridge.

Xysticus limbatUS Keys., Spinneu Americas, 1880.

Tlie female X. crudelis Banks, and X. hrunneus Banks, appear to be this species,
but the male X. limhatus Banks is different from my X. Jimhaius and nearer
the male X. limhatus Keyserling.

Plate XXVIII, figures 1-1 A.
This is one of the largest species, the females measuring 8 or 10"""
long and the cephalothorax 4"'"^ wide.

The colors are light brown spots of various shades on a nearly
white ground, some individuals being ver}^ pale and others nearly
covered by the brown spots. In half grown individuals the mark-
ings are most distinct and are like those of Hentz's figure of Thom-
isus ferox which is very likely this species, PI. xxviii, fig. \b. In
these the sides of the thorax ai"e light brown and the al)domen has
on each side three or four nearly square brown spots darkest on the

J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the Family Thomisidce. 361

front and onter edges. The middle of the cephalothorax has a light
marking tapering behind to the dorsal groove which is marked by a
dark spot. The legs have a distinct fine light line on the dorsal side
and are marked all over with small light brown spots without any
distinct bands or patches except that the fonrth femur and tibia are
darker at the ends. In the adults the markings are less distinct and
that of the middle of the cephalothorax darker so as to obscure the
lateral stripes. PI. xxvin, figs. 1, la. The males have the same
markings but darker. Fig. la. The epigynum, figs. \d, \e, ]/", has
a simple opening of various shapes, sometimes with a low and indis-
tinct ridge thi'ough the middle. The male palpus has a large and
complicated hook under the tibia turned a little toward the outer
side so as to be visible from above. Fig. \h. The processes of the
bulb are large and dark colored, the under one pointed and directed
inward, and the other wide at the end and turned backward to the
base of the bulb. Fig. \g.

Males from Medford and Peabody, Mass. Females, Dedham, Pea-
body, Cambridge, Maiden, Salem, Mass ; Simsbur^^, Conn. Both
sexes from Brooklyn, Long Island, N. Y., N. Pike. A female with
cocoon partly covered by a folded leaf Avas found June 10.

The specimens in the Museum Comp. Zool. at Cambridge, named
by Keyserling, are all females. The male which I suppose to belong
to this species is not the limhatus Keys., but probably X. elegans
Keys.

XystiCUS gulosus Keys.

^ = X. locuples Keys., Spinnen Americas, 1880 ; aud X. lentMs Banks.

PL.VTE XXVIII, FKiURES 2-2c.

The female is 6 to 8™'" long with the cephalothorax 3""" wide.
The color is grayish brown and very uniform, the usual marking
showing indistinctly among the fine brown spots that nearly cover
the body. The femora are light on the ventral side and have two or
three large spots along the middle. The femora are darker toward
the end, those of the fourth pair having a distinct black spot near the
end. The abdomen has usually only a pair of irregular black lines
across near the middle, and several smaller and less distinct behind
it. PI. xxviii, figs. 2, 2a.

The epigynum has an oval oj^ening wider than long, in which are
two oval ridges directed backward. Fig. 2c.

The male palpus has the under tibial process wide and turned out-
ward at the end. The tube of the palpal organ is unusually long aud

362 J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the Family Thomisidm.

slender and has a long outward curve at the tip and a long thin pro-
cess to support it. Fig. 1h.

Salem and Beverly, Mass., under stones ; Long Island, N. Y., N.
Pike.

XystiCUS stomachoSUS Keys., Spmnen Americas, 1880.

A small female appareutly of this species is named X. benefactor ia the Mus.
Comp. Zool. Cambridge.

Plate XXVIII, figures ^-M.

This is a little smaller than linibatus. A mature female measures
gmm iQiig j^,if[ lYiQ thorax 3™™ wide. The largest males are as large
as small males of limhatiis. The brown markings are grayer than in
limbatus and less evenly distributed over the body. The lateral
dark bands of the cephalothorax are very distinct and have a darker
line on the outer edge and two darker spots behind under the front
of the abdomen. The middle of the cephalothorax is light, but a
little darker toward the front of the head.

The brown markings of the abdomen are light with black spots
along the front and outer edges of each marking. The iirst and
second legs are covered with small brown spots darker and closer at
the ends of the joints. The third and fourth legs are lighter and
have darker spots at the ends of the joints, the fourth legs having
conspicuous dark spots on the ends of patella and tibia. PI. xxviii,
ligs. 3, 3a.

The epigynum has a wider opening than limbatus, divided by a
flat ridge at the hinder edge. Fig. ^d.

The male palpus has the under process of the tibia small and
divided at the end into two blunt knobs. The tube is stout and
black and ends between two large thin processes on the outer side.
PI. XXVIII, figs. 3J, 3c. The processes of the bulb are small but ex-
tend outward from its surface. The anterior process is attached
near its middle and pointed at both ends. Figs. 3^, 3c.

Readville, Brookline, Saugus, Swampscott, Mass.; New Haven,
Conn.; Long Island, N. Y,, N. Pike's collection.

XysticUS nervOSUS Banks.

Plate XXVIII, figures \-M.

Female 6""" long, and cephalothorax 3'"'" wide. The markings of
both sexes are very indistinct and much alike. The general color is
light brownish yellow with darker and lighter markings scattered in

J. II. Etiierton — S^rlders of the Family Thoniisidce. 363

small spots all over the body. The middle of the cephalotliorax is
as usual light colored with a few brown markings in the middle and
toward the eyes. The sides of the cephalothorax are darker with
irregular brownish lines. The abdomen has three or four pairs of
indistinct brown spots, in front of which and on the front of the
abdomen are irregular small Avhite spots. The legs are marked in
the same way with irregular light and dark spots, the first and
second pairs a little darker than the others. PI. xxviii, figs. 4, 4a.

In the males the first and second legs are very long and slender,
the second twice as long as the third pair. The markings are a little
brighter and more distinct than in the female. The under process
of the tibia of the male palpus is curved and turned outward at the
end as in gulosus. The processes of the bulb ai'e long and the ante-
rior one has a complicated twist at the end. Figs. 4c, Ad, 4e.

The epigynum has a large oval opening, widest behind, in which
are two smaller openings divided by a narrow ridge, fig. 46.

Medford, Readville, Mass. ; Long Island, N. Y., N. Pike.

XystiCUS trigUttatUS Keys., Spmnen Americas, 1880.

The spider named X. feroclus by Keyserling in the Museum of Comp. Zoology,
Cambridge, is the female of this species and so is X. feroclus Banks.
Plate XXIX, figures \-]d.

The female is 5 or 6""" long and the cephalothorax 2""". The legs
of the female are white or yellowish with a few black hairs and
small spots around the ends of the femora. The cephalothorax is
yellowish brown with a line of black marks each side ending in a
distinct black spot at the hinder end. The third black spot is just
behind the dorsal groove. The middle of the cephalothorax is very
light behind and darker toward the front and middle of the head,
PI. XXIX, fig. 1, and the area between tlie eyes is white. The
abdomen is white with two small black spots in front and several
lines of black spots broken in the middle across the hinder half.

The male is as large as the female and much darker in color.
The markings of the cephalothorax are like those of the female, but
darker. The femora of the first and second legs are dark brown
and the rest of the legs dull yellow. The tarsus of the male palpus
is Avhite and the rest dark. The abdomen has very dark markings,
those of the hinder half usually running entirely across, with white
between. Fig. la.

The epigynum has a large shallow oval opening, in the middle of
which is a small hole with a hard projecting ridge each side. Fig. Ic.

Trans. Conn. Acad.. Vol. VIII. 48 April, 1892.

364 J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the Family TJiomisidm.

The male palpus has the tube stout and extending almost entirely
around it. The processes of the bulb are small and the posterior
one blunt and notched at the end. Fie-. Id.

This is a very common species in grass and low plants all over
New England, In Psyche, vol. v, I have described the pairing of
this species. The female held herself on a blade of grass, head
downward, with the abdomen turned away far enough for the male
to reach under, from above, to the epigynum,

Xysticus graminis, new sp.

Plate XXIX, figures 2-26.

This species resembles in color and markings the male of X.
trlguttatiis. It is a little larger and darker, and there is less con-
trast between the light and dark portions. The legs are shorter and
stouter and the patella and tibia of the first and second legs, as well
as the femur, are dark brown. The ends of these legs, as well as
the third and fourth pairs, are light yellow brown, not as white as
in trlfjvttatus. The dark bands on the cephalothorax are not so
distinctly broken into black marks as in triguttatus^ nor are the
thi'ee spots as distinct. The markings of the abdomen do not extend
across the front half and the lighter parts are not as white as in
trigiittatus. PI. xxix, fig. 2.

The male j^alpus resembles that of triguttattis, but the processes
of the bulb are longer and both pointed and directed inward.
Fig. 2a.

The female is 6'"'" long and the cephalothorax is 3""" long and 3"""
wide. The legs are short and stout. The color is dark brown with
very small light markings. The front of the head is wide and light
colored, with a distinct white band under the upper row of eyes,
behind which is a very dark brown line. The dark patches on the
sides of the thorax are partly divided into two, the inner halves
ending in darker spots, as in trigiittatus and stomachosiis, but less
distinctly marked. In the middle of the cephalothorax is a triangu-
lar dark area narrowing to a dark spot behind, and each side of this
a light line narrowing forward to the eyes. The abdomen is dark .
with alternate narrow darker and white markings across the hinder
half and obliquely down the sides. The legs are covered with small
brown spots. The first and second femora are lighter on the front
side, and the third and fourth legs have a light line on the dorsal
side. The femora of the third and fourth legs have a dark spot at
the end. The under side is dark with small brown " spots, and the

./ H. Emerton — Spiders of the Family Thomisidm. 365

spinnerets and epigynnra are each covered by a very dark round spot.
The epigynnm resembles that of trir/uttatvs.

Males from Peabody and Saugus, Mass. Females, Brookline,
Mass., S. Henshaw.

XysticUS formOSUS Banks.

Plate XXIX, figures 3, Sa.

The m.ale is 5""" long and the cephalothorax 2-5""" wide. The
dark sides of the cephalothorax extend toward the middle behind the
eyes so that the middle light portion is narrower than usual. The
parts around the eyes are white and so is the back of the cephalo-
thorax around the dorsal groove. The hinder ends of the dark
bands are nearly black where they pass under the front part of the
abdomen. The abdomen is white in the middle with irregular
brown spots, and the sides are dark brown, in angular patches that
do not extend as far toward the middle as usual. The legs are
covered with irregular brown spots and the patella and tibia of the
first and second legs are much darker than the rest. PI. xxix, fig. 2.

The tibia of the male palpus has a very small hook underneath,
but the outer process is longer than usual and between it and the
inferior process is a wide flat tooth. Fig. 2a. The palpal organ is
very simple, the usual pi'ocesses of the bulb being represented only
by a very short flat ridge. Fig. 2a.

Only one male from West Roxbury, Mass.

XystiCUS quadrilineatUS Keys., Spinnen Americas, 1880.
Pl.\te xxix, FiGtJREs 4, 4a.
Female '7'"™ long. Cephalothorax 2-5""" wide. In this species the
cephalothorax is unusually wide in front. The color is light yellow
with light brown markings and black spots. The cephalothorax has
four narrow brown stripes, one each side close to the edge, and the
others running back from the lateral eyes. There are also two fine
brown lines in the middle, sometimes extending from the eyes to the
dorsal groove, but usually broken in the middle. There is a brown
spot just behind the dorsal groove and two others on the middle of
the back, half way between the groove and the middle eyes. On
the abdomen there are two black spots at the front end, two in the
middle and two near the hinder end, besides several smaller ones
along the sides. There are four light brown lines across the hinder
half, each with a white line behind it, and there are oblique brown
lines alternating with white at the sides. PI. xxix, fig. 4. The

366 J. H. JEmerton — Spiders of the Family ThomisidcB.

legs have the usual light line along the dorsal side and are covered
with fine brown spots without any distinct markings. The epigynum
has an oblong opening, widest behind. Fig. 4a.

Medford, Swaiupscott, Beverly, Mass. ; Long Island, N. Y., N.
Pike.

Xysticus inornatus, new sp.

Plate XXIX, figures 5-5&.

The adult female is 5"^"^ long, with the <5ephalothorax 2""" wide.
It is less flattened than most species and has the cephalothorax
rounded up in the middle, where it is much higher than the eyes.
PI. XXIX, fig. 5. The cephalothorax is dark brown, almost black,
with a lighter line in the middle and a white line each side near the
edge. The legs ai'e colored in the same way, but the thin parts
between the joints are white. The tarsi of all the legs are lighter
than' the rest. At the base of the first and second femora, in front,
are white spots, and the third and fourth legs have white longitud-
inal stripes. The under side of the cephalothorax and legs are of
the same color, with white joints. The abdomen is light gray with
indistinct lighter lines at the sides and small light spots in the
middle. PI. xxix, fig. 5. The epigynum has a small opening, with
two wide anterior and two sharp posterior projections from its
edges. Fig. oh.

Two young specimens less than half as large, liave all the dark
portions light yellowish brown.

Adult from Medford, Mass.; young from Beverly, Mass., and
New Haven, Conn.

Oxyptila Simon, 1864.
This genus differs little from JCysticus. The cephalothorax is
flatter in the middle and the head narrower. The middle eyes of
both rows are nearer together so that they form a rectangle longer
than wide. The middle eyes of the front row and usually of both
rows are farther forward than in Xysticus, so that both rows of eyes
are more curved. There is less difference between the length of the
front and hind legs in the males than in JCysticus. The dark mark-
ings of the thorax often approach each other behind, as in our species.

Oxyptila cinerea, new sp.

Plate XXIX, figures 6, 6a.
This male is 4-5™"' long and the cephalothorax 2*5'"'" long and 2"^"^
wide. The colors are grayish brown and white. The light portion

J. a. Emerton — Spiders of the Family TJiomisidm. 367

of the cephalothorax is narrowed near the dorsal groove and widened
in front a little behind the eyes. PI. xxix, fig. 6. The abdomen
has the usual markings, all indistinct. The legs are marked more
nearly alike than in the other species. The femora are all thickly
spotted with brown, and the third and fourth have a large dark spot
at the end. The other joints are all light with dark rings at the
ends. The inferior process of the tibia of the male palpus is large,
rounded at the base, and turned outward at the tip. PI. xxix, fig.
6a. The processes of the bulb are small and both turned inward
at the points. The tarsus is curved downward a little at the end.
One male, only, from the White Mountains, New Ilampshii-e.

Coriarachne Thoreii.
The cephalothorax and abdomen are both very much flattened,
not more than half as high in proportion to their width as in
Xysticns. The cephalothorax is flat on the top, not rounded up
from the middle, as in Xysticvs. The head is narrower and more
distinctly separated from the thorax by depressions at the sides.
The arrangement of the eyes is the same as in Xysticus, except that
the two roAvs are nearer together and lower. The male palpus has
a small thin tooth on the end of the outer process of the tibia and
there are no appendages to the under side of the bulb as there are in
Xysticus.

Coriarachne versicolor Keys., Spinnen Americas, Laterigradc-e, 1880.
Plate XXIX, figures 7-7a..

The female is 5 or 6™"' long with the cephalothorax 2-5'"'" wide.
The colors are black and gray on a white or yellowish ground, in
irregular spots that vary in size in difl^erent individuals. There is
usually a dark spot in the middle of the cephalothorax in front of
the dorsal groove, and behind the eyes ai-e four spots more or less
run together and connected with smaller spots behind them. Along
the sides of the thorax are four pairs of spots, the hinder pair largest.
In the male these spots all connect together and the ce})halothorax
is often nearly black. The legs are covered with small dark spots
and have larger spots near the ends of the joints and along the
middle of the femur. In the male the femur, patella and tibia of
the first and second legs are much darker than the other joints.
PI. XXIX, figs. 7, la.

The epigynum has the opening a long distance from the transverse
fold and divided into two by a ridge that widens backward, PI.
XXIX, fig. 7c, much like the epigynum of C. depressa, of Europe.

368 J. H. Emerton — Sjyidet's of the Family Tliomisidm.

The tibia of the male palpus has a large inferior process slight!}^
bent inward at the end. The outer process is longer and the slender
tip is on the inner side and s-shaped. Fig. "Id. The tube of the
palpal oi'gan is stout and has in the middle a thick portion, rough-
ened like a file. The end of the tube is straight, not s})iral as in
C de2)ressa.

All over New England, on fences and under stones.

Misumena Vatia Thorell = Thomisus fartm Hentz.

Adult females of this and of aleatorius are both named valia hv Keyserling.
Plate XXX, figures 1-\g.

The female of this species is the largest and best known of the
genus. It is 8 or 10""" long and milk white, with sometimes a light
crimson marking on each side of the abdomen. PI. xxx, fig. 1.
The cephalothorax is wide and high in front, the distance between
the upper lateral eyes being twice their height. Fig. \b. The sides
of the cephalothorax are very light yellow or brownish, the dark
color being most distinct in young spiders. The dark markings also
extend between the eyes and around the sides of the head, but the
front of the head has a white mark that widens below over the
mandibles and above under the eyes and around the eyes of the
upper row. This marking of the front of the head, PI. xxx,
fig. \b, distinguishes this species from aleatoria.

The legs are white with light brown on the upper side of the first
and second ; or even this is absent in some individuals.

The epigynum has a deep rounded notch in the middle, the corners
of which are prolonged backward over the spermathecse. Each side
of the large notch are two small ones. PI. xxx, fig. \g.

The male is only 3 or 4"'"^ long, with the front legs about twice
the length of the body. The males are strongly marked with dark
reddish brown on a light ground. The cephalothorax is dark at the
sides, while the front of the head around the eyes is white, as in the
female. The abdomen has a dark stripe at the sides extending,
sometimes, its whole length, or in other individuals not more than
half as far. In the middle of the abdomen are two parallel dark
marks or lines of spots, figs, id, le. The first and second legs have
the femur dark brown, the patella dark on the outer half. The tibia
dark at both ends, and the tarsus and metatarsus on the outer half.
The palpi are light with the palpal organ brown. The third and
fourth legs are light.

The male palpi are small. The tarsi are short and nearly as wide
as long. The tibial jirocess is smaller than in the other species and

J. H. Enierton — Spiders of the Family Thomisldm. 369

has the littte hook on the end. PI. xxx, fig. \f. The bulb is
round at the base and has a shallow notch at the distal end, over
which is the short and small tube, twisted once at the end.

The young male has the form of the female with part of the
markings of the male. The femora and palpi are light colored.
PL xxx, fig. Ic.

The female and male from Menge's collection of Prussian spiders
in the Museum of Zoology at Cambridge, are exactly like American
specimens, except that the female has the hairs on the legs a little
more distinct and the epigynum has the lateral openings larger and
the middle one proportionally smaller.

Common all over New England, as far north as the White Moun-
tains.

Mistimena aleatoria = Thomisus aleatorius Hentz = Runcinia BrendeUii

Keys ,

Adult females are named by Keyserling M. vatia, and young females Runcinia
brendellii iu the Museum of Com p. Zoology at Cambridge.

Plate XXX, figures 2-2(1.

The female of this species, PI. xxx, fig. 2, is easily mistaken
for vatia. It is smaller, the color is more yellow, from light straw
color to orange, and it does not have the crimson stripes on the
abdomen, though it occasionally has dark reddish brown marks in
the same places and a double row of dark spots in the middle of the
back. PI. xxx, fig. 2e. The cephalothorax is light yellow or
greenish, with the sides a little darkened with brown. The legs are
usually yellow without markings, but sometimes, especially in indi-
viduals with spots on the abdomen, there are dark marks on the
coxa and trochanter, patella, tibia, and metatarsus of the first and
second legs. The front of the head is lower than in the other
species and the distance between the upper lateral eyes is nearly
three times their height. Below the eyes is a white stripe the lower
corners of which are extended into lines over the mandibles and the
upper corners into a very distinct white line that extends under the
eyes and around the sides of the head. PL xxx, figs. 2a, 1h.

The epigynum (fig. LV;) has the notch less deep than in vatia and
more open behind.

The male is only 3""" long, but with the first and second legs 8'"'"
in length. The ce})halothorax is much like that of the female, green
with the sides dark brown. The abdomen is bright yellow. The
first and second legs are dark brown without any markings, and the

370 J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the Family Thomisidce.

palpi are brown but not quite as dark. The third and fourth legs
are light yellow. The immature males have the front legs no longer
than those of the female and only partly colored brown. PI.
XXX, fig. 2d.

The young of both sexes have the abdomen darker in the middle,
with light stripes in the hinder half.

The male palpi, PI. xxx, figs. 2/', 2//, are very small. The
tibial process extends half the length of the tarsus and has a sharp
point turned a little outward and just below the point a small hook
turned upward. The palpal organ is much smaller than the tarsus,
flat and circular with a short tube and without any other processes.

The abdomen of the female is a little flatter than that of vatia,
straighter at the sides and more truncated behind.

Massachusetts and Connecticut.

Misumena asperata = Tlwmisus asperatus Hentz.

Misumena georgiana Keyserling. specimen in Mas. Comp. Zool., Cambridge ; aud
31. foliata Banks.

Plate XXX, figures 3-3e.

This species does not grow as large as i^atia and the color of the
adult female is more generally yellow, sometimes deep yellow, but
oftener pale and greenish. The legs are a little spotted with pale
brown and more hairy than in vatia. The males and young are
brightly colored with dull yellow and reddish brown markings,
some of which are retained by the female until the last moult. A
female half grown (PI. xxx, fig. 3«) has the cephalothorax light in
the middle with a brownish stripe each side covering half ^v?^,J to
the edge. The abdomen has a dark red band on each side of the
front half and in the middle a pattern in light brick red. The first
and second legs are marked with dark red-brown spots on the end
of the patella, both ends of tibia, and the end half of the meta-
tarsus. The hairs are much longer than in the adult.

A female just before the last moult had lost entirely the markings
of the legs (PI. xxx, fig. 3a), and had the pale markings of the
adult behind the eyes, while the abdomen showed the two side
stripes broken into several spots and three pairs of spots on the
hinder half darkest on the outer side, all brick red. This spider
was perched on a jjlant of sorrel [Rinnex acetocella) and its colors
were exactly those of the flowers. The male has the colors of the
young, but all deeper, the ground yellow or greenish and the mark-

J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the Fatnily Thornisidce. 371

ings dark reddish brown. The femora of legs one and two are
spotted with dark red, thickest toward the front (fig. 3J).

The epigynum has a wide oval opening divided into two round
smaller ones by a wide ridge on which is a thin raised line in the
middle (fig. 3<^).

The male palpus has a large complicated process on the outer side
at the end of which is a small black point, hooked at the end. The
tube of the palpal organ is wide and curved once around the end of
the bulb (PI. XXX, figs. 3(7, 3e), ending on the outer side. The male
palpus is much longer than that of vatia and more than twice as
large as that of aleatoria.

The abdomen of the adult female has often gray or reddish mark-
ings along the sides or in the middle.

Misumena oblonga Keys., Spinnen Americas, 1880.
Plate XXX, figures 4-4c.

Male 2-5"™ long. Front legs 8'""" long and very slender. Colors,
in alcohol, greenish yellow on the cephalothorax and legs and white
on the abdomen and around the eyes, with dark red markings. The
front of the head is high, the distance between the upper lateral
eyes being twice their height, as in M. vatia, but it does not have
the white mark in front like that species. The eyes are all slightly
raised on whitish tubercles. PI. xxx, fig. 4.

The sides of the cephalothorax are slightly darkened and around
its edge is a fine red line, short in some and in others extending its
whole length, and there are also, in one specimen, red lines across
the ends of the mandibles. The first and second legs have a short
red ring at the end of the femur and the patella. The tibia has the
distal half red and also a short ring at the base. The metatarsus is
red for three-fourths its length, and the tarsus half its lengtli.
There are also a few red spots on the front of the first femur and at
the ends of patella and tibia of fourth leg, but these spots are absent
in one specimen. The cephalothorax, abdomen, and femora have
stifi" black hairs, standing wide apart.

The male palpi are as small as those of aleatoria, but shorter and
more pointed, like those of vatia. The outer process of the tibia is
much like that of vatia, but shorter and thicker, and the hook is
placed more on the outer side. The tube is longer and straighter
and more slender than in vatia. PI. xxx, fig. 4.

The only female that seems to belong to this species is an imma-
ture specimen 4*5""^ lung. The color is pale yellow, darkened a

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 49 April, 1892.

372 J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the Family Tlwmisidm.

little at the sides of tlie cephalothorax and the ends of the legs. On
the first and second legs there is a small dull red spot near the end
of the tibia and a longer one on the metatarsus. The whole body is
covered with long hairs arranged in rows. On the back of the
abdomen there are about twenty rows of them nearly their length
apart. On the legs they are in longitudinal rows a little nearer
together. On the cephalothorax there is a middle row directed
forward and another each side of it passing between the eyes. The
other hairs of the cephalothorax point toward the middle. The
body is smooth underneath, or with only very short hairs.

Males from Blue Hills, Milton, Mass.; New Haven and Simsbury,
Conn.; young female from Brookline, Mass.; Washington, D. C,
Dr. Fox.

Philodromus.

Cephalothorax as wide as long, rounded at the sides and much
narrowed in front as far back as the base of the palpi. The front
row of eyes is much shorter than the upper row. The legs are long
and slender, the second pair longest. The third and fourth legs are
not much shorter than the first and second. The hinder legs are
wide apart and the sternum extends backward between them. The
feet have the claws turned backward and under them a thick bunch
of long hairs, wide and flattened at the end. The abdomen is longer
than Avide and a little pointed behind. The males are but little
smaller than the females and much longer legged.

The male palpi have two processes on the tibia, the usual hard
hooked process on the outer side, and a flat, thinner one underneath.

Philodromus vidgaris is a common and distinct species. The
others are all small and miich alike, especially the males, and the
difference between the sexes is so great that it is difficult to tell the
male and female of the same species, and the males which are
referred to ornatus and lineatiis may prove to belong to other species.

Philodromus vulgaris Keys. = Thomisus vulgaris Heiitz.

P. vulgaris Banks. P. pradusfris and F. signifer Banks are probably of this
species.

Plate XXXI, figures 1-1 (7.

Female, S"""" long. Cephalothorax, 3™'" long and the same wide.
Head less than half as wide as the middle of the cephalothorax.
The abdomen is half longer than the cephalothorax and nearly as
wide at the widest part. The colors are various shades of gray,

J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the JFamily Thomi'sidm. 373

resembling closely those of old unpaiuted wood. The ground color
is dirty white and the under side is almost entirely of this color.
The dark portion of the back of the abdomen is darkest at the
edges and does not entirely cover the abdomen, showing a lighter
band around it, plainest around the hinder half. The principal
middle markings are a long oval spot in front, pointed before and
behind, and a herring-bone pattern behind. The legs are spotted
with tine spots closest along the front of the femora and largest at
the ends of each joint. PI. xxxi, fig. 1. The males are darker
and longer legged, as in most species, fig. 1«. The epigynum has
two openings, between which is a ridge that widens behind and
extends to the transverse fold. Usually this ridge has waved or
irregular sides, as in fig. 1/', but in some the sides are rounded.
Fig. Ig.

The male palpus is long with the tibia nearly twice as long as
wide. The lateral process is as wide as long, square at the end,
with the upper corner slightly hooked. The under process is smaller,
rounded on the inner corner, and sharp pointed on the outer. PI.
XXXI, fig. \e. The tarsus is twice as long as wide and pointed
at the end. The tube is short and very thick at the base. It starts
on the middle of the inner side of the bulb and extends around the
end. Under the tip of the tube is a short fine process. Fig. Id.

All over New England on houses and fences, but seldom on plants.

PhilodromUS pictUS, new sp. = P. rw/MS (Walck.j Banks.
Plate XXXI, figures 2-2e.

Female 5 or 6""" long. Abdomen usually about twice as long as
the cephalothorax. The Avidest part farther forward than in most
species. Legs and palpi jjale yellow with fine brown spots. Cephal-
othorax light yellow in 1;he middle and reddish brown at the sides,
covered with fine spots. Abdomen dull red at the sides and bright
yellow in the middle with a dark greenish marking in the middle of
the front half and two dark marks behind it on the hinder half.
PI. XXXI, fig. 2. The eyes are surrounded by distinct light rings.
In some specimens, usually immature, the abdomen has a more dis-
tinct jellow and red pattern. Fig. 2a.

The male has the cephalothorax and legs darker and the abdomen
less bright red and yellow than the female, and sometimes gray and
iridescent. In alcohol it shows a more distinct herring-bone pat-
tern on the hinder half. Fig. 2 J.

The male palpus has the tibia nearly as long as the tarsus. The
lateral process is unusually long and the upper corner has a sharp

374 J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the tamily ThomisidcB.

hook. Fig. 2<7. The under process is very thin and about as long
as the lateral. The tarsus is widened on the inner side and the
tube is long and slender, starting near the base of the bulb. The
eyes are close in both sexes. Figs. 2c, 2f?, 2e,
A very common species all over New England.

Philodromus ornatus Banks.

= /*. minuscihlus Bauks and P. placklus Banks.

Plate XXXI, figures 3-36.

The female of this species is small and very distinctly marked
with dark brown on a white ground. The middle of the cephalo-
thorax is white and the sides brown nearly to the edge. The
abdomen is white with a distinct brown band each side from
the front more than half its length. PI. xxxi, fig. 3. Some-
times there is also an indistinct brownish pattern in the middle, but
this is usually absent in adults and the middle is entirely white.
The coxse are brown and the rest of the legs white, except a little
brown at the ends of the joints. Under the abdomen the lateral
brown bands extend backward and meet across the spinnerets. The
abdomen is nearly as wide as long and widest across the hinder half.

The male which I suppose belongs to this species has the legs and
cephalothorax orange brown, darker at the sides of the thorax and
toward the ends of the legs. The abdomen is dark reddish-brown,
strongly iridescent with red and green in a bright light. In
alcohol it shows brown markings at the sides similar to those of the
female, and also indistinct angular marks in the middle of the hinder
half. The palpi are long, but the tibia is little longer than wide and
narrower than the patella. The outer process is small and the under
process wide and long, extending over the bulb a third its length.
PI. XXXI, figs. 3«, 3J. The tarsus is widest across the middle and
straight on the outer side. The tube is very long and slender
beginning at the base of the bull) near the under tibial process.
Fig. 3 a.

All parts of New England; Ithaca, N. Y., Banks.

Philodromtis lineatus, new sp.

Plate XXXI, figures 4-4r.

The female of this species is a little larger than ornatus and the

brown markings are lighter, and in life, or when freshly killed,

purplish in the lighter parts. The markings are less distinct than

in ornatus, the brown and white running into each other. The abdo-

J. H. Kr»ert07i — /S^^iders of the Family Thomisidm. 315

men has a brown band each side, often broken into several spots,
and a brown band in the middle extending back half its length,
behind which are several lighter marks. Between these are many
oblique lighter markings and rows of spots. The legs are very light
grayish brown, darker toward the ends of the joints. PI. xxxi, fig. 4.
The upper middle eyes are farther apart than in ornatus.

The supposed male of this species resembles closely the last, but is
a little larger and has much larger palpal organs. The tibia is longer
than wide. The outer process is very short and pointed obliquely
outward. The under process is long and wide. Fig. Ah. The
tai'sus is nearly as wide as long, and the palpal organ nearly round.
The tube begins on the outer side beyond the end of the under
process and extends around the inner side and outer end. Fig. Ac.

All over New England. Not found by Banks at Ithaca, N. Y.

Philodromus bidentatus, uew sp.

Plate XXXI, figures 5-5&.
Of this species I have only males, one from New Haven, Conn.,
and two from Mt. Tom, in the central part of Massachusetts. They
are 3"^" long and in their general appearance agree with the other
species. The New Haven specimen is pale and has the markings
very distinct, while the others are dark orange brown, like most
male Philodronins, after a long time in alcohol. The markings of
the legs are more in irregular patches of gra}' and less in fine spots
than in most species, and the dark middle line of the cephalothorax
is unusually distinct. The abdomen has the usual markings. Fig, 5.
The male palpi have the tibia shorter than the patella and widened at
the distal end. The lateral process is stout and has two teeth at the
end. PI. XXXI, fig. 5b. The under ][)rocess is longer, but small com-
pared with other species. Fig. 5a. The tube is shorter than in
pictus, beginning near the middle of the side of the bulb.

Philodromus brevis, new sp.

Plate XXXII, figures 2-2d.

Males, 2-5'"™ long. The color of both specimens is dark. The
cephalothorax does not have the usual light area in the middle, but
only a lighter spot just in front of the dorsal groove. The rest of
the cephalothorax is nearly uniform in coloi*. Fig. 2.

The male palpi have the tibia short and straight, not widened at
the ends. The lateral hook is long and stout and slightly curved

376 J. H. Emerton — Senders of the Family Thomisidm.

down at the end. Fig. 2d. The inferior process is short and wide.
The tarsus is short and blunt. The tube is very short, not half the
length of the tarsus, and nearly straight. PI. xxxii, Hg. 2c.
Two males only, from Readville, Mass.

Philodromus robustus, new sp.

Plate XXXII, figures 1-1 a.

Male, 4™™ long. Legs and palpi stouter and more hairy than in
the other species, and the mandibles longer. The specimen is much
faded and there are no traces of markings on the legs. The abdo-
men shows the usual markings and the cephalothorax had the middle
light colored with a dark line, widening toward the head.

The palpi have the tibia longer than wide and about as long as
the patella. The outer process is slender and short, turned obliquely
outward and blunt at the tip. Fig. la. The under process is thin
but hard and as wide as long. The tarsus is as wide as long and the
palpal organ nearly round. The tube is slender and extends half
way around the bulb.

Beverly, Mass.

TmaruS E. Simon, 1864.
Cephalothorax widest across the middle, farther forward than in
most of the family. Front of the head and mandibles inclined far
enough forward to be seen from above. Lateral eyes of both rows
on large round tubercles. Middle eyes forming a quadrangle longer
than wide and widest behind. Abdomen longer than wide, widest
across the hinder half and high, and pointed behind with the point
in some species prolonged into a tubercule of various shapes.

TmarUS CaudatUS Keys. = Tlwmisus cav.datus Hentz.

Plate XXXII, figures 'i-id.
Female, 6'""^ long. Cephalothorax, 2"™ long and as wide at the
widest part. The abdomen is as narrow as the cephalothorax in
front and widens backward to nearly twice that width. Fig. 3.
The abdomen rises from the front to a point over the spinnerets,
where it forms a blunt conical point. Fig. 3a. The hrst and second
legs are nearly equal and much longer than the third and fourth.
The mandibles are inclined forward, their basal half is nearly
straight and the ends narrowed. The colors are gray and white,
resembling light individuals of Philodromus vulgaris. The legs are

J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the Family Thomisidm. 377

spotted with a few black dots, largest and closest on the front pair.
The markings of the cephalothorax radiate indistinctly from the
dorsal groove. The abdomen is covered with fine gray spots and
has three or four pairs of darker lines across the hinder half. PI.
XXXII, fig. 3.

The males diflFer little from the females except in the smaller
abdomen.

The male palpus has a short and blunt lateral process widened
in the middle and thin and sharp at the end. Figs. 3Z>, 3c. The
tarsus is wide and the palpal organ round and without any processes
in the middle. The tube is slender, passing almost entirely around
the bulb and supported at the end by a soft appendage with a hard
sharp point. Figs. 3J, 3c. The epigynum has a small semicircular
opening. Fig. Zd.

A common species in Massachusetts and Connecticut.

EbO Keyserling-, 1883.

These spiders have a general resemblance to Philodromus. The
whole body is flattened and wider than in that genus, the head is
more rounded and the two rows of eyes more nearly of the same
length. The legs of the second j^air are ranch longer than the others.

Ebo latithorax Keys., Zool. bot. ges., Wieu, 188:5.
Plate XXXII, figures A~id.

Tn this species the second pair of legs is more than twice as long
as either of the others and has the claws of these legs much smaller
than the othei'S. The cephalothorax is wider than long and much
flattened. The head is rounded in front. The mandibles are small
and turned backward under the head. The eyes are arranged as in
Philodromus^ but there is less difference between the length of the
two rows and the front middle eyes are larger than the others.
PI. XXXII, figs. 45, 4c, A^d. The abdomen is as wide as long and a
little pointed behind. Figs. 4, 4«.

The length is 2 to 2 '5™'". The color is light yellow with brownish
markings on the cephalothorax and abdomen. On the cephalothorax
are several radiating lines of spots running from the dorsal groove
to the legs, and three shorter lines extending forward half way to
the eyes. The abdomen has two dark spots at the sides in front and
a line in the middle and an indistinct herring-bone pattern on the
hinder half.

378 J. H. Emerton — Spiders of the Family Thornisidce.

There is little difference between the male and female. The male
palpus is slender and the palpal organ small. The tibia is twice as
long as wide and has a short process on the outer side. The tarsus
is slightly widened across the middle and the palpal organ is oval,
about twice as long as wide. The tube is short and curved in a half
circle across the end of the bulb. Figs. 4e, \f.

Medford, Mass. ; Providence, R. I. ; Long Island, N. Y., in N.
Pike's collection. The only males I have seen are in the latter
collection.

Tibellus Simou, 1875.

Cephalothorax longer than wide. Abdomen very long and slender,
narrower than the cephalothorax, and straight at the sides. Legs
slender with long spines, second pair longest, and the fourth nearly
as long as the first. Eyes on the top of the head. Both rows curved
and the front row about half as long as the upper. The femur and
patella of the female palpi a little thickened.

Tibellus duttonii Keys. = Thomims dnttmii Hentz.
Plate XXXII, figures 5-5c.

Female, 8 or 10'""' long, the abdomen variable in length and thick-
ness. The color is light yellow with light brown markings. The
cephalothorax has a middle brown stripe and one on each side, all
indistinct. The abdomen has two black spots on the hinder half
and a light brown middle spot at the front end extending back half
the length of the abdomen and ending in a point, or sometimes
continuing the whole length. The abdomen is a little pointed
behind and extends back far enough to cover the spinnerets. PI.
XXXII, fig. 5.

The male is a little more slender than the female. The male
palpus is bent downward. The patella and tibia are both short and
the tibia shorter on the under side than above, so that the tarsus
joins it obliquely. Fig. ba. The tibial process is short and blunt.
The tube is stout and black and twisted at the tip and has beside it
a flat process of about its own length. Fig. 5h. I have not been
able to find the spider whose palpus was figured by me on plate 20
of the reprint of Hentz's spiders of the United States in 1875. All
that I have seen since have the slender portion of the tube longer,
as here figured. The epigynum is very far forward and has its
opening behind over the transverse fold. Fig. be.

Massachusetts ; common in the White Mountains and Northern
New York.

J. H. Enierton — Spiders of the Family ThoniisidcB. 379

Thanatus c. Koch.
Cephalothorax as wide as long in males and almost as wide in
females, resembling that of Micrornmata and Dolomedes. The
front row of eyes is much shorter than the upper row and both I'ows
are curved. PI. xxxii, fig. 6. The abdomen is oval and little
flattened, but not as long and slender as in Tibellus. The fourth
legs are as long as the second or longer, which is unusual in this
family.

Thanatus lycosoides, new sp.

Plate XXXIT, figures 6-6c.

This species is very near 7'. coloradensis Keys., and may be the
same. It is smaller than the spiders described by Keyserling in
both sexes, but the proportions are the same, and the male palpi
almost like those of coloradensis, being a little more slender and
having a sharper tibial process. Keyserling's specimens were all
from Colorado and I have not seen any of them.

The female is 6 to 8'"™ long, Cephalothorax of largest specimen,
4""" long and nearly as wide. Length of legs, 4, 2, 1, 3. The legs
are slender and tapering, the fourth pair as long as the second or
longer. The colors are white and brown covered with brown and
gray scales and scattered brown hairs, and the whole appearance is
much like Lycosa or Dolomedes. The middle of the cephalothorax
is light from the eyes backward, and on each side is a dark brown
band. The abdomen has a distinct brown spot extending from the
front end beyond the middle, and pointed at both ends. This spot
is found in several species of the genus. The legs are indistinctly
marked on the femur and tibia with longitudinal brown lines.
PI. xxxn, fig. 6. The epigynum is close to the transverse fold and
is divided by a flat ridge, widest in front. The openings are long
and narrow and covered by a convex brown shell, each side opening
widest toward the transverse fold. Fig. 6c.

The male is, as usual, smaller and longer legged and resembles
more Ocyale and Philodromus. The male palpus is somewhat like
that of duttonii, but shorter and stouter, and it has a longer and
larger tibial hook. The palpal organ is large and extends beyond
the tarsus on the outer side. The tube is short and slender and a
little curved. Over the tube is a small, flat, soft appendage. Figs.
6a, Qb.

Wenham, Annisquam, Dedham, Mass.; and Mt. Carmel, Hamden,
Conn.
Tran^. CoJiN. Acad., Vql. VIII. 50 June, 1892.

38U J. H. Emertoih — Spiders of the Family Thomisidm.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate XXYIIL

Figure 1. — Xysticus limhatus Keys., female, x 4; !«, male, x 4; \h, young female
with more distinct markings; Ic, maxilia^ and labium; \d, le, l/j opening
of epigynum of three different spiders ; It/, male palpus ; 1//, tibia of male
palpus from above.

Figure 2. — Xysticus gulosus Keys., female, x 4; 2a, male, x 4; 2h, male palpus;
2c, epigynum.

Figure 3. — Xysticus stomachosus Keys., female, x 4; 3a, male, x 4; 3^, 3c, male pal-
pus; 'id, epigynum.

Figure 4. — Xysticus ne7-vosus, female, x 4; 4a, male, x 4; 4h, epigynum; 4c, tarsus
and tibia of male palpus; 4c^, under side of male palpus.

Pl.\te XXIX.

Figure 1. — Xysticus trigutiatus Keys., female, x 4; la, male, x 4; Ih, front of head

of female ; 1 c, epigynum ; 1 d, male palpus.
Figure 2. — Xysticus graminis, male, x 4; 2a, male palpus; 2&, dorsal markings of

female, x 4.
Figure 3. — Xysticus formosus, male, x 4 : 3a, male palpus.
Figure 4. — Xysticus quadrilineatus Keys., female, x 4; 4a, epigynum.
Figure 5. — Xysticus inornaius, iema]e, x 4; 5a, front of head of female ; 5Z;, epigynum.
Figure 6. — Oxyptila cinerea, male, x 4 ; Ga, male palpus.
Figure 7. — Coriarachne versicolor, female, x 4; *la, male, x 4; 16, front of head of

female; 7c, epigynum; 7c?, male palpus.

Plate XXX.

Figure 1. — iI//s2Mnena -ya^/a Thor., female, x 4; la, cephalothorax, enlarged ; 16, front
of head; Ic, young male, x 4; \d, \e, adult males of different sizes, x 4;
]/, male palpus; 1^, epigynum.

Figure 2. — Misuviena aleatoria, female, x 4; 2a, front of head; 2b, top of head;
2c, male, x 4; 2c?, young male, x 4; 2e, young female with dark mark-
ings, X 4, from one in the collection of the Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. ;
2/ 2g, male palpus; 2h, epigynum.

Figure 3. — Misumena asperata, female, x 4; 3a, young female, x 4; 3Z), male, x 4;
3c, epigynum; 3c:?, male palpus; 3e, side of male palpus, less enlarged.

Figure A.— Misumena oblonga Keys., male, x 4; 4a, 46, male palpus; 4c, young
female, x 4.

Plate XXXI.

Figure 1. — Philodrornus vulgaris Keys., female, x 4; la, male, x 4; 16, first foot,
outer side; Ic, first foot, inner side; Id, male palpus; le, tibia of male
palpus, outer side; 1/, usual form of epigynum; 1g, epigynum of a
female from Providence, R. I.

Figure 2. — Philodrornus j)ictus, female, x 4; 2a, dorsal markings of a younger female;
26, male, x 4 ; 2c, front of head of female ; 2d, top of head of male ;
2e, front of head of male ; 2/, 2g, male palpus.

J. H. Emerton — SpiiJers of the Family Tliomisidce. 381

Figure 3. — Philodromus ornatus, female, x 4; 3a, 3&, male palpus; 3c, tibia of male

palpus from above; 3c?, epigynum.
Figure 4. — Philodromus lineatus, female, x 4; 4a, stermim; 4&, side of male palpus ;

4c, male palpus, under side.
Figure 5. — Philodromus bidentattis, dorsal markings of light colored male, enlarged

eight times; 5a, 5b, male palpus.

Plate XXXII.

Figure 1. — Philodromus rohustus, palpus of male; la, outer side of tibia of male

palpus.
Figure 2. — Philodromus hrevis, markings of ceplialothorax of male, x 8 ; 2a, top of

head ; 2&, front of head ; 2c, 2d, male palpus.
Figure 3. — Tmarus caudatus Keys., female, x 4; 3a, side of abdomen of female;

3h, 3c, male palpus ; Sd, epigynum.
Figure 4. — Ebo latithorax Keys., female, x 4 ; 4a, male, x 4, from a specimen in

N. Pike's collection of Long Island spiders ; 4&. 4c, Ad, head of female ;

4e, 4/, male palpus.
Figure 5. — Tibellus duitonii Keys., female, x 4; 5a, 5&, male palpus; 5c, epigynum.
Figure 6. — Thanatus lycosoides, female, x 4; 6a, (j&, male palpus; Gc, epigynum.

XXII. — The Marine Nemerteans of New England and Adja-
cent Waters. By A. E. Verrill.

The following article is intended as a descriptive catalogue of all
the Nemerteans of the North-eastern Coast of North America that
have been observed with enough care to permit me to give a
description presumably sufficient to enable ordinary observers to
identify the species Avhen seen living. Therefore all my own
descriptions, herein given, have been made from living specimens,
except in a few special instances, which are, in each case, particu-
larly stated.

As a rule, undetermined alcoholic specimens of Nemerteans, un-
accompanied by notes on their forms and color's while living, cannot
be identified with certainty unless they belong to genera containing
very few and widely differing species. To distinguish the numer-
ous species of Atnphijyorus, Tetrastemma, Lmeus, etc., with alco-
holic specimens alone, would be a hopeless task, at least in the
present state of our knowledge of these groups. Possibly, when
all the known species shall have been studied thoroughl}- by means
of microscopic sections, it may be possible to distinguish many of
the species by means of such sections of preserved specimens, but
that will be a condition possible only in the distant future, and in
any case would require much time and labor.

Exceptional cases are, however, not uncommon in which some
prominent feature may be preserved in the alcoholic specimens suf-
ficiently well to enable the species to be recognized with certainty.
Thus, among the Enopla^ the stylets of the proboscis are frequently
characteristic in form or number. The ocelli, often visible in
alcoholic specimens, may also be characteristic. In a few cases,
even the characteristic colors may be preserved many years in
alcohol, and still better in glycerine. I have specimens of Aviphi-
porus angxilatns [Stimpsotd), preserved in alcohol twenty years ago,
in which the dark purple color of the bod}^ and the characteristic
white patches on the sides of the head are still very distinct. These
specimens have, however, been kept in dark drawers; those that
were exposed to light faded many years ago.

In consequence of the difficulty or impossibility of identifying
alcoholic specimens, T have, in this article, made very little use of a

A, E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of New England, etc. 383

large part of the vast collection of American Nemerteans preserved
in the Museum of Yale University, and including those collected
by myself and others during the explorations carried on from 1871
to 1887 by the United States Fish Commission, under the direction
of the late Commissioner, Professor S. F. Baird.

These collections include several thousands of specimens, filling
more than a thousand bottles and jars. They represent very fully
the Nemertean and Planarian fauna of the coast, from Cape Hatteras
to Labrador, and from high-water mark to 2000 fathoms. Fortun-
ately I personally identified and labelled when captured a large
number of those specimens that belonged to described species, and
made copious descriptions and sketches of most of the unfamiliar
forms that came, while still living, under my observation diiring
all the sixteen seasons spent on the work of the U. S. Fish Com-
mission, as well as during several summers (1864 to 1870) spent in
independent researches in the waters of the Bay of Fundy and
elsewhere. But there were many specimens, especially deep-water
forms, that I did not see until they had been placed in alcohol.
Most of those are entirely omitted from this paper. Probably they
include a number of additional species.

Many of the general figures accompanying this article were made
from life by Mr. J. H. Emerton and Mr. J. H. Blake, under my
direction, for the U. S. Fish Commission. For the privilege of
using these drawings for the present purpose, I am indebted to the
late commissioner, Professor Baird, this article having been in pre-
paration before his death. Other figures have been drawn by
myself for this paper. Numerous figures, taken from my own field-
notes and rough sketches, have been copied and put into shape by
my son, A. H. Verrill, under my personal supervision. The latter
are, therefore, quite as reliable as the former ones. A few anatomi-
cal figures (on PI. xxxix) have been copied from the works of
Mcintosh* and Hubrecht,f in order to illustrate more fully some of
the differences between the orders and sub-orders of Nemerteans.

It was originally a part of my intention to have included numer-
ous anatomical details of our native species, based on new prepara-
tions and studies, but various circumstances have compelled me to
defer that portion of the subject to a future time. Such details are,
however, less essential in the case of our Nemerteans than they

* A Monograph of the British Annelids. Part I. The Nemerteans. Ray Society,
1873.

f Voyage of the Challenger, vol. xix.

384 A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of Nev^ England., etc.

otherwise would have been, because many of our native species are
closely allied to, and several others are identical with, some of those
that have been well studied anatomically by Mcintosh and other
European writers.

Nemerteans are almost universally present on our shores, between
tides at all levels, from near high-water [Lineus socialis) down-
ward. They are also to be found, by dredging, at all depths down
to 1000 fathoms or more, but are much more abundant in shallow
water (1 to 60 fathoms) than at greater depths. They occur on
all kinds of bottoms, but are usually more abundant in soft and
partially organic mud than elsewhere. But in rather shallow water,
on some hard bottoms overgrown with ascidians, hydroids, and
sponges they are often very abundant, especially in the Bay of
Fundy. The littoral Nemerteans occur in greater numbers and of
more numerous species on the rocky shores of the Bay of Fundy,
and especially in Eastport harbor, than in any other localities where
I have collected them.

On sandy shores, also, there are nearly always several species
living buried in the sand, to be found easily by the use of a spade.
These sand-dwelling forms include the largest species of Cerebratu-
hcs, which are, perhaps, the largest of all Nemerteans.

NEMERTINA.

The Nemertinea may be characterized as follows:

Smooth, ciliated, often bright colored, and mostly marine worms,
destitute of external paired apjjendages, usually wuth a long and
somewhat flattened body, often almost linear; without definite body-
cavity. Muscular walls of body thick and complex, not segmented.

Head not very distinct from the body; mouth ventral, beneath
the head, or subterminal, without teeth or jaws.

Intestine large, usually straight and furnished with many short,
lateral, saccular, often lobed appendages; anus posterior.

A long, tubular, dorsal proboscis is contained in a special muscu-
lar sheath, which is filled with a corpusculated fluid and situated
above the intestine but entirely separated from it. The pi'oboscis
can be protruded by eversion from a special aperture at the front
of the head.

Two pairs of cephalic ganglions are present ; they are united
transversely by an upper and a lower commissure, between which
pass the proboscis and its sheath. Most species have ciliated pits or
sacs connected with the posterior ganglions by ducts leading from

A. jG Verrill — Marine Nenierttans of New England, etc. 385

fossae or grooves on the sides of the head. They are probably
olfactory organs. Two large lateral nerves run back from the lower
cephalic ganglions; often there is also a smaller median dorsal nerve
trunk, and in many there is a continuous nervous plexus between the
muscular layers of the body-wall.

Vascular system closed ; a main longitudinal vessel runs along-
each side and usually a median dorsal one is situated above the
intestine; the blood is usually colorless, rarely red.

A paired nephridial system, consisting of ducts and tubules vari-
ously arranged, is usually present in the oesophageal region.

The sexes are almost always separate and nearly all the species
are oviparous. Reproductive organs are very simple and similar
in both sexes, consisting of simple saccular ovaries or spermaries,
situated along the sides of the body, usually between the lateral
saccules of the intestine. External genital openings are mere pores
in the body-wall.

Development is usually direct, but sometimes with a metamorphosis
through a Pilidium, or free swimming larval form, very peculiar
in structure. (Plate xxxix, figures 1 to 6).

Order I, ENOPLA.

Enopla M. Schultz; Mcintosh, Brit. Annelids, Part I, Nemerteans, pp. 36, 43, 134.
Ilojilonemerimillubriicht] Cams, Fauna MediterraneEe, p. 163, 1884.
Hoplonemertea Hubrecht; Voy. Challenger, vol. xix, p. 15.

Proboscis divided into three distinct regions (Plate xxxix, figures
7, 8, 9) ; the first is evertible and tubular ; the middle region (wood-
cut 1), is furnished with a hollow miiscular bulb and a complex
armature, consisting of a central calcai-eous st^det (o), or a toothed
plate, usually accompanied by two or more lateral chambers con-
taining small, pin-like, free spines or stylets (figures 7, "la, and wood-
cut 1, r>, I)'), The central cavity of the bulb and the lateral stylifer-
ous chambers communicate with the anterior evertible chamber of
the proboscis by means of ducts. Proboscis-pore is either terminal,
at the end of the snout, or subventral.

Fig. 1. Armature of proboscis of Amphiporus ladifloreus; A, muscular bulb; B,
its cavity; c, central stylet; d, d', lateral stylet-sacs: e, duct of d; h, muscular
b^nd, (after Mcintosh).

386 A. E. Verrill— Marine Nemerteans of ISFew Migland, etc.

The mouth is small and inconspicuous when contracted, situated
beneath the end of the snout and in front of the cephalic ganglions,
often in close connection with the proboscis-pore.

Lateral longitudinal cephalic slits are wanting and are generally
replaced by shallow, transverse or oblique, ciliated grooves or fossje,
connected by narrow ducts with small sacs (probably olfactory in
function) that connect them with the posterior ganglions.

Cephalic ganglions rounded, the upper or anterior ones closely
united to and largely covering the lower ones. Lateral nerves arise
from the posterior ends of the inferior ganglions and run back
within the inner muscular layer of the body-wall.

Ocelli various, often numerous; sometimes wanting.

Three large, longitudinal vascular trunks are well developed; a
vascular loop in the head.

Intestine large and straight, sacculated. Muscular walls of the
body consist mainly of two layers, an outer circular, and an inner
longitudinal one.

The young, so far as known, undergo no marked metamorphosis.

The species are chiefly marine; a few fresh- water and terrestrial
species are known.

Family, Amphiporid^ Mcintosh (restr.)

Body moderately elongated. Proboscis with a thick, tubular,
evertible anterior portion, its walls consisting of about seven
layers, the inner surface (or outer when protruded) thickly covered
with papillae; middle region furnished with a simple central stylet
and generally two or four lateral chambers containing pin-shaped
stylets, but the lateral sacs are sometimes wanting; posterior region
tubular, with two muscular layers, an outer circular and an inner
longitudinal layer. (Esophagus with a dilated and plicated anterior
portion in the head.

The family Tetrastemmidm Hubr. is here included. I can find no
characters that seem to me sufiicient to warrant even a sub-family
distinction between Tetrastemrna and Amphiporus.

On the other hand, I would separate Drepanophorus Hubr. as a
separate family, Dbepanophorid^, characterized by having the
central armature of the proboscis in the form of a lamina or plate,
bearing several stylets or denticles ; by the numerous styliferous
sacs ; and by the presence of lateral caecal sacs connected with
the sheath of the proboscis.

A. E. Verrill — Marine ISfemerteans of Neio England, etc. 387

Amphiporus Ehrenberg, 1831, Mcintosh, non Dies., nee CErsted.

Oinmatoi)lea khr., Symbohe Physicse, 1831.

Omato'pka Diesing, Syst. Helm., vol. i, p. 248, 1850.

Polystemma Khr., 1831 ; (Ersted, Naturhist. Tidssk., iv, p. 579, 1844.

Polia Quatr. (pars), Ann. des Sci. Nat., vi, p. 201, 1846, non Delle Chiaje, 1841.

Cosmocephala Stiinpson, Prodromus, in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., vol. ix, p.

165 [21, aep. copy]. 1857.
Folina Stimpson, op. cit., p. 165.
OpMonemertes Yerrill, Amer. .Journ. Sci , vol. vii, p. 45. 1873 ; Proc. Araer. Assoc,

1873, p. 389, 1873.

Body only moderately elongated, in some species slender, in
others stout ; usually strongly convex dorsally and with rounded
sides.

Head often distinct from the narrowed neck, but in other cases
of the same breadth as the body and without any definite limita-
tion.

Transverse or oblique ciliated fossje or shallow grooves, two of
them connected with the ciliated sensory ducts, are, apparently,
always present, though often very indistinct; usually there is a pair
at the back of the head and nearly in line with, or just behind, the
posterior ocelli and the ganglions; the other pair, situated in front
of the ganglions, is usually less distinct and may be easily over-
looked, and is perhaps absent in some species. One or both pairs
of foss?e may meet on the dorsal line in certain species.

Ocelli usually numerous, variously arranged ; perhaps the most
common or typical arrangement is that of two anterior groups and
two posterior or cerebral clusters, but either pair may be lacking,
or the two groups may blend, and sometimes no ocelli are visible.

Proboscis-pore terminal, or sometimes sub-terminal, just under
the tip of the snout. Proboscis large and long. Central armature
a simple, sharp stylet with thick base ; lateral stylet-sacs usually
two, each with two to four, or more, pin-shaped stylets.

Mouth far forward, usually united with the proboscis-pore, and
therefore not visible in contraction.

The numerous species belonging to this genus* were distributed

* Many authors, of whom a few are indicated in the synonymy, have used Omma-
toplea Ehr. as the name of this genus, and on many accounts it seems to'me that it
wo\ild have been better to have continued that usage. Mcintosh, in his rnonograpli,
has, however, seen fit to change the name to Amphiporus (of tiie same date) for
reasons that are. to say the least, of questionable validity, — mainly because somebody
may hereafter discover that the " type " of Ommatop)lea is of a different genus, though
he gives no reason for supposing that to be the case. In this instance long usage

Trans. Conn. Aoad.. Voi.. VIII. 51 .Thne, 1892.

388 A. E. Verrill — Marine JSTemerteans of Neio England^ etc.

among a large number of genera by the earlier writers, especially
by those who did not observe the armature of the proboscis, or did
not consider it of importance.

In general, it is impossible to distinguish the species of this genus
from other genera without an examination of the proboscis and its
armature. Hence, no doubt, there are many still unrecognized
species of the genus that were formerly described under other
genera, from various foreign countries, I believe, however, that all
the species hitherto described or mentioned as found on our coast
are included in the following list, together Avith several that appear
to be undescribed.

CErsted adopted Polystemnia for this genus, and placed under it
two typical species; P. roseum and P..pnlchmun. At the same time
he restricted Amphiporus to the genus named Nemertes (new sense)
by Mcintosh, giving its essential character (a small proboscis) and
naming A. Neesii as the type.

Subgenera of Amphiporus.

The genus may be conveniently divided into several groups or
subgenera based primarily on the arrangement of the ocelli and
nerves, as follows :

I. Ocelli form four or more distinct groups ; the two cerebral groups are
distinct from the anterior ones. — Omnia toplea, subgenus.

lo. Anterior ocelli do not form curved rows parallel witli the lateral
margins of the head.

Amphiporus angulahis (Fabr.).
A. multisorus V., sp. no v.
A. heterosorus V., sp. nov.
A. tetrasorus V., sp. nov.

lb. Anterior groups of ocelli form curved rows parallel, at least in
part, with the sides of the head. — Polysieinma (Ers. ; Polina
Stimp.

^4. roseus (Miiller).

A. lactifloreus (Johnst.).

A. ochraceus V.

A. glutinosus V.

A. griseus (Stimp.).

would have justified him in not making the change before there was any proof of the
necessity for doing so.

The cliange having been made in so important a woric, lias been generally adopted
by later European authors, and I have, therefore, followed their example in this
article, for uniformity of nomenclature in this group is at present of paramount
importance.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Nenierteaiis of New England, etc. 389

II. Only two distinct groups of ocelli, anterior or sub-lateral ; cerebral
groups obscure or wanting. — Cosmocephala Stimp.

2a. Only anterior groups of ocelli are evident.
A. frontalis V., sp. nov.

2b. Only median lateral groups of ocelli are present : or else the
median and cerebral groups are blended.
A. mesosorusY., s]!. nov.

III. Ocelli form only elongated lateral rows more or less parallel with the
sides of the head ; cerebral groups are not distinct from tlie others.
Body slender. — Ophionemertes Verrill.

A. cruentatus V.
A. virescens V.
A. agilis V.

IV. Only a single pair of anterior ocelli are present.--Z)ic7i//MS Stimj:).

A. bioculatKs Mclnt.

V. Ocelli indistinct or absent. — Naredopsis Verrill, sub-gen. nov.

A. caucus v., sji. nov.

VI. Ocelli doubtful, forming at least a pair of antero-lateral groups (per-
liaps others that are not observed).

A. thallius V,, sp. nov.

VII. Cerebral groups of ocelli (?) alone observed (perhaps anterior ocelli
overlooked). — Nareda Girard.

A. superbus (Gir.)

AilPIIIPORUS.

Analytical Table of s-pecies based ox the arraugeniod of the ocelli.

A. Ocelli present.
B. Ocelli numerous, arranged in groups.
C. Ocelli arranged in four groups ; two cerebral, near the ganglions,
and two anterior or antero-lateral.
D. Anterior clusters of ocelli transverse, at the front margin of the head ;
posterior groups roundisli.

a. Anterior groups transversely oblong or partly double. A. angidafus.
aa. Anterior groups each divided into three subordinate clusters. A. mal-

tisorus.
DD. Anterior clusters are not transverse at the front margin.

b. Anterior clusters subdorsal, not parallel with the margins of head.

c. Anterior clusters are triangular with the acute angle backward. ^4. het-

erosorus.

cc. Anterior clusters are oblique I'ows parallel with the posterior ones. A.
tetrasorus.

bb. Anterior clusters lateral or sublateral, curved or crescent-shaped, ante-
riorly partly parallel with the margins of head.

e. Posterior groups forpi round or angular close clusters.

/. Anterior groups are large, composed of several rows posteriorly, and
nearly blend with posterior groups. A. roseus.

390 A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of New Emjland, etc.

ff. Anterior groups are more simple, distinctly separated from the posterior

clusters, composed of one or two rows, and regularly curved. A. lacti-

floreus.
ee. Posterior groups of few ocelli, which do not form close clusters.
g. Posterior groups consist of one, two, or rarely three, oblique pairs of

ocelli on each side.
/(. Posterior pairs usually two on each side, convergent backward. A.

ochraceus.
hh. Posterior pairs of ocelli divergent backward. A. glutinosus.
gg. Posterior groups linear, each of about four ocelli. A. griseus.
CC. Ocelli arranged in only two distinct clusters.

a. Clusters transverse, -short, in front of ganglions.

b. Clusters transverse, near fi'ont margin of head. A. frontalis.

bb. A large angular cluster on each side of the middle of the head. A.

mesosortis.
cm. Clusters of ocelli elongated, lateral, parallel with the margins of the

head.

c. Ocelli forming a simple row on each side of head. A. cruentatus.
CC. Ocelli in double or triple rows.

d. Ocelli in two or three nearly parallel rows extending back of ganglions.

A. virescens.
(id. Rows of ocelli broad, terminating at the ganglions. ^4. agilis.
BB. Ocelli two only, near the front of head. A. bioctdatus.
AA. Ocelli wanting or indistinct. A. emeus.

Species not included in the above table :

Amphiporus thallius. Ocelli doubtful ; only front groups observed.
Amphiporiis (?) superbus. Ocelli doubtful ; apparently two cerebral groups
only.

Amphiporus angulatUS (Fabr.) Verrill.

Fasciola anguhiia 0. Fabr., in 0. F. Miiller, Verm. Terrest. et Fluv., i. pp. 58, 1774.

Planaria angulata 0. Fabr., in Mulier, Zool. Danic, Prod, p. 221, 177G. (Commuui-
cated by 0. Fabricius, t. Miiller).

Planaria angulata 0. Fabr., Fauna Groenlandica, p. 323, 1780.

Oinatoplea Stimj)sonii Girard. in Siimpson. Invert, of Grand MoBan, p. 28, pi. 2,
fig. 18, 1853.

Amj)hiporus Stimpsoni Verrill, Notice of Hecent Addit. to Mar. Invert., Part I,
in Proc. National Mus , vol. ii, p. 184, 1879; Check List Marine Invert. Atlan-
tic Coast, p. 12, 1879; Bulletin U. S. Nat. Museum, No. 15, p. 143, 1879 (from
Cumberland Gulf).

Amphiporus Fahricii Levinsen, Bidrag til Kundskab om Grceulands Turbellariefauua
p. 38, 1879, from Vidensk. Meddel. fra den naturli. Foren. i Kbliva., 1879-80,
p. 200.

Plate xxxui, figures 1, la, 2.

Body large and stout, only moderately elongated in extension ;
back convex, sides well rounded, lower surface flattened. The bodj-
is very changeable in form and can contract into a short, thick,

A. E. Verrill — Marine N'emerteuns of Nero England, etc. 391

oblong mass ; the posterior end is often the broadest part, but
frequently in extension the breadth is nearly uniform throughout
most of the length ; posterior end obtuse. Head usually more or
less distinctly delined, often broader than the neck, oblong or ovate
in form, rounded or obtuse in front, nearly always with a conspicu-
ous, pale, angular spot on each side. Ocelli numerous, arranged in
two frontal clusters on the white marginal area, and in two dorsal
groups ; each of the anterior or frontal ones consists of numerous
small ocelli arranged in two or more close rows forming an oblong
or crescent shaped cluster close to the antero-lateral margin of the
head ; in some cases each of these clusters is double, consisting of a
larger, outer or lower group and an upper, smaller one ; but these
subordinate clusters are usually more or less blended ; the dorsal
groups are smaller and of fewer ocelli, rounded, and situated at the
postero-dorsal part of the head, close to the ganglions, and usually
on, or just in front of, a narrow whitish line across the neck which
marks the position of the transverse fossje. Proboscis large, covered
with small papillae. Color of body, above, and middle of head
usually deep pui'ple, madder-brown, or purplish brown, sometimes
plum-color, chocolate-brown, reddish brown, and orange-brown ;
sides and lower surface much paler brown, often flesh-color or
pinkish. The head is whitish in front and is almost always con-
spicuously marked with two large angular spots or patches of whitisli
or flesh-color on the sides above ; most frequently these spots are
broad, triangular or trapezoidal, with the apices directed toward the
median line above, but separated by a wide dorsal stripe of dark
color like that of the body ; in other cases the apices of these spots
are more truncated, giving a broad, somewhat squarish form, the
shape varying with the extension of the head; a little back of the
sjjots a narrow angulated white line, corresponding to the transverse
foss;e, crosses the neck, but it is sometimes absent ; in front of the
angular spots there is usually another, more conspicuous, white line
or narrow band across the dark pigment of the head, but this is
sometimes interrupted dorsally and is then represented by a narrow
triangular spot of white on each side of the head ; proboscis, when
protruded, reddish.

Length up to 100 to loO"""' ; diameter G to 8'"" or more.

Massachusetts Bay to Gulf of St. Lawrence, Labrador, Cumber-
land Gulf, and Greenland, Very common and of large size at
low-water mark, under stones, at Eastport, Me., and Grand Meuan,
N. B. I have also dredged it in numerous localities ofi^ Nova Scotia ;
in the Bay of Fundy ; off the coast of Maine ; Casco Bay ; off Cape

392 A. JE. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of Nev; England, etc.

Ann ; off Cape Cod, etc., in 4 to 150 fathoms ; and in the Gulf of
St. Lawrence, 15 fathoms.

This large and conspicuous species is generally easily recognized
by its clear, dark purplish or chocolate-brown color above, with pale
margins and a trapezoidal or triangular white spot on each side of
the head, and usually with a narrow white line across the neck ; and
by the pinkish or flesh-colored lower surface. Ocelli in two or more
rows in an elongated group on each antero-lateral margin of the
head, and a pair of small sub-dorsal clusters on the transverse white
nuchal band.

The Planaria angulata of Otho Fabricius was, without doubt,
based on this species ; but his description being ver}^ brief, writers
have hesitated in regard to this identification. His description of
the characteristic white angular spots on the head, the color, and the
habits could, however, apply to no other known species. The re-
discovery of this species on the coast of Greenland by Levinsen, and
its abundance in Cumberland Gulf, renders it quite certain that
Fabricius had this species before him. Hence I have considered it
necessary to restore his name.

This species and some of the others herein described, e. g. A. fron-
talis, evidently belong to the group for which Dr. Stimpson insti-
tuted the genus Cosmocephala. Among the characters given, the
clusters of ocelli are said to be arranged on the antero-lateral mar-
gins of the head. The cerebral clusters may, perhaps, have been
ovei'looked in at least one species. Dr. Stimpson has described two
North Pacific species that are evidently closely allied to A. angula-
tus, viz :

Amphiporus Beringianus {Cosniocejjhala Beringiana St.) This
was dredged in Bering Straits, in 5 fathoms. It closely resembles a
light-colored variety of A. angnlatiis and may be identical with it.

Amphiporus Japoiiicus (^Cosmocephala Japonica St.) was from
Simoda, Japan, low water, among rocks. It differs more from our
species than does the preceding. It is brown above, with a pale
median line, with irregular pale spots on the head, and triangular
cervical spots of white ; clusters of ocelli are antero-lateral.*

* Prodromus, in Proc. Phil. Acad. Nat. Sci., ix, p. 165, 1857. The extensive col-
lections of invertebrates made by Dr. Stimpson on the North Pacific Kxploring Expe-
dition were nearly all destroyed in the great Chicago fire by which the Museum of the
Chicago Academy of Science was burned. His original notes and drawings were
burned at the same time. His colored figures of the Turbellaria and Xemerteans,
which I had the pleasure of examining not long before the fire, were numerous and
excellent. Had he been able to publish his figures subsequent writers would have
found it easy to identify his new genera and species, briefly described in the Prodromus.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of Neio England^ etc. 393
Amphiporus multisorus A^en-iii, sp. nov.

Plate xxxiii, figure 3.

Body moderately long, versatile. Plead rather wider than the
body, rather short, rounded in front, separated from the body by a
slightly curved transverse fossa on each side. Front ocelli form six
small rounded, submarginal clusters ; three clusters each containing
3 or 4 ocelli, are on each side of the front of the head, arranged par-
allel with the margin ; the posterior ocelli form two roundish, sub-
dorsal clusters, each containing 6 to 8 ocelli, situated near the pos-
terior part of the head, just in front of the pink ganglions.

Color of body, salmon or flesh-color, paler beneath.

Length, in extension, 25 to 35'"™ ; diameter, 3 to 5""". Described
from life.

Eastport, Me., at low water mark, and in 12 fathoms, 1870.

This species, in the form of the body and arrangement of the
ocelli, is closely allied to A. angulatus^ of which I formerly supposed
it a pale variet3^ The very pale colors, total absence of the white
patches on the head, and peculiar grouping of the anterior ocelli are
characters that seem to warrant its separation as a distinct species,
at least until intermediate specimens be discovered,

Amphiporus heterosorus Ven-iu, sp. uov.

Amphiporus roseus {pars) Verrill, Notice of l^eceat Addit. to Mar. Invert., Part T,
in Proc. National Mus., vol. ii, p. 183, 1879. {}wn Milller.)

Plate xxxiv, figures 7, 17.
Body rather stout, rounded, obtuse at each end, versatile. Head
obtuse, usually rather wider than the body. Ocelli numerous, ar-
ranged in a pair of roundish clusters on the posterior part of the
head, and in a pair of triangular clusters at the front; these triangular
clusters, having their bases at the anterior margin of the head, ex-
tend upward and backward to near the middle of the head and end
in an acute apex formed by a few ocelli, larger and more distinct
' than the rest. The posterior groups are smaller, wide apart, and
distinctly separated from the anterior ones. A pair of shallow trans-
verse fossse, on the posterior part of the head, runs upward in line
with the posterior groups of ocelli. Anterior fossce were not noticed.
Proboscis clavate in extension, large and long, equal to more than
half the length, and about one-half the diameter of the body, finely
papillose toward the end, and light brownish red in color.

Color of body, above, cherry-red, clear reddish brown, or light
chocolate-brown ; the sides and ventral surface flesh-color ; a dark,
medial, longitudinal line on the head.

394 A. E. ^^errill — Marine N^emerteans of Kew England, etc.

Length, in extension, 30'"'" to 50'""^ ; diameter 3""" to 5'""' ; length
of proboscis, in extension, 25""" ; diameter i-o"^"^ (Xo. 5).

The specimens described above, from life, were taken off Cape
Ann, Stat. 136 (U. S. F. C), in 26 fath., sand, 1878. Eastport,
Me. ; Bay of Fundy ; Gulf of Maine ; Casco Bay ; Massachusetts
Bay ; off Cape Cod ; common in 10 to 200 fathoms, on muddy and
sandy bottoms.

Amphiporus tetrasorus Ven-iii, sp. nov.

Plate xxxiv, figure 6.

Body very changeable, in extension roundish, I'ather thick, taper-
ing but little, obtuse at both ends. Head as wide as body, usually
obtuse or subtruncated in front, separated from the body by conspicu-
ous transverse fossae which curve upward and forward on each side;
on the under side of the head these fossfe run forward, on each side,
to the mouth. Ocelli nvimerous, forming two oblique, oblong, nearly
parallel clusters on each side, the posterior ones just in front of, and
parallel with, the transverse fossae.

Color of body, above, chocolate-brown, darker medially ; head, in
front of eyes, white ; body, beneath, whitish.

Length, 26 to 30""" ; diameter, 2"^"". The specimen described
above, from life, was dredged at Station 132 (U. S. Fish Com.), off
Cape Ann, Mass., in 45 fathoms, mud, July, 187^8.

Amphiporus lactifloreuS (Johnston) Mcintosh.

Plavaria Inctiflorea Johnston, Zool. Journal, vol. iii, p. 489, 1828.

Nemertes lacUfiorea Johnston, Mag. Zool. and Bot., vol. i, p. 5.35, pi. xvii, f. 2 and ?,,

1837.
Borlasia alba W. Thompson, Ann. Nat. Hist., vol. xv, p. 320 (with woodcut), 18-45.
Polm mandilla Quati;efages, Ann. des sc. nat , 3""' ser., Zool , torn, vi, p. 203, tab. 8,

figs. 1 and la, and tab. 9, fig. 2, 1846.
Nemertes mandilla Diesing, Syst. Helm., vol. i, p. 274, 1850.
Omafoplea mutabilis Diesing, op. cit., p. 262, 1850.
Omatoplea rosea Johnston, Catalogue P>rit. Mus., p. 23, plate na, f. 2, 2*, 2**, 3,

and 3* 18G5.
Omatoplea alba .Johnston, op. cit., p. 23, 1865.
Amj)hiporus laclifloreus Mcintosh, British Annelids, Part I, Nemerteans, p. 156,

plate 1, figs. 1 and 2, 1873; Jensen. Turbellaria ad Lit. Norvegije, p. 80, 1878.
Amvhiporus laclifloreus Verrill, Notice of Recent Addit. to Mar. Invert., Part 1, in

Proc. National Mus., ii. p. 184. 1879.

Plate xxxix, figures 7, 7a.

Body rather elongated, roundish above and on the margins, flat-
tened l)eneath, of nearly uniform breadth fi'om the head to near

A. E. Yerrill — Marine N'emerteans of New England, etc. 395

the posterior end. Head often somewhat expanded, a little flat-
tened, obtuse or subacute in front according to state of extension.
Ocelli form, on each side of head, a nearly simple submarginal row-
on the antero-latei'al part, and beliind the ends of each of these
rows there is a small cluster of about three or four ocelli on each
side, near the ganglions.

Color dull white, grayish, or pale flesh-color, often with a darker
stripe along the back due to the proboscis-sheath; along the margins,
especially beneath, the lateral sacs of the alimentary canal are
often visible. Length 50 to 75"'™; diameter 4 to 6'"'", in extension.
Eastport, Me., and Grand Menan, N. B., at low-water mark, under
stones.

This species, which is here referred, with some doubt, to the
European form, is not uncommon on the shores of the Bay of
Fundy.

Amphiporus roseus (MiiUei).

Fasciola rosea 0. F. Miiller, Verm, terrest. et fluv. hist., i, 2, p. 58, 1774.

Planaria rosea Miiller, Zool. Danic. Prodr., p. 221, NTo. 2679, 1776; Zool. Danic,

vol. ii, p. 31, tab. 64, fig. 1 and 2, 1788.
Nemertes pulchra Johnston, Mag. Zool. and Bot , vol. i, p. 5.T6, pi. xvn, fig. 6, 18.'?7.
Polystemma roseum CErsted, Kroyer's Nat. Tidss., vol. iv, p. 579, 181^7.
Polysteinma pulchruTTL (Ersted, op. cit., p. 580, 1837.
Omafoplea rosea {pars) Diesing, Syst. Helm., vol. i, p. 251, 1850.
Omatoplea pukhra Diesing, op. cit., p. 252, 1850.
Ommatoplea pulrhra Johnston, Catalogue Brit. Mus., p. 24, pi. iia, fig. 6 and 6*,

1865.
Amphipor-us pulcher Mdnt., British Annelids, Part I, N'emerteans, p. 158, pi. i, fig.

3; PL. XIT, fig. 11, 1873.

Plate xxxiv, figures 5, 5a, 5fe.

Body rather stout, not much elongated, tapering somewhat to
both ends. Head usually broader than the body, ovate in exten-
sion, obtuse in front, separated from the body by a slightly marked,
curved, transverse groove or fossa on each side. Ocelli numerous,
arranged somewhat in four groups, the anterior pair lateral or sub-
marginal, the posterior subdorsal; the anterior clusters form long,
crescent-shaped groups or nearly simple rows on each side, running
somewhat parallel with the antero-lateral margins of the head, but
curving inward posteriorly, so that their posterior ends nearly meet
on the median dorsal surface; the two posterior groups, which are
opposite the hinder portion of the crescents and nearer the postero-
lateral margins of the head, have an irregular I'oundish or ovate

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 52 June, 1892.

396 A. E. Verrill — Marine JVemerteans of New England, etc.

form and are often almost united to the front groups by a few
ocelli scattered between them.

Color of body, above, clear orange-red, paler beneath.
Length of the specimen described above, from life, 18 to 20"'"';
breadth 5"'™. Massachusetts Bay to Bay of Fundy, in various local-
ities, low- water to 112 fathoms. The specimens above described
were taken at station 38, 1877, in 112 fathoms, off Grand Menan,

Amphiporus OChracens Verrill, Check List Invert., 1879.

Cosmocephala ochracea Verrill, Invert, of Vineyard Sound, etc., pp. .^1, 336, pi.
XIX, figs. 95, 95ff, 1873.

Plate xxxiii, figures 5, 6; Plate xxxtx, figure 8.

Body elongated, moderately slender, somewhat flattened, but
thick, with the margins rounded, obtuse at both ends, or subacute
posteriorly ; broadest and often swollen anteriorly; gradually and

Fig. 2. Amphiporus ochraceus. Head and part of body, to show ocelli, enlarged.

sliglitly tapering posteriorly; the integument is translucent and the
internal organs show quite distinctly ; lateral (saccular) organs
voluminous, extending nearly the whole length of the body along each
side, and showing through as dull yellowish white mottlings. Head
usually ovate, slightly wider than the body, obtuse; a slight fossa
or groove, usually appearing as a whitish line on each side, runs
obliquely across the ventral and lateral surface of the head, diverg-
ing from the mouth and curving somewhat forward and upward at
the sides; another, less distinct, is situated farther forward on each
side of the head. Proboscis-pore small and inconspicuous in con-
traction; mouth, small. Ocelli numerous, but varying somewhat in
number; the anterior ones form a submarginal curved row along
each side of the head, anteriorly, but curve inward farther back ;
just back of these, on each side, there are usually four distinct pos-
terior ocelli, standing two by two, obliquely. Color dull yellowish,
or yellowish white, often tinged with deeper yellow or orange ante-
riorly, with the median line lighter ; the position of the cephalic
ganglions is shown by faint reddish spots between the posterior
groups of ocelli.

Length, 50'"™ to VO'""'; breadth, 2-5'""' to 3"'"'.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of Neio Migland, etc. 397

The proboscis is large and thick (PL xxxix, fig. 8). The central
stylet (PI. xxxiii, fig. 5a) has a rather narrow, oblong shaft,
rounded at the base, and with broad basal alfe; the two lateral sacs
usually contain only two stylets each.

Common between tides and in tide pools, under stones and creep-
ing among algie, hydroids, bryozoa, etc., on the piles of wharves
and other similar places. Also dredged frequently in 2 to 20
fathoms, on stony or shelly bottoms, ofi: New Haven, Conn. ;
Thimble Islands; Noank, Conn.; Newport, R. I.; Woods Holl,
Mass.; also dredged at numerous other localities in Long Island
Sound and Vineyard Sound. North of Cape Cod it is less abund-
ant, but I have dredged it at manj" stations, at moderate depths, in
Massachusetts Ba3^ It also occurred between tides on the north
shore of Cape Cod, at Provincetown and Barnstable, Mass.

Amphiporus glutinosus Verriii.

Polina ghdinosa Verrill, Invert. Animals of Vineyard Sound, etc., p. .337, plate xix,
fig. 97, 1873.

Plate xxxv, figure 5.

Body rather slender and elongated in extension, usually broadest
in the middle and tapering to both ends, but quite versatile in
form; head not distinct, usually obtuse ; posterior end narrower,
usually obtuse or slightly emarginate; integument soft, secreting a
large quantity of mucus; the lateral organs extend close to the head.
Ocelli numerous, variable in number, usually eight or ten on each

Fig. 3. AmpJiiporus glutinosus. Outline, enlarged.

side, arranged in three pairs of short, oblique, divergent rows, two
to four in each; proboscis-pore moderately large terminal; no lateral
fossa? were observed. Color dull yellow or pale orange-yellow,
sometimes brighter orange, especially anteriorly; posteriorly usually
lighter, with a faintly marked dusky or greenish median line.

Length, 25""" to 30'"'" in extension; breadth, 1-3'"'" to 2""". 'Great
Egg Harbor, N. J., to New Haven, Conn., and Wood's Holl, Mass.;
low- water mark to 6 fathoms, usually among hydroids and bryozoa.

398 A. M Verrill — 3farine JVemerteans of New England, etc.
Amphiporns griseus (Stimp.) Verriii.

Polina grisea Stimp., Proclromus, iu Proc. Philad. Acad. Nat. Sci., vol. ix, p. 164,
1857.

Body rather long, a little depressed, sub-cylindrical in extension,
pale gray in color. Head distinct, ovate, or subcordate, narrower
than the body, acute in front. Anterior clusters of ocelli larger,
elongated, partly submarginal on the antero-lateral margin of the
head; ocelli ten in each cluster. Posterior clusters cervical, small,
linear, with four ocelli in each.

Length 0'8 inch; breadth 0-04 inch.

In the harbor of Norfolk, Va., sublittoral, among algie in muddy
places.

The above is a translation of Dr. Stimpson's Latin diagnosis.
The species appears to be closely allied to A. glutinosus.

Amphiporus frontalis Yen-ill, sp. nov.

Plate xxxiv, figures 1, la, \h, 8.

Body large, versatile in form, rather elongated, convex above, but
somewhat depressed in extension, of nearly uniform breadth to near
the ends, which are obtuse. Head in extension usually broader than
the neck and separated by a slight constriction, usually longer than
broad, but it may shorten into short ovate or broad rounded forms;
front margin often emarginate, A well-marked, but shallow, ob-
lique, transverse, ciliated fossa at the posterior border of the head,
on each side, curves inward and usually somewhat forward, but
does not reach the middle line; in some states of contraction these
fossae curve backward ; underneath, the fossae run very oblicpiely
backward and inward, when the head is extended. Near the front
of the head, on each side, a short curved fossa runs inward and
curves forward, nearly parallel with the posterior ones, beneath
the head they curve inward and backward but they recede in a
V-shaped curve on each side of the head. Ocelli rather large and
conspicuous, blackish, arranged in a single irregular cluster, or
double row, of six to eight or more, on each side of the front and
near the margin of the head. Mouth close to the proboscis-pore.

Color translucent white, or pale gray, or yellowish, with a darker
dorsal band ; sides of body mottled with pale pink or yellowish,
due to the internal organs.

A vai'iety taken at Eastport, Me., at low water, 1868, was trans-
lucent pale salmon, or flesh-color, mottled laterally with purplish
and yellowish, due to the internal organs, while the median dorsal

A. K Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of.N'ew Ewfland^ etc. 399

region was greenish, apparently due to the contents of the intestine.
Ocelli about 10 in each cluster.

Length, in extension, 100"""; diameter 3'""".

Length 25 to 125"'"^; breadth about 3 to 5"'"\ An individual 5
inches long can contract to less than 2 inches.

Eastport, Maine, low water, 1868 and 1870.

Amphiporus meSOSOrUS Verrill, sp. nov.

Plate xxxiv, figure 9.

Body not much elongated, rather thick, well-rounded. Head of
the same breadth as the neck, obtuse in front. Posterior transverse
fossje rather shallow and indistinct. Ocelli numerous, forming a
large, irregular, somewhat triangular cluster on each side of the
middle of the head, the apex of the groups pointing backward
toward the ganglions. In some cases these clusters seem to consist
of two rather roundish cerebral groups, which blend with two short,
triangular lateral groups.

Color above, bright red; beneath, liesh-color. Length 50""";
breadth 3""".

Massachusetts Bay, off Salem, Aug. 13, 1877, station 30 (three
specimens)

Amphiporus cruentatUS Verrill, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. ii, p. 184,

1879.

Plate xxxiii, figures 7, 8, 8a; Plate xxxv, figure 3; Plate xxxix, figure 9.

A species peculiarly characterized by having red blood, so that
the longitudinal vessels appear distinctly red through the translu-
cent integument. Body soft, flaccid, versatile, in full extension
slender, tapering to both ends, but capable of becoming thicker and
obtuse or even swollen posteriori}'-, and of contracting into a short
stout form. Head not very distinct, scarcely broader than the
neck, snout strongly ciliated. Ocelli about 8 to 12 on each side
of the head, in a simple, interrupted, longitudinal, sublateral row,
the most anterior ocellus distinctly the largest. Two slight trans-
verse grooves on each side of the head, apparently not extending
across the dorsal side, the anterior ones curving forward in front
of, and the posterior ones behind the ganglia. Proboscis long,
densely covered with elongated, conical papilla?, ; &. simple central
stylet, with two small, pin-shaped lateral ones on each side (PI. xxxix,
fig. 9).

400 A. E. Verrill — Marine JVemerteans of Nevi England, etc.

Color light flesh-color or yellowish white with conspicuous bright
red median and lateral blood-vessels.

Length 25™'° to 40™'".

Vineyard Sound, 4 to 10 fathoms; off Newport, R. I., 3 to 8
fathoms. Not very common.

AmphiporUS Virescens Vernll, Proc. Nat. Mus., p. 183, 1875.
Nemertes, sp. undet. (c) Yerrill, Invert. Vineyard Sd., p. 335, 1873.

Plate .xxxiii, figures 4, 4fl, 45, 4c, 4f7, 4e.
Body, in extension, broadest anteriorly, rather depressed, long,
slender, tapering gradually to the rather attenuated posterior end.
Active in its movements. Head changeable in form, rather large,
in expansion usually ovate, broader than the body, depressed, and
obtusely rounded in front. A pair of faintl}'^ marked, nearly trans-
verse f ossfe runs up on each side .of the posterior part of the head,
crossing the rows of ocelli; farther forward and parallel with these
there is another pair of similar furrows that cross the eye- patches,
and beneath the head curve forward to the mouth. Ocelli numer-
ous, forming a long lateral cluster on each side of the head; ante-
riorly each cluster consists of three or more rows, but backward the
interior rows cease, finally leaving only the outer row, which ex-
tends back beyond the head and neck. Proboscis in partial exten-
sion clavate and covered with prominent papillae ; central stylet
with an oblong shank, which in one mounted specimen is light
greenish blue, together with the transverse, pigmented band near it.
Color clear light green, varying in tint.

Length of largest specimen seen, about 40""". New Haven and
Noank, Conn.; Newport, R. I.; Wood's Holl, Mass., etc. Common
in shallow water among hydroids and ascidians, and on the piles
of wharves between tides.

Amphiporus agilis VerriU.

Ophionemertes agilis Verrill. Am. Jour. Science, vii, p. 45, pi. 1, fig. 1, 1873; Vpr-
rill, Expl. of Casco Bay, in Proc. Amer. Assoc, for 1873, p. 389, pi. 2, fig. 4.

Amphiporus agilis Verrill, Notice of Recent Addit. to Mar. Invert , Part I, in Proc.
National Mus., ii, p. 183, 1879.

Plate \.\.\v, figure 4.
Body versatile, slender and elongated in extension, slightly de-
pressed, with the sides well rounded, thickest in the middle, taper-
ing gradually to the slender, obtuse posterior end. Head some-
what separate from, and wider than, the anterior part of the body,
changeable in form, often oval, sometimes sub-triangular, generally

A. K Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of Neio England, etc. 401

longer than broad, narrowed anteriorly, obtuse or slightly emar-
ginate, with a terminal proboscis-pore. Ocelli numerous, forming

Fig. 4. Amphiporus agilis. Outline, enlarged.

a long, crowded, lateral row or group along each side of the head;
the rows are simple and convergent anteriorly, posteriorly they
become broader and double. Back of the ocelli there is a curved
transverse groove or fossa, crossing the back of the head. No
anterior fossoe were observed. Color pale ocher-yellow ; median
dorsal line slightly reddish ; the internal lateral organs lighter
yellow, giving a reticulated appearance to the sides.

Length 25™"' to 40""'; diameter 1-5"'™ to 2™"\ Described from
life (No. 546).

Casco Bay, 20 to 65 fathoms; Bay of Fundy, 10 to 90 fathoms;
Massachusetts Bay and off Cape Cod, 12 to 60 fathoms.

This species is very active and restless. It creeps with a rapid
gliding motion, frequently moving its head from side to side, and
in confinement is apt to creep above the edge of the water and
perish by drying up. It secretes mucus abundantly and forms
tubes of that material. It also creeps on the surface of the water,
back downward, like most of the species of Tetrasternma, which it
closely resembles in habits.

AmphiporuS bioCUlatUS ? Mcintosh.

Plate xxxiv, figures 3, 4, 15.

Body rarely more than 1*5 inches long, soft, changeable in form,
in extension usually rather short and thick, roundish, tapering only
slightly toward the ends, which are usually obtuse ; the posterior
region is sometimes broader; head not wider than the l)ody, not
distinctly defined, in extension tapering to the front end, which is
usually subacute ; ocelli two, forming a pair, close together and
near the front margin of the head. A pair of small, rather faint,
anterior transverse fosste passes upward and forward on the sides
of the head, just back of the eyes, usually showing only as pale
lines, apparently not meeting dorsally.

Color dark orange-red, varying to pale orange and salmon, with
paler margins and ventral surfaces and usually with darker brown-
ish mottlings along the sides posteriorly, due to the internal organs;

402 A. E. Yerrill — Marine N'emertecms of N'eic England, etc.

the large proboscis-sheath and proboscis can often be seen indis-
tinctly along the median dorsal region.

Length, in extension, about 35 to 40""" ; diameter 2*5 to 3-5'"™.

Length of a specimen from station 811, in 19 fathoms, 18 to 20"^"^;
diameter 1-25 to 2"^™.

Proboscis large ; its armature consists of a slender central stylet
having an elongated, narrow, oblong or cylindrical shaft, sur-
rounded by a small dark-colored basal expansion. Below the stylet
there is a dark pigmented transverse band. Described from living
specimens.

Long Island Sound, near New Haven, etc. ; Fisher's Island Sound ;
and Vineyard Sound, in I to 10 fathoms, not uncommon. Noank,
Conn., in harbor mud, IBH. Off Block I., 19 fath., sand, (Sta. 811).

Amphiporus CaeCUS Verrill, sp. nov.
Nemertesf, sp. undet. (a), Invert, of Vineyard Sound, etc., p. 335, 1873.
Plate xxxiv, figures 2, 2a, 26, 2c.

Body soft, oblong, flattened, obtuse at both ends, the edges
rounded. Head not distinctly separated from the body and of the
same breadth ; a faint whitish groove crosses the neck, receding in
the middle above, and extends around on each side to the ventral
surface, on which it advances in the middle, or runs directly across,
according to the state of contraction. No ocelli. The cephalic
ganglions can usually be seen through the integument of the head,
especially on the lower side, as reddish spots.

Color bright orange-red; lighter orange-yellow along the sides;
usually with a median dorsal stripe of darker red.

Length, in extension, 35 to 40™"'; diameter 2*5 to 3™"\ Described
from living specimens.

North of Block Island, 18 to 20 fathoms, Aug. C, 1874.

Amphiporus CSeCUS Young.

Body verj' slender. Head acute. Ocelli none. Proboscis with a
central stylet having a narrow oblong shaft and expanded base,
much as in that of A. ochraceus; lateral stylets not obsei'ved, per-
haps wanting.

Color pale yellowish white, with the head red.

Length about 6 to 7"^™.

Station 812, in 28 fathom.s, sand. Off Block Island, 1880,

A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of JVeto Enqland, etc. 403
Amphiporus thallius Verriu.

AmpMporus sp., Verrill, Bulletin U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 15, p. 143, 1879 (with
description).

Body, as preserved in alcohol, thick, not very long, somewhat
depressed, tapered a little to both ends, which are obtuse. Head
not very distinct, of the same width as the body; transverse foss?e
at back part of head not very distinct, running back obliquely on
each side, so as to form a V-shaped line on the middle above.
Ocelli minute, arranged in a small roundish cluster on each side,
on the pale antero-lateral margins.

Color, in alcohol, dark bluish green above ; under surface and
margins of head yellowish white. In life " bright pea-green "
(Kumlin). Length, in alcohol, 25 to 30"'"; diameter 4 to 5""".

Cumberland Gulf, N. lat. 66°, October 4, 1887; Arctic Island, at
low water, Sept. 13, 1877 (Kumlin coll.).

The very peculiar and strongly marked color, which persists for
years in alcoholic specimens, appears to be characteristic of this
species.

Amphiporus (?) superbus Verrill.

Nareda superha Girard, in Stimpson, Invert. Grand Menan, p. 28, pi. 2, fig. 17, 1853.
Plate xxxiy, figure 16.

This species was dredged oif Grand Menan in 40 fathoms by Dr.
Wm. Stimpson. The description by Girard was evidently based on
the drawing furnished him by Dr. Stimpson, and could not have
furnished anything more than the external appearance. I have
reproduced the original figure, somewhat reduced by photography.
The original description is as follows:

"Nareda Grd."

"Body elongated, subcylindrical. Head obtusely triangular in
front, neck slightly contracted; one pair of rounded ocelli."

" iV! SMjt>er5a Grd. — Length from one to two inches; body pos-
teriorly attenuated ; head forming an equilateral triangle ; the base
of which is at the contracted neck. Color above uniform soft red;
head margined by a narrow band of white. The neck is also
marked by a transverse band of white, on which the eyes are situ-
ated, far apart. Below white. Dredged in thirty-five fathoms, in
the Hake Bay."

The only character mentioned which could have been considered
as of generic value is the presence of two eyes (?) on the white

Tbans. Conx. Acad., Vol. VIII. 53 June, 1892.

404 A. JE. Verrill—3Iarine Ntinerteans of Neto England, etc.

nuchal band. But it is much more probable that those spots repre-
sented either the cephalic ganglions, which usually show themselves
in that position in this group, or else clusters of small ocelli.

In the latter case there may also have been small anterior ocelli
that were overlooked. Either supposition is consistent with its sup-
posed relation to the known species of Ariq^Jdporus with many of
which it agrees in form.

Although I have spent })art of several summers dredging in the
region of Grand Menan, and have dredged even in the same locality
where this species was obtained, I have never met with a Nemer-
tean that could be referred to the same species with certainty, even
after making allowances for errors in the original drawing. The
nearest approach to it that I have seen, is a red variety of A. angii-
latus in which the angular pale spots on the sides of the head are
nearly obsolete, and the front ocelli inconspicuous. I have, there-
fore, reproduced the original description and figure.

Tetrastemma Ehrenberg, 1831.

Folia {parb) Quatr , Ann. des sci. nat., vol. vi, 1846.

(Erstedia Quatr., op. cit, p. 22! ; Dies., Syst. Helm , vol. i, p. 2-J7 {aon lluhreclit).

Tetrastemma Diesing, Syst. Helm., vol. i, p. 2.'JG, 1850; ytiuipsoii, Prodroiiius, in

Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad , p. 163 [19], 1853.
Nemertes {pars) Dies., Syst. Helm., vol. i, p. 269, 1850.

Body rather small, moderately elongated, often nearl}' terete.
Head in some species wider than neck, but in many species of the
same breadth. Transverse fossae usually two on each side of the
head, more or less oblique. Ocelli four, arranged in a quadrangle.
Proboscis Avith a central stylet and two lateral chambers, each
usually containing two to four stylets.

A terrestrial species of Tetrastemma ( 7\ agricola) has been
described from the Bermudas by Moseley. Fresh water species of
the same, or a closely allied genus, are also known.

Tetrastemma candidtim. (Fabr.) (Ersted.

? Fasciula Candida 0. Fabr. in 0. F. Miiller, Yerm. terreyt. et fiuv. hist., I, ii, p. 71,

1774.
?Planana Candida 0. Fahr. in 0. F. Miiller, Zool. Dan. Prodr., p. 223, No. 2704,

1776; 0. Fabricius, Fauna Groenlandica, p. 327, 1780.
Planaria quadriocutata (pars) Johnston, Zool. Jour., vol. iv, p. 56, 1829.
Nemertes quadriocidata Johnston, Mag. Zool. and Bot., vol. i, p. 535, pi. xvu, fig. 4,

1837.
Tetrastemma varicolor (pars) (Ersted, Kroyer's Naturhist. Tidss., iv, p. 575, 1837;

Diesing, Syst. Helm., vol. i, p. 257, 1850.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of New England, etc. 405

Tetrastem7na grcenlandicum Diesiug-, op. cit., p. 259.

Tetraslemma Candida Mcintosh, British Annelids, Part I, Nemerteans, p. 167, pi. ii,
figs. 2, 3, 1873 (non Diesingr, Syst.); Levinsen, Groenlands Turbell, p. 39 [200],
1879; Verrill, Amer. Jour. Sci , vol x, p. 40, 1875; Check List, 1879.

PL.4.TE XX.XIII, FIGURES 9, 10, lOft; PL.\TE XXXV, FIGURES 9, 10.

Body very contractile, in extension slender, elongated, somewhat
depi-essed, tapering backward and often attenuated toward the
posterior end. Head in usual extension rather wider than the body.
Ocelli rather large, conspicuous, reddish brown, nearly in a square,
but when the head is fully extended, the two pairs are farther apart
than the distance between those of a pair.

Color variable, usually pale green, greenish white, or yellowish
white, translucent, and generally with indistinct lateral grayish
mottling, due to the internal organs; sometimes the intestinal area
is decidedly greenish, while the sides are pale yellow ; at other
times the median region is whitish and the sides pale green.
Several specimens, taken at Eastport, Me., in South Bay, 8 to 10
fathoms, mud, 1868, were clear cream color above, whitish below.

Length in extension 25 to 32™"^; diameter 1 to 2'""".

Common at many localities between tides, among alg?e, hydroids,
and bryozoa from New Haven, Conn., to the Bay of Fundy. Also
dredged at moderate depths, 1 to 14 fathoms, in many localities.

This species is very active ; it creeps rapidly with a gliding
motion. The relatively larger size of the head, more conspicuous
eyes, and lighter colors, as contrasted with the following species, are
its most distinctive characters.

It seems to me very doubtful whether the Planarki Candida of
Fabricius was this species. The large size and the habits given by
him, and lack of mention of the eyes are against that view. His
species may have been Amphi-iw^-us lactifloreus, a Greenland species.

Tetrastemma Candida. Variations.

Several specimens of the variety figured on |)late xxxtii, figs. 10,
10a, were taken on the piles of the wharves at Gloucester, Mass.,
July 24, 1878. These were probably not full grown. The body
was 8 to 12"'"" long, in extension, slender, very changeable, usually
of nearly uniform breadth to near the ends. Head obtuse and
usually a little wider than the body, but very changeable in shape;
when extended the ocelli were farther apart longitudinally than
transversely, but when the head contracted, as in progression, the
two paii's of ocelli were broiight near together', as' shown in the

406 A. E. Yerrill — Marine Nemerteans of Neio England, etc.

figures. The form and direction of the two pairs of rather indis-
tinct, transverse cephalic fossae also varied greatly with the changes
in the shape of the head. The two lateral stylet-sacs of the pro-
boscis contained three stylets each.

Color of body, above, pale yellowish green, or pale brown; head
with an opaque, flake-white spot in front of the eyes; along the
margins of the body the internal organs produce series of brownish,
irregular, transverse spots or blotches, varying in depth of color;
alternating with these spots, and so interrupting the marginal dark
bands, there are small, rounded whitish spots, probably due to the
ovaries.

Tetrastemma elegans Vemii.

Tetrastemma elegans Verrill, Amer. .Journ. Sci., vol. x, p. 40, 1875.

? Hedate elegans Girard, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol, iv, p. 186, 1852.

Plate x.xxiv, figure 10.

Body, in extension, longer and more slender than most species of

the genus, depressed, broadest in the middle, tapering both ways.

Head ovate, broader than the neck, obtuse or emarginate in front;

lateral fossa? not very distinct. Ocelli conspicuous, nearly in a

Fig. 5. Tetrastemma ekyans. Dorsal view.

square, the front pair rather nearer together than the others. Color
above, striped with two broad brown lateral, and a wide median,
yellow stripe; the median stripe is clearly defined, clear light yellow
and occupies about a fourth of the breadth of the back; it extends
to the front of the head, becoming narrow on the neck and then
expanding on the middle of the head; a narrow ring of light yellow
surrounds the neck, just behind the head; the two stripes of dark
brown are well defined, but have irregular margins and are varied
in color by paler specks ; lower surface and margins of body and
head pale yellow.

Length 20™™; breadth 1 to l-5'""\ Described from life.

Noank, Conn., among eel-grass ; Fisher's Island Sound, 2 to S
fathoms; Wood's Holl, Mass., on piles of wharf.

A paler vai'iety occurs in which the lateral bands are lighter
brown, interrupted by yellowish spots, and the dorsal stripe is less
clearly defined."

A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of Neio England, etc. 407
Tetrastemma vermiculus (Quatr.) stimpson.

Polia vermiculus Quatrefap:es, Ann. des sc. nat., ser. Ill, Zool., vol. vi, p. 214, 184G;

Voyage en Sicilie, vol. ii, p. 12G, pi. xiv, figs. 12, 13, 1849.
Nernertes vermiculus Diesing, Syst. Helm., vol. i, p. 270, 1850.
Tetrastemma vermiculus Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad, vol. ix, p. 1G3 (19),

1857 ; Diesing, Revis der Turbell., p. 290, 1862.
Tetrastemma vermictila Mcintosh, British Annelids. Part I, Nemerteans, p. 169,

Plate HI, fig. 3, 1873.
Tetrastemma vermicuhts Verrill, Notice of Regent Addit. to Mar. Invert., Part I, in

Proc. National Mus., ii, p. 184, 1879; Check List, 1879.

Plate xxxiii, figures 11 to lie; plate xxxiv, figures 11, 12; plate xxxt,

FIGURES 8, 11.

Body versatile, rather slender in extension, obtuse at both ends;
sometimes tapered to the posterior end, but more often of nearly
uniform diameter. Ocelli conspicuous, the two pairs i-ather far
apart when the head is extended, those on the same side farther
separated than those of a single pair, and connected by a dark line
of pigment, which is rarely absent.

Color rather variable; above, often pale yellowish, or pale salmon,
or translucent yellowish gray, more or less specked or spotted, espe-
cially along the sides, with brown, often leaving a paler, wide,
rather indefinite dorsal stripe ; ventral surface and front of head
pale.

Length, in extension, about 20™™; breadth 1""°. Described from
life.

Many specimens taken at Wood's Holl in the mud of Little Hai'-
bor, .Tuly 25th, 1881, and August 4th, 1882, varied from dull orange-
yellow to bright greenish 3^ellow, more or less covered with specks
of brown, especially on the sides, yet not forming a definite dorsal
stripe, but with a darker brownish, often indistinct stripe on each
side of the head between the eyes.

Length up to 18 to 20'""'.

Yoimg — several young specimens of this species were taken
together in a tide-pool, in 18*78 (No. 12).

Body slender, of nearly the same width throughout. Ocelli con-
spicuous, the two pairs more widely separated than usual when tlie
head is extended ; the front ones a little larger than tlie others.
Color translucent pale yellow, bright salmon, and flesh-color, usuallv
with a white median spot in front of the anterior ocelli, and some-
times, also, with other white specks along the back; frequently an
irregular brownish band runs along each side of the back; median
line paler. Li many of the specimens a faint longitudinal line of

408 A. E. Verrill — 3farine JSfemerteans of N'ev England, etc.

dark brown pigment specks runs between the ocelli on each side.
In one example the median region, posteriorly, Avas green probably
from the contents of the intestine showing through the integument.

Gloucester, Mass., at Ten Pound Island, in a tide-pool at low-
water, among algse.

This European species is common among hydroids, bryozoa, ascid-
ians, etc., between tides, on rocks, piles of wharves, and in tide-
pools, from Long Island Sound to the Bay of Fundy. I have, also,
often dredged it in 2 to 12 fathoms, at various localities on hard
bottoms. It is especially abundant among ascidians in Vineyard
Sound, in 6 to 10 fathoms. Very common at Noank, Conn., in the
harbor, on muddy bottoms among eel-grass. Common in similar
places and on piles of wharves, at Wood's PIoll, Mass., and Newport,
R. I.

Tetrastemma vermiculus, variety catenulatum uov.
Plate xxxiv, figure 12; plate x.vxv, figure 11.
Form and size essentially as above described. Ground-color,
at>ove, light salmon, pale yellow, or yellowish gray, thickly covered
along the sides with irregular specks, spots, or blotches of brown,
which at moi-e or less irregular intervals extend upward toward or
across the middle line, interrupting the median dorsal light stripe,
which is often thus divided into a series of irregular oblong or
elliptical spots; sometimes there is also a row of small brown spots
along the median line; middle of head pale, often with flake- white
specks; stripe of dark color, more or less distinct, between the two
eyes of each side ; lower surface pale yellow or yellowish white.
Length up to 18"""; diameter 1""". Described from life. Specimens
of this marked variety are common in the harbor at Wood's Holl,
Mass.

Other specimens, from the same locality, were noted as follows:
Body very changeable, often, in extension, narrow or sub-acute at
both ends and more or less swollen in the middle, at one or more
places, at other times nearly cylindrical or terete. Color pale
vellowish or grayish green, with a darker central line on the pale
dorsal stripe and with irregular, transverse, lateral markings. Or
specks of darker brown are scattered over the back, and are often
arranged in imperfect lateral stripes, leaving a paler, wide, more or
less irregular and interrupted median stripe; lower surface pale.
Ocelli reddish brown, forming nearly a square. Usually a line of
dark pigment connects the two ocelli of the same side (No. 857).

A. JS. Verrill — Marine Nernerteans of New England^ etc. 409
Tetrastemma dorsale (Abiidgaard) Mclut.

Planaria dorsalis Abiidgaard, Zool. Danic, vol. iv, p. 25, tab. 142, figs. 1-3, 1806.
Tetrastemma fuscum (Ersted, Kroyer's Natiirhist. Tidss., iv, p. 575, 1844.
(Erstedia maculata Quatr., Ana. Sci. Nat., ser. Ill, vol. vi, p. 222, pi. viii, fig. 2.
Tetrastemma marmoratum Claparede, Beobach. iiber Anat. u. Entwickluiig., etc., p.

24, pi. v, fig. 14, 1863 (variety).
Tetrastemma variegatuvi Johnston, Catalogue Brit. Mus , pp. 20 and 289, 1865.
Tetrastemma dorsalis Mcintosh, British Annelids, Part 1, Nernerteans, p. 172. pi. i,

fig. 4; pi. Ill, fig. 4, 1873; Verrill, Check List, 1879.
Tetrastemma dorsale Jensen, Turb. ad Litoria NorvegitTj, p. 81, pi vui, figs. 9 to 12,

1878.

Plate xxxiv, figures 13, 14.

Body only moderately elongated, sub-terete, usually nearly cylin-
drical in extension, with both ends obtuse. Head not wider than
the body, with two rather indistinct transverse fossa3 on each side.
Ocelli forming nearly a square; in full extension more distant longi-
tudinally than transversely. Proboscis-pore a little below the end
of the snout. Proboscis large, when protruded more than three-
foui'ths the length of the body, thickly covered with acute papilloe.

Color variable ; generally brown or dull reddish, with a well
defined light dorsal stripe; or else variegated or mottled with two
or more shades of brown, with or without the dorsal stripe.

Length up to 20"'™; diameter 1-5 to 2""".

Variations. — Among the variations noted in life, are the follow-
ing:—

Several examples were taken together at stations 310 to 313, off
Cape Cod, in 15 to 21 fathoms, 1879.

In these the general color above was brownish, with a conspicu-
ous pale, flesh-colored dorsal stripe, bordered with dark brown on
each side ; the brown lateral stripes were freckled with white
specks; a pale line crosses the neck behind the eyes; front of the
head, margins of the body and tip of the tail pale flesh-color.
PI. XXXIV, fig. 13.

Length 12 to 18"""; diameter 1-5 to 2""".

Other specimens had the following characters :

Body slender, 10'""^ long; 1""" broad. Color cinnamon-brown,
specked with darker brown, and with a pale median line. Ocelli
conspicuous, black. When the head is extended the two pairs are
more distant than the space between those of the same pair. Pro-
boscis large, more than three-fourths as long as the body, thickly
covered with acute, conical papilla?, and protruded from a large
pore, which is sub-ventral. Two slight transverse fossae are seen on
each side of the head.

Broad Sound, Casco Bay, July 22, 1873 (No. 72J).

410 A. E. Verrill — Marine Neinerteans of New JEnigland, etc.

Tetrastemma dorsale, variety marmoratum (Clap).
Plate xxxiv, figure 14.

Body terete, somewhat elongated in extension, obtuse at both
ends. Proboscis large, protruded from the sub-terminal pore,
thickly covered with papilla. Color pale olive-brown, or chestnut-
brown, irregularl}^ mottled and blotched with darker brown.

Length IS'"'"; diameter 1-5'"'". Described from life (No. 735).

Portland, Me., in 2 to 3 fathoms, harbor mud, July 28, 1873.

A paler colored race, probably closely related to this variety, was
taken in the harbor of Eastport, Me., in 12 fathoms, in 1872 (No.
507). The body was chan^able in form, usually nearly cylindrical,
and obtuse at both ends. Ground-color pale yellow or salmon, thickly
blotched and mottled with dark brown, or greenish brown ; some
specimens bad an inconspicuous ring of yellowish white around the
neck. Length 15 to 18'"'"; diameter 1-25 to 2"^'".

Tetrastemma dorsale, variety unicolor A^erriii, nov.

A specimen taken in Eastport Harbor, off Friar's Head, in 18
fathoms, August 20, 1870, agreed, with this species in form but
differed so much in color that it probably ought to be considered
as representing a distinct variety, at least: —

Body moderately slender, slightly depressed, with the sides
rounded. Head obtuse, four distinct black ocelli. Color, above,
uniform dark fuscous brown; lower surface paler.

Another specimen taken in 1879, according to the notes made
from life, probably belongs to the same variety: —

Body moderate in extension, broadest at or behind the middle,
tapering to both ends, not very slender. Ocelli well developed, the
two pairs, when the head is extended, wider apart than the distance
between those of the same pair. A very distinct transverse fossa,
on each side of the head, runs upward and backward just in front
of the posterior ocelli, but the two do not meet on the middle line.

Color of the body, above, clear brown, the margins, head, and
under surface paler.

Length 8"""; breadth 1'"'".

Station 331, off Cape Cod, in 28 fathoms, 1879.

A. M Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of New England, etc. 411
Tetrastemma vittatum Verriii.

American Journal of Science, vol. vii, p. 45, pi. yii, figs. 3, rt, h, 1874; Proc. Amer.
Assoc, for Adv. of Science for 187.-?, p. :^89, pi. ir, figs. 7, 8, 1874; Verrill,
Notice of Recent Addit. to Mar. Invert., Part I, in Proc. National Mus., ii, p.
185, 1879 (not (Ersledia vittata Hubr )

PtATE XXXV, FIGURES 6, 7.

Body rather short and stout, up to 2 or 3 inches in length, soft,
changeahle, in extension nearly cylindrical but often a little flat-
tened beneath, tapering slightly anteriorly, or sometimes both ways,
usually obtuse at the posterior end.

Fig. G. Tetrastemma vittatum ; n, head, dorsal view ; 6, front view, much enlarged.

Head usually slightly narrower than the body, with a transverse
groove or constriction in front of the posterior eyes ; front end
obtuse, conical, or rounded. Ocelli four, small, rather indistinct in
dark colored specimens ; the anterior ones are nearer together than
the posterior, which are far back behind the transverse groove,
which extends across, beneath, and crosses the median line above.
Proboscis-pore terminal.

Color of body, above, dark or light olive-green, dull yellowish
green, or greenish brown, or even greenish black, often with two
yellowish or light green dorsal stripes and sometimes with one
median light stripe ; beneath paler, mottled laterally. Color of
head, in advance of the transverse groove, various shades of olive-
green and dark green, white at the tip, and with six longitudinal
whitish or pale greenish stripes, which converge to the end ; two of
these stripes are dorsal, two are ventral, and one is lateral on each
side; the green line between the two dorsal stripes extends back on
the body. Internal organs show through the integument as irreg-
ular, short, transverse blotches or bars of lighter color along the
sides beneath.

Length in extension usually about 25 to 30™'"; diameter 3 to 4™™;
unusually large examples have been taken as much as 75""" long,
gmm 1,,-oad. Described from life.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 54 June, 1892.

412 A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of New England, etc.

Long Island Sound, Vineyard Sound, Massachusetts Bay, Casco
Bay, Bay of Fundy, etc., low-water mark to 25 fathoms, common
on muddy bottoms. Noank, Conn., in harbor mud, among eel-grass;
Wood's Holl, Mass., harbor mud.

This species is sluggish in its habits and creeps very slowly.

Tetrastemma vittatum. Variations.

Several specimens of this species were taken together at station
310, off Cape Cod, in 21 fathoms, 1879.

These show great variation in the color of the body, which, in
some was flesh-color, in others light olive-green, dark olive, light
greenish brown, dark olive-brown, and dark smoky brown. All
these varieties agree, however, in having the head greenish with
the six light vitta? distinctly marked. In all the specimens the four
ocelli were detected, but they are so indistinct in the dark specimens
that they mnst be sought with care.

The largest specimens were 50 to 75""^ long; diameter np to 6'""\

Tetrastemma roseum Verriii, sp. nov.

Body round and soft, in extension about 1*25 inches long. Head
obtusely conical ; a transverse shallow groove close to the end of
the snout ; the jpart beyond the groove is capable of withdrawing
under the portion behind it. Ocelli obscure; two behind the groove
and (apparently) two very minute ones in front of it. Color clear
bright rosy red.

Length abput 30"""; diameter 3'"'".

Station 826, off Block Island, in 22 fathoms, 1880.

This species was met with only once, and then circumstances pre-
vented a careful study of its structure. In the foi'm of the body
and characters of the head and cephalic grooves it resembles T.
mttatuyn V., and if the front ocelli were correctly noted, would
appear to be closely allied to it and might even be thought to be a
plain red variety, were not that species A'^ery constant in its color
markings, the longitudinal vittre being very characteristic.

Emplectonema stimpson.

Prodronius, in Proc. Philad. Acad. Nat. Sci., vol. ix, p. 164 [20] 1851.
Am2)Mporus ffirsted, Kroyer's Tidds., iv, p. 581, 1844, (? nou Ehr., non Mcintosh).
Nemertes Mcintosh, Nemerteans, p. 176, 1873 (non Cuvier, 1817, non (Ersted, 1844,

no7i Diesing, 1850, nee White, 1850).
Macronemertes Verrill, Atner. Jour. Sci., vol. vi, p. 439, 1873.

A. E. Yevrill — Marine Nemerteans of New England, etc. 413

Body much elongated in extension, sometimes almost filiform, very
contractile, rounded or a little flattened. Head not very distinctly
defined ; in some cases with a pair of longitudinal or oblique, shal-
low, submarginal fossa? on the upper side ; in other cases {E. gracilis)
without evident fossae.

Ocelli variously arranged, often numerous and in several clusters,
both anterior and cerebral.

Proboscis relatively small, especially the anterior portion, which is
much shorter than in Aniphiporus. Mouth usually (always V) separate
from the proboscis-pore.

For this geinus the earliest available name seems to be tliat given
by Stimpson, who named as type E. camillea (Quatr. sp. = E. Neesii
Oersted sp.), which is also the type of the genus Netnertes of Mc-
intosh. The latter name could not be retained in this sense, even if
the genus had not received a prior name, for Nemertes had already
been used for a genus of insects by White in 1850, in addition to
its prior use for several distinct genera of Nemerteans. Had not
Stimpson's generic name been available, 3Iacronemertes would have
been next in order,

Emplectonema giganteum Verrili.

MacroiiKiiierttifi giguntea Verrili, Amer. Journ. Sci., vol, vi, p. 439, pi. 7, tigs. 2, a, b,
1873; Expl. of Casco Bay, lu Proc. Amer. Assoc, for 1873, p. 390, pi. 2, figs.
5, 6, 1873.

PLATE XXXV, FIOURE 2. PLATE XXXVIII, FHiURES 12, 12rt.

Size large. Body much elongated, very contractile ; in extension,
subterete, a little depressed, thickest anteriorly, gradually tapering
posteriorly, becoming very slender and considerably flattened toward
the end. Integument very soft, secreting a large quantity of mucus.
Head not distinct from the body and of the same diameter, obtusely
rounded in front, with a terminal proboscis-pore ; upper surface with
two shallow, indistinct, sublateral, longitudinal fosscC, often becom-
ing more distinct in alcohol ; below with two rather indistinct,
obliquely transverse grooves or fossct".

Ocelli numerous, but not veiy distinct, because deeply buried in
the integument ; they are numerous, arranged in four or more clus-
ters ; a pair of large oval or subtriangular clusters on the antero-
lateral border of the head, each of which may be divided into an
upper and a lower grouj), the u})per part running backward ; a pair
of smaller lateral clusters farther back ; and a pair of small rather
indistinct clusters on the dorsal surface, between the longitudinal
fossfB.

414 A. E. Yerrill — Marine Nemerteans of New England^ etc.

Color, when alive, deep salmon or l)right orange-red, flesh-color
below.

Length of the largest examples, 2 to 3'5 meters, or about 7 to 12
feet, in extension ; diameter, anteriorly, 6 to 8""", or -30 of an inch.

When preserved in alcohol this species soon loses all its color,
contracts greatly in length, and l)ecomes quite hard ; sometimes the
body is considerably flattened, but in most cases it retains its sub-
terete form except toward the posterior end. The head often shows
the shallow, dorso-lateral, longitudinal foss;e (not slits) and the two
large anterior groups of ocelli can usually be seen indistinctly as
dark rounded patches beneath the thick outer integument. The
small proboscis is often protruded a short distance, its pore being
then rather small and slightly below the tip of the snout. The
mouth is not visible in the preserved specimens, but my original
sketches, made from life, show what I then supposed to be the con-
tracted mouth beneath the head, distinct from the proboscis-pore.

In some horizontal sections of the head the anterior ocelli form an
upper pair of transverse groups nearer the front than the sides of
the head, while two smaller clusters; lower down in front, seem to
be nearly separate from the up})er ones. In some specimens these
large anterior groups are formed of four or five transverse horizontal
rows, of which the upper row runs back to a small lateral cluster of
ocelli. The a^sophagus has a large i)licated anterior portion in the
head. The mouth appears to open decidedly behind the proboscis-
pore.

In sections of the body the intestine, blood-system, and muscular
layers are nearly as in Amphiporus, but the muscular layers are
unusually thick.

One specimen, taken August 12, 1873, contained large eggs,
arranged in about six rows of sacs, above and at the side of the in-
testine, on each side. The armature of the proboscis has not been
observed, but in other respects the proboscis agrees with that of the
allied species ; the length of the anterior region is about twice the
diameter of the body ; the posterior portion is long and slender.

Off Cape Elizabeth, 68 fathoms, soft mud, August 12, 1873 ; Gulf
of Maine, 88 fathoms, mud, station 45, 1874 ; off Martha's Vineyard,
192 fathoms, fine sand and mud, station 869, 1880 ; off Martha's
Vineyard, 229 fathoms, sandy mud, station 925, 1881 ; off George's
Bank, 852 fathoms, gray mud, station 2531 ; off Block Island, 156
fathoms, fine mud and sand, station 2537; off Block Island, 131
fathoms, fine sand, station 2544, 1885, (U. 8. Fish Commission).

A. E. Yerrill — 3Iarine Nemerteans of New England, etc. 415

Family, Dkepanophorid.e Verrill, nov.

AmpliiporidcR (pars) authors.

Probosfis-slieath provided with c;i?cal appendages. Central arma-
ture of proboscis a lamelliform [)late bearing a number of small
stylets on its edge. Lateral stylet-sacs more than two ; often nu-
merous, containing small nail-shaped stylets.

Drepanophorus Hubrecht.

Body^ and head nearly as in Aniphiporas; mouth-o[)ening separate
from the proboscis-pore. Proboscis large. Musculature of thp body^-
Avall as in Amphiporat!.

Drepanophorus Lankesteri Hubrecht.

Voyage of the Challenger, vol. xix, pp. 18, 50, pi. i, fig. 22; pi. ix, tigs. 1, 2, 10;
pi. X, figs. 2, 4; pi. xii, fig. 5; pi. xiv, flgs. 9, 10; pi. xv, fig. 13, 1887.

This species was described from alcoholic specimens, destitute of
the proboscis. Its external features are, therefore, entirely unknown.
Its anatomy^ was, however, carefully worked out by means of sec-
tions.

It is peculiar in having numerous well marked ti'ansverse ner-
vous commissures connecting the lateral nerve-trunks anteriorly.

The Ciccal appendages of the proboscis-sheath are also unusually
well developed, with thicker walls than in most species, and they^
sometimes anastomose distally^

Ocelli are present, but their arrangement was not stated. Genital
sacs are numerous, apparently in four rows, subventral.

For other details reference should be made to the original descrip-
tion and figures.

Oft' Nova Scotia, near Le Have Bank, 45 fathoms.

I have observed a single, small, and probably immature, specimen
of DRiii'ANOPHORiD^: OH the New England coast, but do not deem
it Avise to name it. This was translucent yellowish white in color.

Order II, ANOPLA.

Ano2)Ui Max Scliultze, 1852; Mclutosh.

Proboscis unarmed, long, slender, tubular, and not divided into
three distinct regions ; its walls may contain three to five layers ;
inner surface, when retracted, papillose.

Head with or without lateral slits or ciliated pouches.

Ocelli variously arranged ; often wanting.

416 A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemertecms of Nevj England, etc.

Mouth ventral, situated behind the ganglions.

The muscular walls of the body often consist of three layers :
outer longitudinal, middle circular, and inner longitiulinal (PI.
xxxix, tigs. 17 to 21). In some cases the outer longitudinal layer is
lacking (figs, 15 and 16).

Two or three main vascular trunks ; the vessels generally not so
well defined as in the Eno])la, and often having in part the character
of wide lacunie, especially anteriorly,

(Esophagus entirely behind the brain, usually large, long, plicated,
and surrounded by a vascular network, or by lacuna?. (PI. xxxix,
fig. 22, "v, r).

Lateral nerve-trunks arise from the outer sides of the lower gan-
glions, and are situated between the muscular layers of the body-
walls, but they vary in position in the different families. Usually
there is a nervous plexus outside of the circular muscular layer.
(PI. xxxix, figs. 17, 20, n).

The s|)ecies are almost all nuirine ; a few inhabit brackish water.

Suborder I, RHAG-ADOCEPHALA Diesing, 1850 (emeDded).

Schizonemtrti7ii \iv\\n-Qcht ■, Carus, Fauuie Med., p. 160.
Schizonemertea. Hubrecht, Voy. Challenger, xix, p. :i7.

Head with a deej), longitudinal, ciliated slit, or fossa (pro1>a])ly
olfactory in function), on each side, terminating posteriorly in a deep
pit or (^luct running inward to the posterior ganglions. (PI. xxxix,

fig. 22,/; d, d').

Mouth large, behind or opposite the posterior ends of the lateral
slits and cej)halic ganglions. (Wood-cut 8).

Lateral nerve-trunks situated between the outer longitudinal and
the circular muscular layers of the body-wall. (PI. xxxix, figs.
19 to 21). A median dorsal nerve is also usually distinctly developed.

Three large, longitudinal, vascular trunks, which are usually con-
nected by numerous transverse vessels around the intestine, espe-
cially posteriorly,

CEsophagus large, prolonged backward, plicated, and j)rovided with
a vascular system, probably having a respiratory function. (PI,
XXXIX, figs. 20, 22).

Many of the species of this group develop directly from the eggs,
without a marked metamorphosis, but certain species of Mlcrura
(perhaps all) have a peculiar, free-swimming larval form known as
P'didium (PI. xxxix, figs. 1 to 6, and wood-cut 7). The embryology
of the closely related genus, Cerebratidas, is apparently unknown.

A. E. 'VervUl — Marine Nemerteansi of New England, etc.. 417

Tlie species are almost exclusively marine and are found in deep
water as well as between tides. Many are fossorial in their habits,

Fig. 7. Pilidium of Micrura, much enlarged: c, apical cilium; h, cephalic lobe;
m, mouth; i, intestine; u, bands of cilia; o, young nemerteau developing in the in-
terior, showiug its head with two ocelli.

living in sand or mud, or beneath stones. Some of the large Hat
species of Cerebratulus leave their burrows and swim with an undu-
latory, eel-like movement at the surface of the sea at night.

Family, Lineid^e Mcintosh.

Body simple, generally much elongated in extension, very contrac-
tile, usually thickest in the region of the oesophagus, and becoming

fiffill!^

Fig. 8. Lineidoi. A, Cerebra lulus luridus, ventral side; m, mouth; s, one of the
olfactory slits or cephalopori; p, proboscis-pore. B, head of the same, side view. C,
tail ; X, anus. D, head of Lineus viridis, young, enlarged ; s, one of the cephalopori ;
p, proboscis-pore.

more or less flattened farther back, where the saccular appendages
of the intestine and the reproductive glands occupy the sides. Head
simple, with elongated lateral olfactory slits or cephalopori.

LiineilS Sowerby, 1806.

Lineus Sowerby, British Miscel., p. 15, pi. 8, 1806.

BorJasia Oken, Lehrbuch, p. 36.5, 1815; Blainville, Diet. Sci. Nat., .57, p. 575, 1828 ;

Johnston, Catal., p. 21, 1865.
iVemerfe.s Cuvier, Regne Anim., vol. iv, p. 37, 1815; Dies, {^pars), op. cit., p. 264.
Lineus CErsted, Naturh. Tidsskr., iv, p. 576, 1844.
Meckelia (jjars) Diesing, Syst. Helm., vol. i, p. 265, 1850.
Notosjiermus Diesing, op. cit., vol. i, p. 260.
Li'neMS Stimpson, Prodromus, p. 160, 1851.
Cerebratulus (pars) Stirapson, Prodromus, p. 160, 1857.
Poseidon Girard, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., iv, p. 185, 1852.
Nemerfes Verrill, lavert. Vineyard Sound, etc., 1873.

418 A. M Verrill — Marine Nemertecms of New Knghnid, etc.

Body very contractile, in extension elongated, slender, tapering,
and often attenuated toward the posterior end, rounded or slightly
depressed anteriorly, generally somewhat l)roader and more depressed
in the middle region, but without the conspicuous flattening back of
the oesophageal region seen in Cerehratidus. No anal papilla. Head
elongated, not very distinctly defined ; often a little wider than the
neck, but not constantlj^ so. Lateral slits elongated and deep, run-
ning close to the terminal proboscis-jiore, but usually not joining it.
Mouth, in ordinary states, rounded or elliptical and not very large,
but capable of great extension when feeding. Ocelli small, usually
arranged in a simple row along the lateral margins of the head,
sometimes absent.

The several European species of this genus have been referred by
authors to a great number of different genera, of which I have indi-
cated only a part. The first three names cited in the synonymy were
all given to the same species [L. mariuvs =z L. lom/issimns) of
Europe and are, thei'efore, exact equivalents. The two later names
should, thei'efore, have been dro'pped entirely from the nomenclature
of the group. Unfortunately several different writers have tried to
restrict both Borlasia and Nemertes to groups entirely different
from that to wdiich they were originally given, and have thus intro-
duced great confusion. Each attempt of this kind has, hitherto,
been a failure for in most instances the new groups thus named have
been found to have had other and earlier names. One of the latest
reapplications of Nemertes to a newly constituted group was by
Mcintosh (Nemerteans, p. IVC). He applied it to a genus of
Enophi^ in a wholly new sense, Nemertes of Mcintosh, 1879, is,
however, antedated by Nemertes of White, 1860, applied to a Crus-
tacean, and therefore it could not be retained, even if the nemertean
genus, so named, had not already received other names.

The use of Borlasia by Mcintosh, in a wholly new sense, seems
also to be untenable.

LineUS Viridis (Fabr.) .Tolmston.

Planaria viridis 0. Fabrichis in O. F. Miiller, Zoo]. Dan. Prod., 2r.S4, 1776; 0.

Fabricius, Fauna Groonlandiea, p. .■'.24, 1780; Miiller, Zoologia Dauioa, ii, p. 35,

pi. 68, figs. 1 to 4, (from Greenland specimens sent by Fabricius to Miilter).
Planaria, Gesserensis Miiller, Zoiil. Danica, ii, p. 32, pi. 64, fios. 5 to 8, 1788.
Nrin'-rtcs oUvarea ^ohwsion, Mag. of Zool. and Botany, vol. i, p. .')36, pi. 18, fig. 1,

1837; Diesing, Syst. Helm., i, p. 273, IS.'iO.
Nemertes dbscura Desor, Boston Journal of Natural History, vol. vi, pp. 1 to 12.

plates 1 and 2, 1848 (embryology).

A. E. Verr'dl — Mdriue JVeinertcaus of New EiKjland, etc. 419

PoUa ohscura Girard iu Stimpsou's Marine Invertebrates of Graud Manaii, p. 82,

1853 (no description).
Nemertes viridis Diesiug, yiczuugsbericlito der kais. Aliad. der Wissenschafteu,

vol. xlv, p. 305, 18G2.
Bmiasia olivacea Johnston, Catalogue British Nou-parasitical Worms, jj. 21, pi. 2'',

fig. 1, 1865; Mcintosh, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb , vol. xxv, pt. ii, p. 371, 1869.
Lineus wmfe Johnston, Catal., pp. 27, 296, 1865.

Nemertes viridis Verrill, Marine Invert of Vineyard Sound, etc., p. :J34 [628], 1873.
Lineiis Gesseretisis Mcintosh, Hist. British Annelida, Part I, Nemerteans, (Ray

Society) p. 185, pi. iv, fig. 2; pi. v, fig. 1, (red var.); pi. xviii to xxii, (anatomy);

pi. xxiii, (green var., embryology), 1873.
Linens viridis Verrill, Check List Marine Invert., p. 12, 1879; Notice of Recent

Addit. to Mar. Invert., Part I, in Proc. National Mus., ii, p. 185, 1879.

PLATE XXXV^I, FIGURES 5 to 5^ ; PLATE XXXVIII, FIGURES 6 tO 6C? ;
PLATE XXXIX, FIGURES 18, 22.

Budy soft, very contractile and changeable ; in full extension
elongated and moderately slender, in large examples six to eight
inclies long and abont one-lifth of an inch iu diameter ; usually thick-
est in advance of the middle, tapering gradually to the rather slender
caudal portion, and decreasing less toward the head; not iinfrequently
the body is dilated in two or more places at the same time, the
swollen parts moving continually ; in extension the body is usually
Romewdiat flattened, but tlie dorsal surface is decidedly convex and
the sides well-rounded ; it is often crossed by faint, light-colored, ir-
regularly si)aced wrinkles. In contraction the body becomes short
and thick, oblong, swollen and almost saccular at times.

Head, in extension, rather large, dei)ressed, usually wider than the
neck, short, ovate-spatulate, or elongated, accoi-ding to the degree of
extension ; the snout is blunt, often emai'ginate, and bears three
small ciliated papilhe ; proboscis-pore terminal, rounded, or in the
shai)e of a short vertical slit ; lateral foss:i? long and very deep, with
wide, thin, pale margins, above and below, the anterior ends of the
slits reaching close to the proboscis-})ore.

The ocelli are arranged in a simple row on each side of the head,
close to the edge of the dorsal pigmented region ; they vary in
number and size according to the age, the large specimens often hav-
ing six or eight on each side, while the small ones have but three or
four, and the very young ones have only a single pair ; usually the
anterior ocelli are slightly larger than the others.

The mouth is situated opposite to, or a little behind, the posterior
ends of the lateral fossae ; it is ordinarily small and elliptical, with
a distinct, lighter colored border, but it is capable of great dilation

Trans. Con-v. Acad., Vol. VIII. 55 .June, 1892.

420 A. E. Verrlll — Marine Neruerteans of New England^ etc.

when the creature is engaged in swallowing some annelid nearly or
quite as large as itself.

The color, in life, is variable; the most common variety is dull
green, or olive green, varying to dark smoky green or greenish black,
dai'kest anteriorly, and with the under surface and caudal portion
somewhat paler ; region of the cephalic ganglions and lateral pits
usually reddish ; front and margins of head pale or whitish ; on
many specimens faint pale transverse lines or rings can be seen, if
carefully examined ; at times a row of small whitish spots, corres-
ponding to the genital pores, can be seen on each side. Other speci-
mens occur, often living with grewn ones, in which the general color
of the body is brown, greenish brown, re(hlisij brown, or chiar red
with the margins of the head and lower surfaces liesh-color or
reddish.

Some of these forms differ so much in a[>pearance from the com-
mon dark green variety that it would be convenient to distinguish
them by variety names, using, in this sense, some of the numerous
names applied by the early writers when they were supposed to be
distinct species, viz :

Var. oUvaceiis (Johnston). The typical green and olive-colored
variety.

Var. fiiscns. The brown and reddish brown variety.

Var. rufiis (Rathke). The distinctly red variety.

Var. obseurus (Desor). The smoky green and blackish variety.

Specimens intermediate in color l)etween all these are, however,
of frequent occurrence.

The length, in extension, is sometimes 150'"'" to 200""" ; the di-
ameter 2""" to 4'"'" ; in contraction the body becomes much shorter
and stouter, large specimens often being only 30'"'" or 40'"'" long and
4'"™ to 6'"'" broad.

In alcoholic specimens the body is usually thickened and rounded
anteriorly, more slender and somewhat flattened farther back, often
acute at the posterior end ; head obtusely rounded or sub-truncate,
with a small terminal proboscis-pore and two lateral slits, which are
short and extend forward very near to the proboscis-pore. Mouth
small and round, situated slightly behind the posterior ends of the
lateral slits ; ocelli not apparent. When placed in alcohol the body
usually contracts so violently that it breaks up into segments, es-
pecially posteriorly, and the proboscis is often completely ejected.

The extruded proboscis is long, slender toward the base, clavate
toward the end, the terminal portion transversely wrinkled.

A. K. Verrill— Marine N^emerteans of JSFev) Enghind^ etc. 421

This common littoral and shallow water species is found on the
Amoi-ican coast from Long Island Sound to Lal)rador, Cumberland
Gulf, and Greenland. It is also common on the coasts of Great
Britain as far south as the Channel Islands (Mcintosh), and on all
the northern coasts of Europe.

South of Cape Cod, I have collected it near New Haven, Conn.,
and at the Thimble Islands ; Noank, Conn.; Newport, R. I.; Wood's
Holl, Mass.; and at various other localities. North of Cape Cod it
is more abundant and larger. Among the localities where I have
taken it are TrovincetoAvn and Barnstable, Mass.; Salem and Glou-
cester, Mass. ; Casco Bay ; Mount Desert Island ; Eastport, Me. ;
Grand Menan Island ; Halifax, N. S. ; Gulf of St. Lawrence, etc.

It is particularly abundant and large at Eastport, Me., and at all
localities about the Bay of Fundy, where the shore is composed of
rocks.

This species is active and restless in confinement. It creeps rather
rapidly and is prone to climb out of the water and perish by drying
up. It is a voracious feeder and lives largely upon annelids, I have
observed it in the act of swallowing a full grown scaly annelid,
{Lepidonottis squamatus), which was considerably greater in dia-
meter than the thickest })art of its own body. A specimen of this
kind, with the J^epidonottcs half swallowed, is preserved in the mu-
seum of Yale University.

The eggs are deposited in great abundance on our shores under
stones near low-water mark, in midsummer. They are contained in
more or less cylindrical masses of a translucent, dull greenish, jelly-
like substance, made up of numerous capsules, (Plate xxxvaii, fig,
6c), These cylinders are usually from 3""" to 5""" in diameter, and
40"'"^' to 50'""^ in length, and are usually coiled in a spiral or ring-like
form. The eggs aro in several rows. In those clusters taken at one
date, in July, at Eastport, Me., I have found eggs in all stages of
development, while in some of them the recently hatched young
were still present. (PI. xxxviii, fig. 6d).

I have adopted the name, viridis, given to this species by Otho
P""al)ricius, who communicated the first published descriptions and
figures to Midler, as stated both by him and by Mfiller, That this
is the species observed on the shores of Greenland and described by
Fabricius there can be no reasonable doubt. His brief description is
quite as correct and characteristic as the descriptions of such ani-
mals were wont to be at that time, and his figures, published by
Midler in the Zoologia Danica, represent the worm fairlj^ well when

422 .1. A'. Vi'fril} — Marine A^emcrf.eans of Neio I'Jni/hnKl, etc.

partially contracted ; nor could they be referred to any other Green-
land species.

The lateral slits of the head of this species are spoken of on p, 325
of the Fauna Gnpnlandica, and are also distinctly shown in the
figures. Fabricius speaks of his virklis as common on the shores of
Greenland among the roots of alg;e. I have personallj^ examined
good specimens of this species recently taken on the coast of Green-
land in the same situations. There can l)e no doubt of their identity
with the true virklis. Therefore there is not the slightest reason
why his characteristic name should not be used, in preference to
Gessereyisis* of much later date.

Although the latter name has been adopted by many recent writers
on European nemerteans, the ordinaiy rules of priority, as well as
justice to the very meritorious author of the Fauna Grwnlandica,
should compel a change in this rcs]>ect.

Fabricius and Midler, in the same works, described another Green-
land form under the name of rubra. I am of the opinion that this
was simply the red variety of L. viridis, for the two varieties occur
together everywhere on the northern coast of America. Levinsen,
however, has referred the rubra to L. sanguineus^ and has given the
latter as a Greenland species. If both species actually inhabit
Greenland his view may be correct, for there is nothing in the orig-
inal description to indicate that it belongs to one ratlun- than to
the other of these two species, if it really belonged to eithor.f

Indeed these; two re))uted species arc so much alike that I am my-
self in doubt whether they arc really distinct. There is no special
diagnostic character given by Mcintosh unless it be the somewhat
narrower head in X. sanguineus. The sha])e of the head in this genus
is so changeable and variable that, in practice, little reliance can be
placed upon this as a diagnostic character. The ocelli are supj)osed
to differ slightly in size and number, but they also vary in both
forms. Hence it seems to me not improbable that a more extended
study of the variations will compel us to consider X. sanguineus
only a lighter red variety of L. viridis. In this article I have, how-
ever, followed most European writers in keeping them separate,
although I confess that with scores of living specimens of both

* Levinsen, in his recent paper on the Turbellaria of Oreenland, also records tho
typical form, under the name of L. Gesserensis, as a native of that coast.

f Fabricius mentions neither ocelli nor cephalic slits in this species. Therefore it
may not have been a Linens. The necessary rloubt concerning its true relations
should prevent the application of the name to any species.

A. E. Verrill — Marine JVenxirtemis of New Ejiglaixt, etc. 423

forms before me, I have always found it difficult to draw any clear
line of separation between tbein,

LineUS sanguineus (-Tens Ratlike).

Planaria sanguinea Jens Rathke, Skiivter af Natiirhist. Selsk., vol. v, i, p. 83, 1709.

Planaria oefoCTt/ate Johnsf.on, Zool. Jour., vol. iv, p. 56, 1829.

Nemertes (Borlasia) oc.tocnlata Johnston, Mag. Zool. and Bot., vol. i, p. 537, pi. 18, fig.

2, 1837; ffirsted, Kroyer's Naturhist. Tidss., iv, p. 579, in note, 1S:'.7.
Nemertes sanguinea (Er&tGdi, Entw. Plattw., p. 92, 1844.
Borlasia octoculahi Johnston, Catalogue Brit. Mns., pp. 21, 2S7, 290, jii. \ih, fig. 2,

2* 1855.
Linens sanguinfinn Mcintosh, Britisli Annelids, part T, Nenierteans, p. 18S, pi. v,

fig. 2, \ST.',.

PLATE XXXYIll, FIGURES 10, 10^/.

Body strongly convex or well rounded above, flatish beneath,
rather long-, in extension often 8 to 10 inches long and .25 inch
broad, but it is capal)le of contracting to less than one-fourth this
length, and then becomes about .35 of an inch in diameter. Head
elongated, usually not so wide as the body, often acute in front
when extended, but it changes much in form and may become much
shorter and obtuse in contraction ; lateral cephalic slits, moderately
long and deep, bordered by narrow pale lips, above ajid below.
Ocelli small, but very distinct, blackish, usually 4 to 8 in a row on
each side, arranged at the upper margin of the white lateral borders
of the head. Mouth rather large, usually round or oval. Math corru-
gated white lips, but capable of great extension when swallowing
large prey.

Color of body, above, dai'k red, l)riglit red, or clear reddish brown,
usually darker medially ; beneath, pale salmon, flesh-color, or light
yellowish red ; snout and margins of head whitish ; the red color of
the middle of the head slightly emarginate or notched at its anterior
end.

Eastport, Me., at Dog Island, low-water, under stones, 18GR, (No.
2). Also taken at various other localities at Eastport and Grand
Menan, between tides, in 1870 and 1872, common.

ITnder L. viridis, on a previous page, I have, spoken of the close
relationshi)> of the red variety of that species to X. sangtihiefis, and
have given reasons for doubting the status of this as a distinct
species — at least as they occur on our northern coasts. It may be
possible that we do not have the real European Z,. sanguineus, but
we have an abundance of specimens tlj.at agree in all respects, so far

424 A. E. VerriU — Marine N^emerteans of JVeir E))</Iatid^ etc.

as I can see, witli tlie descriptions and figures given by Mclnto.sh
and others.

The character upon which Mcintosh puts the most stress is the
greater narrowness of the head, said to be chiefly due to the nar-
rower lips of the cephalic slits in the present species, as compared
with L. viridis [Gef^serenais). But as the length and breadth of the
head and of the margins of the slits are constantly clianging during
the motions of the living worms, it is not easy to make sure of such
differences. The lighter and brighter red color of the body, and the
greater distinctness of tlie ocelli in L. sangiiineKs are also supposed
to be cliaracteristic.

It is found chiefly under stones from half-tide to low-water mark,
and at moderate depths (1 to 25 fathoms) on stony and muddy bot-
toms. Many specimens are often found living gregariously, curled
up together, under one stone,

LineUS SOCialis (Leidy) VeniU.

Nemertes socialis Leid}\ Marine Invert. Fauna of Point Jiiditli, R. T., and New
Jersey, p. 11 [143J, 1855; Verrill, Invert., Vineyard Sd., etc., p. 334 [G28].

Lineus commums Van Beneden (?) ; Verrill, Notice of Recent Addit. to Mar. Invert-
Part T. in Proc. National Mns., ii, p. 185, 1870.

PLATE XXXVII, FIGURES 8, 8(/ ; TLATE XXXVIII, FKiURES 7, 1".

l>ody very long and slender, subterete, attenuated posteriorly, in
full extension abnost linear, up to 8 to 10 inches long, with the di-
ameter about ,04 inch. Head very long, flattened, obtuse ; lateral
cephalic slits very much elongated. Mouth placed far back from the
front of the head. Ocelli very small, often obscured by the dark
color of the head, in large specimens four to six or more in a row on
each side of the head, the front pair larger than the others and
usually separated by a slightly greater interval ; very young ones
have only a single pair. Color, above, usually dark olive-green,
greenish brown, greenish black, or smoky bi'own, and more rarely
reddish brown, the anterior parts often darkest ; indistinct, rather
distant, pale transverse lines are often pi-esent, and occasionally
there is a darker median dorsal stripe ; front margin of the head
paler and slightly translucent ; lower surface of the body usually
similar in color to the back but of a ]>aler shade, most frequently
dull green or greenish ash.

Length of large specimens, in extension, 250""", diameter l"'"" to

cmm

This is a strictly littoral species. It is common from New Jersey
to the Bay of Fiindy. It occurs abundantly and usuallj' gregarious-

A. E. Jlirri/l — Marine Neniertemis of Neio Engliiud, etc. 425

ly under stones, among living mussels, between the roots of grasses
and algae, etc., from near low-water mark nearly up to high-water
mark of medium tides. 1 have collected it at Great Egg Harbor,
N. J.; New Haven, Conn.; Noank, Conn,; Newport, R. I.; Wood's
Holl, Mass.; in the harbors of Provincetown, Barnstable, Salem, and
Gloucester, Mass.; Portland and Eastport, Me., etc.

This S])ecies is very gregarious, a large number usually living-
coiled up together in a tangled mass, from which, however, the in-
dividual worms can easily disengage themselves when disturbed.
It occurs nearly up to high-water mark where other nemerteans are
not found.

Superticially this species resembles, in color and general a|)})ear-
ance, the young of L. viridis (dark green variety), but it is relative-
ly much longer and more slender, and has a much longer and nar-
rower head, with decidedly longer lateral slits, and the mouth is
placed much farther back.

Lineus arenicola Veniii.

7'e,trastetnina{'^) nren'kol((. YcrviW, liiverteljiiite Animals of Viueyaid 8oiiud, etc.,
p. 335, pi. xix, fig. 98, 1873.

PLATE XXXVIII, FIGURES 5, bCl.

Body subterete, long, slender, slightly depressed, of nearly uni-
form width ; the head is very versatile, usually sub-conical or lanceo-
late, flattened, occasionally becoming partially distinct from the
body by a slight constriction at the neck. Ocelli four, those in the
anterior pair nearer together, The lateral fosste are long, and dee})
slits on the sides of the head. Mouth small, often sub-triangular,
situated Just back of the i)osterior ends of the lateral fossiu. Body
deep ilesh-color or pale purplish.

Length about 100""", in extension.

Savin Rock, near New Haven, Conn., in sand at low- water mark.

This species has not been taken except in the original locality. It
ai^pears to be very rare in our waters. Possibly it is a southern
s[)ecies that does not ordinarily live so far north.

Lineus pallidas Veniii.

Lineus paUidus Verrill, Notice of Recent Addit. to Mar. Invert., Part I, in Proc.
National Mus., ii, p. 18G, 1879.

PLATE XXXVII, FIGURES 9, 9rt.

Body long and very slender in extension, subterete, attenuated
posteriorly. Head elongated, usually obtuse and wider than the

426 A. E. Verrill — Maruie Neniertecms of New En.</lajid, etc.

body, but very changeable. Ocelli absent. Lateral (cephalic) fosste
long and deep. Mouth situated far back from the anterior end. Color
usually whitish or pale ocher-yellow, usually becoming reddish to-
ward the head, and with a rather indistinct pale dorsal line ; an-
teriorly there are usually two pale doreal sj)ots in front of which the
head is yellowish.

Length, in extension, 100"""; breadth 0-5 to 0-75""".

Off Cape Ann, Mass., 45 fathoms, mud, 1878.

Lineus dubius Ven-iii.

Liaeus dubius Verrill, Notice of Keeeat Addit. to Mar. Invert., Part I, in Proc.
National Mus., ii, p, 18(3, IS79.

PLATE XXXVII, FIGURES 4, 4a.

Body very slender in extension, and attenuated ])osteriorly. Head
elongated, narrow, usually pointed ; lateral slits of moderate length ;
ocelli lohite, inconspicuous, forming a lateral row of about twelve,
extending back on each side of the head beyond the posterior ends
of the lateral fossae, usually the four anterior ones on each side are
separated by a little space from those that follow, but all are nearly
in a simjile row. Color, above, light green to dark olive-green.

Length of tlie largest specimens observed, 50 to 75""".

Gloucester, Mass., under stones, between tides, 1878.

Linens bicolor Verrill, si), uov.

PLATE XXXVII, FIGURES 8, 8a, 8^.

Body rather small, in extension elongated, thickest and somewhat
depressed in the middle, tajjering to both ends, and decidedly at-
tenuated posteriorly ; sides rounded. Head elongated, flattened,
rather wider than the neck, in usual extension. Lateral olfactory
slits long and deep, Avith thin margins. Mouth usually elliptical,
situated behind the ends of the olfactory slits. The ocelli are ar-
ranged in a simple row of about 4 to 7 on each side of the head, the
front pair largest. Color, above, along each side of back a broad
stripe of olive-green, yellowish green, or brownish green, separated
by a median dorsal, well defined, broad stripe of pale yellow or
yellowish white, usually becoming clear white on the head, where it
expands and blends with a white frontal area in advance of the eyes;
the margins of head are also white. Lower surface })ale greenish or
yellowish white.

Length in extension, 35 to 45"""; diameter, 1 to 1.5""". Described
from life.

A. K Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of New England, etc. 427

Long Island Sound to Vineyard Sound, in 2 to 24 fathoms ; Bart-
lett's Reef, 22 fathoms, 1874. Usually taken on shelly or stony
bottoms among algje, ascidians, and hydroids ; common, es})ecially in
Vineyard Sound. The specimen figured was taken at Wood's Holl,
July 14, 1875.

DOUBTFUL SPECIES.

Lineus truncatus (flubr.) Veniii.

Cerebratulus truncatus Hubrecht, Voyage of the Challenger, vol. xix, pp. 37, 50, pi.
1, figs. 11, 12, 1887.

This species was described from imperfect alcoholic specimens, so
that its external form and color in life are entii'ely unknown.

In the contracted speidraens the head is short, flattened, truncated
in front ; the cephalic slits are short and run forward close to, but
do not join, the proboscis-pore ; the mouth is small, rounded, and
only a short distance back from the front.

Ofl:'Nova Scotia in 75 and 85 fathoms ; also off Bermuda. (Chal-
lenger Exp.)

The S)nall mouth, rounded l)ody, and general appearances of the
specimens, as figured, indicate that it belongs to Linens or Micrura,
and not to Cerehratulus, as here defined. There is nothing in the de-
scription to distinguish it from Lineus viridis, which often contracts
into the same form.

Micrura Elueuberg, 1830.

Micrura (pars) Mcintosh, Nemerteans, p. 196.
Gerehrattdm (pars) Hubrecht.

Body, head, and proboscis nearly as in Lineus ; body elongated,
terete or somewhat flattened ; the posterior regions usually not
much flattened, nor very different in form from the region of the
proboscis. Cephalopori or olfactory slits well defined. Ocelli some-
times present, but often wanting. Posterior end of the body pro-
vided with a median slender cixTus, above the anus.

This genus, as here defined, differs from Lineus in little else than
the presence of a well marked contractile anal cirrus, which may
often be distinguished even in alcoholic specimens. From Cerebra-
tulus, which also has the anal cirrus, it differs in the form and mus-
cular structure of the bod}^ posteriorly, which is not very flat and
thin, nor adapted for swimming, as in the latter.

Tkans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 56 June, L892.

428 A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of Neio England, etc.

Some of the flat species included in this genus by Mcintosh, I
should, therefore, transfer to Cerebratidxis, especially his M. fnsca
(uoft Fabr. sp.)

Ilubrecht has united 3ficricra and Cerebratulus without regard to
the form of the body and the muscidar structure of the body-walls,
which seem to me important characters, involving wide differences
in habits.

The species of Micrura are fossorial in their habits and do not
swim at the surface, so far as I have observed, and, indeed, the form
and structure of the' body are not ada[)ted for swimming.

Some of the species of 3Ucrura, if not all, have a Pilidium-stage
in development. The embryology of many of the species has, how-
ever, not been traced. Nor have any of the several species of Pili-
dium-larvse found on our coast been reared till the adidt characters
could be determined. On Plate xxxix, I have hgured two distinct
kinds of these larvae that are common at Wood's Holl, Mass., in sum-
mer. One or both probably belong to some of our species of Micrura,
but as the larval form of Gerehratidus is unknown, one of them may
belong to that common genus. The young nemertean seen in the
interior of one S])ecies (fig. 5, w), has already two distinct ocelli,
which would indicate that it belongs to a species like M. affinis,
which lias ocelli when adult.

Micrura affinis Voniii.

Poseidon qffiuif; Girard in Stiiiip., Marine Invert, of Grand Manan, p. 28, 1853.
Neinertes aj§inifi Verrill, Auier. Journ. Sci., vol. vii, pp. 39, 412, 1874; Proc. Am.

Assoc, for ISIS, pp. 351, 363.
Micrura affinis Y ern\\ Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus , vol. ii, p. 18G, 1879; Check List,

Invert., p. 12, 1879.

PLATE XXXVI, FIOURE 1 ; I'LATK XXXVII, FIUUKES 6, 6a.

Body elongated in extension, somewhat depressed, but with round-
ed sides, of nearly uniform breadth through most of the length, but
somewhat tapered posteriorly, and terminated by a slender, pointed,
pale anal papilla or cirrus, about one-half as long as the diameter of
the body. Head scarcely wider than the neck, elongated, flattened,
usually obtusely rounded anteriorly, but changeable. Lateral olfac-
tory slits long and deep, with thin white margins in front, uniting
with the proboscis-pore. Mouth of moderate size situated opposite
the ends of the slits. Ocelli rather large, black, conspicuous, vari-
able in number, forming a single row, usually of four to six on each
side at the edges of the white marginal areas ; the front ocelli are

A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of New Em/land, etc. 429

iisually distinctly larger than the others. Color, above, usually
clear bright red, varying to dark red and reddish brown, rarely to
greenish brown ; often crossed l)y indistinct, transverse, pale lines,
as in Linens viridis ; front and margins of head white ; under sur-
face light flesh-color or pinkish, often showing by translucency the
intestinal creca or pouches along the sides in the form of transverse
gray blotches.

Length up to 125 to 150""" ; diameter, 2 to 4"'"\ Described from
life.

Very common from off Cape Cod and Massachusetts Bay to Nova
Scotia, in 8 to 150 fathoms or more, on shelly and stony bottoms. It
is particularly connuon in the Bay of Fundy, the harbor of Eastport,
Me., and the other cold waters of that region, where it is also often
found at low-water mark under stones. It has also been frequently
dredged in 12 to 50 fathoms south of Cape Cod, and off Nantucket
and Martha's Vineyard, i?i tlie cold area.

This species, in some of its red and brown varieties, closely resem-
bles the red and brown varieties of lAneus viridis, from which it
cannot be distinguished when living without a careful examination.
The presence of the caudal cirrus is easily diagnostic, when the
specimen is perfect, but when mutilated, as often happens, the dif-
ficulty is much increased. The ocelli in this species are usually
larger and more distinct than in Lineus viridis.

Micrura dorsalis Veniii, sp. nov.

PLATE XXXViri, FIGURES 4, Ail.

Body depressed, rather large and thick, length up to 6 inches in ordi-
nary extension ; in contraction it becomes short and thick, and may
even contract itself into a ball ; the margins are well rounded and the
body tapers toward both ends. The anterior region of the body for
about a sixth to a tenth of the whole length, often becomes in par-
tial contraction rounded and narrower than the rest of the body.
Head obtusely pointed or bluntly rounded in front, not distinct
from the body and of the same breadth. Cephalopori moderately
long, somewhat oblique longitudijial slits on the sides of the head,
extending nearly to the proboscis-pore. Ocelli, none. Mouth small,
rounded, nearly opposite the hind end of the cephalopori.

Color pale ocher-j'ellow with an orange tinge anteriorly, with a
darker medial stripe above and below, and having pale mottlings in-
distinctly showing through on each side due to the internal organs.

Length 160'""^; diameter 5""". Described from life.

430 A. E. Yerrill — Marine Nemerteans of Neto England, etc.

The type-specimen, described above, as now preserved in alcohol,
has a stout body, thickest anteriorly, tapering to the hind end,
which terminates in a small, whitish caudal papilla. The sides are
everywhere rounded. Head short, thick, subconical, blunt, not dis-
tinct from the body ; proboscis-pore terminal, in the form of a short
vertical slit ; lateral cephalic slits moderately long, joining the pi'o-
boscis-pore in front, so as to divide the tip of the snout into four
parts. Mouth small, rounded, opposite the posterior ends of the
cephalic slits.

Length in alcohol, 64'"™; diameter 3"""; length of cephalic slits

omm

Eastport, Me., at Clark's Ledge, extreme low- water mark, under
stones, 1870.

Micrura rubra Verrili, sp. nov.

PLATE XXXVIII, FIGURES 3, 3a, 9, 9a.

Body moderately large, subterete and elongated in extension, up
to 3 inches long, rather more slender posteriorly. Head obtuse or
rounded in front ; proboscis- pore a vertical terminal slit ; cephalic
slits or cephalopori long and deep, in front joining the proboscis-
pore so as to divide the tip of the snout into four small lobes ; the
slits extend back as far as, or beyond, the mouth, which is ordinarily
a small elliptical opening. No ocelli.

Color, above, light orange red to bright red, indistinctly mottled
along the sides with brownish red, due to internal organs.

Length 62 to 75'"™ in extension ; diameter 2'5""'\ Described from
life. (No. 722).

In alcohol the specimens above described are much contracted,
thick and short, stoutest anteriorly, tapered, but scarcely flattened
posteriorly. Ovaries filled with eggs commence some distance
back of the head. Cephalic slits moderately long and deep, joining
the proboscis-pore in front. Prosboscis, as ejected, coiled in a
spiral, moderately long and rather thick, tapering to both ends.

OflP Casco Bay, July 16, 1873.

A curious specimen (Plate xxxviii, fig. 3, 3f/), probabl}^ of this
species, was taken in the Bay of Fundy. It had, apparently, been
broken and was in the act of reproducing the hinder ])art of the
body.

Body round, cylindrical in extension, very changeable in shape ;
posterior eiul abruptly narrowed into a small, round caudal portion
terminating in a small paj)illa. Head obtusely rounded or obliquely

A. JE. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of New England, etc.. 4.11

conical with an oblique lateral cephalic slit on each side ; mouth
small, opposite the posterior ends of the slits. No ocelli.

Color nearly uniform deep flesh-color. The salmon-colored ovaries
show through slightly, especially posteriorly, as transverse spots.

Length about 25""°; diameter 2-5"""'.

Bay of Fundy, off Head Harboi", Campo Bello Island, 40 fathoms,
mud, Aug. 2Y, 1870. (Catal. No. 117).

Micrura albida Verriii.

Micrura albida Verrill, Notice of Recent A-ddit. to Mar. Invert., Part I. in Proc.
National Mns., ii, p. 186, 1879.

Body slender, thickest and nearly round anteriorly, gradually
tapered and somewhat flattened posteriorly, with a small, slender
caudal papilla. Head flattened, narrow, obtuse, narroM'er than tlie
body. No ocelli. Lateral fossoe rather short, extending beyond the
mouth, not conspicuous. Color whitish, or pale yellowish, often be-
coming light red toward the head ; posteriorly often with grayish or
clay-colored internal mottlings along the sides, due to the repro-
ductive organs. Very sluggish in its motions.

Two specimens from 140 fathoms, ofi^ Cape Ann, apparently of
the same species, were milk white above, with fine specks of opaque
white, the ganglions showing as red spots ; they had a narrow l>ut
distinct ring of blue around the body, behind the head.

Length, 50 to 125"""; diameter 2-5 to 3""".

Common in the Gulf of Maine and Massachusetts Bay, on muddy
bottoms, in from 30 to 140 fathoms.

It is sluggish in its movements and constructs translucent tubes of
tough inucus,

Micrura inornata Veniii.

Micrura inornafM Verrill, Notice of Recent Addit. to Mar. Invert., Part i, iu
Proc. National Mns., ii, p. 18G, 1879.

PLATE XXXVII, FIGURE 7.

Body subterete, moderately elongated, thickest anteriorly or in
the middhi, gradually tapered to the somewhat flattened tail ; cau-
dal filament white, very slender and acute, sometimes as long as the
diameter of the body, but usually less. Head obtuse, often as wide
as the body or wider, somewhat flattened. Lateral fossae long, deep,
curve<l, extending to opposite the mouth, the latter not being very
far back. No ocelli. Color above, l)right cherry-red, varying to
dark red, the middle of the head l)rightest ; tail pale.

432 A. M Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of Neio Eagland, etc.

Length of largest specimens observed, about 75'"'"; breadth, 1-5 to
2'"'" in extension. Described from life.

Massachusetts Bay and Gulf of Maine, 45 to 110 fathoms, mud.

Resembles the young of Cerebratulus luHdus T^, whicli occurs
with it.

Cerebratulus Remer, 1804.

. Meckelia Leuckart, Breves Anim., p. 17, 1828 (t. Rathke); Diesing, Syst. Helm.

vol. i, p. 266, 1850.
Serpentaria Goodsir, Ann. Nat. Hist, vol. xvi, p. Si?, 1835.
Oerehratulus {jxirs) and Meckelia Stimpson, Prodrorans, p. 160, 1857.
Cerehratulm Mcintosh, British Annelids, Part T, Nemerteans, p. 194, 1873.
Cerebratulus (pars) Hiibreeht, Voy. Challenger, vol. xix, p. 37, 1887; Cams, Fauna

Medit., p. 160.

Body large, elongated, much flattened along the middle and pos-
terior portions and adapted for swimming by having the margins
produced and thin, mainly oAving to the unusual development of
the longitudinal muscular layers, which are greatly thickened, es-
pecially the outer layer, which, as seen in transverse sections, forms
a more or less triangular band, much thicker than elsewhere, (Plate
XXXIX, fig, 19, I). Transverse muscular l)undles running from the
upper to the lower sides of the inner surface of the body-wall (fig.
19, t') are also unusually well developed so as to aid in giving an un-
dulatory motion to the margin while swimming.

Anterior or oesophageal region large, with rounded margins (fig.
20). Ca^cal appendages of intestine numerous and crowded, elon-
gated, more or less forked and lobed at the outer ends, the divisions
occurring partly horizontally, and showing well in sagittal sections.

Head versatile in form, usually without ocelli. Cephalic lateral
slits or olfactory organs are large and deep. Mouth unusually
large, oblong or oval, rather far back. Proboscis very long and
slender ; in section showing decussated muscular layers medially,
above and below.

Anal papilla or cirrus often long and slender, delicate, con-
tractile, often M'an ting owing to injury. Tt contains a continuation
of the muscular layers of the body-wall.

Hubrecht has united Micrura to this genus, and in his report on
the Nemerteans of the Challenger Exp. he proposes also to unite
Lineus with it.

Such a wholesale massing together of these groups seems to me
unnecessarj^ and undesirable, and is, apparently, only thought of be-
cause of the diificulty of distinguishing the generic position of alco-

A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of JVe^o England, etc. 433

holie specimens — a difficulty tliat holds with quite as nuu!h force in
many other groups of animals, which lose many of their characters
by preservation in any known medium.

However, it seems to me that some of the large species referred to
Micrura by authors really belong to Cei'ebrattdus, especially those
like 31. fusca Mcintosh {non Fabr. sp.)

The differences noted by Mcintosh in the muscular layers of the
proboscis appears to me of less importance than the special muscular
structure of the body-wall which enables the species of Cerehratalus
to swim actively at the surface, while the more slender and rounded
species belonging to Micrura (restr.) and Linens, so far as I have
observed, are unable to swim, and do not voluntarily leave the
bottom.

The broad, flattened form of the body with thin tnargins is the
external expression of the internal musculature, adapting it to the un-
dulatory swimming motion.

Cerebratulus lacteus (Leidy) Veniii.

Meckelia frag ills Girard, Nord Arner. Monatsb., 1851 {non Goodsir, sp.)

Meckelia lactea Leidy, Proceedings Academy Natural Sciences of Pliiladelphia, vol.

V, p. 243, 1851, (young); Verrill, Invertebrate Animals of Vineyard Sound, p.

336 [630], 1873, (young), nou 0. lacteus Hubrecht, Mont. s\). = Liueus lacteus

Mcintosh.
f Meckelia Lizzice, Girard, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., vol. vi, p. 366, 1854.
Mecktlia iwjens Leidy, Marine Invertebrate Fauna of Rhode Island and New Jersey,

p. 11 (143), 1*855; Verrill, Invertebrate Animals of Vineyard Sound, p. 336 [630],

Plate XI.V, figures 96, 96a.

PLATE XXXV, FIGURES 1, \a ; PLATE XXXVI, FIGURE 2 ; PLATE
XXXVII, FIGURES 1, Irt, \b ; PLATE XXXIX, FfGURES 19, 20, 21.

Body flat, large and very long when full grown, sometimes becom-
ing fifteen to twenty feet long and upwards of an inch in breadth,
very contractile and changeable in length, breadth, and form.
While swimming the body is turned up edgewise and thrown into
many undulations and the motion resembles that of an eel, but is
less rapid. Tlie anterior part of the body for some distance back of
the head is, in usual extension, narrower and thicker than the rest,
with the margins rounded ; the body then expands rather rapidly
in breadth and at the same time becomes more flattened while the
margins become thin and pale, and throughout the rest of its length
the body continues thin and flat, gradually decreasing in breadth
and thickness toward the ])osterior end, which is usually obtuse, or
slightly emarginate, but occasionally, or when perfect, terminates in

434 A. E. Yerrill — Marine Nernerteans of New JEnylatul, etc.

a slender aiuil papilla. The posterior end is, however, seldom seen
entire, owing to its extreme fragility and its tendency to disrupt it-
self when irritated. When disturbed the middle region of the body
often contracts, while the anterior becomes thick and swollen.

The increase in breadth of the body and enlargement of the mar-
ginal regions marks the commencement of the crowded lateral lobes
of the stomach and the genital organs, which can usually be seen
through the translucent integuments ; the caecal lobes of the intes-
tine usually appear as closely arranged, transverse, oblong spots,
forming a regular row along each side, from their commencement
nearly to the posterior end of the body, and usually having a slight-
ly darker or more brownish tint than the central and marginal
regions. The ctecal appendages, when seen from above or below,
usually appear as simple, narrow, but often forked, and closely ar-
ranged lobes, but when examined in sagittal sections they are most-
ly lobed and forked horizontally. The genital organs are closely
crowded between the enseal pouches of the stomach, digitally.

The head is exceediugly changeable in shape, according to its
state of contractiou or expansion, but is usually narrower and thinner
than the adjacent part of the body. In full extension it is usually
broad spear-shaped or rhomboidal, and more or less pointed at the
ajsex, while marked lateral constrictions separate it posteriorly from
the body, but in another moment it may contract to a broad rounded
form, or it may even become deeply emarginate in front, with
rounded lateral lobes, or it may change to a very narrow and elon-
gated form with a sharp point. Ocelli are wanting.

The lateral cephalic slits are large and deep, extending the entire
length of the head, and running forward close to and a little above
the proboscis-pore, those of opposite sides not uniting together ex-
cept by a very shallow furrow ; they do not join the proboscis-pore,
so that the snout is not four-lobed at tip, as in some allied species.
Their margins are thin and mobile, often undtdated or curled back
so as to open the slits widely and expose the deej) posterioi- pits,
which, in life, are dull red within. Proboscis-poi'e large, terminal or
subterminal.

Mouth very large, but variable in form as the head varies in
shape, most frequently appearing as a long, narrow oval or oblong-
slit, its anterior end opposite the posterior ends of the lateral slits.

Proboscis exceedingly long, slender, round, whitish, and, nearly
smooth. When the worm is placed in alcohol or other irritating
fluid the proboscis is usually ejected entirely without eversion (PI.

A. M. Verrill — Marine Nemcrteans of Neio England^ etc. 435

XXXV, fig. la); in large specimens it is fonr feet or more long, and 3
or 4'"'" in diameter at the large end.

Color of small and moderate-sized specimens is translucent milk-
white, cream-color, pale tlesh-color, and occasionally pale salmon or
pale pink, with the margins paler and more translucent ; larger indi-
viduals are generally deeper flesh-color, cream-color, light salmon or
ocher-yellow, and occasionally dull gray ; the ca^cal appendages of the
intestine and the i*eproductive organs appear as a more opaque
yellowish or pale brownish liand along each side, near the pale
margins ; the latei-al nerve-trunks are reddish.

Length of Ordinary adult specimens, in extension, 500 to 1200""";
breadth in middle 15 to 22'""'; some specimens ai*e more than double
these sizes.

Common, burrowing both in sand and mud at and above low-
water mark, and in shallow water down to several fathoms in depth,
from Florida to Massnclinsetts Bay, and locally found on the coast
of Maine.

It is particularly abundant near low-water mark on the sheltered
sandy shores of the New Jersey estuaries ; Long Island Sound ; Buz-
zard's Bay ; Vineyard Sound ; Cape Cod ; and at Annisquam, Mass.,
noith of Cape Ann. I have taken a number of well grown examples
at Quahog Bay, on the coast of Maine, where it is associated with a
colony of other southern species. I have not found it in the Bay of
Fundy, where it is replaced by a closely allied arctic species (C
JuscKs). Its southern range is not well determined, but I have seen
specimens from Fort Macon, North Carolina, and others from St.
Augustine, Fla., and Charleston, S. C, (W. R. Coe).

The largest specimen hitherto obtained I personally dug from the
sand at low-water mark at Great Egg Harbor, N. J., April, 18'72.
This one, when extended, was 22 feet long and nearly an inch in
breadth, in the middle. It could contract, however, to less than 6
feet in length, becoming, at the same time, much broader, thicker,
and firmer. This gigantic specimen is, apparently, the most bulky
nemertean that has ever been described, though species of Lineus
far exceed it in length.

When preserved in alcohol it contracts very firmly and shows very
plainly the contrast between the form of the anterior and middle
regions of the body, the latter being decidedly fiat with thinner mar-
gins. The head takes various shapes.

In alcoholic specimens the mouth is usually large and open.
Sometimes numerous small whitish papillae, probably containing the

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 57 June, 1892.

436 A. E. VerriJl — Marine Nemerteans of Nexc England, etc.

genital pores, can be seen a short distance from the mai'gin, both
above and below ; sometimes there are several in each transverse
row ;-at other times only two or three are visible.

In transverse sections the great thickening of the interior longitn-
dinal muscular layer in the marginal areas is strongly marked. (PI.
XXXIX, figure 19.)

The earliest name of this species that can be retained is apparently
G. lacteva (Leid)"), which was given to the white specimens tliat
I now regard as the young of this species. I have adopted this
name for the species, notwithstanding that Linens lacteiis (Mont.)
Mcintosh is now referred to Cerehratuhis by Hubrecht. That the
latter belongs to Cerehratuhtx, as here defined, I do not think |)os-
sible,

A large species (C. Pocohontas) from Charelston, S. C, ver}^
briefly described by Girard under tlu; name of Mechelia Pocohontas*
appeal's to be very similar to our species in size (3 feet long), form, and
color, but he states that the snout, is split vertically [by the proboscis-
pore], indicating that the cephalic slits join the proboscis-pore in front,
so that the snout, as he states, is four-lobed at the tip, which is not the
case in our species. (J. Lizzia', from the same place, described in
few words, at the same time (op. cit. p. 367), agrees with our species
in respect to the color, snout, and slits, and may be identical with it.

C. striolenta [Leodes strlolenta. Girard, loc. cit.) also from Charles-
ton, appears to be a typical Cerehratidus, but it is a very distinctly
mai'ked species, having a pink body, longitudinally striped, and with
dark longitudinal blotches on the head ; margins pale ; length six
inches ; no ocelli.

Cerebratulus Leidyi Yeniii.

J/ecW/a, rowo, Leiily, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., vol. v, p. 244, 1851; Verrill,

Invert, of Vineyard Sound, etc., pp. 336, [630] 1873.
? Renieria rubra Girard, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., vol. vi, p. 306, 18r)4.
CerebratMlus roseit^YnTYxW, Check List Invert., p. 12, 1879, (»ow C. roseus {T>. C\i.)
Hubrecht).

rr.ATE xxxviii, figures 2, 2a.

Body elongated, rather slender in extension, rounded in the oeso-
phageal region, decidedly flattened and wider farther back, l)ut not
so much so as in C. lacteux and allied s})ecies, nor do the margins be-
come so broad and thin. Caudal papilla of moderate length, slender,
white, often absent, owing to injury.

*Proc. Acad. Nat. Sciences, Philad.. vol. vi, p. 366, 1854,

A. E. Verrill — 3Iarine JVemerteanfi of JVew England, etc. 437

Head versatile, in extension decidedly long and narrow, often nar-
rower than the body, regularly tapered to the acute tip.

Mouth large, elongated, with slightly crenulated white lips ; its
anterior end is about opposite the posterior ends of the lateral slits.

Lateral cephalic slits long and deep, with thin, translucent mar-
gins, often curved back so as to show the large interior cavity ; in
front they run very close to the proboscis-pore, which, in contrac-
tion, appears as a sub-terminal vertical slit. Proboscis very lono- and
slender, pale pink in color. No ocelli. Cephalic ganglions laro-e
showing through the integument as dark red spots.

Color of body dull red, or rose-color, or pale purplish, somewhat
lighter beneath ; usually with a lighter colored median line, and a
red spot in the head corresponding to the ganglions ; front of head
and mouth area Avhitish ; the closely arranged c;ecal lobes of the in-
testine often show through the integument, especially beneath, as
a pale brown baud along each side. These ctecal appendages are nu-
merous, and many of them are divided into two or three lobes dis-
tally.

Very common, burrowing in sand near low-water mark, from New
Jersey to Cape Ann, Mass. It is abundant near New Haven, Conn.;
Thimble Islands and Noank, Conn.; Newport, R. I.; and Wood's
Holl, Mass.

This is a more strictly littoral species than the preceding. It sel-
dom occurs much below low-water mark. The mucus that it secretes
is more tenacious than that of most species, so that captive s])ecimens
often cover themselves quickly with adherent sand.

This species is generally found associated with C. lacteus, from
which it can easily be distinguished by its decidedly red color, and
its narrower and more slender body, without the very thin margins.
It is also a more sluggish species and seldom swims freely. It is
prone to break itself in fragments when captured.

It is unfortunate that the name roseus, which applies so well to
this species, cannot be retained on account of the much earlier named
Mediterranean species. I have, therefore, given it a new name in
honor of Professor Leidy, who tirst described it.

It is quite probable, however, that C. rubra {=:Iie?iierla rubra
Girard, op. cit., p. 366, 1854) is identical with this species. Girard's
description is too brief and indefinite to determine this question.
He describes C. rubra as uniform brick-red, paler beneath, and as
lacking eyes ; length 5 to 6 inches. Its form was nearly as in the
present species. It was from Charleston, S. C, on sand-tiats at Fort
Johnson.

438 A. E. Merrill — Marbie Nemerteans of New England^ etc.

CerebratuluS fuSCUS (Fabr.) Venill.

Planariafusca Fiihw, Fauua Groulandica, p. :{2'l, 1780.

Meckelia olivacea Rathke, Beitrage zur Fauna Norvvegeus, p. 324, 1843 (from Acta

Akad. Ca3S. Leop. Carol. Nat. Cur., vol. xx, 1843).
Serpentaria fragilis G-oodsir, Aim. Nat. Hist., vol. xv, p. 387, pi. 20, tigs. 1 and 2,

1845.
Jieckelia se7-2>e7ita'na Diesiug,Syste\na lielm., vol. i, p. 266, 1850.
Gordius fragilib- Dalyell, Povk^. Great., vol. ii, p. 55, pis. 0, 7, and 7 (his), 1853.
Meckelia serpentaria Leuck-Avi, Arcliiv. fur Naturges., ii, p. 187, 1859.
Serpentaria fragilis Johnston, Catalogue Brit. Mus., p 28, 1865.
CerebratuluS angulatus Mcintosh, British Annelids, part i, Neraerteans, p. 195, 1873.
Cerebratulus (?) sp. undeter. («) Verrill, Report on Invert. Anim. of Vineyard Sound,

p. 336 [630], 1874.
Cerebralulus fragilis (!) Janseu, op. cit., p. 85, 1878.
Cerebrniuhis grandis (Sars) Jensen, op. cit., p.. 97, pi. 8, figs. 17-22.
Cerchratulas fusce.sceus Levinsen, Bidrag til kuudskab om Groulands Turbellarie-

fauna, p. 40 [202], 1879.

PLATE X.XXVII, Kl<;URES 2 TO 2c.

Body large, stout, rounded for a considerable distance back of the
head, and thence broad and much flattened to the posterior end, the
edges thin and usually pale in color. Head very changeable in
form, often broad lance-shaped, with acute snout, changing (piickly
to ovate, rounded,' or even emarginate forms. Ocelli wanting.
Mouth large, oblong. Cephalic slits large and deep, moderately
long ; they do not meet in front, nor run into the proboscis-})Ore,
but lie in a higher i)lane Anal cirrus slender, easily detached.

Color, above, dull ash-gra}^, greenish gray, slate-color, clay-color,
o-rayish olive, or dirty brown, paler below, and with paler margins,
within which, on each side, a red line, showing through theintegumeut?
marks the position of the large lateral nerves. Sometimes the back is
mottled with lighter, and darker gray or slate ; mouth surrounded by
white, reddish at the anterior angle.

Length np to two feet or more. A specimen taken at Todd's
Head, Eastport, Me., under stones at low-water, Aug. 19, 1870,
measured 400'"'" in length, when moderately extended ; breadth, in
middle, 12 to 14'"'", but it could contract to less than 100'""' in
length.

This is a northern and arctic species. I have taken it at Halifax,
]^. S.; Grand Menan, N. B,; Eastport, Me., under stones and in
sand and gravel near low water mark, and beyond in shallow water
to 20 fathoms or more. South of Cape Cod it occurs in 15 to 45
fathoms on bottoms of sand and mud in the cold areas swept by the

A. E. Yerrill — Marine Nemerteans of New England, etc. 439

arctic current, as off Gay Head, in 19 fathoms, and off Block Island,
in 29 fathoms. It is also found on the coasts of Greenland, northern
Europe, and Scotland.

This species usually lives in burrows under stones, in muddy or
sandy places, at and below low-water mark, but when disturbed it
swims readily and rapidly with vigorous eel-like undulations of the
posterior flattened portion of its body, which is carried with the
greater diameter vertical while swimming. In this habit it agrees
with (J. lacteus and several other large species, but it is, perhaps,
more active and more vigorous than C. lacteus, and somewhat less
liable to disrupt its body when captured. Like C. lacteas it is oc-
casionally taken at night in surface nets, showing that it is nocturnal
in its habits and voluntarily leaves its burrows and swims free at
the surface.

After long preservation in alcohol the slate-color of the body and
the white margins are often distinctly visible. In some alcoholic
specimens the small and slender anal papilla is still preserved, but it is
so fragile that it is generally lost during capture or in the violent
contractions caused by the alcohol.

Our species is probably identical with the European species
named C. angulatus by Mcintosh, who supposed his species to be
the JPlanaria angulata of Fabricius (Fauna Grunlandica). The
latter is, however, our Aniph'qoorus angulatus, as stated on a former
page.

Formerly* I supposed that the Greenland species named Planaria
fusca by Fabricius might be the brown variety of Lineus virldis,
but a more careful study of his description, in which the absence of
ocelli, the presence of lateral cephalic slits, the rounded form of the
anterior, and the distinctly flattened form of the posterior part of the
body are mentioned, has convinced me that the species he had in
hand was the common dark-colored, large, northern Cerehrattdus,
which has received many later names. His statement that it lives
in sand on the shores conflrms this view. Moreover, this same Cere-
brat'idus has been recently recoi'ded from the Gi*eenland coast and
referred to the Fabrician species by Levinsen, as quoted above. He,
however, adopts the later emended form of the name, quite unneces-
sarily it seems to me. Hence I have restored the original name, first
given by Fabricius to this species.

* Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. ii, p. 185, 1879.

440 A. E. Verrill — 3Iarine Nemerteans of JVeio Em/land, etc.
Cerebratulus luridus Veniii.

Meckelia lurida Verrill, Report ou Invert of Vineyard Sound, etc., p. 33U [630],

1873.
Cerebrattilm luridus Verrill, Check List Invert., p. 12, 1879.

PLATE XXXVl, FIGURE 3 ; PLATE XXXVII, FIGURE 3.

Body large, rather stout, very changeable in form, broad, flat,
thin posteriorly, where the lateral cteca and reproductive organs are
developed ; these diminish anteriorly and do not extend forward
into the narrower, rounder, and thicker portion which occupies
nearly one-fourth the whole length. Head very changeable, often
separated from the body by a constriction ; in expansion often
spade-shaped, obtuse, or pointed. Lateral cephalic slits very long and
deep ; in front they are connected together by a shallow furrow,
above the proboscis-pore. Mouth large, usually in the form of a
long slot, commencing about opposite the posterior end of the lateral
slits. Proboscis long and slender. Caudal papilla small, slender,
acute.

Color reddish brown to dark olive-brown, chocolate-color, or
purplish brown, darkest anteriorly, and with pale margins ; the
cfecal lobes of the intestine show through the integument as dull
brownish or ocher-yellow transyerse bars ; usually there is a brown
or reddish median dorsal line, and a pale ventral line. Some dark
specimens are marked with several narrow lighter reddish or pur-
plish longitudinal lines. Young specimens are usually reddish brown
or liver-brown with paler snouts.

Length 150 to 250"""; breadth 8 to 12'"'", Described from life,
(No. '723).

Off Gay Head, 19 fathoms, soft mud, 1871 ; off Buzzard's Bay, 25
fathoms ; and off Block Island, 29 fathoms, sandy mud, 1871 ; Casco
Bay, 10 to 68 fathoms, 1873 ; Massachusetts Bay, in many localities,
1877, 1878, 1879, in 10 to 100 fathoms; Bay of Fundy ; off Hali-
fax, N. S., etc., common ; off Martha's Vineyard, 192 fathoms, 1883.
Numerous specimens of various sizes from 1 to 8 inches long were
taken in Cape Cod Bay, in 15 to 21 fathoms, soft mud, Aug. 29, 1879.
The larger ones were filled Avith eggs.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Neinerteans of Nexc England^ etc. 441

TIOUBTFUI. SPECIES.

CerebratuluS medullatUS Hubrecht, Voyage of the Challenger, vol. xix,
pp. 39, 50, pi. xi, fig. 10 ; pi. xii, figs. 9, 10, 1818.

PLATE XXXIX, FIGURE 17.

Tliis species was described from a mere fragment, without head or
tail. It is said, however, to differ from other species in the structure
of the body-wall, which is thinner than usual.

The inner glandular layer of the integument and the inner base-
ment membrane are wanting, as distinct layers, so that the outer
glandular layer and its basement layer are in contact with the outer-
longitudinal muscular layer. The median dorsal nerve, or nervous
thickening, is also unusually large and distinct, being from one-
third to one-fourth as thick as the core of the lateral nerve-trunks.

Off Nova Scotia, in 85 fathoms.

This species is probably not a Cerebratulus, as here defined, but
more likely belongs to Lineus or Micrura, and perhaps to some
of the speties described above.

Suborder II, GYMNOCEPHALA.

Holocephala Diesing, 1850, non Miill., 1835.

Gymnocephnlidce, Kefferstein, Zeitsch. fiir wiss. Zoo!., xii, 1862.

Ano'pla. (pars) Mcintosh, Nemerteans, p. 203.

PalmonemfiTiini Hubi'echt ; Canis.

Palceonemertea Hubrecht, Voy. Challenger, xix, p. 5, 1887.

Palwomertina Lang, Text-Book of Comparative Anat., p. 178, 1891.

Head without lateral slits, but sometimes having shallow trans-
verse or oblique fossae connected with small, ciliated (olfactory)
pouches or ducts leading to the posterior ganglions ; sometimes des-
titute of both fossiB and ciliated ducts. Mouth distinct, situated
back of the ganglions.

Proboscis long and slender, more simple in structure than in the
Rhagadocephala. Usually only two (lateral) longitudinal blood
vessels are present.

Ocelli often numerous, variously arranged, sometimes wanting.

Lateral nerve trunks sometimes situated between the basal layer
of the cutis and the external circular muscular layer ; sometimes
outside of the longitudinal muscular layer; and sometimes in the
midst of the muscular layer of the body-wall ; usually connected
with a continuous nervous plexus.

442 A. K. Verrill — 3farine Nemerteans of JVew England^ etc.

In the classification adopted by Hubrecht and several other
writers this group and the Rhagadocephala (or ScJtizonertina) are
both raised to the same rank as the Eitopla. To rae they appear to
be of subordinate value, as here indicated.

The species are all marine, and, so far as known, none of them
undergo a marked metamorphosis.

Family, Cephalothricid^e Mcintosh, Nemerteans, p. 208.

Uody slender. Head elongated. Superior ganglions and com-
missure situated decidedly in front of inferior ones. Cephalic fossa^
and pits wanting. Ocelli usually few or absent ; sometimes numer-
ous. Two longitudinal blood vessels.

Cephalothrix fErsted, Kroyer's Tidss., iv, p. 573, 1844.

Astemma CErtsted, Kroyer's Tidss., iv, p. 574, 1844 (t. Mclntosli).

Body slender, terete or nearly so. Head terete, much elongated,
tapering to a point in extension. Mouth small, situated far back.

Cephalothrix linearis (Rathke) (Ersted.

Plamiria linearis Jens Rathke, Skrivter nf Natiirhist. Selsk., vol. v, p. 84, tab. 3,
fig. 11, 1799.

Planariafiliforrnis Johnston, Zool. Jour., vol. iv, p. 56, 1829 (t. Mcintosh).

Nemerf.es {Borlasia) rufifrons Johnston, Mag. Zool. and Bot., vol. i, p. 538, pi. xviii,
figs. 4 and 5, 1837 (t. Mcintosh).

Cephalothrix linearis G5rsted, Entw. Plattw., p. 82 (note under C. cceca), 1844 (t.
Mcintosh).

Cephalothrix bioculato (Ersted, Kro3'er's Nat. Tidss., vol. iv, p. 573, 1844 (t. Mc-
intosh).

Astemma fill formis iohn?,\.on, Catalogue Brit. Mus., p. 19, 18G5.

Cephalothrix filiformis Mcintosh, Rept Brit. Assoc, 1867, Trans. Sect., p. 92, 1867.

Cephalothrix linearis Mcintosh, British Annelids, Part I, Nemerteans, p. 208, pi. IV,
figs. 4 and 5; pi. xviii, fig. 15; pi. xxi, figs. 2, 8, 13; pi. xxni, figs. 12 to 16,
1873.

Plate xxxvi, figures 4, 5; plate xxxix, figures 10 to 13, 14, 15.

Body small, nearh' terete, changeable ; in extension very slender,
elongated, often linear or hair-like, fre(piently coiled in a close spiral
form, usually rather thickest in the middle and tapered both Avays,
but often with the posterior end thicker and obtuse. Head very
long and round, in full extension tapering to a slender sharp tip, in
contraction often circularly wrinkled ; usually, in mature specimens,
without distinct ocelli ; sometimes dark specks of pigment, irregu-
larly arranged, resemble imperfect ocelli. Young examples usually

A. JE. Verrill — Marine Nemerfeaiis of Neio England. 443

have a pair of distinct ocelli. No cephalic slits nor fossae. Mouth
small, situated far back from the snout ; and usually Avith slightly
prominent lips.

Color pale yellow, flesh-color, or cream-color, varying to pale
salmon and greenish white, often with the anterior region deeper
salmon or reddish, or with a median red line ; sometimes the poste-
rior part of body is bright salmon ; the head and anterior portions
of body often show a whitish or drab median line, due to the pro-
boscis ; lower surface paler than the upper. Proboscis very long
and slender ; when exerted, covered with slender acute papillae.

Length 50 to 75""" ; diameter -5 to 1""".

Long Island Sound to Nova Scotia, at many localities, between
tides under stones and in sand. Noank, Conn. ; Newport, R. L ;
Wood's Holl, Mass. ; Portland, Me. ; Eastport, Me. ; Halifax, N. S.,
etc. Also common on the northern coasts of Europe.

This species often occurs gregariously, many individuals being
intricately coiled up together in a mass, often mingled with numer-
ous pale young ones, of various sizes.

Family, Carinellid.e Mcintosh.

Body elongated, roundish, decreasing backward. Head broader
than body, obtuse anteriorly. Mouth small, not far back. Cejshalic
shallow fossae and olfactory sacs present. Ocelli often Avanting.

Carinina Hubrecht, Voy. Challenger, vol. xix, p. 5.

" Closely allied to Carhiella, from which it dift'ers in the presence
of a distinct posterior brain lobe, situated with the rest of the brain
and nerve-stems in the integument, outside of the body musculature.
A ciliated canal penetrates into this posterior brain lobe."

Carinina grata Hubrecht, op. cit., pi. i, figs. l-3; plates II, III, IV; pi. vi, figs.
1-3; pi. XI, figs. 1, 2.

This species is known only from two alcoholic specimens, which
were very fully studied anatomically.

Off the East Coast of the U. S. States in 1240 and 1340 fathoms.

Trans. Conn. Aoad., Vol. VIII. 58 Dec, 1892.

444 ^4. E. Verrill — Marine Nejnerte,(ins of New England.

Order III, B DEL L OMO RPH A.

Body short, stout, flattened, and leech-like in appearance, Avith a
large rounded sucker or acetabulum at the posterior end, as in the
leeches. Head indistinct. No ocelli. Anterior end emarginate,
with neither lateral slits nor grooves. Mouth at the bottom of the
anterior emargination.

Proboscis seldom protruded in captivity, small, slender, unarmed,
but with a small special bulb and sac in the middle region ; probos-
cis-poi'e close to the mouth, in the anterior notch.

Intestine not lobulated, slender, convoluted, longer than the
body ; anus at the base of the sucker. Reproductive organs volum-
inous, filling the larger part of the body. A median dorsal and two
lateral blood-vessels, with numerous branches.

Muscular walls of the body consist of an external circular, and an
internal longitudinal layer. Lateral nerve-trunks ai'e not included
in the muscular layers ; they are united by a posterior commissure.

This singular group is united to the Enopla by some writers,
mainly on account of the rudimentary bulb and sac in the proboscis,
which certainly indicate some relationship. The simple, convoluted
intestine and other peculiar features appear to me of ordinal value.

Family, Malacobdellid^ Semper.
Characters not distinguishable from those of the sub-order.

Malacobdella Biaiuviiie.

Diet. Sci. Nat., vol. xlvi, p. 270 ; Blanchard, Ann. des sci. nat., ser. 3, vol. iv, p.
364, 1845 ; op. cit., viii, p. 142, 1847 ; op. cit., vol. xii, pp. 267-276, pi. 5, 1849, anatomy.
Phyllme Oken, 1815, (non Abilg-, 1790).

This is the only genus of the order known. Therefore the generic
characters are not distinguishable from those of the ordei-.

Malacobdella obesa Verriii.

Report on Invert, of Vineyard Sound, etc., pp. 458 [164] and 625 [331], pi.
xvm, fig. 90, 1873.

Wood-cut, No. 9.
Body stout, broad, thick, convex above, flat below, broadest near
the posterior end, narrowing somewhat anteriorly ; the front end is
broadly rounded, with a median vertical slit, in which the mouth is
situated. Acetabulum large, rounded, about as broad as the body.
Intestine convoluted posteriorly, visible through the integument.

A. E. Verrill— Marine Nemerteans of New England. 445

Between the intestine and lateral margins, especially posteriorly, the
skin is covered with small stellate spots, looking like openings,
around which are large numbers of small round reproductive vesi-
cles. Color yellowish white. Length, 30 to 40"""; breadth, 12 to

15""".

Whole coast of New England ; abundant in Massachusetts Bay-
Parasitic in the branchial cavity of the long clam {Mya arenaria).
This species is closely related to M. grossa of Europe, and may

prove to be identical with it. The latter occurs mostly in 3fya

truncata and Gyprina. Islandica.

Fig. 9. Malacobiit'lld obrsa, dorsal view, nat. size.

Malacobdella mercenaria Verriii.

Malacobdella grosaa Leidy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sciences Philad., vol. v, p. 209 (non

Blainville).
Malacobdella mercenaria Verrill, Report on Invert, of Vineyard Sound, etc., pp

458 [164] and 625 [331], 1873.

Plate xxxix, figure 20.

Body, in extension, elongated, oblong, with nearly parallel sides,
or tapering slightly anteriorly ; ' anterior end broad, obtusely
rounded, emarginate in the center, but not deeply fissured. In con-
traction the body is broader posteriorly. Dorsal surface a little
convex ; lower side flat. Acetabulum round, rather small, about
half the diameter of the body in the contracted state, but nearly as
broad when the body is fully extended. The intestine shows
through the integument distinctly ; it is slender, and makes about
seven turns or folds. Color pale yellow, with minute white specks
beneath and on the upper surface anteriorly, giving it a hoary ap-
pearance ; middle of the dorsal surface irregularly marked with
flake-white ; laterally reticulated with fine white lines.

Length in extension, 25'"'" ; breadth, 4'""' ; in partial contraction,
18'""" long ; 5 to 6'^"" wide.

New Haven, parasitic in the branchial cavity of the round clam
{Venus mercenaria), October, 1871. Philadelphia, in the same
species of clam (Leidy).

446 A. E. Verrill — Marine JSlemerUans of New England.

Addenda to the Enopla,

I take this opportunity to describe two very remarkable new forms
of pelagic nemerteans, of which several specimens were taken by
the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, in the region of the
Gulf Stream. Whether they occurred at the surface or near the
bottom I am unable to say, but their form and structure is eminently
adapted to a purely pelagic mode of life. In form they somewhat
recall Sagltta, though they are much larger and stouter. The in-
ternal structure is, however, entirely nemertean, and not very differ-
ent from that of the typical Enopla. In that grouj), however, they
should form at least a distinct family {Nectonemertidm) . They also
have some affinity with Pelagoneniertes^ but differ from that genus
widely in form, as well as in having a distinct head and caudal fin,
lateral cirriform organs in one species, etc. The latter, moreover,
has long, much subdivided intestinal diverticula, which is not the
case with our new genera. The resemblance in the structure of the
muscular walls of the body and the nervous system is quite marked.

Several forms occur among the few specimens of Nectonemertidm
hitherto obtained. Some of them are entirely destitute of the lat-
eral arms or cirri of the neck, which in others ai'e large and long
and give them a very striking appearance. But as small specimens
of Nectonemertes occur in which the lateral cirri are of small size,
it is pi'obable that they would be entirely absent in still smaller
specimens of that genus. In the second genus [Hyalonemertea)
they are probably never developed.

Although I have prepared many microscopic sections of two
specimens of N'ectonemertes of different ages, I have not yet had
suflicient opportunity to work out several important parts of their
anatomy, — especially the structure of the brain and certain special
organs in the head, supposed to be sensory. But since there is, at
this time, no opportunity to illustrate the details of the anatomy,
I propose to describe here only the more prominent features, reserv-
ing details for another occasion.

Family, Xectoxemertid.e Verrill.

Body with highly muscular striated walls, adapted for swimming
actively, elongated, more or less flattened, and with a differentiated,
muscular caudal fin ; the dorsal and ventral surfaces are similar.

Proboscis with a distinct bulb and sac. Mouth far forward, close
to the proboscis-pore. Intestine straight, with large lateral pouches.

A. M. Verrill — Marine Nemertecms of J^ew England. 447

which are often bilobed ; anus at the posterior end of the caudal fin.
Lateral nerves large, not included in the muscular walls of the
body, united posteriorly. A median dorsal, and two lateral blood-
vessels are well developed.

Muscular walls of the body are composed mainly of a thin, outer,
circular layer and a thicker inner, longitudinal muscular layer, in
which the fibers are arranged in distinct bundles, except in the thin-
ner marginal regions. A pair of long, muscular, cirriform appen-
dages is developed from the sides of the nuchal region in one genus.

Nectonemertes, gen. nov.

Body decidedly flattened and with thin borders along the sides ;
caudal fin usually broadest at the end and sometimes bilobed. Head
separated from the body by a more or less distinct neck-like portion.
Lateral cirriform appendages project from the neck or posterior part
of the head, in the adult. Mouth near the front of the head, just
below the terminal proboscis-pore.

Proboscis long, slender, with a small bulb and sac ; its sheath ex-
tends nearly to the posterior end of body. Lateral lobes of the
intestine exist nearly to the end of the intestine, even into the cau-
dal fin.

Special sense organs,* imbedded in the integument of the lower
side of the head, form a cluster on each side, their ends projecting
as small papilla?. Eyes of the ordinary type are, apparently, want-
ing. Probably the species are transparent in life and swim actively,
like Sagitta.

Nectonemertes mirabilis Veiriil, sp. nov.

I^LATE X.V.Wiri, FIGURE 1.

Description of the adult: Size large, up to 2 inches or more in
length. Bodj' rather elongated, decidedly flattened and with
abruptly thinner marginal regions, smooth, with the walls somewhat
translucent, longitudinally and transversely striated, elastic ; in the
middle region of the body the sides are nearly parallel ; posteriorly
it narrows rather rapidly to the base of the tail, and at this place, in
some examples, the thin marginof the body forms a sort of fin or
thin rounded lobe on each side.

*The precise nature of these organs has not been ascertained, but they are prob-
ably special sense organs.

448 A. E. Verrill — 3Iarine Nemerteans of Nevi England.

The tail gradually thins out to the end and at the saine time in-
creases in width by the development of the thin marginal regions,
thus forming a true caudal fin, in form somewhat like that of a fish.
Its posterior mai'gin is emarginate in the largest specimens, with a
distinct notch in the- middle, Adhere the anus is situated, but in other
specimens it is truncate. The integument of the tail shows strong
longitudinal muscular fibers toward its base, while the edges are thin
and delicate.

The head is ovate in form, narrowest, but obtuse, in front, consid-
erably flattened, and usually separated from the body by a distinctly
narrower neck. From the back part of the head, or commencement
of the neck, a long, tapering cirrus arises on each side. The cirri
have a thick, roundish, muscular base from which they taper gradu-
ally to the long, slender, lash-like, often coiled tip. These organs
seem to be mere extensions of the muscular walls of the body and
are not hollow.

On the ventral surface of the head and occupying a large ovate
patch on each side, there is a group of small acute papillae, pro-
jecting slightly above the surface ; they are arranged in three or
four irregular rows, and are connected beneath the integument with
pyriform organs which can be seen by transmitted light as opaque
yellowish bodies.

The proboscis-sheath is well developed and extends back nearl}^ to
the base of the tail, where it is abruptly naiTOwed to a short muscular
band that joins the wall of the body. The proboscis is long and
slender, with a small rounded muscular bulb* and a small saccular
organ, much as in ordinary Enopla, though relatively smaller.
When the proboscis is partially protruded, as is the case in one ex-
ample, it is somewhat clavatc distally and is covered with small
papillae. In transverse sections its structure is similar to that of the
typical Enopla; its internal glandular layer is thick.

The intestine is large and straight ; its lateral pouches are large,
not much elongated, mostly bilobed distally, those in the tail becom-
ing small and simple. The generative organs, in the form of rather
large, round or ovate vesicles, occupy the lateral and ventral regions
of the body-cavity, between and beyond the intestinal pouches.

In transverse sections the walls of the body are rather thin ; the
outer layer of circular muscular fibers is thinner than the inner

*I have been unable to find any armature in the only specimen hitherto prepared
for this purpose, but the stylets, if they existed, may have been destroyed by the
acidity of the alcohol in which it was preserved.

A. E. Verrill — Marine JVemerteaus of New England. 449

layer, wliich is made up of longitudinal fibers arranged in bundles,
80 that its inner surface, in the sections, is strongly crenulated, or
deeply furrowed ; from the indentations between these bundles nu-
merous strong vertical bands oif muscular fibei's extend from the dor-
sal to the ventral body-walls, between the internal organs. Toward
the margins the muscular layers thin out rather abruptly, leaving
the marginal portions thin and without longitudinal bundles. The
general structure of the interior of the body-cavity is loose, with
many spaces in the porous parenchyma, which is feebly developed,
as compared with that of other nemerteans.

The lateral nerve-trunks are very large and quite interior to the
muscular layers. They are situated ventrally, some distance from
the edges, and near the commencement of the thin-walled marginal
portion of the body. In transverse sections they are elliptical or
rounded, with an excentric translucent fibrous core along the dorsal
side, thus giving the cellular portion a thick-lunate or reniform shape.
The lateral nerves are large and conspicuous even back to the caudal
fin, where those of opposite sides unite.

The median dorsal blood-vessel and the two lateral blood-vessels
are well developed and situated nearly as in typical Enopla. The
lateral blood-vessels are subventral and only a short distance interior
to the nerve-trunks.

There are no memoranda as to the color of the living specimens.
All had been placed in alcohol when first seen by me. One that had
been in alcohol only a short time was distinctly salmon, or pale
orange, in tint ; the others had lost all color, if they had any when
living. They may have been white or colorless, and were doubtless
translucent, like many other pelagic creatures. Even in alcohol
some of them show considerable translucency, — nearly as much as
the larger sj^ecies of Sagitta.

The largest specimens, when first examined by me, were about 2 '5
inches long and '50 wide ; subsequently they have contracted con-
siderably by long preservation in strong alcohol.

The largest specimen now measures as follows : length 38"^'" ;
breadth of body O™'" ; vertical diameter of body 2'"'" ; length of
cirri 14'"'" ; length of head 4""" ; breadth of head 6""" ; breadth
of caudal fin 4'°'".

Descriptions of immature s^^ecimens : A specimen from station
2076 is smaller and more slender than those described above. It
has a narrower head and shows scarcely any constriction at the neck.
The caudal fin is somewhat elliptical, being widest in the middle and

450 A. E. Verrill— Marine Nemerteans of ISfeiv England.

truncate at the end. Otherwise it agrees very well with the larger
specimens. The cirri are, however, relatively shorter, their length
being scarcely more than the breadth of the bod}^, but they taper to
slender tips, as do those of the adults. They are directed back-
ward. ,

This specimen is somewhat translucent in alcohol and the thin,
marginal bands are very distinct along the sides of the body and in
the tail fin. The intestinal pouches, proboscis-sheath, and other in-
ternal organs show more or less distinctly, especially posteriorly.
In the head there are about 20 sense organs (?) in each lateral
cluster.

Length 35'"'" ; breadth of body 5'"'" ; length of head to base of
cirri 4'"'" ; its breadth 4'""' ; length of cirri 5""".

Perhaps this may be a male and the larger and flatter specimens
females.

A specimen from station 2229 agrees in most respects with the
fuUgrown ones described above, except that it is smaller and has
short nuchal cirri. In this the body is relatively narrower and less
flattened than in the larger examples, but the head, caudal fln, and
proboscis are nearly as described and figured. The nuchal cirri are,
however, short, tapered, blunt, not much longer than half the
breadth of the head, and stand out rather rigidly from the sides
of the neck, and nearly at right angles with it.

This specimen is about 30'""' long ; 7'""' broad ; caudal fin 3-5"""
broad ; length of cirri 2'"'". It has been treated with hardening
reagents for sections, and is therefore strongly contracted.

A single specimen was taken at each of the following stations by
the steamer Albatross :

Station 2036, N. lat. 38"^ 52' 40", W. long. 69° 24' 40", 1735 fathoms.
Adult.

Station 2076, N. lat. 41° 13' OO", W. long. 66° 00' 50", 906 fathoms.
Young with small cirri.

Station 2229, N. lat. 37° 38' 40", W. long. 73° 16' 30", 1423 fathoms.
Young with small cirri.

Station 2236, N. lat. 39° 1 1' 00", W. long. 72° 08' 30", 636 fathoms.
Adult.

The specimen from Station 2236 is marked as having been taken
in the trawl-wings. Many of the specimens of other groups, thus
taken, undoubtedly came from near the bottom, but on the other
hand, it is eas}^ for any surface species to be taken in the same nets
while the trawl is being loAvered or when it is being taken in. Con-

A. E. Verrill — Marine N'emerteans of New England. 451

cerning the other specimens there are no memoranda, but from their
good condition it is more probable that they were all taken in the
trawl-wings than in the trawl itself.

Hyalonemertes, gen. nov.

Body elongated, fusiform, somewhat flattened, having no evident
constriction at the neck, nor marked marginal folds, except in the
caudal fin. Cirri wanting. Head not differentiated from the neck.
Caudal fin well developed.

Proboscis long and slender, with a distinct bulb and sac, and,
apparently, having a small central stylet. Lateral pouches of the
intestine numerous, short, not much divided. Walls of the body
thicker and more gelatinous than in Nectonemertes, not showing
transverse striations, but covered with fine granulations ; inner mus-
cular layer longitudinally striated.

Pyriform bodies not present in the head. Eyes apparently want-
ing. Neither ciliated grooves nor pits were noticed on the head.

Hyalonemertes Atlantica, sp. nov.

Body of the larger specimen moderately flattened, fusiform, about
four times longer than broad, gradually tapered both ways ; head
blunt, flattened ; caudal fin short, stout at base, a little broader
toward the end, which is thin and slightly emarginate. Along the
sides of the body the marginal fold is very narrow and indistinct,
the edges being rounded ; the folds become more evident posteriorly
and form the boi'ders of the caudal fin.

The integument appears somewhat soft and gelatinous, and is
more translucent than in Nectonemertes, and not so firm. The whole
surface is covered with minute soft granules hardly visible to the
naked eye, but appearing, when magnified, something like fine
shagreen ; beneath the surface the longitudinal muscular striations
can be seen. The granulation of the surface is finer and less dis-
tinct on the head. The proboscis is not protuded in this speci-
men. The small mouth is just below the end of the snoiit; near the
upper margin there is a small round papilla.

Length of the larger specimen, from Station 2724, 38'""'; breadth
of body 11™""; breadth of caudal fin 6"™.

Length of the smaller specimen, from Station 2428, 20™"'; breadth
3-5""".

The smaller specimen, just mentioned, is rather more slender than
the larger one ; its caudal fin is distinctly bilobed, with the lobes

Trans. Conn. Acad. Vol. VIII. 59 Dec, 1892,

452 A. E. Verrill — Marine JSTemerteans of N'ew England.

well rounded at the end. The long slender proboscis is partially
protruded, so as to show the bulb and sac in the exserted part, but
not at the end ; there appears to be a small stylet, but the mounted
sj)ecimen is not sufficiently transparent to show its foi'm ; the ex-
terior of the exsert proboscis is finely papillose. The large pro-
boscis-sac extends back to about the posterior fourth ; it is abruptly
narrowed near the posterior end, and a band of muscular fibers near
the end, on each side, binds it to the bodjj- wall. A single specimen
was taken by the Albatross at each of the following stations :

Station 2428, N. lat. 42° 48', W. long. 50° 55' 30", in 82G fathoms.
Young.

Station 2724, N. lat. 36° 47', W. long. '73° 25' 00", in 1641 fathoms.
Adult.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate XXXIII.

Figure 1. — Amphiporus angukdus. Dorsal view with the proboscis partially pro-
truded, natural size; !«, the same, ventral view of the head and anterior part
of the body. Eastport, Me., low- water, Aug. 7, 1872.

Figure 2. — The same. Dorsal view of a specimen of the reddish brown variety, more
enlarged. Massachusetts Bay.

Figure 3. — Amphiporus multisorus, sp. nov. Dorsal view of the head and anterior
portion of the body ; x 2. Kastport, Me.

Figure 4. — Amphiporus vircscens Y. Dorsal view; x .'5. Noank, Conn., July 24,
1874; 4a, the same specimen, posterior end, more enlarged ; Ab, the same, ven-
tral view of the head, more enlarged ; 4r, the same, dorsal view, more enlarged ;
id, the same, head with the slightly protruded proboscis ; x 8 ; 4e, the same,
nearly profile view of the head ; x 8. Wood's HoU, Mass., July 13, 1875.

Figure 5. — Amphip>orus ochraceus Y. Dorsal view ; x 4 ; 5a, the same, central
stylet of the proboscis, much enlarged. Wood's Holl.

Figure 6. — The same. Head and anterior portion of another specimen more con-
tracted; X 6. Eel Pond, Wood's Holl, July 19, 1875.

Figure 7. — Amphiporus cruentaf us Y . Dorsal view; x 3. Noank, Conn.. July 14,
1874 (No. 740)..

Figures. — The same. Doreal view of a larger specimen : x 6; 8«, head of the
same specimen, more enlarged. Wood's Holl.

Figure 9. — Tetrastemma candidum. Dorsal view of a greenish specimen ; x 6.

Figure 10— The same. Dorsal view of a specimen of the yellow variety; somewhat
compressed under the microscope; x 3, low-water; 10a, the same specimen,
showing variation in the form of the head owing to the different degree of
extension. Casco Bay, low-water, 1873.

Figure 11. — Tetrastemma vermiculus, var. Dorsal view ; x 7; 11 a, 1 1 ft, other views
of the head of the same specimen in different states of contraction ; lie, probos-
cis-armature of the same, much enlarged. Wood's Holl, on piles of wharf, July
24, 1875.

Figures 1, 2, and 10 are by J. H. Emerton ; figures 3, 4a to 4e, and 11 to lie, are by
the author; the rest are by J. H. Blake. All are from living specimens.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Netnerteans of Nev^ England. 453

Plate XXXIV.

Figure 1. — AmpM'por us frontalis, sp. no v. Dorsal view ; x 2; la, the same speci-
men, ventral view of the head. (No. 10) Eastport, Me., 86 fath., 1870; 1&, the
same, dorsal view of the head of another specimen. This was pale salmon with
pale purplish spots on the sides due to the ovaries ; proboscis-sheath greenish,
(No. 86) Eastport, Me., low-water.

Figure 2. — AmphiiMrus ccbcus, sp. nov. Dorsal view ; x 5 ; 2a, 2b, dorsal and ven-
tral views of the head of another specimen (No. 721); 2c, extruded proboscis of
the same specimen, enlarged.

Figure 3. — Amph/porusbioculatus. Dorsal view; x 5. Off Fisher's I., Conn., July 22,
187'!:. The ocelli are too much obscured by the color in printing.

Figure 4. — The same. Dorsal view of a younger specimen of the light colored
variety, compressed under the microscope ; x 10. Newport, R. I.

Figures. — Amjjhijwrus roseus. Dorsal view; x 2; 5«, the same, head and anterior
portion of body, dorsal view; x 4 ; 5&, the same, side view; x 4.

Figure 6. — AynpMporus tetrasorus, sp. nov. Dorsal view ; x 3. Massachusetts Bay,
1878.

Figure 7. — Ampjliiporus heterosorus, sp. nov. Head and anterior portion of body, dor-
sal view; X 1-J-. Massachusetts Bay, 1878.

Figure 8. — Amphiporus frontalis, sp. nov. Dorsal view of a small specimen partly
contracted; x 3. Off Witch Rock, Massachusetts Bay, September, 1877.

Figure 9. — Amphiporus mesosorus, sp. nov. Head and anterior portion of body, dorsal
view; x 3. Massachiisetts Bay, off Salem, August 13, 1877.

Figure 10. — letrastemma elegans Y . Type specimen from life. Dorsal view; x 6.

Figure 11. — Tetrastemma vermiculus. Young, dorsal view; x 12.

Figure 12. — Tetrastemma vermiculus, vav. catenula. Dorsal view ; x 8. Noauk, Conn.

Figure 13. — Tetrastemma dorsale. Dorsal view of head and anterior portion of body
with protruded proboscis ; x 8. Casco Bay, 1873.

Figure 14. — Tetrastemma dorsale, y&v. marmoratum. Dorsal view; x 3. The lighter
and darker mottlings are not sufficiently distinct. Casco Bay.

Figure 15. — Amphiporus bioculatus (?). "Very young, dorsal view ; x 1 2 ; compressed
imder the microscope, while alive. Newport, R. I., September 1, 1880, station
851, \2^ fath. Color translucent white ; eyes black.

Figure 16. — Ainphiporus {Nareda) superba. Copy of the original tigure.

Figure 17. — Amphiporus heterosorus, sp. nov. Head and anterior part of body, dorsal
view ; x 2.

Figures 2, 3, 10, 11 are by J. li. Blake; figures 4, 8, 13, 15 are by J. H. Emerton ;
the rest, except 16, are by the author. All are from living specimens.

Pl.\te XXXV.

Figure 1. — Oerebratulus lacteus. Young, natural size; la, the same, ventral view of
head and extruded proboscis, natural size. New Haven, Conn.

Figure 2. — Emplectonema giganteum V. Dorsal view of a specimen not full grown ;
i natural size.

Figure 3. — Amphiporus cruentoMis Y . Dorsal view; x 4.

Figure 4. — Amphiporus agilis V. Dorsal view ; x 4.

Figure 5. — Amphiporus glutinosus Y. Dorsal view ; x 2.

Figure 6. — Tetrastemma vittatuvi V. Dorsal view; x 8; compressed under the
microscope, while living.

454 A. K Verrill — 3farine Nemertecma of New England.

Figure 7. — The same. Dorsal view of the variety with a single pale dorsal stripe ; x 3.
Figure 8. — Tetrastemma vermicubis. Dorsal view: x 8. Wood's Holl, Mass., low-water.
Figure "d. — Tetrastemma candidum (?). Dorsal view of a very young specimen, much

enlarged; compressed under the microscope, while living. Newport, R. I., sta.

851, 12i fath., September 1,. 1880.
Figure 10. — The same. Dorsal view of a somewhat older specimen. Savin Rock,

Conn., October 18, 1887.
Figure 11. — Tetrastemma vermiculus, waw catenida : x 2.
Figures 1, 6, 8 are by J. H. Emerton; figures 3, 11, are by J. H. Blake; the rest are

by the author. All are from living specimens.

Plate XXXVI.
Figure 1. — Micrura afflnis. Dorsal view; x 4. Off Martha's Vineyard, 1887.
Figure 2. — Cerebratulus lacteus. General view of a living specimen of the pinkish

variety, natural size. Wood's Holl, July 17, 1875.
Figures. — Cerebratidus luridus Y . Natural size. Noank, Conn., Aug. 8, 1874.
Figure 4. — Cephalotlirix linearis. General view; x 8.
Figure 5.— The same. Dorsal view of the head and anterior portion of the body of a

young specimen, much enlarged. Wood's Holl, Mass., August 19, 1881.
Figure 6. — Dinophilus simplex, sp. nov. Dorsal view, much enlarged; 6a, the same,

ventral view of head and mouth, much enlarged. Newport, R. I.
Figures 1, 2, 3 are by J. H. Blake; 4, 5, 6 are by J. H, Emerton. All are from living

specimens.

Plate XXXVII.
Figure 1. — Cerebratidus lacteus. Pale variety, ^ natural size; la, the same, side view

of head, in extension; 16, the same, ventral view of head, in partial contraction.
Figure 2. — Cerebratulus fusciis. Dorsal view of head and anterior part of body in

moderate extension ; 2a, the same specimen in a state of contraction ; 2b, 2c, ven-
tral views of the same specimen in different degrees of extension. All natural

size.
Figure 3. — Cerebratulus luridus. Natural size, but considerably contracted in length.
Figure 4. — Lineus duhius. Ventral view; x 2; 4a, dorsal view of the head, more

enlarged. August 18, 1878.
Figure 5. — Linens viridis. Green variety, natural size ; 5a, the same, side view of

head, natural size ; 56, the same, ventral view of head, more enlarged. East-
port, Me., low- water.
Figure 6. — Micrura affinis. Enlarged 11; f rom Eastport. Me. ; 6a, the same, posterior

end of another specimen.
Figure 7. — Micrura inornataV. Dorsal view; x 2. Massachusetts Bay, sta. 135,

25 fath., 1878.
Figure 8. — Lineus socialis. General view of the light green variety ; x 2 ; 8a, the

same, side view of head and anterior part of body, more enlarged.
Figure 9. — Lineus pallidus. Dorsal view; x 2; 9a, the same, side view of head;

more enlarged. Massachusetts Bay.
Figures 3, 5, 6, 9 are by J. H. Emerton ; 1 and 8 by A. H. Verrill ; the rest are by

the author. All are from living specimens.

Plate XXXVIII.
Figure 1. — Nectonemertes mirabilis, sp. nov. Dorsal view with proboscis partially
extended; x 2. Atlantic Ocean, sta. 2036, 1883.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Nemerteans of Ne/w England. 455

Figure 2. — Cerebrahdus Leldyi V. Natural size; la, the same, ventral view of head.

New Haven, Conn.
Figure 3. — Micruru rubra, sp. nov. Peculiar specimen, probably repaiiing mutilation

of tail. Side view; x IJ; 3a, the same, ventral view of head.
Figure 4. — Ilicrura do7'salis, sp. nov. Dorsal view; x 1|; 4a, the same, ventral view

of head, more enlarged. Type specimen. Eastport, Me.
Figures. — Lineus arenicola V. Dorsal view of the original specimen; x 1^; 5a,

the same, ventral view of head.
Figure 6. — Lineus viridis. Red variety, dorsal view; x H; 6a, the same, side

view of head ; 6&, the same, dorsal view of a very young specimen having but

four eyes ; 6c, the same, a cluster of eggs, f natural size ; 6c?, the same, a young

specimen Just hatched, much enlarged.
Figure 7. — Lineus socialis. Young, ventral view, natural size ; 7a, the same, dorsal

view of the head and anterior part of the body, enlarged. August 12, 1880.
Figures. — Lineus bicolor. Dorsal view; x 5; 8a, 8b, the same, side and ventral

views of head, more enlarged. Wood's Hoil, Mass., July 14, 1875.
Figures 9, 9a. — Micrura rubra, sp. nov. Front and side views of the head ; x 3.

Eastport, Me.
Figures 10 and 10a. — Lineus sanguineus. Dorsal and ventral views of the head and

anterior part of the body ; x 3.
Figure 11. — Lineup, sp. (?) Young, dorsal view, much enlarged; 11a, another view

of the front part of the same specimen. Vineyard Sound, among compound

ascidians, 1881.
Figures 12, 12a. — Empledoneitia giganteum Y. Dorsal and ventral views of the head

of the original type-specimen ; x 2.
Figures 1, 6, 7, 11 are by J. H. Emerton ; 8 to 8& are by J. H. Blake; 2 by A. H.

Verrill ; the rest are by the author. All are from living specimens.

Plate XXXIX.

Figures 1, 2, 3, 4. — Pilidiuni, sp. uudetermined. Different views; x 30. Wood's
Holl, Mass., at surface, in day time, August 18, 1881. J. H. Emerton, from
nature.

Figure 5. — The same; x 75; a, apical cirrus ; &, apical plate; //, nerve ; w, head of
developing nemertean with two eyes. J. H. Emerton, from nature.

Figure 6. — Piliditim, undetermined, sp. with golden yellow spots around the margins ;
taken with the preceding ; a, cluster of apical cirri ; b, apical plate ; b', nerve ;
c, c', anterior and posterior lobes; d, d', lateral lobes ; t, oesophagus; /^ /, de-
veloping nemertean ; x 75. J. H. Emerton, from nature.

Figure 7. — Amphiporus lactifloreus. End of protruded proboscis, much enlarged;
s, central stylet ; s', lateral stylets ; 2>, posterior region of proboscis ; d, bulbous
region ; /, saccular organ ; 7a, one of the lateral stylet-sacs, more enlarged.
After Mcintosh.

Figure 8. — Amphiporus ochraceus V. Extruded proboscis, enlarged ; a, anterior re-
gion ; s, middle region with central and lateral stylets ;' p, posterior region.
Camera-lucida drawing by the author.

Figure 9. — Amphiporus bioculatus (?). Middle portion of the proboscis, compressed
under the microscope and much enlarged ; p, commencement of the posterior
region; r, muscular bulb; s, central stylet; f, one of the lateral stylet-sacs.
Camera-lucida drawing by the author.

456 A. E. Verrill — Marine JSTemerteans of New England.

Figures 10, 11, 12. — Ce-phalotlirix linearis. Different stages in the development of the
larva, much enlarged ; c, large cephalic cilia; a, region of the mouth; ft, intes-
tinal area. After Mcintosh.

Figure 13. — The same, farther developed; o, oceUi, li, ganglions; a, mouth area; rf,
opening of cephalic ducts; m, ,one of the cephalic sacs; /, oesophagus; p, pro-
boscis ; h, intestine, imperfectly developed. After Mcintosh.

Figure 14. — Cephalothrix linearis. Head, much enlarged, and seen as a transparent
object ; m, mouth ; p, proboscis ; p\ rhynchodeum ; v, proboscis-sheath ; h.
lateral blood vessel; g, superior, r/', inferior gangUon ; n, origin of lateral nerve.
After Mcintosh.

Figure 15. — The same. Part of a transverse section of the body-wall adjacent to one
of the lateral nerves ; c, external cuticle layer ; c% basement layer ; t, outer, and
t\ inner circular muscular layers; /, longitudinal muscular layer; ?i, lateral
nerve. After Hubrecht.

Figure 16. — Car inina grata Ji. Section of a part of the body-wall corresiDonding to
that in the preceding figure with the same lettering. After Hubrecht.

Figure 17. — Cerebrafulus niedtdlatus H.nhr. Section of the body-wall in the region of
the median dorsal line; lettering the same as in the two preceding figures, with
the following additional ones; nd, median dorsal nerve ; n, nervous plexus; n",
proboscis-nerve; V, inner longitudinal muscular layer. After Hubrecht.

Figure 18. — Lineus viridis. Transverse section through tlie middle of the body;
X 14; j), proboscis ; v, proboscis-sheath; h, dorsal blood vessel ; ?/, one of the
lateral blood vessels; /, cavity of intestine ; c, external cuticular layer; c', base-
ment layer of cuticle ; I, outer, and I', inner longitudinal muscular layers ; t,
circular muscular layer ; t', transverse muscular bundles arising from t; n. ner-
vous plexus ; n% lateral nerve ; ro, reproductive organs. After Mcintosh.

Figure 19. — Cerebratulus lacteus. Transverse section of the middle region of the
body; x 8. Lettering the same as in figure 18. From nature by the author.

Figure 20. — The same. Transverse section in the region of the oesophagus ; x 8.
Lettering the same as in figures 18 and 19, with the following additional ; ?',
plicated wall of the oesophagus; n" , median dorsal nerve; ?<, ■«, nephridia.
From nature, bj^ the author.

Figure 21. — The same. Portion of the same section shown in figure 20, from the
region of the lateral nerve; x 3G. Letters the same as in figures 18 and 20.
From nature, by the author.

Figure 22. — Lineus viridis. Head and anterior part of body viewed as a transparent
object; o. ocelli; /./.lateral cephalic slits; g, superior ganglion; cf, interior of
olfactory sac; d', its duct; n', lateral nerve; ?«, mouth; e, oesophagus; p, pro-
boscis ; p\ rhynchodeum ; v, proboscis-sheath ; r, r, blood lacunae surrounding
the oesophagus. After Mcintosh.

Figure 23. — Malacobdella mercenarice. Dorsal view; x 4. Newport, R. L, July,
1880, in Venus mercenaria. J. H. Emerton from life.

Figure 24. — Tetrastemma dorsale. Central .stylet; x 200; 24«, one of the lateral
stylets; x 350. After Mcintosh.

Figure 25. — Tetrastemma cCmdidum. Central stylet ; x 150. After Mcintosh.

ERRATUM.

Page 384, line 23, for Nemertinea, read Nemertina.
Page 405, line 31, for Candida, read candidum.

XXIII.— DixoPHiLiD^ OF Np:av England. By A. E. Verriu..

No representatives of this group have hitherto been described
from this coast, so far as I am aware. Two species have been
known to me for several years, but I have delaj^ed publishing
descriptions of them, hoping to be able to obtain additional speci-
mens in order to make the figures and descriptions more complete.
But since this group is supposed by many writers to be related to
the Neraerteans, it seems to me desirable that our species should be
put on record in this connection.

Both our species may be referred, provisionally, to Dinophilus,
though they differ considerably in structure. One of them {D. sim-
plex) may not be a true Dinophilus.

Family, Dinophilid^ Graff.

Dinophilus pygmseus, sp. nov.

Wood-cut 10.

Body very small, translucent, in extension long-ovate or nearly
cylindrical, capable of contracting into a short-ovate or subglobular
form, composed of five segments, exclusive of the head and tail ;
the posterior segments are usually the largest. Each segment is
surrounded near its middle by a circle of rather long and strong-
cilia. The head is usually rounded in front, often nearly semicircu-
lar, and has a tuft or fringe of strong cilia around its front margin,
and two transverse lateral tufts which are parts of two continuous
preoral bands, one before and one behind the eyes. The eyes are
rather wide apart, small, reniform, conspicuous.

The mouth is small and appears to be bilobed. The pharynx or
oesophagus is short and swollen. On each side of the pharynx there
is a small pharyngeal gland. The stomach is large, oblong-cylin-
drical, and occupies about three body-segments in ordinary extension ;
the intestine is narrow and tei'minates in an anal opening at the

Fig. 10. — Dino2Jhilus 2}yfjm(eiis, dorsal view, somewhat compre.ssed ; a, mouth
pharynx and pharyngeal glands ; .s, stomach ; i, intestine.

458 A. E. Yerrill — Dinophilidm of Neio England.

base of the caudal segment, which is small, short-triangular, and
terminated by a tuft of large cilia. In the posterior part of the
body are two relatively large, ovate, opaque, reproductive bodies,
but whether they wei'e ovaries or spermaries I did not ascertain, so
that the sex of the specimen described and figured is uncertain,
but it is probably a female. Color whitish. Length -7""" ; breadth,
as compressed, 'IG'"™.

Taken on the piles of a wharf at Wood's Holl, Mass., Aug. 1 0, 1 883.

This species is closely allied to D. gyrociliatus of Europe. The
latter has, however, six post-oral segments, and differs also in the
form of the head, pharynx, and stomach. How much importance
should be attached to these differences is uncertain, for they may be
due largely to different conditions of the specimens examined. The
two may eventually prove to be identical.

Dinophilus simplex, sp. nov.

Plate xxxvi, figures 6. 6a.

Body nearly smooth, distinctly segmented, in extension elongated
and more or less cylindrical, the anterior part usually broadest, com-
posed of four evident segments, exclusive of the large head and
abortive tail. Segments well defined, but without any conspicuous
bands of cilia. Head-segment large and long, subtriangular in front,
and often pointed, but sometimes rounded. Eyes nearly lateral,
small, but conspicuous. Mouth simple, elongated, situated between,
or a little in front of the eyes. Stomach long and not much en-
larged ; intestine nearly as wide as the stomach, terminating in a
nearly terminal anal pore. The tail segment appears to be rudi-
mentary or abortive. The sex was not ascertained. Color pale
yellow. Newport, R. I., Aug., 1880.

The afiinities of this species are somewhat uncertain. The
pharynx and stomach differ considerably from a typical Dinophilus.
Reproductive organs were not observed.

XXTV. — Marine Planarians of New England.
By a. E. Verbill.

Part I. — Dench'occela.

In the following paper I have brought together the scattered
notes, descriptions, and sketches of our native marine planarians
made by me during more than twenty seasons spent in the study of
our marine invertebrates. But as the planarians were not, at any
time, a subject of special investigation with me, my observations
and descriptions will be found, in some instances, incomplete and un-
satisfactory. At the present time other more urgent duties prevent
me from making many desirable supplementary investigations of
their anatomy by means of prepared sections. Nevertheless, I trust
that this article, with the accompanying figures, will prove of some
value as an introduction to the study of our native species of this
group, which has, hitherto, been very much neglected by American
naturalists.

The unsatisfactory state of what little literature there is in exist-
ence relating to our species may be, to a great extent, the cause of
this neglect, I have, therefore, endeavored to unravel the synon-
ymy, so far as it is possible to do so with the data at hand.

The drawings, except a few by myself, have all been made under
my direct supervision, partly from living individuals and partly
from preserved specimens rendered translucent by suitable reagents*
and mounted in Canada balsam. Most of those figures (Plates 42
and 43), showing details of anatomy, and many of the general
figures were drawn by my son, A. H. Verrill. Some of the general
figures from life were drawn by J. H. Emerton and others by J. H.
Blake for the XJ. S. Fish Commission. f

As a general rule alcoholic specimens of planarians cannot be
identified with any degree of certainty unless rendered translucent

* In most cases the specimens have been transferred from strong alcohol to a mix-
ture of turpentine and carbolic acid (phenol) which renders them more or less trans-
lucent ; they are then mounted in balsam. Various staining agents and other reagents
have also been used in making these preparations.

f For the use of the Fish Commission drawings in this place I am indebted to the
liberality of the late Commissioner, Professor S. F. Baird, this article having been in
preparation before his death.

Trans. Conn. Acad. Vor,. A^II. 60 Dec, 189'i.

460 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of JVeic Mngland.

by some special treatment, such as that mentioned above. When
thus treated it is usually possible to identify most of the larger
dendrocoelous planarians, but some of the smaller and more contrac-
tile species and most of the Rhabdocoela cannot be determined from
alcoholic specimens unless studied in thin sections — a method requir-
ing much time and giving rather uncertain results for specific identi-
fication. Such species should, therefore, be studied as fully as
possible while living, and preserved by special methods on micro-
scopic slides, so as to show their anatomy.

1 have recently gone over the collections of planarians preserved
in the Museum of Yale University and those contained in the collec-
tions made by the U. S. Fish Commission during many years and
have identified most of the larger specimens.*

The planarians (Turbellaria) may be divided into three orders,
viz :

I. Dendroocela. In these the stomach has more or less numerous

branches, often forked or arborescently divided ; the body is
usually rather broad and flat. Size usually large.

II. Aca-:LA. In these there is no digestive organ distinct from the

body-cavity. The mouth opens into a space lined with the
body-pai'enchyma, and without any .definite bounding mem-
brane. The body is soft, changeable, usually flat. Size small.

III. Rhabdoccela. In these the stomach is unbranched, and usually
more or less cylindrical in form, but without an}- anal pore.
Form of body various, often thick-ovate, and even linear. As in
the preceding groups, the species are nearly all hermaphrodite.
The reproductive organs are very complicated and vary greatly
in structure and position in the various genera and families, so
that they afford very important chai-acters for classification.
The mouth occupies various positions : anterior, medial ventral,
posterior ventral, etc. Size ver}^ small. Fluviatile and marine.

The Dendrocoela are divided into two suborders, viz :
I. DiGONOPORA or Polycladidea. In these there is a central
stomach from which several main branches go forth on each

*In this article all specimens recorded as collected between 1871 and 1887, unless
otherwise stated, were collected bj- myself and others of the U. S. Fish Commission
parties. The numbered stations recorded are those of tlie U. S. Fish Commission
dredgings, made, for the most part, while I had personal charge of that part of the
work of the Commission. The specimens from Eastport and the Bay of Fundy, prior
to 1872, and those recorded from Long Island Sound were mo.stly collected by me for
the museum of Yale Uuiversitj-.

A. E. Verrill — 3farine Planarians of JVew Midland. 461

side, and also a median anterior branch ; the branches sub-
divide arborescently and usually anastomose distally. Ovarian
organs all similar ; no distinct vitellaria. Male and female
openings generally separate. Marine.
II. MoNOGONOPORA or Tricladidea. In these the central stomach
is small and divides at once into three parts, viz : a median
anterior, and a pair of posterior branches, from all of which
simple or divided lateral branches go forth. Germai'ia distinct
from the vitellaria. Terrestrial, fluviatile, and marine.

DIGONOPORA Stimpsou; POLYCLADIDEA Lang.

Digonopora Stimp., Prodromvis, p. 1, in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sciences Pliilad., ix, p.
19, 1857.

Body generally rather large, broad, flat, often foliaceous with
thin undulating margins. Very changeable in form, mouth situated
on the lower side, often near the center, sometimes far forward.
Pharynx sometimes long, tubular ; often broad, many lobed or pli-
cated ; digestive organ has a distinct, wide central portion or
stomach, from which arise more or less numerous, large lateral
branches which usually fork at first, or subdivide in a dendritic man-
ner, but in most cases anastomose distally and form a reticulated
netwoi'k ; anterior branch of the stomach situated medially, passing
above the cerebral ganglion, which is bilobed.

Ocelli usually small and numei"ous, variously arranged, some are
generally grouped over the cerebral ganglions. Tentacles sometimes
present, with or without ocelli ; often absent.

Reproductive organs hermaphrodite. Ovaries and testes numer-
ous, scattered ; the ovigenous and vitelligenous organs not separate.
External genital openings generally two, situated behind the mouth,
the female behind the male ; sometimes there are two female open-
ings, one behind the other ; rarely there are several male organs, each
with a separate opening. The species are all marine.

Tribe, Aootylea Lang.

Acetabulum wanting. Pharynx short and wide ; mouth in the
middle of the body, or a little forward of, or behind the middle.
Branches of the stomach ramose or reticulated. Copulatory organs
situated in the postei-ior part ol the body. Tentacles, when present,
two dorsal, usually having ocelli ; often wanting.

462 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planariana of New England.

Family, Planocerid^e Lang.

Notoceridece Diesing, Syst. Helm., p. 215, 1850.

Planoceridce and Stylochidce Stimp., Prodromus, pp. 4, 5, in Proc. Acad. Nat Sci.
Philad., vol. ix, pp. 22, 23, 1857.

Two dorsal tentacles, usually containing ocelli. Mouth situated at
or near the middle of the body. Male copulatory organ directed
backward. Marginal ocelli present or absent. Cerebral ocelli gen-
erally present.

StylochuS (Ehrenberg) Lang (restr.)

Stylochus (pars) and Stylochopsis Stimpson, op. cit, p. 22 [8], 1857.
Stylochus (pars) Lang, op. cit., p. 447.

Body very changeable, usually ovate or elliptical and flat in full
extension, but thicker and firmer than usual in this group when con-
tracted. Two dorsal tentacles, each containing a conspicuous group
of ocelli, and situated rather far back from the anterior end of the
body. Other groups of ocelli are situated between, or in front of the
tentacles over the cerebral ganglions and frontal nerves ; others form
submarginal rows, most numerous anteriorly. The pharnyx is fur-
nished with several accessory plicated lobes or pouches, Male and
female genital openings are situated close together near the poste-
rior end of the body and in the typical species open into a common
external pit or pore ; female copulatory pouch apparently wanting
in the typical species ; accessory vesicle or spermatheca absent or
small.

The following species are referred with some hesitation to this
genus, with which they agree well in external characters. They
differ from the figures and descriptions given by Lang of the Euro-
pean species in the structure of both male and female copulatory
organs, especially in having two distinct genital openings, with the
female duct opening backward. I have, accordingly, modified the
generic characters so as to include them. But when their anatomy
becomes better known it may be found that they belong rather with
the new genus Eustylochiis, described below. At present it seems
best to put them in the older genus, which still evidently includes
very diverse species.

One of these peculiar forms T have separated (see p. 466, note)
as a new genus, Seterostylochus.

The anatomy of both the type-species of Stylochopsis Stimp., is
still unknown. There is nothing in the original diagnosis of that
group to distinguish it from Stylochus^ as now restricted.

A, E. Verrill — 3farlne Planarians of Nexo England. 463
Stylochus zebra Verriii.

Stijlochopsis zebra Verrill, Amer. Journ. Sci., vol. xxlv, p. 371, 1882; Annual
Report U. S. Com. of Fish and Fisheries, for 1882, p. 666,, 1884.

Plate xl, figure 3 ; Plate xlii, figures 2, 2(i.

Size large. Body thick and firm, when active oblong ov long-
elliptical, usually rounded at both ends ; in full extension often five
or six times as long as broad, but capable of contracting to a broad
oval or elliptical form. In full expansion the body is rather thin,
though convex doreally, but is nearly opaque, except at the margins,
which are translucent and often raoi-e or less undulated. In strong
contraction the body is convex, thick, and firm. Tentacles situated
not far from the anterior end, at about the anterior eighth or tenth,
and not far apart ; they are short, obtuse, white, filled with very
numerous, crowded, minute, black ocelli. Two large, rather open,
elongated cerebral clusters, composed of numerous very minute
ocelli, are situated between the tentacles and extend about the same
distance forward and back of them ; the hind ends of these clus-
ters are widest and contain the greatest number of crowded ocelli ;
the two clusters often blend, more or less, on the median line, and
terminate posteriorly rather abruptly. In some specimens these
clusters are imperfectly developed, with comparatively few ocelli ;
in others, of large size, additional scattered ocelli occur over the
whole anterior end, between the cerebral groups and the marginal
rows. The marginal ocelli are minute and very numerous ; around
the anterior end they form three or four irregular rows, but they
extend in one or two rows to the posterior end. The pharyx, as
contracted, is elongated and has five or six pairs of much divided
lobes anteriorly, and three or four pairs of successively smaller and
simpler lobes along the sides of the elongated posterior portion,
which ends not far from the middle of the body. Mouth anteriorly
situated about opposite the third pair of large stomach-branches and
pharyngeal lobes. There are, evidently, two genital pores, only a
short distance apart and inconspicuous.* The vas deferens extends
forward to about the posterior third of the stomach as a conspicuous

*I have already stated, on a former page, that this is not a tjpical species Of
Stylochus, as that genus is defined by Lang, for it differs considerably from all the
European species iii the structure of the copiilatory organs, and especially in having
two separate genital openings. But our other species seem to agree with this in that
respect. It might be regarded, quite as well, as a Planocera ivith marijinal ocelli
and numerous tentacular ocelli.

464 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of Neio England.

convoluted, opaque white organ, on each side. Shell glands show
through faintly as a cloudy cluster of grayish white, slender,
branched, radiating tubes. The other reproductive organs show
only obscurely in adult living specimens, owing to the opacity and
thickness of the integument. The interior throughout most of the
body is filled with great numbers of ovarian eggs.

Color, above, j^ellowish brown, umber-brown, or chocolate-brown,
crossed by numerous j'ellowish or whitish lines and stripes, of Avhich
tliere are sometimes at least fifty, while many other similar but nar-
rower and shorter stripes run in from the margins, between the main
ones, usually narrowing and disappearing before reaching the middle
of the body ; toward the ends of the ho^j the light stripes diverge
more and more till those of opposite sides form v-shaped markings
at each end, with a small median wliite stripe at the extreme end.
Sometimes the light stripes become wider as the}^ approach the
middle of the back, as in the specimen figured on Plate xl, fig. 3.
Some examples show an ill-defined median pale sti'ipe posteriorly.
The under side is mostly pale buff, except close to the margins,
which show the alternation of brown and white stripes by trans-
lucency ; the pharynx, stomach lobes, and vas deferens are opaque
Avhite in life, and show distinctly on the Aentral side. Described
from adult living examples.

Length, in life, 30 to 40""" ; breadth 10 to 12""" or more.

Wood's Holl, Mass., on piles, and on the shore of Great Harbor at
low-water, 1882 ; Vineyard Sound, off Menemsha, in 10 to 12
fathoms, September 6, 1886. Several fine specimens were taken on
oyster beds in Long Island Sound, off New Haven, by Mr. Gilbert
Van Ingen, October 29, 1892. These were all found in the canals of
dead shells of Fulgur that were occupied by hermit crabs [EiqKigu-
rus polHcaris). Some of those previoush' taken in Vineyard Sound
were living in the same situation.

Owing to the density of the pigment and the opacity of the tis-
sues, I have not been able to make out satisfactorily the structure of
the reproduction organs in this species, without sections, for which I
have not j^et had sufficient material in good preservation. There
are, apparently, two small genital ])ores situated a short distance apart
and relatively farther forward than in our other species of this family.

This species can always be recognized at once by its peculiar and
conspicuous colors. It is, also, the largest planarian commonly
found on our coast. The color is usually recognizable, even in alco-
holic specimens, as well as in those mounted in balsam as translucent

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planar ians of New Emjland. 465

objects. From our other species of the family it also differs strongly
in the more anterior position of the mouth and stomach, as well as in
the arrangement of the frontal and cerebral ocelli.

Stylochus frontalis Yerrill, sp. nov.

Plate xliv, figure 1.

Body elliptical, large, about one inch long and half as broad.
Tentacles small, obtuse, near together, well forward, nearly sur-
rounded at the base with a ring of many ocelli, and containing very
numerous, email black ocelli, arranged in two groups, one on the
antero-lateral, and the other on the inner-lateral surface. Frontal,
and cerebral ocelli form a large, median, double cluster containing
very many small ocelli, situated before and between the bases of the
tentacles and running to a point back of them, so as to form a me-
dian triangular patch, and extending forward in the form of a fan,
or large open triangular group, formed by the nearly complete
blending of the two lateral clusters, and becoming more widely scat-
tered toward the antferior margin. Marginal ocelli minute, forming
two or more closely crowded rows, close to the edge and most
numerous on the middle part of the anterior border, but extending
to the sides.

Color, above, yellowish gray, mottled with yellowish brown, and
marked with the brighter orange-colored, repeatedly forked and
branched intestinal branches, which show best toward the paler
margins, and with unequal, rounded, scattered spots of dark brown
around the central region. The pharynx and stomach cause a cen-
tral whitish patch, narrowing backward ; behind this there is a
small pale patch, near the posterior end, caused by the reproductive,
organs. The under side of the body is paler than the upper.

Length, in life, about 25'""' ; breadth 12""^^ Described from life.

One living specimen was taken at Provincetown, Mass., from the
bottom of a whaling vessel recently returned from a cruise off the
Carolina coast in ISYQ. Some of the associated species were of
distinctly southern origin.

The reproductive organs were not well seen, owing to the dark
color of the pigment. There appear to be two genital openings,
near together. The mouth is in advance of the middle of the body.
The pharynx has about five principal branches on each side, decreas-
ing backwards, while the posterior end extends some distance
beyond the last branches. The brancbes of the stomach are much
divided dichotomously, but do not seem to anastomose to any great
extent.

466 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of JSTero Migland.

Stylochus crassus Vemll, sp. nov.

Description of a specitnen preserved and rendered partially trans-
lucent: — Body large, thick, rounded, nearly as broad as long. Upper
surface covered with minute, whitish, conical papillae, barely visible
to the naked eye. Mouth nearly central. Stomach with about five
or six main lateral branches, which have very numerous divisions
and anastomose freely distally. A short distance behind the mouth
there is a rather large and slightly prominent sucker-like organ or
acetabulum.

Ocelli are minute and very numerous, forming two large, elongated,
sub-parallel groups, broadest posteriorly and tapering anteriorly ; at
its posterior end each group expands into a wide, roundish, rather open
cerebral cluster, which is connected by a narrow band of ocelli with
another similar roundish cluster a little farther forward, over the
anterior part of the brain, beyond which the groups gradually dimin-
ish in breadth to their anterior ends, not far from the front margin
of the body. At about the anterior fourth, and a little back of the
posterior part of the cerebral groups, and somewhat farther apart,
are two low, inconspicuous prominences, which appear to be the re-
tracted tentacles ; each of these contains a small group of minute
ocelli, not easily distinguishable.

Marginal ocelli are minute and not very numerous, forming about
two rather irregular and indistinct rows anteriorly, but the margin is
somewhat abraded and some of its ocelli may have been destroyed.

Most of the interior of the body is densely filled with small ova.
The density, thickness, and opacity of the tissues render the study of
the reproductive organs impossible, except by sections, for which my
single specimen is not suitably preserved.

Color of the preserved specimen dull brown, covered above with
small white specks, due to the papillae.

Length and breadth of the alcoholic specimen about 25"""; thick-
ness 2 to 3'""'.

Station 2732, U. S. Fish Com. steamer Albatross, Oct. 26, 1886,
N. lat. 37* 27'; W. long. 73° 33', in 1152 fathoms, dark green mud.

Only one specimen was taken. It is remarkable for its great size,
thickness, and solidity. I refer it to this genus only provisionally,
because its reproductive organs are unknown. I detected only a
single genital pore, of small size, near the posterior end, but a second
may exist, for the specimen is broken and not well preserved in that
region. The arrangement of the ocelli is sufficient to distinguish it
from all other American species.

It is possible that it lives at the surface among floating algse, and
not at the bottom.

A. E. Verrill — 3Iarine Planarians of New England. 467

EustylOChuS, gen. nov.

Tentacles with ocelli in the sides, or base, or both. Cerebral ocelli
variously arranged. Mai'ginal ocelli present. Stomacli branches
numerous ; distal branches anastomosed.

Male and female genital jiores separate, the female ducts opening
backward. Seminal vesicle well developed, usually distinctly three-
lobed, the middle lobe with a long duct leading to the penis. Penis-
sheath short and thick ; penis styliform ; granular gland not prom-
inent, closely attached to the penis-bulb, often indistinct.

Female orifice not far back of the male organ ; it connects with
the vagina and with a long, narrow median duct which starts from
the orifice and runs forward to or near the gastric region, where it
connects with a flask-shaped vesicle, which is probably a sperma-
theca or seminal receptacle. The vaginal duct expands into a short,
swollen glandular portion, which bends upward and backward upon
itself, and receives the uterine ducts.

This genus agrees externally with Stylochus, but its reproductive
organs are very different from those of that genus.

The only European species which is described as having a similar
spermatheca and median duct is Stylochtis macxdatus Quatrefages,*
but that dift'ers in other characters.

EustylochuS elliptiCUS (Giiard) Ven-ill.

Planocera elliptica Girard, Proc. Boston See. Nat. Hist., vol. iii, p. 251, 1850 (de-
scription very brief and imperfect); op. cit., p. 348 (note on its embryology).
Embryonic development of Planocera elliptica in Journal Acad. Nat. Science of
Philadelphia, vol. ii, p. 307, sep. copies, pp. 7-27, pi. 1-3, 1 854 (details of its embry-
ology, but no description of adult).

Stimpson, Prodromus, in Proc. Philad. Acad. Nat. Sci., vol. ix, p. 25 [5], 1857.

Lang, Polycladen des Goifes von Neapel, p. 463, 1884 (copy of Girard's I860 brief
description).

Stylochopsis littoralis Verrill, Report on Mar. Invert, of A^'ineyard Sd., etc., pp. 325
[31 j, 632 [338], pi. 19, fig. 99, 1873.

Stylochus littoralis Lang, Polycladen des Goifes von Neapel, p. 453, 1884 (copy of
description in work last cited).

Plate xl, figure 2; plate xli, figures 1, la; plate xui, figures 1, la.
Body flat with thin, often undulated, and very flexible margins ;
very changeable in form, usually, when creeping, long-oval, ellipti-
cal, or oblong; in extension often narrowed anteriorly, but when at
rest rounded or subtruncate at the ends ; often with a small median

* This species, as described and figured by Quatrefages, differs so much from all
related forms, that it should, undoubtedly, constitute the type of a new genus, for
which I propose the name H^'tcrostyloch^^s. Some of its characters are as follows:

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 61 Dec, 1892.

468 A. E. Verril! — Marine Planarians of N'ew England.

posterior lobe, but at other times with a notch in the middle of the
posterior margin ; frequently the breadth exceeds the length, but
more commonly it is less than half. The tentacles are small, round,
elongated and tapered in full expansion, often obtuse in partial re-
traction, translucent white, each containing an elongated, crowded
group, extending from the base nearly to the tips, consisting of about
twelve to twenty-live small, but conspicuous, black ocelli. The ten-
tacles are situated at about the anterior fourth of the body, and are
usually separated by a distance equal to about one-fourth of its
breadth, but the relative positions of the tentacles change according
to the degree of extension. Frontal and cerebral ocelli usually about
eight to twelve, often more in the largest specimens. They usually
form four or six small paired groups ; the two groups most in ad-
vance of the tentacles and situated over the frontal nerves sometimes
contain three or four ocelli each, but more commonly only two ; the
next pair of groups, which are nearer together and situated between
or a little in front of the tentacles, about over the apex of the cere-
bral ganglions, or near the base of the large frontal nerves, usually
contain each only two or three ocelli, one of which is larger than
the othei's, but in some adult specimens they contain four or live
ocelli, the mimber in that case often varying in the right and left
clusters ; a little farther back and directly over each gangloin there
are often one or two pairs of ocelli ; occasionally there are others
placed singly over the posterior part of the gangloins. Young ex-
amples often have only the two front pairs of groups, each consist-
ing of two ocelli. Marginal ocelli numerous, black, easily seen with
a lens ; they are most numerous on the anterior margin, where they
are arranged mostly in two or three or more irregular rows along
the pale border ; they extend back to the middle of the sides or be-
yond, gradually decreasing in numbers backward ; a few ocelli,
which are usually loosely arranged somewhat in radial rows over the

Heterotsylochus, gea. nov.

Tentacles with lateral ocelli ; cerebral ocelli form two groups ; apparently no
marginal ocelli. Main stomach-branches few. Genital openings separate. Vasa
deferentia large, discharging into the ejaculatory duct; seminal vesicle large, rounded,
sessile. Muscular penis-bulb pyriform. A long, narrow, median duct (vagina Quatr.),
runs far forward from the female orifice and expands into a flask-shaped seminal
receptacle or spermatheca near the male organs; a swollen egg-duct also connects
with the female orifice.

Type H. maculatus (Quatr. sp.) from Saint Malo, under stones. (See Ann. des sci.
nat., iv, p. 144, pi. iv, figs. 3, 3a; pi vi, fig. 2, anatomy).

Stylochoplana macvlafa Lang, op. cit., p. 459.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planar Ian s of Wew England. 469

frontal nerves, antei'iorly, but often appear irregularly scattered,
occur farther from the margin than the main rows.

Mouth subraedian, or at about the anterior third. Pharynx, wlien
everted, short and broad, with numerous short, flattened lobules. The
I'etraeted pharynx has about six or seven pairs of principal lateral
lobes and some smaller ones anteriorly and posteriorly. The six or
seven pairs of lateral branches of the stomach, and also the anterior
and posterior ones, have many dendritic branches at first, but distally
anastomose freely making an intricate network.

The copulatory organs lie in an elongated whitish spot, close to
the posterior end. The most anterior part of this spot contains an
elongated, swollen, median seminal vesicle, which tapers backAvard,
and has two lateral lobes, continuous with the vasa deferentia ; back
of this the small, opaque white, elliptical or barrel-shaped male organ
is more or less distinctly visible ; the penis is short, straight, tapered,
and appears to end at a small distinct external pore. The vas
deferens extends forward, on each side, to the middle of, or some-
times nearly to the anterior end of the stomach, in the form of a
much convoluted opaque white organ, often distinctly visible from
beneath, through the integument, even with the naked eye.

Just back of the penis, and more indistinct, there is a smaller,
swollen, short, pear-shaped female copulatory organ (vagina or copu-
latory pouch) which has thick, rather opaque, glandular walls ; it is
surrounded by, and connected with a larger translucent organ or
cavity, and opens externally by the small genital pore at its pos-
terior apex. The glandular part of the vagina, in most preserved
examples, appears to be short, ovate or pear-shaped when seen from
the ventral side, but its front end bends upward and then backward
on itself, the dorsal bend being of nearly the same shape and size as
the ventral part, is mostly concealed by it ; the apex of the dorsal
fold, in the largest examples, again bends forward, so that the entire
organ in profile, is somewhat S-shaped, but this is not the case in some
of the smaller specimens. From the external female orifice a narrow
but very definite duct runs forward, in the median line beyond the
penis and seminal vesicle to the gastric region, where it expands
into an elongated flask-shaped vesicle, which lies below the stomach.*
This appears to be a seminal receptacle or spermatheca.

* An organ precisely like this is figured by Quatrefages (op. cit., pi. vi, fig. 2l\ as
present in his Stylochus maculatus (Helerostylochus maculatus V.), as described in
note on page 466. By him it was considered a copulatory sac or seminal receptacle,
and he called its duct the vagina. Others have doubted whether it forms part of the

470 A. E. Ve.rrill — Marine PlanaruDis of New E)igland.

Close to the female genital orifice there is a minute pore, from
which runs forward a long narrow duct (often distinctly stained
with carmine in the preparations). This appears to be the main
nephridial duct ; it was traced as far as the gastric region.

Color pale or deep yellowish brown, greenish brown, salmon,
smoky brown, greenish yellow, etc., irregularly radially veined or
reticulated with a jDale, translucent, yelloAvish, whitish, or salmon
ground-color and usually with a light brown, yellow, or whitish,
irregular, laterally lobed median stripe, most distinct posteriorly ; a
small posterior pale spot ; margins pale. In some examples the yel-
lowish brown color appears in the form of thickly arranged, irregu-
lar, angular spots and patches on a pale translucent ground, while
the stomach, pharynx, and reproductive organs {vas deferens) cause
an elongated, irregular, lobulated, whitish median patch, more dis-
tinct on the under side ; beneath white, pale gray, or pale flesh-color,
or salmon, with a median, elongated, lobulated, light patch, due to
the stomach and vasa deferentia.

Length of adults 20 to 25"""^ in extension; breadth, about 6 to 10"'°^.

New Haven, Conn., to Casco Bay, Maine, common in shallow
water and between tides, under stones, and in tide-pools.

Fort Hale, South End, and Savin Rock, near New Haven ; Thim-
ble Islands, abundant ; Newport, R. I., on piles of bridges and
wharves, 1880 ; Wood's Holl and Vineyard Sd,, Mass., common ;
Provinctown, Mass., at low- water mark, common, Aug., 18*79 ; Salem
and Gloucester, Mass., on piles, 187V, 1878. Quahog Bay, Maine, at
low-water, 1873; Banks of Newfoundland (?), T. M. Coffin. A
number of large specimens were taken by Mr. Gilbert Van Ingen,
Oct. 29, on the piles of the railroad bridge across West River, near
New Haven, where the water is distinctly brackish. Each one was
inside the shell of a recently killed barnacle [JBalanus eburneus) and
was evidently feeding upon its flesh. The barnacles may, however?
have been killed by some other agency.

A specimen taken at Savin Rock, near New Haven, laid its eggs
on July 12th in large clusters placed close together on the inside of
a glass bottle. The eggs themselves were very small and white.

This is decidedly the most common species of the larger planarians
found on the shores of New England, especially south of Massachu-
setts Bay. I have not obtained it during many seasons of collecting

reproductive system. In our species its connection witli the orifice that I take to be
the female genital pore is very obvious in some prepared specimens, in which the
duct has taken a deeper stain than the surrounding parts.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Flanarians of N'ew England. 471

at Eastport, Me., nor elsewhere in the Bay of Fundy, Therefore
the specimen received from Capt. Coffin marked as from the New-
foundland Banks may be regarded as doubtful, as to locality.

I have referred this species to the Planocera elliptica of Girard
with much hesitation, for Dr. Girard did not publish anj^ description
of his species b}^ which it could be identified. He did not even
mention the arrangement of the ocelli in either of his papers, but
said, incidentally, that he understood the genus Planocera as in-
cluding StyloeJnis. Hence it may be inferred that his species had
ocelli in the tentacles, but not necessarily marginal ocelli. My prin-
cipal reason for uniting S. littoralis with his species is because
it has proved, in my experience, to be the common shore species in
the region of Massachusetts Bay, where Girard obtained his speci-
mens. Nor have I found in that district any other species which
could be referred to his species with any degree of probability what-
ever. As Dr. Girard published an important paper on the embry-
ology of his species, it is very desirable to retain his specific name,
if it can be located with any considerable degree of certaint3^

Planocera Blainv., 1828 (emeBd.)

Ptawocera Stimpson, Prodromus, p. 5, 1857 (emend.)
Lang, Polycladen, p. •134, 1884 (emend.)

Body oval or elliptical and rather flat in extension, thickened and
convex when contracted. Tentacles slender, tapered, reti-actile, situ-
ated at some distance from the anterior end of the body. A cluster
of ocelli is generally situated in the base of each tentacle ; usually
others form clusters between and behind the tentacles ; marginal
ocelli wanting in the typical species, sometimes numerous. Genital
pores sepai'ate, but near together, situated a short distance from the
posterior end of the body ; female duct is short U-shaped, usually
with a copulatory i^ouch and accessory vesicle (spermatheca) ; the
vagina opens backward ; the spermatheca is above or behind the
vagina.

I have modified the generic characters so as to include species
which, like the following, have marginal ocelli, but otherwise agree
nearly with the typical species. For this group I propose, however,
to establish a new subgenus :

Subgenus, Planoceropsls, uov.

Tentacles, cerebral ocelli, pharynx, and stomach as in typical
Planocera; marginal ocelli present. Reproductive organs mostly

472 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planaruins of Nev^ England.

similar to those of typical Planocera, but the seminal vesicle is free
and three-lobed, with the central lobe elongated, tapering backward
into a narrow duct that joins the penis, while the side lobes arc con-
tinuous with the vasa deferentia ; the penis-sheath is short, thick,
conical ; the penis is short, styliform. Female duct runs forward
a short distance from the opening and then bends upward and turns
back on itself, forming a U-shaped tube.

Planocera nebulosa Girard.

Planocera nehidosa Girard, Proceedings Philadelphia Academy Natural Sciences,
for 1853, vol. vi, p. 3G7, 1854; Verrill, Report on Invert, of Vineyard Sd., etc.,
in Annual Report U. S. Com. of Fish and Fisheries for 1871, pp. 325 [31 ], and
632 [338J, pi XIX, tig. 100, 1873; Lang, Polycladen, p. 463.

Plate xl, figure 4; Plate xlii, figure 3.

Body convex above and rather thick, especially in contraction. In
usual extension, broad-elliptical or oblong, but capable of becoming
long-elliptical or nearly circular ; edges sometimes thin and undu-
lated. Tentacles rather long, slender, tapered, translucent whitish,
retractile, situated near together and well back from the front mar-
gin ; no ocelli in the distal portion, but a cluster of small ocelli is
situated in the base. Mouth and stomach nearly central ; the phar-
ynx and stomach have four or five main lobes on each side, and the
mouth is a little behind the middle of the stomach ; in some states of
expansion the anterior and posterior lobes are somewhat prolonged.
The bilobed cerebral' ganglion is situated between or a little before
the bases of the tentacles. No ocelli Avere observed in the deep
colored living specimens, above described, but when looked for in
sections they are found to be numerous. The ocelli in the bases of
the tentacles form small rounded clusters, more easil}^ visible from
below than from above. Just back of each tentacle and a little
more toward the median line there is a larger and more open cluster
of ocelli; in the cerebral region there is a pair of small incon-
spicuous groups, each containing about two or three ocelli, while a
few others are apparently irregularly scattered between and in front
of the tentacles. The marginal ocelli are also minute and form two
or three rows, some of which extend back to about the middle of the
sides.

Genital orifices two, small, near together, not far from the posterior
margin.

Color somewhat variable. Our specimens were usually olive-
green with the paler ground-color showing more or less as whitish or

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarains of New England. 4*73

yellowish lines and mottlings ; median dorsal stripe pale or greenish
white ; margin whitish ; sometimes the dark color is in the form of
distinct irregnlar spots or blotches ; ventral surface yellowish green,
with the pharynx opaque whitish.

According to Girard the original specimens were dark gray, on a
pale ground, and the median stripe was reddish, — a variation similar
to that common in Eustylochus ellipticus.

Length 20'""' ; breadth 10 to 12""", in extension.

New Haven, Conn., 1805, 1870, 1892; Newport, R. 1., 1880;
Wood's IIoll., Mass., under stones near low- water mark, 1886 ;
Charleston, S. C. (Girard.)

On the southern New England coast this species is not common, —
at least I have found it only in few instances and in small numbers
during more than twenty seasons spent in collecting marine animals
on these shores. Most of the specimens are immature.

The structure of the internal reproductive organs of this species,
owing to its opacity and dark color, were not well made out, in the
adult specimen described above. Some additional observations on
a smaller and somewhat immature specimen, apparently of the same
species, recentl}^ obtained living, are here given.

This specimen agrees with the larger and more characteristic ones
described above in the arrangement of the ocelli, which, owing to
the lighter colors of the integument, could be made out in the living
specimen, though they are minute. The tentacles, however, were
relatively smaller than in the larger specimen formerly described.
They are tapered, acute, translucent whitish, without ocelli except in
the strictly basal part, so that they can scarcely be seen from
above, but seen from beneath they form a small round group ; the
clusters behind and between the tentacles, those in the cerebral
region, and the marginal ocelli are nearly as described above,
except that they are rather less numerous. They can hardly be
seen with a pocket lens. Scattered, minute, marginal ocelli occur
even at the posterior margin. The color is light olive-green, irregu-
larly radiated and reticulated with rather faint, greenish white lines ;
margins and tentacles whitish ; a median streak over the stomach
and a small elliptical spot close to the posterior end, and inclosing
the copulatory organs, ai'e greenish white. Lower surface pale, the
pharynx, stomach, and vas deferens showing through as mox-e
opaque white organs. Mouth central ; pharynx with about six
main lobes on each side.

In this living specimen the reproductive organs (PI. xlii, fig. 3)

474 A. JE. Verrill — Marine Planarians of J^etc England.

conld be seen indistinctly when it was compressed under the micro-
scope. There are apparently two small genital pores, near together,
but distinct, as in E. ellipticus, with which this species seems to agree
nearly in the structure of its reproductive organs. The convo-
luted vas deferens, which runs up, on each side, to about opposite
the middle of the stomach, discharges into the lateral lobes of a
relatively large, three-lobed, or somewhat anchor-shaped, seminal
vesicle, which is more conspicuous than most of the other organs ;
its three lobes point backward, while its anterior end is broadly
rounded ; its middle lobe is longer than the others, and connects
with a narrow efferent duct. The male copulatory organ is broad-
elliptical, terminating in a conical penis-sheath and a small, short,
straight, tapered penis, which terminates close to a small external
pore. The larger or elliptical part of the male organ may be, at
least in part, a "granular gland," but I was unable to clearly dis-
tinguish between the penis-bulb and the glandular organ. The
female organs consist of two evident parts ; the more anterior por-
tion is a small elliptical vesicle (copulatory pouch ?) ; with a posterior
pore ; the posterior j^ortion is a narrower and more tubular organ,
which appears to be a simple spermatheca. This specimen is not
mature sexually and the female organs are not well developed.

I have referred this, with considerable doubt, to Girard's species,
for the description of the latter was very meagre, and there is con-
siderable difference in color. The color, however, is quite variable
in this group. The southern form may prove to be a very distinct
species.

The generic relations of this species are somewhat doubtful. In
general structure, and especially in the characters of its tentacles
and dorsal ocelli, it agrees well with the typical species of Planocera,
but the latter genus is described by Lang and others as destitute of
marginal ocelli, which are numerous in oiir species. In the struc-
ture of the reproductive organs it agrees more nearly with Plano-
cera than with Stylochus, as described by Lang.

In many respects the reproductive organs are like those of Eusty-
lochus, and it is possible that its affinities may be even greater with
that genus than with Planocera. But as there is but a single speci-
men available for the study of the reproductive organs, and that
seems to be immature, I am unable to determine some of the details
which are desirable before its position can be fully established.

The presence or absence of marginal ocelli might be regarded as
not of generic importance. In that case the present species might
be defined as a Planocera with marainal ocelli.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of JVevj England. 475

Imogine Girard, 1853.

Imorjine Stimpson, Prodromus, p. [4] 22, 1857; Lang. Polycladen, p. 445.

Body thin, foliaceous. Tentacles with a single rather large ocellus
at the tip. Anterior border furnished with marginal ocelli. Repro-
ductive organs unknown.

Imogine oculifera Girard.

hiioginc oculifera Girard, Proc. Philad. Acad. Nat. Sci., p. 367, 1853; Stimpson,
Prodromus, p. [4] 22 ; Lang, op. cit., p. 446.

Plate xl, figure 1.

The only specimen that I have seen was small and immature.
The reproductive organs were not developed. The body of this
was very thin, obovate, with a broadly rounded anterior and a nar-
rowed posterior end, when creeping. The tentacles were distant
from the front margin, clavate, each with a very distinct ocellus
in the rounded tip. The ocelli formed two linear divergent groups
of about ten each, commencing between or a little behind the ten-
tacles and extending much beyond them anteriorly. The pharynx
and stomach were not well defined, but the stomach appeared to
have rather numerous (at least seven or eight) main lateral branches,
which were much divided distally, and appeared to branch dichoto-
mously.

The color, to the naked eye, appears bright red with pale margins;
when much enlarged the bright carmine red is seen to form irreg-
ular radiating and branched lines, corresponding to the branches of
the stomach, while the narrow intervening spaces, the gastric region,
the cerebral area, the tentacles, and the margins are translucent
whitish. The margin is, however, covered with small pale yellow
spots.

Length of the young specimen described and figured, in life,
4*5"'™; greatest breadth r5"'"\ According to Girard, this species
becomes l"o inches long; -5 wide.

Buzzard's Bay, at Quisset Harbor, in 4 or 5 fathoms, on sandy
bottom, Sept. 4, 1882. Charleston, S. C. (Girard).

Family, Leptoplanid.e Stimp., 1857.

Body bi'oad, flat, usually thin or foliaceous. Tentacles none.
Mouth ventral, near the center of the body. Pharynx large, lobed
or plicated. The main lateral branches of the stomach vary in
number ; the distal branches often anastomose freely. Ocelli nu-

Trans. Goss. Acad., Vol. VIII. 62 Dec, 1892.

476 A. M Verrill — Marine Planarlans of New England.

merous, usually forming four groups, two of which are cerebral, and
two dorsal in the position of the tentacles of PlanoceridcB. Mar-
ginal ocelli sometimes present, often wanting or indistinct. The
copulatory organs are situated behind the mouth and more or less
distant from the posterior end of the body. The male organ is
directed backward. Male and female genital pores are usually con-
siderably separated, but sometimes have a common external opening.
In some genera a second female orifice is situated behind the ordin-
ary one. No marked metamorphosis.

The species and genera of this family are not easy to distinguish
without a careful study, both of the living and prepared specimens.
The majority of the species, while living, closely resemble each
other in form, color, habits, etc., although the internal organs may
show great diversities in arrangement and structure. Unfortunately
it is generally difficult, if not impossible, to make out much of the
internal anatomy while the animals are alive, owing to the thickness,
density, and* imperfect translucency of the tissues ; the presence of
large quantities of ova ; the frequently deep colors, etc. On this
account the species, as collected, are frequently confounded, and the
rarer species, being mistaken for common ones, are often overlooked.
The only sure way, therefore, is to save all the specimens seen.

Even the arrangement of the ocelli is apt to be deceptive, for
many very diverse species have the ocelli arranged in almost exactly
the same way. Moreover the number of ocelli and the forms of the
clusters in each species vary widely, according to the age of the in-
dividuals; and the form and relative positions of the clusters of
ocelli change greatly according to the states of contraction and ex-
pansion. In life, part of the ocelli are apt to be overlooked on ac-
count of their being more or less deeply imbedded in the integument,
and perhaps, also, partly concealed by pigment, as well as because
of their very small size in some species. The marginal ocelli, espe-
cially, are liable to be overlooked in several species, owing to their
minuteness. I have found it impossible to see the marginal ocelli
Avith the best of simple lenses, in some of our species, while they
were alive, but could see them easily when the same specimens were
properly preserved and mounted.

The form is continually changing in life, and preserved specimens
are apt to contract in all sorts of shapes, unless care be taken to con-
fine them between glasses before killing.

The colors of each species, in life, are usually variable through a
wide range of tints, and the special color-markings, when due to the

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of N'evi England. 4-71

branches of the stomach, or to the reproductive organs, vary accord-
ing to the kind and quantity of food, the season of the year, etc.
Hence the forms and colors are usually of secondary importance
in distinguishing the species and genera.

The form and structure of the i-eproductive organs are here of
the greatest importance, but these organs can usually be seen
only very imperfectly, if at all, unless the specimens are preserved
and mounted in such a manner as to render them translucent.* A
few species are sufficiently translucent while living, especially when
immatui'e, to afford a fairly good view of their internal organs when
slightly compressed between glass, especiall}^ immediately after they
are killed with some agent that does not coagulate the fluids of their
bodies. f The structure of the pharynx and the number and modes
of division of the main branches of the stomach affoi'd characters
of great value that can be easily observed.

I have good reasons for beliving that there ai"e a number of
species of this group living on our coast, that are not included in
this article. This is doubtless largely due to lack of attention to
this family on the part of collectors, myself included, owing partly
to the prevalent impression that all the forms are members of one
or two common species. I have observed young specimens of
several kinds, too immature to describe specifically, that are evi-
dently not the young of any of those here included.

Leptoplana (Ehrenberg) Lang, (restr.).

Polycelis {jjars) Quatrf., Ann. des sci. nat., ser. .3, vol. iv, p. 133, 1845; Voyage

en Sicile, ii, p. 33, 35.
Leptoplana and Elasmodes {2mrs) Stimp., Prodromus, p. 3, 1857.

' Body foliaceous, usually with thin undulated margins, usually
elliptical or oblong, changeable. Ocelli numerous, forming four
groups : cerebral and dorsal. The anterior or cerebral ones are sit-
uated over the cerebral ganglions, the dorsal groups occupy the
position of the teiitacles found in Planoceridce. No marginal ocelli.
Phar^'nx with more or less numerous broad, short accessory lobes.

Genital pores rather widely separated, the male pore distant from
the posterior end of the body. Female pore opens backward and is

* It must be noted that the form and relative positions of these organs are more
or less altered by all modes of preservation, owing to contraction of the tissues.

■[ I have found hydrogen peroxid an excellent reagent for this purpose. Nitric
acid often does very well, as do many other agents in common use. Alcohol, corro-
sive sublimate, chromic acid, etc., render the tissues more opaque.

478 A. E. Yerrill — 3Iarine Planarians of New England.

often in a circular pit ; the female duct is usually elongated and
forms a siphon-shaped organ, the longer and narrower leg of the
siphon above the vagina, and extending backward into a more or
less dilated spermatheca ; the middle portion of the vagina* is
thickened and receives, on each side, numerous ducts from the
shell-glands. In at least two of our species there appears to be a
small posterior genital pore connected with the spermatheca by a
narrow duct, somewhat as in Trigonoporus.

A large, round or pyriform, thick-walled "granular gland" is con-
nected with the male organ. Seminal vesicle usually well developed.
Penis or verge often long and cirriform. In some species a sucker
exists between the genital pores.

The most obvious distinction between this and the closely allied
genera is the unusual elongation of the female ducts and the verge,
and the consequent wide separation of the genital pores. The ab-
sence of mai'ginal ocelli seems to be constant,

Leptoplana virilis, sp. nov.

Plate xlui, figures I, la.

Description of living specimens : — Body thin, more or less ellip-
tical, changeable. Ocelli conspicuous, black, arranged in four dis-
tinct, rather large groups, those in the posterior or dorsal groups
largest ; the posterior groups are short-oblong or somewhat quadran-
gular, divergent, situated near the ganglions, and have each about
twelve visible ocelli ; the anterior or cerebral groups are nearly par-
allel, elliptical or oblong, a little nearer together than the others,
and usually commence between the latter and extend considerably"
farther forward over the ganglions ; they consist of man}' minute
ocelli and each has a single distinct ocellus, larger than the others,
at the posterior, and another at the anterior end of the group.

Color pale brown covered with darker brown specks and with
poorly defined pale blotches.

Length 18'"'"; breadth 10'^"" in extension.

Descriptioyi of a specimen mounted in haham : — This specimen
(pi. XLiii, figs. 1, la) shows that the ocelli are somewhat more numer-
ous than described above, part of them being too deeply seated to

* The first, or thickened, glandular portion of the duct (r, pi. lxiii, fig. la) is
usually called the vagina, but it may not be the copulatory duct, at least in such
species as have a second female orifice farther back leading to the spermatheca, as in
Trigonoporus. The latter duct, in such cases, is probably the true copulatory duct,
the other serving for the laying of the eggs.

A. JEJ. Verrill — Marine Planarians of Ne%o England. 479

be readily seen iu life ; the anterior clusters are shorter than in life,
owing to contraction. The retracted pharynx has five pairs of large
lateral lobes, and a pair of smaller ones anteriorly. The mouth is
about opposite the second pair of large lobes.

The greater part of the body is filled with small rounded ovarian
folicles (o, o) crowded between and around the branches of the
stomach. A still larger number of spermaries [t, t), of smaller size,
are arranged around and between the ovaries.* Only a part of them
are represented in the figure.

The male organs of copulation are larger than in most species and
rather conspicuous. The muscular penis-sheath {q) is stout-cylindri-
cal, or slightly clavate, longer than broad. Its anterior part is cov-
ered by a nearly globular "granular gland" {k) with thick, dark
colored walls. The seminal vesicle (r) in a ventral view appears
like a rounded cap anterior to, and above the granular gland ; it con-
sists of a median ^nd two lateral lobes. The penis (/>) is long,
slender, and somewhat enlarged at the end, as seen in this example,
in which it is retracted and probably unnaturally crooked and
twisted, owing to the mode of preservation.

The female genital pore is situated at the bottom of a large and
deep funnel-shaped pit (perhaps produced by conti'action), and is
situated about a third of the distance from the male pore to the end
of the body. The female duct (y, v') extends forward to near the
male pore where it bends upward and turns abruptly backward on
itself, and then becoming a narrow tube (??'), runs backward con-
siderably beyond the male genital pore and connects with a rather
large and nearly round spermatheca or receptaculuni seiniiialis.

This organ (s, s') seems to consist of two parts or compartments,
for in some specimens there can be seen a smaller rounded organ [s')
overlapping or resting upon its anterior side and apparently having
its cavity continuous with the other. In other specimens it is in
front of the main vesicle and seems joined to it by a neck. These
parts are,. however, much obscured by the glandular organs of the
region, the stomach branches, and other organs. The first or ventral
portion of the female duct {v), which is usually considered the
vaginaf or bursa copidatrix is rather thick, increasing in diameter
to the anterior bend, and it receives, on each side, the ducts of very

* This preparation has been stained with borax-carmine and with picric acid, so
that the organs show very plainly. The spermaries are darlc brown and the ovaries
bright red. Other mounted specimens of the species agree well with this one.

f See note under the genus, p. 477.

480 A. JEJ. Verrill — Marine Planar ions of JVew England.

numerous "shell glands" {w) which radiate outward and back-
ward from it. The outlines and connections of the large uterine
sacs, which also join the vagina, cannot be distinctly seen, but they
lie alongside the stomach, and are filled with eggs. The vas def-
erens also runs up along each side of the stomach as a convohited
tube.

Off Cape Cod, at Station 307, in 31 fathoms, 1879 ; also at Sta-
tion T4V, off Nantucket Shoals, in \3^ fathoms.

Leptoplana variabilis (Girard) Diesing.

Polyscelis variabilis Girard, Proc. BostoD Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. iii, p. 251, 1850.

Leptoplana variabilifi Diesing, Revision Turbell., Sitz. mathera-nat., xliv, p. 542,

1861.

Plate xli, figure 7 ; Plate xliii, figures 2, 2a, 3, 3o, 3b.

Descri^ytion of living specimens: — Body thin, smooth, oblong or
elliptical in extension, with the edges usually much undulated ; very
active and changeable in form.

Ocelli black and conspicuous; the cerebral clusters, which are sit-
uated over and in front of the ganglions, are decidedly elongated,
usually fusiform and distinctly widest in the middle, but sometimes
widest at the front end, subparallel or more or less divergent, and
changeable in position according to the extension or contraction of
the tissues about them ; the hind end often extends as a narrow line
or single row of ocelli back of the dorsal groups ; the cerebral
clusters may contain 25 or 30 ocelli each. The posterior or dorsal
clusters are more or less circular or oval, each containing ten to
fifteen rather large, conspicuous, black ocelli ; a few of those in front
are usually larger than the rest.

Color often yellowish brown, becoming paler toward the translu-
cent margins and darker around the light gastric streak. The gan-
glions and nerves are not red.

Other specimens (as No. 736) are light salmon or light yellowish
brown, thickly spotted with darker orange-brown, and with an inter-
rupted pale streak over the sloraach and reproductive organs.

Length of the larger specimens 12 to 18"'"; breadth 4 to 8""".

Description of specimens mounted in balsam : — The tissues are
thin and fairly translucent. The pharj^nx has a large anterior, and
a small short posterior lobe, with six principal lobes on each side^
The mouth is neai'ly in the middle of the pharynx, but in advance
of the middle of the bod}^.

In the larger examples (PI. xliii, figs. 3 to 3b) the greater part of
the body is filled Avith numerous ovarian and spermary vesicles, the

A. E. Verrlll — Marine Planarians of JSTeto England. 481

latter being Diore numerous and smaller than the former, and
often grouped around them in clusters.*

The male genital orifice is far from the hind end of the body.
The granular gland (k) is nearly round and prominent. The seminal
vesicle (r) rests against the anterior side of the granular gland and
consists of a central and two lateral parts, partially concealed by the
granular gland, the exposed part being obovate or somewhat pyri-
form, as usually seen ; the lateral portions are continuous with the
vasa deferentia [d). The penis-sheath {q) is short, stout, somewhat
conical ; the penis itself, or verge, {p) is very long and slender,
cirriform or hair-like, ajjparently somewhat chitinous, usually more
or less coiled, often exsert in the preserved specimens.

The female genital orifice is usually surrounded by a broad circu-
lar pit. The first part of the duct (or vagina, v) is relatively large
and long, a little expanded at the end, narrowing farther forward
and bending upward and backward close to the male orifice, where
it expands into a small ovate vesicle, from which it extends back-
ward as a narrow moniliform tube (w') which runs back beyond the
external orifice and passes into the elongated cornucopia-shaped
sperniatheca {s), which is broad at the anterior, and pointed at the
posterior end. In many specimens there appeared to be a small duct
leading from the posterior end of the spermatheea to a minute ex-
ternal orifice {x), but this is uncertain, for it may be the nephridial
duct.

Vineyard Sound to Eastport, Me., low-water mark to 42 fathoms
or more. Abundant at Gloucestei", Mass., on the shores, under
stones, on the piles of wharves, and in tide-pools, especially at Ten
Pound Island, 1878. Off Cape Ann, Mass., station 156, in 42
fathoms, muddy bottom, 1878 (No. 20). Casco Bay, Me., in tide-
pools, 1873 ; Eastport, Me., in tide-pools and under stones at low-
water mark, 1868, 1870, 1872. Vineyard Sound, on telegraph Cable,
off Cuttyhunk Island.

The original description of this species is almost useless for its
identification. It is as follows: "This species is oblong-shaped,
somewhat lanceolated, of a color varying from a light greenish yel-

* In the specimen (No. 20) illustrated (figs. 3-36), the ovaries are colored light red,
while the testes are colored dark red by the staining fluid used (alcoholic borax-car-
mine) and are, therefore, easily distinguishable. In order to prevent confusion, only
a part of these organs are actually figured. The uterine sacs, oviducts, and most of
the large sperm-ducts are also omitted, as well as the branches of the stomach, all
of which can be seen, more or less distinctly, in the preparation.

482 A. E. Verrill — Marhie Planarians of N'ev) England.

low to an orange red, Avith a minute punctulation of a deeper red.
The relative position of the eye-specks is subject to some variation.
I have found it in Boston and Beverly harbors, always in deep
water. It spawns in January and February. Entire length, half an
inch."

The expression " deep-water " at the time the above was written
probably meant 12 to 25 fathoms or less.

Although I have dredged extensively in the same waters where
Girard's species was taken, and at all depths, I have never obtained
any planarian that could be referred to his species with any proba-
bility of correctness, unless it be the species described above, which
is a common one in Massachusetts Bay. There is nothing in Girard's
description of specific importance except the color, which is more or
less variable in all the species of the genus. Otlier species of Lep-
to'plana, observed by me, are often tinged with reddish, or pale
orange, but seldom so decidedly as his description would imply.
Some of the varieties of the pi'esent species are, however, decidedly
orange-red and have darker red or brown spots, nearly as stated in
Girai'd's description. This fact, and the correspondence in locality
induce me to adopt his name for this common species.

That his species was a Leptoplana is probable, because of his call-
ing it a Polycelis, which, as used by authors at that time, was nearly
equivalent to Tieptoplana. From tlie description alone, it would, of
course, be impossible to tell even the genus to which his species
belongs, for no indication of the actual arrangement of the ocelli is
given.

It is quite possible that this species is identical with L. eWpsoides
Girard, described by him a few years later from the drawings of Dr.
Stimpson. The latter, as it exists in the Bay of Fundy, is a much
larger and broader form, with less conspicuous ocelli, and presents
some'other differences, as noted below. But these variations may
be due to greater age, or to more favorable conditions of growth.
My specimens ai'e not sufficiently numerous to enable me to form a
complete series between the two tyjDical forms. They are, at any
rate, very closely allied.

Among foreign species, the nearest relative of this species is, per-
haps, L. Drohachiensis (Oersted) of Greenland. The latter has
more numerous lobes to the pharynx and stomach, and differs, also,
in the form of the genital organs.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of JSTev) England. 483
Leptoplana ellipsoides Girard.

Leptoplmia ellipsoides Girard, in Stinipsoii, Invert. Grand Manan, p. 27, pi. 2, fig.
16, 1853; Diesing, Revision der Turbellarien, Abtheilung, Sitz. d. mathem.-
naturw., xliv, p. 533, 1861; Lang, Polycladen, p. 512, copy of original descrip-
tion.

Pl.^TE XL, FIGURES 5, 6; PLATE XLIII, FIGURES 4, 4a, 4&.

Description of living specirneus : — Body large, flat, rather thin,
usually broad-ovate or broad-elliptical, but capable of becoming
long-elliptical ; the edges are thin and frequently strongly undulated,
and are capable of being used for swimming by means of rapid un-
dulatory motions.

Ocelli are small, black, and not very conspicuous ; those in the
dorsal clusters are larger than those in the cerebral clusters. The
latter are relatively rather small, somewhat elongated groups, broad-
est near the middle, narrowing to a point anteriorly, and containing
numerous (often 30 to 40) minute crowded ocelli. They are situated
a little forward of the other groups in usual states of the body,
but in some states of contraction of the anterior and dorsal region
they may be drawn back, so as to lie between, or even behind, the
dorsal groups. The dorsal groups are usually nearly circular and
contain numerous (20 to 25) ocelli of different sizes, some of which
are much larger than the rest.

Color, various shades of dull yellowish brown, greenish brown, and
reddish brown, usually more or less distinctly marked with irregular
spots or blotches of darker brown, and with small specks of whitish;
a lighter colored median streak runs over the gastric region, and
another covers the genital region farther back ; frequently the two
streaks are united into a continuous median streak that extends
nearly the Avhole length of the body. Under surface pale grayish
or yellowish white, the whiter pharynx and vasa deferentia showing
through indistinctly.

Length of large specimens, in extension, 25 to 35"^'"; breadth 12
to 20""".

Description of mounted specimens : — The specimens mounted in
balsam are not sufficiently translucent to show distinctly many of
the internal organs, owing in part to their large size and the great
amount of pigment, but more particularly to the fact that the body
is so densely filled with ovarian and spermarian vesicles that the other
organs are obscured.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 63 January, 1893.

484 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of New England.

The male genital organs (PI. xliii, figs. 4a, \b) are close to the
posterior end of the stomach; there is a conspicuous, nearly round,
granular gland (A') ; at the anterior end of this, and partly concealed
by it, the seminal vesicle (/■) can be seen ; its form is pyriform or
rounded and cap-like, its length, as exposed, being usually greater
than its breadth; it consists of a central, and two lateral parts, which
are dilations of the vas deferens' the penis-sheath is stout-cylindrical
or somewhat expanded at the end; the penis (jt>) is long and slender,
cirriforra, coiled up more or less in contraction; the external open-
ing is often, in preserved specimens, raised on a conical elevation,
and sometimes the penis sheath is protruded as a clavate papilla.

The female genital opening is usually situated in a broad funnel-
shaped depression of the surface in preserved specimens ; from this
opening the nearly cylindrical, thick-walled, tubular duct or vagina
(y) runs forward nearly or quite to the male orifice, where it bends up-
ward and then turns backward upon itself in the shape of a siphon ;
at the bend it expands somewhat, into a small vesicle ; but its distal
or dorsal portion is a narrow, somewhat moniliform tube (v'), there
being a series of slight constrictions along most of its length ; it
extends back beyond the external female orifice into a rather large,
elongated, somewhat flask-shaped, thick-walled spermatheca (s). The
first or ventral portion of the female duct (vagina, v) receives, on
each side, numerous slender ducts of the tubular shell-glands that
radiate outward from it in every direction, except directly forward.
The connections of the uterine sacs or oviducts were not observed.
Opposite the posterior end of the spermatheca there appears to be
a minute external orifice that communicates by a slender duct with
the spermatheca, but this connection was not fully demonstrated,
nor was it seen in every specimen examined; it may be the nephri-
dial duct.

Gulf of St, Lawrence to Casco Bay, low-water mark to 60 fathoms.
Common at Eastport, Me., and Grand Menan, K B., 1862 to 1872,
at low-water mark under stones, in tide-pools, and at all depths down
to 40 fathoms, on stony bottoms. Halifax, N. S., 8 to 10 fathoms,
1877, Casco Bay, Maine, 10 to 12 fathoms, 1873,

This species, as stated under L. variabilis, is closely related to the
latter and may prove to be only a larger and more fully developed
variety of it. The principal differences, externally, are the larger,
broader, and more robust body, and the relatively smaller and much
less conspicuous ocelli. The color is variable in each and not essen-
tially different, unless the small white specks of the present species

A. E. Yerrill — Marine Planarians of New England. 485

be characteristic, which is doubtful. Internally, the structure is very
similar, but the first part of the female duct (vagina) in this species
is relatively shorter and smaller, and the spermatheca is somewhat
swollen or flask-shaped, while that of L. variabilis is rather cornu-
copia-shaped. • The male organs are very much alike.

The amount of the variations in form, proportions, and position of
the genital organs that may be produced by the presei-ving and hard-
ening fluids is, however, very uncertain. These closely allied forms
should be more carefully compared as to these organs, when living,
or at least before immersion in hardening agents.

Leptoplana angusta, sp. nov.

Plate xl, figure 8 ; Plate xliv, figures 2, 2a, 3.

Body veiy changeable, in extension rather narrow and elongated,
elliptical or oblong, the length exceeding half an inch and equal to
about thi-ee times the bi*eadth, very thin, with the margins flexible,
and usually more or less undulated and curled ; the front end is
usually rounded ; the posterior end is often notched or emarginate
in the middle.

The cerebral and dorsal clusters of ocelli blend, and form two
nearly straight and parallel fusiform groups, often nearly linear in
the small specimens, pointed at both ends, and situated well forward.
In the larger specimens these groups have a distinctly wider portion
behind the middle, composed of a small cluster of larger ocelli be-
longing to the dorsal groups, which are partially detached from the
cerebral groups ; but in the smaller specimens the dorsal ocelli can
hardly be distinguished from the others, which mostly lie in two
rows in each group.

The retracted pharynx is large, elongated, elliptical, with numer-
ous short, nearly equal lobes along the sides, of which about twelve
or thirteen pairs can usually be distinguished. The mouth is some-
what behind the center of the pharynx. The stomach has numerous
lateral branches and a great number of terminal twigs which anas-
tomose pretty fi*eely distally.

The reproductive organs extend entirely around the pharynx and
stomach, thus forming an opaque or dark colored elliptical zone.
The vasa defereittia in the larger specimens are often conspicuous
organs along the sides of the stomach. The uterine sacs in some
specimens are large and swollen with masses of eggs, opposite and
behind the posterior part of the stomach. The copulatory organs

486 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of Neio England.

are situated rather far back and are not easily seen in most of the
preparations. The male organs consist of a large, elliptical, muscu-
lar penis-bulb more or less concealed by a lai-ge round granular
gland ; the sessile, rounded or oval seminal vesicle is situated above
and partly behind the anterior end of the granular gland ; the penis-
sheath is rather long and large, cylindrical or sometimes elliptical ;
the penis is, apparently, simple and conical, without a slender chit-
inous cirrus. The glandular portion of the siphon-shaped female
duct is elongated and dilated anteriorly, in the largest specimens,
and extends from near the posterior margin of the body forward to,
and often beyond, the male orifice, as seen in tlie best preserved
specimens. This region is usually so altered by contraction that the
reproductive organs are evidently much altered in form and position
in nearly all cases, and therefore vary in different specimens from
the same lot. The larger specimens are filled with numerous ovarian
and spermarian folicles, and the uterine sacs and \Hi8a deferentla are
swollen with their contents.

Color above, while living, various shades of light brown, often
tinged with darker brown in the middle and at the margins.

Length, in extension, while living, 12 to 16'"™, breadth 4 to 6'"'".

Provincetown, Mass., 1870, abundant among hydroids, barnacles,
etc., on the bottom of a whaling vessel, recently arrived from off the
Carolina coast. It was associated with several southern species of
mollusks, crustaceans, etc.

This species is not a typical Leptoplana, but it appears to be
closely allied to several foreign species referred to that genus by
Lang and others. In its external characters it agrees with the genus
Elasmodes of Stimpson, which Lang unites Avith Leptoplana.

TrigOnoporUS Lang, op. dt., p. 502.

Pharynx with numerous lateral lobes, stomach with about five or
six pairs of main branches, which at first branch arborescently, but
distally anastomose more or less completely.

Marginal ocelli numerous, but minute ; many other similar minute
ocelli are scattered over the frontal region. Cerebral ocelli numer-
ous, forming large clusters over the ganglions and frontal nerves.

Dorsal ocelli small and numerous, forming crowded groups, some-
times confused with the cerebral clusters. Male copulatory organ
with a well developed pyriform penis-bulb and granular gland com-
bined ; muscular penis-sheath conical or funnel-shaped ; penis sim-
ple, conical ; seminal vesicle apparently wanting. Female duct

A. Til. Verrill — Marine Planarians of New England. 487

siphon-shaped, with an external opening at each end. Its anterior
opening is very near the male orifice (in contracted specimens often
in the same depression); the posterior orifice is smaller and consider-
ably farther back. A special spermatheca is wanting, or may be
formed by a dilation at the anterior bend of the vagina, and not
much specialized.

The single European species ( T. cephaloplithalmns).^ for which this
genus was constituted, is a long and narrow form, with the groups
of ocelli all confused, while our two species are broad and stout
forms, with the four main clusters of ocelli clearly distinct, and ar-
ranged much as in Leptoplana and Cryj^tocelis, from which they dif-
fer but little in general appearance, when living. From Leptoplana
they ai'e, however, easily distinguished by the presence of numerous
marginal and fi'ontal ocelli, and by the peculiar structure of the gen-
ital organs. In the structure of the reproductive organs, and espe-
cially in having two orifices for the female duct, both of our species
agree well with the type-species of Trigoiioporus.

The cerebral ganglions and main nei've-trunks in both of our spe-
cies are distinctly pale red in life, the color resembling that of the
nervous system of certain nemerteans belonging to the genera Lineus
and Cerehratulus. This observation was repeated many times, and
in different years, so that it can scarcely be due to any temporary
cause. I have not observed a red color in the nervous system of any
other planarian.

Trigonoporus folium Veniii.

LeptojjJana folium Yerrill, Marine Invert, of Vineyard Sound, etc., pp. iVA'l [?>:-i8],
1873 ; Lang, op. cit.. p. 512 ; copy of original description.

Pl.-^te xli, figures 5, 5a, 6; Plate xlii, figures 5, 5a, 56; Plate xliv, figures
4, 4a, 46, 4c, 4rf, 56, 6, 7.

Description of living specimens : — Body very changeable in form,
rather flat, leaf-like, in extension oblong-elliptical or ovate, and
usually nai'rowest anteriorly, capable of contracting to short, rounded
or broad-ovate forms ; mai'gins more or less undulated, when in rapid
motion.

Ocelli small and rather inconspicuous ; the dorsal groups are sit-
uated at about the anterior fourth or fifth ; the cerebral groups are
elongated, irregularly fusiform, there being two broader portions,
united by a narrower one, in the middle of each ; they taper to a
point at both ends, with numerous minute ocelli in the broader parts,
near the middle and over the front and posterior ends of the gan-

488 A. K Verrill — Marine Planarians of New England.

glions ; they are nearly parallel, not far apart, extending both behind
and before the brain, but diminishing in breadth over the middle
of the ganglions ; one or two of the anterior ocelli are usually dis-
tinctly larger than most of those in the clusters. The smaller but
more conspicuous dorsal groups, which are a little farther apart and
situated rather behind the ganglions, contain a moderate number of
rather larger ocelli, forming somewhat angular or irregularly rounded
clusters, while just behind each group there is usually a small de-
tached cluster of two, three, or more ocelli. In some specimens
these small clusters are not noticeable, while in others they nearly
blend with the main clusters.

The mounted specimens show, also, two, three or more rows of
minute marginal ocelli, extending around the anterior margins, back
to the middle of the sides, and in small numbers even to the posterior
end ; many other similar minute ocelli* are scattered over the whole
frontal region, in advance of the cerebral groups, and some of the
largest of these are ranged along the main frontal nerves.

Color, in life, yellowish flesh-color or pale ocher-yellow, lighter or
darker yellowish brown, etc., becoming paler and translucent near
the margins which are whitish ; the ganglions and main nerves are
pale red or pink ; the stomach has very numerous, much lobed and
divided branches, Avhich often show through as brown markings;
over the stomach and pharynx there is a whitish or pale reddish
streak ; behind the gastric streak there is a small elliptical whitish
patch over the genital organs. The ventral surface is paler and
shows a whitish gastric spot and the opaque vas deferens running
up along each side of the stomach.

Length in life, 18 to 25™"'; breadth 10 to 15™"\

Description of specimens mounted in balsam : — The ocelli, in the
mounted specimens (PI. xliv, figs. 4^, 5b), appear more numerous
than in the living ones, because more of those that are situated deep
in the integument become visible, and consequently the shape of the
clusters, especially the cerebral ones, appears to be different, in addi-
tion to the effect of contraction. The brain (fig. oh) is only slightly
bilobed. The stomach-branches are so thoroughly anastomosed that
the body-parenchyma, as seen by translucency, appears to be ver-
miculated, or divided in many places into polygonal compartments,
in some places even having a honey-combed appearance while in

* These small scattered and inargiual ocelli were not noticed in the living speci-
mens, doubtless owing to their small size. The examinations were mostly made with
a good pocket lens, or a dissecting microscope.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of New England. 489

other parts the spaces are rosette-like ; owing to the contraction of
the tissues the surface is reticulated by corresponding grooves. The
ovaries and spermaries when present are numerous and arranged
somewhat in rosettes, but they are not developed in most of the spe-
cimens, even when of large size.* The granular gland and muscular
penis-bulb together form a conspicuous, broad-pyriform organ (PL
XLiv, figs. 4, 4a, 6, 7, A'), which is partially translucent and shows
a radially vermiculated structure within (Jk!) and a central funnel-like
opening to the ejaculatory duct ; the anterior, opaque, rounded,
glandular portion, forms, in some specimens, a slight median angle,
or prominence. The muscular penis-sheath (figs. 6, 7, q) is strong
and usually regularly funnel-shaped. The penis (/>) is small,
tapered, styliform.

The anterior female pore is near the male orifice, and in some spe-
cimens, owing to contraction of the tissues, both are brought close
together into a single pit-like depression (figs. 4, 7) ; the dorsal por-
tion of the female duct (w') is somewhat elongated, and its posterior
opening is at a considerable distance from the anterior orifice ; the
ventral part of the duct (v) is shorter and broader, and it receives
the ducts of numerous shell-glands (^o); at its upward bend it is con-
siderably dilated, and this part probably serves as a spermatheca.

Behind the second female orifice ( ? ') there is usually visible a
slender median duct which appears to terminate in a minixte med-
ian pore {u) ; this is, perhaps, the central nephridial duct, but its
extension forward could not be traced in the preparations.

The vasa deferentia are large and convoluted, in the specimens
containing ova, and extend forward to or beyond the middle of the
stomach. The uterine sacs, in the same specimens, are large and
moniliform, each one containing four or five rounded masses of
eggs ; they extend forward to about opposite the mouth.

In the sexually developed specimens the spermaries are very
numerous, especially between the outer meshes of the gastric branches,
where there are few ovaries ; farther toward the center they often
form groups of five to ten around a single ovarian folicle, thus hav-
ing the appearance of a rosette, with the larger ovarian folicle in the
center, each rosette occupying one of the meshes formed by the
digestive tubes.

Long Island Sound to Eastport, Maine, from low-water mark to

* Probably the breeding season was mostly past when they were collected, in mid-
summer, but they are present in the original specimen obtained in April, and also in
the one from station 784.

490 A. M Verrill — Marine Planar lans of Nem England.

54 fathoms. Off Watch Hill, R. I., 4 to 6 fath. among algfe, specimen
with ova, April, 1872 (A. E. V.); off Point Judith, R. I., sta. 784, in
20 fath., with ova, 1880; off Block Island, sta. 812, 28^ fath. ; off
Gay Head, Martha's Vineyard, 18 fath., 1887; off Cape Cod, sta. 301,
27 fath., 1879; off Cape Ann, Mass., at stations 134 and 136, in 26
fath., and at sta. 182, in 45 fath., 1878; Eastport, Maine, 1870.

There is considerable variation, both in external appearance and
in the form of the reproductive organs in this species, but I believe
the differences observed are due to age, season of the year, presence
or absence of ova, and the amount of contraction when preserved.
As it might be doubted w^hether all the forms can be referred to T.
folium, I have thought it well to give here a special description of
the original type-specimen of that species, for comparison with the
later and better specimens, described above.

IJescription of the original specinien from life: — Body very flat,
foliaceous, with the margin thin and undulated ; outline very change-
able, broad-ovate, narrowing to an obtuse point at the anterior end ;
sometimes oblong or elliptical and but little narrowed anteriorly.

Ocelli in four groups, near the anterior end ; the anterior or cere-
bral clusters are parallel, narrow, elongated, Avidest in the middle,
close together, almost blending on the median line, and composed of
many very minute ocelli, less easily seen than those of the other
clusters ; the terminal ocelli are largest ; the dorsal or posterior
groups are rather small and irregular ; in some states of extension
often triangular, with the pointed end backward ; marginal ocelli
numerous, but minute, in two or three rows near the edge, with
others scattered over the frontal region, visible only when much
magnified.

Color, pale yellowish flesh-color, veined with dendritic streaks of
darker flesh-color and whitish lines ; an interrupted longitudinal
whitish streak in the middle, over the stomach and pharynx, and a
small median whitish streak farther back.

Length, 20°"" to 25^"™; breadth, lO'""" to 15'""\

Off Watch Hill, 4 to 6 fathoms, among rocks and algje, April, 1872-

Description of the original type as preserved : — This original type-
specimen, mounted in balsam, shows man}?- of the anatomical charac-
ters (PI. XLiv, figs. 4-4c), but the posterior end had been mutilated
in life and only partly healed ; in consequence of this the female
repi'oductive organs are not perfect. This also accounts for the
broad eraargination of the posterior end, mentioned in the original
description.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of Neto England. 491

The pharynx is short and broad and has five large lobes on each
side, some of which are bilobed, and two small lobes near the antei-ior
end. The mouth is somewhat behind the middle of the pharynx. The
stomach has five or six main branches on each side and these are
much branched and extensively anastomosed distally, as described
above.

The meshes or interspaces between the stomach-branches are filled
with large numbers of rather large ovarian folicles and a much
greater number of smaller s])ermaries which are grouped closely
around each of the ovarian folicles, so as to form rosettes Avhere they
are not too much crowded ; distallj^ the spermaries increase in num-
bers, while the ovaries diminish.

The combined granular gland and penis-bulb (figs. 4, 4«, k) form
a regularly pyriform organ, rounded anteriorly, and having essen-
tially the same structures as in the specimens described above ; the
penis and penis-sheath {q) also agree well with those already
described. Owing to the mutilation of the female organs and the
contraction of the parts, the anterior female orifice and the male
orifice are brought close together, and the posterior female orifice is
not distinguishable.

This is a very active and restless species. One specimen protruded
its multilobed pharynx when placed in alcohol. A specimen (sta.
136, July 26, 1878) was filled with white eggs, visible through the
integument of the ventral side, while living.

When preserved in alcohol, the specimens retain their form better
than those of most of the I'elated species, and usually do not curl up
much ; the preserved specimens are rather thick, firm, usually broad-
ovate, narrower toward the front end, which is often somewhat
lanceolate ; the mouth is usually visible as a small round central
opening ; the small male reproductive orifice, or a papilla in its place,
is often distinct.

Trigonoporus dendriticus, sp. nov.

Plate xli, figure 4; Plate xlii, nauRES 4, 4a, 4& ; Plate xliii, figure 5.

Body usually ovate with the anterior end narrowed and more or
less pointed, edges undulated and flexible, but the form is subject to
considerable changes, though less so than in the species of Lepto-
plana.

Ocelli minute and rather inconspicuous ; the cerebral groups are
near together, irregular and somewhat elongated, composed of
numerous very small ocelli which mostly lie over the anterior and

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 64 January, 1893.

492 A. E. Verrill — 3Iarine Planarians of New England.

the posterior ends of the ganglions, so that each cluster is constricted
in the middle, or somewhat hour-glass shaped ; the dorsal groups
are more conspicuous, but usually smaller, irregular, longer than
broad, often somewhat elongate-triangular, with the acute end
directed backward ;* they are well separated fi'om the cerebral
groups and are, for the most part, behind them ; marginal ocelli are
small but numerous, in two or three rows extending back to the
middle, while numerous small ocelli are scattered over the whole
frontal region.

Color pale yellowish or pinkish, with brown dendritic markings,
due to the much divided and lobed stomach branches ; the pharynx,
showing distinctly through the integument, forms a deeply lobed
central spot. The cerebral ganglions and nerves are reddish. The
mouth is rather large, situated in front of the middle, and about op-
posite the second pair of large pharyngeal lobes. Pharynx is large
and has about five pairs of large and long lobes. The main branches
of the stomach fork and divide arborescently at first, and the branches
are much lobulated along their sides, giving them a fern-like appear"
ance. They do not anastomose so freely as those of T. folium.

Length 12 to 15™"i; breadth 6 to 8""".

The reproductive organs (PI. xr.iv, fig. 3) agree pretty neai'ly with
those of T. folium, as seen in the mounted specimen. The penis-
bulb and granular gland together are more oblong than in that
species, and there appears to be a constriction near the front end,
partially separating the cap-like anterior portion from the rest. The
penis is short, conical, and simple ; its sheath is not so thick and
strong as in T. folium. The anterior female orifice is a little distance
back of the male orifice ; the glandular part of the vagina is elon-
gated, and its posterior orifice is situated well back.

Off Race Point, Cape Cod, sta. 31 V, in 25 fathoms, 18V9.

DisCOCelis P]hrenberg, 1832, (emend.); Lang, op. cit., p. 466.

Body broad, usually ovate, foliaceous, marginal ocelli present,
cerebral and dorsal ocelli variable in number, usually in four groups.
Mouth central or a little in advance of the center. Pharynx large,
and sometimes with divided accessory pouches, A single common

* The mounted specimens, as well as some of my sketches from life, show that
all the groups of ocelli as represented in fig. 4, Plate xii, are too regularly triangular,
and the posterior groups are too large and too elongated; the enlarged figure on
Plate XLii. fig. 4a, is from the same specimen, after nionnting; but doubtless the
shape of the groups is more or leas altered by contraction.

A. M Verrill — Mar me Planaricms of New England. 493

genital opening. Female genital organ with a glandular accessory
vesicle.

The following species is referred to this genus chiefly on account
of its external resemblance to the tyi>ical species. 1 have had no
mature specimens sufficiently well preserved to enable me to study
the reproductive organs.

Discocells mutabilis Vemii.

Polycelis mutabilis Verrill, Report ou the Invertel). of Viueyard Sound, etc., p.

746, (452,) 1873.
Lang, op. cit., p. 616, copy of original description.

Plate xl, figure 7; Plate xlh, figures 6, 6a, 7.

Description of the original specimen from life: — Body much
depressed, thin, changeable in form, often elliptical or oval, fre-
quently broad and emarginate in front, and tapered posteriorly.
Marginal ocelli very distinct, black, forming several rows along the
front border, l)ut only one or two rows laterally. Dorsal and cere-
bral ocelli larger, forming three pairs of rather ill-defined clusters ;
the outer or dorsal clusters are largest, often convergent backward ;
a pair of smaller cerebral clusters is situated a little in advance, and
nearer together ; the third pair is a little farther forward and still
closer together, often more or less confused with those next behind
them.

Color, yellowish brown, darker centrally ; or pale yellowish, thickly
specked with yellowish brown. Length, about V to 9™'" ; breadth,
5 to 6°>"'.

Thimble Islands, near New Haven, Conn., 1 to 2 fathoms, among
red algfe, 1872.

The original type-specimen, described above, was mounted in bal-
sam for the microscope, when first obtained. It is still in my pos-
session, and from it the figures (PI. xlii, figs. 6, 6a) have been
drawn with the camera-lucida. Unfortunately the internal organs
are not well preserved. The reproductive organs cannot be seen
at all. Possibly the specimen was immature, with imperfectly de-
veloped sexual organs, but its size would indicate that it was adult.

The pharynx and stomach are large and have numerous lateral
obes. As near as can be made out, the elongated stomach has eight
or nine principal branches on each side, but they are indistinct, owing
to the poor state of preservation of the specimen.

The marginal ocelli are rather conspicuous and extend back nearly
as far as the posterior end of the stomach. The four groups of

494 A. E. Yerrill — Marine Planarians of Neio England.

cerebral and frontal ocelli are more or less confused in the prepara-
tion, and are unusually far apart, doubtless owing to compression in
mounting the specimen ; the distortion of the groups is doubtless
due to the same cause ; behind each cerebi'al group there is a rather
large isolated ocellus. The posterior or dorsal groups are conspicu-
ous, a little elongated, elliptical or oval, somewhat pointed behind ;
each is composed of about 12 black ocelli, several of which are con-
siderably larger than the others, reniform in shape, with a transpar-
ent, lens-like portion on the concave side.

I have never found another large specimen that can be referred to
this species.

Descri^otion of young specimens: — Several very young individuals
were taken at the surface, with towing nets, both at Newport, R. I.,
and at Wood's Holl, Mass., which apparently belong to this species,
but they are all too immature to be identified with certainty, until
intermediate sizes shall have been observed.

One of these young specimens, figured from life, is represented on
Plate XL, figure V, in its contracted form ; another unpublished fig-
ure of the same individual is considerable longer with the frontal
ocelli farther forward, and with the stomach longer and showing
eight or nine pairs of lateral branches. The reproductive organs are
not distinctly developed. The form is generally obovate or obcor-
date, with a distinct emargination in front. The ocelli form six
groups; the frontal groups contain each only one or two ocelli; the
cerebral groups contain each about three ocelli in a single row; each
of the outer or dorsal groups contains three ocelli. (PI. xlii, fig. 7).

The color is translucent whitish with delicate, pale yellow den-
dritic marking and a deeper yellow gastric spot ; the transparent
margin is elegantly marked with a row of light golden yellow spots.
It is active and graceful in its movements.

This specimen was taken at the surface of the sea at Wood's Holl>
Aug. 16, 1882.

Tribe, Cotylea Lang.

Acetajbulum ventral, behind the female opening.* Mouth and
pharynx situated between the middle and anterior end of the body.

* The existence of a ventral acetabulum or sucker is not strictly diagnostic of this
group, for certain species of Leptoplana and of Planoeeridce have, also, a ventral
sucker of the same kind. But in all the latter groups, so far as I know, the sucker,
when present, is in front of the female orifice. 5'erhaps the pit-like depression around
the female orifice of certain species of Leptoplanidce is of the same nature and for the
same purpose.

A. E. Verrlll — Marine Pldnarlans of Neio England. 495

Pharynx tubular, long or short, exsertible. Main stomach cavity
not extending forward beyond the pharynx. Lateral branches of
the stomach variable in number, reticulated or dendritic.

Tentacles, when present, situated at the anterior margin, often
wanting. Ocelli numerous, usually forming two cerebral clusters ;
an anterior marginal row ; and clusters in the tentacles, when these
are present. Female organs are without a copulatory pouch and
accessory vesicle or spermatheca. The male organs are variously
situated, often anterior ; sometimes they are paired, or even (in the
genus Anonymus) multiple in a lateral row along each side. De-
velopment with metamorphosis.

Family, Euryleptice Stimp., 1857 (emend.).

Euryleptidm Lang, Die Polycladen des Golfes von Neapel, p. 553, 1884.

Body ovate or elliptical. Marginal tentacles present or absent.
Mouth near the anterior extremity of the body. Pharynx tubular.
Stomach long, narrow ; its branches either simple or anastomosing.
Ocelli are present at the front margin of the body and in the tenta-
cles, when these are present; others form two cerebral groups.

Eurylepta (Ehrenberg) Lang.

Body not papillose. Marginal tentacles well developed, elongated,
not pliciform. Pharynx cylindrical. Principal lateral branches of
the stomach about five on each side, not anastomosing. Male aper-
ture under the posterior end of the pharyngeal sac.

Eurylepta maculosa Verriii, sp. nov.

Plate xlt, figures 2, 3.

Description of living specimens: — Body thin, very changeable,
usually elliptical or oblong, and more or less elongated, with the
margin very thin ; in motion often wavy and undulated, and con-
stantly changing its form ; frontal margin rather narrow with two
moderately long, obtuse, flattened marginal tentacles, which are
flexible and changeable in form.

Ocelli numerous; on the lower and anterior sides of the tentacles
there are clusters of numerous, minute, black ocelli, but they do not
e.Ktend much above the middle of the tentacles ; numerous similar
marginal ocelli are scattered between the tentacles on and near the
front margin ; back of the tentacles, the distance varying with the
state of contraction or extension, there are, above the ganglions, two
elongated groups of cerebral ocelli, side by side, and so close together
as to appear, at times, like one broad group ; each of these groups

496 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of Neio England.

consists of twelve or more ocelli, of which one, near the middle in
each group, is larger than the rest.

Color pale, translucent, yellowish or pinkish white, irregularly
specked and mottled, or veined, with purplish or brown, and usuallj^
with a number of darker and more distinct, small, brown spots scat-
tered over the central area, and especially along the middle of the
back, while around the margin the color markings form distinct
radial spots.

Length 10 to 12'""^ ; breadth 6 to 8™'°.

Wood's Holl, on piles, July 14, 1881; in mud, Aug. 2, 1882; Nau-
shon I., near Wood's Holl, Mass., at low-water mark, among algae,
Aug. 20, 1887.

This species has been met with but few times, and in each case
only a single specimen has been obtained. It must be considered
very rare on our coast. None of the specimens are sufficiently well
preserved to allow any anatomical study.

Family, PROSTHiosTOMiDyE Lang, p. 594.
Prosthiostomum Quarrefages, op. cit., p. 133, 1845; Lang, op. cit., p. .594.

Body elongated, smooth. No tentacles. Ocelli in cerebral groups
and around the front margin. Mouth anterior, below the brain.
Pharynx long, tubular, directed forward. Stomach elongated, with
numerous lateral branches, not anastomosed.

Male genital organs behind the pharyngeal sac ; two accessory
seminal vesicles ; penis uncinate, directed backward.

This is the only genus of the family.

Prosthiostomum gracile Girard.

ProHlhiostomnni yracile Girard. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. iii. p. 251. 1850.
Elanmodes f r/rociVis Stimpson, Prodromus, p. [3] 21, 1857.

Woodcut, Fig. 1.

The original description of this species is so meager that no one
has hitherto been able to identify it, so far as I know.

It reads as follows : " It differs from other species of the same
genus by its very slender body and the arrangement of the eye-
specks, which are disposed in four groups ; of which the first and
second are in a single pair, the third triple, and the fourth double.
From Boston Harbor."

The generic position has been doubtful. Dr. Stimj)Son, who states
that he had Girard's original drawings of planarians for examination,
refers it doubtfully to Elasmodes [= Leptoplana in part).

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of JSTeio England. 497

The only specimens of the genus Prosthiostomum that I have
found on the New England coast are quite young. Presuming
that Girard's species was correctly referred to this genus, my young-
specimens may, very likely, belong to the same species, for the
ocelli have a similar arrangement.

Fig. 1. Prosthiostomum gracilt. Young, x 8.

When living the body is long-elliptical in extension (see cut 1, from
life) and quite thin and translucent. The stomach has about four-
teen main branches on each side, and these are much divided distally.
Those of the anterior pair curve outward and forward around the
pharyngeal region and ocelli. The tubular pharynx was only imper-
fectly^ seen, and was probably not fully developed. The cerebral
ocelli form an interrupted curved row of about four on each side, of
which the anterior pair is largest. The posterior or dorsal clusters
are each represented by two ocelli, placed obliquely. The marginal
ocelli are very distinct, and form a single row around the front edge.
The reproductive organs were not developed.

Color pale yellowish white with darker yellow arborescent mark-
ings, due to the gastric branches. Other specimens are light yellow-
ish green, with a whitish gastric spot and pale radial lines, and a
greenish median line posteriorly.

Length of the largest about 4""" ; breadth I •25'"'".

Noaiik, Conn., July 9, 1874; Wood's HoU, Mass., July 25, 1881;
New Haven, Conn., Oct. 14, 1892. Boston Harbor (Girard).

It is probable that Girard's specimens were also immature, and
perhaps but little larger than those here described. He does not
give the size.

MONOGONOPORA or TRICLADIDEA.
Body generally narrower and relatively longer than in the I>igo-
nopora. Sometimes a distinct muscular ventral foot is present.
Sometimes a posterior sucker is developed. In some genera there
are dorsal tentacles ; in others, frontal lobes. The mouth is gener-
ally somewhat behind the middle. The pharynx is generally simple*

* In the American fresh-water genus Phagocata (Leidy), besides the central pharynx,
there is a row of smaller ones along each side, each one arising from the base of a
lateral secondary stomach-branch.

498 A. JEJ. Verrili — Marine Planarians of New England.

and tubular, often cylindrical or urn-shaped, and capable of being
protruded fully from the mouth ; when retracted it lies in the median
line, in a definite pharyngeal -cavity. Its base connects with the
stomach at the central part from which the three main gastric
branches arise.

Two of the main gastric branches run backward, one on each side
of the pharyngeal and reproductive regions, and from these numer-
ous smaller transverse branches, either simple or branched, run out
toward the margins, and still smaller transverse branches often run
inward toward the center. The anterior main branch is median and
gives off lateral branches more or less symmetrically on each side.

The brain, frontal nerves, and main lateral nerve-trunks are gen-
erally well developed ; a small marginal nerve and a complex nerv-
ous plexus can often be distinguished without difficulty.

The ocelli are often only two, situated over or near the cerebral
ganglions, in other cases three pairs, and in many genera they are
numerous, in tw^o groups ; sometimes they are lacking. A median
otocyst is sometimes present.

The species are nearly all hermaphrodites. There is one common,
genital orifice, posteriorly situated. The ovaries, or germaria, are
usually two, anteriorl}'^ situated, and special inteUaria are developed
along the sides. Spermaries are generally, but not always, numerous
and scattered. The copulatory organs present many variations. The
eggs are generally enclosed in capsules. Some species are viviparous.
Development is direct.

Most of the species of this group inhabit fresh-water and moist
places on the land, but there are several marine genera. The terres-
trial species are found chiefly in warm and moist countries, but a
single, small terrestrial species [Rhynchodemiis sylvaticus Leidy)
inhabits New England, as far north as New Haven, where I have
often observed it.

Famil}^, Bdellourid.e Verrili,
Bdelluridea Diesing, op. cit., p. 518, 1861.

Body elongated, flattened, highly muscular, leech-like, with a well
developed posterior acetabulum or sucker. Brain and lateral nerve-
trunks well developed ; marginal nerve distinct. Pharynx plicated,
cylindrical in extension. Two posterior main gastric branches not
united posteriorly. Ectoparasites.

This family is constituted for the following genus only.

A. E. Verrill — 3farine Planar kins of New England. 499

Bdelloura Leidy.

Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., vol. v. 242, 1851; Stimpson, Prodromus, p. 6, 1857.
BdeUura Diesing', Sitzb. der mathem-naturw., Abtheilung, Dendrocoelen, p. 518,1861.

Body flat, lanceolate, with thin muscular edges along the middle,
adapted for swimming. Acetabulum nearly as wide as the body,
separated by a constriction. Month behind the middle. Tentacles
none. Ocelli two, reniform, with a front lens. Brain large, bilobed,
with several pairs of frontal nerves ; lateral nerve-trunks (PI. xlia',
fig. 8, n, n',) large, united by a posterior commissure in the acetabu-
lum, and by others, farther forward, behind the genital orifice.
Lateral gastric branches (fig. 8, g') more or less divided. Penis sim-
ple, conical, unarmed (figs. 8, 8a, p). A pair of female, accessory,
lobulated glandular organs or "uterine sacs" (fig. 8, x) is situated
about opposite the genital pore. Unicellular mucus-glands are pres-
ent. Rhabdites are wanting. Eggs are enclosed in capsules.

The only known species is an active ectoparasite on Lhnulus, but
it is able to swim freely, with an undulatory, leech-like motion.

Bdelloura Candida Girard.

Vortex Candida Girard, Proceedings Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. iii, p. 264, 1851.

Bdelloura parasitica Leidy, Proceedings Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., vol. v, p. 242,
1852; Stimpson, Prodromus, p. 6, 1857.

Bdelloura Candida Girard, op. cit., vol. iv, p. 211, 1852.

BdeUura parasitica Diesing. op. cit., p. 518.

Bdelloura Candida "Verrill, Rep. Marine Invert. Vineyard Sound, pp. 634 [340j,
460 [166], 1873: Gissler, Amer. Nat, vol. xvi, pp. 52, 53, 1882 (egg-cases and young);
Ryder, op. cit., pp. 48-51; 142, 143, 1882 (10 woodcuts of egg-cases, etc.; fig. 8 is
reversed, head for tail), three species supposed to exist on Limulus.

Planaria limuli Graff, Zool. Anzeig., pp. 202-205, 1879; Woodruff, Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool., xxi, p. 19, 1891.

Plate xl, figures 10, lOb; Plate xli, figure 8; Plate XLm, figure 11 ; Plate
XLIV, FIGURES 8, 8a. 8b.

Body smooth and firm ; muscular system highl}^ developed ; very
changeable in form and very active ; usually lanceolate, or broadest
in the middle with the anterior end pointed. While, adhering by
the posterior sucker it can extend itself in every direction, at times

Fig. 2. Bdelloura Candida. Adult, slightly enlarged.

becoming almost linear and looking very much like a small leech

{ Clepsine), hnt in contraction it becomes short-elliptical, oval, or

oblong ; tlie margins are thin and often undulated in life. Posterior

Tuans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 65 January, 1893.

500 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planar ians of JVeic England.

sucker well-developed, variable in form according to the state of
contraction. It is able to swim rapidly with undulatory motions like
those of a leech.

Ocelli two, black, conspicuous, near together, not far from the
front end. Pharynx conspicuous in life, as a white median, cylin-
drical, sulcated organ showing through the integument ; its open
end is divided into about six small lobes. Mouth neai*ly central,
or a little behind the middle. Transverse branches of the intestine
numerous and crowded, about twenty-five to thirty principal ones
on each side; mostly forked and lobulated distally, in adult speci-
mens. The ovaries or germaria appear as somewhat opaque, whitish,
round or pyriform organs near the bases of the fourth pair of
branches of the stomach, and often about midway between the brain
and the base of the pharynx.

Color whitish, grayish, or yellowish ; the intestinal branches
usually forming a central darker brown region, in the middle of
Avhich the pharynx forms an oblong white spot. The color of the
gastric or intestinal branches varies according to their contents.

Length 15 to 25"""; breadth 4 to 6"'"\

Cape Hatteras, N. C, to Casco Bay, Maine, Very common on
the gills and gill-plates and other parts of the " horse-shoe crab,"
Limulus polyphem us.

The egg-capsules* are often found in large numbers attached to
the gill-plates of Limnlus. They are chitinous, brownish or yellow-
ish, variable in size and form, usually oval, elliptical, or oblong,
with the upper side convex and the under side nearly flat ; the
larger ones are about ^^^ long and half as wide. PL xLiv, figure
Sh. They are usually attached by a pedicle at one end, but some-
times at both ends. They contain from one to eight eggs or em-
bryos, most commonly four to six. I have observed fresh capsules
during the whole summer, and have seen them forming in October,
showing that the breeding season is long. PI. xliii, fig. 11, ca.

It seems to me certain that the embryos formerly described and

* Dr. J. A. Ryder has described and figured three forms of these egg-capsules from
the gills of Limulus (Amer. Naturalist, vol. 16, pp. 48-51) and thinks that they prob-
ably belong to distinct species. I have never found but one species of adult plana-
rians on Limulus. In the case of one of the worms (fig. 8), supposed by him to be
a distinct species, he mistook the caudal sucker for the head, and overlooked the eyes.
Making this correction, the differences noted by him disappear. The differences in the
capsules appear to be only variations of form and size of no great importance due, in
part at least, to the age and size of the individuals producing them. The capsules
produced by the largest specimens contain more ova than those belonging to young
individuals.

A. M Verrill — Marine Planarians of Neio England. 501

figured by Mr. A. Agassiz,t under the name oi Flanarla angulata,
did not belong to this species, for he stated that the eggs found
by him were in " a string of eggs, mistaken at first for those of
some naked mollusk," which is the case with the eggs of many
Polycladidea, but not with those of this genus. The embryos ob-
served by him were not sufiiiciently advanced for identification, but
the structure of the stomach and its branches, so far as developed,
agrees better with one of the Polycladidea than with that of any
of the Tricladidea. The embryos of BdeUoura before leaving the
capsules usually have the three main divisions of the stomach clearly
visible, as well as the two eyes.*

This is a true parasite. It sucks the blood of its host and destroys
the substance of the gills. When large numbers are present the gills
of the Limxdtis are often extensively damaged in this way.

It is gregarious in its habits. Large clusters of the adults are
often found grouped together on the joints of the legs as well as
on the gills of Limuhis. Even in confinement they preserve the
same habit, adhering to the glass in large groups. When disturbed
they often swim away with undulatory motions, like certain leeches.

This species is particularly favorable for anatomical studies, for
the tissues are well differentiated and the various organs are more
distinct than in many other allied planarians. The small amount
of pigment in the integument is also favorable, especially when
examined in the living or fresh condition. It is also very tenacious
of life, for it will live for a long time without food in a very small
amount of sea- water.

Some of the principal anatomical characters that can be made out
with living specimens are represented on plate xliv, figs. 8, 8«.
Figure 8 shows a ventral view of the entire worm only slightly com-
pressed, and figure 8a shows the posterior portion of another indi-
vidual more strongly compressed, so as to show the reproductive
organs better, but in this figure the intestinal branches (^') are so
much compressed that they appear unnaturally broad and swollen,
while the outline of the posterior sucker is obscured, for the same
reason. In this figure the nervous system is omitted.

The lateral gastric branches (left unshaded in fig. 8) in adult
specimens are very numerous, ten to twelve arising from each side
of the anterior trunk or median division of the stomach (^), while

* Several writers, have carelessly referred to the embryonic forms, described by Mr.
Agassiz, as the young of this species, although the true egg-capsules of the latter
have long been known.

f .Annals Lyceum Nat. Hist., New York, vol. viii, pp. 306-309. 1860.

502 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of New England.

twelve to eighteen arise from each of the posterier divisions [g').
Those in the middle part of the body are mostly two-lobed or
forked, and some of them ai'e divided into three or four branches
but some remain simple, especially toward the ends of the body.
Under pressure all the branches usually appear lobulated along their
sides and at their ends. The posterior trunks also give off from
their inner borders smaller lateral branches which run in toward
the median line, where those of opposite sides anastomose, back of
the pharyngeal region. The two posterior trunks do not anasto-
mose at their posterior ends in any of the examples studied by me.
The anterior trunk terminates behind the brain.

The pharynx (/") is large, cylindrical or urn-shaped, according to
its state of contraction, lobed or scolloped at the end, and often
plicate or grooved along the sides. It is often protruded in alco-
holic specimens.

The bilobed brain (c) is large and easily seen. Each lobe gives
off from its antero-lateral and front borders about five main nerves
(c') which subdivide and run to the margins of the head. The
main lateral nerve-trunks (n, n') are large and distinct. They run
back and anastomose directly in the posterior sucker. They give
off, all along their course, lateral nerves that subdivide into many
small branches, part of which go to the adjacent organs, while some
go to and join the small but distinct marginal nerve («"), in the
vicinity of which tliey form a fine network. The principal trans-
verse branches from the large nerve-trunks correspond nearly in
number with the gastric branches. Back of the genital organs
five or six, or more, transverse commissures unite the main nervous
trunks. The eyes are well developed, Avith a blackish, reniforra?
pigmented retinal body and a frontal lens-like structure.

The genital orifice ( ? , 3 ) is situated just back of the pharyngeal
region. The vasa deferentia (d) run alongside of the pharyngeal
region as convoluted tubes; near the penis they become enlarged
and serve as two seminal vesicles (r). The penis-bulb is pyriform
or obconic, and the penis [jy) is simple, styliform. The oviducts
run forward from the female genital duct or vagina (v) on each
side to the germaria or ovaries (o, fig. 8), which are situated well
forward at or near the bases of the third and fourth pairs of gastric
branches. The vitellaria or yolk-glands are very numerous; they are
clustered around and between the gastric branches, together with
the testes or spermarian folicles (t, t), which are smaller and more
numerous.

A. E. Verrill — Marine PImiarians of JVew England. 503

Two rather conspicuous glandular organs or " uterine sacs " [x)
are situated to the right and left of the genital orifice. Each one
is connected with the genital duct by a convoluted tube. The func-
tion of these organs was not clearly ascertained, but they probably
are of the same nature as the so-called " uterine sac " of other tri-
cladial planarians, which serves in part as a sperraatheca or seminal
receptacle and in part as a shell-gland. In this genus their principal
function is probably the secretion of the materials for the formation
of the strong, chitinous egg-capsules.

Family, Planarid^e.

Body depressed, more or less elongated, often oblong or long-
lanceolate in extension. Head sometimes broader than the body,
often with its lateral or antero-lateral maigins a little produced into
points or angles, or somewhat auriculate. Tentacles sometimes pres-
ent, usually absent.

Ocelli commonly a single anterior pair, with a frontal lens-like por-
tion and a reniform pigmented body; sometimes three or more pairs;
sometimes absent.

Pharynx single,* tubular, usually cylindrical; mouth central or
subcentral. Lateral intestinal branches simple or dichotomously
divided.

Eggs commonly laid in capsules. Some species are viviparous.
Fluviatile and marine.

F'OVia Girard; Stimpsou, emend., 1857.

Fovia Girard, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., iv, p. 211, 185'2; Stimpson, Prodromus,
p. vi, 1857; Diesing. op. cit.,. Dendroc, p. 501, 1862; Jensen, Turbellaria ad
Litora Norvegise. p. 74, 1878.

Body depressed, oblong or long-elliptical in extension, changeable;
back a little convex, ventral side flat, the posterior part most muscu-
lar. Front of head often slightly produced and angular; sides of
head rounded, at other times a little prominent or angular.

Ocelli two, anterior, rather large, with front lens and reniform
pigmented body, each usually surrounded by a pale spot.

* The fluviatile genus PJiagocata Leidy is here excluded from this family. It
should be the type of a special family {Phagocatidoi) characterized by the presence of
numerous secondary lateral pharynges, besides the median central one, and by
several other peculiarities of structure. (See detailed description of its anatomy and
histology by W. M. Woodworth, in Bulletin Museum Comp. Zool., vol. xii, pp. 1-44,
pi. i-iv, 1891.)

504 A. JBJ. Verrill — Marine Planarians of Neio England.

Mouth near or behind the middle. Largest lateral branches of
the stomach usually more or less lobed or forked in the adult,
simple in the young. Pharynx large, cylindrical. Reproductive
organs not fully known. Penis conical, simple.

This genus appears to be closely related to Gunda.

Fovia affinis (CErsted) Stimp.

Planaria affinis (Esrted, Entw. syst. Einth. Plattwurmer, p. 54.

Fovia affinis Stimp., Prod., p. [6] 24, 1857; Diesing, op. cit., p. 502, 1861 ; Jensen,

op. cit., p. 74 (descr.)
f Vortex Warreni Girard. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. iii, pp. 264, 363, 1851.
f Fovia Warreni Girard, op. cit., vol. iv, p. 211, 1852 ; Stimp. Prod., p. [6] 24, 1857 ;

Diesing, op. cit., p. 229, 1862.
Planaria grisea Verrill, Rep. Invert. Vineyard Sound, etc., pp. 633 [399], 487

[193], 1873.
Fovia grisea Verrill, Check List Marine Invert., p. 13, 1879.
Fovia littoralis Verrill, op. cit., p. 13, 1879, {? non Miiller sp.).

Plate xli, figures 9, 9a, 96.

Body very versatile, in usual extension oblong, widest behind the
middle, round or subtruncate at both ends, or with the middle of
the front margin a little prominent, sometimes contracting into
broad-ovate or cordate forms. The antero-lateral angles of the
head are often slightly prominent, subangular or rounded, and very
mobile. Mouth nearly central. Principal lateral branches of the
stomach mostly bilobed, others simple. The posterior part of the
lower surface seems to be capable of being used to some extent as
a sucker, for the creature often moves with quick jerks, like a leech,
but it is not separated by any constriction from the rest of the body.

Ocelli two, not far apart, black, reniform, with a transparent front
lens, each situated in a reniform white patch or spot, widest out-
wardly.

Color above, yellowish, grayish, reddish, or fulvous brown, or
dark brown; margins and lower side paler; over the pharynx and
stomach is a long, pale blotch in the middle above, extending in
some examples the whole length of the body; the long cylindrical
pharynx can sometimes be seen through the integument, especially
beneath, extending in partly contracted specimens nearly to the
posterior end. Plate xli, figure Qb.

Length 4 to 12'"'"; breadth 2 to 3"^'", in extension.

Ten Pound I., Gloucester, Mass., in tide-pools at low-water, and
among eel-grass (Zostera) in the harbor, 1878; Casco Bay, Me., at
low- water, under stones, 1873, (var. grisea); Watch Hill, R, I.,

A. JE. Verrill — Marine FlcuiarUtns of New' JiJngland. 505

at low-water mark, April, 1872 (A. E. V.), var, grisea. Beverly,
Mass. (Girard), var, 'Warrenl.

This species is not abundant on our coast. I have taken only a
single specimen of a dark green variety (referred doubtfully to this
species) at Eastport, Me., and Grand Menan, N. B., during many
seasons spent in studying the fauna of that region.

Our species appears to vary widely in color, but I am unable to
find other differences sufficient to indicate more than one species.
Nevertheless, it may be well to designate the principal color-
variations as varieties until better known, especially as they have
already received specific names.

Variety, "Warreni Girard.*
Color red or reddish brown.

Variety, grisea Verrill.

Planaria grisea Verrill, Invert. Vineyard Sd., p. 633 [339], 1873.

Color grayish, yellowish or greenish above, with a median whitish
streak. PI. xli, figs. 9-9^.

The original description is as follows: —

" Body elongated and usually oblong in extension, often long
oval or somewhat elliptical, obtusely pointed or rounded posteriorly;
head subtruncate in front, often a little prominent in the middle;
the angles are somewhat prominent, but not elongated. Ocelli two,
black, each surrounded by a reniform white spot. Color yellowish
green or grayish, with a central whitish stripe in the middle of the
back, surrounded by darker; head margined with whitish. Length,
in extension, 12"^"'; breadth, 3™"."

Watch Hill, R. I., under stones, between tides (April, 1872).

This species is referred to that of northern Europe with some
doubt, owing to our imperfect knowledge of the internal anatomy
of both forms. Externally they appear to agree closely.

* I should retain this name with some hesitation for this form, from the original
description alone, which is too indefinite to enable one to be certain as to its applica-
tion to a species of this genus, as now defined. But as Stimpson had Girard's
original drawings for examination, and gave a more precise definition to this genus,
it must be presumed that F. Warreni, the type, co.nforms to his definition.

There is a peculiar red planarian, on our coast (see pi. xl, fig. 9), which agrees well
with Girard's description, so far as it goes, but my specimens had no distinct ocelli
This is tlie species referred to F. Warreni by me in the Report on Invert, of Vine-
yard Sound, p. G33 [3.39], 1873. Additional studies of fresh specimens are essential,
in order to identify it.

506 A. E. Ve.(,rUl — Marine Planar lans of JVeio England.

The synonymy of tlie European species is still doubtful, for some
European authors refer the Planarla littoralis Miiller to this genus,
while others consider it identical with Procerodes xdvm CErsted sp.
As Midler's species is doubtful, I have preferred to adopt a later
name, which appears to be applicable to our American form.

Procerodes Girard.

Procerodes Girard, Proc. Bostou Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. iii, p. 251, 1850; Stimpson,
Prodromus, p. [5] 23, 1857; Diesing, Rev. Turbell., Dendroccelen, pp. 491, 520,
1861 ; Jensen, op. cit., p. 74.

Size small. Body convex, thickened, more or less oblong. Head
obtuse, somewhat wider than the neck. Tentacles two, near to, but
distinct from, the antero-lateral margins of the head. Eyes two,
well developed, situated just behind the tentacles, furnished with a
transparent front lens, directed antero-laterally, and a reniforra, pig-
mented retinal portion. Pharynx long, cylindrical. Mouth sub-
median, or in advance of the middle of the body.

Owing to the dark color and opacity of my specimens, when
living, I was unable to observe the structure of the reproductive
organs, nor did I ascertain positively whether the intestinal branches
were chiefly simple or branched, but they appeared to be forked, or
bilobed, in many cases, at least. My specimens are all mounted in
balsam, so that sections cannot well be made, at present. The
mounted specimens are very dark.

Procerodes ulvae ((Ersted) stimp.

Planaria ulvce (Ersted, Kroyer's Naturh. Tidssk., iv, p. 550, 1844; Diesing, Syst.,
vol. i, p. 205, 1850.

Procerodes Wheatlandii Girard, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., iii, p. 251, 1851;
Stimpson, Prod., p. 6, 1857; Diesing, Revis. Turbell., Abtheil., Deudroc, p. 520,
1861 ; Verrill, Invert. Vineyard Sd., etc., p. 633 [339], 187.3.

Procerodes ulvce Stimpson, Prod., p. 6, 1857 : Diesing, Kevis. Turbell., p. 521 ; Jen-
sen, Turbell. Lit. Norvegiffi, p. 74, 1878.

Planaria frequens Leidy, Marine Invert. Fauna of Rhode I. and New Jersey, p.
11, 1855, in Journ. Philad. Acad. Nat. Sci., ser. 2, vol. iii, p. 14.

Procerodes frequens Stimp., op. cit., p. 6; Diesing, Rev. Turbell., p. 521; Verrill.
op. cit., p 325 [31].

Pl.\te xli, figure 10; Plate xlii, figures 11, 11«.

Body, in ordinary extension, oblong-oval, rather wider posteriorly
than anteriorly, broadly rounded at the posterior end, convex dor-
sally and flattened beneath; the neck narrows decidedly in normal
extension. Head distinctly wider than the neck, rounded in front.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of N'ev England. 507

Tentacles whitish, when extended a little elongated and tapered to
a point, but capable of complete retraction and usually not visible
in preserved specimens, though their position ma}^ be indicated by
small white spots; they are situated near the antero-lateral margins
of the head, but not on the margins. Eyes rather large, black, but
not easily seen, owing to the dark color of the integument.* Mouth
submedian.

Pharynx, as retracted in mounted specimens, long, rather narrow,
cylindrical, equal to a third, or even nearly half the length of the
body, its posterior end reaching back to about the posterior fourth
of the body.

Color, above, dark smoky brown or blackish, often with a more
or less distinct stripe of light gray or yellowish white along each
side of the back, sometimes mottled with darker and lighter brown;
beneath paler; tentacles and margins of head whitish.

Length 4 to 6™"^; breadth 1 to IS""".

New Haven to Bay of Fundy. Point Judith, R. I., (Leidy) ; Man-
chester, Mass., (Girard). I have collected it at New Haven, Conn.,
Newport, R. I., Wood's Holl, Mass., Casco Bay, Me., etc. It is
found also on the northern coasts of Europe. Found near low-
water mark under stones, and in tide-pools, among algie.

This species is active in its habits. It has a singular resemblance
to some of the small land slugs in form and mode of progression.
Its egg-capsules are unknown to me.

Part II. — Accela.

The acoelous planarians of our coast have, hitherto, received but
little attention. Besides the few species noticed below, I have
observed several others, but not with sufficient care to enable me
to give satisfactory diagnoses. Some of the species are very com-
mon among algae and eel-grass in shallow hax-bors.

The Accela are remarkable for the absence of any distinct mem-
brane lining the digestive cavity, so that no distinction can be made
between the body-cavity and digestive cavity. This cavity is lined
with a loose celhilar parenchyma and has an indeterminate outline;
it is often very large and usually filled with large numbers of small
crustaceans, diatoms, and various other organisms.

The mouth is often at, or near, the anterior end of the body, but

* The eyes are not distinctly shown in the figure (pi. XLi, fig'. 10). owing to the
dark shading.

Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII. 66 January, 1893.

508 A. E. Verrill — Marine Plariarians of Xeiv England.

it may be near the middle of the ventral side, or even behind the
middle. It is often large and is sometimes simple, but more fre-
quently it is surrounded by a slightly developed muscular ring or
collar ; moi*e rarely there is a rudimentary pharynx. The integu-
ment is generally filled with clusters of rhabdites. There is often a
peculiar glandular frontal organ opening at the anterior end.

The brain, longitudinal nervous trunks, and nervous branches are
present, but not so well-defined as in the previous groups. A pair
of ocelli may be present, but are oftener absent. A median otocyst
is almost always present. Posterior tentacle-like organs or cii'ri
are sometimes present.

The reproductive organs are variable in structure and position.
Sometimes there is but a single genital pore, but usually there are
two median ones, posteriorly situated, the male orifice being be-
hind the female. The ovaries are usually lateral and paired; special
yolk-glands are not developed. A bursa seminalis or spermatheca
may be present, or absent; sometimes there are two. The testes
are folicular and imbeddeJ in the parenchyma. The penis may be
simple or armed; a seminal vesicle is usually present. Eggs are
usually enclosed in capsules.

The external form is exceedingly varied. Many species are flat,
broad-elliptical or ovate ; others are long and narrow ; some are
nearly terete; others are angular in outline. Some species [Convo-
luta) habitually curl the sides of the body inward and downward,
so that they appear narrower than they really are. The size is
generally small, the colors often bright.

Family, Aphanostomidje Graff, Monog.

Body usually more or less flattened, elliptical, ovate, or cordate,
long or short, frequently with the sides curved downward. Mouth
ventral, behind the otocyst, often median or submedian. Pharynx ru-
dimentary or wanting. Otocyst present. Ocelli sometimes two, often
absent. Genital orifices separate. Penis simple, unarmed. Bursa
seminalis well-developed, with one, two, or several tubular outlets.

Aphanostoma (Ersted.

Kroyer's Naturhist. Tidssk., ser. 2, vol. i. p. 417, 1845; Carus, Fauna Med., p. 139,

1884; GrafE, Monog., p. 220; Graff, Turbell. A.ccela, pp. 55, 59, 1891.
Aphanostomum Jensen, Turbell. Lit. Norvegue, p. 22, 1878.

Body more or less flattened, oblong, ovate, or elliptical ; usually
narrowed posteriorly. Mouth circular, before or near the middle.

A. E. Yerrill — Marine Plannrians of New England. 509

A rudimentary pharynx. Otocyst single, near the anterior end.
Otolith usually well developed. No ocelli. Frontal glandular
organs present.

Genital apertures, posterior; the male behind the female. Sper-
marian folicles numerous, lateral. Openings of the bursa semlnalis
without chitinous parts. Ovaries paired, lateral.

Aphanostoma diversicolor CErsted.

Kroyer's Naturhist. Tidssk., ser. 2, vol. i, p. 417, 1845; Cams. op. cit., p. 139;
Graff, Monogr., p. 220; Graff, Turbell. Acoela, p. 59, pi. 5, fig. 4, 1891, section.

A2ihanostomwn diversicolor Jensen, Turbell. ad Lit. Norvegife, p. 26, pi. i, figs. 12
to 21, 1878, anatomy.

Plate xlii, figure 8.

Body very changeable, in extension usually long-oval or elliptical,
obtuse anteriorly, or tapering to both ends, but most so posteriorly;
only a little depressed; in contraction short-ovate and thick.

Color variable, generally with a sulphur-yellow spot on the ante-
rior end and another oq the back; a large spot of bluish or viola-
ceous usually covers more or less of the back, and is sometimes
divided posteriorly by a V-shaped white line ; lateral borders
whitish. Mouth subcentral beneath. A cluster of frontal glands
is connected with a pore at the anterior end of the body. Otocyst
small, much obscured by the pigment, gibbous, situated at about
the anterior eighth.

Length, in extension, To to 2"^'"; breadth 0-25 to 0-.35'""\

Newport, R. I., July 29, 1880, among algffi at low- water mark.
It occurs on the coasts of Norway and Great Britain, and in the
Mediterranean at Naples, Trieste, etc.

Aphanostoma aurantiacum sp. nov.

Plate xlii, figures 10, \0a.
Body long-ovate in extension, depressed, broadest in front of
the middle, usually bluntly rounded anteriorlj^ but very soft and
changeable. Otocyst rather large, conspicuous, situated at about
the anterior eighth, gibbous, containing an inverted cup-shaped or
bell-shaped otolith, situated at the anterior side of the nearly circu-
lar and transparent vesicle. The otolith is almost continually in
motion, while living. Ground-color light ocher-yellow, everywhere
thickly covered with small, distinct spots or specks of bright orange-
red, thus giving the whole surface an orange-yellow color, paler
towards the margins. Reproductive organs are unknown.

510 A. E. Veri'ill — Marine Planar lans of New England.

Length about l-S""'-; breadth 0-35 to 0-50'""\

Newport, R. I., at low-water mark, among algae, July 29, 1880.

This species is only provisionally referred to the genus Aphanos-
tonia, for its internal anatomy was not studied. The specimens
were lost.

Aphanostoma olivaceum sp. nov. ,

Plate xui, figure 9.

Body ovate, broadest anteriorly, rather thick, convex. Otocyst
conspicuous, at about the anterior eighth. Mouth rather behind
the middle ; digestive cavity large, behind the middle ; in the ex-
ample figure it contained an amphipod crustacean.

The ovaries are large, lateral; posteriori}', the oviducts are tilled
with two or three rows of large ova, which are dark green in color.
The female orifice is about midway between the posterior border of
the digestive cavity and the male orifice. The latter is near the
posterior margin, in the center of a pale spot. It is flanked on each
side by two small vesicles (probably seminal vesicles) ; two larger
saccular organs (perhaps the posterior part of vasa deferentia) run
forward and diverge, but their nature was not certainly ascertained'
owing to the dark color of the integument. The form and structure
of the penis and spermatheca were not observed, for the same reason

Color dark olive-green, or brownish green.

Length 2'""'; breadth about 1-5"'".

Provincetown, Mass., at low-water mark, among filamentous algse,
Aug. 14, 1879.

This species is referred to Aphanostoma only provisionally, for
its reproductive organs are imperfectly known. It has considerable
resemblance to certain species of Mecynostoraa.

Polychoerus Mark.

Festschrift fiir Leuckart, p. 298, Oct.. 1892.

Body flattened, changeable in outline, usually cordate or ovate,
narrowest anteriorly, emarginate or bilobed posteriorly, with one to
five slender, contractile caudal cirri. The lateral margins are usually
not inflexed. Mouth central or nearly so, with simple muscular
margins. No proper pharynx. Digestive cavity large, separated
posteriorly from the genital area by tissues more dense than those
of other parts.

Otocyst small, round, sometimes indistinct or wanting; otolith
cup-shaped.

Brain distinctly bilobed; each ganglion is somewhat stellate in
form, and gives off three main nerves: anterior, lateral, and poste-

A. E. Vet-rill — Marine Planarians of Neio England. 511

rior. The superficia^l nerves are extensively anastomosed, so as to
form a network of irregular meshes.

Ovaries lai'ge, on each side of the digestive cavity; oviducts large,
often much distended posteriorly by clusters of large mature ova.
Spermarian folicles numerous, situated on each side of, and often
extending nearly or quite around, the digestive cavity. Vasa de-
ferentia large, more or less saccular posteriorly, when distended
with their contents, and connected with a circular seminal vesicle
surrounding the base of the penis.

The penis is unarmed and in contraction ovoid or conical, but
rather long, tapered, and usually somewhat curved when fully ex-
tended. (See plate xliv, figs, 6, 8, 9).

The male orifice is near the posterior margin, in front of the
median caudal cirrus.

The female orifice is situated a little farther forward and com-
municates with a simple tubular vagina, which runs up dorsally
beneath the saccular spermatheca.

Spermatheca or bursa serninalis is large, complex, reniform or
cordate, with numerous chitinous outlet-tubes scattered over the
surface.

Rhabdites and pigment-corpuscles are contained in the integument.

Polychcerus caudatus Mark.

Mark, op. eit., pp. 298-309, pi. xxi, figs. 1-22, anatomy.

PL.'ITE XLI, figures 11, 11a; PLATE XLIV, FIGURES 6 TO 10.

Body depressed, flat or concave beneath, somewhat convex above,
and often gibbous or swollen dorsally, when filled with ova ; in
extension varying from broad cordate to narrow-ovate, according
to the state of contraction ; front end bluntly pointed or evenly
rounded ; sides often nearly parallel ; posterior end usually deeply
emarginate, with a broad median notch and rounded lobes each side
of it ; margin thin, sometimes inflexed, especially when swimming.

Caudal cirri one to five. In adult examples there are generally
three slender, pale, translucent caudal cirri, one of which is median,
while the others, which are usually a little smaller, arise from near
the inner border of the posterior lobes. Sometimes, in large speci-
mens, another smaller pair is developed external to the latter, on
the posterior lobes (pi. xliv, fig. 6). In young specimens the
median cirrus appears first. The cirri all arise at a slight distance
from the margin, on the dorsal side. Each one can be retracted
into a small, basal, bulb-like, muscular, invaginated cavity of the

512 A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarianfi of New England.

integument. The caudal cirri are often lost by injuries, but are
quickly reproduced.

The otocyst is small, circular, situated well forward at about the
anterior fourth; otolith cup-shaped. In some specimens the otocyst
appears to be rudimentary or wanting ; in many it can scarcely be
seen while living, owing to its small size and the great amount of
pigment in the integument; in others it is easily visible.

Mouth central or subcentral, simple, circular or transversely ellip-
tical, highly dilatable, surrounded b^^ circular muscular fibers. The
digestive cavity is capacious, more or less irregular in outline. It is
usually filled with various Entomostraca and other small crustaceans.

The genital openings are small, round, near together, and usually
not very distinct. The male orifice is a little in advance of the base
of the median caudal cirrus. The penis, as seen from beneath and
foreshortened in mounted specimens, is usually ovoid or conical;
when protruded it is rather elongated, cylindrical or tapered, often
curved, with a conical tip. Its base is surrounded by a circular
seminal vesicle (pi. xliv, figs. 6-10, /■) which receives the vasa def-
erentia (d) on the right and left sides. The latter are voluminous,
more or less saccular and contorted posteriorly, when filled with
their contents.

The spermarian folicles (t) are small, numerous, pyriform, and
extend along each side above and partly external to the ovaries and
oviducts, as far as the anterior margin of the digestive cavity,
where they converge and nearly or quite blend at the median line,
when fully developed.

The oviducts are large and saccular and lie close to the digestive
cavity, on each side; posteriorly they are often much swollen by
large clusters of relatively large mature ova, of which there are
often six to ten, arranged in two or three rows, in each cluster;
those farthest back often crowd against and more or less distort
and conceal the spermatheca and other organs, and make that part
of the body gibbous externally.

The spermatheca (figs. 6, 7, 8, s) is large, glandular and saccular
dorsally, variable in shape, but when least crowded it is generally
broad-cordate or reniform ; the emargination of the posterior side
includes the female orifice and vagina. Its ventral surface is
covered with small brownish, chitinous, conical outlet-tubes or
" mouth-pieces," differing in size and varying in number in differ-
ent specimens from six or eight up to thirty or forty; most fre-
quently twelve to fifteen fully developed ones and several smaller

A. JS. Verrill — Marine Plaiuiruois of Ntv) England. 513

ones can be seen. Each of these is surrounded at base by a circle
of glandular cells.*

In small speciinjens the male organs are often well developed
before the female organs appear.

According to Professor Mark, the spermatozoa are long and fili-
form, thickest in advance of the middle, with a very slender anterior
portion, more active and more attenuated than the posterior portion.

Color usually brick-red or dark orange-red, sometimes pale red,
with a central paler spot over the digestive cavity, and usually with
a circular or horse-shoe-shaped region of darker brownish red color
over the ovaries, and almost entirely surrounding the digestive
region, interrupted posteriorly; margins pale; caudal cirri translu-
cent, whitish; ventral surface yellowish.

The orange coloi*, according to Professor Mark's observations, is
due to clusters of two kinds of minute pigment-corpuscles. Of
these, the most numerous are greenish yellow; the others, which are
smaller and less numerous, are purplish. The pale median patch is
caused by whitish, mostly rod-like, corpuscles. Clusters of cigar-
shaped rhabdites are also scattered in the integument.

Length 3 to 4'"™; breadth 1-5 to 2"'".

Common from Great Egg Harbor, N. J. to Casco Bay, Me.; espe-
cially in sheltered harbors, adhering to eel-grass [Zostera) and creep-
ing over the vegetable debris, shells, etc., on the bottom in shallow
water, where it is often extremely abundant.

I have taken it in large numbers, especially in New Haven Har-
bor, 1865 to 1870; Noank, Conn., 1874; Newport, R. I., 1880;
Wood's Holl, Mass., 1871, 1875, 1881 to 1887. At Quahog Bay,
Me., in 1873, I found it in small numbers, but have not observed
it farther north.

I have been familiar with this species for many years, and have
had several drawings and descriptions of it made as early as 1874
and 1875, but had put them aside with those of various other Tur-
bellaria.f Not knowing that Professor Mark had worked upon

* Professor Mark (op. cit.) describes some of these " mouth-pieces," observed by
him, as filled with the filiform spermatozoa, with clusters of them hanging from the
basal portion. He also observed large masses of, spermatozoa in the dorsal cavities
of the spermatheca, with which the "mouth-pieces" communicate. The vagina ter-
minates in proximity to the dorsal cavities of the spermatheca.

f In the summer of 1874, while in charge of the invertebrate zoology of the U. S.
Fish Com., at Xoank. Conn , I had the pleasure of studying this species in company
with the late Professor Joseph Leidy, who was much interested in its anatomy. P'or
that reason in my MSS. notes I had named it in honor of Professor Leidy.

514 A. E. Verrill — Marine PlanaricDis of N^ir England.

it, and before his excellent paper had been published, I had i-esumed
the study of the species and prepared descriptions of the genus
and species for this article. Having received Professor Mark's
paper, just as the last pages of my own were going to press, I have
been able to add several additional anatomical facts of importance,
which I had not personally observed. Professor Mark, in his paper,
moreover, describes in detail the nervous system, and also numerous
additional features not here referred to, or only briefly mentioned.

My own conclusions, in regard to the essential structure and
affinities of the genus, were perfectly in accord with those of
Professor Mark. The few additional details that I have given in
the preceding description are due to the larger sei'ies that I have
had for study, or to their different modes of preservation.

Professor Mark informs me that he has found the egg-capsules of
this species in abundance on dead shells and stones in the harbor of
Wood's Holl, Mass. They are circular, flat on the lower side, by
which they are attached, and a little convex on the upper side, with
thin margins. I have not met with them myself. In several in-
stances 1 have seen living young individuals in the interior of the
body of adults, but it is quite possible that they had been swallowed
as food Avith other small prey. The mode of depositing the egg-
capsules is unknown. There seems to be no special opening adapted
to that purpose. Possibly they escape from the mouth. The speci-
men figured on pi. xli, fig. 11a, appears to contain egg-capsules in
process of formation, but as the specimen was not preserved, this
cannot now be confirmed.

Doubtful Species.
TyphloCOlaX aCUtUS Stimpson, Prod, p. 3, 1857.

Typhlolepta acuta Girard, in Stimpson, Invert. Grand Manan, p. 27, 1853; Diesing,
Rev. Turbell., p. 523, 1861.

" Body depressed, ovoid, elongated, posteriorly rounded; anterior
extremity terminating in an acute point; mouth underneath, and
situated at about the middle of the body. Length about a sixteenth
of an inch. Ground color pale, with reddish confluent blotches
above. Found in considerable numbers creeping over the surface
of (Jhirodoia Icevis.''''

Dr. Stimpson (Prodroraus, p. ;J) referred this genus and species to
the Digonopora, but its internal structure was not known to him.
It is more probable that it belongs to the Acoela or Rhabdocoela. I
have not observed it myself, although I have collected numerous
specimens of the holothurian, on which it is said to be parasitic, in
the original locality.

INDEX TO THE GENERA AND SPECIES.

AccEla, 460, 507.
Acotylea, 461.
Aphanostoma, 508.
aurantiacum, 509.
diversicolor, 509.
olivaceum, 510.
Aphanostomidffi, 508.
Aphanostomum, 508.

diversicolor, 509.
Bdelloura, 499.

Candida, 499.

parasitica, 499.
Bdellouridffi, 498.
Bdellura, 499.

parasitica, 499.
Bdelliiridea, 498.
Convoluta, 508.
Cotylea, 494.
Crvptocelis, 487.
Dendroccela, 459, 460.
Digonopora, 460, 461.
Discocelis, 492.

mutabilis, 493.
Elasmodes, 477.

gracilis, 496.
Eurylepta, 495.

maculosa, 495.
Euryleptidse, 495.
Eustylochus, 467.

ellipticus, 467.
Fovia affinis, 504.

grisea, 504.

Warreni, 504.
Heterostylochus, 468.

maculatus, 468, 469.
Imogine, 475.

oculifera, 475.
Leptoplana, 477.

augiista, 485.

Drobachiensis, 482.

ellipsoides, 483.

folium, 487.

variabilis, 480.

virilis, 478.
Leptoplanidai, 475.
Mecynostoma, 510.
Monogonopora, 461, 497.
Notocerideaj, 462.

Trans. Conn Acad. Vol. VIII.

Phagoeata, 498, 503.
Phagocatidse, 503.
Planaria affinis, 504.
frequens, 500.
grisea, 504.
limuli, 499.
ulvse, 506.
Planaridse, 508.
Planocera, 471.
elliptica, 467.
nebulosa, 472.
Plauoceridaj, 462.
Planoceropsis, 471.
Polycelis, 477.

mutabilis, 493.
Polychoerus, 510.

caiidatus, 511.
Polycladidea, 460, 461.
Polyscelis variabilis, 480.
Procerodes, 506.

frequens, 506.

ulvse, 506.

Wheatlandii, 506.
Prosthiostomidse, 496.
Prosthiostomum, 496.

gracile, 496.
Rhabdocoela, 460.
Stylochidffi, 462.
Stylochoplana maculata, 468.
Stylochopsis, 462.

littoralis, 467.

zebra, 463.
Stylochus, 462.

crassus, 466.

frontalis, 465.

littoralis, 467.

maculatus, 467, 469.

zebra, 463.
Trieladidea, 461, 497.
Trigonoporus, 486.

cephaloplithalmus, 487.

dendriticus, 491.

folium, 487.
Turbellaria, 460.
Typhlocolax acutus, 514.
Typhlolepta acuta, 514.
Vortex Candida, 499.

67

January, 1893.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate xl.

Figure 1. — Imogine oculifera Girard, p. 475. Dorsal view of a young living specimen
with dendritic, rose-colored makings; x 20. Wood's HoU, Mass.

Figure 2. — Eushjlochus ellipticus (Girard) Y., p. 467. Dorsal view of a living speci-
men, much compressed; x 6. Savin Rock, near New Haven, Conn., 1868.

Figure 3. — Stylochus zebra V., p. 463. Dorsal view of a living specimen; x 4.
Wood's Holl, Mass., Sept. 23, 1882.

Figure 4. — Planocera nehulosa Girard, p. 472. Dorsal view of a living specimen, x 5.
New Haven, Conn., 1870.

Figure 5. — Lejytoplana ellijisoides Girard, p. 483. Dorsal view of a living specimen ;
X 5. Eastport, Me., 1870, at low-water. Color orange-brown with irregular
spots of dark brown and small specks of white. (The clusters of ocelli occupy
unusual positions, owing to a peculiar state of contraction).

Figure 6. — Leptoplana ellvpsoides. Dorsal view of a large example, from life, in the
act of creeping; x 4. Eastport, Me., August 10. 1872.

Figure 7. — Discocelis mutalnlis V. (?), p. 493. Dorsal view of a young living speci-
men ; much enlarged. Surface, Wood's Holl. Mass., August 16, 1882. Trans-
parent, with yellow spots around the margin.

Figure 8. — Leptoplana angasta V., p. 485. Dorsal view of a young living example,
X 10. Provincetown, Mass., from the bottom of a whaler.

Figure 9. — Fovia affinis (?). See foot-note, p. 505. Dorsal view ; x 6. Noank, Conn.,
in harbor, July 16, 1874.

Figure 10. — Bdelloura Candida Girard, p. 499. Ventral view (a), from life; dorsal
view(&); about natural size ; 10?*, the same, posterior sucker ; x 4.

Figures 1, 3, 6, 7, 10 were drawn from life by J. H. Emerton ; figure 9 by J. H.
Blake ; the rest by the author.

Plate xli.

Figure 1. — Eustylochus ellijjticus (Girard) V., p. 467. Dorsal view of a living speci-
men; x4. la, the same, one of the tentacles; more enlarged. Newport, R. I.,
on piles of railroad bridge. August 20, 1880.

Figure 2. — Eurylepta maculosa V., p. 495. Dorsal view of a living specimen ; x 5.
Wood's Holl, Mass., on piles, July 15, 1881.

Figure 3. — The same. Dorsal view of a living specimen ; x 5. Naushon Island, at
low-water mark, August 20, 1887.

Figure 4. — Trigonoporus deyidriticus Y., i:>. 4d]. Dorsal view of a living specimen;
x4. Sta. 317, off Cape Cod, 25 fath., 1879. Color light pink with a pale
central area. (The clusters of ocelli are too angular and definite.)

Figure 5. — Trigonoporus folium V., p. 48.7. Dorsal view from life; x 2. Fig. 5a,
the same, ventral view. Sta. 784, off Point Judith, R. I., in 20 fath., 1880.

A. E. Verrill — Marine Planarians of JVew England. 517

Figure 6. — Trigonoportis folium Y., p. 487. Dorsal view of a living specimen; x 5.

Sta. 134, off Cape Ann, Mass., in 26 fath., July 23, 1878. Color yellowish brown

with the gastric region and margins pale ; ganglions and nerves pink.
Figure 7. — Leptoplana variabilis (Girard). No. 20, p. 480. Dorsal view, from life;
x5. Sta. 156, off Gloucester, Mass., 42 fath., Aug. 15, 1878. Color yellowish

brown with pale margins and central stripe. The clusters of cerebral ocelli are

too long and too divergent.
Figure 8. — Bdelloura candicki Girard, p. 499. Dorsal view of a living specimen

slightly compressed between glasses, and seen by transmitted light; x 3.
Figure 9. — Fovia affinis (CErs.) Stimp. (var. grisea V.), p. 504. Dorsal view of a living

specimen; x 6. Fig. 9a, the same specimen strongly contracted while living;
X 6. Fig. 9&, the same ; dark-brown variety. Ventral view of a living specimen,

seen by transmitted light; x 3. Gloucester, Mass., on eel-grass (Zostera), 1878.

Figure 10. — Procerodes ulvce (CErs.) Stimp., p. 506. Dorsal view of a living specimen;

X 8. Casco Bay, at low-water mark, 1873. The ocelli are not shown, owing to

the dark shading.
Figure 11. — Polychoerus caudafus Mark, p. 511. Dorsal view of a living specimen;

X 20. Noank, Conn., July 30, 1874. The caudal cirri should have been left

without color.
Figure lira. — The same. Another individual seen as a transparent object, slightly

compressed between glasses. Wood's Holl, Mass., 1881. The bilobed body,

covering the region of the spermatheca, was probably an egg-capsule (or two of

them) in process of formation (see p. 514).

Figures 3 and 11 were drawn by J. H. Blake; 4, 6, 7, 8, dh by the author; the
rest by J. H. Emerton.

Plate xlii.

Figure 1. — Eustylochus ellipticus (Girard) V., p. 466. Dorsal view of a living speci-
men; X 6. New Haven Harbor, Oct., 1892.

Figure la. — The same specimen. Ventral view; x6; h, one of the tentacles; c,
brain; /, pharynx; m, mouth; d, vas deferens; r, seminal vesicle; ^j, penis; p',
penis-bulb and granular gland; S. male orifice ; 2, female orifice ; .s, sperma-
theca; s', duct of the same; v, vagina; m, large oviduct or uterine sac; z, orifice
of the median nephridial tube (z').

Figure \h. — The same. Male genital organs of a young mounted specimen; much
enlarged; d. d, vasa deferentia; r, seminal vesicle; p, penis; j/, penis-bulb and
granular gland. New Haven Harbor, Oct., 1892.

Figure 2. — Stylochus zebra V., p. 403. Ventral view of a living specimen ; x4; /,
pharynx ; m, mouth ; d, vas deferens ; $ , male orifice ; $ , female orifice ; w,
shell-glands. Off New Haven.

Figure 2a. — The same. Dorsal view of the head and anterior portion of another
specimen from the same locality, from life ; x 4.

Figure 3. — Planocera nebulosa Girard, p. 473. Genital organs of a young specimen ;
much enlarged. New Haven Harbor, Oct., 1892. d, vas deferens; r, seminal
vesicle ; r', its duct ; p, penis and penis-sheath ; p', penis-bulb and granular
gland ; $ , male orifice ; 2 , female orifice ; v, vagina ; s, spermatheca.

Figure 4. — Triyonoporiis dendriticus V., p. 491. Ventral view of a specimen mounted
in balsam; x 6. Station 317, off Cape Cod, 1879.

SIi*^ A. E. VerriU — Marine Planarians of New England.

Figure 4a. — The same specimen. Brain snd clusters of ocelli ; x 25 ; t:, brain ; e,
cerebral ocelli; e', dorsal ocelli ; g, g, anterior branches of the stomach. Fig. 46,
cerebral ocelli of the same specimen ; x 25.

Figure 5. — Trigonoporus folium V., ja. 487. Ventral view of a specimen mounted in
balsam; x 6. Eastport, Me., 1870. Fig. 5ff, ocelli of the left side of the same
specimen, x 20 ; e, cerebral cluster ; e', dorsal cluster. Fig. 56, ocelli of the right
side of the same specimen ; x 25 ; e, cerebral cluster ; e' dorsal cluster.

Figure 6. — Discocelis mutahilis V., p. 493. Dorsal view of the original, type-speci-
men mounted in balsam ; x 8. Thimble Islands, 1872.

Figure 6a. — The same specimen. Clusters of ocelli ; x 25 ; e, cerebral, and e', dorsal
clusters of ocelli.

Figure 7. — Discocelis mutahilis V. (?), young, p. 494. Dorsal and cerebral ocelli of a
mounted specimen; x 25. Wood's Holl, Mass., 1882.

Figure 8. — Ajyhanostoma dialers i color ((Erst.), p. 509. Dorsal view of a living speci-
men; x20. Newport, R. I., 1880.

Figure d.—Aphanostoma olivaceumY., p. 510. Ventral view of a living specimen;
xl2; ot, otocyst; gr, digestive cavity containing an amphipod crustacean; u,
large oviduct containing ripe ova ; ? , female orifice , ?i , male orifice and penis.

Figure 10. — Aphanostoma aurantiacum V., p. 509. Dorsal view of a living speci-
men; X 20.

Figure 10a. — The same specimeo. Otocyst; more enlarged.

Figure 11. — Procerodes ulinx. (CErst ), p. 506. Dorsal view of head of a living speci-
men; X 12. Casco Bay, Me., 1873.

Figure 11a. — The same. Dorsal view of another specimen mounted in balsam; x8;
o, ovaries; /, pharynx; p, penis; 2 5, common genital orifice. (In thi.«? figure
the number and form of the gastric branches are partly diagramatic, for many of
them could be seen only indistinctly).

Figures 1, la, 2, 2a, 4, 4a, 5, 6 were drawn from nature by A. H. Verrill ; 8 and
10 were drawn from life by J. H. Emerton; the rest are camera-lucida drawings by
the author.

Plate xliii.

Figure 1. — Leptoplana virilis V., p. 478. Ventral view of the type-specimen, stained
and mounted in balsam; x 6. Sta. 307, Off Cape Cod, Mass., 31 fath , 1879.

Figure la. — The same specimen. Posterior portion, ventral view : x 15 ; /, pharynx;
r, semmal vesicle ; /r, granular gland and penis-bulb; j), penis; q. penis-sheath;
t, t, spermarian folicles or testes : $ . male orifice ; S , female orifice ; o, o, o,
ovarian folicles; w, ventral portion of vagina; «/, dorsal portion of the same; s,
spermatheca; «', anterior portion of the same and its connection with the vagina ;
w, shell-glands ; m, one of the uterine sacs.

Fio-ure 2. — Leptoplana variabilis (Girard) V., young, p. 480. Dorsal view of a
mounted specimen; x S. Gloucester, Mass., in tide-pool, 1878.

Figure 3. — Leptoplana variabilis (Girard) V. No. 20. Ventral view of a mounted
specimen; x 6. Sta. 156, off Cape Ann, Mass., 42 fath., 1878.

Figure 3a. — The same specimen. Genital organs, dorsal view; xl5; d, d, vasa
deferentia ; k, granular gland ; p, penis , q, penis-sheath ; ? , female orifice ; v,
ventral portion of vagina ; v', dorsal portion of the same ; s, spermatheca ; 5', an-
terior division of the same and its connection with the vagina; w, iv, shell-
glands ; M, u, large oviducts or uterine sacs ; u% duct of the same leading to the
vagina ; x, orifice of the uephridial duct (?) ; g', g', posterior gastric branches.

A. E. VerHll — Marine Planarians of N^etn Migland. 510

Figure '6h. — The same specimen. Ocelli and brain ; x 25 ; c. brain ; e, cerebral ocelli ;

e', dorsal ocelli.
Figure 4. — Lejjtoplana ellipsoides Girard, p. 483. Ocelli ; x 25 ; e, cerebral, and e .

dorsal clusters. Eastport, Me., 1872.
Figure 4a. — The same. Dorsal view of the genital organs; xl5. The lettering is

the same as that of 3a. Figure 4&. — The same parts; ventral view^.
Figures. — Trigonoporus dendriticus Y ., \>. 491. Type-specimen. Sta. 317. Ventral

view of the genital organs ; x 25 ; S , male orifice ; 'p, penis ; p', penis-bulb ; 7,

penis-sheath ; k, granular gland ; ? , anterior female orifice ; 2 ', posterior

female orifice ; w, shell-glands.
Figure 6. — Polychcerus caudatus Mark, p. 512. Ventral view of a mounted specimen;
X 15. Wood's Holl, Mass., 1881. This specimen is noteworthy fcr having five

caudal cirri. The digestive cavity contains numerous small crustaceans.
Figure 7. — The same. Ventral view of a mounted specimen having three caudal

cirri; x 15 ; $, female orifice; s, spermatheca; 0, one of the ovaries; t, sper-

marian folicles or testes; p, retracted penis and male orifice.
Figures. — The same. Ventral view of the genital organs of a mature specimen;
X 30 ; d, d, vasa deferentia ; r, seminal vesicle ; ])• penis exserled ; ? , female

orifice ; s, spermatheca or bursa seminalis ; 0, cluster of mature eggs.
Figure 9. — The same. Male genital organs of another specimen with the penis (p)

fully exserted ; r, seminal vesicle ; x 30.
Figure 10. — The same, another specimen. A partially profile view of the genital

organs; x30; $, female orifice; u, vagina; 2h penis partly protruded; d, d,

vasa deferentia ; r, seminal vesicle.
Figure II. — Bdelloura Candida Girard, p. 499. Ventral view of a specimen containing

a nearly mature egg-capsule; x6; c, brain and ocelli; /t, longitudinal muscles

of the sucker; n, one of the longitudinal nerve-trunks; «', frontal nerves; ;/,

anterior division of the stomach ; j\ pharynx ; 0, o, ovaries ; ca, egg-capsules ;

M, uterine sac or accessory gland.

The large chitinous egg-capsule occupies the entire thickness of the body, no organs
appearing over its central part, on either side, except the thin, stretched integument ;
its front edge lies above the end of the pharynx, and the vasa deferentia run above
its lateral borders. How it is expelled is not known.

Figures 1, la, 2, 3, 3a, and 11 were drawn from nature by A. H. Verrill; the rest
by the author.

Plate xliv.
Figure 1. — Stylochus frontalis V., p. 4G5. Ocelli and tentacles of the type-specimen,

mounted in balsam; x30; h, b, tentacles retracted; e, e, cerebral clusters; e', e',

dorsal clusters at base of tentacles ; e", e", scattered frontal ocelli.
Figure 2. — Leptoi^lana angusta V., p. 485. Ventral view of one of the type-specimens,

mounted in balsam; xl2; r, brain ; /J pharynx ; »i, mouth; f, f, sperniarian

folicles ; d, vas deferens ; p, penis and penis-sheath ; v, vagina and sh^ll-glands ;

s. spermatheca ; $ , female orifice ; u, uterine sac filled with mature ova.
Figure 2a. — The same. Brain and ocelli ; x 30 ; c, brain ; e, cerebral, and, e' dorsal

clusters.
Figure 3. — Tlie same. Reproductive organs of another mounted specimen; x 20 ; p,

penis ; q, penis-bulb and sheath ; v, female orifice and ventral portion of vagina ;

v', dorsal portion of vagina ; u, u, large oviducts or uterine sacs filled with

mature ova.

520 A. K Verrill — Marine Planarians of N'eio England.

Figures 4, 4a. — Trigonojjorus folium V., p. 487. Original type-specimeu monuted in
balsam. 4, ventral view of the genital organs, x 15 ; <J , male orifice; j;, penis;
A:, penis-bulb and granular gland ; 2 , anterior female orifice in a cup-like depres-
sion ; V, vagina mutilated ; t«, iv, shell-glands. 4a. dorsal view of the same parts,
with the same lettering, and ^j', penis-sheath ; v', dorsal portion of vagina ; s ',
posterior female orifice.

Figure 46. — The same specimen ; (•, cerebral ocelli; e', dorsal ocelli; x 30.

Figure 4c. — The same specimen. Part of front margin and marginal ocelli; x 30.

Figure 4cZ. — The same specimen. Mouth and retracted pharynx, ventral view ; x 10.

Figure 56. — The same. Brain and ocelli of a specimen from sta. 134, 1878. Ventral
view; x50; f, c, cerebral ganglions; e, cerebral ocelli; e' dorsal ocelli; n. n,
large frontal nerves ; g, median anterior gastric branch.

Figure 6. — The same. Genital organs of a specimen from sta. 301. Ventral view;
X 30 ; 3, male orifice; p, penis; j/, interior of penis-bulb; q, i enis-sheath ; k.
granular gland ; $ , anterior female orifice ; ? ', posterior female orifice ; v, ven-
tral part of vagina; ■;;', dorsal part of vagina; tv, shell-glands; u, supposed ori-
fice of nephridial duct.

Figure 7. — The same. Genital organs of a sijecimeu from sta. 182, 1878 Ventral
view ; x 30. Lettering is the same as in fig. 6.

Figure 8. — Bdelloura Candida Girard, p. 499. A specimen stained with borax-carmine
and picric acid and mounted in balsam. New Haven. Oct., 1892. A'entral view;
xlO; A, posterior sucker; c, c, two cerebral ganglions of the brain, and the
ocelli ; c', main frontal nerves (five pairs are shown, by stippled lines, with a few
of their branches); n, one of the great longitudinal nerve-trunks; «', posterior
commissure uniting the nerve-trunks, from this part large numbers of branches
diverge to the borders of the posterior sucker; im, one of the several serial
transverse commissures uniting the nerve-trunks ; %", marginal nerve and exterior
branchlets ; /, pharynx, retracted; /', its open end; g, anterior median division
of the stomach ; </', one of the two main posterior divisions of the stomach ;
g", one of the transverse lateral gastric branches. (The stomach and its branches
are left unshaded for greater clearness ; they are usually more deeply colored
than the other organs); o, left ovary; o', its duct : y, vitellaria or yolk-glands;
X, left accessory female gland or "uterine sac" and its convoluted duct, going
to the female genital organs; ^), penis and penis-sheath ; $ ,J , common genital
orifice ; t, t, testes or spermarian folicles.

Figure 8a. — The same. Ventral view of the posterior part of a living specimen com-
pressed between glasses; x 20. The gastric branches are distended by the pres-
sure and the nervous system is omitted. The lettering is the same as in fig. 8,
with the following additions; d, vas deferens of the right side; r, seminal vesi-
cle; V, vagina.

Figure 86. — The same. Side and profile views of an egg-capsule that was attached
by both ends; x 8.

Figures 2, 3, 4, 4a, 8, 8a, 86 were drawn from nature by A. H. Verrill; the rest by
the author.

INDEX.

Acetic acid precipitate, 83, 88, 94, 99.
Acid, hydrofliioric, 158.

pepsin-hydrochloric, B7, 79.

sulphuric, at 100° C, 93.

water at 100° C, 23, 37.
Accela, 460, 507.
Acolea, 372.
Acotylea, 461.
AcrobolbecB, 272.
Acrobolbiis, 272.

wilsoui, 272.
Acrolejeunea, 264.
Acrostolia, 275.

pingtiis, 275.
Actitis macularia, 322, 349.
Adams, H. F., 48.
Adelanthus, 268.

decipiens, 268.

falcatus, 268.

lindbergianus, 268.

magellanicus, 268.
Agalena, 197.

americana, 197, 199.

naevia, 197.

potteri, 197.
Agalenida?, 166, 178, 190, 191.
Agalenopsis albipilis, 197.
Agouti, 318.
Agroeca, 168, 188, 190.

crocata, 168, 171.

pratensis, 190.
Aigrette, 321.
Aitonia, 277.

cordata, 260.
Albumin and sugar. Excretion of, 5.
Alcediuidie, 329.
Alcyones, 329.
Alevopora, 212.
Alicularia, 272.
AUenia montana, 345, 350.
Alobiella, 267.
Alsophis sibonius, 351, 352.
Amaurobius, 183.
Amazoua augusta, 327, 349.

bouqueti, 328, 349.
Ameiva fuscata, 355.
Amiva major, 352.

plei, 352.

var. brachiosquamatus, 352.
Ammodramus savannarum passerinus,

338.
Ammonium sulphate precipitate, 85.
Amphibulima patula, 357.

rubescens, 358.

Amphiporidffi, 386.
Amphiporus, 382, 386-389, 412.

agilis, 389, 390, 400.

angulatus, 382, 388, 389, 390, 392,
393, 404, 439.
Amphiporus beringianus, 392.

bioculatus, 389, 390, 401.

caecxis, 389, 390, 402.

cmentatus, 389, 390, 399.

frontalis, 389, 390, 392, 398.

fabricii, 390.

glutinosus, 388, 390, 397, 398.

griseus, 388, 390, 398.

heterosorus, 388, 389, 393.

japonicus, 392.

lactifloreus, 385, 388, 390, 394, 405.

mesosorns, 389, 390, 399.

multisorus, 388, 389, 393.

neesii, 388.

ochraceus, 388, 390, 396, 402.

pulcher, 395.

roseus, 388, 389, 393, 395.

sp., 403.

stimpsoni, 382, 390.

superbus, 389, 390, 403.

tetrasorus, 388, 389, 394.

thallius, 389, 390, 403.

virescens, 389, 390, 400.
Amylolytic action. Influence on, 60.
Analysis of Acetic acid precipitate, 84,
88, 94, 99.

Ammonium sulphate precipitate,
32, 85.

Casein antipeptone, 101, 103.

Deuterocaseose, 91, 94, 95, 97, 99.

Deuteroelastose, 28, 33, 34.

Deuteromyosinose, 145.

Dyspeptoue, 69, 71, 73, 74, 75.

Eiastiu, 20, 22, 37.

Myosin, 117-132, 140.

Precipitate prodiiced by salt-satur-
ated acetic acid, 36.

Protocaseose, 81, 88, 92, 93.
I Protoelastose, 25, 26, 30, 33, 81, 88,

92, 93.

Protomyosinose, 143.

Sodium chloride precipitate, 35.

Urine of a dog, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12,
45, 46, 47.

of a man, 41, 42, 55-58.
of a rabbit, 50-52.
Anastrophylhxm, 271.
Anatidaj, 320.
Androcryphia, 273.

522

INDEX.

Aneura, 275.
Aneurese, 275.
Anopla, 415, 441.
Anolis alliaceus, 355.

leachii, 852, 355.
Anomoclada, 268.

mucosa, 268.
Anonymus, 495.
Anoplolej eunea, 264.
Anovira inultifida. 260.

pinnatifida, 260.

palmata, 260.

pectinata, 260.

pingiiis, 260.
Anovis stolidus, 349, 350.
Anseres, 320.
Anthelia, 268.

julacea, 268.
Authoceros, 275.

Isevis, 275.

ptinctatus, 275.

vesiculosus, 260.

vincentianus, 260.
Anthocerotaceye, 275.
Antifebrin, Influence of, 53, 61, 64.
Antimony, Action of, on a fowl, 110-
112; rabbit. 113.

Infliience of, on tbe liver, 106.
Antij3,>Tin, Influence of, 48. 60, 64.
Antoiria, 265.
Anura, 350.
Anyphsena, 166, 185.

calcarata, 187.

incerta, 186, 187, 190.

rubra, 186.

saltabunda, 187.
Aphanostoma, 508, 510.

aurantiacum, 509.

diversicolor, 509.

olivaceum, 510.
Aphanostomum, 508.

diversicolor, 509.
Aphanostomidae, 508.
Aplozia, 271.
AploziiB, 270, 272.
Apotomantlius, 272.
Aracliniopsis, 267.
Arbalo, 352.
Archilej eunea, 264.
Ardea caerulea, 321, 349.

candidissima, 321, 349.

egretta, 321, 349.

herodias, 821, 349.

virescens, 321, 349.
Ardeidae, 321.
Arenaria interpres, 349.
Argiope, 245.
Ariadne, 201.

bicolor, 201.
Arnellia, 271.

fennica, 271.
Arsenic, Action of, on a fowl, 108, 109;
rabbit. 110.

Arsenic, Influence of, on the liver, 106.
Ascolobia, 263.
Askepas, 277.

brevipes, 277.
Astemma, 442.

fiiiformis, 442.

hemisphaerica, 277.
Asterella, 277.
Astia vittata. 236.
Athalamia, 276.

pinguis, 276.
Attid*, 220.
Attus, 223.

audax, 227.

binus, 239.

capitatus, 228.

castaneus, 224.

elegans, 233.

familiaris, 237.

leopardus, 242.

inilitaris, 230.

mitratus. 232.

mystaceus, 227.

niger, 236.

palustris, 223. 247.

parvTis, 228.

pulex, 246.

quadrilineatus, 239.

rufus, 224.

superciliosus, 233.

sylvestris, 223, 247.

tripunctatus, 227.

vittatus, 236.
Aulopora, 210, 212.

subtenius, 212.

Balantiopsis, 273.

diplophylla, 278.

erinacea, 278.
Batrachia, 350.
Bazzania, 267.

baldwinii, 255.

brighami, 255.

eordistipula, 255.

deflexa, 255.

falcata, 255.

integrifolia, 255.

minuta, 255.

patens, 255.

trilobata, 267.
Bdellomoiiaha, 444.
Bdelloura, 499, 501.

Candida, 499.

parasitica, 499.
Bdellourida;, 498.
Bdellura, 499.

parasitica, 499.
Bdelluridea, 498.
Becasse, 322.

Beecher, Charles E., Symmetrical cell
development in the Favositidie, 215.

The development of a i^aleozoic
poriferous coral, 207.

INDEX.

523

Bellincinia, 265.
Bellona exilis, 834, 349.
Blake, J. A. See Chittenden.
Blacicus brunneicapilliis, 336, 349.
Blasia, 274.

pusilla, 262, 274.
Blepharidophyllum, 269.
Blepharostoma, 268.

palmatum, 268.

trichophyllum, 268.
Blepharozia, 265.
Blind worm, 351.
Blue jay, 346.
Blyttia, 274.
Boa, 351.

diviniloqnax, 351.
Boidse, 351.
Bonasa umbellus, 324.
Borlasia, 417, 418.

alba, 394.

octocnlata, 423.

olivacea, 419.
Boschia, 278.

weddellii, 278.
Bracliiolejennea, 264.
Bryolejeunea, 264.
Bryopteris, 264.
Biiteo lastissimus, 325, 349.

pennsylvanicus, 325.
Butorides virescens, 321.
Bnlimnlids^, 356.
Bulimnlns exili.s, 357.

laticincttis, 356, 358.

multifasciatus, 356.

nichoUsii, 357.

Ctesia, 272.

Caffein and thein. 63, 65.
Calbasco, 329.
Calliethera, 222.

scenica, 238.
Calobrynm, 273.

blumii, 273.
Calycnlaria, 273.
Calypogeia, 268, 273.

baldwinii, 256.

bidentula, 256.

bifurca, 256.

ericetoriim, 273.

flagellifera, 273.
CandoUea, 264, 269, 270.
Carinella, 443.
Carinellida?, 443.
Carinina, 443.

grata, 443.
Carpolipum, 275.
Caseoses, 78, 79, 90, 93, 96.

casein dyspeptone, and casein pep-
tone. E. H. Chittenden, 66.
Casein, 76.

antialbnmid, 77.

antipeptone, 101, 103.

dyspeptone, 66.

peptone, 66, 90-92, 100.
Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VIII.

Castianeira, 169.

bivittata, 169, 170, 171.
Cavendishia, 265.

Cell development in the Favositidse, 215.
Cenobita diogenes, 353.
Cephalothricidce, 442.
Cephalothrix, 442.

biociilata, 442.

filiformis, 442.

linearis, 442.
Cephalozia, 267.

multiflora, 256.

sandvicensis, 256.
Cephaloziella, 267.
Ceratolejennea, 264.
CerebratuliTs, 384, 416, 417, 427, 432, 487.

angiilatns, 438, 439.

fragilis, 438.

fuscescens, 488.

fuscus, 435, 438.

grandis, 438.

lacteus, 433, 436.

leidyi, 436.

lizzice, 436.

luridus, 417, 432, 440.

medullatus, 441.

pocohontas, 436.

rosens, 436.

rubra, 437.

sp., 438.

striolenta, 486.

trancatus, 427.
Certhiola dominicana, 840.
Ceryle alcyon, 329, 349.
Cesia, 272.
Chaetocolea, 266.
Chsetopsis, 268.
Chtetui-a dominicana, 330, 349.

poliura, 330.
Chamseceros, 275.
Chanifepelia passerina, 824.
Chameleon, 852.
Chandonanthus, 268.

setiformis, 268.

squarrosa, 268.
Charadrius dominicus, 849, 850.
Chascostoma, 272.
Chat, 843.

Cheilolejeunea, 264.
Chelonia, 352.
Cheweck, 337.

tetlong, 340.
Chiloscyphus, 270.

polyanthos, 270.
Chiracanthium, 166, 184.

viride, 184.
Chittenden, E. H., Influence of urethan,
paraldehyde, antipyrin, and antife-
brin on proteid metabolism, 89.

and Blake, J. A. Some experi-
ments on the infltience of arsenic and
antimony on glycogenic function and
fatty degeneration of the liver, 106.

<i8

January, 1893,

524

INDEX.

Chittenden, R. H., Cummins, G. W.,
Nature and chemical composition of
the myosin of muscle tissue, 115.

Hart, Horace S. , Elastin and elas-
tose bodies, 19.

Joslin, E. P. and Meara, F. S., On
the ferments contained in the juice
of the pineapple {Ananassa saliva),
together with some observations on
the composition and proteolytic action
of the juice, 281.

Kiihne, W., Myosinoses, 139.
Lambert, A., Some experiments on
the physiological action of tiraniiim
salts, 1.

Norris, Charles, Jr., Relative ab-
sorption of nickel and cobalt, 148.

Stewart, C. W., Influence of several
new therapeutic agents on amylolytic
and proteolytic action, 60.
Chomiocarpou, 276.
Chonanthelia, 263.
Chrysotis augusta, 337.
boiiqueti, 328.
cyanopis, 328.
nichoUsi, 328.
versicolor, 328.
Ciceroo, 327.

Cichlherminia dominicensis, 341, 346,
350.

fuscata densirostris, 346, 350.
Cicurina, 194.

complicata, 195.
Cincinnulus, 268.

Cinclocerthia ruficauda, 343, 348, 350.
Ciniflonidi«, 178.
Cladochonus, 210.
Clasmatocolea, 269.
Cleistopora geometrica. 215.
Clevea, 276.

hyalina, 276.
Clubiona, 166, 178, 179, 185.
abbottii, 182.
canadensis, 181.
ci'assipalpis, 180.
excepta, 183.
minuta, 181.
mixta, 180.
ornata, 183.
pallens, 166, 183.
pusilla, 181.
rubra, 181, 182.
saltabunda, 166, 187.
tibialis, 180.
Cobalt and nickel, Relative absorption

of, 148.
Coccyges, 329.
Coccyzus americanus, 329.
minor, 329, 349.
seniculus, 329.
Codonia, 273.
Coelocauleae, 271.
Coelotes, 191, 193, 194, 195, 197.

Coelotes, hybridus, 193.

longitarsus, 192, 193.

medicinalis, 191.

montanus, 192.
Coereba dominicana, 340, 344, 349.
CoerebidiB, 340.
Coleochila, 270.
Cololejeunea, 264.
Columbifi, 323.
Columba corensis, 323, 349.

leucocephala, 333, 349.
ColumbidaB, 323.

Columbigallina passerina, 324, 349.
ColumbridiB, 351.
Columnopora, 212.
Colura, 263.
Colurolejeunea, 264.
Conner, L. A., 66.
Conocephalus, 276.

couicus, 276.

japonicus, 376.
Convoluta, 508.

Coral, paleozoic poriferoiis, 207.
Cordcea, 274.
Coriarachne, 367.

depressa, 367.

versicolor, 367.
Corsinia, 278.

marchantioides, 278-
Cosmocephala, 387, 389, 392.

beringiana, 392.

japonica, 392.

ochracea, 396.
Cotylea, 494.
Coucoumioc, 329.
Coulaveecou. 329.
Crab, 353.

Hermit, 353.

Land, 353.
Crab-eater, 322.

Black, 321.
Crabe, 353.
Crabier, 322.

Black, 321.

Green, 321.

noir, 321.
Crak crak, 354.
Crapaud, 350.
Crawfish, 353.
Crazy Crazy, 330.

Blue, 333.

long-head, 331.
Crossotolejeunea, 264.
Cryptocarpus, 278.
CrJT3tocelis, 487.
Cryptomitrium, 377.

tenerum, 277.
Cuckoo, 339.

yellow-billed, 329.
Cuculidce, 329.

Cummins, G. Wyckoflt'. See Chittenden.
Cyauoeitta cristata, 346.
Cyathodium, 277.

INDEX.

525

Cyathodium, cavernosnm. 377.

CycloplioridcB, 358.

Cyclopliorus (Amphicyclotns) amethyst-

iiius, 358.
Cypseloides niger, 330, 349.
Cyrba ptilex, 246.
Cystignathid*, 350.

Dendroceros, 275.

clintoni, 360.
Dendroccsla, 459, 460.
Deudroica ^estiva, 341.

melauoptera, 341.

petechia, 341.

melanoptera, 341, 343, 349.

pliimbea. 342, 350.

virens, 350.
Dendrolejennea, 264.
Dendryplaaiites, 222.

aestivalis, 220, 232, 238.

capitatus, 328.

elegans, 333.

militaris, 220, 223, 339, 230

montanus, 333, 339.
Deuteroelastose, 27, 31, 37.
Deiiteromyosinose, 144. -
Diablotin, 330.
Diastaloba, 363.
Dichilus, 389.
Dicliiton, 373.

perpiisillum, 372.
Dicranolejennea, 264.
Diemyctylus virescens, 310.
Digoiiopora, 460, 461, 497.
Dilasna, 374.
DiuophilidfTB of New England, A. E.

VeiTill, 457.
Dinopliilus, 457.

gyi'ociliatns, 458.

pygmseus, 457.

simplex, 457, 458.
Diplasiolejennea, 264.
Diplolpena, 374.
Diplomitriitm, 374.
Diplopliyllnm, 269.

albicans, 256, 269.
Diploscypbiis, 269.

borneensis, 369.
Discocelis, 493.

mutabilis, 493.
Dockendorff, J. E.. 44.
Dolomedes, 379.

Dominica Island. Fanna of, 315.
Dove, Ground, 324.
Drassidfe, 166, 178, 190. 330.
Drassns, 167, 178.

lapidosus, 178.
robustus, 179.
saccatns, 178, 179.
troglodytes, 178.
yariegatus, 174, 175.
Drepanolejeunea, 264.
Drepanophoridje, 386, 415.

Drepanophorus, 386, 415.

lankesteri, 415.
Drummer, 354.
Dumortiera, 277.

liirsuta, 260, 277.

nepalensis, 260.

trichocephala, 260.
Duricea, 278
Duvalia, 276.
Dysdera, 185, 301.

crocata, 301.

interrita, 300, 301.

rnbicunda, 301.
Dysderidfe, 166, 300.
Dy.speptones, 76.

Ebo, 377.

latithorax, 377.
Echinogyna. 375.
Egg-albumen, 133.
Elfenea pagana martinica, 387, 349.
Elainea martinica, 337.
Elasmodes, 477, 486, 496.

gracilis, 496.
Elastin, 37.

and the elastose bodies. E. H.
Chittenden and Horace S. Hart, 19.

decomposition of, 33.

digestion of, 39, 34.

preparation of, 19.
Emerton, J. H., New England spiders of
the familj^ Attidfe, 330.

DrassidfB, Agalenidfe and Dysder-
idre, 166.

Thomisidce, 359.
Empidonax minimus, 337.
Emplectonema, 413.

camillea, 413.

giganteum, 413.

gracilis, 413.

neesii, 413.
Enopla, 385, 443, 446.
Epeirida?, 330.
Epiblemum, 233.

faustum, 338.

palmarum, 333.

scenicum, 223, 238.
Ereunetes petrificatus, 322.

pusillus, 323, 349, 350.
Ergane splendens, 344.
Etching a sphere and crystals of quartz
with hydroiiuoric acid, Eesults ob-
tained by, Dr. Otto Mover and S. L.
Penfieki; 158.
Eucalyx, 272.
Eucephalozia, 367.
Euetheia bicolor, 338, 349.
Eulampis liolosericeus, 331, 349.

jugularis, 330, 349.
Eulejeunea, 364.
Eunardia, 373.
Euophrys, 338.

craciatus, 241.

526

INDEX.

Euophrys, monadnock, 233, 241.
Enosmolejeimea, 264.
Eiiphoiiia flavifrons, 339, 349.
Eiirylepta, 495.

maculosa, 495.
Euryleptid.ne, 495.
Eustyloclins, 463, 467.

ellipticiis, 467, 473, 474.
Evans. A. W., An arrangement of the
genera of Hepatic:^, 363.

A provisional list of the HeiJaticne
of the Hawaiian Islands, 253.
Exormotheca, 376.

Falco caribb<Tearum, 336, 349.

columbarius, 335, 349.

sparverins, 326.
FalconidiB, 335.
Farrington, Oliver C, The nephrostomes

of Eana, 309.
Fasciola. 275.

angulata, 390.

Candida, 404.

rosea, 395.
Favosites, 209, 210, 211, 213, 216. 218.

forbesi, var. occidentalis, 310.
Favositidse, cell development in. 315.
Fegatella, 376.
Ferments contained in the juice of the

pineapple, 281.
Fibrin, 133.
Fibrinogen. 133.
Fimbriaria, 276.

innovans, 260.

tenella, 276.
Fish hawk, 326.
Flycatcher. 336.
Fossombronia, 273.

pusilla, 273.
FoSsombronieiP, 273.
Fou Foil, 380.

beqnar, 334.

blen, 333.

mardet. 380.

tete-longue, 331.
Fovia, 503.

affinis, 504.

var. giisea, 505.

var. warreni. 505.

grisea. 504.

littoralis, 504.

wan-eni, 504, 505.
Fregata aquila, 320, 849.
Fregatid«». 330.
Fringillid<T?, 337.
Fnillania, 363.

apicnlata, 353.

arietina, 353.

explicata, 353.

hntchinsiae. 353.

hypoleuca, 353.

kuuzei, 253.

piligera, 253.

FruUania, sandvicensis, 253.

sqnarrosa, 253.
FrullaniiB, 263.
Frnllaniepe, 263.

Gaulin. Black, 321.

Night, 322.

AVTiite, 821.
Gecarcinus lateralis. 353.

ruricola. 353.
Gecko, 351.
Geckonidfe, 351.
Geocalyx, 269.

graveolens, 269.
Geotrecha. 168.

bivittata, 169.

crocata, 171.

pinnata, 170.
Geotrygon montana, 324, 349.

mystacea, 325, 849.
Gnaphosa, 175, 178.

brumalis, 166, 175.

conspersa, 166, 173. 175, 17€

gigantea, 176.

sciidderi, 166, 175,
Gobe-monche, 336.
Gongylanthns, 273.
Gordins fragilis, 438.
Gottschea, 271.
Grimaldia. 276. ^

barbifrons. 276.

rupestris, 276.
Grive, 345, 346.
Grivette, 845.
Grosbeak, 339.
Grosbec, 339.
Grosse grive, 346.
Ground dove. 824.
Gru gru worm. 854.
Gue Gne, 825, 326.
Gunda, 504.
Gymnanthe, 272, 273.

bolanderi, 256.

saccata, 272.
Gymnanthes, 272.
Gymnocephala, 441.
Gymnocephalidie, 441.
Gymnocolea, 271.
Gymnomitrium, 272.

concinnatiim, 272.
Gymnoscyphtis, 271.

repens, 271.

Habrocestum, 223.

peregrinum, 223, 245.

sjalendens, 223, 244.
Hahnia, 195.

bimaculata, 196.

cinerea, 197.

radula, 196.
Haplomitrium, 273.
Harpalejennea, 264.
Harpanthus, 270.

INDEX.

527

Harpauthus, flotoviamis, 270.

scutatus, 270.
Harporhynchus rufus, 343, 346.
Hart, Horace S. See Chittenden.
Hasarius, 223.

hoyi, 223, 243.
Hawk, Fish, 326.

Moxmtain, 325.
Hecate elegans, 406.
Helicidffi, 356.
Helicina autillarum, 358.
epistilia, 357.
fasciata, 358.
rhodostoma, 357, 358.
velntina, 357.
Helicinidte, 357.
Helix (Dentellaria) badia, 356.
dentiens, 358.
josephinae, 356.
nigrescens, 356.
Hepatica, 276.
Hepaticas, genera of, .262.

of the Hawaiian Islands, 253.
Herberta, 266.
adunca, 266.
sangTtinea, 255.
Hercules beetle, 354.
Hermit crab, 353.
Herodiones, 321.
Herpetium, 267.
Herpocladium, 267.
Herpylhis, 166, 168.
alarius, 189.
ater, 166, 172.
auratns, 167.
bilineatiTS, 166, 175.
conarius, 168.
crocatus, 166, 168, 171.
crnciger, 168.
descriptns, 166, 168, 171.
ecclesiasticus, 166, 173.
longipalpus, 168.
marinoratus, 168.
ornatus, 168.
parens, 188.
trilineatus. 168, 170.
variegatus, 166, 174.
zonarins, 170.
Heterostyloclms, 462, 467, 468.

mactilatus, 468, 469.
Hirondelle, 330, 340.
Himndinidfe, 340.
Holocephala, 441.
Holostip;^, 264.
Homalolejennea, 264.
Homotropantha, 263.
Hoplonemertea, 385.
Hoplonemertini, 385.
Horn-bng, 354.
House wren, 344.
Hyalonemertes, 446, 451.

atlantica, 451.
Hygrobiella, 267.

Hygrobiella, laxifolia, 267.

myriocarpa, 267.

nevicensis, 267.
Hygrolejennea, 264.
Hylodes martinicensis, 351.
Hymenophyton, 274.
Hypenantron, 276.

loins, 222.

elegans, 222, 233.

formicarius, 222, 235.

hartii, 222, 235.

lineatns, 239.

mitratus, 222, 232.

palinarnm, 222, 233.

tibialis, 235.
Iguana, 351.

delicatissima, 351.
Ignanidas, 351.
Iniogine, 475.

ocnlifera, 475.
lonoruis martinica, 322, 349.
Isotachis, 266.

Jaco, 339.

Joslin, E. P. See Chittenden.

Jubula, 263.

hutchinsise, 263.

piligera, 253, 263.
Jiibulotypus, 263.
Jungermannia, 265, 267, 268, 269, 271.

albicans, 256.

anomala, 270.

callithrix, 259.

caudifera, 256.

coriacea, 258.

esenbeekii, 258.

lucens, 258.

lurida, 258.

macrophylla, 258.

mauii, 259.

minuta, 259.

nana, 258.

piligera, 258.

pulchella, 271.

quadrifida, 271.

rigida, 258.

robusta, 258.

sandvieensis, 256.

subulata, 258.

taylori, 258, 270.
Jungermannia?, 267-270, 272.
Jungermanniacefc, 263.
JungermanniefB, 269.

Kantia, 268.

baldwinii, 256.

bidentula, 256.

bifurca, 256.

trichomanis, 268.
Kialee, 321.
Killee Killee, 325, 326.
Kuhne. W. See Chittenden.

528

l^fDEX.

La belle, 354.

gotet, 336.
Lacertilia, 351.

Lambert, Alexander. See Chittenden.
Land crab, 353.
Laridae, 319.
Leiomitra, 2(55.

capillata, 265.

tomentosa, 265.
Leioscypluis, 270.
Lejeunea, 263.

albicans, 254.

alcina, 253.

anders.sonii, 254.

calcarea, 264.

calyptrata, 254.

calyjjtrifolia, 254.

cancellata, 254.

ceratocarpa, 254.

cucnllata, 254.

elongata, 253.

gibbosa, 253.

liillebrandii, 254.

mannii, 253.

obcordata, 254.

oculata, 254.

owaihieiisis. 254.

pacifica, 254.

sandvicensis, 253, 254.

serpyllifolia, 264.

stenoschiza, 254.

subligulata, 254.

ungulata, 254.
Lembidium, 266.

dendroides, 266.

niitans, 266.

ventrosnm, 266,
Leodes striolenta, 436.
Leperoma, 266.
Leijicolea, 266.

ocliroleuca, 266.

pniinosa, 266.

scolopendra, 266.
Lepidol?ena, 266.

clavigera, 266.

menziesii, 266.

palpebrifolia, 266.
Lepidozia, 267.

filipendula, 255.

reptans, 256, 267.

sandvicensis, 255.

STiccida, 267.
Lepidozie.Te, 266.
Leptinaria lamellata, 358.
Leptodactylvis pentadactylirs. 350.
Leptolejeunea, 264.
Leptoplana, 477, 494.

angusta, 485.

drobacbiensis. 482.

ellipsoides, 482. 483.

folitim, 487.

variabilis, 480, 484.

virilis, 478.

LeptoplanidaB, 475, 494. "•
Leptoscyphus, 270.

fragilifoliiis, 270.
Lethocolea, 272.
Lichenodes, 278.
Lindigia, 272.
Lindigina, 272.

granatensis, 272.

liebmanniana, 272.
Linens, 382, 417, 432, 433, 441.

arenicola, 425.

bicolor, 426.

comninnis, 424.

dnbius, 426.

gessei-ensis, 419, 422, 424.

lacteus, 433, 436.

longissimns, 418.

marinus, 418.

pallidns, 425.

rubra, 422.

sanguineus, 422, 423, 424.

socialis, 384, 424.

truncatus, 427.

viridis, 417, 418, 425, 427, 429, 439.

var. fuseus, 420.

var. obscurus, 420.

var. olivaceus. 420.

var. rufus, 420.
Lineidfe, 417.
Linj^ihia, 191.
Limicolffi, 322.
Liochlsena, 270.

lanceolata, 270.
Liver, Influence of antimony find arsenic
on glycogenic function and fatty de-
generation of the, R. H. Chittenden
and J. A. Blake, 106.
Longipennes, 319.
Lophocolea, 269.

beecheyana, 256.

bidentata, 256, 269.

breutelii, 256.

columbica, 256.

connata, 256.

gaudichaixdii, 256.

heterojjhylla. 269.

martiana, 256.

orbigniana, 256.

spinosa, 256.
Lopholejeunea, 264.
Lophozia, 271.
Loxigilla noctis, 337.

sclateri. 337, 349.
Lycosa, 190, 379.
Lycosidfe, 166, 220.
Lunularia, 277.

vulgaris, 277.
Lunnlarieae, 277.

Mabuia agilis, 355.

nigropunctata. 352. 355.
cepedei, 352.
dominicana, 355,

IN^DKX

.')29

Macaria, 167.
Macrochires, 330.
Mac role jevinea, 264.
Macronemertes, 413.

gigautea, 413.
Madotheca, 265.

Itevigata, 254.

ligulifera, 254.
Madreporaria perforata, 212.
Maevia, 223.

pencillata, 236.

vittata, 223, 236.
Malacobdella, 444.

grossa, 445.

mercenaria, 445.

obesa, 444.
Malacobdellidiu, 444.
Malfeenee, 325.
Mauaeoti, 318.
Marchantia, 260, 275.

creuata, 260.

disjuncta, 260.

innovaus, 260.

polymorpha, 260, 275.
Marchantiacess, 275.
Marchantieae, 275.
Marchesinia, 263.
Margarops densirostris, 346.

dominicensis, 346.

berminieri, 346.

montanus, 345.
Marpissa, 222.
Marptusa, 222.

familiaris, 222, 237.
Marsupella, 271.

emarginata, 271.

sphacelata, 271.
Marsupia, 271.

knightii, 273.

orvilleaniim, 273.

setulosum. 273.
Marsupidium, 273.
Martinellia. 264, 269, 270.
Masong, 337.
Mastigobryixm, 267.

brigbami, 255.

cordistipulum, 255.

defiexiim, 255.

falcatiim, 255.

iiitegrifolitim, 255.

minixtiim, 255.

parvistipiilxTm, 255.

piitens, 255.
Mastigolejeimea, 264.
Mastigopbora, 266.

gracilis, 255.

woodsii, 266.
Meara, F. S. See Cbitteuden.
Meckelia, 417, 432.

fragibs, 433.

ingens, 433.

lactea, 433.

lizziae, 433.

Meckelia, birida, 440.

olivacea, 438.

pocobontas. 436.

rosea, 436.

serpeutaria, 438.
Mec;yTiostoma, 510.
Meuemerus, 222.

bimis, 222, 239.

lineatus, 222. 239.

paykullii, 239.
Mesopbylla, 272.

Metabolism, proteid, lutlueuce of Ure-
tbau, Paraldebyde, Antijiyi-in, and An-
tifebrin on, R. H. Cbittenden, 39.
Meteoriojjsis, 263.
Metzgeria, 275.

dicbotoma, 260.

furcata, 275.

pubescens, 275.
Metzgerieai, 275.

Meyer, Dr. Otto, and Peutield, S. L.,
Results obtained by etcbing a sphere
and crystals of qnartz with bydro-
finoric acid, 158.
Micaria, 167.

longipes, 167, 16b.

montana, 168.
Micariosoma, 188.
Michelinia, 207, 209, 211, 215, 218.

convexa, 216, 218.

lentictilaris, 207.
Microlejeunea, 264.
Micrommata, 379.
Micropodidge, 330.
Micropteryginm, 266.
Micrura, 416, 417, 432, 433, 441.

affinis, 428.

albida, 431.

dorsalis, 429.

fnsca, 428, 433.

inornata. 431.

rubra, 430.
Mimocichla albiventris, 347.

ardesiaea, 347.

albiventris, 347.

plumbea, 348.

rubripes, 348.

verrilloiiim, 347, 350.
Misninena aleatoria, 369.
I asperata, 370.

i foliata, 370.

j georgiana, 370.

] oblonga, 371.

I vatia, 368.

Mittenia, 274.
Mniopsis, 273.
Mniotiltidae, 341.
Monoclea, 274.

forsteri, 274.

gottschei, 274.
Monocleae, 274.
Monogonopora, 461, 497.
' Monoselenium, 277.

530

INDEX.

Morckia, 374.

Morvy, 341, 346. ^

Mountain hawk, 325.

whistler, 344.
Myadestes dominicanus, 344, 350.
Mygalidae, 200.
Myiadestes genibarbis, 344.
Myiarchiis crinitus, 336.

erythrocerciis, 336.

oberi, 336.

sp., 336.

tjTannuliis, 336.
oberi, 336, 349.
Mylia, 270.

tavlori, 258.
MvosiA, 116, 118, 121, 126, 127, 133,

134, 137. 140.
Myosin of muscle tissue. Nature and
chemical composition of, E. H. Chit-
tenden and C. W. Cummins, 115.
Myosinoses, W. Kiihne and R. H. Chit-
tenden, 139.
Myriocolea, 264.

irrorata, 264.
Myiiorrhynchus, 278.

fimbriatus, 378.
Mytilopsis, 266.

Nardia, 271.

callithrix, 259.

exserta, 259.

maiiii, 259.
Nareda, 389, 403.

superba, 403.
Naredopsis, 389.
Nectouemertes, 446, 447.

mirabilis, 447.
Nectonemertidfe, 446.
Nemerteans, Marine, of New England
and adjacent waters, A. E. Verrill,
382.
Nemertes, 388, 400, 402, 404, 412, 417.

affinis, 428.

lactiflorea, 394.

mandilla, 394.

obscura, 418.

(Borlasia) octoculata, 423.

olivacea, 418.

jHilchra, 395.

quadrioculata, 404.

(Borlasia) rufifrons, 442.

sanguinea, 423.

socialis, 424.

sp., 400, 402.

vermiculus, 407.

viridis, 419.
Nemertina, 384.
Nemertinea, 384.
Neon, 223.

nellii, 224, 240.
Nephrostomes of Rana, 0. C. Farring-

ton, 309.
Neritidae, 857.

Neritina punctulata, 357, 358.

Neurolejeunea, 264.

New England Attidag, 220.

Drassidae, AgalenidHP, and Dysder-
idas, 166.

Thomisida-, 359.
Nickel and cobalt. Relative absorption

of, 148.
Nightingale, 343.
Nonnette, 325.
Norris, Charles, Jr., 78, 100.

See Chittenden.
Noteroclada, 273.
Notocerideae, 462.
Notoscyphus, 270.
Notospermus, 417.
Notothylas, 275.

orbicularis, 275.
Nyctiardea violaeea, 323.
Nycticorax nsevius, 322.

violaceus, 333, 349.

Ocyale, 379.
Odontolejeuuea, 264.
Odontoschisma, 367.

sandvicensis, 356.

sphagni, 367.

subjulacea, 356.
CErstedia, 404.

maculata, 409.

vittata, 411.
Officer bird, 343.
Omatoplea, 387.

alba. 394.

mutabilis, 394.

inxichra, 395.

rosea, 394, 395.

stimpsonii, 390, 393.
Ommatoplea, 387, 388.

pulchra, 395.
Omphalanthus, 363.
Omphalolejeunea, 364.
Opheomorphus juli*, 351, 353.
Ophidia, 351.
Ophionemertes. 387, 389.

agilis, 400.
Opossum, 318.
Orthorhynchus exilis, 334.
Ortolan,' 324.
Osprey, 325.
Otigoniolejeunea, 264.
Otiona, 377.
Owl, 317, 326.
Oxymitra, 278.
Oxyptila, 366.

cinerea, 366.

Pahemon jamaicensis, 353.
Palfeomertina, 441.
Pal.ieonemertea, 441.
Paheonemertini, 441.
Pallavicinia, 274.
baldwinii, 259.

INDEX.

;3i

Pallavicinia cylindrica, 259.

lyellii, 274.
Paludicolge, 322.
Pandion haliaetus, 326.

carolinensis, 326. 349.
Pa-pia, 343.
Paraglobiilin, 133.
Paraldehyde. 62, 64.

Influence of, 39, 44.
Parrot, 328. 339.
Partridge, Black, 324.

.Crescent, 325.

Eed, 324.
Passeres, 335.
Pedinophylhim, 270.
Pelagonemertes, 446.
Pelecanidaj, 320.
Pelecanus fuscus, 320, 349.
Pellenes nigriceps, 244.
Pellia, 274.

epiphylla, 274.
Peltolejeunea, 264.
Peltolepsis, 276.

grand! s, 276.
Penfield, Samuel L. See Meyer.
Penwe, 337.

Pepsin-hydrochloric acid, 29, 37, 79.
Perdrix keesong. 325.

noire, 324.

rouge. 324.
Perforata, 210.
Peritch. 339.
PeiToquet, 328.
Perro-vanter. 347.
PetalophyUum, 273.

ralfsii, 273.
Phaethon fla\irostris, 320, 349.
Phaethontidae, 320.
Phagocata, 498, 503.
PhagocatidtP, 503.
Phidippus, 221.

albomaculatus, 227.

auctus, 224.

brunnens, 222, 225.

galatea, 227.

morsitans, 227.

multiformis, 224.

mystaceus, 222, 227.

pur|3uratus. 227.

i-uber, 222, 224. 226.

rufus, 223, 224. 226.

tripunctatus, 223, 327.
Philcfius militaris, 230.
Philodrominne, 359.
Philodromus. 372.

bidentatus, 375.

brevis, 375.

lineatus, 374.

minusculus, 374.

ornatus, 374.

pictus, 373.

placidus, 374.

praelustris, 372.

Trans. Conn. Acad.. Vol. VIU.

Philodromus, robustus, 376.

rufus, 373.

signifer, 372.

vulgaris, 372.
Phlegra leopardus, 223, 242.
Phonipara bicolor, 338.

omissa, 338.
Phragmicoma, 263.

elongata, 253.

sandvicensis, 253.

subsquarrossa, 353.
Phrtirolithus. 188.

alarius, 188, 189.

piignatus, 188.
Physiotium, 365.

cochleariforme, 355.

conchaefolium, 355.

sphagnoides, 255.

subinflatum, 255.
Pigafettoa, 268.

crenulata, 268.
Pineapple, Ferments contained in the

juice of. 281.
Pipiree, 335.
Plagiochasma, 277.
cordata. 260.
Plagiochila, 264, 270.

acutiuscula, 257.

adiantoides, 257.

asplenoides, 270.

baldwinii, 257.

biserialis, 257.

brauniana, 257.

deflexa, 257.

deltoidea. 257.

eatoni, 257.

fissidentoides, 257.

iiava. 257.

frondescens, 257.

gaudichaudii, 257.

gracillima. 356.

oppositifolia, 357.

owaihiensis, 257.

patens, 257.

patula, 257.

simplex, 256.

tenuis, 257.
Planaria angulata, 390, 392, 439, 500.

affinis, 504.

Candida, 404, 405.

dorsalis, 409.

filiformis, 442.

frequens, 506.

fusca, 438, 439.

gesserensis, 418.

grisea, 504, 505.

lactiflorea, 394.

limuli, 499.

linearis, 442.

littoralis, 504.

octoculata, 423.

quadrioculata. 404.

rosea. 395.

69

January, 1S93.

532

INDEX.

Planaria sangiiinea, 423.

vdvee, 506.

viridis, 418.
Planarians, marine, of New England, A.

E. VeiTill, 459.
Planaridae, 503.
Planocera, 471, 474.

elliptica, 467, 471.

nebulosa, 472.
Planoceridae, 462, 494.
Planoceropsis, 471.
Plantain-eater, 337.
Platylejeunea, 264.
Pleuranthe, 270.
Pleuroclada, 268.

albescens, 268.

islandica, 268.
Plenrodictynm, 207, 211.

lenticulare, 207, 215.

problematicum, 211.
Pleuroschisma, 267.
Pleuroschismotypus, 267.
Plenrozia, 265.

cochleariformis, 255, 265.

conchsefolia, 255.

gigantea, 255.

subinflata, 255.
Podanthe, 272.
Podanthes, 272.
Podomitrium, 274.

phyllanthus, 274.
Poecilochroa, 174.

bilineata, 175.

montana, 175.

variegata, 174.
Polia, 387, 404.

mandilla, 394.

obscura, 419.

verinicuhis, 407.
Polina, 387, 388.

gliitinosa, 397.

grisea, 398.
Polycelis, 477, 482.

mutabilis, 493.
Polychoenis, 510.

candatiis, 511.
Polycladidea, 460, 461, 501.
Polyotus, 266.
Polyscells variabilis, 480.
Polystemma, 387, 388.

pulchrum, 388, 395.

roseum, 388, 395.
Porella, 265.

hawaiiensis, 254.

laevigata, 254.
, porella, 265.
Porphyrio martinicus, 322.
Poseidon, 417.

affinis, 428.
Potamolejetmea, 264.
Poule d'eau, 322.
Prasanthus, 272.

snecicum, 272.

Prawn, 353.
Preissia, 276.

commutata, 276.
Prionolobus, 267.
Priouolejetinea, 264.
Procellariidas, 320.
Procerodes, 506.

freqiiens, 506.

ulvse, 506.

wheatlandii, 506.
Progne dominicensis, 340, 349.
Prosthesima, 169, 172, 174.

atra, 172.

depressa, 173.

ecclesiastica, 172, 173.

ftmesta, 172.

melancholica, 166, 172.

propinqua, 173.
Prosthiostomidae, 496.
Prosthiostomum, 496.

gracile, 496.
Proteid metabolism, Influence on, 2, 39.
Proteolytic action, 60, 63, 281, 286, 306.
Protocephalozia, 267.
Protoelastose, 25, 29, 37.
Protomyosinose, 142.
Pseudonenra, 275.
Psendotelphiisa dentata, 317, 353.

tennipes, 353.
Psiloclada, 270.

clandestina, 270.
Psittaci, 327.
Psittacidte, 327.
Pteropsiella, 267.
PtilidiefB, 265.
Ptilidium, 265.

ciliare, 265.
Ptychanthus, 264.
Ptycholejnnea, 264.
Pycnolejeiinea, 264.
Pycnoscenus, 278.
Pylanis bicolor, 201.
Pythonissa, 177.

imbecilla, 176, 177.

Quartz, Etching a sphere and crystal of,
158.

Eadula, 264, 269, 270.

complanata, 264.

javanica, 254.

mannii, 254.

reflexa, 254.

xalapensis, 254.
Radulfe, 265.
Radulotypus, 264.
Eallidie, 322.
Ramier, 323.

Black, 323.

White-headed, 323.
Eana catesbiana, 310.

vii'escens, 310.

Nephrostomes of, 309.

INDEX.

533

Eaptores, 335.

Reboulia, 377.
Eenieria rubra, 436, 437.
Reptilia, 351.
RhabdoccBla, 460.
Rhacotheca, 377.

azorica, 377.
Rhagadocephala, 416, 443.
Rhopalanthtis, 373.

mnioides, 373.
Rhynchodemus sylvaticus, 498.
Riccardia, 175.
Riccia, 378.

fimbriata, 378.
Ricciaceae, 378.
Riccieae, 378.
Ricciella, 378.
Ricciocarpus, 378.
Richardia. 375.
RieUa, 378.
Ringdove. 333.
Robin, 337.
Roeineria, 375.
Romingeria, 310, 313, 318.
Rosingnole, 343.
Runcinia brendellii, 369.
Rupinia, 378.

Saccogyna, 369.

australis, 269.

bolanderi, 356.

jtigata, 369.

viticulosa, 369.
Saccogyneic, 368.
Saitis, 333.

pulex, 333. 346.

x-notata, 346.
Saltator albicoUis, 339.

guadehipensis, 339, 349.
Salticus, 334.

ephippiatus, 224, 349.

scenicus, 338.
Sandea, 376.

supradecomposita, 376.
Sarcomitriiim, 375.
Sarcoscyphiis, 371.
Sa^^teria, 376.

alpina, 376.
Sayornis phoebe, 337.
Scalia, 373.

hookeri, 373.
Scapania, 364, 369.

cbloroleuca, 369.

densifolia, 269.

nemorosa, 356, 269.

oakesii, 256.

planifolia, 356.

iindulata, 356, 369.
Scapaniae, 369.
Schisma, 366.
Schi.stocalyx, 369.
Schistochila, 371.
Schizonemertea, 416.

Schizonemertina, 442.
Schizonemertini, 416.
Schizostipje, 364.
Scincidse, 353.
Scolopacidfle, 333.
Scopnlina, 374.
Seiurns noveboracensis, 343.
Sendtnera, 366.

gracilis, 255.

jnniiaerina var. sangninea. 355.

tristicha, 255.
Serpentaria, 433.

fragilis, 438.
Setophaga ruticilla, 343, 350.
Sliawah, 336.
Siifleur montagne, 344.
Skink, 353.
Snake, 351.
Snipe, 333.
Sojer, 353.
Soldier, 353.
Soleil coucher, 336.
Solenostoma, 372.
Southbya, 371.
Sparrow, Chipping, 345.

Yellow-winged, 338.
SpliferocarpefB, 278.
Sphserocarpus, 278.

terrestris, 378.
Spbserodactylus copii, 355.

oxyi'hinus, 351, 355.
Sphagnoecetis, 267.

sandvicensis, 256.
Sphenolobus, 269, 271.
Spiders of New England, 166, 220, 359.
Spiniis tristis, 343.
Spizella socialis, 345.
Spongodes, 278.
Spracella, 267.

succida, 267.
Steatoda marmorata, 194.
Steetzia, 374.

baldwinii, 359.

cylindrica, 359.
Steganopodes, 330.
Stenogyi'a octona, 357, 358.
Stenogyridae, 357.
Sterna anaethetus, 349.

antillarum, 349.

dougalli, 349.

fuliginosa, 319, 349.
Stewart, C. W. See Chittenden.
Stictolejeunea, 364.
Striatopora, 209, 311.
Strigidje, 336.

Strix flammea nigrescens, 317, 336, 349.
Stylochidce, 462.
Stylochoplana maciilata, 468.
Stylochopsis, 463.

littoralis, 467.

zebra, 463.
Stylochus, 463, 467, 471, 474.

crassus, 466.

534

INDEX.

Stylochus froutalis, 465.

littoralis, 467, 471.

maciilatus, 467, 469.

zebra, 463.
Succinea approximans, 358.
Siicrier, 340, 344.

Sugar and Albumin, Excretion of, 5.
Sugarmaker, 340.
Sulphate, Thallin, 63, 65.
Sulphuric acid, 93-95.
Sunset bird, 336.
Surique, 353.
Swallow, 330, 340.
Sykorea, 269.
Symphyogjaia, 274.

semi-involucrata, 260.
Syinphyomitra, 271.
Synageles, 224.

picata, 224, 250.
Synemosyna, 224.

ephippiata, 249.

formica, 224, 248.

picata, 250.
Sjaihynienium, 277.
Syringopora, 210, 212.
Syzygiella, 271.

Tanagridse, 339.

Targionia, 277.

hypophylla, 277.
Tai'gionieiB, 277.
Taxilejeunea, 264.
Taylor, H. C, 53.
Teeteen, 341.
Tegenaria, 183, 191, 193, 195.

brevis, 194.

civilis, 193.

derhamii, 193.

domestica, 193.

medicinalis, 191, 192, 193.
Teiidce, 352.
Temnoma, 271.
Tessellina, 278.

pyramidata, 278.
Testudinidfe, 352.
Testudo tabulata, 352.
Tetlong, Cheweck. 340. ,

Fou Fou, 331.
Tetrastemma, 382, 386, 401, 404.

agricola, 404.

arenicola, 425.

Candida, 405.

candidum, 404, 405.

dorsale, 409.

var. marmoratiim, 410.
var. unicolor, 410.

dorsalis, 409.

elegans, 406.

fuscum, 409.

groenlandicum, 405.

marmoratum, 409.

roseum, 412.

varicolor, 404.

Tetrastemma variegatum, 409.

vermicula, 407.

vermiculns, 407.

var. catenulatum, 408.

vittatum, 411, 412.
Tetrastemmidpe, 386.
Thallin sulphate, 62, 65.
Thallocarpus, 278.

curtisii, 278.
Thalurania bicolor, 331, 333, 349.

wagleri, 333.
Thanatus, 379.

coloradensis, 379.

lycosoides, 379.
Thecadactylus rapicauda, 355.
Thein and caffein, 63, 65.
Therapeutic agents on amylolytic and
proteolytic action. Influence of several
new, E. H. Chittenden and C. W.
Stewart, 60.
Therididas, 221.
Thomisidfe, 359.
Thomisin;E, 359.
Thomisus aleatorius, 369.

asperatus, 370.

caudatus, 376.

duttonii, 378.

fartus, 368.

ferox, 360.

vulgaris, 372.
Thrasher, Brown, 343.
Thricolea, 265.
Thrash, Brown, 343, 346.

Large, 346.

Small, 345. •

Wood, 346.
Thryothorus rufescens, 343, 350.
Thyopsiella, 263.
Thysananthus, 264.
Thysanolejeunea, 264.
Tibellus, 378.

duttonii, 378.
Tinnunculus caribbyearum, 326.

sparverius antillarum, 326.
Tmarus, 376.

caudatus, 376.
Toad, 350.

Tree, 351.
Tourterelle, 323.
Toxic action, 7.
Trachelas, 184.

riiber, 184.
Trachycolea, 263.
Trachylejeunea, 264.
Tree toad, 351.
Trembler, 343.
Trembleur, 343, 348.
Treubia, 274.

Tricladidea, 461, 497, 501.
Trichocolea, 265.

gracillima, 255.

tomentella, 265.
Tricolea, 265.

IKDEX

535

Trigonanthiis, 267.
Trigonoporus, 478, 486.

cephalophthalmus, 487.

dendriticus, 491.

folium, 487, 492.
Triuga minutilla. 850.
Triugoides macularins, 322.
TrocMlidje, 330.
Troglodytes aedon, 344.
Troglodytids, 343.
Trypsin, 35, 36, 96, 97, 99.
Turbellaria, 460.
Turbinares, 320.
Turdidte, 344.
Turdus mustelinus, 346.
Turtle, 352.
Turtledove, 323.
Tuttle, C. A., 66, 78.
Twar-oo, 319.
Tylimantlius, 272.

integrifolius, 259.
Typhlocolax acutus, 514.
Typhlolepta acuta, 514.
Typhlopidfe, 351.
Typhlops lumbricalis, 351 .
Tyrannid.ie, 335.
T_\Tannns rostratus, 335, 349.

tyrannus, 335.

Umbraculum, 274.

Uranium salts. Some experiments on

the physiological action of, R. H.

Chittenden and Alexander Lambert, 1.
Uranium, toxic action of, 7.
Urethan, 39, 61, 64.

Vaginula punctatissima, 357, 358

Vaginulidae, 357.

Verrill, A. E., Dinophilidae of New
England, 457.

Marine nemerteans of New Eng-
land and adjacent waters, 382.

Marine planarians of New Eng-
land, 459.

Verrill, G. E. Notes on the faiina of
the Island of Dominica, British West
Indies, vnth lists of the species ob-
tained and observed by A. H. and G.
E. Verrill, 315.

Vespertilio migricans, 317.
Vireo calidris, 340, 349.

olivaceus, 340.
Vireonidas, 340.
Vireosylvia altiloqua, 340.

calidris, 340.

var. dominicana, 340.
Vortex Candida, 499.

warreni, 504.

Washburn, N. P., 39.
Water-hen, 322.
Whistler, Mountain, 344.
Wood thrush, 346.
Worm, Blind, 351.
Gru gru, 354.
Wren, House, 344.

Xiphosurus oculatus, 352, 355.
Xystictis, 360.

benefactor, 362.

brunneus, 360.

crudelis, 360.

elegans, 361.

feroclus, 363.

formosiis, 365.

graminis, 364.

gulosus, 361.

inornatus, 366.

lentus, 361.

limbatus, 360.

locuples, 361.

nervosus, 362.

quadrilineatus, 365.

stomachosus, 362.

triguttatus, 363.

Zee zee zay, 338.

Zee zee zeb, 338.

Zenaida martinicana, 323, 349.

Zoopsis, 267-

Zygoballus, 223.

bettini, 223, 230.

terrestris, 223, 231.

ERRATA.

Page 186, fifth line from bottom, for meiaucliolia, read melaucholica.
Page 170, eleventh line from bottom, for C. crocata, read G. crocata.
Page 170, seventh line from bottom, for C. bivittata, read G. bivittata ; also, p.
171, sixth and sixteenth lines fi'om top and ninth line from bottom.

Page 191, ninth line from tojj, for C<elotes. read Ccelotes.

Page 333. fourth line from bottom, for cins, read Icins.

Page 317, sixth line from top, for A. flammea nigrescens, i-ead S. flammea nigres-
cens.

Page 337, fourteenth line from bottom, for schlateri, read sclateri.

Page 443, second line from top, for Schizonertina, read Schizonemertina.

Trans. Conn. Acad. Vol. VIII.

Plate

>:V^

/

\KiorypE,

E. BIERSTADT, N. Y.

Trans. Conn. Acad. Vol. VI

ARTOTYPE, E. BIERSTADT, N. Y.

am, Con nAcF^dVclVm

PLATE in;

- J,H,Eir,.-rt-.r. fr-rr. nalui

L S.Punderscn.&- Son Ph^toLuhN'tw Haver

P.sCoAnA-adVclVTII

PLATE IV

H.Emerton from nature

L.S.Punderson,&- SonPhoto.LuhJ-Jew Haven.

-jTiS

Conn Acad Vol VTII

PLATE V

J.H.Emerton from nature.

L S.Punderson,&^ Son Photo .Lith. New Haven.

rans Conn Acad Vol VTn

PLATE VI

J.H Emerton from nature

L.S.Pundercon.Sr SonPhDto.XuhJIew Haven.

Trans Conn Acad Vol ^^H

PLATEVIT

.H.Emerton t'rom natut

L S.Punderscn. 6-- SonPhoioLith. New Haven.

T^ans Conn Acad Vol VTII

PLATE VIII

J,H Emertcn from nature.

L S.Punderscn,&- S ^n Photo Lith.New Haven.

TRANS. CONN. ACAD., Vol. VIM

Plate IX.

8 3

12

TRANS. CONN. ACAD., Vol. VIII.

Plate X.

TRANS. CONN. ACAD.. Vol. VIII.

Plate XI.

TRANS. CONN. ACAD., Vol. VIII

Plate XII.

TRANS. CONN. ACAD.

Vol. VIII.

Plate XIII.

/

^

1

\ •>

TRANS. CONN. ACAD., Vol. VIII.

Plate XIV.

TRANS. CONN. ACAD., Vol. VIII.

Plate XV.

TRANS. CONN. ACAD. VOL. VIII

PLATE XVI,

J H, Emerton, from Nature.

Photo. Lith. by L. S. Punderson & Son,

TRANS. CONN. ACAD. VOL. VIII.

PLATE XVII,

J H. Emerton, from Nature.

Photo. Lith. by L. S. Punderson & Son,

TRANS. CONN. ACAD. VOL. VIII

PLATE XVIII,

J H. Emerton, from Nature.

Photo. Lith. by L. S. Punderson & Son,

TRANS. CONN. ACAD. VOL.. VIII.

PLATE XIX,

J H. Emerton, from Nature.

Photo. Lith. by L. S. Punderson & Son,

TRANS. CONN. ACAD. VOL. VIIl

PLATE XX.

J H. Emerton, from Nature.

Photo. Lith. by L. S. Punderion 8c Son,

TRANS. CONN. ACAD. VOL. VIII.

PLATE XXI

J H. Emsrton, from Nature.

Photo. Lith. by L. S. Pund9r«on'& Son,

Trans. Comi Acad Sci.VolVIIL

PLATE XXII.

Evans, fiom naraie

E Ciii;ajid, liih ,>Tew i-inven.Ct

Trans. Cop.ii Acad Sci.VoI^/III.

PLATE XXIII.

Evans , , frciii natva"-

E Cxis-ariM^ ra'a , /Tev; "haveu C:

Trans. Corai Ac ad, Sci, Vol.VIII

PLATEXX^

Farrinyton, ii;a'j_ nature

E CiiseJid.litti, New Haven, Ct.

Trans. Conn. Acad.Sci.Vol.'VIII.

PLATE XX^;

10

11

E Cnsajid,litli.,NewH?-ven,Ct.

Tr'ans- Conn. Acad. Scl.Vol. VIII.

PLATE XXVI.

E Crisand, litti.iNfe-w Haven, C t

Trans.Co-nB.Acaa.Sci.Vol VIII .

T^LATE XXVII.

E CriScind, lilh,7Te-w Haven, Ct

rraiis Conn. Acad.Sci. VolVIII

PLATE XX^TIIT

rI.Einer-.on, from nature

E Ci-is an <^, Zna., New- Haven, C t

:-CYSTIGUS.

1 rans. Comi. Acad.Sc1.Vol.VITI.

PLATEXXDC.

..'^. H.Enie; ton, ircm natxire.

E Crisarid, lr.a,,Xe\v Haven, Ct.

XYSTICUS.

rTai-is.Conn.AcadSci.VolYIIL

PL/^TE.ZX:^.

HEriierton, ixOT^. ii attire.

Z CrjScaid, lith.., New Haven Ct

MISU14ENA,

Trans. C onii Ac acl, S cl. Vol ,VIII .

PLATE.XXXI.

.IH.Emerton, tiora nat-ure.

E Ci'isajid, "lita.,NewKci.ven;Ct.

PHILUDR014US,

Trans. Coral Acacl.Sci.VolVIIL

PLATE XXXir

■E Cnsajid, litli.,NewHaveni.Ct

PHILODROyrUS, ETC.

II ill

III

i^ -h

,v^'-

V

.^'(Ift;.

A

7^*5S7^J(S?!»H>P^-~

iM

I

:>V "^l

"PLATE XXXV

/•^,

/y>

t'u

U Li

M

' Mill j^'i

I \Mi -' '^i

\

(''"\ 10

I'l

K'

■%

.;ci.Vorviii.

_,^.i'j::xxxvii

)l^ S

^-f^"-

%

vOl VIII.

PLATE XX:-v,.i.

^^. A

NEMERTEANS

Z Ciisaiicl, lith .New Haven, Ct

Trans^ Com. Ac acl.Sci, Vol . VIII .

PLATE XXXEX:

0- ,

-*M

1-

"^

t-

16

c

^

n'

:§

t
1

t'-

-v;-;f

NEMERTEANS.

E Cnsand, litli-,Ne-w Haven, Ct..

A

/^':M%^..

/

- 2

A

\ r

V 4

-4

%

J'

/■■•

. icii:;-; '_-j1"1 rii ;i;iM osi. vui- vjj 1-

iL/VTEXLI.

Nt;

'!/V

I T I I

\;,;, ,

lia

6

,^.

]

■%^ :'

4

•\

Trans. CoTOi Ac ad. Scl Vol. VII I .

PLATE XLir

A-E.Verrill and A.H.Vernil from nature.

PLANARIAK^

"■L Ci-i.StUid, lith .New Haven, Ct.

Trans.CoTin.Acad Sci.Vol^ VIII.

PLATE XLIU.

A.E.VerriU and A.H.Verrili frcra nature.

PLANAR.IAKS.

E Cnscaid.iittL.iNe-w Haven, Ct,

TTans.Coi-iiiAcad.Sci.Vol.VlII.

PLATE XLTV

1

mm

^^^•■•c

#v-'v-"'r_^f'

X30

2a ,f

■-0* ./

i^-j^^v-^

' \ I

.>^

^S^-^v -/

X2o

:■• •;;^ \

E. Verrill and A.H Verrill i:

xs

PI^AKiURLAJ"

E Cxisoiid, iith., New Haven, Ct,

^dja

TKANSACTIONS

CONNECTICUT ACADEMY

ARTS AND SCIENCES.

VOLUME VIII, PART 1.

NEW HAVEN:
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY.

1890.

TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR, PRINTERS

CONTENTS.

PAGE

List of Additions to the Library v

Art. I.— Some Experiments on the Physiological Action of

Uranium Salts. By R. H. Chittenden and A. Lambert 1

Art. II.— Elastine and Elastose Bodies. By R. H, Chittenden

andH. S. Hart - - 19

Art. hi.— The Influence of Urethan, Paraldehyde, Antipyrin,

AND ANTIFEBRIN ON PrOTEID METABOLISM. By R. H. CHITTEN-
DEN . - , - 39

Art, IV. — The Influence of several new Therapeutic Agents
ON Amylolytic and Proteolytic Action. By R. H. Chit-
tenden and C. W. Stewart - - . 60

Art. v.— Caseoses, Casein Dyspeptone, and Casein Peptone.

By R. H.Chittenden - 66

Art. VL— Some Experiments on the Influence of Arsenic and
Antimony on Glycogenic Function and Fatty Degenera-
tion OF The Liver. By R. H. Chittenden and J. A. Blake.. 106

Art. VIL— The Nature and Chemical Composition op the Myo-
sin OF Muscle Tissue. By R. H. Chittenden and G. W. Cum-
mins -- 115

Art. VIIL— Myosinoses. By W. KtJHNE and R. H. Chittenden. 139

Art, IX.— The Relative Absorption of Nickel and Cobalt. By

R. H. Chittenden and C. NoRRis, JR .-. 148

Art. X. — Results obtained by Etching a Sphere and Crystals
of Quartz with Hydrofluoric Acid. By O. Meyer and S.
L. Penpield. Plates 1, 2 .. .- 158

Art. XL — New England Spiders of the Families Drassidae,

Agalenid^ AND Dysderid^. By J. H. Emerton. Plates 3-8 166

Any of the below-named parts of the Transactions of the Connecticut Academy
of Arts and Sciences will be sent post-paid on receipt of the price by the Corres-
ponding- Secretary, Addison Van Name, to whom also all communications respect-
ing- exchange of publications should be addressed.

Vol.

Part.

Pages.

Plates.

Price.

Vol

Part.

Pages.

Plates.

Price.

I,

1. 1866

246

3

$3.50

V,

1, 1880

267

36

$3.00

I,

2, wm-n.

367

7

3.50

V,

2, 1882

341

33

3.50

IT,

1, 1870.

208

7

3.00

VI,

1, 1884

294

33

3.50

II,

3, 1873.

303

11

3.00

VI,

2, 1885

333

17

3.00

III,

1, 1876.

248

37

3.50

VII,

1, 1886

259

7

2.50

III,

2, 1878.

260

33

2.50

VII,

2, 1888

2o:i

4

2.50

IV,

1, 1877.

243

2

2.50

VIII,

1, 1890

204

8

2.50

IV,

2, 1883.

100

11

1.50

Vol. IV is to foe completed by a third part, not yet ready.

TRANSACTIONS

COfflECTICDT ACADEMY

ARTS AND SCIENCES.

VOLUME Till, PART 2.

NEW HAVEN:
PUBLISHED BY T^HE ACADEMY.

TUTTLE, MOREH-OUSE & TAYLOR, PRINTERS.

COJSTTENTS,

PAGE.

Art. XII.— The Development of a Paleozoic Poriferous

, Co"BAL. By C. E. Beecher. Plates 9-13 207

Art. XIII. — Symmetrical Cell Development in the Favosi-

TiD^. By C. E. Beecher. Plates 14, 15 315

Art. XTV.— New England Spiders of the Family Attid^.

By J. H. Emerton. Plates 16-21 220

Art. XV. — A Provisional List of the Hepatic^ of the

Hawaiian Islands. By A. W. Evans. Plates 22,23 253

Art. XVI. — An Arrangement of the Genera of Hepatic^.

By A. W. Evans 262

Art. XVII. — On the Ferments contained in the Juice of the

Pineapple (Ananassa sativa). By R. H. Chittenden, E. P.

JOSLIN and F. S. Meara 281

Art. XVIII.— The Nephrostomes op.Rana. By O. C. Farring-

TON. Plate 24 ... 309

Art. XIX. — Notes on the Fauna of the Island op Dominica,

British West Indies. By G. E. Verrill. Plates 25-27 815

Art. XX.— On a Collection of Land Mollusc a From the

Island of Dominica, West Indies. By H. A. Pilsbry 356

Art. XXL -^New England Spiders of the Family Thomisid^.

By J. H. Emerton. Plates 28-32 359

Art. XXII. — The Machine Nemerteans of New England and

Adjacent Waters. By A. E. Verrill. Plates 33-39 382

Art. XXIIL— Dinophilid^ of New England. By A. E. Ver-
rill. Plate 36, Figures 6, 6a 457

Art. XXIV.— Marine Planarians of New England. By A. E.

Verrill. Plates 40-44 _....-. 459

Any of the below-named parts of the Transactions of the Connecticut Academy
of Arts and Sciences will be sent post-paid on receipt of the price by the Correspond-
ing Secretary, Addison Van Name, to whona also all communications respecting
exchange of publications should be addressed.

Vol. Part. Pages. Plates. Price. [ Vol. Part. Pages. Plates. Price.

I, 1, 1866. 346 3 $3.50 j V, 1, 1880. 267 36 $3.00

1,. 3, 1867-71. 367 7 3.50' V, 3,1882,

II, 1, 1870. 308 7 3.00 ; VI, 1, 1884

II, 3, 1873. 202 11 3.00 VI, 3, 1885.

Ill, 1, 1876. 348 37 3.50 VII, 1, 1

III, 3, 1878. 360 33 3.50 VII, 3, 1888,

IV, 1, 1877. 343 2 2.50 VIII, 1, 1890,
IV, 2, 1882. 100 11 1..tO VIII. 2, 1893,

IV, 3, (in press.) ' IX, 1, 1892

341 33 3.50

294 32 3.50

223 17 3.00

359 7 2.50

203 4 2.50

204 8 3.50
331 36 3.50
333 3.00

Date Due

3 2044 072 225 634

<a^

£'"<'<^

^^^<s^s

-^t^ <r

■■roc cr <CL ^

.^i^:o

c^c:

^<t^' ^1. ^

'^SSi

<a e<l ,.< ^cx

2 • <20s:<r ^*a^^

1 <GCC<o: <e«C^

€S^

^1

= <:r<CC

k CC C

<-C.- c cc^

4^ c:cc<Cc^<3.c- ,f- c^ccc